Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Permit D98-0155 - BABIES R US - TENANT IMPROVEMENT
D98 -0155 17500 Southcenter • Pkwy. Babies " 99 THIS CERTIFICATE ISSUEDITURSUANT 1 THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 109 OF THE UNIFORM BUILDING CODE CERTIFYING THAT AT THE 'TIME,•:OF ISSUANCE THIS STRUCTURE WAS IN COMPLIANCE ,-WITH THE;;VARIOUS 'ORDINANCES OF THE CITY,', REGULATING BUILDING CONSTRUCTION OR USE FOR THE- FOLLOWING.: , • " • - • • . .• ." • Occupant: Bu i 1 ding Address 4. • Parcel , Owner: • ; . THIS .IMPROVEMENTS CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY - • CITY OF TUKWILA 6300, SOUTHCENTER BOULEVARD, SUITE 100 ,• TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 ; • BABIES US 17500 .sOUTHCENTER , . 2623O4-.91 1O MBK'NORTHWEST FFICIAL PerInt No '09,8-0155 PY Su i to 1P • ':'!•,••••••••-." • • 0O•Ctipancy: STOE Occupant 'Load: 212 , Occupancy Group: 'M' , Type of Cbnst: V TO CREATE NEW ,:,RETAIL SPACE. ..." • •,,,",„.. CERTIFICATE MUST BE . :CONSPICUOUSLY • • •••."'•;:1 • • . , • POSTED ON THE PREMISES • • ' City of Tukwila �. (206) 431-3670 Community Development / Public Works • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite 100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 Parcel No: Address: Suite No: Location: Category: Type. Zoning: Const Type: Gas /Elec.: Units: Setbacks: Water: Wetlands: WARNING: Contractor 262304 -9110 17500 SOUTHCENTER PY 17500 SOUTHCENTER PY ARET DEVPERM TUC V -N 001 North: TUKWILA IF CONSTRUCTION BEGINS BEFORE APPEAL PERIOD EXPIRES. APPLICANT IS PROCEEDING AT THEIR OWN RISK. License No: SIERRCC145N8 .0 South: Sewer: Slopes: DEVELOPMENT PERMIT .0 TUKWILA N Permit No: Status: Issued: Expires: Occupancy: UBC: Fire Protection: East: .0 West: Streams: D98 -0155 ISSUED 08/04/1998 01/31/1999 STORE 1994 SPRINKLERS /AFA .0 OCCUPANT BABIES 'R' US 17500 SOUTHCENTER PY, TUKWILA WA 98188 OWNER MBK NORTHWEST Phone: 206 575 -8090 C/O TRAMMEL CROW COMPANY, 17560 SOUTHCENTER PY, TUKWILA WA 98188 CONTRACTOR SIERRA CONSTRUCTION CO INC. Phone: 206.885 -3797 16715 N.E. 79TH STREET, REDMOND, WA 98052 CONTACT TODD RANKIN Phone: 206 -574 -0925 16715 NE 79 ST, REDMOND WA 98052 (**************************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Permit Description: TENANT IMPROVEMENTS TO CREATE NEW RETAIL SPACE. r**************************************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Construction Valuation: $ 750,000.00 PUBLIC WORKS PERMITS: *(Water Meter Permits Listed Separate) .Eng. Appr: Curb Cut /Access /Sidewalk /CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: N No: •Flood Control Zone: N Hauling: N Start Time: Land Altering: N Cut: Landscape Irrigation: N Moving Oversized Load: N Start Time: Sanitary Side Sewer: N No: Sewer Main Extension: N Private: Storm Drainage: N Street Use: N Water Main Extension: N Private: N Public: N Ir* k**** k***** k*************************** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** TOTAL DEVELOPMENT PERMIT FEES: $ 6,521.59 k******** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** Permit Center Authorized Signature: Date: - 5 Size(in): .00 End Time: Fill: End Time: Public: N I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provision of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the perform - of work. I am authorized to sign for and obtain this development p Date: ' 0 This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of Issuance, or if the work 1s suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. Fscicir es" : 175 'SOUTHCEUTER - P.Y• Suite Tenant: Type . bEVPERM Parcel #: 2'62304 -9110 Permit D98-.0155 Status ISSUED_ Applied: 05/11/1998 Issued: 03/01.4/;1993 ** Cfe4'k•k* k * l< a 11k,4'k•*'k:k *1€kl4 * kk *•k *kkk'kkk•kk.k;kk *k *•k•k:11 *'ek.•kkk'kk:k • k * * 'k* P ern) it' Conditio 1 PRIOR TO FINAL IGNoFF.- PARKWAY ':SUPER. 'CENTER SHALL SUBMIT A METR O NON ',RESIDENTIAL SEWER .UsE,.. CERTIFICATION' :TO Ptl3LIC WORKS FOR Nip chances wi,11 be , iarde to the p1,�tts:.'uril� its ark ►�t'6�decl .bar the .ArOh itec:t cir Eno ix%.ee 7EA 11 d . t he r�T0 . ks,7 � 1 a 4Bu•i.l'di;na vision F h irbin' ti 'er mit ,,.t-h a 1 1 tie 3p �thr c : t : J O tee cTtt 1.e K ing l. t . D eLar trnent g ut, Pubtl i c kHea =l _ 1 umtlbil`ngi; w 1 1 `L'e is. 0.e l ed b as encv inc.ludina all 6 ��rip1ro 4 ti' � fi r E`1 e ctri ca bar nii t , e sha 1 1 be:.'obt fled, th? i1uth the la:�h in n State : s and Industrjes and 'all e1G;ctr i&a;•t be . inspected bv'; :that agency (248.603D.) � � , ` ° „ • A11 rne chariical: wor *. �hal1 be undet5 separate Permit is^�ueci�`•stb the �Lri; v ,�• $ TuFrw i 1 a �t , 9�, s ytfN4■ Al 1 p3.e st. inspect re anci aup'rnved n1.2ns shall b avaliA, b1,e at the iub' SIte; pt,ior . to ,the:. start., o any, cot *, st r*u ..t,ian °' . - 1,0 e.e ,.da e .tn �b�e maint�3ined and alrai ab' e i . / � at z + ,K � 3 Lanted d .. . w ^ �untiltiinalt:itispec�tiufl Lrvva'11 � } Gr 1 i erw ce 1 i;ng dr an 4 ah 1r t�'t i,,tur e in al 1at n IS stio recurred t meet lateral braci t eauir�eiire tts for: Sej .,n► �c � y " Z o n c �' K i7 1.1 ,� {� hr� l � Y n � t : x aeFcw {' S Part . t� on,-wall: atGac'hed to ce1,ling; ea n be r i �rmu:,t lat eral Gr~ c d ,it over etght� (3) �t t'�' lenhry' ;.. Al to be 'done' in c t7 wi ap t�ci�ed • nl ati ..an d re u' r eirlents of the Ur� ifar rn 3.ii.i 1din Codes: C dit v a e o ) teas amended Uniturm Me chani'ca1 � • �Code , `( 199'4 Edi end • ►a�,hinaton: :,tate Energy; Code (1994'1,Ed K (.___ _____ ....., , Project Name/Tenant: t uit1..ra — v1 : S Value of Construction: L► 0e0 • ite Address: • b • .. .t;. _ .. LGw City State /Zip: - ta.AA -:. •. Ta ar el Nu ber: 3 - `1110 - o Property Owner: MPS- 1 ` - i 0 C - A - 0 1 A : = G - r Building Square Feet: 1 79 - 9 1 -- -4 -t' existing Phone: ( 5 T ) Cif 1- 6 i Street Address: Z c p vwo low tL - { - L,A f; t. , q City State /Zip: 1 o &2 , • .St0 Fax #: (S (o&4 - - 2-R-'2.- Phone: i Contractor: Street Address: City State /Zip: Fax #: (4. ", 1 _ Archi 0ct: R� lr� - 1 City State /Zip: tM\ �` 1 4, Pho '�� ,) mss - � g o Fax # • L( Z &sr - 354 Street Address: f 3 1D ;5F - s tie- • & t 1. os f Engineer: ` 1,11% — I Phone: Street Address: City State /Zip: Fax #: Contact Person: t r - � - � - � Phone: / ?m) 4- -0 92A -- Street Address: 7 , 1(4» /1)c% clei411 s$ h //j /*/-L 1.04- City State /Zip: r0os Fax #: (2t s - cod-\ Description of work to be done:_ 1 _ \ I ` ��1, Existing use: Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi - family ❑ Warehouse ❑Hospital Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other Proposed use: 0 Retail ❑ Restaurant ❑ Multi- family ❑ Warehouse El Hospital ❑ Church ❑ Manufacturing ❑ Motel /Hotel ❑ Office ❑ School /College /University ❑ Other Will there be a change of use? ❑ yes no If yes, extent of change: (Attach additional sheet if necessary) Will there be rack storage? ❑ yes a no Existing fire protection feature s: Xsprinklers 71 automatic fire alarm El none 71 other (specify) Building Square Feet: 1 79 - 9 1 -- -4 -t' existing Area of Construction: (sq. ft.) ''''R--:::) '9-2. c Will there be storage of flammable /combustible hazardous material in the building? ❑ yes 0 no Attach list of materials and storage location on se•arate 8 1/2 X 11 •a•er indicating •uantities & Material Safet Data Sheets CITY OF 7 'KWILA Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100, Tukwila, WA 98188 (206) 431 -3670 ❑ Channelization /Striping ❑ Curb cut/Access /Sidewalk ❑ Fire Loop /Hydrant (main to vault) #: ' Size(s): ❑ Land Altering 0 Cut cubic yds. 0 Fill cubic yds. ❑ Sanitary Side Sewer #: ❑ Sewer Main Extension ❑ Storm Drainage ❑ Street Use ❑ Water Main Extension ❑ Water Meter /Exempt #: Size(s): 0 Deduct ❑ Water Meter /Permanent # Size(s): ❑ Water Meter Temp # Size(s): Est. quantity: ❑ Miscellaneous Date application accepted: 5 - f( —q'' CTPERMIT.DOC 1/29/97 Date application expires: FOR STAFF USE ONLY Commercial / Multi - Family Tenant Improvement / Alteration Permit Application Application and plans must be complete In order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or facsimile. APPLICANT REQUEST FOR PUBLIC.. WORKS. PLAN REVIEW:OF THE.FOLLOWING:. , (Additional reviews maybe determined.by the PubIlc Works Department): ❑ Flood Control Zone ❑ Hauling ❑ Landscape Irrigation O Private 0 Public O Private 0 Public 0 Water Only gal Schedule: Value of Construction - In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review - Applications for which no permit Is Issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The building official may extend the time for action by the applicant for a period not exceeding 180 days upon written request by the applicant as defined In Suction 107.4 of the Uniform Building Code (current edition). No application shall be extended more than once. Applicay ken by: (Initials) PLEASE SIGN BACK OF APPLICATION FORM BUILDING OW R • R UTHOR/ZED AGENT: Signature: il L . Date: _ . a , .� Print name: a� Phone: v S-' - ax Z41 i ". 4 :. 1�",...) Address city/wpm et Im , 4 9 - 2_ Vtil l c e _ . ALL COMMERCIAUMULTI -FA TENANT IMPROVEMENT /ALTER TION PERMIT APPLICATIONS MUSE SUBMITTED WITH THE FOLL $`•O NG: 0 BE STAMPED BY WASHINGTON STATE LICENSED ARCHITECT, ENGINEER OR CIVIL ENGINEER ➢ ALL DRAWINGS SHALL BE AT A LEGIBLE SCALE AND NEATLY DRAWN ➢ BUILDING SITE PLANS AND UTILITY PLANS ARE TO BE COMBINED N/A SUBMITTED ❑ ❑ Complete Legal Description ❑ ❑ Metro: Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification if there is a change in the amount of plumbing fixtures (Form H -13). Business Declaration required (Form H -10). Four (4) sets of working drawings (five(5) sets for structural work), which include : ❑ ❑ Site Plan (including existing fire hydrant location(s) 1. North arrow and scale 2. Property lines, dimensions, setbacks, names of adjacent roads, any proposed or existing easements 3. Parking Analysis of existing and proposed capacity; proposed stalls with dimensions 4. Location of driveways, parking, loading & service areas 5. Recycle collection location and area calculations (change of use only) 6. Location and screening of outdoor storage (change of use only) 7. Limits of clearing /grading with existing and proposed topography at 2' intervals extending 5' beyond property's boundaries 8. Identify location of sensitive area slopes 20% or greater, wetlands, watercourses and their buffers (change of use only) 9. Identify location and size of existing trees that are located in sensitive areas and buffer (TMC 18.45.040), of those, identify by size and species which are to be removed and saved 10. Landscape plan with irrigation and existing trees to be saved by size and species (exterior changes or change of use only) 11. Location and gross floor area of existing structure with dimensions and setback 12. Lowest finished floor elevation (if in flood control zone) 13. See Public Works Checklist for detailed civil /site plan information required for Public Works Review (Form H- 9). ❑ ❑ Floor plan: show location of tenant space with proposed use of each room labeled ❑ ❑ Overall building floor plan with adjacent tenant use; identify tenant space use and location of storage of any hazardous materials; dimensions of proposed tenant space. ❑ ❑ Vicinity Map showing location of site ❑ ❑ Rack Storage: If adding new racks or altering existing rack storage, provide a floor plan identifying rack layout and all exit doors. Show dimensions of aisles, include dimensions of height, length, and width of rack. Structural calculations are required for rack storage eight feet and over. ❑ ❑ Indicate proposed construction of tenant space or addition and walls being demolished ❑ ❑ Construction details ❑ ❑ Sprinkler details - details of sprinkler hangers, specifically penetrations in structure, i.e., roof; size of water supply to sprinkler vault with documentation from contractor stating supply line will meet or exceed sprinkler system design criteria as identified by the Fire Department. ❑ ❑ Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code Data shall be noted on the construction drawings. ❑ ❑ SEPA Checklist - if intensification of use (check with Planning Department for thresholds). ❑ ❑ Attach plans, reports or other documentation required to comply with Sensitive Area Ordinance or other land use or SEPA decisions. ❑ ❑ Food service establishments require two (2) sets of stamped approved plans by the Seattle -King County Department of Public Health prior to submitting for building permit application. The Department of Public Health is located at 201 Smith Tower, Seattle, WA or call (206) 296 -4787. (Form H -5) ❑ ❑ Copy of Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Valid Contractor's License. If no contractor has been selected at time of application a copy of this license will be required before the permit is issued OR submit Form H -4, "Affidavit in Lieu of Contractor Registration ". Building Owner /Authorized Agent If the applicant is other than the owner, registered architect/engineer, or contractor licensed by the State of Washington, a notarized letter from the property owner authorizing the agent to submit this permit application "and' '. obtain the permit will be required as part of this submittal I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. CTPERMIT.DOC 1/29/97 Account Code 000/322.1.00 1. 000/386.904 • *** *A 4 A.*.,V *A.* * * * * **A * * * * uk ‘••■• A *1k A.A A **A*** CITY': OF TLIKW,ILA. ,:41A . • . : , TKANSMIT PANSKI1 Number': R'9'.700805 Amount: 3,954..25 08/04/98 15;28 1? 'Method: 54661 Notation: SIERA CONST . ' Perm i No D98-0155 Type: DEVPERM DEVELOPMENT- PERMIT • Parcel Mo 262304- 911.0 Eis'ite 'Address: 17500 SOUTHCENTEV PY Location: 17500 304TFICENT,ER PY -Tot.a Fees: 6 „521 ThiS,Payment 3.954.25 Total ALL P,rilts;:-• 52.1 .13a1 anOer,„ 00 - ,1,-*Ai**.A**1, , , , A*o******.A***,‘**.A.*o**:***..kit****4**.i.***A*,ti'lkw . A4A4**),** Dr_Ascri pt i on • . Amount NONRES" • 3.949.75 STATE BUILDING 3UIHfflGE . .50'.' - 0B/05 1717.. TOTAL ':A954.45: **1111***, 1**., 1*• * *A *JA *a*,1*k,t * *4 *••4 * *** * **k*4**4*•b * *11 +:14 * • . ** ***,14 *4* CITY OF ..TUKWILA, _WA TRANSMIT 4 *. * *,l *4* **.6* ,■*.A * *A*{*** A * *4 * ;,..4•,4•1. *4,1 * * *k 4t* /1 'FRANSMIT Number,: R970f12C1 Arnol.unto... 2„5s;7..34 G5 /1j/48 1t0 :0':, Payment Method: CHECK Notation: l:ERRA CC)NS1;RUCT Iriitt NL.H Permit No D98 -0155 Type: DEVPEF<M DEVELOPMENT F'ERMTT 'Total Fe4s: 6,521 ;59 This Payment 2,5E Tota1 ALL Pmts: 2,5t..7.34, Dalance: J,94 : 2,5 *** k******* k*****• A*. 5* dr* ttA•* 1A**, 1*.J.*41A, l k*** 9', 1 * * * *1i*s1 *k *1l*,1 * *, % *. Account ..Code u00/3'4 ; . 830 Project:, , • . ' ,, Type of I (pection: Address: VI Si)() ' :v(LL.f111((i/(f la•. f! Date called- _.__ ----- !'� 'ol Special instructions: , Date wanted: ',.' 1 wt9 Ca,m.= p.m. Requester:. Phone: Y • iv INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION • 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. P 'iS- of PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 COMMENTS: (bZi , 7(73 )/77.41 Corrections required prior to approval. $47.00 REINSPECTIO FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection, Receipt No: Date: Pr ct: Type of nspection/ A dress• D c Dat� led: // gi b /gib° Special instructions: Date wanted:., 1/40//D 14.,..) Requester; 00 Phone: lz' 76(0 3� y INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 0 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: a..)o BSc " r%)- hae., j $47.00 REINSPEGTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Date; Receipt No: INSPECTION RECOR Retain a copy with permit .:% PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 Pro • h es 12. US Type spection: (Al / C; - / Address: Date called: Special instructions: pate wanted: a.m. P.m.. Requester: Phone: V INSPECTION RECO° Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd, #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 PERMIT NO. (206)431 -3670 0 Approved per applicable codes. 0 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 9l18 , �►.' q;vei.-) Inspector: Date: $47.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Cali to schedule reinspection. [Receipt No: Date: Project: — 340 0 Ii iY Type of inspection: p , Date called: / j ' . -6 1 ( 4 /Date wanted: p p MA a.m. p.m. Address: � L 1�I7�/J Special instructions: Requester: Phone No.: 6.h4 INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 COMMENTS: Approved per applicable codes. 1-i Inspector: Receipt No.: INSPECTION RECQ Retain a copy with p. Date: Date: ;..:. PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. oje t: ; r L) s T t -pe T-, n csui A /d 1 Date called L'_ 9 0 Special instructions: Date wanted• / q...9 U a.m. P.m. / �+t F No. 5 °l ti!„s�;. Y'�:rt*.?•.:+ YtT"�"^'"' " • INSPECTION NO. CITY. OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 COMMENTS: N-DA,61— :, spy. usarn-o; $1/4t4 P Ut �� -fix J / u T so -L.v. Ja e o N^1 pc) C iv1,66,frpl 1`t Ua* fL ) Approved per applicable codes. f Inspector: INSPECTION RECORP Retain a copy with peri,_ 0.0 &J ,c (t.a\ 1J ct Corrections required prior to approval. es 8-01 55 ERMIT NO. 6-// Date: 1 0 1 $42.00. REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must . be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Pr t ) 4 . 5 r'' �l J Type of inspe • 'n: Ad s` Date calla Sp ciaf instructions: Date wanted: a.m. p.m. Requester: lq.—/ / - Phone N> • 76 Cs� [1 INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Receipt No.: INSPECTION RECflp Retain a copy with imit to c c cr '' Ng-o/S W 4-/Ame- PERMIT (206) 431 ..3670 Corrections required prior to approval. $42.00 EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. CaII to schedule reinspection. Date: r" (744..r:..t:t .re.1:A!M,�rtzt rSt�tt'Wa s+i�.r, Ma' Mtbh Project: CAS � Py Type o f inspectior �. l � e r ") Address. / 5 « T( tec Iled: 94 Special instructions: Date wanted: a.m. Requester: j Phone No.: -- :77y 0 INSPECTION REC Retain a: copy with INSPECTION NO.. - CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 So,uthcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 9818 DW-O65 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 pproved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Corrections required prior to approval. .il►rnw riri Inspecto ' 1.19 $42.01 EINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection, Date: Project: ti Type of inspectio Addrggss: �! /� / 7 5 o • t� F Date called: l �� � ( /f r Special instructions: : Date wanted: //f _ /( �l a.m. p.m. Requester: Phone No.:, , ,_ /� /n/ S- ` (/1-- l/ lJ `� INSPECTION RECQD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 pproved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: [ Inspect 7G.5 e Corrections required prior to approval. Dater f Receipt No.: roate: oil" PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 nr: F $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Project: 1 r /JIr /rC // • ( f f Type of inspection n Add v / / 75 ress: C) �� l �c .r C f 7�' Date called: �, /v / p ■ Date wanted: 91 / Special instructions: Requester: 6u Phone No : 4,25 a c - WOO _ "eftxwtttwi f90� t'SvarBit' (kgrk i war.au t w ° �7b ". aS9' , Inspector: pproved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: ZS -7 II INSPECTION FIE C )D Retain a copy with mit INSPECTIQN NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila, WA 98188 Date: PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. 542.00 REI ' PECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to i spection, fee•must . be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: Date: Project: ri ,i L€4 V L ( Type of inspection: 5„ A i Date called: l Spe‘iai instructions: Date wanted: �/i //�0 wit a.m. P.m. Requester: Phone No.: 1 - -2 ' _ / /Uv r.-' , tvzgv f.inermry yr 1 "" -eat- eP -Ti :: l sa'mS"Y ga :05 -,.. r moi INSPECTION REC Retain a copy with °init 06 INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., # Tukwila, WA 98188 Receipt No.: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: r ..A�iAr /r i Ti $42.00 REINSPECT ON FEE Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedulereinspection. 1 Date: PERMIT NO. (206) 431-3670 Project: c Q b t_r K US Type of inspectiOlpf ,........14,-e-n 1-7/1 Address: Date called: Special instructions: • Date wanted: ,..- /,. /__ a.m. inifer irr Requester: a 1" Phone No.: -</e2.57 4.6,o- itOo. Ki.!;a4i*virirtmisromt,.-?* ' efita IN . TION RECT11 Retain.a copy with /3/b4t/it 04' INSPECTIO NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 I I Approved per applicable codes. Inspector: 1 f7eFeWlo.: a Date: q Date: DW.- 0 iss"" orrections required prior to apProval. , COMMENTS: 97P $42.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd•, Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Project: , j)-1_0 , 1 7 . _ Type of inspectfo r ` � Date called: 9 / 7 r ---, Adder ) ■n €) Cke Special instructions: Date wanted: A! / P.m. Requester: Phone N.: „ 5 - 7 (r. 0 0 c,..1 yr INSPECTION REC Retain a copy with p INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter. Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98189 Approved per applicable codes. 11 $42.00 REINSPECTIO FEE REQUIRED. Priorio inspection, fee . must be pai8'at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Receipt No.: VPXSZVIMI Dg-0 PERMIT NO. • (206)431 -3670 Corrections required peer to.approval. Date: Project: / Type of inspection: Address: Date called: Special instructions :.. Date wanted: 8 m Requester: Phone No.: jj.•q•3'il • arar.. . , . „� .. • .e :t?salk;trl xr �. _ 5��d�fi:Cv°. ,`a.�'�; ;_.,'""��:t�"` �4:.�F' INSPECTION RECO Retain a copy with pekait • INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved .per applicable codes. COMMENTS: I Inspector: I Receipt No.: II Date: PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. .�V" Date: e l e $42.00 tEINSPECTION E REQUIRED. Prior to Inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Project:/? ? Typ: of in ecti:. ` /'— Address: Da a called: Date wanted / , g r rr} m. Special instructions: Requester: Phone No.: INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100; Tukwila, WA 98188 Approved per applicable codes. Inspector: l A INSPECTION RECTI Retain a copy with pit 11 PERMIT NO. (206) 431 -3670 Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: / p/y/ /2„.56,4414, 4Cca . Date: ;/ 9g I $42.O INSPECTIO 'FEE REQUIRED. Prior to inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite,100. Call to schedule reinspection, I Receipt No.: Date: w.. ..,} Y "r:� r..�.: .fy�, %',ar ^✓M+ ^ hF:..- �h+i TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT FINAL APPROVAL FORM John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Permit No. C E5 ' (3155 0 City of Tukwila Fire Department Project Name 21te..S . ,5 Address k I5 C � �`Gert ...t Retain current inspection schedule Needs shift inspection Approved without correction notice X r Approved with correction notice issued Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Halon: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Authorized Signature FINALAPP.FRM Rev. 2/19/98 T.F.D. Form F -.P. 85 Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington, 98188 ' Phone: (206) 575.4404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 INSCireiner COVER SHEET RBr ac JUL -07 -98 TUE 01 :46 P11 URS GREINER ..r JUL 0 cc enc. Toys "R" Us, Inc. Ms. Sue Price (201) 261 -2409 Toys "R" Us - West Coast Engineering Center Mr. J. R. Valentine (209) 462 -6438 FAX N0, 16162853542 7 1998 i client: 7 1998 Project Name: Location: Ili► 1 1.1 project Number FAX TRANSMITTAL - - Issue Date: TO NAME/CO.: Todd Rankin - Sierra Construction Co. FROM: Rudy Baker NO. OP PAGES (INCLUDING COVER SHEET): 9 SUBJECT: Summary of Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code In response to your request, please find enclosed the non - residential energy code for the Babies "R" Us store in Tukwila, Washington. If you have any questions or need further clarification, please contact Lyle Bogner, mechanical engineer in our office at (61 6) 285 - 3526. if there are problems with this transmission, call (616) 285 -3500 immediately. Mb fgimie umiak' rRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL 1NFORMA71ON hdankd only Rs be idiot the Addressee(s) armed above. if you an aril the intended recipient you am beak swathed that amy duplication at copying of Ws facsimik is STRICTLY prohibited. if you have received Rahn facsimile in mot, phmac notify to by telephone and velum Mc facsimile to ca at the addteu below via the U.S. Postal Service. Thank you. 3950 Sports Drive, SE Grand Rapids. Mi 49546-4146 (616) 2$5 -3500 FAX (616) 225.3542 6 6.1 Toys "R" Us, Inc. Proposed Babies "R" Us Tukwila, Washington M103040.05 July 7, 1998 FAX NO.: (206) 574-0041 PHONE NO. : = (616) 285 -3489 34405 W. 12 Mk R4 Silk 299 340 West Milebdl Stint . 546 S. Meridian St. Suite 714 Farmin$soa Hills. Ml 4$331 -$627 Petoskey. M149770 -2229 . Wiii sI s. IN 46225 -1100 (110) 553.9449 (616) 3474103 017) 636 -7469 FAX 010) 5534571 FAX (616) 34746111 FAX Q17)6164364 P. 01/09 CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 8 1998 PERMIT CENTER (......... • JUL-07--98 TUE 01.47 PM 7 • DATIe Play 27, 19911 PROJECT PlAME SAKES 4 1NUS • PLAN 01630 H04 091•0151 Ilevletters Centict lob leeefitto at (206) 431-367(4 Wyatt love , any gondola roprdbe the Iollowleg carte:nett . 1. Dow coos with a e Waddostos Sato Nonroiklootio1 Bony Code. Spedfloelly. ebe* ocropliesce odds Section LSO- Ligbdog Pant Aflame= Option. • • „ •.:TUKWIIA, - BUILDING:01MM PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS a' . Cod uirer eat per W es.Req m p A State Eoa�gy Code, 1'V r A.C' �• Pe od .: '�° = U .. : .. ...._.. a V Mil alu ::AM e' = , ...U- .....<�:: Roof U -Value - Page 130, Table 13 -1 .05 .05 Wall U -Value - Page 130, Table 13 -1 .14 .20 Perimeter Insulation .10 Existing Condition Glass - Page 130, Table 13 -1 1.45 1.03 Glass SC - Page 130 1.00 .82 JUL 707 -9B TUE 01 :47 P11 URS GREINER URSCinefner File No.: M103040.05 Date: May 14, 1998 Project: Babies "R" Us Location: Tukwila, Washington Zone 1 Latitude: Relative Humidity 5 .4A1010W OIU45\ENERGYEN Energy Envelope Data Standard Thermal Analysis Design Input According to ASHRAE 1993 Fundamental Standards Degree Days per year = 5,145 Temperatures: Summer = 80 db, 64 wb Winter 23 db 47 °5' North = 30% FAX . N0. 16162853542 P. 04/09 . • RECEIVED • CITY OF TUKWILA JUL - .81998 SABLES R UL TORRIUR, Wk. JUL.07 -98 TUE 01:47 PM URS GREINER Trine Air Conditioning conic , $y: URS c EIXZR ee e. LAS 38.500 SO VT 'NOS PHOTO/TVS Weather File Code:., SEATTLE Location: .SSATrLE, MASNING?ON Latitude: 47.0 (deg) Lon9itudc: 122.0 (deg) Time Zone: 8 Elevation: 384 tft) barometric Preaeurs: 29.8 tin. SG) Summer Clcarnesc Number: Pinter Clearness Number: Summer Design Dry bulb: Summer Design Met bulb: Minter Design Dry bulb: Summer Ground bcflectsnce: Minter Ground Reflectxact: 0.95 0.95 80 (K) 44 (F) 2t IF). 0.20 0.20 Air Density, 0.0749 (Lbm /cult) Air Specific Hest: 0.2444 (Atu /lbm /F) DensitySpocitic Heat Prod: .1.0988 (btu- sin. /br /cult /!) Latent Hear Factor: 4,e3i.9 (Dtu- min. /hr /tuft) Cathalpy Factor: 4.4953 (LL- min. /hr /cult) Design Simulation Period: June To November System Simulation Period: January To December Cooling Load Methodology: TLTD /Time Averaging 'Time /Dane Program vas Run: 4,14: 5 7/ 7/98 Dats:.et Name: 381TUKWZ .TN .c ..::.:.:... w.,rwu. uu.�. u:.•.'.ti,r ✓:�..�..: y+navt..lreienssAw>�. FAX 'N0..16162853542 P. 05/09 • Outside . System System Airflow !Manor Type • (Cfe) ''Auxil. Supply Airflow (Cfm) ?tame Air Conditioning Economics 1y3•URS GRESNCR AIRFLOW - ALTCRMATIVL 1 1 SZ 'Tota2G CAPACITY - ALTERNATIVE 1 System Number 1 SZ Totals JUL -07 -98 TUE OI :48 PM. URS GREINER 60.5 0.0 60.5 smnINEERING CHECKS - ALTERNATIVE 1 System Main/ Number Auxiliary Systole Type 'SYSTEM SUMMARY (Design Airflow Quantities) Cooling Seating Airflow Airflow (Cis) (Um) • 11.550 31,630 53.630 31,550 31,630 31,630 Cooling Main Sys. Aux. Syo..Opt. Vent System Capacity Capacity Capacity Type (Tons) (Ton:) (Tons) 0.0 0.0 Percent =side • Air 3 Main SZ 36.52 Mai Cfm/ Sq Ft 0.02 Cowling Totals (Tons) Return Exhaust Airflow ' Airflow (Cfm) ' • (Cis/ SYSTEM 5UMMART (Ds ;ign Capacity Quantities) 0.0 60.5 •751,121 CD.5 - 753.121 The building peaked at hour la month 7 with a Capacity of 60.5 tens H N G 1 N R E R I N G CUE C_2 5 Cooling Cis/ sq Ft stun/ Ton /Ton Sq Ft S22.7 Main Sys.' Aux. Sys. Capacity Capacity (atuh) (stub) Preheat Capacity (Stun) - 269;103 0 - 269.103 11.16 0.12 -20.55 Seating Reheat Numidil. Opt. vent )(eating Capacity Capacity Capacity Tnta1s (atuh) (Stub) (btuh) (lituh) • Heating - -_- Cfa! • Stun/ sq Ft Sq rt. 0 0 - 791,121 791,121 • JUL -07 -98 TUE 01:48 PH URS GREINER • franc Air Conditioning Economic: Sy: ORS «1 IMat SYSTD CRECKS07)5 System 1 Peak St - SINGLE ZONE SYSTEM FAX NO, 16162853542 P.07/09 V 600 PAGE 69 COOLING COIL PEAK CLG SPACE FEAE • REATING COIL PEAK Peaked at Time -*s Mo /Nr: 7/14 • No/Kr: 7/24 • Mo /Rr: 13/ 1 Outside Ads v? OADH /WS /KR: 75/ 45/ 70.0 • OADW: 77 • OAD1• 76 • • Space Act. Air Ret. Air Net Percnt • Space Percnt • Space Peak Coil Poak Perent Sens..Lat. Sensible Latent Total Of Tot • Sensible 01 Tot • Space Sens Tot aces Of Tot Envelope Loadi (Dcuh) Mull) Mull) (Utah) (t) • (etuh) (6) • (Stub) Muhl (9) Skylitc Solr 75,600 0 75,600 10.41 • .75,600 23.74 • 0 0 0.00 Skyline Cond 0 1,067 1.067 0.15 • 0 0.00 • 0 - 17,544 2.22 Root Cond 0 96,927 16,927 12.26 • 0 0.00 • 0 - 70,999 6.96 Glass Solar 26.560 c 26,560 3.93 • 26.560 5.19 • 0 0 9.00 Glass Cond 739 0 739 0.10 • 739 0.13 • - 7,291 -7.291 0.92 Wa11 Cond 20,126 1,656 21.993 3.03 • 20,126 3.06 • - 72,671 -60,505 10.16• Partition 0 0 0.00 • 0 0.00 • 0 0 0.00 Exposed Floor 0 0 0.00 • 0 0.00 • -6,34 -6,347 1.06 Iutiltration 17.125 20.125 2.36 • 10,765 1.96 • •102.943 - 102,943 13.01 Sub T0t02._? 142.150 51,651 234.001 32.22 • 135,610 24.69 • - 191,453 - 267,529 ' 76.34 • Internal Load9 • Lights 341,641 0 341,641 41,05 • 341,641 62.10 • 0 0 0.00 People 90.000 90,000 32.,39 • 90,000 5.02 • 0 0 0.00 Mite 0 0 0 0 0.00 • 0 0.00 • 0 0 0.00 Sub 7otu1c:s 431,641 0 0 431.641 55.44 • 391.541 71.19 • 0 0 0.00 Coaling Load 22,660 - 22,660 0 0.00 • 22,677 4.12 • - 23,723 0 0.00 Putaide Air 0 0 0 66,671 12.21 • 0 0.00 • 0 - 633,036 67,36 Svp. Fan Meat 0 0.00 • 0.00 • 0 0.00 Ret. Fat licit 0 0 0.00 • 0.00 • 0 0.00 Duct Heat Pkup 0 0 0.00 • 0.00 • 0 0.00 0V/VTZ7l Siting 0 0 0.00 • 0 0.00 • 0 0 0.00 Exhaust Meat - 2e,152 0 - 29,252 -3,66 • 0.00 • 25,447 -3.72 Terminal Pyposs 0 0 0 0.00 • 0.00 • 0 0.00 • • Grand 701111- -• 596,671 41,020 0 725,361 100.00 • 550,126 100.00 • - 715,1 - 791,121 100.00 Total capacity (;o:,*) (Mbh) Main Clg 60.5 7:4.2 Aux Clg 0.0 0.0 Opt Vent 0.0 0.0 Totals 60.5 726.2 COOLING COIL SELECTION AREAS Sens Cap. Cell Ai1I1 Entcting Da /x8 /HR Leaving Da/W2 /MR 02046 Total Glav (si) (L) (Mbh) (eft) Deg F Deg F Grains Deg F Deg F Grains Floor 36.500 647.0 31.630 77.8 63.6 67.4 59.2 56.2 63.6 Part 0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 Earle 3 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 9.0 Root 36,600 640 2 Wall 22,153 420 4 KEJT1NG COIL 5225CT10N AIRF)AMS (cfm) - -ENG:MMHG CAECXS -- -- TEMPNRAT7PSS (F) - -- Capacity 0911 Airr1 ent Lvg Type Cooling Westing Clg i OA 36.5 Type Clg Kg (10th) (cfm) Deg F Deg F Vent 21,550 11.550 C10 Cfm /Sgit 0.52 SADO S9.2 74.2 Main Mg -791.1 31,630 51.4 74.2 I&,fil 2.231 2,231 Clg Cfm /Ton 921.69 Plenum 76.9 65.1 A:u: Wt9 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Supply 31,530 31.630 Clg Soft /Ton 636.22 Return 76.9 66.1 Preheat -269.1 31,630 51.4 59.2 Mlncfn 0 0 Clg Stub /Sgft 16.64 Art /OA 77.6 51.4 Reheat 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Return 33.660 33,960 0o. People 200 Runarnd 75.0 66.0 wemidif 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Exhaust 23,761 13,761 5tg i OA 36.6 Fn MtrTD 0.0 0.0 Opt Vent 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Rc Kxls 0 0 NLg Cfm /SOFt 0.92 Fn $ldTD 0.0 0.0 Total -191.1 Auxil 0 0 Nta Otuh /Sg5t -20.55 Tn Frict 0.0 0.0 01 r • OF TUKWILA JUL .. 8 1998 PERMIT CENTER .- JUL -07 -98 TUE 01 :48 PM URS GREINER • Tfane Air Conditioning icoaomies Sy: DNS Q1SIN8R MAIN 67511.!1 COOLI1NG - ALTERNATIVE 1 PEAK C O O L S N G LOADS (Main SYstem) FAX NO. 16162853542 P. 08/09 v 400 PACE 70 . Space Coil Peak OA AM Supp. Space Space Space Peak OA Ws Supp. Coil Coil Coil Time Cond. Dry Dry Air Sena. Lat. Time Cond. Dry Dry Air ' Sens., Lat. Rose No /Br DB /W9 121b Snlb Flow a Load W4 Mo /Kr DE /WB alb Bulb Floe . Load Load Number Description (F) at (Y) (Cfa) .. (Stub) (Btuh) tF) IF) tF) Mtn) (atuh) (ltuh) 1 SALES AREA 7/14 79 65 75 59.2 31,630 550.128 44,340 7/34 79 65 75 59.2 31.630 646,993 79,147 Sere 1 Total /Ave. 79 55 75 59.9 32.630 550,128 46.340 79 G5 75 59.2 31,630 646,993 75,149 .;one ' 1 block 7/14 79 65 75 57.2 31,630 550,129 45,340 1/24 79 65 75 99.2 31,630 646.913 71,169 System 1 Totnl /Ave. 79 65 75 59.2 31,630 950,128 46,540 79 65 75 S9.2 31,430 646.933 79,169 Syatom 1 Block 7/14 7 9 65 75 59.2 31,630 550.128 46,340 7/14 79 65 75 59.2 31,630 646,993 79,149 MAIN SYSTEM BEATING - ALTERNATIVE' 1 Room Number Dtaoription BV ;LDZWG V- VALVES - ALTERNATIVE 1 P S A X BEATING LOADS (Main System) Spacc Coil Peak OA Am Supp. Space Space Peak OA Em Supp. Coil Coil Floor Time Cond. Dry Dry Air Sons. Time Cond. Dry Dry Air Sens. Arca Mo /Mr DP /W5 Blb Bulb Flow Load Mo/Hr DE /Wa Blb Bulb Flow Load (Sq Ft) (F) (F) (r) (Cim) (etuh) (P) (F) (F) (Cfm) (atuh) 1 51v,1t$ ARIA 31.500 13/ 1 26 23 66 74.2 31,630 - 215,176 13/ 1 26 23 64 74.2 12.630 -791,121 4one 1 Tot11l /Ave. 30,500 26 Z3 69 74.2 31,630 - 215,174 25 23 49 74.2 31,630 - 791,121 Zone 1 Block 38,500 13/ 1 26 23 69 74.2 31,630 - 215,176 13/ 1 26 73 68 74.2 31,630 - 791,121 Syut6. 3 7o147./Ave. 39,500 26 23 68 14.2 33,610 - 215,176 26 23 68 74.2 33.630 - 791,221 System 1 Alock 36.500 13/ 1 26 23 69 74.2 31.630 - 215,176 23/ 1 25 23 69. 74.2 31,620 - 791,321 B U I L D I N G U VALVES Room V- valuta Room Room (Btu /nr /aa:t /F) Masa Capac. Room Summr Winer Sumer Wiatr (lb/ (Btu/ ' AUmbcr Description Part. ExFlr 5kylt Gayle Roof Wide Alnico gall Coil. neat) agft /F) 1 SALES ARBA 0.000 0.510 0.500 0.522 0.047 0.400 0.414 0.279 0.317 35.2 9.11 2tne 1 Total /Ave. 0.000 0.530 0.500 0.522 0.047 0.400 0.414 0.179 0.317 35.2 9.12 System 1 Total /Ave. 0.000 0.5)0 0.500 u.522 0.047 0.400 0.414 0.179 0.31 '35.2 9.11 Building 0.000 0.5.10 0,500 0.522 0.047 0.400 0.414 0.179 0.311 35.2 9.11 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWIIA JUL 8 1998 PERMIT CENTER $ ?ILDINIi AREAS - ALTERNATIVE 1 4. a ta'..... PUILDIN0; �•�- • ?• ••. • �r..w -. i :Yf.i FAX NO. 16162853542 P:09109 Floor Total imposed •. wumber. of .area /Dupl . Floor Par itlon ,Floor Skylight . Skl . lies Aooi Vindew Uit : Arct Wall ROOM .. Duplicate koo! Aree , Area Area Area Azea Arco ,U% Arcs Nu ?It Aa t.gft) tsgft) . tsgft)::: (sgft) (WO : (13 t. (sgft3 (sgit) .(1T (sgft), 1 1 34.500 34.500 0 276 440: Z 37.460 '420 { `.'.10.733' 34.500 0 375. 440 2 :. ,37.660: ,.{30 4 : "30.733 30.500, 0 : 374 .. 440 .. .. 37,400 420 4 :30.733 34.500 0 315. .440 2 . 237.640 ' 420 : 10;733 ..l'�.'i. -'.'. C� � 1i�.i :...r.rtiwwr..- a...n.•rw r�r.r. • .. ..... ........a.� l'.... ...t•. w . r..n JUL707- 98 01 :49 Ffll URS GREINER 1 SALES AREA Zone 1 7otel /Ave. . System 3 Total/Ave. !Wilding ASRRAE 50 ANA).YSIS - A27tRN)1TIVE 1 Overall Roof 0-Value Overall 0111 U -Valua - Overall Building 0-Value 'T A S M R A C 9 0 A N A L Y S I S 0.057 (Etu /$r /Sq Tt /F) 0.140 (Dtu /Hr /Sq re/r) 0.006 (Ets /wr /Sq Ft /F) !loot Overall Thermal Transfer Valuo tOr:Yr) = 3.04 .(Bta /Hr /8q Tt). wall Overall Thermal Transfer Value (OTIVv) = 4.44 tillu /Br /Sq,PC) BABIES "R" US PARKWAY SUPERCENTER 17500 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY , ;,Jai\ TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98110 F ':"'':` PROJECT NO. M103040.04 M ' 5, 1998 Prepared By: URS GREINER, INC. 5287 1ST '•0 ECT ION 3H' GTON EXPIRES / RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA F R O011 vo On MAY 1 1 1998 PERMIT CENTER PROJECT MANUAL for BABIES "R US PARKWAY SUPERCENTER 17500 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TUKWILA, WASHINGTON 98188 PROJECT NO. M103040.04 MAY 5, 1998 Prepared By: URS GREINER, INC. 5287 REGISTERE Ao HITE HINGTON C GENERAL INDEX (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE SPECIFICATION SECTION IS GENERIC) • General Specifications Sections for Remodels (verify all sections) TITLE PAGE NOS, DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS "Construction Agreement Between Owner & Contractor Pages 1 thru 29 -32 1A *General Provisions and Bidding Information 1A -1 thru 1A -10 1 B "General Provisions for Mechanical & Electrical Work 1 B -1 thru 18-6 1C *General Provisions for Remodeling Work 1C -1 thru 1C -5 1D *Proposal Form 1D -1 thru 1D -10 1E "List of Drawings Under Separate Cover IF "Exhibit "A" Guarantee 1F -1 "Exhibit "B" Affidavit 1F -1 "Exhibit "C" Final Release 1F-2 *Exhibit "D" Construction Stage Project Checklist 1F-3 "Exhibit "E" Contract Scope of Work Clarifications 1F-4 thru 1F-15 *Exhibit "F" Construction Schedule 1F -16 thru 1F -17 *Exhibit "G" Manpower Status 1 F -18 thru 1 F -19 *Exhibit "H" Cost Collection Sheets 1F-20 thru 1F-22 1G "Soil Report, Boring Location Plan & Boring Logs 1G -1 1H "Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection 1 H -1 thru 1 H -6 11 *Alternates 11 -1 1J *Owner Furnished Items 1J -1 thru 1J -2 DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK - NOT USED DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 3A *Concrete 3B "Concrete Patching (if applicable) REMODELS ONLY DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 4A "Unit Masonry Work 4B NOT USED DIVISION 5 - METALS 5A NOT USED 5B NOT USED 5C NOT USED 5D NOT USED 5E "Miscellaneous Metals 5F *Cold Rolled Structural Metals DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY 6A *Carpentry 6B NOT USED 6C NOT USED DIVISION 7 - MOISTURE CONTROL 7A NOT USED 7B *Building Insulation (if used) 7C NOT USED 7D "Roofing, Flashing, & Associated Sheet Metal 7E *Waterproofing 7F *Roof Patching (If used) 7G 'Joint Sealants 7H NOT USED 71 NOT USED 7J NOT USED J3abies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 3A -1 thru 3A -8 3B -1 4A =1 thru 4A -8 5E -1 thru 5E -5 5F -1 PAGE -1 6A -1 thru 6A-4 7B -1 7D -1 thru 7D-6 7E -1 thru 7E -3 7F -1 7G -1 thru 7G -2 05/05/98 GEN RALINDEX TITLR DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS & GLASS 8A "Hollow Metal Work 88 'Curtain Wall 8C *Glass and Glazing 8D Aluminum Storefront 8E NOT USED 8F *Sliding Automatic Entrance /Exit Doors 8G *Special Doors 8H 'Rolling Fire Shutters 81 *Finish Hardware 8J 'Truck Dock Doors DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 9A 'Cement Plaster (Stucco) 9A -1 thru 9A -5 9B *Gypsum Drywall 9B -1 thru 9B-4 9C Ceramic Tile 9C -1 thru 9C-4 9D *Suspended Acoustical Ceiling Systems 9D -1 thru 9D -3 9E 'Resilient Flooring 9E -1 thru 9E -2 9F Carpeting 9F -1 thru 9F -2 9G 'Vinyl Wallcovering 9G -1 thru 9G -2 9H *Painting 9H -1 thru 9H -5 91 *Special Coatings 91 -1 thru 91 -3 9J Linear Metal Ceilings 9J -1 thru 9J -3 9K Environmental Play Surface 9K -1 thru 9K -2 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10A *Solid Plastic Toilet Partitions 10B *Toilet Room Accessories 10C NOT USED 10D *Wall & Storefront Protection 10E Portable Fire Extinguishers DIVISION 11 - NOT USED DIVISION 12 - NOT USED DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - NOT USED DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS 14A *Powered Conveyor (if required) 148 *Lift (If required) 14C NOT USED DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL WORK 15A *Basic Materials, Methods and Requirements 15B 'Basic Requirements for Piping Systems 15C *Plumbing Systems 15D "HVAC Systems and Equipment 15E 'Air Distribution Systems and Accessories 15F "Fuel Systems 15G "Fire Protection Systems DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL WORK 16A Basic Materials, Methods and Requirements 168 Technical Requirements 16C "Lighting Systems 16D NOT USED 16E Special & Auxiliary Systems Pabies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington PAGE -2 PAGE NOS, 8A -1 thru 8A -3 8B -1 thru 8B -3 8C -1 thru 8C -2 8D -1 thru 8D -3 8F -1 8G -1 8H -1 81 -1 8J -1 10A -1 10B -1 10D -1 10E -1 • 14A -1 14B -1 15A -1 thru 15A -2 15B -1 thru 15B -5 15C -1 thru 15C -5 15D -1 thru 15D -3 15E -1 thru 15E -3 15F -1 Refer: CCI Spec 16A -1 thru 16A -7 16B -1 thru 168 -2 16C -1 thru 16C -2 16E -1 thru 16E -2 05/05/98 TOYS "R" US CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT GCCONT REVISED: 05/10/95 Location: Dated as of: ARTICLE TITLE TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE Preliminary Statement 1. The Contract Documents 1 2. The Work 1 3. Architect 2 4, Contractor's Duties 2 5. Subcontractors 6 6. Work by Owner or By Separate Contractors 7 7. Miscellaneous Provisions 7 8. Time of Performance 8 9. Examination of Documents and Site 9 10. Lien Rights 9 11. Payment to Contractor 10 12. Protection of Persons and Property 12 13. Insurance 13 14. Changes in the Work 14 15. Uncovering and Correction of Work 15 16. Accounting Records 16 17. Liquidated Damages for Delay in Completion; 16 Bonus for Early Completion 18. Notices 16 19, Overtime 17 20. Termination 17 21. Entire Agreement 17 Exhibit A - Project Cost Breakdown Exhibit B - Unit Pricing Exhibit C - Material Quantity Estimates Exhibit D - Contractor's Cost Collection Sheet Exhibit E - General Scope of Work Exhibit F - OSHA THIS AGREEMENT, made as of , 19 , by and between TOYS "R" US a Corporation having an office at 461 From Road, Paramus, New Jersey 07652 (herein called "Owner"), and having an office at (herein called "Contractor). hereby agree as follows: CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT PRELIMINARY STATEMENT Owner is the lessee /owner of a parcel of and (herein called the "Site ") situated at: Owner desires to have a with related improvements (herein called the "Project ") constructed on the Site, and the Contractor has agreed to construct the Project in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. NOW, THEREFORE, Owner and Contractor, for the consideration herein set forth, 1.1 The Contract Documents (herein collectively called the "Contract" or "Contract Documents ") consist of the following: (a) This Agreement, (b) The Drawings (herein called "Drawings "), dated and consisting of the following: The general character of the detail work is shown on the Drawings, but Owner may require modifications thereto. 11 in any Drawings a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder indicated by outline or note, the drawn out parts shall apply to all other like portions of the Work. (c) The Specifications (herein called "Specifications "), dated and prepared by . (d) The following addenda, modifications and revisions to the foregoing: Any of the Contract Documents not attached hereto are hereby incorporated by reference and shall be deemed to be of the same force and effect as if actually attached hereto. 1.2 In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between: (a) This Agreement and the Drawings or the Specifications, this Agreement shall control; (b) The Drawings and the Specifications, the Specifications shall control; however, notes or other details on Drawings shall control over Specifications If such notes or details are not explained in the Specifications; (c) Larger scale drawings and smaller scale drawings, the larger scale drawings shall control. 1.3 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will not be required unless it is consistent herewith and is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents. Words and abbreviations which have well -known technical or trade GC Construction Contract ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.4 The organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and the arrangement of the Drawings, she" not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Suucontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.5 Contractor shall examine all Drawings and Specifications, and if, in order to install any materials or finish, it is necessary to temporarily omit certain portions of the Work in any sections thereof, Contractor shall cause such portions of the Work to be omitted until the materials and finish have been installed, and then to be completed without decay or extra cost to Owner. 1.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shalt be furnished, free of charge, all copies of the Drawings and Specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work. Owner may, at his option, furnish Contractor with one (1) sepia transparency of the Drawings, in which case the Contractor shall be responsible for and pay for furnishing all further copies of the Drawings. Contractor shall not, under any circumstances, alter the sepia transparency in any way whatsoever. 1.7 This Agreement shall not be construed so as to create any contractual relationship of any kind between Architect and Contractor, but Architect shall be entitled to the performance of obligations intended for his benefit, and to the enforcement thereof. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall create any contractual relationship between Owner or Architect and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK 2.1 All work required pursuant to the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, all labor, materials and equipment utilized or incorporated therein, is herein called the "Work". 2.2 The "Work' consists of: Page 1 ARTICLE 3 ARCHITECT 3.1 The architect for the Project is: (herein called "Architect "). 3.2 Owner may, from time to time and at any time during the construction of the Project, designate a new Architect, and, in the event of such designation, Owner shall give Contractor written notice thereof. 3.3 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 3.3.1 (a) Owner's Representative will administer the Contract Documents in accordance with the provisions hereof. As used herein, "Owner's Representative" shall mean any party or parties authorized or designated by Owner, as such, including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, Architect, Owners Architectural Project Manager, Owner's Construction Project Manager or any other employee or designee of Owner. Owners Representative will have authority to act on belief? of Owner only to the extent expressly provided in the Contract Documents. Owners instruction to Contractor may be forwarded directly by Owner to Contractor, or through Owner's Representative. Any action, duty or responsibility authorized by Owner to be performed or undertaken by Owners Representative may in Owner's discretion, at any time and from time to time, be performed or undertaken In whole or in part directly by Owner, in lieu of or in conjunction with Owner's Representative. (b) Unless and until Contractor is otherwise notified by Owner, Owners Representative shall be: NAME(S) ADDRESS: 3.3.2 Architect and/or Owner's Representative may visit the Site during construction to observe the progress and quality of me Work, to determine in general if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents, to protect Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and to establish the "Substantial Completion Date" and "Completion Date" (as those terms are hereinafter defined). 3.3.3 Neither the designation of Owners Representative, nor any action taken or duty performed by Architect or Owner's Representative shall relieve Contractor of any of its responsibility hereunder. 3.3.4 Architect, Owners Representative and Owner shall at all times have access to the Work, and the Contractor shall provide facilities for such access. 3.3.5 Owner's Representative will, pursuant to the provisions of Article 11 recommend to Owner the amounts to be paid to Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment In such amounts as provided in said Article 11. 3.3.6 Claims, disputes and other matters in question between Contractor and Owner relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents may be referred by Owner to Architect for his recommendation, but no such recommendation shall be binding upon Owner unless Owner shall accept same, in writing, and shall notify Contractor of such acceptance. 3.3.7 All interpretations and recommendations of Architect shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be furnished in writing or in the form of drawings within a reasonable time after submission to Architect. 3.3.8 Owner's Representative and/or Owner will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable for the implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, he will have authority to require special Inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Paragraph 7.6.2 whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed or completed. 3.3.9 Architect, Owner's Representative and/or Owner will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Items sUbmltted by Contractor, including without limitation Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The approval by Architect, Owners Representative or Owner of a specific item shall not constitute approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 3.3.10 Owner's Representative will receive and forward to Owner written warranties and related documents required by the Contract Documents to be provided by Contractor. 3.3.11 The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of Architect and/or Owners Representative during construction as set forth in the Contract Documents may be modified in any respect by Owner, and Contractor shall be given notice by Owner of any such modification. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES 4.1 Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with, and shall in all respects comply with, the Contract Documents. 4.2 REVIEW OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 4.2.1 Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and shall immediately report any error, inconsistency or omission he may discover to Owner and Owners Representative. Except as may otherwise be provided in this Agreement, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for any damage resulting from any such errors, Inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. 4.2.2 Before ordering any material or performing any of the Work, Contractor and each Subcontractor shall verify measurements at the building which apply to them, and shall be responsible for the correctness of same, No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of any inconsistency between actual measurements and the measurements indicated on any Drawing. GC Construction Contract Page 2 4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE 4.3.1 Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using his best skill and attention. He shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures (including, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, all safety precautions and programs) and for coordinating all portions of the Work. 4.3.2 Contractor shall be responsible for the acts and omissions of his employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with, or otherwise on behalf of, Contractor. 4.3.3 Contractor shall not be relieved from his obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of Owner's Representative in his administration of the Contract Documents, or by inspections, tests or approvals required or performed pursuant to Section 7.6. 4.3.4 Contractor shall establish permanent benchmarks In not less than two widely separated places; shall establish the lines and levels of the Work upon substantial batter boards, and shall be responsible for their continued accuracy during the progress of the Work. 4.3.5 Contractor shall at all times keep on the Site a complete and accurate level transit and rod in good working condition and shall allow Architect and Owner's Representative the unrestricted use of the same. 4.3.6 Owner or Architect shall provide Contractor with a survey of the Site showing, among other things, property lines, corner stakes, roads, utilities and sewer facilities. Using the established survey points, Contractor shall locate the building, sewer lines and other construction features at locations to be approved by Owner. Contractor shall set up batter boards as required by Paragraph 4.3.4 and shall establish and maintain the elevation called for. Upon completion, Contractor shall furnish Owner with reproducible sepias of (1) a site plan accurately marked to show all buried services and facilities, (2) as built drawings showing the location of the facilities within the structure, and (3) a final survey, prepared by a surveyor licensed to do business in the state in which the Project Is located, indicating the exterior location and layout of all buildings, structures and other Improvements comprising the Project. Contractor shall be liable for failure to maintain the minimum clearance, set -backs and similar requirements of applicable codes, ordinances, leases, or other agreements and /or governing authorities. 4.3.7 Contractor shall be responsible for all locations, dimensions and levels, and no instructions or orders received from any source, other than the Information contained In the surveys, plot drawings and Specifications, or on written orders of Owner, shall justify departure from the dimensions and levels required by the Drawings. 4.3.8 Contractor shall employ a competent surveyor, licensed by the state in which the Site is located and acceptable to Owner, to take measurements at the Site and establish all lines, levels and benchmarks, all of which shall be verified with drawings. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Contractor shall be responsible for the proper laying out and location of the Work. GC Construction Contract 4.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be Incorporated in the Work. 4.4.2 Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his employees and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the task assigned to him. 4.4.3 All material shall be arranged and maintained in an orderly manner on the Site. The streets, sidewalks, and other passageways are to be left open for traffic, or maintained in accordance with instructions of local building auttxxitles. Contractor shall allot suitable and proper space to his Subcontractors for storage of their materials, equipment and supplies. 4.4.4 Contractor shall use local labor and materials to the extent possible and practicable without causing any delay in or damage to the Work. Owner assumes no responsibility and shall not be deemed to have any liability for any delays, poor workmanship or faulty materials resulting from or in any way attributable to such use. 4.4.5 Contractor and any Subcontractor shall make all provisions necessary to avoid any disputes with tabor unions and shall be responsible for any delays, damages, or extra costs incurred as a result of such disputes. 4.4.6 Contractor shall keep the working areas of the Site free of standing water, providing all pumps, maintenance and means of removal necessary to accomplish same, and also shall arrange for the removal of snow and ice from the approaches to the Site in order to keep the Site clear and unobstructed. 4.4.7 Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, alter and remove all runways, planks, walks, ladders, rigging, barricades, shores, rails, hoists, derricks, scaffolding, and other equipment and apparatus necessary for the proper and expeditious performance of the Work, in compliance with all applicable laws. 4.4.8 Contractor shall remove all rubbish resulting from the performance of the Work on a daily basis, and shall keep all adjacent streets and driveways clear and unobstructed at all times. Upon completion of construction, Contractor shall remove all waste, surplus material, debris, construction equipment, machinery and tools relating to this Contract from the Site and the Project. Adjoining land shall be left in a clean and neat condition. Contractor shall wash and/or clean all floors, walls, ceilings, and both sides of glass and glazing, before final acceptance of the Work by Owner. 4.4.9 Water required for the performance of the Work shall be provided by Contractor who shall pay maintenance costs, obtain necessary permits, pay all fees required, and provide temporary water where necessary. 4.4.10 Contractor shall provide and install ample temporary toilet accommodations, in accordance with all applicable govemmental requirements, for the use of all workers at the Site and shall maintain same in a clean, sanitary and functioning condition at all times. Upon completion of the Page 3 Work, Contractor shall remove all temporary toilet accommodations. 4.4.11 Contractor shall provide, maintain and pay for all temporary wiring, transformers, meters, lamps, lighting and electric power in sufficient amount required for the performance of the Work, end shell provide temporary electric light and power sufficient in Owner's judgment for store fixture Installation in the building. 4.4.12 Contractor shall pay all charges for utilities up to and including the date prior to the date on which the Work shall be fully completed, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature. Contractor shall cause all utilities to be connected, turned on and ready for use by Owner by the date prior to the Substantial Completion Date. 4.4.13 Contractor shall fumish, pay for and maintain temporary heat for all workers at the Site when the outside temperature is below 50 degrees F. in order to protect the Work from freezing and to prevent any delay in the performance of the Work. 4.4.14 Contractor shall arrange for the heating and ventilating equipment in all areas to be in operation as soon as the building interior is complete, and shall provide meter and electrical service for temporary power for these areas until completion. Prior to completion of the building interior, Contractor shall provide Owner's personnel with proper instruction for the operating procedures for all such equipment. 4.4.15 Contractor shall cooperate with and work in harmony with all other contractors engaged in the installation of features not included in this Contract, but necessary or proper, in Owners sole judgment, to the completion of the Project. Any dispute or misunderstanding relating to the foregoing shall be submitted to Owner, and Contractor shalt comply with Owner's directions given in connection therewith. 4.4.16 If any exterior areas are designated on the site plan for the storage and transporting of materials and equipment, Contractor shall utilize only such areas for such purposes. 4.4.17 Prior to "Final Payment" (as hereinafter defined), Contractor shall deliver to Owners Representative all books, brochures and lists of manufacturer's operating instructions for all operable equipment included in the building and, in addition, shall thoroughly acquaint Owner with all maintenance and operational requirements of said equipment. 4.5 WARRANTY 4.5.1 Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished pursuant to the Contract Documents will be new unless otherwise specified, and that all Work will be of good quality, free Yom faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may, at Owner's Representative's discretion, be considered detective. If required by Owner, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of Section 15.2. 4.6 TAXES 4.6.1 Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes relating to the Work or portions thereof performed by Contractor, provided such taxes had been legally enacted at the time bids were received, but regardless of whether or not they were effective at such time. GC Construction Contract 4.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 4.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall secure the building permit at Owner's expense and shall secure at Contractor's expense all other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work, including, without limitation, any permit, license or inspection which may be necessary to allow Owner to commence Its 1iixturing and merchandising operations and other preparatory work necessary or proper to enable the Project to be In full operation for its intended purposes no later than the day following the Completion Date, and a permanent certificate of occupancy (or its local equivalent, if certificates of occupancy are not issued in the jurisdiction). 4.7.2 If Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are at variance in any respect with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any governmental authority, he shall promptly notify Owner's Representative to enable Owner to make any necessary or appropriate modifications. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for and bear all costs attributable to the performance of any Work known by Contractor to be contrary to any such laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders, unless prior written notice to such effect has been given to Owners Representative and Owner, and Owner has failed or refused to make necessary or appropriate modifications. 4.8 ALLOWANCES 4.8.1 Contractor shall include in the Project Cost all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by these allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons as Owner may direct. 4.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, these allowances are intended to cover the actual cost to Contractor of the materials and equipment covered by the allowance, reflecting any applicable trade discount and including the cost of delivery to the Site and all applicable taxes. Contractors costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit end other expenses contemplated for the allowance shall be included in the Project Cost and not in the allowance. Whenever the actual cost is more than or less than the allowance, the Project Cost shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. 4.9 SUPERINTENDENT AND PROJECT MANAGER 4.8.1- Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent, a competent project manager and necessary assistants ( all of whom must be acceptable to Owner) to supervise the Work and who shall be in attendance at the Site until completion of the Work. The superintendent and the project manager shall represent Contractor and all communications given to either the superintendent or the project manager shall be as binding as If given to Contractor. Unless otherwise provided herein, all such communications shall be in writing. The names and qualifications of the superintendent and the project manager which Contractor wishes to employ shall be supplied to Owner simultaneously with Contractors execution of this Agreement. 4.9.2 Neither the superintendent nor the project manager shall be transferred from this Project to another without the consent of Owner. Page 4 4.9.3 Without limiting Contractor's obligations pursuant to Paragraph 4.2.1, the superintendent and the project manager shall carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications and advise Owner's Representative of any inconsistency or discrepancy that may appear before proceeding with the Work. 4.9.4 The superintendent and the project manager shall, at all times, enforce good order among all workers, and shall relieve from employment on the Project any unfit person or anyone not skilled In the work assigned to him. 4.9.5 Owner shall have the right to refuse admittance to the Site to any employee of Contractor or its Subcontractors whose presence Owner or Owner's Representative, in either's sole judgment, deems hostile to Owner's interest. 4.10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4.10.1 Contractor, simultaneously with the execution of this Agreement, shall submit to Owner a proposed progress schedule for the Work providing for the expeditious and practicable performance thereof and setting forth commencement and completion dates for the different portions of the Work, broken down according to the Specifications subsections (which progress schedule, as approved by Owner, is herein called the "Progress Schedule"). 4.10.2 Contractor, simultaneously with the execution of this Agreement, shall submit to Owner a proposed manpower chart for the Work providing for the expeditious and practicable performance thereof and setting forth manpower requirements for different portions of the Work, broken down by major trades and/or Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors (which manpower chart, as approved by Owner, is herein called the "Manpower Chart"). The Manpower Chart shall be In a form satisfactory to Owner and which may be easily revised for both planned and actual manpower utilized during the execution of the Work. 4.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE 4.11.1 Contractor shall maintain at the Site one record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other modifications, in good order and marked currently to record all changes made during construction, and approved Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples. These shall be available to Architect, Owner and Owners Representative, and shall be delivered to Owner upon completion of the Work. 4.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 4.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate a portion of the Work. 4.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information fumished by Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for a portion of the Work. 4.12.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 4.12.4 Contractor shall thoroughly review all Shop Drawings, clearly marking all discrepancies of design concept, compliance with Contract Documents, dimensions, fabrication processes, techniques of construction and coordination of the work of all trades, and shall stamp drawings with corrections or GC Construction Contract approval noted thereon, and submit five (5) copies of same to Architect and Owner's Representative with reasonable promptness, in order to avoid delay in the Work or In the worts of any other contractor. 4.12.6 Shop Drawings of all Subcontractors shall be thoroughly reviewed, approved and submitted by Contractor to Architect and Owner's Representative, all In accordance with Paragraph 4.12.4 hereof. 4.12.6 Contractor's approval and submission to Architect and Owner's Representative of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples shall constitute a representation by Contractor that he has determined and verified all materials, field measurements and field construction crfterta related thereto, and that he has checked and coordinated the information contained therein with requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 4.12.7 Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents by Architect's, Owners or Ownere Representative's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples under Paragraph 3.3.9 unless Contractor has specifically informed Architect and Owners Representative in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect and Owner have given written approval specifically thereto. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by Architect's Owners or Owners Representative's approval thereof. 4.12.8 Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples, to revisions, other than those requested by Owners Representative on previous submittals. 4.12.9 No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by Architect, Owner or Owners Representative as provided in Paragraph 3.3.9. All such portions of the Work shall be performed in accordance with approved submittals, as such approvals may, from time to time, be modified by Owner. 4.13 USE OF SITE 4.13.1 Contractor shall confine operations at the Site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site with any materials or equipment. 4.13.2 Contractor shall provide two (2) separate construction trailers at the Site, each in a location as close to the construction area as practical and otherwise acceptable to Owner. One such trailer shall serve as a Project field office for Contractor and Contractors supervisory personnel and the other trailer shall serve as a Project field office for Owner's Representative, Architect and other personnel of Owner. Each trailer shall be of the dimensions and shall include the furnishings and equipment set forth in Sections 1C -3(C) and 1C-4(D), respectively, of the Supplementary General Provisions of the Specifications, and shall otherwise comply with said Sections of the Specifications. 4.13.3 All telephones and photocopy and fax machines required to be provided by Contractor under Sections 1C-3(C) and 1C-4(D) of the Supplementary General Provisions of the Specifications shall be maintained at Contractors expense until the "Completion Date" (as that term is defined In Section Page 5 8.1.3). Their use for calls, photocopying and fax transmisslons shall be free of charge to Owner's Representative, Architect and other personnel of Owner. 4.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING OF WORK 4.14.1 Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting or patching that may be required to complete the Work or to make its several parts fit together properly. Such work shall be performed by skilled mechanics. 4.14.2 Contractor shall not damage or endanger any portions of the Work or the work of Owner or any separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering any portion of the Work or any such separate work, or by excavation. Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter the work of Owner or any separate contractor except with the written consent of Owner and of such separate contractor. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner shall have the right to cut or otherwise alter the Work without the consent of Contractor. 4.14.3 Work that may be cut, damaged, disturbed or otherwise interfered with during progress of the Work of various trades shall be fully, property and carefully repaired by the trade responsible for such cutting, damage or disturbances, made good in a first -class manner to the satisfaction of Owner, and shall match similar existing adjoining work. 4.14.4 Cut, patched or altered structural framing, or other materials providing structural support, shall be properly braced and shored throughout the performance of the Work. 4.14.5 Mechanical and electrical contractors shall perform all of their cutting to limits as prescribed by Contractor. 4.15 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 4.15.1 Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturer's is specified; but if Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he shall promptly give such information to Architect and Owner. 4.16 INDEMNIFICATION 4.16.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Architect and their agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (2) is alleged or claimed to be caused in whole or part by any willful or negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, Owner or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not alleged or claimed to be caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. 4.16.2 In any and all claims against Owner or Architect or any of their agents or employees by any employee of Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them GC Construction Contract may be liable, the indemnification obligations under this Section 4.16 shall not be limited In any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any Subcontractor under worker's or workmen's' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other emr.:oyee benefit acts. 4.16.3 Nothing contained in this Section 4.16 shall constitute, or be deemed or construed to constitute, a modification, alteration or limitation of Contractor's liability and responsibility as set forth In Sections 6.2 and 10.3 hereof, it being understood and agreed by Contractor that such liability and responsibility shall be in addition to Contractor's obligations under this Section 4.16. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITION 6.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform any of the Work at the Site or to furnish any materials or equipment to the Contractor, whether at the Site or elsewhere. 6.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform any of the Work at the Slte or to furnish any materials or equipment to such Subcontractor, whether at the Site or elsewhere. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, simultaneously with Contractor's execution of this Agreement Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative a list setting forth the names of the proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers, with no more than three (3) names for each portion of the Work. Owner or Owner's Representative shall, promptly thereafter, notify Contractor if he objects to any such proposed Subcontractor, ft being understood and agreed that Owner or Owner's Representative has the right, in either's sole discretion, to reject any proposed Subcontractor. Within five (5) days after Contractor's execution of this Agreement, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative, in writing, of the specific Subcontractors and Suppliers selected by Contractor. 6.2.2 If Owner or Owner's Representative objects to any such proposed person or entity, Contractor shall delete his name from the list of proposed Subcontractors, and may submit the name of a substitute for acceptance by Owner. Owner shall have the right, at no increased cost to Owner, to require Contractor to subcontract with any such proposed Subcontractors designated by Owner. 5.2.3 The subcontracting of any portion of the Work and Owner's approval thereof shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for the improper performance thereof or any other responsibility under the Contract Documents. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 5.3.1 By an appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume for the benefit of Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which Page 6 Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has assumed. Said agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in said agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against Contractor that Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against Owner. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with his Sub - subcontractors. Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound pursuant to this Section 5.3, and identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract which may be at variance with the Contract Documents, Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of such documents available to his Sub - subcontractors. ARTICLE 6 WORK BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM WORK AND AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.1.1 Owner reserves the right to perform portions of the Work required to complete the Project with its own forces or separate contractors, and to award separate contracts in connection therewith. Any claim by Contractor that such action by Owner will result in delay or additional cost shall be made as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITIES 6.2.1 Contractor shall afford Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall connect and coordinate the Work with their work as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If any part of the Work depends, for proper execution or results, upon the work of Owner or any separate contractor, Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly notify Owner's Representative of any apparent discrepancies or defects in such other work that lender it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of Contractor to give such notice shall constitute a waiver by Contractor of its right to object that such work was not fit and proper to receive his work, except as to defects which may subsequently become apparent in such work by others. 6.2.3 Any costs caused by defective or ill-timed work shall be bome by the party responsible therefor, except that each Contractor shall be responsible for all work performed by him or by any of his Subcontractors. 6.2.4 Should Contractor wrongfully cause damage to any of the work or property on the Site, Contractor shall promptly remedy such damage in accordance with Paragraph 12,2.5. 6.2.6 Should Contractor wrongfully cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor, Contractor shall promptly correct same at his sole cost and expense. If such separate contractor sues Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been caused by Contractor, Owner shall so notify Contractor who shall defend, indemnify and hold Owner harmless from and against any and all claims, judgments, GC Construction Contract awards or other liability resulting from damage caused or allegedly caused by Contractor. ARTICLE 7 J MSCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 7.1 GOVERNING LAW 7.1.1 This Agreement shall be govemed by laws of the state where the Site is located. 7.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 7.2.1 Owner and Contractor each binds himself, his heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to the heirs, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, Contractor shall have no right to assign this Agreement. 7.3 CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES 7.3.1 Should either party hereto suffer Injury or damage because of any act or omission of the other party or of any of his employees, agents or others for whose acts he is liable, claim shall be made in writing to such other party within a reasonable time alter the first observance of such injury or damage. 7.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.4.1 If required by Owner, Contractor shall, at Owner's expense, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of this Agreement and the payment of all obligations arising hereunder. Such payment and performance bonds shall be in such amounts and issued by such bonding or surety company or companies as may be designated by Owner. 7.6 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 7.6.1 The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available at law. 7.6.2 No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of any right or duty afforded any of them under the Contract Documents, nor shall any such action or failure to act constitute an approval of or acquiescence to any breach thereunder, except as may otherwise be expressly provided in this Agreement or specifically confirmed in writing. 7.6 TESTS 7.6.1 If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority ha ling jurisdiction require any portion of the Work to be inspected, tested or approved, Contractor shall give Owners Representative timely notice of its readiness so that Owners Representative and/or Architect may observe such inspection, testing or approval. Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals conducted by public authorities. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Owner shall bear all costs of other inspections, tests or approvals. Page 7 7.6.2 If Owner's Representative determines that any Work requires special inspection, testing, or approval which Paragraph 7.6.1 does not cover, he will, upon written authorization from Owner, instruct Contractor to order such special inspection, testing or approval, and Contractor shall give notice as provided in Paragraph 7.6.1. If such special inspection or testing reveals a failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall bear all costs thereof, including inspection fees and compensation for Architect's additional services made necessary buy such failure; otherwise Owner shall bear such costs, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. 7.6.3 Required certificates of inspection, testing or approval shall be secured by Contractor and promptly delivered by him to Owner's Representative. 7.6.4 If Architect and/or Owner's Representative is to observe the inspections, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, he shall do so promptly and, where practicable, at the source of supply. 7.6.5 Contractor shall not be entitled to interest on any monies due hereunder or any monies due as a result of any claim, dispute or other matter in question. 7.7 INSPECTION BY CONTRACTOR 7.7.1 Prior to submission of Contractor's bid, Contractor shall examine all locations and areas where Work is to be done, and shall notify Owner's Representative, in writing, of any conditions which would be detrimental to the proper Installation of any portion of the Work. 7.8 CERTIFICATION OF MATERIALS 7.8.1 Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative certificates or affidavits from all manufacturers of materials used, certifying that materials conform to the requirements of the Specifications. 7.9 USAGE 7.9.1 Wherever the words "or equal," "similar to," or words of similar meaning are mentioned, they shall mean that the quality of materials, appliances or workmanship to which they refer shall be equal in the opinion of Owner. 7.9.2 Contractor shall base his bid on the name or make of any article, device, material, form of construction, fixture, or similar item specified in the Specifications unless the term "or equal" is used. 7.9.3 After entering into this Agreement, substitutions will be considered for proprietary brands specified, other than those listed on a "Substitution Sheet" submitted with the bids, only if evidence that the proposed substitution is equal to the specified Item is submitted to Owner's Representative and such substitution is approved in writing by Owner. 7.10.1 Owner reserves the right, in its sole and absolute discretion, to reject any and all bids. 7.11 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY 7.11.1 Contractor hereby acknowledges that it has established its bid for the Project based upon the quantities of materials set forth on Exhibit C attached hereto and made a part hereof and that Owner has entered into this Agreement in reliance upon Contractor's assurances to Owner that such quantities represent Contractor's good faith estimate of the requirements for the Project as determined by the exercise of sound construction practices. 7.11.2 The construction of the Project shall be solely at Contractor's risk concerning the damage or Toss of any equipment or materials incorporated into the Work or located on the Site, except to the extent such damage or loss is to real property covered by the insurance Owner Is required to carry pursuant to Paragraph 13.2.1. 7.11.3 Owner's Code of Ethical Standards and Business Practices and Conduct (the "Policy") requires that the selection of a vendor or other supplier of goods and services to Owner must be based on quality, need, performance and cost. Owner's Policy further prohibits the acceptance from suppliers by Owner's employees or agents of gifts or gratuities, whether in the form of money, merchandise, services, lavish entertainment, travel or any other form. If any employee or agent of Owner shall solicit from Contractor, or any of Contractor's employees or agents, any such gifts or gratuities , it shall be Contractor's obligation and responsibility to promptly notify Owner of any such solicitation. Such notice shall be sent to Owner in accordance with the provisions of Section 18.1 hereof, except that no copy of such notice shall be sent to Owner's Representative. ARTICLE 8 TiME OF PERFORMANCE 8.1 COMMENCEMENT AND COMPLETION 8.1.1 The Work shall be commenced within three (3) calendar days after Owners Representative notifies Contractor (which notice may be given verbally) that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon, and shall progress in accordance with the Progress Schedule. If the Site is not ready for the work to be commenced thereon by 19 , than all dates in the Progress Schedule, the Substantial Completion Date and the Completion Date shall automatically be deemed extended for a period equivalent to the number of days between said date and the date that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon. 8.1.2 Owner's Representative's determination that the Site is ready for the Work to be commenced thereon shall be binding upon Contractor unless, within twenty -four (24) hours after receipt of notice of such determination, Contractor notifies Owner of its objection thereto (which notice shall be given verbally, but shall immediately thereafter be followed up in writing in accordance with Article 18). 8.1.3 The Work shall be substantially completed to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof no later than (herein called the "Substantial Completion Date "). The Work shall be fully completed, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, no later than (herein called the "Completion Date "). Contractor shall complete the work on all such punch list items within the time period specified in Paragraph 11.7.1, except that no such work shall be performed during the months of without the prior written consent of Owner. 8.1.4 The Work shall be deemed to be substantially completed when the Work has been completed (including the procurement by Contractor of a Certificate of Occupancy or other occupancy permit, if required by the governmental authority having jurisdiction) to such an extent as to allow GC Construction Contract Page 8 Owner, without Interference or interruption resulting from continuance of the Work by Contractor or any Subcontractor or Subsubcontractor, to commence and perform its fixturing and merchandising operations and other preparatory work in order that the Project may be in full operation for its intended purposes (including the Issuance of a permanent certificate of occupancy or its equivalent) no later than the day following the Completion Date, with nothing other than minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, remaining to be done on the Completion Date, end Owner's Representative has certified to such effect. Contractor shall, on the Substantial Completion Date, furnish Owner with a complete set of keys sufficient to provide Owner independent access to the Project, but delivery of such keys to Owner shall not constitute, or be deemed or construed to constitute acceptance by Owner of the Work or the Project, in whole or in part. 8.1.6 If the Work is not being performed in compliance with the Progress Schedule, Owner shall have the right, in addition to any other rights It may have, to: (a) give notice to Contractor compelling him to perform the Work on an overtime basis (which shall include weekends, if necessary), at no additional cost to Owner, in order to assure that the Substantial Completion Date and Completion Date are met, and Contractor shall promptly comply with any such notice, whether or not Owner shall have exercised the foregoing right; or (b) assume responsibility for the construction of the Project in accordance with Article 20 hereof and Contractor shall be liable to Owner for all damages sustained by Owner as a result of Contractor's failure to comply. In addition, Owner shall have the right to apply amounts previously retained from the Progress Payments to costs incurred by Owner In performing the Work. Failure of Owner to exercise its rights pursuant hereto shall not be deemed a waiver thereof, nor prevent Owner from exercising such rights at a later date. Contractor shall insert in all agreements between Contractor and any Subcontractor a provision whereby the Subcontractor recognizes the right of Owner to assume responsibility for the construction of the Project, with such agreements to continue as direct agreements between Owner and the Subcontractor. 8.1.6 Unless otherwise provided, all of the dates and time periods set forth herein are of the essence of this Agreement. 8.2 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8,2.1 If Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or negligence of Owner or an employee of Owner, or by any separate contractor employed by Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by delay authorized by Owner, then the dates in the Progress Schedule, the Substantial Completion Date and the Completion Date shall, subject to Paragraph 8.2.2, be appropriately extended. 8.2.2 Any claim for extension of time pursuant to Paragraph 8.2.1 shalt be made in writing to Owner's Representative not more than two (2) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. Contractor shall provide an estimate of the probable effect of any such delay on the progress of the Work at the time such claim is made. 8.2.9 This section 8.2 does not. exclude the recovery of damages for the delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE 9.1 Contractor acknowledges that before making his proposal he carefully examined the Contract Documents, the Site and the surrounding area, and that he is fully informed regarding all of the conditions affecting the work to be done and . labor and materials to be furnished in connection herewith. Contractor further acknowledges that he has not relied on any representations or estimates which may have been made by Owner or Architect (or any of its or their representatives, agents or employees), and Contractor shall make no claim against Owner by reason of any such representation or estimate. ARTICLE 10 LIEN RIGHTS 10.1 Contractor hereby stipulates and agrees that any and all of its lien rights, however crested, now existing or which may exist in the future, are and shall be subject and subordinate to: (a) all existing mortgages affecting the Site, including future advances thereon; (b) all interim, construction and permanent mortgages, including future advances thereon, given in connection with the financing of (or reimbursement for) all or any part of the cost of the acquisition of the Site and the construction of the Project; (c) all existing or future grants, easements, rights of way, and dedications affecting all or any part of the Site; (d) all existing or future leases covering all or any part of the Site; (e) all renewals, replacements, extensions or modifications of any of the foregoing. 10.2 Contractor shall not, at any time, suffer or permit any lien, attachment, notice of intention to Hen, stop notice, mechanic's lien or other similar lien or encumbrance permitted under the law of the jurisdiction in which the Site is located (all of the foregoing being herein individually and collectively called "Contractor's Lien ") filed or served upon Owner by or on behalf of any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, to remain on file against the Site, the improvements thereon, or money due or to become due for any work performed or materials furnished in connections with the construction of the Project, or to otherwise establish or create any liability or potential liability as between Owner and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor. In the event a Contractor's Lien is so filed or served, whether during or after the performance of the Work, Contractor shall cause same to be released or discharged of record or otherwise eliminated, by bonding or otherwise, at no cost or expense to Owner, within ten (10) days after Contractor receives notice of such filing or service, failing which, until same has been so released, discharged or eliminated, Owner may, at its option, in addition to any other remedies available to it, withhold any payments then or thereafter due by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement or cause same to be so released, discharged or eliminated, in which event Contractor shall, promptly on demand, reimburse Owner for all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in connection therewith, falling which, Owner may deduct all such costs and expenses from any payments then or thereafter due by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement. 10.9 Contractor hereby agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner from and against any and all Toss, cost, damage or expense (including attomeys' fees) arising out of or in any way resulting from any claim, suit, action or other GC Construction Contract Page 9 � proceeding instituted against Owner or the Protect by or on behalf of any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor, whether or not such claim, suit, action or other proceeding shall be instituted in connection wth any Contractor's Lien. 10.4 In the event either party to this Agreement shall institute any claim, suit, action or other proceeding Involving the other party hereto, then the party prevailing in such claim, suit, action or other proceeding shall be entitled to recover and receive from the non - prevailing party all costs and expenses (including' attorneys' fees) actually Incurred by the prevailing party in prosecuting or defending, as the case may be, its interest in such claim, suit, action or other proceeding. Such recovery shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other relief to which the prevailing party may be entitled in such claim, suit, action or other proceeding. ARTICLE 11 PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR 11.1 PROJECT COST 11.1.1 Contractor agrees to perform the Work and to complete the Project, all in accordance with the Contract Documents, for the total cost (the "Project Cost") set forth on Exhibit A attached hereto and made a part hereof. Contractor acknowledges that the Project Cost includes all costs and expenses, including, without limitation, for tabor, material, equipment rentals and payments to Subcontractors, plus profit and overhead. Owner shall pay to Contractor the Project Cost, as hereinafter provided. Except as provided in Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof, Owners liability for payment to Contractor pursuant hereto shall in no event exceed the Project Cost. 11.1.2 If Contractors costs and expenses exceed the Project Cost, then the amount of such excess shall be paid by Contractor without reimbursement by Owner; except that, if Owner, pursuant to approved change order(s), has required changes in the scope of the Work, and If such changes have resulted in a net increase In Contractor's costs and expenses (after taking into account all such changes), then Owner shall pay Contractor the net amount by which Contractor's cost and expenses were thereby increased. 11.2 DRAW REQUESTS 11.2.1 On or before the tenth (10th) day of each month, Contractor shall request payment by delivering to Owner's Representative (personal delivery or delivery by regular mail shall be permitted) AIA Document G702- Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA Document G702A- Ce ^!inuation Sheets (herein called "Draw Request "), together with all supporting documentation necessary to verify the items and amounts included in the Draw Request. Wit■i each Dra. Request, Contractor shall submit an updated schedule, In the form of a bar graph, showing the actual (or estimated) time for commencement and completion of the different portions of the Work broken down according to the Specifications subsections, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by Owners Representative. 11.2.2 Contractor warrants that; (i) title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by each Draw Request will pass to Owner either by incorporation into the Project or upon the receipt of payment by Contractor, whichever occurs first, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances, hereinafter referred to in this Article 11 as "liens "; and (ii) no Work, materials or equipment covered by any Draw Request will have been acquired by Contractor, or by GC Construction Contract any other person performing Work at the Site or furnishing materials and equipment for the Project, for or on behalf of Contractor, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or provider thereof or Is otherwise imposed by or on Contractor or such other person. Unless otherwise provided In the Contract Documents, payments will not be made on account of materials or equipment not incorporated into the Project. 11.2.3 Within five (5) days after the date hereof, Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative a schedule of values allocated to each portion of the Work according to the various subheadings of the Specifications, prepared on Practical Standard Form for Contractors No. 591 (or such other form as Owner's Representative may designate) and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as Owner's Representative may require. The total of all amounts set forth in the schedule of values shall equal the Project Cost and shall be used in verifying the amounts contained in the Draw Requests. 11.3 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 11.3.1 Owner's Representative will, within seven (7) days after the receipt of each Draw Request, either issue a Certificate for Payment to Owner, with a copy to Contractor, for such amount as Owner's Representative considers to be property due, or notify the Contractor in writing of his reasons for withholding the Certificate for Payment in accordance with Paragraph 11.4.1. 11.3.2 By issuing a Certificate for Payment, Owner's Representative shall not hereby be deemed to represent that he has made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work or that he has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or that he has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose Contractor has used any payments previously made. 11.4 PAYMENTS WITHHELD 11.4.1 Owners Representative may withhold his Certificate for Payment, in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect Owner, if, in Owners Representative's opinion, he is unable to represent to Owner that: (i) the Work has progressed to the point indicated in the Draw Request; (ii) to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to later evaluation, to subsequent tests, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion, and to any specific qualifications set forth in his Certificate); and (iii) the Contractor is entitled to payment. If Owners Representative is unable to make such representations and to certify payment in the amount of the Diaw Request, he will notify Contractor as provided in Paragraph 11.3.1. If Contractor and Owner's Representative cannot agree on a revised amount, Owners Representative will prcmptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount, If any, for which it is able to make such representations to Owner. Owners Representative may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent observations, he may nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion to protect Owner from loss because of: (a) defective work not remedied; (b) third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; Page 10 (c) failure of Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment; (d) reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Project Cost; (e) damage to Owner or another contractor; (1) reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed in accordance with the Progress Schedule; or (g) persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance wtth the Contract Documents. 11.5 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 11.5.1 Within thirty (30) days after receipt by Owner of a Certificate for Payment, Owner shall either (i) approve same and pay Contractor the approved amount less ten percent (10%) of said amount, which shall be retained until the Final Payment is made (such payment being herein called a "Progress Payment ") or (ii) disapprove same and notify Contractor in writing of the reasons for such disapproval. 11.5.2 Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, on account of that portion of such Subcontractor's work completed through the date of Contractor's then current Draw Request, the amount to which such Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting the percentage actually retained, if any, from payments by Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's work. Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to his Subsubcontractors in similar manner. 11.6.3 Owner's Representative may, at its discretion, fumish to any Subcontractor information regarding the percentages of completion or the amounts applied for by Contractor and the action taken thereon account of work done by such Subcontractor. 11.5.4 Owner shall have no obligations to pay or to see to the payment of any money to any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner may, in his discretion, make all or any portion of any Progress Payment by check payable jointly to the order of Contractor and any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor which is entitled to payment on account of such Subcontractor's or Sub - subcontractor's work. Nothing herein shall be construed to permit Contractor to withhold or delay payment to any Subcontractor not involved in disputed amount pending receipt of payment to Contractor by Owner. 11.5.5 Prior to or simultaneously with the submission of any Draw Request, Contractor stall deliver to Owner's Representative unconditional waivers or releases (in form satisfactory to Owner) of all liens or other claims relating to items covered by the Progress Payment made with respect to such Draw Request, together with affidavits in form and substance acceptable to Owner from each Subcontractor certifying that payment was made by Contractor to Subcontractor in the proper amounts. Until such waivers, releases or affidavits have been delivered, Owner shall have the right to refuse to make any further Progress Payments. 11.5.6 No Certificate for Payment, nor any Progress Payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by Owner, shall constitute an acceptance by Owner of any Work not done in accordance with the Contract Documents. 11.6 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 11.6.1 If Owner's Representative does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of Contractor, within seven (7) days after receipt of a Draw Request, or, subject to GC Construction Contract Paragraphs 11.5.1 and 11.5.5, if Owner does not pay Contractor within thirty (30) days after approval of a Certificate for Payment, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days' written notice to Owner, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been made. 11.7 PUNCH LISTS 11.7.1 Within a reasonable time after the Work has been fully completed, subject to minor punch list Items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, Owner's Representative may prepare a punch list setting forth those items of work remaining to be completed, or those items to be repaired or replaced. Subject to Paragraph 8.1.3, Contractor shall promptly perform all work set forth on said punch list, completing same within fourteen (14) days after receipt thereof, failing which, without the giving of additional notice to Contractor, Owner shall have the right to perform same and deduct the cost hereof from the Final Payment. Nothing herein shall limit Contractor's obligations pursuant to Section 15.2. 11.7.2 Upon full completion of the Work, subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature, and upon application by Contractor and certification by Owner's Representative, Owner may, at Owner's discretion (but taking into account any bonds of the type enumerated in Paragraph 11.8.2(f) still outstanding) make payment reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof, as provided in the Contract Documents. 11.8 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 11.8.1 Upon completion by Contractor of all work, set forth on the punch list referred to in Paragraph 11.7.1 hereof, Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative a final Draw Request. Upon approval by Owner's Representation of said final Draw Request and receipt thereof by Owner, Owner shall promptly make or cause to be made a final inspection of the Work and, if, in Owner's view, the Work has been fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items) in accordance with the Contract Documents and Contractor's obligations thereunder have been fully performed, he will make the "Final Payment" (as hereinafter defined), in accordance . with and subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.8.2 hereof. 11.8.2 Owner shall pay the entire amount remaining to be paid pursuant to this Agreement, including any retainage, (herein called the "Final Payment"), within thirty (30) days after all of the following shall have occurred: (a) Receipt by Owner of a permanent certificate of occupancy (or its local equivalent, if certificates of occupancy are not issued in the jurisdiction) permitting the use of the Project for its intended purposes. (b) Receipt by Owner of the final Draw Request, setting forth the amount of the Final Payment and approved by Owner's Representative (which approval shall indicate that to the best of Owner's Representative's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of his observations and inspectior.s, the Work has been fully completed, including the completion of all punch list items, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and that the Final Payment is due and payable). (c) Receipt by Owner of an affidavit of Contractor that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or his property might In any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, and such other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, unconditional releases and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract Documents, to the extent and in such form as may be Page 11 required by Owner. If any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by Owner, Contractor, at no cost to Owner, shall furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify him against any such lien. If any such lien is filed and remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, Contractor shalt refund to Owner, promptly on demand, all moneys that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attomeys' fees; (d) Receipt by Owner of consent of the surety, if any, to Final Payment. (e) Receipt by Owner of all warranties, guarantees and as -built drawings relating to the Work required under the Plans and Specifications or under any of the other Contract Documents. (1) Acceptance by Owner of the Work as being fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items), which acceptance shall be acknowledged in writing; (g) Retum to Owner of all payment or performance bonds (or other security) paid for by Owner and deposited with any govemmental authority having jurisdiction to secure the performance of any portion of the Work required by such governmental authority. (h) Receipt by Owner of fully completed cost collection sheet as provided in the Specifications. 11.8.3 The making of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver by Owner of all claims against Contractor arising out of the performance of the Work, except those arising from: (a) unsettled liens filed prior to the date Final Payment is made, all liens filed thereafter; (b) faulty or defective Work, regardless of when appearing; (c) failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; (d) terms of any special warranties or guarantees required by the Contract Documents; (e) claims relating to the liability of Contractor under the Contract Documents which, either by their nature or pursuant to the Contract Documents, are intended to survive Final Payment; or (I) any audit by Owner of Contractor's books and records relating to sums paid by Owner to Contractor pursuant to Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof. 11.8.4 The acceptance of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver by Contractor of all claims against Owner arising out of the performance of the Work. ARTICLE 12 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 12.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS 12.1.1 Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. 12.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 12.2.1 Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (a) all employees performing any portion of the Work and all other persons who may be affected thereby; (b) all the Work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site, under the care, custody or control of the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and GC Construction Contract (c) other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavement, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. 12.2.2 Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of any public authority bearing on the safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 12.2.3 Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities. 12.2.4 When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the Work, Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. 12.2.6 Subject to Section 13.2, Contractor shall promptly remedy all damage or loss to any property referred to in subparagraphs (b) and (c) of Paragraph 12.2.1 caused in whole or in part by Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable and for which Contractor is responsible under subparagraphs (b) and (c) of Paragraph 12.2.1, except damage or loss attributable to the acts or omissions of Owner, Owner's Representative or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of Contractor. The foregoing obligations of Contractor are in addition to his obligations under Section 4.16. 12.2.6 Contractor's superintendent, or another responsible member of Contractor's organization at the Site designated by Contractor in wrlting to Owner shall be responsible for the prevention of accidents. 12.2.7 Contractor shall: (a) Protect the excavation, trenches, and building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, back up from drains and sewers and all other water. (b) Provide all shoring, bracing and sheathing required for the proper execution of the Work, and have same removed when the Work is completed. (c) Provide and maintain guard lights at all barricades, railings, obstructions in the street, sidewalks and all trenches or pits adjacent to walks or streets, In accordance with all applicable codes or requirements. (d) Protect all underground and above ground utility lines, including gas, telephone, electricity, water, sewage and storm drains. In addition, Contractor shall notify Owner's Representative of any utility encountered which is not indicated or is indicated incorrectly. (e) Provide protection against the elements at all times, so as to maintain all Work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from injury or damage therefrom. At the end of each day, all new work likely to be damaged shall be covered. (1) Provide and maintain suitable fire protection equipment which shall be subject to approval of the local fire authorities. (g) Erect and maintain all necessary and proper temporary dustproof enclosures, screens, fences, barriers, guards, lights and other protective devices for the prevention of accidents and for the protection of the workmen and the public Page 12 In accordance with the requirements of all govemmental authorities having jurisdiction, and post danger signs warning against the hazards created by performance of the Work. Contractor shall observe all laws and regulations relating to obstructing the street, keeping passageways open and protecting the same where they are exposed and may be dangerous to the public, the Work or employees of other contractors. Contractor shall plank or bridge passageways, place proper guards upon and around the same, and take such other measures as may be necessary to prevent accidents, All excavations, embankments, materials, rubbish heaps and other obstacles, and encumbrances incident to the Work must be strongly barricaded and their presence clearly indicated by red or amber blinking or burning lights, which shall continuously operate between sunset and sunrise. (h) Be responsible for the management, care and maintenance of the Site and except as may be otherwise expressly provided herein, shall be solely responsible for damage thereto and pay for any and at injury to persons or property incident to or on account of the execution of the Work as a result of this Contract, and shall adjust all claims or suits arising therefrom, without loss, expense or annoyance to Owner or Architect. 12.3 EMERGENCIES 12.3.1 In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor shall take such measures as may be reasonably necessary to prevent potential damage, injury or Toss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in Article 14 for changes in the Work. ARTICLE 13 INSURANCE 13.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13.1.1 Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect Owner and Contractor from claims arising out of or as a result of Contractor's operations under the Contract Documents, whether directly performed by Contractor or any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of the location of such operation or act, the place of business of contractor or subcontractor, the state of incorporation of any contractor or subcontractor or the state of residency of any employee or worker. Such insurance shall include, but not be limited to: (a) workers' compensation insurance, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit coverages (including similar coverage for any class of employees engaged in hazardous work at the Site who are not protected under the applicable workers' compensation statute). The worker's compensation policy must satisfy the statutory limits of the state in which the work is to be performed, with employer's liability limits of $500,000.00; (b) comprehensive general liability insurance, including contractual liability coverage, in an amount not less than 51,000,000.00 for personal and bodily injury to all persons in any one occurrence and for damage to property; and (c) motor vehicle liability coverage, with coverage limits not less than the amounts required by subparagraph (b) above. 13.1.2 Certificates of insurance, satisfactory to Owner and naming Owner as an additional insured, (except for worker's compensation) shall be delivered to Owner prior to the commencement of Work, and said certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled without thirty (30) days' prior written notice to Owner. 13.1.3 All insurance required to be carried by Contractor pursuant hereto shall be taken out with insurance companies approved by Owner in advance and licensed to do business in the state in which the Work is to be performed. 13.2 PROPERTY INSURANCE 13.2.1 Unless otherwise provided, Owner may, but shall not be required to, maintain with respect to the entire Work at the site property insurance coverage of such type and in such amount as Owner, in its sole judgment, shall deem proper. Any such policy shall name as insureds Owner, Contractor and any other party or parties which Owner may deem appropriate, as their interests may appear, and the proceeds of any loss shall be payable in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 13.2.3. If Owner does not intend to maintain such insurance, he shall inform Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Contractor may then effect insurance which will protect the interests of himself, his Subcontractors and the Subsubcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to Owner. If Contractor Is damaged by failure of Owner to maintain such insurance and to so notify Contractor, then Owner shall bear all reasonable costs property attributable thereto. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Owner's insurance shall not cover hoists or equipment (including tools) belonging to Contractor or any Subcontractor or any other person or entity acting through or under Contractor or any Subcontractor. 13.2.2 Owner shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract Documents or by law. The Policies shall name as insureds Owner, Contractor and any other party or parties which Owner may deem appropriate, as their Interests may appear. 13.2.3 Any loss insured under Paragraph 13.2.1 or 13.2.2 is to be adjusted with Owner and made payable to Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a Just share of any insurance monies received by Contractor, and by appropriate written agreement, shall require each Subcontractor to make payments to his Sub - subcontractors in similar manner. 13.2.4 Owner hereby waives all rights against Contractor, his Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors, and their agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance maintained by Owner pursuant to this Article 13. Contractor hereby waives all rights against Owner, Owner's Representative, Architect and separate contractors, if any, and their respective subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents and employees for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance carried by Contractor. Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of Architect, separate contractors, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors, by appropriate written agreements, similar waivers each in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Paragraph 13.2.4. 13.2.5 Owner shall have the right to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers in any manner it deems appropriate. 13,2.6 Owner shall have the right to use or occupy portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion thereof provided such use or occupancy shall not unreasonably Interfere with Contractor's performance of the Work. The insurance required GC Construction Contract Page 13 hereunder shall not lapse or be canceled on account of such use or occupancy. 13.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE 13.3.1 To the extent of any insurance proceeds actually received by Owner with respect thereto, Owner waives all rights of action against Contractor for loss of use of his property due to fire or other hazards, including consequential losses. 13.4 SELF-INSURANCE 13.4.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract Documents, Owner shall have the right to be a self- Insurer with respect to any Insurance which Owner may carry hereunder. ARTICLE 14 CHANGES IN THE WORK 14.1 CHANGE ORDERS 14.1.1 A Change Order is a written order to Contractor signed by Owner and/or Owner's Representative, issued after execution of this Agreement, authorizing s change in the Work or an adjustment in the Project Cost or in the time for performance of the Work. There shall be no deviation from the requirements of the Contract Documents except as authorized by Change Orders. A Change Order signed by Contractor indicates his agreement with respect to the items contained therein. 14.1.2 Owner, without invalidating this Agreement, may from time to time and at any time, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions and the Project Cost and/or the time for performance shall be adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. Except as may be set forth in a Change Order, Owner shall have no liability whatsoever to Contractor as a result of any such changes, notwithstanding that said changes may result in, among other things, loss of anticipated profits or variations between estimated actual work required to construct the Project. 14.1.3 The cost or credit to Owner resulting from a change In the Work shall be determined by the Owner in one or more of the following ways, in Owner's discretion: (a) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; (b) by unit prices as set forth on Exhibit B attached hereto and made a part hereof; (c) by determination in a manner agreed upon by the parties of a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or (d) by the method provided in Paragraph 14.1.4. 14.1.4 Contractor shall promptly comply with all Change Orders notwithstanding that no agreement may have been reached with respect to determination of the cost or credit to Owner as provided in Paragraphs 14.1.3. The cost of such Work shall then be determined on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, and in such case Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as Owner's Representative may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate data for Inclusion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be GC Construction Contract limited as set forth in Section 14.1.6 hereof. Pending final determination of the cost or credit to Owner, payments on account shall be made on portions of Certificates for Payment relating thereto that are approved by Owner. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Project Cost will be the amount of the actual net savings, determined, to the extent possible, in accordance with the above. 14.1.5 All "extras" must be authorized by Owner on a duly executed Change Order form signed by Contractor and any one of Owner's Representative, Owner's Vice President - Archftecture & Construction or Owner's Senior Vice President - Real Estate. No other representative of Owner shall be authorized to sign any Change Order on behalf of Owner unless such authorization is set forth in writing signed by Owner's Senior Vice President - Real Estate. 14.1.6 All "extras" shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative no later than five (5) days after the work covered by such "extra" is commenced, in either or both of the following ways, as specified by Owner: (a) Lump sum proposal outlining the work to be performed; or (b) Labor and material plus overhead and profit: general contractor, subcontractor and subordinate subcontractors shall all agree to be limited to and perform any additional work which may be ordered in accordance with this Article 14 and the following conditions: 1. The total number of tiers involved in performing "extras" shall be limited to a maximum of three (3) (the Contractor, One Subcontractor and one Sub - subcontractor). 2. Overhead and profit shall be allowed only In accordance with the following schedule: (a) Single tier (Contractor only) - 10% upon all materials, labor and/or rentals supplied. (b) Double tier (Contractor and Subcontractor) Subcontractor may increase price upon materials, labor and/or rentals supplied by 10%, with the Contractor being permitted a 596 increase thereon (Total overhead and profit 15.596). (c) Triple tier Sub - subcontractor may increase price of any materials, labor or rentals supplied by 1096. The Subcontractor may increase such price by 596 and the Contractor may thereafter increase such price by 596 (Total overhead and profit - 21.2596). In determining overhead and profit, the foregoing percentages shall be applied to the net cost of materials, labor and rentals only, and such percentage shall be deemed to include all overhead and profit of every type and nature. The net cost of labor shall include the cash wages and ordinary benefits actually paid. Persons performing services other than so -called "trade persons" and "foreman" including and not limited to office, support and supervisory staff shall not be included in any 1/4.J.culation of the cost of tabor and shall be deemed a part of overhead profit included In the foregoing percentages. 14.1.7 If the unit quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order that application of the unit prices set forth in Exhibit B to the quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. Page 14 (1 14.2 CONCEALED CONDITIONS 14.2.1 Should concealed conditions be encountered in the performance of the Work below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure be at variance with the conditions indicated by the Contract Documents, or should unknown physical conditions below the surface of the ground or should concealed or unknown conditions in an existing structure of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in this agreement, be encountered, the Project Cost shall be equitably adjusted by Change Order upon claim by either party made within two (2) days after the observance of the conditions. Notwithstanding the foregoing, If a concealed or unknown condition requires modification in the amount of excavation or concrete work, the adjustment in the Project Cost may. in Owner's discretion, be determined in accordance with Exhibit B attached hereto and made a part hereof. 14.E CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST 14.3.1 If Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Project Cost, he shall give Owners Representative written notice thereof within two (2) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim (Including, without limitation, a claim arising out of (1) any written interpretation pursuant to Paragraph 3.3.7, (ii) any order by Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Section 15.3 where Contractor was not at fault, or (iii) failure of payment by Owner as provided in Section 11.6, but excluding any claims pursuant to Section 14.2). This notice shall be given by Contractor before proceeding to execute the Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property, in which case Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Section 12.3. No such claim shall be valid unless made in accordance with the foregoing. Any change in the Project Cost resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order ARTICLE 15 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 15.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 15.1.1 If any portion of the Work is covered contrary to the request of Owners Representative or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, said Work shall, at the direction of Owners Representative, be uncovered for inspection and then replaced at Contractors expense. 15.1.2 If any other portion of the Work has been covered which Owner's Representative did not specifically requested to observe r'ior to being covered, Owner's Representative may direct that such Work be uncovered by Contractor for inspection. If such Work is found to be in accordance with The Contrac., Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall be charged to Owner by appropriate Change Order. If such Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay such cost unless this condition was caused by Owner or a separate contractor as provided in Article 6, in which event Owner shall be responsible for the payment of such costs. 15.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 16.2.1 Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by Owners Representative as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of and expenses relating to the correction of rejected Work, including, without limitation, compensation for Architect's additional services, it any, made necessary thereby, and the costs of transportation incident to the repairing or replacement of defective work, removal and reinstallation as well as any damage to the work or property of others resulting from, or specifically attributable to, the remedial or corrective work. 16.2.2 If, within one (1) year after the date on which the Work, or any designated portion thereof, has been fully completed (including the completion of all punch list items), or within one (1) year after acceptance by Owner of designated equipment or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not In accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct same promptly after receipt of a written notice from Owner or Owner's Representative to do so. This obligation shall survive termination of this Agreement. 15.2.3 Contractor shall remove from the Site all portions of the Work which are defective or nonconforming and which have not been corrected under Paragraphs 15.2.1 and 15.2.2, unless such removal has been waived in writing by Owner. 15.2.4 If Contractor fails to correct defective or nonconforming Work in accordance with this Section 15.2, Owner may correct tt as provided in the Article. 16.2.5 If Contractor does not proceed with the correction of such defective or nonconforming Work within the time fixed by written notice from Owner or Owners Representative, Owner may remove same and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of Contractor. If Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten (10) days after demand therefor is made, Owner may, upon ten (10) additional days' written notice, sell such Work at auction or at private sale. If the proceeds of such sale are not equal to or greater than all the costs that should have been bome by Contractor, including compensation for Architect's additional services, if any, made necessary thereby, the deficiency shall be charged to Contractor and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. If payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, Contractor shall pay such amount to Owner promptly on demand. 15.2.6 Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all work Owner or separate contractors destroyed or damaged by such correction or removal. 16.2.7 Nothing contained in this Section 15.2 shall be construed as establishing a period of limitation with respect to any other obligation which Contractor may have under the Contract Documents, including Paragraph 4.5.1 hereof. Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that the establishment of the time period on one (1) year after the date on which the Work has been fully completed (including the completion of punch list items), or after the date of acceptance, or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any warranty required by the Contract Documents, shall relate only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and shall not constitute a limitation upon the time within which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor upon the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractors liability with respect to his obligations ( other than specifically to correct the Work). GC Construction Contract Page 15 15.2.E Contractor shall deliver to Owner's Representative, together with his final Draw Request, his written guarantee, made out to Owner and In a form satisfactory to Owner, guaranteeing all of the Work under the Contract Documents to be free from faulty materials and workmanship, watertight and leakproof In every particular. Contractor shall also agree to replace or to re.execute without cost to Owner such Work as may be found to be defective, and to make good all damage caused to other work or materials due to such required replacement or re-execution. This Agreement shall cover all Work under the Contract Documents and shall run for a period of one (1) year from the date the Project is in full operation, except as may be otherwise noted in the Specifications, or for a longer period where so stipulated in the Contract Documents. 15.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK 15.3.1 If Contractor faits to perform the Work in accordance with Contract Documents or fails to correct defective Work as required by Section 15.2, Owner, by written notice, may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Ov'iner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other person or entity. 15.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 15.4.1 If, within two (2) days after written notice from Owner, Contractor fails to commence to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or to correct any defective Work as required by Section 15.2, and thereafter to complete said performance or correction with due diligence, Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy it may have, perform or correct said Work on behalf of Contractor. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due Contractor all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in connection therewith, including, without limitation, compensation for Architect's additional services made necessary thereby. If the payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner promptly on demand. 15.5 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE OR NONCONFORMING WORK 15.5.1 Owner may, in his discretion, accept defective or nonconforming Work, In which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect a reduction in the Project Cost where appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not Final Payment has been made. Owner shall not be deemed to have accepted any defective or nonconforming Work unless such acceptance has been specifically acknowledged in writing. ARTICLE 16 ACCOUNTING RECORDS 16.1 Contractor shall keep and maintain complete and accurate books and records in accordance with sound accounting principles, relating to the cost and/or performance of the Work and the materials and supplies incorporated therein. Owner shall have the right, on ten (10) days prior notice given at any time and from time to time, to audit such books and records relating to the Project Cost (including any additions or reductions thereof pursuant to Paragraph 11.1.2 hereof), the Work, the Project and all such other matters relating to this Agreement. The books and records required to be maintained by Contractor in accordance with this Section 16.1 shall be kept and preserved at Contractor's principal place of business for a period of not less than three (3) years after the date upon which Final Payment is made. ARTICLE 17 j.IGUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN COMPLETION 17.1 Contractor acknowledges that Owner is relying upon Contractor to perform the Work and construct the Project in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, and that Owner may suffer damages (whether by loss of sales and profits, increased costs or otherwise) in the event completion is delayed. 17.2 In view of the difficulty in ascertaining the actual damages Owner may suffer as a result of such delay, Contractor and Owner hereby agree that the sum of Two Thousand ($2,000) Dollars per day represents a fair measure of such damages (said sum being fixed as tlquidated damages and not as a penalty). In accordance therewith, if by the Substantial Completion Date the Work . has - not been substantially completed to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof: or, if by the Completion Date the .Work has not been fully completed, subject onty to minor punch Net items, primarily of a cosmetic nature: then in either such event Contractor shall pay Owner the. sum of Two Thousand (52,000) Dollars for each calendar day after the Substantial Completion Date until the Work is fully completed, subject only to minor punch kat items, primarily of a cosmetic nature. Owner may take and retain such amount from any payment to be made to the Contractor hereunder, and in the event of a deficiency. Contractor shall pay the deficiency to the Owner promptly upon demand. 17.3 Owner hereby agrees that if Contractor shall substantially complete the Work to the extent provided in Paragraph 8.1.4 hereof prior to the Substantial Completion Date, and shall fully complete the Work (subject only to minor punch list items, primarily of a cosmetic nature) within fourteen (14) days after the Work is substantially completed as aforesaid, and provided that Contractor has otherwise fully and faithfully performed and discharged all of its obligations and responsibilities under this Agreement, then Owner shall pay to Contractor, in addition to all other sums payable by Owner to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement; an amount equal to One Thousand (51,000) Dollars for each calendar day by which the date on which the Work is so substantially completed precedes the Substantial Completion Date. Such amount shall be paid by Owner to Contractor at the same time as, and subject to the same conditions pursuant to which, the Final Payment is made. GC Construction Contract Page 16 18.1 Unless otherwise provided herein, all notices, consents or other communications given under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed given if sent by registered or certified mall, retum receipt requested, postage paid, as follows: 1. If to Owner, addressed: (a) TOYS "R" US 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 - One copy to the attention of: Senior Vice President - Real Estate - with duplicate copy, under separate cover, to the attention of: Vice President - Architecture and Construction - with a copy to Owner's Representative 2. If to Architect, addressed: 3. If to Contractor, addressed: 4. If to Owner's Representative, to the address set forth in Paragraph 3.3.1 (b) hereof, with a copy to Owner (if Owner's Representative's address is not the address herein above set forth for Owner) or to such other persons or addresses as the party to be given such notice may designate by notice to the other party. GC Construction Contract ARTICLE 18 NOTICES ARTICLE 19 OVERTIME 19.1 Contractor shall omit any markup for overhead and profit for any overtime labor (premium time only) for which Contractor is compensated. ARTICLE 20 TERMINATION 20.1 TERMINATION BY CONTRACTOR 20.1.1 If the Work is stopped for period of thirty (30) consecutive days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of Contractor or Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with Contractor or a Subcontractor, or if the Work should be stopped for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days by Contractor because Owner's Representative has not issued a Certificate for Payment as provided in Section 11.6 or because Owner has not made payment thereon as provided in Section 11.6, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) additional days' written notice to Owner terminate this Agreement and recover from Owner payment for all Work executed and for any proven loss sustained upon any materials, equipment, tools, con .truction equipment and machinery. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no such termination shall occur if, within said seven (7) days, either Owner's Representative issues the Certificate for Payment or Owner makes the payment. 20.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER 20.2.1 If a petition under any federal bankruptcy law or an action under any insolvency taw or statute is flied by or against Contractor and not dismissed within ten (10) days after such filing, or if Contractor makes a general assignment for the . benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, or if he persistently or reportedly refuses or falls, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials, or if he fails to make prompt payment to Subcontractor or for materials or labor, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, or is otherwise in violation of any provision of the Contract Documents, then Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy he may have and after giving Contractor and his surety, if any, seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of Contractor and take possession of the Site and of all materials thereon owned by Contractor, and thereafter Owner may finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any payment then or thereafter due under this Agreement. 20.2.2 Ii, after termination of this Agreement by Owner (other than a termination pursuant to Paragraph 20.2.3), the cost to Owner of completing the Work, including compensation for Architect's additional services, if any, made necessary thereby, exceeds the Project Cost, Contractor shall pay such excess to Owner promptly on demand. This obligation for payment shall survive the termination of this Agreement. 20.2.3 Without limiting the generality of Paragraph 20.2.1, if Contractor fails to deliver to Owner, at the time or times required by this Agreement, any items or information required to be delivered prior to the commencement of the Work (including, without limitation, the name and qualifications of his superintendent and the project manager, the proposed progress schedule and manpower chart, the name of his Subcontractors and the schedule of values for the portions of the Work), Owner may, at any time until the commencement of the Work In accordance with Paragraph 8.11, or seven (7) days after all of such items or information have been submitted, whichever occurs first, terminate this Agreement by giving Contractor written notice to such effect. In the event of the giving of such notice, this Agreement shall be deemed terminated and neither party shall have any further rights, obligations or liability hereunder. Page 17 • By: , < < .Eric Swartwood Vice President, Architecture and Construction CONTRACTOR: ARTICLE 21 gNTIRE AOREEMENT 21.1: This Agreement represents the entire agreement between • the parties hereto and supersedes all prior • negotiations, representations, or agreements, efther written or oral: This Agreement may be amended or modified only in writing, or as otherwise Specifically provided herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Agreement has been executed as of the day and year first above written. OWNER: TOYS "R" US Date: Title: GC Construction Contract EXHIBIT'A : DIVISION 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 -010 TEMP. FACILITIES i 1.020 TEMP. UTILITIES i 1-030 SUPERVISION i 1-040 ADMINISTRATIVE $ 1-050 SURVEYING $ 1.060 CLEAN UP 1-070 SECURITY $ 1-060 MISCELLANEOUS i Total General Conditions DIVISION 2 $JIJIMPROVEMENJS 2 -010 DEMOLITION i 2-020 SITE CLEARING/GRADING $ 2-030 UTILITIES i 2-040 BUILDING EXCAVATING AND BACKFILL $ 2-050 BITUMINOUS PAVING 2-060 LANDSCAPING i 2 -070 MISCELLANEOUS i 2-060 PILE INSTALLATION $ 2-090 SITE CONCRETE i Total Site Improvements i DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 3-010 CONCRETE $ 3-020 REINFORCED RODS AND MESH S Total Concrete $ DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 4-010 MASONRY Total Masonry i GC Construction Contract S DIVISION 5 - STEED 5-010 STRUCTURAL STEEL S 5 -020 MISC. STEEL 3 5-030 STEEL ERECTION i Total Steel $ pIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY 6-010 CARPENTRY i Total Carpentry $ Pape 19 EXHIBIT A DIVISION 7 - ROOFING AND MOISTURE CONTROL 7 -010 ROOFING S 7-020 FLASHING $ 7 -030 METAL ROOFING AND SIDING $ 7-040 MOISTURE CONTROL S 7-050 CAULKING $ Total Rooting and Moisture Control DIVISION 8 - DOORS. WINDOWS, GLASS 8-010 HIM DOORS S 8-020 GLASS AND GLAZING $ 8-030 FINISH HARDWARE $ Total Doors, Windows, Glass i DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 9-010 PAINTING S 9-020 CERAMIC TILE $ 9-030 VCT/RESIUENT $ 9-040 ACOUSTICAL CEILING S 9-050 DRYWALL S 9-060 EIFS/DRYVIT S Total Finishes : DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 10-010 PARTITIONS $ 10-020 TOILET ACCESSORIES $ 10-030 MISC. ITEMS S 10-040 OSI INSTALLATION $ Total Specialties DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL 15-010 HVAC S 15-020 SPRINKLERS 15-030 PLUMBING $ Total Mechanical DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL. 16-010 ELECTRICAL (INSIDE 5 FT.) S 16 -020 ELECTRICAL (OUTSIDE 5 FT.) $ Total Electrical GC Construction Contract $ $ $ $ Page 20 GC Construction Contract EXHIBIT: A CONTRACTOR SUBTOTAL 20-999 OVERHEAD AND PROFIT $ 50-010 DEDUCTIONS S TOTAL DEDUCTIONS.. . 60-010 ALTERNATES i TOTAL ALTERNATES • '$' GRAND TOTAL _ Bulk Bed Rock Removal - by blasting, including removal of materiels from site: Duck Rock Removal - by ripping w/D-8 Cat, w/hhydralic ripper, including removal of material from site: Trench Rock Removal - up to 5'-0" deep by 3'-0" wide (as required for utility Nnes) by jack hammer. Materials to be removed from site: Trench Rock Removal - up to 5'-0" deep by 7-0" wide (as required for utility lines ) by ripping w235 Caterpillar. Materials removed from site: Trench Bed Rock Removal - up to 5-0" deep by 3'-0" wide (as required for utility lines) by blasting and machine. Materials removed from site: • Trench Bad Rock Removal - up to 10'-0" deep by 3'-0" wide (as required for utility lines) by ripping w/235 Caterpillar. Materials removed from site: Trench Bed Rock Removal - up to 10'-0" deep by 3'-0" wide (as required for utility lines) by blasting and machine. Materials removed from site: Trench Earth Excavation - by Case 580, to 8'-0" deep, including removal of material from site by machine as necessary: Mass Earth Excavation - by D -8 Cat or pans, including removal of material from site: Control Fill - as measured compacted in- placed and including placement and compaction as per specs: • Using On -site materials • Using Imported Materials Granular Fill - 3/4" crushed stone from off -site In place and tamped: GC Construction Contract EXHIBIT B Unit Pricing UNIT OF MEASURES NATURE OF WORK Reinforced Concrete - additional depth of column piers, including forms and rebore (excavation excluded): C.Y. Reinforced Concrete - additional depth of foundation walls, including forms and rebus (excavation excluded): C.Y. Concrete Sidewalk • 4" thick, including mesh reinforcing: C.Y. Paring-$y - as per specificatkms: • Heavy Section • Light Section Paving Bituminous Surfage_Course Overlay - as per specifications: S.Y. Paving Concrete Surface - as per specifications: S.Y. Concrete Curbing - 4 000 psi, in place (excavation and stone base excluded): L.F. Pisoosition of Excess Excavated Material • Bulk • Trench S.F. Pile Installation: GC Construction Contract EXHIBIT B Unit Pricing UNIT OF MEASURES S.Y. S.Y. C.Y. C.Y. L.F. Page 2 of 2 UNIT PRICE Page 23 EXHIBIT C Material Quantity Estimates DESCRIPTION QUANTITY Excavation Cut and reuse on -site Cut and haul off-site Import and place controlled fill Pavement Subgrade Pavement Bituminous Surface Pavement Concrete Surface Concret Reinforced Rods Masonry Structural Steel Joists and Joist Girders Miscellaneous Steel: Miscellaneous Railings Stairs Lumber Roofing VCT Ceramic Tile Gypsum Board Windows, Doors Pile Installation PROJECT: TOYS "R" US, INC, GC Construction Contract Page 1 of 1 (Title) (Date) (Sign Name) (Name of Contractor) GC Construction Contract COST COMPLETED BY: EXHIBIT D General Contractors Cost Collection Sheets 1) Landscaping/Shubbery/Fences 2) Storm Drainage/Off-site 3) Sanitary Swam/Lateral/On-site 4) Storm Drainaget/MahVOn•site 5) Storm Dralnaga/Uiteral/On-site 6) Sanitary Sewage/Main/On-site 7) Water UnestMain/On-ske $ 8) Primary Pow/On•site $ 9) Telephone Equipment 10) Irrigation Systern/Canals/Watetways 11) Approachn/Apron/Sidewalks $ 12) Parking Lots/Roads/Railroads (including Blacktop) 13) Fence/Exterior 14) Wads/Docks/Bridges $ (X) Sub Total (Y) All Other Costs TOTAL (X) (Y) (MUST EQUAL TOTAL CONTRACT PRICES) Page 1 of 1 C DIVISION 1* GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION 1. REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS 1.1 Throughout the drawings and specifications, addenda and other Contract Documents, the term "Owner" shall mean 'Toys "R" Us". 1.2 Throughout the plans, specifications, addenda, and other Contract Documents, the term "Contractors" shall be taken to mean the Contractor or his Subcontractors. 1.3 In the plans, specifications, addenda, and other Contract Documents, the abbreviation CONTR is used. CONTR shall be taken to mean the Contractor. 1.4 The term "Owner's Representative" shall be taken to mean the person or persons authorized by the Owner to act in his behalf. 1.5 The words "plans" and "drawings" shall be taken to have the same meaning, unless in context specifically referendng plan view or views. 1.6 The drawings and specifications are complementary each to the other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. However, the drawings and specifications shall be considered inseparable documents and each Contractor shall consider both instruments in order to perform the work in accordance with their combined intent. 1.7 References to the "Project Manager" in the specifications or on the drawings shall be taken to mean an authorized professional representative of the Owner. 1.8 In case of discrepancies in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall first consult with the Owner and Project Manager for clarifications, revisions, or further action as may be required. Any discrepancy which results in any claim for additional time or money must be addressed to the Owner in writing. 2. PROPOSALS - N.A. te- Sid -- setter- TOYS "R" U8, INC. any- bid -reeei eet-te gaelifieetiondete- daeamonts. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington *SECTION 1A -1 3.1 This is a 'Time is of the Essence" project. Construction time shall not exceed 120 days, or the time period set by the owner's Representative at the time of bidding. Bidders are encouraged to submit, with their proposals, reduced time schedules. 3.2 Due to the nature of the Owner's retail market this project must be completed in accordance with the agreed construction schedule. Sitework must be so scheduled as to have asphaltb base course installed as early as possible in the job schedule. 3.3 Contractors shall carefully schedule and coordinate wak so as to provide the maximum cooperation and the minimum of interference with the work of others. Scheduling shall be approved by the Owner. 3.4 Contractor shall submit prior to the start of the work a schedule showing the various phases and indicating the starting and completion dates of all phases of the contract work. 3.5 After the work is commenced, the Contractor shall conduct weekly jobsite meetings with all major subcontractors and shall advise the Project Manager in writing with a copy to the Owner as to the then current status of the schedule, and indicating whether or not the Contractor contemplates, as of that time, any future deviation from the schedule. Such reports and meeting minutes shall include a statement indicating that the report is based on the then current information furnished by all subcontractors and material suppliers and shall be issued promptly after the weekly meeting. 3.6 Progress photos shall be taken biweekly and forwarded to the Owner. Photos should be selected to accurately depict job status (elevations, sitework, interior, etc.) and shall be identified as to the job location and date on the rear of the photo. Said photographs are no to be of professional quality but may be snap shots taken by the job superintendent. 3.7 No extension of time beyond date stipulated In proposal will be allowed on account of inclement weather or other causes which could have been avoided by exercise of reasonable foresight on contractor's part. (Site development shall be so scheduled to provide an impervious surface as early as practical.) 3.8 Any problems developing during the course of the job that would affect the schedule shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's Representative immediately. 4. DEVELOPMENT (For Contractor Information) 4.1 Consultants: Soils - Surveyor - Site Engineer - Others - 5. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENT 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION *SECTION 1A -2 5.2 All inquiries regarding the meaning of drawings, specifications, and /or other Contract Documents shall be addressed to: PROJECT MANAGER: Rudy L. Baker URS Greiner, Inc. 3950 Sparks Drive SE Grand Rapids, Michigan 49546 Phone: 616/285 -3489 FAX: 616/285 -3542 PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 5.3. BIDDERS NOTE 5.3.1 INQUIRIES SHALL BE LIMITED TO CALLS FROM PRE - QUALIFIED CONTRACTORS BIDDING THIS PROJECT. SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL MAKE CONTACTS ONLY THROUGH ONE OF THESE CONTRACTORS. 5.3.2 BIDDERS SHALL QI RELY ON VERBAL REPLIES. SHOULD CLARIFICATIONS OR REVISIONS BE REQUIRED, THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS WILL BE MODIFIED BY WRITTEN ADDENDUM DISTRIBUTED TO ALL BIDDING CONTRACTORS. 5.3.3 NQ PRE - APPROVALS WILL BE GIVEN FOR SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, OR METHODS. REFER TO SEPARATE PARAGRAPH THIS SECTION FOR SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE. 5.3.4 BIDDERS ARE HEREBY INSTRUCTED TO QUALIFY THEIR RESPECTIVE BIDS IN WRITING FOR ALL CONDITIONS NOT CLARIFIED TO THEIR SATISFACTION BY THE BIDDING DOCUMENTS. ANY SUCH QUALIFICATIONS MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. 5.3.5 THE OWNER HAS A COMMITMENT TO THE MINORITY COMMUNITY. ONE ASPECT OF THAT COMMITMENT IS TO MAKE EVERY EFFORT TO ENSURE THAT A FAIR PORTION OF MONIES EXPENDED FOR CAPITAL IMPROVEMENTS BE DISTRIBUTED TO MINORITY CONTRACTORS. BIDDERS' ASSISTANCE IN HELPING MEET THAT COMMITMENT IS REQUESTED. EACH BIDDER SHALL SUBMIT AT THE TIME OF BID THE NAME(S), TRADE(S), AND DOLLAR AMOUNT(S) THAT WILL BE AWARDED TO MINORITY CONTRACTORS IF THE Contractor IS THE SELECTED BIDDER. EVERY SUCH LISTED MINORITY CONTRACTOR SHALL BE CERTIFIED AS A BONAFIDE MINORITY OWNED AND MANAGED FIRM. INFORMATION RELATIVE TO CERTIFIED MINORITY CONTRACTORS MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF MINORITY CONTRACTORS 6. SITE INSPECTION 6.1 Each bidder shall visit the project site prior to the preparation of his bid to investigate and determine all conditions on and near the site which could affect the execution of the work. Any Contractor's failure to fully acquaint himself with existing conditions under which the work is to be performed will not be justification for additional compensation. 6.2 The location of the underground utilities, such as sewers, electrical power, water piping, conduits, eta, indicated on the drawings is as exact as can be determined from available Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington information but its accuracy or completeness cannot be guaranteed. Exact location of these utilities shall be verified by the Contractor prior to starting work. Contractor shall exercise special care when excavathg at or near the general location of underground utilities for the safety of workers, as well as for protection of the utility services. 6.3 Any connections to or relocation of any existing utility Tine requiring temporary discontinuation of utilities which are in active use shall be scheduled and coordinated with the utility companies and /or the representatives of the Owner. 6II premium time required for the installation of any such connections and /or relocations shall be included in Contractor's bid. In no case shall the utilities be left disconnected at the end of a working day or weekend unless authorized by representatives of the utilities and the Owner. Any existing utilities damaged due to the operation of any Contractor shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and utility company or agency, by the Contractor causing the damage, at no increase in the contract cost. 7. INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION 7.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that ALL surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. 7.2 Contractor shall advise Owner's Representative immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and Contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 8. WORK OF THE CONTRACTOR 8.1 Contractor shall furnish all labor and material required to perform and complete all work as shown and described in the Contract Documents, including all work indicated or specified in addenda, bulletins, accepted alternates or amendments. 8.2 The scope of work shall include all work noted in the plans or these specifications with the following clarifications: 8.2.1 Verification of the site conditions is the responsibility of the Contractor and no extra (time or money) shall be approved due to this contractor's failure to review conditions under which the work will be performed unless Identified specifically by written exception as a part of his proposal. 8.2.2 The Contract Documents are intended to describe a total and completed facility. The specifications describe the various items of work, character of materials and quality of workmanship. Any appurtenances, parts, finish work, etc., essential to the entire completion of the work, though not specifically shown or specified shall be covered by the contract sum. 8.2.3 The Contractor will be required to furnish and install all temporary piping, power, electric wiring, lighting, etc., that is necessary to perform his work and shall remove same upon completion of the work. Point of connection, route and method of extension must meet the approval of the Owner's Representative and the utility. 8.2.4 Contractor shall repair and continuously maintain all existing pavements in a condition passable by automobile traffic. Temporary repairs shall be made at the end of each working day as a minimum. At the completion of construction, any and all existing pavements damaged shall be restored to their original condition (paving type, thickness, finish, striping, base and subbase) as part of the 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* base bid work at no additional cost to Owner. 8.2.5 The Contractor is required to track the man - hours, by trade, expended on the project, and is required to chart this information in the format provided by the owner. These charts shall be maintained on a daily basis and shall be posted in the Contractor's Project Field Office Trailer. 8.3 Project Field Office Trailer: Contractor is responsible, as part of the contract, for providing a separate trailer to serve as the project field office. The trailer is to be located on site as close to the construction area as practical. Minimum required trailer specifications to include: 8.3.1 Contractor to provide a 40' to 50' - 3 compartment construction office trailer that shall include at each end, A) an office for the TRU CPM and B) an office for the GC, with a middle conference area. Trailer shall have 2 exterior doors with stairs at each. The trailer shall be blocked and leveled and be professional in appearance. Trailer to have permanent tires, glazed windows, and lockable doors. 8.3.2 The trailer shall be heated and cooled, must be provided with appropriate utilities (telephone, power, etc.) and wired for convenience outlets. 8.3.3 Office furniture: TRU Office - Shall be equipped at a minimum with a desk, plan table, two (2) chairs, overhead lighting and a tough tone speaker phone with a dedicated line. GC Office - Shall at a minimum include furnishings required by GC: One (1) Fax with a dedicated phone line, two (2) line speaker phone with phone line roll over feature, answering machine and photo copy machine. Conference Area - Shall at a minimum include a conference table with seating for 20 people, drinking water dispenser, overhead lighting, plan table, and phone service with a touch tone speaker phone. 8.3.4 Minimum of two outside phone lines with touchtone phones (no rotary dial). One private line to be accessible to superintendent, consultant, etc. The other line to be used for subcontractor access. The phones shall be equipped with an exterior audible ringer. 8.3.5 Phone beeper system for supervisor and answering machine for taking calls when no one is available. 8.3.6 All copies of plans and specifications wth latest up -to -date revised drawings, addenda and change orders in sequence for reference. Shop drawings to be kept on rack sets. 8.3.7 A complete set of as -built drawings, current with project. 8.3.8 A complete set of job documents including all field photos, tests, building permit set, copy of building permit, approval and inspection log, etc. 8.3.9 Bulletin board with subcontractor list, latest construction schedule, calendar, all key phone numbers and contacts, posted for public viewing. 8.3.10 All OSHA safety requirements including but not limited to hardhats, first aid kit and fire extinguisher. 8.3.11 Potable water dispenser with cups and extra boots for muddy conditions should also be available in the trailer. 8.3.12 Provide one operable fax machine and one (1) operable photocopy machine. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION *SECTION 1A -3 8.3.13 This Contractor is responsible for all other provisions that may be dictated by abnormal construction circumstances, local, state and federal requirements, unique site conditions, climate or topography, special construction materials or techniques and other conditions which may effect the safety, efficiency or completeness of the project. 8.4 Owners hiring Trailer: 30 Days prior to fixture date the Contractor shall provide a 30' - 40' (2) compartment hiring trailer that shall include an office and conference room area. This trailer shall be on site for 60 days. 8.4.1 Trailer shall be blocked and leveled. Trailer to have permanent tires, glazed windows, lockable door, steps (if required), trailer skirt, etc. and must be in professional appearing condition. 8.4.2 The trailer shall be heated and cooled, must be provided with appropriate utilities (telephone, power, etc.) and wired for convenience outlets. 8.4.3 Office furniture: Office Area - shall be equipped with a desk, table, three (3) chairs, overhead lighting, and a 2 -line touch tone speaker phone and service roll over feature. Conference Area - shall be equipped with a conference table and seating for ten (10) people. 8.4.4 Two outside phone lines with touchtone phones (no rotary dial). 8.4.5 A complete set of as -built drawings, current with project. 8.4.6 All OSHA safety requirements including but not limited to hardhats, first aid kit and fire extinguisher. 8.4.8 Potable water dispenser with cups. 8.4.9 This Contractor is responsible for all other provisions that may be dictated by abnormal construction circumstances, local, state and federal requirements, unique site conditions, climate or topography, special construction materials or techniques and other conditions which may effect the safety, efficiency or completeness of the project. 8.5 The Contractor shall not assign any monies due or to become due to him under the Contract Documents without prior consent of the Owner, nor shall either party to the contract assign the contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other. 8.6 The base bid shall be a complete and total package but to avoid price duplications shall exclude those Items for which alternates are requested. Each alternate price shall be a total including all charges associated with adding the said item to the scope of work such as general conditions, overhead and profit. Reference Section 1A, Paragraph 11. 9. PAYMENTS 9.1 Within two weeks after award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit a breakdown of the costs of the work including those of all the vendors and subcontractors. 9.2 The Contractor shall furnish the initial breakdown on A.I.A. Form G702 with the complete breakdown of the contract price so arranged and iternlzed as to meet the aooroval of the Protect Manager. 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION 'SECTION 1A-4 9.3 All subsequent applications for payment will be submitted on A.I.A. Form G702 or a reasonable facsimile thereto, and shall be accompanied by Certificate A.I.A. Form G703. 9.3.1 Column B, Description of Work, on Form G703 shall be listed by Sub - contract and spec division and shall include material supplier items. 9.3.2 Column C, Schedule Value, on Form G703 shall be the actual sub- contract value and not the estimated value for the corresponding line item of work. 9.4 Submit four (4) embossed, notarized copies of applications with original signatures on each. 9.5 Contractor shall submit with the first application for payment a copy of the proposed lien release form for approval by the Protect Manager. Contractor shall also submit along with this payment application a copy of the State Lien Law regulations. Lien release forms shall comply with State Lien Law regulations and shall include the following items: 9.5.1 Date of release and type (partial or final) of release. 9.5.2 Type of work or description of material for this release. 9.5.3 Project name and address including the County and State. 9.5.4 Name of the Owner for whom the lien waiver is releasing all claims. 9.5.5 Total amount of partial lien waiver. 9.5.6 Total amount of partial Tien releases to date for the work described. 9.5.7 Total contract amount. 9.5.8 Total amount of the lien waiver that pertains to Change Orders. indicate the corresponding Change Order number(s) for which work was performed. 9.5.9 Total amount of releases to date for Change Orders and the Corresponding Change Order Numbers. 9.5.10 State Ilen law verbiage. 9.5.11 Notarized with an embossed seal. 9.5.12 Signature and name of the Contractor or subcontractor and /or material supplier company. 9.6 Payment applications shall be accompanied by partial Tien waivers (submitted in duplicate) for the application being submitted. These partial lien waivers shall equal the total dollar amount for each line item listed under "Description of Work, Column B, Form 0703 ", for which the Contractor is seeking payment. 9.7 Payment applications will not be processed until all such partial and /or final lien waivers have been submitted to the Owner's Representative. Partial and final Ilen waivers shall be accompanied by an itemized index of waivers which covers the application for which payment is being made. 9.8 The Owner shall pay the Contractor between the first and fifteenth of each month for work performed the preceding month, in accordance with Plans and Specifications, plus any approved Change Orders, If pay requests and lien waivers are in compliance with contract and submitted as stipulated. 9.9 Payments to be made as follows: 9.9.1 The Contractor shall prepare a statement each month of all work performed the preceding month including all acceptable materials suitably stored on the site at that time. 9.9.2 When the statement is approved, the Owner will pay ninety percent (90 %) of the amount due. 9.9.3 Release of retained funds shall be contingent upon Contractor's execution of Exhibits "B" and "C" and receipt of all tax forms, guarantees, warranties, As -Built Drawings, and service /operating manuals. Release of retained funds will also not be approved until all final lien waivers have been submitted and the time period for which a lien can be filed against the project from the date of substantial com- pletion, as described by State Law, has lapsed. 9.9.4 Miscellaneous Provisions: Contractors and material suppliers shall not be entitled to service charges or interest on any monies due and not paid and on any monies due as a result of any claim, dispute or other matter in ques- tion. 9.9.5 All Change Order cost breakdowns shall be notarized and shall be included on the Application for Payment Form G702 and G703. 10. INSURANCE 10.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain during the life of the contract, insurance with insurers satisfactory to the Owner and with not less than a B+ rating as established by "Best Insurance Rating." Coverages noted below shall be provided. Any Contractor not having these limits shall so state in his proposal, otherwise it will be assumed the noted coverages are to be provided. 10.1.1 Workers Compensation and Employer's Liability - Workers Compensation as required by statute and, if such exposures exist, Contractor's liability under the Federal Longshoremen and Harbor Workers Act. Employer's liability shall be for a minimum limit of $100,000. In case any work is sublet, each Contractor shall require any and all of his subcontractors similarly to provide such coverages for all the latter's employees employed in connection with the work, unless such employees are covered by the protection of the Contractor. Provide similar coverage for any class of employees engaged in work at the site, not protected under the applicable workers' compensation statute. 10.1.2 Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, Including contractual liability coverage, in an amount not less than $1,000,000.00 for personal and bodily injury to all persons in any one occurrence and for damage to property. 10.1.3 Motor Vehicle Liability Coverage, with coverage limits not less than the amounts required by paragraph 10.1.2 above. 10.1.4 Certificates of insurance, satisfactory to Owner and naming Owner as an additional insured, shall be delivered to Owner prior to the commencement of work, and said certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled without thirty (30) days' prior written notice to Owner. All Insurance required to be carried by Contractor pursuant hereto shall be taken out with insurance companies approved by Owner In advance. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION `SECTION 1A -5 10.1.5 Builder's Risk Insurance - The Owner shall maintain a policy for the duration of the project upon all structures and upon all materials in or adjacent thereto which are to be made a part of the insured structure to the insurable value thereof less a deductible amount of $100,000.00 (Owner paid) for each occurrence. This coverage will not include Contractor's and subcontractor's equipment, and may not necessarily be all inclusive as to Contractor's desired protection. 11. SPECIFIED MANUFACTURERS. SUBSTITUTIONS. AND ALTERNATES 11.1 The following provisions shall govem the bidding of all work. The provisions specified below shall not relieve the Contractor from meeting other requirements set forth elsewhere in the Bidding or Contract Documents. 11.2 When a brand name is not specified: 11.2.1 Product used shall meet the specified standard, such as ASTM, etc., if specified, and shall be of the appropriate design, configuration, type, and finish as required to meet the requirements of the intended service. 11.3 When two (2) or more brand names are specified without further qualifying stipulations: 11.3.1 In all cases, the first -named brand or manufacturer's equipment has been used for the basic design and to determine the space requirements. 11.3.2 Any one of the specified brands or manufacturer's products equivalent to the first -named may be used for the base bid price. 11.3.3 Should other than the first -named brand be used in preparation of the bid, the Contractor shall be responsible to determine and assure that the product or equipment being bid will fit and function in the space allocated. Submission of shop drawings to the Contractor shall be construed as evidence that the Subcontractor has made this determination and that the equipment will fit and function in the allocated space. 11.3.4 In at cases, the product used shall meet the requirements of the intended service, including specified optional accessories, performance, and basic features. Should one of the named manufacturers offer a range of quality for a particular item, the Contractor shall provide the selection of equal or greater quality compared with the first -named brand in the specifications. All equality determinations rest with the Project Manager, and his decisions shall be final. 11.4 When one (1) brand name only is specified without further qualifying stipulations: 11.4.1 Contractor's base bid price shall be based on the product specified. 11.4.2 The Contractors are invited and encouraged to propose, as Substitutions, the products or equipment of other manufacturers potentially suitable for the intended services and /or applications. See paragraph below regarding Substitutions for further requirements. 11.5 Substitutions 11.5.1 Any material, product, or equipment (other than specified materials, brands, or manufacturers) proposed by the Contractor shall be considered a Substitution. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 11.5.2 Except as otherwise specified herein below, in order to qualify for review by the Project Manager for a decision on approval, a Substitution shall be submitted at the time of bidding. The proposed Substitution shall be clearly identified and shall include the respective add or deduct to the contract base bid amount as defined above. The Contractor shall submit complete data (including samples, if requested) regarding the Substitution to the Project Manager for review and decision. 11.6 Alternates /Unit Prices 11.6.1 When requested in the specifications or on the drawings, Contractor shall include the appropriate add or deduct to the contract amount for the Altemate as specified. The add or deduct shall included all related charges including general conditions, overhead and profit. 11.6.2 Requested Alternates shall be numbered and shall be clearly identified in each Contractor's bid. 11.6.3 Each bidder is encouraged to submit any voluntary alternates or unit prices he feels appropriate. 11.7 Associated Costs and Delays 11.7.1 All additional costs associated with the use of any product, material, or equipment (other than the first -named brand, a specified material, or a requested Alternate) shall be the responsibility of the Contractor making the Substitution or electing to use other than the first -named brand. 11.7.2 For example, if a Contractor elects to use the third -named brand in the specifications covering a particular item of equipment, and the choice of that brand necessitates an increase in electrical feeder size, additional structural support, access panels, or any other changes whatsoever in this work and /or the work of others, the Contractor shall include in his bid the cost of all such changes. 11.7.3 The approval of a Substitution and /or the discovery of associated costs during construction shall not relieve the Contractor from paying for changes in his work and /or the work of others. 11.7.4 To avoid the associated costs as described above due to an untimely discovery of necessary changes, the Contractor may be permitted to revert to the use of the specified product, material, or equipment provided a delay in the project does not result. The Project Manager shall first be consulted and his decision regarding the interpretation of "delay" shall be final. 11.7.5 It shall be further understood that the use of any approved Substitution or other than the first-named brand in the specifications shall involve no extension of the project completion date and /or shall not cause delays In the work of other Contractors unless otherwise stipulated in writing with the respective Contractor's bid and/or proposal for Substitution. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS AFTER CONTRACT AWARD 12.1 In the event the Contractor (or his subcontractors) proposes substitutions to the Project Manager or to the Owner after the Contract has been awarded, the Project Manager will record all time used by him, his employees, and/or his consultants In the evaluation of each such proposed substitution. 12.2 Regardless of whether or not the Project Manager approves 05/05/98 • . DIVISION 1* GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION *SECTION 1A-6 a proposed substitution, the Project Manager shall be reimbursed at the rate of two and one -half (2.5) times the direct cost for all time spent by the Project Manager and /or his consultants in evaluating each proposed substitution. A Change Order will be issued to reduce the Construction Contract by an amount equal to the fees charged by the Project Manager for reviewing one or more proposed substitutions. The Project Manager will be reimbursed by the Owner In accordance with the Change Order amounts. 13. MODEL NUMBERS AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS 13.1 References used throughout the specifications are made to manufacturer's names and model numbers in conjunction vAt a written specification description of the product. In the event any specified model number has been superseded and /or been rendered out of date by the manufacturer's product line revisions, or in the event any specified model number identifies a product which is not identical with the specified written description in all respects, the Contractor shall notify the Project Manager for clarification and directions prior to ordering and /or purchasing the product in question. Contractor's failure to consider the combined intent of model numbers and specified product descriptions shall not be justification for additional payments. 14. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTAL DATA 14.1 After award of the Contract, the Contractor and each sub-contractor shall promptly prepare and submit (wthin not more than 14 calendar days after contract award) to the Owner's APM, the Owner's CPM and the Architectural Consultant complete lists of all products and equipment proposed for use in constructing this project. 14.1.1 The required lists shall include the equipment mark noted on the drawings (if applicable), the manufacturer's name and model number, and /or a brief description of the product, equipment, or material. 14.1.2 The lists shall clearly identify any and all deviations from the drawings and specifications, if applicable. 14.1.3 If use of the first -named brand in the specifications is proposed by the Contractor or required by the Contract Documents, the required lists may include the specification page and paragraph reference to augment or replace the product description. 14.1.4 Any and all Substitutions accepted at the time the Contract was signed and appropriately Identified in the Contract shall be identified on the lists as "Accented Substitutes ", 14.1.5 For construction based on a "Performance Specification" such lawn irrigation systems, the lists shall include a line item for each product plus separate line items for hydraulic calculations and detailed shop drawings. 14.1.6 Structural systems shall be entered on the lists by categories or types of shop drawngs required to properly fabricate, install, and erect the systems. 14.2 Each list shall be accompanied by a notarized certification signed by the Contractor and subcontractor (as applicable) attesting to the fact that the products, equipment, and materials will be furnished in accordance with the Contract Documents the list, including all specified options, features, characteristics, and performance. The Contractor's certification shall be construed and interpreted to mean that the Contract Documents are clearly and fully understood and that corrections to non - complying work will be made promptly without delaying the protect completion schedule and without additional costs to the Owner, unless Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington otherwise qualified or stipulated. 14.3 Upon receipt of the required list of products, materials, and equipment. The Project Manager will review same and exercise the option to request selected shop drawings and /or submittals for review. 14.3.1 The Project Manager will return a copy of each required list to the Contractor along with comments and a notification of shop drawings and submittals requested for review. 14.3.2 Upon return receipt of the required lists, Contractor shall promptly submit those shop drawings /submittals requested by the Project Manager. 14.3.3 The Contractor should anticipate that selected shop drawings /submittals will be requested. The following list represents the minimum required submissions. The Contractor will verify all submittal requirements with the project specification and construction documents. 14.3.3.1 Selected reinforcing and structural steel shop drawings. 14.3.3.2 Block and other exterior material samples. 14.33.3 Sprinkler shop drawings. 14.3.3.4 Lawn irrigation system (if applicable). 14.3.3.5 Automatic door and storefront shop drawings. 14.3.3.6 Roofing system submittals and specialty roof top accessories (skylights, clerestories, etc.). 14.3.3.7 Hollow metal, hardware, and specialty submittals. 14.3.3.8 Submittals by contractor indicating manufacturers to be used for conduit, fittings, wire, cable, outlet and switch boxes, wiring connectors, junction boxes, pull boxes, wireways, wiring devices and cover plates. 14.4 Except for those shop drawings and /or submittals specifically requested, by the Project Manager, the Project Manager will not review shop drawings. submittals. or product data. 14.4.1 Contractor's request for clarifications and /or interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be made in writing on an individual and specific basis. All such requests shall first be reviewed by the Contractor. 14.4.2 In the event specific approvals are required by the manufacturer of a product, material, or fabrication, the Contractor (and his subcontractors) shall provide said "approval" of the shop drawings or submittals as required to release for fabrication and /or shipment on a timely basis. The Contractor and subcontractors shall advise suppliers, vendors, distributors, and manufacturer's of the terms stated in this paragraph regarding release or "approval" for manufacturing, fabrication, and/or shipment to insure timely delivery of respective products, materials, equipment, and fabrications. 14.4.3 Submittals received by the Project Manager outside the scope of the above guidelines will be returned to the Contractor without review or comment. 14.5 The above stated procedures and policies regarding shop drawings and submittals are intended to simplify and expedite the construction process and emphasize the Contractor's role and responsibility for coordinating the work of all trades in a proper and timely manner consistent with 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION *SECTION 1A -7 the Contract Documents. In keeping with this intent and concept, review comments received by the Contractor (and Subcontractors) from the Project Manager on selected and requested shop drawings and /or submittals shall not be Interpreted or construed as relieving the Contractor (or his subcontractors) from complying with the requirements set forth in the Contract Documents. 14.6 For all shop drawings, or product data, including those requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall review same thoroughly and carefully, clearly marking and /or noting all discrepancies and deviations from the Contract Documents, and affixing an appropriate review stamp, signed and dated, Contractor's review (and submit- tal if requested) shall constitute a representation by the Contractor that he has verified compliance with the Contract Documents; and that he has determined and /or verified that field measurements, coordination, materials, and requirements relating to the work and information contained therein are consistent with the project criteria and Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible to distribute all shop drawings and product data to the appropriate subcontractor, as applicable, on a timely basis after his review. 14.7 At the completion of the project and prior to or in conjunction with the Contractor's request for final payment, one (1) copy of all shop drawings and similar data shall be furnished to both the Owner and the Project Manager as part of the "As- Built" project records, including revisions and notations to truly reflect as -built conditions. 14.8 Requested shop drawings and submittal data shall be mailed with a transmittal letter or form prepared by the Contractor which shall include the number of copies and identification of each item submitted. The transmittal shall g.gt be used as the only source for identifying deviations, if any, from the Contract Documents. 14.9 Requested shop drawings for inter - related equipment must be submitted at one time, since the performance of one piece of equipment must be matched in performance by all other equipment of the overall system. 15. EXPEDITING PRODUCT DELIVERIES 15.1 Contractor shall be responsible for ordering and purchasing products, equipment, and materials on a prompt and timely basis to avoid delays in construction due to deliveries. 15.2 Contractor shall submit the lists of products, equipment, and materials within not more than 14 calendar days after award of contract. 15.3 Orders shall be placed with suppliers immediately upon return receipt of the above referenced "lists" from the Project Manager and /or upon return receipt of requested submittals reviewed by the Project Manager, as applicable. No excuse for delivery delay will be entertained unless the following items have been previously submitted to the Owner's Representative. 15.3.1 Photocopy of the order form forwarded not later than seven days after placement of the said order. 15.3.2 Letter from the supplier explaining the said delay. 15.4 Dated purchase orders shall be submitted to Owner, not later than 3 weeks following award of the contract for the following Items: 15.4.1 Electrical Items: 15.4.1.1 Conduit/duct. 15.4.1.2 Panels (if applicable) 15.4.1.3 Contactors (if applicable) 15.4.1.4 Main Distribution Panel (if applicable) 15.4.1.5 Dry Type Transformers (if applicable) 15.4.1.6 Parking lot lighting fixtures (if applicable) 15.4.2 Mechanical Items: 15.4.2.1 Toilet fixtures. 15.4.2.2 Electric water coolers. 15.4.3 Architectural Items: 15.4.3.1 Hollow metal doors and frames with hardware. 15.4.3.2 Toilet partitions. 15.4.3.3 Aluminum store front or curtainwall, glass and glazing. 15.4.3.4 Split face, colored or other special masonry units. 15.4.3.5 Custom finishes, laminates, etc. as called out on the drawings or specifications. 16. OWNER - FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND /OR MATERIAL 16.1 Each Contractor shall receive, unload, inventory, rig temporarily store and safeguard, uncrate, erect, install, and place into proper operation all Owner - furnished equipment, material and accessories in accordance wink the drawings and specifications and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's detailed working drawings and installation recommendations. Contractor shall provide all materials, accessories, devices, and equipment as required to properly install and place into operation all Owner- furnished material and/or equipment. 16.1.1 For Owner - supplied safes, Contractor shall have on hand at the time of delivery a forklift or similar equipment capable of transporting and placing a 4200 Ibs safe in the vertical position. 16.2 The material and equipment furnished by the Owner will carry the manufacturer's standard warranty. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative should any defective components or feature be discovered during receiving, inventory, uncrating, installation, or testing. All packing slips, bills of lading, and related paperwork must be held for the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for all shortages and damages after accepting delivery NO EXCEPTIONS. The Owner will notify the manufacturer for replacement or repairs. 16.3 Any repairs and /or replacements required due to Contractor's negligence shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 16.4 The Contractor shall provide all labor and work for repairs and /or replacements related to Owner - furnished material and equipment during the term of the manufacturer's warranty, including warranty extensions (if any), purchased with the equipment. All work, materials, and labor related to repairs and /or replacements excluded from the manufacturers warranty shall be provided by the Contractor for all defects, malfunctions, or deficiencies occurring within the full warranty period. 16.5 The maintenance service requirements specified on the drawings and /or in the respective sections of the Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 1• GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION *SECTION 1A -8 specifications shall apply to all Owner - furnished equipment, unless noted or specified otherwise. 16.6 Data relating to Owner- furnished equipment shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals provided by the Contractor in accordance with this section of the specifications unless noted or specified otherwise. 16.7 Each item of Owner - fumished equipment and /or material is shown or identified on the drawings and /or in the appropriate Section of the specifications. 16.8 The Contractor shall make notifications and coordinate with the Owner's Representative and the manufacturer to assure a timely, properly functioning installation of Owner- furnished material and equipment. 16.9 Contractor is responsible for complete installation of material or equipment, unless otherwise specified. If additional information is required this must be made known at bidding time as an extra for this work will not be considered by Owner. 16.10 All surplus owner - supplied equipment and material shall be stored and safeguarded during the course of the work in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be permanently stored and /or distributed as directed by the Owner's Representative at Final Completion. 17. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17.1 Each Contractor shall be fully responsible for complete and absolute compliance with all provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, including all amendments, pertaining to the work. 17.2 Each Contractor shall fumish and maintain for his portion of all the work all danger signals, signs, lights, guard barricades, etc., required by good practice and by law during the entire period of his contract. Each Contractor shall confine his equipment, storage of materials and the operations of his workmen to limits indicated by law. No Contractor shall load or permit the loading of any part of the structure with a weight that will endanger its safety. 17.3 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper protection of all materials and equipment delivered to the site from the time of such delivery until final approval and acceptance by the Owner. This protection and security provision shall include all Owner supplied items. 17.4 The Contractor shall, at all times, protect the excavations, trenches and /or the portions of the building pertaining to his work from damage from rainwater, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water. He shall provide all pumps and equipment and enclosures to provide this protection. He shall construct and maintain all necessary temporary drainage and do all pumping necessary to keep excavations free of water. 17.5 The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing and sheathing as required for safety and for the proper execution of the work, and have it removed when the work is completed. Special attention shall be given to foundations for buildings and basements. Where cuts for utilities exceed 4', they shall be sloped or shored as required by a registered Engineer, In accord with both OSHA and local regulations. 17.6 Any work damaged by failure to provide protection as required above shall be removed and replaced with new work at the Contractor's expense. (Special attention is drawn to this provision as it relates to Owner supplied items including lighting fixtures and lamps.) 18. PERMITS. REGULATIONS. CODES AND STANDARDS 18.1 The Contractor shall secure and pay for all required permits necessary for the prosecution of his work. 18.2 The Owner is responsible for filing the plans for the Building Permit. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in expediting acquisition of this Permit. The main Building Permit fee shall be paid by the Owner, any other fees are to be paid for by the Contractor or his subcontractors. Ne extra for such fees or one time charges will be considered. 18.3 Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn or specified. 18.4 All work installed by the Contractors shall be in compliance with governing Federal, State and Local Codes. All electrical work shall comply with the National Electrical Code (NEC - latest); except where more stringent Local or other Codes must govern. If any portion of work called for in the specifications or shown on the drawings is deemed contrary to the Codes and requirements, Contractor shall be required to bring the matter to the attention of the Contractor prior to roughing -in so that same can be reviewed for clarification or revision. Installations made without regard to Code require- ments must be corrected by the Contractor or Contractors without an increase in the contract amount. 18.5 Existing fluorescent fixtures to be removed or relocated may have ballasts containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Handling and disposal of such ballasts is regulated by federal and /or state agencies. It is the responsibility of the contractor to determine if fixture ballasts containing polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) are existing and, if so, to handle and dispose of them properly and in accordance with all applicable regulations. 18.6 Any "Standard" (ASTM, ASA, etc.) referenced in these specifications shall be based on the edition and /or amendments of the Standard as specified herein. In cases where the edition or date of the "Standard" is not specified, the edition and /or amendments of the Standard which are current on the date the bids are submitted shall govern. Should a more current edition of a Standard become effective during construction, the Contractor may, with the approval of the Engineer apply the latest edition of the specified Standard. 19. SUPERVISION, COORDINATION AND LAYOUT 19.1 All work included in the respective contracts shall be under the constant supervision of qualified superintendents or foremen. 19.2 Considering the Time of Essence Contract the Contractor shall conduct weekly job meetings with all maior subcontractors In attendance for the purpose of coordination and expediting. 19.3 The Contractor will be required to submit the name of all subcontractors to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to awarding of the subcontract work. The Owner reserves the right to approve or disapprove any subcontractors. After their approval and the subsequent award of subcontracts, the Contractor shall provide a type written list of the subcontractors with their work identified, address, phone number(s). and prime contact(s) to both the Owner and the Project Manager. 19.4 In order to maintain proper coordination and continuation of all branches of work, job superintendents or foremen shall Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* not be replaced without prior notice to and approval of the Owner's Representative. 19.5 Each Contractor shall carefully examine ALL drawings and specifications for the total project and coordinate his work with others to avoid delay and shall be responsible to ascertain that the work he installs does not interfere with work of other Contractors. If work is installed which does interfere, it shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Preoccupation of space by any Contractor or subcontractor does not give him the right of priority to the space. 19.6 When piping, conduits, ducts or other items are to run in the same general direction, elevation or location, the Contractors involved shall request the Contractor to arrange a conference to determine the proper allocation of the space or position. 19.7 When work is to be installed above ceilings, adequate clearance must be maintained to allow for access, repairs, and removal of all devices. Each Contractor shall be responsible for protecting his installation from being blocked off by others. Should this condition occur, he shall bring the matter to the attention of the other Contractor for correction. 19.8 Each Contractor shall be responsible for any layout associated with the performance of his work. Should a subcontractor's work be subsequent to and contingent upon layout by another, he shall check said layout prior to proceeding with his work, reporting any discrepancies to the Contractor. Proceeding with the layout shall be considered as acceptance of the layout. 20. CUTTING PATCHING, AND CLEANING 20.1 No Contractor shall endanger and /or damage any work by cutting, drilling, digging or other actions. No Contractor shall cut or alter the work of another Contractor without prior written approval by the Owner's Representative. 20.2 Any cost caused by defective and /or ill-timed work shall be borne by the Contractor responsible therefore. 20.3 In no case shall any Contractor cut into any structural element, beam, or column without prior written approval from the Engineer. 20.4 Each Contractor shall be responsible to follow the progress of the project to assure that his portion of the work is installed at the appropriate time to avoid unnecessary cutting, patching, or modifications to his work and /or the work of other Contractors. (Special effort shall be undertaken to ensure that all conduit and embedded items are properly Installed In the masonry work.) 20.5 In case any Contractor is required to cut existing work in order to install the work required under his portion of the contract, the Contractor requiring the cutting shall bear the expense of the cutting and all subsequent repairing, patching, and /or replacement. All cutting, patching, repairing, and /or replacing shall meet with the approval of the Owner's Representative, Project Manager, and Engineer. 20.6 Each Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning up packing materials, trash, and any debris related to his portion of the work and /or generated by his workmen. In addition, each Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning walls, floors and other finished surfaces soiled as a result of his portion of the work or due to his workmen. All work by each Contractor shall be clean at the completion of the respective portion of the contract. (Special attention shall be given to cleaning dirt, stains, etc. from interior and exterior masonry.) Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION *SECTION 1A -9 20.7 The subcontractor or material supplier shall promptly correct all work rejected by the Project Manager or the Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, Installed or completed. The subcontractor or material supplier shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected work or materials, including the cost of the Project Manager's additional services thereby made necessary. 20.8 If the Owner prefers to accept defective or non - conforming work or materials, he may do so Instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case a Change Order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the contract sum, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the subcontractor or material supplier. 21. OWNER OCCUPANCY 21.1 The Owner reserves the right to take initial occupancy d the building at the earliest possible date, particularly with regard to delivery and installation of fixtures, and merchandise. Depending on the prdgress of the subcontractor's work, this may or may not create some inconvenience. The subcontractor should anticipate this possibility. Claims for time delays and /or extra costs due to such inconveniences will not be allowed. 21.2 When the Owner takes beneficial occupancy and begins receipt of merchandise, the site shall no longer be considered as a construction site. Subsequent to beneficial occupancy the contractor will be subject to the rules of the store management regarding access, security, smoking, etc 22. FINAL INSPECTION 22.1 As the work nears completion, each Contractor shall review the requirements of the Contract Documents, inspect the work, and inform all parties involved of work to be corrected or completed before the project can be deemed substantially complete. 22.2 When, in the opinion of the Contractor, the project is substantially complete, he shall notify the Project Manager in writing of this fact, listing those items of work remaining incomplete, the reason therefore, and the anticipated date that all remaining work will be completed. Final inspection of the project will then be scheduled. 22.3 The Owner's Representative reserves the right to cancel and reschedule the inspection in the event considerably more work remains to be completed or corrected than Indicated on the written request. 22.4 A representative of the Contractor shall be present at the time of inspection. 23. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 23.1 Each contractor shall maintain current and accurate marked -up prints indicating the as -built conditions associated with his contracted work. 23.2 Upon completion of each contractor's work he shall submit the required marked prints to the Contractor for review and approval. 23.3 After receipt of this approval, the as -built conditions shown on these prints shall be transferred to a "Master As -Built Set" maintained by the Contractor. 23.4 Each subcontractor shall sign this "master as -built set" certifying its accuracy. DIVISION 1* GENERAL INFORMATION AND BiDDiNG INFORMATION *SECTION 1A -10 23.5 Upon completion of the "Punchlist" the Contractor shall forward this "master as -built set" to Project Manager Corporation as a permanent record of the project. 23.6 The final fetainaae will not be released until receipt of this "master as -built set ". 24. GUARANTEE 24.1 General Guarantee - See Section 1F, Exhibit "A" 24.1.1 Each Contractor and/or his subcontractor shall guarantee his work in writing, including labor and materials, for a period of one (1) year, or longer if so specified elsewhere, from the date of final completion of the contract by the Contractor or from full occupancy of the building by the Owner, whichever date is earlier. 24.1.2 However, if at the time of full occupancy of the building by Owner, a portion of the work has not been completed or is found to be defective, the starting date of guarantee for the defective or incomplete portion shall be effective only after same has been completed or corrected by the Contractor. 24.1.3 If a portion of the building and /or the work is turned over to the Owner for occupancy and /or operation prior to the completion of the work under contract, the beginning of the guarantee period for the portion occupied will begin from the date of occupancy. In order to receive an adjustment in the guarantee period, the Contractors involved shall each submit a written certificate describing the portion of the work involved. The certificate shall be submitted for signature and shall become effective when signed by the authorized Representative of the Owner. 24,1.4 Defective work and all damages resulting from same occurring within one year from the date of completion of work under contract shall be corrected by the responsible Contractor at his own expense. 24.1.5 Contractor shall be required to submit his written guarantee to Owner's Representative prior to receiving final payment. 24.2 Specific Warranty 24.2.1 Manufacturer's equipment warranties shall be for at least a period of one (1) year as defined in the General Guarantee paragraph. When manufacturer's standard warranty is for a longer period, or if a longer period is called for in the specific equipment specifications, then the longer warranty period as defined by the manufacturer shall govern. In any case, the overall effective guarantee period shall not be shorter than the one (1) year period dating from the final completion of the contract. 24.2.2 Contractor shall be required to turn over manufacturer's written guarantees, along with operating and service manuals, to Owner's Representative prior to receiving final payment. Refer to Section 1B, Paragraph 10 for specific requirements. - ENO OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 05/05/98 GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK •SECTION 1B -1 DIVISION 1* 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under Divisions 15 and 16 of these specifications will be subject to and governed by the following: 1.1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION AND BIDDING INFORMATION - Section 1A 1.2 The term "Mechanical" Contractors shall mean the Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, and Fire Protection Contractor. The term "Electrical" Contractor shall mean the building Electrical Contractor. Electrical work per- formed by the automatic temperature control subcontractor shall be included in the Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor's work. For ease of reference, the following abbreviations may be used in the specifications and drawings: 1.2.1 CONTR: Contractor who shall be the prime Contractor for this project and who shall be responsible to the Owner. 1.2.2 HAC: Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. 1.2.3 PBC: Plumbing Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. 1.2.4 ELC: Electrical Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. 1.2.5 FPC: Fire Protection Contractor, a subcontractor to the Contractor. 2. MATERIALS. EQUIPMENT AND WORKMANSHIP 2.1 Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated in the work under the contract shall be new. All work shall be performed by persons qualified in their respective trades. 2.2 All material shall conform to the governing Codes or regulations. 2.3 All material and equipment shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U.L,), if U.L. has an established certification for the particular type of material, device, or equipment. 2.4 Contractors shall not scale the drawings. Refer to architectural and structural drawings for the building construction and dimensions, and refer to "Room Finish Schedule" on architectural drawings for material, finish, and construction method of walls, floors and ceilings so that proper roughing -in of Contractor's work can be provided. 2.5 Where the word "provide" is used, this shall be taken to mean "furnish and install ", unless other -wise noted or specified. 2.6 It is the intent of the drawings and specifications that all labor, materials, and equipment be provided as required to complete the installation of all mechanical and electrical systems and work described, shown, or indicated in the Contract Documents for proper functioning and finished appearance. The respective Contractors shall provide all necessary components, hardware, accessories, and devices as required to comply with the intent of the Contract Documents, whether or not such items are shown on the drawings or referenced in the specifications. 2,7 Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified, each Contractor shall provide structural members, brackets, bracing, hardware, and related accessories as required to securely install all equipment, devices, and materials under his portion of the work. This shall include flashing, gaskets, sealants, and caulking as required to prevent entrance of or damage from rain or wind. 2.8 In all cases, route utilities to cause the least interference with the fixture plan (e.g. mount sprinkler mains as high as possible in Mezzanine). 3, OWNER- FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AND /OR MATERIAL 3.1 Each Contractor shall receive, unload, temporarily store and safeguard, uncrate, rig, erect, install, and place Into proper operation all Owner- furnished equipment, material and accessories in accordance with the drawings and specifications and in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's detailed working drawings and installation recommendations. Contractor shall provide all materials, accessories, devices, and equipment as required to properly install and place into operation all Owner - furnished material and /or equipment, including assistance with and coordinating start-up services when provided by the equipment manufacturer. 3.2 The material and equipment furnished by the Owner will carry the manufacturer's standard warranty. The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative should any defective components or feature be discovered during receiving, uncrating, installation, or testing. All packing slips, bills of lading, and related paperwork must be held for the Owner's Representative. The Contractor shall be responsible for all shortages and damages after accepting delivery, NO EXCEPTIONS. The Owner will notify the manufacturer for replacement or repairs. 3.3 Any repairs and /or replacements required due to Contractor's negligence shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.4 The Contractor shall provide all labor and work for repairs and /or replacements related to Owner - furnished material and equipment during the term of the manufacturer's warranty, including warranty extensions (if any), purchased with the equipment. All work, materials, and labor related to repairs and /or replacements excluded from the manufacturer's warranty shall be provided by the Contractor for all defects, malfunctions, or deficiencies occurring within the full warranty period. 3.5 Data relating to Owner - furnished equipment shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals provided by the Contractor in accordance with this section of the specifications unless noted or specified otherwise. 3.6 Each item of Owner- furnished equipment and /or material is shown or identified on the drawings and /or in the appropriate Section of the specifications. 3.7 The Contractor shall make notifications and coordinate with the Owner's Representative and the manufacturer to assure a timely, properly functioning installation of Owner - furnished material and equipment. 3.8 Contractor is responsible for complete installation of equipment If additional information is required this must be made known at bidding time as an extra for thls work will not be considered by Owner. 3.9 All surplus owner - supplied equipment and material shall be stored and safeguarded during the course of the work in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and shall be permanently stored and /or distributed as directed by the Owner's Representative at Final Completion. 4. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 4.1 Excavation 4.1.1 All excavation shall be in accordance with Divisim 2 of these specifications. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 05/05/98 • • •► - VI 4.1.2 All excavation required for mechanical and electrical work shall be done by the respective Contractor, and shall be done in as short a time as practical before the work is placed. 4.1.3 When services are shown in the same general location, a common excavation may be used. However, separation between services as specified or as required by governing Code shall be maintained. Contractors involved shall make their own agreement as to the sharing of cost for the common excavation work. 4.1.4 No excavation or soil stock piling shall be done within drip line of trees not shown to be removed on Architectural drawings. No trees shall be removed without prior approval of the Owner. 4.1.5 Excavation for utility lines in the parking area will be undertaken as soon as possible after contractaward to allow for accelerated parking lot installation. Utility lines under curbing and for parking lot lights shall be the first utility lines installed where practical. 4.2 Backfill: 4.2.1 All backfill shall be in accordance with Division 2 of these specifications. 4.2.2 All backfill for mechanical and electrical work shall be done by respective Contractor and shall comply with the following specifications. 4.2.3 Within building fines and under areas to be paved: Backfill for trenches shall be performed in two operations. The backfill around and to 12 inches above the pipe or conduit shall be placed in thin lifts, not exceeding 6 inches, and thoroughly tamped and compacted. The balance of the backfill shall be placed in lifts not exceeding 8 inches. All backfill material shall be clean soil, free from rock, debris, cinders, frozen earth, or materials which could cause pipe or conduit damage or corrosion. Each lift shall be compacted to a maximum density to comply with the requirements specified in the Section of the specifications governing backfill around foundations. 4.2.4 Backfill for mechanical and electrical work shall not be placed until all required inspections, tests, and approvals have been performed and given, including inspection and approval by the Owner's Representative. 4.2.5 Exterior of building lines and exterior of areas to be paved: Backfill for trenches shall be placed in 12 inch lifts above the top of pipe or conduit. Backfill around and to the top of the pipe or conduit shall be planed in thin lifts as specified above Backfill materials shall be as specified above. Each lift shall be compacted as required to prevent settlement of trench backfill. 4.2.6 All backfill shall be placed with care such that piping, conduit or other work is not disturbed or damaged, Compaction by flooding or pooling shall not be used. Immersion -type vibrators are acceptable for compaction of granular backfill. 4.3 Shoring and Protection - Each Contractor responsible for excavation work shall provide all necessary barricades, fendng, bracing, warning signs, pumping, etc., for the protection of workers, general public, and properties. 4.4 Sheet Piling and Pumping - if required, shall be provided by each Contractor for his work. 4.5 Dewatering: 4.5.1 All excavations shall be dewatered before the work Is placed Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington and shall be kept dewatered until backfill is completed. 4.5.2 Local site conditions and time of year must be taken into account when bidding dewatering costs; and included in base contract price. All over excavation required of trench bottoms to meet required densities will be to contractor's account. 4.6 Excess Earth from Excavation: 4.6.1 Excess earth from excavation shall be trucked away by the Contractor making the excavation, or may be piled on the site at location designated by the Contractor, if the excess earth is needed by Contractor, and if approved by the Owner's Representative as fill material. 4.6.2 Debris, trash, or rock not usable for fill shall be removed from the Owner's property by the respective Contractor. 4.7 Restoration of Existing Conditions: 4.7.1 When the excavation is within the area of finished site work by the Contractor, backfill to the height of rough grade. Final surfacing by Contractor. 4.7.2 When the excavation is beyond the area of general construction work, final surface of the excavation and adjacent disturbed areas shall be restored to match the original condition by sodding, seeding, asphalt paving, concrete, etc., as required. Work shall conform to applicable Sections of the specifications and shall be provided by the respective Contractor. 4.7.3 When the excavation is on public property, restoration of surface conditions shall meet the requirements of public authorities having jurisdiction, and be maintained for a minimum of one (1) year. 5. CONCRETE WORK 5.1 Concrete Encasement and Cradles: 5.1.1 Concrete encasement, cradles, or trenches for underground pipes, conduits and ducts shall be provided by the respective Contractor, unless otherwise noted or specified. 5.1.2 Composition and quality of concrete work shall comply with Division 3 of the specifications. 6. SLEEVES THROUGH WALLS AND FLOORS 6.1 Exterior and Foundation Walls: 6.1.1 All piping or conduit through exterior walls and foundation walls shall pass through schedule 40 steel sleeves which shall be large enough to allow for caulking material. No sleeves are permitted through concrete structural members unless indicated on the structural drawings. 6.1.2 Space between pipe or conduit and sleeve shall first be packed with jute, hemp, or oakum and then be finally caulked flush with finished surfaces. 6.2 Interior Walls and Partitions: 6.2.1 All piping or conduit through interior walls and partitions shall pass through either schedule 40 black steel, plastic or galvanized steel sheet metal sleeves. Schedule 40 sleeves must be used with concrete or masonry construction. Sleeves will not be required for temperature control tubing. 6.2.2 Space between pipe or conduit and sleeve, or between 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* Insulation and sleeve shall be caulked when passing through mechanical room walls or fire -rated walls. 6.2.3 Ducts: Space between duct and opening shall be grouted with non- shrinking cement or plaster for fire rating and noise isolation. Openings in stud walls shall be sleeved with galvanized sheet metal collar and grouted as above. Fire dampers shall be provided in all ducts penetrating fire -rated walls. 6.3 Floors: 6.3.1 All piping or conduit through floors shall be provided with schedule 40 pipe sleeves, extending 1" above floor, except in finished areas. Sleeves in finished areas shall terminate flush with floor, and shall be schedule 40 pipe, plastic, or sheet metal. 7. LINTELS 6.3.1.1 When opening is on the lowest floor - grout space between pipe or conduit and sleeve with non - shrinking cement. 6.3.1.2 When opening is above lowest floor - space between pipe or conduit or insulation and sleeve shall be grouted with nonshrinking cement or shall be caulked from above and below to provide watertight construction and to maintain fire- rating of floor structure. 6.3.2 All ducts through floors shall be provided with galvanized or painted steel angle frame for support of duct and closure of opening. Provide grouting in the same manner as for ducts through walls. Fire dampers are required in all ducts penetrating fire -rated floors. 7.1 All lintels required for supporting building construction above pipes, boxes, panels, ducts, etc., shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor 7.2 Contractor requiring the opening or recess shall be responsible for the size, location, and configuration of the opening. 8. ROOF OPENINGS AND CURBS 8.1 Roof Openings: 8.1.1 All roof openings for piping, vents, flues, stacks, ducts, conduits, etc., shall be sleeved by the respective Contractor. 8.1.2 All framed openings on roof shall be provided by Contractor in accordance with details, dimensions, and locations as shown on the structural and architectural drawings. 8.2 Roof Curbs:(RTU Curbs are Owner - Supplied) GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK *SECTION 1 B -3 8.2.1 Unless prefabricated type curbs are specified, curbs shall be constructed by the Contractor in accordance with details and dimensions shown on the structural and architectural plans. Respective Contractor shall provide correct dimensions to the Contractor prior to fabrication of curbs. 8.2.2 Flashing for piping, vents, flues, stacks, ducts, conduits, etc., shall be made watertight by means of sleeves, flashing, and draw collars. Materials and methods shall be in accordance with Division 7 of these specifications. Sleeves, flashing, and flashing draw collars shall be furnished and Installed by the Contractor requiring the opening. If piping Is insulated, the insulation shall be sealed off by insulation cement or weatherproof mastic in a manner and with materials as required to prevent rain leakage. Contractors requiring openings shall coordinate all flashing, counter flashing, and related details with the roofing subcontractor. 8.2.3 Plumbing vent terminals shall be installed as shown on the drawings. 8.2.4 Special flashing and counter flashing if required, shall be as shown on the drawings and /or as specified elsewhere in Division 15. 8.2.5 Prefabricated roof curbs, if required, shall be of the type as specified in the appropriate Section of Division 15 of these specifications and /or noted on the drawings. 8.3 Flashing and Counter Flashing: 8.3.1 Flashing around roof curbs shall be provided by the roofing subcontractor under Contractor. Counter flashing shall be by the Contractor requiring such curbed openings, except where counter flashing is a component part of the equipment, all counter flashing materials and methods shall be in accordance with Division 7 of these specifications. 8.4 Roofing and /or weatherproofing of any installation and /or penetration of the roof, by respective contractor, must be coordinated with and installed by the Contractor roofing subcontractor to assure the roofing guarantee will not be invalidated. 9. CUTTING AND PATCHING 9.1 For New Construction: 9.1.1 Roof Openings - Field -cut openings in roof deck shall be cut by various subcontractors under Contractor. The size and location of such openings are the responsibility of the Contractor requiring the opening. 9.1.2 Floors, Walls, and Partitions - Openings in stud walls shall be cut and /or framed by various subcontractors under Contractor. Openings in concrete and masonry work shall be sleeved prior to or at the placing of the concrete and masonry work. The sizes and locations of openings are the responsibility of the Contractor requiring the opening. 9.1.3 Openings, lintels, frames, etc., as required for flush mounted panels and recessed equipment shall be provided by various subcontractors under Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified herein. 9.1.4 Each Contractor shall be responsible to follow the progress of the project to assure that all sleeves, openings, rough -in boxes, frames, etc., are placed at the proper time. Any and all subsequent cutting and patching and /or unnecessary modifications to the work of other subcontractors shall be done at the expense of the Contractor requiring the opening. Under no circumstances shall any structural members, load bearing walls, footings, or foundations be cut without first obtaining written permission from the Project Manager. 9.2 For Existing Structure: 9.2.1 All cutting required shall be performed by each Contractor. Under no circumstances shall any structural members, load bearing walls, footings, or foundations be cut without first obtaining permission from the Project Manager unless the location and size of openings are predetermined as noted on the drawings. Babies "R" U - Tukwila. Washington t)5 /05/9$ DIVISION 1* 9.2.2 Contractor shall make thorough investigation and /or field measurement by use of magnetic detection instruments or other approved means to detect any concealed ferrous metal piping or conduits prior to cutting. Should any existing and active piping or conduits be damaged by the Contractor's work, same shall be restored to service immediately without additional cost to the Owner. 9.3 Cutting shall be limited to the size necessary for working conditions. When cutting surfaces are difficult or costly to replace, such as marble, ceramic tile, wood paneling, etc., each Contractor shall consult with the Contractor in advance and they shall jointly develop a method of cutting. 9.4 All patching shall be done with materials and by methods consistent with the construction and materials being patched. In general, cement grout shall be used with masonry, and filler compound shall be used with dry-wall or plastered surfaces. Quality and final appearance of all patching work shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative and /or Project Manager. 10. OPERATING AND SERVICE MANUALS 10.1 General: Near the completion of the project, and (in order to allow Owner time in which to become familiar with its contents) at least one (1) month prior to Contractor's request for final inspection, each Contractor shall be required to provide three (3) volumes of Operating and Service Manuals containing the following: 10.1.1 Start-up and Shut -down Procedures - Provide a step -by -step write -up of all major equipment. When manufacturer's printed start-up, trouble shooting and shut- down procedures are available, they shall be incorporated into the operating manual for reference. 10.1.2 Operating Instructions - Written operating instructions shall be included for the efficient and safe operation of all equipment. 10.1.3 Equipment List - List of all major equipment as installed shall include model number, capacities, flow rates, and nameplate data. (The list shall include all equipment furnished by Owner.) 10.1.4 Contractor will, before the store opens, familiarize store personnel with operating instructions on each piece of equipment (e.g. set temperature controls, timers for lights, etc.). 10.1.5 Service Instructions - Each Contractor shall be required to provide the following information for all pieces of equipment: 10.1.5.1 Recommended spare parts including catalog number, name of local suppliers, and /or factory representative. 10.1.5.2 Lubrication and maintenance instructions for all equipment including all electric motors. 10.1.5.3 Belt sizes, types and lengths (mechanical only). 10.1.6 Manufacturer's Certificate of Warranty - Manufacturer's certificate of warranty shall be obtained for all major equipment furnished by each Contractor. Warranty shall be obtained for at least one (1) year as defined in the GUARANTEE paragraph. Where longer period is called for in the specific equipment specifications, the longer period shall govern. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK *SECTION 15-4 10.1.7 The Contractor shall include in the manuals parts catalogs for each item of equipment furnished by him on the project with the components identified by number for replacement ordering. 10.2 Submission 10.2.1 Manuals shall be in triplicate, and all materials shall be bound into volumes of standard black, 2 -1/2" wide, 8 -1/2" x 11" hard binders, with 2 -1/4" clear plastic label sleeve. Large drawings too bulky to be folded into 8 -1/2" x 11" size shall be separately bound or folded into brown envelopes, cross referenced and indexed with the manuals. 10.2.2 The manuals shall include the name of Project Manager, Contractors, and major subcontractors. 10.2.3 In order not to duplicate Contractor's effort, it is suggested that each Contractor submit one (1) preliminary copy of the manual to the Owner's Representative for a pre- check, and when approved, Contractor shall then submit the three (3) final copies through normal channels. 11. ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT 11.1 Accessibility 11.1.1 All control devices, specialties, valves, and removable panels on equipment shall be so located as to provide easy access for inspection and maintenance including ease of removal of any interior components. 11.1.2 Should any Contractor's work, such as piping, ducts, conduits, etc. be installed without due regard to the accessibility of devices installed by other Contractors, the installation shall be relocated, offset, or re- routed without cost to the Owner. 11.2 Access Panels 11.2.1 Where devices are to be concealed in walls or above non - removable ceilings, each Contractor shall be required to furnish the required access panels to the Contractor for installation. 11.2.2 Size of panels shall be larger than the devices for accessibility, and shall be not less than 6 inches square for wall panels and not less than 12 inches square for ceiling panels. Where the opening must allow adequate room for a person to pass through, a 24" x 24" panel shall be provided. 11.2.3 Construction of panel shall comply with the following: 11.2.3.1 For masonry, tile, wood or wallboard surfaces - extruded aluminum frames, 3/4" border, aluminum piano hinges, screwdriver - operated cam lock, brushed satin aluminum finish. Final painting to match decor by Contractor. 11.2.3.2 For acoustical tile ceiling - flangeless construction of even -tile module, recessed door panel for receiving acoustical tile by Contractor, piano hinges, flush screw- driver- operated cam latch, white prime coat finish. Access panels will not be required in accessible type ceilings. 11.2.3.3 For plastered ceiling or wall - concealed flange, recessed door panel to receive plaster by Contractor, continuous hinges, flush latch, white prime coat finish. Final painting to match Interior decor by Contractor. 05/05/98 C DIVISION 1* Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK *SECTION 1B -5 12. OPERATION OF DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT 12.1 If after installation, operation of the equipment proves to be unsatisfactory to Owner by reasons of defects, errors or omissions, Owner reserves the right to operate the equipment until it can be removed from service for correction by Contractor. Contractor shall be liable for any damage to equipment resulting from such continued operation. 13. ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 13.1 Contractor - Shall wire all mechanical equipment furnished by various Contractors and the Owner, in accordance with the following general provisions: 13.1.1 Power wiring from panel to motor controllers, relays, etc., and controllers to motor terminals per equipment manufacturer's wiring diagram. 13.1.2 Furnish, install and wire local disconnect switches, manual push buttons and other control wiring specifically called for or noted in electrical specifications. 13.1.3 Initial field oiling of all motors prior to the test running of same. 13.1.4 Receive, unload, set and align all separately shipped motors. Adjust and align drive and adjust belt tension. 13.1.5 Furnish and Install motor starters specifically called for on plans. 13.1.6 Install and wire all field- mounted devices, such as selector switches, push button stations, etc. specifically called for to be furnished by other Contractors when not a factory pre -wired component. 13.1.7 Owner supplied items include but are not limited to: 13.1.7.1 Trash compactor 13.1.7.2 Lift (Mezzanine or Basement stores only) 13.1.7.3 Emergency generator 13.1.7.4 HVAC Packaged Roof -Top Units 13.1.7.5 (EMS)HVAC Controls for Roof -Top Units Refer to Specification Section 1J for a detailed list of Owner - supplied electrical items. 13.2 Contractors - Shall include the following: 13.2.1 All motor starters or control devices spedfically called for to be factory pre - wired. 13.2.2 Furnish individual motor starters or control devices specifically called for in accordance with the specifications, or as noted on the drawings. 13.2.3 Automatic control and interlock wiring as called for under Division 15. 13.2.4 Furnish complete and accurate wiring diagrams to ELC for all equipment requiring electrical power wiring and /or control wiring. 13.2.5 All separately shipped motors shall be delivered to ELC for installation. Adjustable motor base and all bolts and nuts required for installation of base and motor shall be furnished by respective Contractor. 13.2.6 Fumish motor terminal connection diagram as prepared by motor manufacturers. 13.3 Motor Starters - Motor starters for mechanical equipment shall be furnished by the respective Contractors as called for on the drawings. In general, the following principles shall be followed: 13.3.1 All magnetic motor starters to be built -in in motor control panelboards will be furnished and installed by ELC. 13.3.2 All magnetic motor starters to be factory prewired shall be furnished and installed at the factory and shall be included in the respective Mechanical Contract. 13.3.3 All individual motor starters shall be furnished and installed by the ELC, unless noted to be furnished by others on plans. The ELC will install and wire all individual motor starters, including those furnished by others. 13.3.4 Magnetic motor starters furnished by ELC will be provided with auxiliary contacts required for operation of starting device only. Additional auxiliary contacts required for electri- cal interlock and automatic controls shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor responsible for the interlock wiring. 13.3.5 In order to be properly sized, all heater elements for overload relays on magnetic motor starters (except the starters factory prewired with equipment) shall be furnished and installed by the ELC in the field. Each Contractor furnishing the motorized equipment shall be required to furnish a list of motor characteristics to the ELC so that properly sized heater elements may be provided. The list shall include equipment identification by name and by number, full load current, locked rotor current, voltage rating, and suggested service factor to compensate for operating duty cycle and ambient temperature. 14. PAINTING 14.1 General 14.1.1 In general, all required field painting of piping, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical systems and components shall be done by subcontractor under the Contractor. However, all painting or finishing, which is required for special results and /or wherever painting or finishing is specifically referenced within the context of Divisions 15 and 16, all such painting or finishing shall be provided by the respective Contractor, except as otherwise noted. Other painting to be provided under the mechanical and electrical work is described below. 14.1.2 Contractors are referred to Section 9H for further clarification and scope of painting work for this project. 14.2 Work Included - By Each Contractor 14.2.1 Equipment with factory standard finishes: Each Contractor shall touch -up paint all scratches or damages to finishes to match the factory finish. This shall Include all Owner- furnished equipment. 14.2.2 All miscellaneous structural members, brackets, braces, hardware, and accessories provided by each Contractor shall be painted with light gray rust inhibiting metal primer, except as otherwise specified herein or noted on the drawings. Items in this category which are galvanized, cadmium or copper plated, stainless steel, or finished with a factory finish shall not be painted. 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* 15. AS - BUILT DRAWINGQ GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL WORK 14.2.3 Nameplates and equipment Identifications shall be masked -off or suitably protected from paint during touch -up or adjacent painting required by the respective Contractors. Protection of nameplates and similar identifications as may be required during paint operations performed by the paint- ing subcontractor under the Contractor shall be provided by that painting subcontractor. 14.3 Painting Specifications 14.3.1 All painting work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All painting materials shall be of the best quality and suitable for the service Intended. All finish paints shall present a glossy finish and/or shall match the color and texture of the adjacent areas and surfaces. 14.3.2 Surfaces to be painted by the respective mechanical or electrical Contractor shall be free of rust, scale, peeling, blistering, : grease, oil, or deteriorating film prior to application of primer. 14.3.3 Applicable parts of Section 9H of these specifications shall govern work under this Section. 15.1 Refer to Section 1A, 23.1 thru 23.6 for general information and bidding information on as -built drawings, all items apply to Section 1B. ¢abies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington *SECTION 1 B-6 DIVISION 1* 1. GENERAL 1.1 Drawings and all general provisions of Contract, including other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 This section specifies administration and procedural requirements for Owner's continued operations, construction facilities and temporary controls, selective demolition and cutting and patching. 1.3 Refer to other Sections and Drawings for specific requirements and limitations applicable to demolition, and cutting and patching individual parts of work. 1.4 Requirements of this Section apply to all trade installation, removals, repairs, replacements, etc. 2. WORK SEQUENCE 2.1 The Work will be conducted in several phases to provide the least possible interference to the activities of the Owner's personnel and operation. 2.2 The Owner will provide a phasing plan and schedule and will instruct the Contractor as to the sequence of construction to permit the Owner's uninterrupted operation. The Contractor shall maintain a safe and clean environment during the construction period. 3. OWNER'S CONTINUING OPERATIONS 3.1 Work for this Project Is within existing facilities which will remain in full operation throughout construction period. 3.2 All remodeling work, new construction, etc. must be conducted so as to cause absolute minimum of interference with and inconvenience to Owner's continuing operations. 3.3 All construction and remodeling operations must be conducted as required to insure complete safety to persons (Owner's personnel, Contractor's personnel, general public and others) who may be on site or adjacent to work. 3.4 Entrances to and exits from existing buildings must be protected, kept free of restrictions or obstructions and maintained in full use at all times. Safety and well-being of occupants of this building and other persons must be prime concern of Contractor at all times. 3.5 Use by Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, delivery persons, etc. of Owner's property (buildings and site) must be restricted to those areas designated by Owner for such use. Contractor must obtain permission from Owner before beginning any use of property. 3.6 Provide adequate safeguards for control of dust and moisture during construction. Close coordination with Owner for these environmental controls is mandatory. 4. CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES 4.1 General: Limit use of the premises to construction activities In areas indicated; allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public. Portions of the site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed. 4.1.2 Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner and the general public at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR REMODELING WORK *SECTION 1C -1 4.2 Maintain existing building in weathertight condition throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. 5. OWNER OCCUPANCY 5.1 The Owner will occupy the site and existing building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations. 5.2 The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building, prior to Substantial Completion. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 5.2.1 Obtain Certificate of Occupancy from local building officials prior to Owner occupancy. 5.2.2 Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy the Owner will provide operation and maintenance of mechanical and electrical systems in completed portions of the building. 6. TEMPORARY UTILITIES 6.1 Water and electrical energy will be made available only as they presently exist. Provide and pay for such connections to, extensions from, and means of using these utilities as may be required. 6.2 Except as noted in following paragraph, Owner will pay utility company bills for water and electrical energy which is required for project and which passes through Owner's meters. 6.3 Owner will not pay for following: 6.3.1 Water which is wasted needlessly or expended without proper regard for conservational or ecological considerations. 6.3.2 Electrical energy expended In electric heating devices. 7. PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITY INSTALLATIONS 7.1 Before work is started, consult with public and private utility companies and agencies and with Owner relative to location, conditions, protection, maintenance, relocation, etc., of utility installations within boundaries of site or adjacent thereto. This includes, but is not necessarily limited to, companies and agencies providing gas, water, electrical, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, telephone, and site utilities and /or services: 7.2 Before Item of work is started, carefully review Information relative to existing utility installations, and plan and schedule work so as to avoid damage to equipment or work, or other adverse results. 7.3 Should utility installation be damaged or destroyed, or should injury or damage be caused to persons or property, party or parties (Contractors and /or subcontractors) responsible for such injury and/or damage shall be fully and exclusively labia and claims resulting therefrom. 15/05/98 DIVISION 1* 8. WEATHER PROTECTION 8.1 All temporary enclosures, heating devices, fuel, etc. and labor and services required therefore to protect materials in storage, work in progress and completed construction from damage to defacement due to usual or unusual condition(s) of weather prior to time that building is completely and permanently enclosed (all exterior building construction -- walls, doors, windows, louvers, roofs, etc.- 100 percent complete and weathertight) shall be considered 'Weather Protection ". 8.2 Contractor shall provide and maintain weather protection as may be required by trades to properly protect work from damage during construction. 9. TEMPORARY HEAT 9.1 Except as provided in Paragraphs 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4 (following) Contractor shall provide temporary heat required for proper and timely completion of total project including temporary space heaters with vent pipes, adequate controls, fuel, attendants, supervision, etc. 9.2 Mechanical Trades shall provide early use of or part of permanent heating system for supplementary heating subject to approval by Owner. 9.3 When permanent heating equipment is used for temporary heating, units shall be fitted with disposable type filters which shall be changed at regular intervals as directed by Owner. At end of temporary heating period and prior to being turned over to Owner, heating units shall be thoroughly cleaned and permanent filters installed. Mechanical Tradesman shall be responsible for operation, maintenance, cleaning, and warranty of these units during temporary heating period. 9.4 Owner will pay fuel bills for temporary heat provided by permanent heating system (only). Owner will not pay for fuel used in temporary heating devices. 10. EXISTING TOILET FACILITIES 10.1 Owner will permit use of toilet facilities In existing building, subject to Contractor enforcing compliance with Owner's requirements as to cleanliness, etc. to satisfaction of Owner's Representative. 10.2 Abuse of privilege will result in cancellation of same, and Contractor will be required to make alternative arrangements at own expense to satisfaction of Owner's Representative. 11. TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES 11.1 Provide and maintain temporary first aid facilities as required by OSHA and other federal, state and local authorities, laws, ordinances, regulations, etc. 12. TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION 12.1 Contractor and subcontractor shall at times exercise every precaution for prevention of fire(s). Further, make timely and adequate provisions for protection and safety of persons and property in event of fire. 12.2 Contractor shall provide fire protection for work and shall furnish fire extinguishers and/or other firefighting devices, equipment, etc. of types and in such quantities as required by appropriate officials. Further, Contractor shall maintain same in fully operable condition and keep them readily available on site at times. 12.3 Whenever work of particularly hazardous nature is being Aabies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR REMODELING WORK *SECTION 1C -2 done, party doing such work shall provide additional and /or special fire protection as may be required. 12.4 Electrical arc welding and flame cutting equipment must be approved by Owner before they may be used within building. Gas welding equipment may not be used. Gasoline torches or burners will not be permitted. When welding or flame cutting is permitted, Contractor shall provide full -time stand-by watchperson, with fire - extinguisher mounted on cart or other means of transportation located immediately adjacent to work and ready for immediate use. 12.5 All trash, refuse, etc. must be removed from the building and legally disposed of after each day's work. 12.6 Smoking shall be prohibited in all portions of building. 13. SECURITY 13.1 Owner maintains full -time security watch at store. All traffic is subject to control and search by Owner's security personnel. 13.2 Contractors, subcontractors, material persons, suppliers, delivery people, etc. will be required to cooperate fully with Owner's personnel in maintaining integrity of Owner's security program. 13.3 Provide security for tools, equipment, devices, etc. required or otherwise used for construction of project, and for materials which have been paid for by Owner but not yet incorporated into new construction. 14. RESTORATION OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION. PAVING, ETC.: 14.1 In addition to other work required by Contract Documents, leave facilities and site in same condition as before project began. 14.2 Should existing construction, paving, landscaping, etc. be defaced, damaged or destroyed, same shall be repaired or replaced to complete satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and local building official having jurisdiction. 14.3 Where specific damage can be attributed to specific party (Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, delivery people, etc.), that party shall pay for repair or replacement of such damage. 14.4 Where damage cannot be attributed to specific party, Project Manager shall apportion cost of necessary repais or replacement among various parties In such manner as seems proper. 14.5 In event of delay or dispute involving repair and /or replacement of damaged construction, Project Manager reserves right to order execution of work and to deduct full cost thereof from monies due Contractor. 14.6 Photographs of existing exterior conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to storage, removal operations, etc. must be filed with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. 15. PROTECTION OF FINISHED ROOFS; 15.1 Provide temporary protective covering consisting of one layer of 3/4 Inch thick Dow Chemical STYROFOAM or similar polystyrene or urethane foam type roof Insulation, with full coverage overlay of minimum 5/8 -inch thick exterior grade plywood in as large sheets as available. 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* 15.2 Protection shall be provided at existing roof area where heavy construction traffic will occur. 15.3 Place protection in accordance with following: 15.3.1 Set first layer of foam board firmly onto roof, with butt tight joints throughout. 15.3.2 Tape boards of layer together as necessary to retain firmly in place until succeeding work is placed. 15.3.3 Lay plywood over entire area with joints staggered from joints in layer of foam board, and provide suitable method of fastening boards at corners so as to retain same in place under traffic. 15.3.4 Provide sand bag ballast to hold plywood in place. 15.4 Areas protected may be modified during course of work to suit changing requirements, but must be maintained in good condition at times. 16. PROTECTION OF AREAS WHERE EXISTING ROOFING IS REMOVED 16.1 Provide temporary plywood, waterproof covers, flashings, etc. as required to keep roof deck dry and to maintain weathertightness of occupied space below roof while existing roofing is removed for required work. 16.2 Protect existing remaining roof insulation to keep wain from penetrating insulation and causing damage to insulation, causing reduction of thermal insulating value, and possible leakage below. 16.3 Coordinate timing of protection work with cutting of openings in roof deck to avoid duplication of effort and to assure that completed protection work is not undone by others. 17. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 17.1 The following paragraphs below address the selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal: 17.1.1 Portions of existing building indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction. 17.1.2 Removal of interior partitions as indicated on drawings. 17.1.3 Removal of doors and frames indicated "remove." 17.1.4 Removal of built -in casework indicated "remove." 17.1.5 Removal of existing windows indicated to be filled in. 17.1.6 Removal and protection of existing fixtures, materials, and equipment items indicated "salvage." 17.1.7 Roofing and roof insulation removal. 17.1.8 Cutting nonstructural concrete floors and masonry walls for piping, ducts, and conduits is included with the work of the respective mechanical and electrical specification sections in Divisions 15 and 16. 17.1.9 Cutting holes in roof deck for Installation of new rooftop mechanical equipment. 17.2 Submit schedule indicating proposed sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's Representative for review prior to start of work. Coordinate with Owner's Phasing Plan. Include coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services as required, together with details for dust and noise control protection. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR REMODELING WORK *SECTION 1C -3 17.2.1 Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on -site operations. 17.2.2 Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of existing building and with Owner's partial occupancy of completed new addition. 17.3 Photographs of existing interior conditions of structure surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to storage, removal operations, etc. must be filed with Owner's Representative prior to start of work. 17.4 Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will not disrupt Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations. 17.5 Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practicable. 17.6 Items indicated to be removed but of salvageable value to Contractor may be removed from structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged item from site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. 17.7 Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect Owners personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work. 17.7.1 Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to occupied portions of building. 17.7.2 Erect temporary covered passageways whenever overhead work is performed. 17.7.3 Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations. 17.7.4 Protect existing floors to remain and new floors with suitable coverings. 17.7.5 Construct temporary insulated dustproof partitions where required to separate areas where noisy or extensive dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks. 17.7.6 Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. 17.7.7 Remove protections at completion of work. 17.7.8 Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. 17.7.9 Erect and maintain dust -proof partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building. 17.7.9.1 Construct temporary barrier partition as required per state and local building codes and rules and OSHA 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR REMODELING WORK *SECTION 1C-4 standards to ensure public and employee safety. 17.7.9.2 Where necessary, construct temporary partition to maintain fire rating required by governing authority. 17.7.9.3 Provide weatherproof closures for exterior openings resulting from demolition work. 17.8 Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure no interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 17.8.1 Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide aftemate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways. Use signalman to ensure safe passage and egress. 17.9 Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame - cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame - cutting operations. Provide fire watch in areas not visible to flame cutter operator. 17.10 Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations. 17.10.1 Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interrdptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities and Owner. 17.10.2 Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations. 17.10.3 Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain. 17.10.4 Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. 17.11 Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain. 17.11.1 Cease operations and notify Owner's Representative immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. 17.11.2 Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soilage or darnage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed. 17.12 Perform selective demolition work in systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work Indicated on Drawings in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations. 17.12.1 Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Unless otherwise noted on Drawings cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain using power- driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power - driven impact tools. Tooth -In masonry where an exposed masonry opening is required. 17.12.2 Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing dangerous f3abies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington and /or improper loads on existing structures. 17.12.3 Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 17.12.4 Demolish foundation walls to depth of not Tess than 12 inches below existing ground surface. Demolish and remove below -grade wood or metal construction. Break up below -grade concrete slabs. 17.12.5 For interior slabs on grade, use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. Use power saw at all times. 17.12.6 Completely fill and compact below -grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. Provide fill consisting of approved earth, gravel, or sand, free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches in diameter, roots, or other organic matter. 17.13 If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit written report to Owner's Representative in accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. 17.14 Salvaged Items: Where indicated on Drawings as "Salvage - Deliver to Owner," carefully remove indicated items, clean, store, and turn over to Owner and obtain receipt. 17.15 Remove from site all debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site. Provide dumpster and locate on site per Owner's Field Representative. 17.15.1 If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 17.15.2 Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site. 17.16 Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work. 18. CUTTING AND PATCHING 18.1 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 18.2 Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safety related components In manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as Intended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety. 18.3 Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR REMODELING WORK *SECTION 1C -5 where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. 18.4 Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 18.4.1 Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 18.4.2 Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. 18.4.3 Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 18.4.4 Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 18.4.5 Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. 18.5 Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 18.5.1 Cut existing construction to provide for Installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 18.6 Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to be retained or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations. 18.6.1 In general, where cutting is required use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 18.6.2 To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces, 18.6.3 Cut through concrete and masonry using cutting machine such as carborundum saw or diamond core drill. 18.6.4 Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division -2 where cutting and patching requires excavatng and backfilling. 18.6.5 By -pass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting, where services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or abandoned. Cut -off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by- passing and cutting. 18.7 Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 18.7.1 Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 18.7.2 Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 18.7.3 Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Where patching occurs in smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken containing the patch, after the patched area has received primer and second coat. 18.7.4 Patch, repair or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance. 18.8 Cleaning: Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features 'before painting or other finishing is applied. Refer to painting and flooring specification sections for other requirements. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 19. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19.1 Refer to Section 1A, 23.1 thru 23.6 for general information and bidding information on as -built drawings, all items apply to Section 1C. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* CONTRACTOR'S NAME: CONTRACTORS ADDRESS: BABIES "R" US 17500 Southcenter Parkway Parkway Supercenter Tukwila, Washington Attn: Bid Committee Re: BABIES "R" US Tukwila, Washington Gentlemen: PROPOSAL FORM *SECTION 1 D -1 Date: The undersigned being familiar with the local conditions affecting the cost of the work with the drawngs and specifications for the proposed above referenced project as prepared by URS Greiner, Inc., 3950 Sparks Drive, S.E., Grand Rapids, Michigan 49546, hereby proposes and agrees if this proposal is accepted to enter into a contract to supply any labor, materials, services and equipment necessary for the complete execution of all general construction work in strict accordance with the plans and specifications for a lump sum of: DOLLARS ($ ) Write Out in Words Write in Figures and not more than _ Consecutive Calendar Days (not to exceed 120 days construction condition date listed in specification). This bid is based upon proprietary brands as shown on plans and /or specified. The undersigned further proposes and agrees hereby to commence work with an adequate force and equipment immediately after being notified in writing to do so, and to complete all work as required by the plans and specifications within the number of consecutive calendar days as ibmized above. In submitting this bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner or his representative to reject any or all bids, and it is agreed that this bid may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) days from bid date. It is further acknowledged that, after thorough examination of the site, drawings and specifications, the above quoted prices do not include any changes or substitutions to specified materials or methods. Any proposed changes or substitutions are itemized by attachment herewith for consideration noting the appropriate Add or Deduct amount. (Reference documents for specifically requested alternates.) We propose to subcontract the following items of work to other firms as follows: Item of Work Subcontractor Name and Address At the time of submission of this proposal, the undersigned has received the following addenda (if any): Addendum No. Date By (Typed) By (Signature) Title Official Address Telephone Attest: Secretary Enclosures: Exhibit A (Pages 1 thru 4) SEAL Exhibit B (Pages 1 thru 2) Exhibit C (Pages 1 of 1) Exhibit D (Pages 1 of 1) 14 11 Name of Firm DIVISION 1* PROPOSALFORM • •• ' . ' • • • THE FOLLOWING EXHIBITS A (PAGES 1 THRU 4) , • , ;;;• B (PAGES 1 THRU 2), C (PAGES 1 OF:1), AND D (PAGES 1 OF 1) ARE TO BE USED BY : , , - • ;• .• BIDDERS IN SUBMITTING THEIR PROPOSALS TO „, "• ' ; ' OWNER. THESE SAME EXHIBITS WILL BE MADE AN ; , • ATTACHMENT TO THE CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND THE SUCCESSFUL CONTRACTOR. • „ , • DIVISION 1* PROPOSAL FORM PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR DESCRIPTION DIVISION 1 - GENERAL CONDITIONS 1 -010 Temporary Facilities $ 1 -020 Temporary Utilities $ 1 -030 Supervision $ 1 -040 Administrative (Inc. Insurance) $ 1 -050 Surveyors $ 1 -060 Clean Up $ 1 -070 Security $ 1 -080 Miscellaneous $ TOTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS DIVISION 2 - SITE IMPROVEMENTS 2 -010 Demolition 2 -020 Site Clearing / Grading 2 -030 Utilities Storm Drains $ Sanitary Sewers $ Water Service $ Total Utilities $ 2 -040 Building Excavation & Backfill $ 2 -050 Bituminous Paving, Striping, Stops, Signs $ 2 -060 Landscaping $ 2 -070 Miscellaneous $ 2 -080 Pile Installation $ 2 -090 Site Concrete $ DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 3 -010 Building Foundations, Slab & Sidewalks at Building Installation. 3 -020 Concrete Steel Reinforcing Babies "R" Us - Tukwlja. Washington EXHIBIT A Project Cost Breakdown of Major Categories of Work TOTAL CONCRETE TOTAL SITE IMPROVEMENTS $ *SECTION 1 D -3 AMOUNT 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* PROJECT NAME DESCRIPTION DIVISION 4 - MASONRY 4 -010 Masonry DIVISION 5 - STEEL Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington PROPOSAL FORM EXHIBIT A TOTAL MASONRY 5 -010 Structural Steel $ 5 -020 Miscellaneous Steel $ 5 -030 Steel Erection $ TOTAL STEEL DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK 6 -010 Carpentry TOTAL CARPENTRY DIVISION 7 - ROOFING & MOISTURE CONTROL 7 -010 Roofing $ 7 -020 Flashing $ 7 -030 Metal Roofing and Siding $ 7 -040 Insulation $ 7 -050 Caulking $ TOTAL ROOFING & MOISTURE CONTROL DIVISION 8 - DOORS. WINDOWS. GLASS 8 -010 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames $ 8 -020 Glass, Glazing & Aluminum $ 8 -030 Finish Hardware $ TOTAL DOORS, GLASS & HARDWARE CONTRACTOR *SECTION 1 D=4 PAGE2OF4 AMOUNT • PAGE 3 OF 4 05/05/98, :.. C. DIVISION 1* PROJECT NAME DESCRIPTION DIVISION 9- FINISHES PROPOSAL FORM EXHIBIT A CONTRACTOR 9-010 Painting Interior Painting Exterior Painting Total Painting 9-020 Ceramic Tile 9-030 VCT/Resilient Flooring 9-040 Acoustical Ceiling 9-050 Drywall & Associated Framing 9-060 EIFS & Stucco TOTAL FINISHES $ DIVISION lo - SPECIALTIES 10-010 Toilet Partitions 10-020 Toilet Accessories 10-030 Miscellaneous Items 10-040 OSI Installation TOTAL SPECIALTIES DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL 15-010 HVAC 15-020 Sprinkler 15-030 Plumbing $ Within 5' of Building Outside 5' of Building Sub-Total Plumbing Rabies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington TOTAL MECHANICAL MURIA •SECTION 1 D-5 AMOUNT PAGE4OF 4OF • 05/05/98' ••• „.„ DIVISION 1* PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR DESCRIPTION DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL 16 -010 Electrical (Withing 5' of Building) 16 -020 Electrical (Outside 5' of Building) 34 -010 Sign Installation TOTAL SIGN INSTALLATION CONTRACTOR SUB -TOTAL 20 -999 Overhead and Profit TOTAL OVERHEAD AND PROFIT 50 -010 Deductions Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington TOTAL ELECTRICAL TOTAL DEDUCTIONS . . 60 -010 Alternates TOTAL ALTERNATES PROPOSAL FORM GRAND TOTAL *SECTION 1D-6 AMOUNT DIVISION 1* PROPOSAL. FORM EXHIBIT B Unit Pricing NATURE OF UNIT OF WORK MEASURES PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR pull( Oed Rock Removal - by blasting, including removal of materials from site: Dull( RockRerpoval - by ripping w /D -8 Cat, w/ hydraulic ripper, including removal of material from site: Tre ch ,R pck emoval - up to 5' -0" deep by 3 - wide as required for utility lines) by jack ammer. Materials to be removed from site: Trench cGk Removal up to 5' -0" deep 33 -0' wiide (as required for utility p lines) by ripping w/235 Caterpillar. Materials removed from site: Trench Be Rtogk Rem - up to 5' -0" deep by 3 - ' widde (as required for utility lines) by blasting and machine. Materials removed from site: TrencJ BgdRock Removal - up to 10' -0" deep by 3-0 wide (as required for utility lines) by ripping w/235 Caterpillar. Materials removed from site: Trench L Rogls Removal - up to 10' -0" deep by -0" wide (as required for utility fines) by blasting and machine. Materials removed from site: TrQ h Earth Exfavption - by Case 580, to 8 deep, including removal of material from site by machine as necessary: Mass earth excavation - by D -8 Cat or pans, including removal of material from site: Control FIII - as measured compacted in- placed, and including placement and compaction as per specs: Using On -Site Materials Using Imported Materials Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington C.Y. *SECTION 1D-7 PAGE 1 OF 2 DIVISION 1 PROPOSAL FORM EXHIBIT B (Continued) PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR NATURE OF UNIT OF WORK MEASURES Granular FHI - 3/4" crushed stone from off-site in place, and tamped: Ton Reinforced _Concrete - additional depth of column piers, including forms and rebars: (Excavation C.Y. Excluded) ReiriforCggd Concrete - additional depth of foundation walls, including forms and rebars: (Excavation C.Y. Excluded) Concrete $idew Ik - (4" thick, including mesh reinforcing): C.Y. Paving Subgraoe - as per specifications: Heavy Section S.Y. Light Section S.Y. Paving bituryJinoys surface course overlay as per specifications: S.Y. Paving Concrete Surface - as per specifications: S.Y. Qg�ncret Cu b' q - 4,000 psi, in place: (Excavation & Stone Base Excluded) L.F. Di of excess excavated r m u Trench Masonry Pile Installation C.Y. C.Y. S.F. L.F. *SECTION 1 D -8 PAGE 2 OF 2 •7, DIVISION 1* • PROJECT NAME CONTRACTOR Miscellaneous Steel: Miscellaneous Railings Stairs Lumber Roofing Ceramic Tile Gypsum Board Windows, Doors Pile Installation Babies " R" Us - Tukwila Washington_ PROPOSAL FORM EXHIBIT C Material Quantity Estimates QUANTITY DESCRIPTION Excavation Cut and reuse on -site cu. yd. Cut and haul off-site cu. yd. Import and place controlled fill cu. yd. Total Excavation cu. yd. Pavement Subgrade sq. yd. Pavement Bituminous Surface sq. yd. Pavement Concrete Surface sq. yd. Concrete cu. yd. Reinforced Rods ton Masonry sq. ft. Structural Steel ton Joists and Joist Girders ton Decking sq. ft. ton lin.ft. riser bd. ft. 100 sf. sq. ft. sq. ft. unit *SECTION 1 D -9 PAGE 1 OF 1 DIVISION 1• PROJECT CONTRACTOR 1)Landscaping /Shrubbery/Fences 2)Storm Drainage /Off -site 3)Sanitary Sewer /Lateral /On -site 4)Storm Drainage /Main /On -site 5)Storm Drainage /Lateral /On -site $ 6)Sanitary Sewage /Main /On -site $ 7)Water Lines /Main /On - site $ 8)Primary Power /On -site $ 9)Telephone Equipment/Exterior $ 10)Irrigation System/Canals/Waterways $ 11)Approaches /Apron /Sidewalks $ 12)Parking Lots /Roads /Railroads (including Blacktop) $ 13)Fence /Exterior $ 14)Wharfs /Docks /Bridges $ (X)Sub -Total (Y)AII Other Costs ( X) + (Y) MUST EQUAL TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE Costs Completed by: Babies MR" Us - Tukwila. Washington PROPOSAL FORM EXHIBIT D Cost Collection Sheet $ $ (Sign Name) (Title) (Name of Contractor) (Date) *SECTION 1D-10 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* CIVIL Structural Mechanical Electrical Provided by: KPFF Consulting Engineers Portland, Oregon (503) 227 -3251 ARCHITECTURAL A0.0 Cover Sheet SP1 Not Used SP2 Not Used A1.0 Floor Plan F1 Fixture Plan (For Information Only) A1.1 Finish Plan and Finish Schedules A1.2 Reflected Ceiling Plans and Finish Details A1.3 Roof Plan A1.4 Roof Details A2.0 Enlarged Vestibule Plan and Receiving Plan A2.1 Enlarged Toilet Area Plan and Office Plan A3.0' Vestibule Plan Details A4.0 Not Used A4.1 Not Used A4.2 Interior Elevations A4.3 Interior Elevations A4.4 Interior Elevations A5.0 Vestibule Wall Sections A5.1 Not Used A5.2 Not Used A5.3 Interior Wall Sections A6.0 Not Used A6.1 Not Used A6.2 Interior Miscellaneous Details A7.0 Door Schedule and Details A7.1 Door Details A8.0 Architectural Miscellaneous Metals Details A9.0 Reflected Ceiling Pian Provided by: Benner Stange Associates Architects Lake Oswego, Oregon M1.0 Mechanical Floor Plan M2.0 Enlarged Mechanical Plans M3.0 Mechanical Details M4.0 Mechanical Schedules P1.0 Plumbing Floor Plan P2.0 Toilet Plan and Piping Diagrams P3.0 Plumbing Schedule and Details E1.0 Power Plan E1.1 Racking Power Plan E2,0 Lighting Plan E2.1 Rack and Sign Lighting Plan E3.0 Racking I.D. Plan E4.0 Enlarged Power Plan EFP1 Fire Alarm and Security Cabling Plan EMS1 Energy Management Systems (Novar) E5.0 Electrical Details E6.0 Computer System Wiring Diagram E7.0 Panel Schedules E8.0 Riser Diagram Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington LIST OF DRAWINGS *SECTION 1E-1 05105/98 DIVISION 1" EXHIBIT "A" GUARANTEE DATE: TO: TOYS "R" US, INC. 461 From Road Paramus, New Jersey 07652 The undersigned having heretofore entered into a contract with TOYS "R" US, INC. dated for located at . according to certain plans and specifications as identified in the contract and in accordance with the terms of said contract, do hereby guarantee that all the labor and material fumished and work performed by us under said contract is in conformity with such plans and specifications and authorized alterations thereto and that such materials and equipment installed pursuant to said contract is free from imperfect workmanship, and we agree to repair at our own cost and expense all of the work covered under said contract and change orders which may prove to be defective for a period of year(s) from the date hereof. Furthermore, we agree to repair at our sole cost any work which we may affect or disturb in making the repairs herein contemplated. By: Title: Guarantee Period Begins (Date) Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington EXHIBITS EXHIBIT 'B" SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS TO: TOYS "R" US, INC. 461, From Road Paramus, New Jersey 07652 PROJECT: Babies "R" Us 17500 Southcenter Parkway . . Parkway Supercenter Tukwila, Washington State of: Washington County of: King The undersigned hereby certifies that to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, except as listed below, the Releases or. Waivers of Lien attached hereto include this contractor, all of his subcontractors, all suppliers of materials and equipment, and all performers of work, labor or services who have or may have liens against any property of the Owner arising in any manner out of the performance of the Contract referenced above. EXCEPTIONS: (If none, write "None". If required by the Owner, the subcontractor shall fumish bond satisfactory tothe Owner for each exception.) SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: 1. Contractor's Final Release or Waiver of Liens, conditional upon receipt of final payment. 2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, accompanied by a Ilst thereof. CONTRACTOR: Address: By: Subscribed and sworn before me this day of ;.199 My Commission Expires: •SECTION' 1 F -1 05/05/98 DIVISION 1" EXHIBIT "C" FINAL RELEASE TO: TOYS "R" US, INC. 461, From Road Paramus, New Jersey 07652 WHEREAS, pursuant to contract made by and between, the Owner, hereinafter called CONTRACTOR, for final payment is about to be made, NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and of the sum of DOLLARS $ ) lawful money of the United States being the full and entire sum due upon the completion of the contract aforesaid to the said Contractor in hand paid by receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, said Contractor does hereby remise, release and forever discharge of and from any and all manner of actions, suits, debts, dues, sums of money, accounts, reckonings, bonds, bills, covenants, controversies, agreements, promises, claims, demands and liens whatsoever . in law or in equity which the said Contractor has or may have for or on account of or in connection with the contract aforesaid. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Contractor has caused its name to be hereunto subscribed and its seal to be hereunto affixed this day of nineteen hundred and ATTEST OR WITNESS: (SEAL) CONTRACTOR By: Title: Address: WITNESS By: Title: ',DIVISION 1* - EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F-3 EXHIBIT "D" CONSTRUCTION STAGE PROJECT CHECKLIST prior to Start-up Building Permit(s) Grading Foundation Special Contractor's Construction Schedule Performance Bond (if required) Insurance Certificates Workman's Comp. General /Auto Liability Builder's Risk Other Addenda # During Construction Application for Payment #(s) Change Order #(s) Purchase Orders (critical items) and Contracts Hollow Metal Toilet Partitions .: HVAC Units Parking Lot Fixtures & Poles Doors V.A. Tile Aluminum Storefront Work Specialty Block Close Out Certificate of Occupancy. • "Guarantee Service and Operating manuals Affidavit of Release of Liens Final Release As -Built Mark -Up Drawings Toys "R" Us Tax Forms Punch -out sign -off by designated Owner's Representative Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications is intended to summarize the anticipated work detailed in the plans and specifications relative to each prime contractor's responsibilities. Each contractor is responsible for their respective trade's work as described in addenda and change bulletins. Each contractor shall be familiar with the complete set of project drawings and specifications and must qualify his bid to reflect any items of work that may not be clear at the time of bidding. All work must comply with all project documents. 05/05(98 Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington DIVISION 1* Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 1. General Items 1.4 Contractors shall clean up their own work areas on a daily basis. "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington EXHIBITS 1.1 The Owner will obtain the building permit. Each contractor is responsible: for obtaining all other permits and fees relative to each contractor's trades. 1.2 The Owner will provide four (4) building corner control points and one (1) bench mark elevations point at the start of the project. It is the responsibility of each contractor to replace these points if disturbed by their own personnel. Each contractor shall lay out their own work. 1.3 Each contractor is responsible to coordinate their work with the work of other trades in order to complete all work in accordance with the plans and specifications within the established construction schedule. 1.5 Contractor's as -built drawings must be maintained continuously and transferred into on -site as -built drawing set prior to the covering of the work. 1.7 Information contained herein is for general information. Project scope may not entail specific work referenced herein. Contractor shall note exceptions where they occur and qualify his bid accordingly. *SECTION 1F-5 1.6 Each Contract Scope of Work includes, but shall not be limited to, the Specification Division 1, all Divisions and Sections detailed below for each contract, and all pertinent information contained within the Construction Documents, addenda and change bulletins. DIVISION 1". 2. Sitework Contract EXHIBITS Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 2, Sections 2A, B, C, D, E, G, H, M, N and Q. - Erosion control - Clearing and removal of debris from site. Protection of tree and facilities to remain. - Topsoil removal and remove . excess from site. - Borrow materials by contractor and excess materials hauled off- - Grading, proof rolling, compaction and clean up. Rock removal. - Placing of top soil to final grades. - As- builts of all installed items. - De- watering of open excavations. - Storm system to within 5' of bldg. Asphalt paving and base. - Pavement painting and stripes at loading dock. - Wheel stops. - Water system to within 5' of bldg. - Sanitary system to within 5' of bldg. - Demolition - Building pad including floor subbase and compaction to +1- .1 foot balanced. - Concrete curbs and gutters. - Handicap signs. - Parking lot signs. - Parking lot sweeping. - Remove waste concrete and demolition materials from site. - Excavation and backfill of bldg. foundations. - Painting of light pole bases. - Protect and barricade open excavations. - Traffic control and protect new paving. - Weed barriers at landscape areas. Final grading by landscaper. Seeding and landscaping by Landscape Contractor. Soil treatment by Concrete Contractor. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton site. *SECTION 1F-6 .. DIVISION 1 • EXHIBITS *SECTION :1 F -7 Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 3. Concrete Contract Refer to Specification Divisions 1, Division 2, Section 21, Division 3, and Division 7, Section A. - Foundation layout for concrete and excavations. - Mix designs. - Formwork. - Concrete reinforcing and wire fabric. - Pilasters, piers and grade beams. Slabs and pads for equipment and at exterior doors. Sidewalks adjacent to building. - Monolithic curb at sidewalks at front of bldg. by Concrete Contractor. - Site light pole bases, grout and layout. - Installation of embedded steel items furnished by steel supplier. - Vapor barrier and perimeter insulation. - Dowels for masonry walls and placement. - Concrete fill at metal pan stairs. - Excavation and placement of interior and exterior bollards including concrete; bollards furnished by steel supplier. - Saw cutting control joints and flash patching joints. Grinding of construction joints for VCT. - Expansion joint materials and zip cap at caulked joints. - Clean up. - Retaining wall and finish. - Soil treatment. Testing by Owner. - Waterproof foundations, as required. • Curbs and gutters by Sitework Contractor. • Epoxy floor sealer by Painting Contractor: 05/05/9Q3. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. WashingtQ4 DIVISION 1' EXHIBITS Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 4. Masonry Contract Refer to Specification Division 1 and Division 4, Section 4A. Block and coloring. Mortar and coloring. Masonry rebar and joint reinforcement. Grout. Installation of misc. steel embedded items furnished by Owner.:, Installation of door frames in masonry walls fumished by Owner; Cleaning all masonry, final and daily. Masonry insulation. All pre -cast or block window sills. Masonry flashings. Control and expansion joints. Bond beams. Quality control testing by Masonry Contractor. Layout. Cover /protect walls. Shoring and bracing of walls. Grout all cores where expansion anchors are shown (i:e RWCguards and hand rails). Welding of vertical rebar to top of lintels. Glass block (TRU & BRU only) Water repellent furnished and installed by Painting Contractor. aaj2les "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington .... DIVISION 1* Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 5. Steel Supply Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 5, Sections 5A, B, C, D, E and F. Fabricate and deliver to job site all structural steel. * Beams * Columns * Bar joists * Steel joist girders * Structural steel erection bolts * Metal roof deck * Metal floor deck (if required) * Shop prime paint * Column anchor bolts and templates * Masonry embedded anchor bolts at roof and mezzanine * Joist bridging * Weld washers or screws for roof deck. Fabricate and deliver to job site all miscellaneous steel. * Clip angles for roof system. * Gondola channels * Hanging rods * Bollards * Steel stairs * Angles at mezzanine (if required) * Perimeter angles * Rain leader guards * Stair rails and sleeves * Overhead door and compactor door frame channels * Steel lintels and other steel items shown on architectural dimensioned on structural dwgs. Sign hanger conduit is by Electrical Contractor, All expansion anchors are by Steel Erector. EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F -9 6. Steel Erection Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 5, Sections 5A, B, C, D, E and F. dwgs., but not shown or Installation of all structural and misc. steel furnished by Steel Supply Contract. Furnish welding rods and all equipment for installation. Inventory all items delivered by steel supply contractor. Excludes installation of misc. steel and bolts embedded in masonry and concrete work. Includes furnishing and installing all expansion anchors for miscellaneous steel installation. All cables and etc. to properly brace steel during erection. - Certification of welders required. Sign hanger conduit by Electrical Contractor. Steel lintels and channel door frames installed by Masonry Contractor. Installation of hand rails and railings by Carpentry Contractor. Installation of bollards by Concrete Contractor Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F-10 Exhibit "E"- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 7. Carpentry Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, Division 5, Section 5F, Division 6, Section 6A, Division 8, Sections 8A, G, H, I, Division 10, Sections 10A, B, C and D. Detex alarm (by Owner) Structural studs and runners for mezz. floor and ceiling (if required). Temporary enclosures and protection. - Millwork. - Shelves and rods. Blocking for millwork, toilet partitions, grab bars, etc. Wood framing and wood joists and joist hangers, etc. Preformed plastic laminate wainscots (by Owner) - Wood trim. Plywood for equipment backboards. Wood fire-retardant and preservative treatment. Coping wood and wood cants on roof and at curbs. Fiberglass building insulation (batt.) - Hollow metal doors and frames and anchors. Install double acting door, impact doors, etc. (by Owner) (TRU Only). Receive, unload, store, protect owner furnished items to be installed under this contract. - Finish hardware. Toilet partitions and hardware (by Owner). Toilet room accessories F/I by contractor and install Owner furnished items. Bumpers, corner guards and wall rails. Stainless steel corner guards (if required) by Owner. Install wood counters furnished by Owner. Install dock seals furnished by Owner. Install safe furnished by Owner. Install dock bumpers furnished by Owner. Install hand rails and sleeves furnished by Owner. Install hand rails and railing furnished by Steel Supplier. Furnish and install on 12" x 24" shelf and brackets in equipment room. Contractor shall core drill floor for installation of handrail sleeves (if required). Pre-Fab low-height walls by Owner (TRU Only) (if required) Column sheet material by Owner. Install double acting impact doors, etc. (by Owner) (TRU & BRU Only) - Box corners and infills at store fixtures. 8. Drywall & Framing Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, Division 5, Section 5F, Division 9, Section 9B; an d Division 13, Section 13A. Furnish and install all framing for sheetrock walls. Furnish and install all sheetrock on framing. All drywall accessories. All taping. Framing and board for exterior ceramic tile band (if required). Install HM door frames in drywall framing. HM frames furnished by Carpentry Contractor. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 05/05/98 ) C DIVISION 1* Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 9. Acoustical Ceilings Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 9, Section 9D. - Furnish all materials and labor to install all acoustical ceiling system. - Coordinate layout of work with mechanical and electrical contractors. 10. Caulking Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 7, Section 7G. At flashings and counter flashings adjoining wall areas. Colored caulking to match adjacent surfaces. Masonry expansion and control joints. Interior and exterior. Backer rod. Doors windows, grilles, and frames interior and exterior. Drywall abuts differing materials. Ceramic tile. Two year guarantee. Coping at parapets on both sides. Caulking of penetrations through walls and floors are by contractor making penetrations. Caulk top and bottom of wall bumpers and at corner guards. Caulk sidewalk and cart cub expansion joints. 11. Roofing Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 7, Section 7D. Built up roof / Various Roof Alternates. - Roof insulation. Roof and smoke hatches with safety post. Insulation fasteners. Flashings and counter flashings. Coping. - Gutters. Scuppers. Downspouts. - Entry canopy (BRU Only). Cant strips. Pitch pans. Gravel stops. Caulking as related to this trade (Le. Reglet, etc.). - Skylights Counter flashing on top of RTU curbs by HVAC Contractor. Wood blocking by Carpentry Contractor. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F -11 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* EXHIBITS Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 12. Windows & Glass Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 8, Sections 8B and C. Aluminum frames and framing. Caulking of aluminum frames as related to this trade. Storefront windows and glass with stops. Borrow lights for doors. Mirror glass at CPU and tower area and vision panels. Vision panels. Breakmetal. Aluminum Curtainwall System. Coordinate work with automatic door installer. 13. Ceramic Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, Division 9, Section 9C, and Division 13, Section 13A. - Wall and floor tile in restrooms. Colored grout. Minimum floor preparation included. Exterior ceramic tile bands and waterproofing (if required). Exterior tile furnished by Owner (if required). - Unload, inventory, protect and store tile. - Interior tile F/I by contractor. - Marble thresholds full width. Spare tile. 14. VCT Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 9, Section 9E. Minimum floor preparation and flash patching. Sweep /scrape floor. - Clear adhesive. - Cove base. Slab primer. Reducer strips. Metal edge strips. Resilient edge strips. Roll floors during installation. Cleaning, strip flooring and waxing. VCT tile furnished by Owner. Rubber risers and treads. Contractor to receive, unload, store, protect and install. VCT: Floor icons by Owner (if required) (TRU Only). Cutting and fitting of race track. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington *SECTION 1F-12 05/05/ @8 DIVISION 1* EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F-13 Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 15. Painting Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, Division 4, Section 4A (12.2), and Division 9, Sectio ns 9G, and 9H. F/I vinyl wall coverings. - Paint all finish surfaces. Paint drywall. - Paint misc. steel. Paint primed surfaces. - Paint structural steel. - Paint roof deck (sprayed). Paint conduits and piping where adjacent surfaces are painted. - Paint wood surfaces. s E Surface preparations and cleaning. Paint H.M. doors and frames. Masonry sealer at walls and parapets. Exposed gas lines interior and exterior. Epoxy floor sealer. Graphics (if required). Prime touch -up structural steel. Specified equipment. Light supports and hangers. Stairs and ladders. Paint conduits to store sales fixtures after installation by electrical contractor and after painting ceiling. Exposed ductwork in sales area. 16. Plumbing Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 15, Sections 15A, B and C. Sanitary system to 5' outside building. Domestic water to 5' outside building. Cast iron sanitary piping underground. - Copper plumbing lines. Piping insulation. - Waste and vents. Provide temporary water connections for all trades at designated points. - Floor drains. - Fixtures and trim. Hot water heater and supports for heater. - Clean and disinfection. Storm piping interior if R.D. are used. Backflow preventers as required. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F -14 Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 17. Mechanical Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 15, Sections 15A, B, D and E. Ventilation fans and accessories and controls (E.F. furnished by Owner). - Gas fired unit heaters. Air Curtains furnished by Owner (if required). Unload, store, protect all owner furnished items and installed by contractor. top units furnished by Owner. Automatic controls (some partially furnished by Owner). Conduit for control wiring. Service requirements. Gas piping and blocking on roof. - Test and balance. Interlocking controls. - Ductwork. - Duct insulation. Volume control dampers. Register, grilles and diffusers. Flexible duct. Install RTU curbs and tapered blocking as required. Concentric duct package insulated. Retrofit duct work around burglar bars. - Flue vents. Gas to generator with specified plug cock. All equipment and Tstat i.d. plates. Furnish and install smoke detectors, if required, including power. Coordinate work with energy management system contractor. Supply and install all ductwork, and transitions. Diffusers for large units to from RSI (on dwgs.). 18. Fire Protection Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 15, Sections 15A, B and G. Fire protection water system to 5' outside building. Complete system and testing. - Valves. Fire department connections. - Flow switch with contacts. - Alarm bell. Sprinkler heads. Head guards. Auxiliary drains & signage. Inspector's test ports. Spare heads and box. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington be purchased 05/05/98 DIVIS 1 Exhibit "E "- Contract Scope of Work Clarifications, continued 19. Electrical Contract Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 16, Sections 16A, B, C, and E. Receive, inventory, store, protect owner furnished items as listed in Section 1J and on drawings and install same: All power conduit. - CT enclosure. Light and power systems including timers. Mounting starters and controls. Grounding. Phone and security conduits. Power wiring for other contractors. Motor starters. Push button stations. Temporary Tight and power with subfeeds into building: Step down transformer at pylon sign if required. Conduits shall be installed minimum of one foot below subgrade. One junction box per building sign letter. Wire and conduit to store sales fixtures. Final wiring of compactor and bailer. Equipment and disconnect i.d. plates and panel identification plates. All trenching, backfill & compaction for site Tight conduit and ground rods at Tight poles: - Conduit to be no closer than 2" from roof deck. No exposed conduit allowed in sales areas except in ceiling areas. Provide temporary power to designated points including 220 volt power as required. Coordinate work with energy management system installer, communications,; security systems and data systems. Install rigid conduit sign hangers. 20. Exterior Insulations Finish System gables "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington EXHIBITS *SECTION 1 F -15 Refer to Specification Division 1, and Division 7, Section 7J. Base coat, finish coat and reinforcing backing, accessories, trims Joint sealers, and fillers. Insulation board and adhesives. Texture and color. EXHIBIT "F" - CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE DIVISION 1* 14 EXHIBITS ,•• • . • • • *SECTION 1F-16 The attached construction schedule represents a prototypical project, and is included as an example - • only The Contractor is required to submit a project construction schedule on a similar blank form provided by the Owner's Representative in accordance with Section 1A Paragraph 3.4 .- co _ 1 TOYS 'Ails AcclvIty CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ,111 1LAA 1111 "0.TO �M�® ® ®..® M� . WM1 ®� l/�® +A•, M. 1P0R 1 MLR WI DUI Mtt► olilQSi�O�i ?isiliD➢si NIAT �isoIii4i8Z?i8i�i99�i2al�iloi� INITA � OINN NE: E :E:E MIONE M EEE : EEERME M E R MI IM MOV E I MMOEEE:';; E w.■■..1 ■ .....■.../■■.■■..■■■...■.■..■■. ■.■.■.■■w■...■MM■■M■M.M ■MM/M■M■ ■.... ■1 � I. M■..■../.. M..■ M..■■MM..M..■. ■ ■.M■ ■....M■■.■...M..1■M.U.M..■ ■■■■.■■ ■. MM.■M■ M.■.■ M. M..M■.■..MM■..■■ ■M■. ■M.■■...M.M..■...MM.M.MMMM. ■...... .....■.........■....MM■..M..M.■ ■....M.M.■..M■M■.■..M.M...■MMM■ ■■..1..i ■■.■..■■■ .. . .....■■.■■.■..■■. ■. ■.■■..■.■■■■■■■..■.■■....■■...■ ....... C./...■.. M■.M M.■ M■......■■M.■■ ■...■MM.MM..■.M......M. ■.M■M■M■ . ■ ■..■ M■.■■/.■.■■.■■■■■M.■M■ M■ MM.MM■■ ■ ■■MM■ ■■■ *■.■■.■■■■■.... ■.M. ■ ■. /. ■■ ■ ■M■■ ■■ ■■■M ■M■ ■M■■.■ ■M■.■■■■ ■M■ ■■.■...■ ■M..M■ ■M■ ■..MM.M.M ■ ■. /. ■.I ■■..■■M■ M■■M■■ l■...■■.../■..... ■MM..M.....■■ ■ ■.MM■ ■M.....■..■■ ■M..■■. MM ■..MM ■■ M■M M■...■■■.M■ ■..M/M.S.M..M.■ ■..M.■MM.M■.MM.■ ■■ ■.... 111 .M.■■.M ■MMM.MM.M......Mw.M..M.M.w.M.M■ ..M■M.MM.MMwM.M.MM■Mn■ ■■ ■ ■. ■1 .■MM. ■.■./.■■M■■MM...../■■....M....■ ■■..■.■./.M...M■..M..MM.MM..... ■.wA... ■M. w..■■ . M MM w. MMM■.M■.. M. M■■MMM.M■MwM.■ ■.M■M■..MM.Mrr 11■ ■1■■■■■. ■ ■... ■1.M� MM M■■■M■■■M■ M■ M■.■■■M■M.■M■■M■.MMMM.. ■■ ■MM ■.■ ■MM■■..M.M.M.MM■ 11111111111111111 ...........M.......w.......■.■. ■■■■..■■■■M■..C■■M...M. ■MMMMMM■ ■ ■ ■ ■... ■w..■MM■.■M■...MM M.■■■■M■■■.M■■ ■M■Mw■M■■ ■MM■..■■MM■..M.M■MMMM■ M■■■M.. M■■M■MMM■M■ ■■■M■.M.■.■■ ■ . .M .■MMM..M....MMM IERO M.MM.■ ■■■ ■. ■ ■ ..M.■1 :..M■■■. M■■■■■M■ M■■■M.M■■MM.M■. M.M.■.MM■MM■M ■MM■..■MM.■MM■ /M.. ■.M /... MMM.■..■■ ■■M■ ■■.M M■.....MM■■ ■M ■M■ .■..■. MM.M......M..MM.MM ■w ■.. /. ■.M.� M .■ ■ M...■■..■�MM■■....M.■ M...■■ ■.MM..■ ■.M. ■ ■. ■■........■..M■M■ ■ ■....■MM■.1 ■...■....■MM ■ ■ ■.MM...■■..M■ ..r ■■■■ .■M■.■M..........■■MM.rMM.r■ ■ ■ ■ ■... M...■I ■■■■M■■■■MM..MMMMMM.M■■.■.■M... M ■ ■.■M.M......MM.M...MM..MMM..■ ■. ■ ■........ ■MM. ■MM■■w..MM■■M■...■ M.■ ■■ ■ .M MM M MMM ...M...MM■M.M.M■.MM..M■ ....... .... C ■■M■ w ■M■■■M■MM■■.M..■.■MM■ ■■M...MM . ...■.. ..■MMM..MM ■MM■MM■■.MMu■ •■..... ■ ■..M..■..■.M...■...■.... M. ■.■MM■■ ■.MM..MMM■■M...M.■■..■ MM■ ■ ■ww.■ MMM.� ■■■.■MMEMMIO. .■■M .■■ MMM...■ ■M.M..M■■■■M......■M.. ..M M.MM.w ■ ■ ■ ■. ■� M■■.. M.■.M.....M.■■.■■.■■...M■■■■■■■ M. ■.■.■M.■■■.■■■■.MM...MM..M..■ . ■. /1 ■1 ..M.. M.■.■■M■.■M■M.■■ MMM.M.■.■■■.■ M■ ■M.M..M■■.M.. ■..MMMMM...MMM.rrw ■.....1 ..M....■M■■. M■■... ■ ■ ■■ .....M..■.■.M■M. ■■....w. ■ ■M■ ■.....M....■ ■. ■... MMM■. ■MM■....M■■.■ MM.■■.■M■........M ■■M.■■.M..MMM..M..■ . .■w..■ ■.MM■M.MMMw ■..... ...■.M.MM...M.■ wM■■...M. ■■M.M.....■..M...uM.MM..MMMMM.■ ■..MI.. MM M..■■■....M.. MMM...■..■M.. M.. .■■...■.■..M.■.MM.....MM.M.M..■ ■ ■ ■..1 ...■. ■■M■■M.■■■■ M■M.M..■■M■..MM.■.■ M MM ■M.■ ■■■■M ■M■■■■MM■■MM■.MM■..■ ■..... M. .M M...M.M.. M... ■ . . .■.. M..MMM.M■MM. M■■..MM.M..■ ■M.■ ■.M..■M.M. ■..1 ■. M■� M M./■■..M■.■■ M■ MMM..M■M.■■■.■.■ M.■M■■M..■....■.... ■M... ■M■M.M■ ■..MI ■.I ■.■.M..■ M■■M■MM■ MM■■■.M.w.M...■ ■..M.M■..MMMM.M..M..MMM ■.M■MMM■ 11111111 AINAM 111 111011 'AMC? �� ►11 /AAt• AT Oat N n • a DIVISION 1* EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F-1 EXHIBIT "G" - MANPOWER STATUS The attached manpower chart represents the approved format for submission` made by the Contractor in accordance with. Section .1A Paragraph 8.2.5: This example . shows manpower allocation for an average and shall not be construed as representative of manpower requirements for this project Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington AVERAGE MANPOWER (Excluding She Work) Mtn Dava Comer' 339.4 MtsOnry 447.7 Steel 1 59.8 Roofing 133.2 Elect. 441.1 Plumbing 62.8 HYAC 68.0 Sprinkler 71.0 Painting 103.6 Finishes 343.1 TOTAL. 2169.5 Mtn HMS 2715.2 3581.8 1278.4 1065.8 3528.8 500.8 544.0 568.0 828.8 2744.8 17356.0 NOTE: Average manpower data is being provided for Informational purposes only and does not Include ilia work. Oait was complied from prototypical Toys • R' 115 buildings. cc 0 50 40 30 20 I0 TOYS "R" US GROUND UP PROTOTYPE MANPOWER (Excluding Sllework) r 1 20 40 60 80 GAYS (Excluding Sot. & Sun.) i 100 120 140 • DIVISION 1 • EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F-20 EXHIBIT "H" Contractor'S COST COLLECTION SHEETS "RETURN TO TOYS "R" US TAX DEPT UPON COMPLETION** PROJECT: TOYS "R" US, INC. BABIES "R" US - Tukwila, Washington 1) Landscaping /Shrubbery/Fences 2) Storm Drainage /Off Site 3) Sanitary Sewer /Lateral /On Site 4) Storm Drainage /Main /On Site 5) Storm Drainage /Lateral /On Site 6) Sanitary Sewage /Main /On Site 7) Water Lines /Main /On Site 8) Primary Power /On Site 9) Telephone Equipment 10) Irrigation System /Canals/Waterways 11) Approaches /Apron /Sidewalks 12) Parking Lots /Roads /Railroads/ (including Blacktop) 13) Fence /Exterior (X) Sub -Total (Y) All Other Costs TOTAL (X) + (Y) (MUST EQUAL TOTAL CONTRACT PRICE) COST COMPLETED BY: (Sign Name) (Title) (Name of Contractor) (Date) Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washincton 05/05/98 DIVISION 1 • EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F-21 EXHIBIT "H -1" SUPPLEMENTAL CONTRACTOR COST COLLECTION SHEET (COMPLETE COLUMN (A) ONLY) PART I PROJECT: Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 1. Framing and /or Gypsum Board Partition for Security Cage (Room), Customer Pick -Up Area, Lunchroom, Training Room (excluding Bathrooms) 2. Concrete Equipment Pad for Trash Compactor 3. Interior Doors and Frames including Hardware 4. Electrical Service (including conduit) for the following components:- Trash Compactor, Store Sign, Exit Lights, Lift Dock Light, Automatic Door Operators, Time Clock, Public Address /Muzak System, Microwave Oven in Lunchroom, Computer Systems, Registers 5. Suspended Ceiling (including Gridwork) for Restrooms, Breakroom, Training Room, Mother's Room (BRU) and Hallways 6. Installation of Stainless Steel Register Rails and Metal Chutes (if required) 7. Rubber Base Molding in Lunchroom, Security Room, Training Room and Hallways 8. Toilet and Plumbing Items (including Cold Water Line for Vending Machine), Toilet Partitions, Grab Bars, Paper Towel, Feminine Napkin and Toilet Tissue Dispensers, Feminine Napkin Disposal Units, Trash Cans, Mirrors, Soap Dish or Dispenser 9. Other Contractor Installed Items (not included elsewhere) for Kids "R" Us Stores Only a) Electrical Service to Duplicating Machines, Kids "R" Us Sign, Accent Lighting/Track Lighting in Display and Selling Areas, Globe Lighting in Fitting Room Cubicles, etc.) b) Gypsum Board Partitions and Rubber Base Molding located in Office Area, including Office Manager, Infants, Little Boys, Big Boys, Little Girls, Lingerie, Toddlers, Photo, Shoes, Lounge, Utility Room c) Tile Ceiling in Office Area and Lighting Grid over Register Area d) Finished Carpentry including Trim and Woodwork, Laminated Plastic Covered Plywood Countertops and Fronts Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington (A) (B) (C) Direct . Allocated Total Cost Cost Cost 05/05/98 DIVISION 1• : , EXHIBITS *SECTION 1F -22 SUPPLEMENTAL Contractor COST COLLECTION SHEET (COMPLETE COLUMN (A) ONLY) PART I PROJECT: Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington (A) (B) Direct Allocated Total Cost ; Cost Cost e) Interior Doors, Hardware and Bumperguards f) Mirrors in Fitting Rooms (KRU Only), and Other Mirrors (w) Total Contractor Installed Items Eligible for ITC (Total Items 1 thru 10) (x) All Other Contractor Expenses (Contract Price excluding ITC Items and Architectural, Engineering, Profit and General Conditions • (y) Total (W) + (X) (z) Total Architectural Costs, Engineering Costs, Profit and General Conditions Total (Y) + (Z) (must equal Contract Price) EXHIBIT "H -1" Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington DIVISION 1• SOILS REPORT 'SECTION 1G -1 The Soils Report is made available for the convenience of the Contractor. Data on the indicated subsurface conditions are not representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor for the purpose of preparing his bid but these will be at no cost to Owner. 05/05/98 DIVISION 1* PART 1: GENERAL 1. REQUIREMENTS FOR QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTIONS 1.1 The owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide certain quality assurance testing and inspections as enumerated in these specifications. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 1.2 The Contractor will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide other quality assurance testing and inspections as enumerated in these specifi- cations. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the re- quirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 1.3 Materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. 1.4 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. 1.5 At the completion of all work the testing agency shall submit a quality assurance certification (control inspection report for site work, concrete, masonry, structural steel, etc.) signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all work subject to quality assurance testing and inspections has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all other applicable code requirements. Submit a quality assurance certification for each specifications section requiring quality assurance testing and inspections on the attached form. 1.6 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion of the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. 1.7 The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all structural steel operations and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. 1.8 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the buiking official during progress of work for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the testing agency. 1.9 Testing agency personnel shall have their time sheets signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SURVEILLANCE BYA LOCAL PROFESSIONAL *SECTION 1H -1 Copies of signed time sheets must be submitted with all invoices for payment. 1.10 Professional Liability, General Liability and Worker's Compensation Insurance are required. Minimum coverage for Professional Liabiity Insurance is $500,000. 2. SCOPE OF WORK OF QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING AND INSPECTION 2.1 The specification sections requiring quality assurance testing and inspections are shown in Schedule A. Specific requirements are shown in the project specifications for each section. 2.2 Fumish all labor, materials, tools and supplies, and perform operations in connection with quality assurance testing and inspections. 3. SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL 3.1 Where required by local or state code or authority, the Contractor shall retain an Architect or Civil Engineer, licensed in the State, to provide construction surveillance and final sign off of the project. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 • , • _ - • ._ DATE: TO: Attention: RE: Request for Professional Services Quality Assurance Testing & Inspection Babies "R" Us 17500 Southcenter Parkway Parkway Supercenter Tukwila, Washington Gentlemen, QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND Your firm is among those being invited to submit a proposal for the quality assurance testing and inspectbns during the construction of the referenced project. Enclosed for your reference are the following: 1. Project Drawings. 2. Project Specifications. 3. Requirements for Quality Assurance Testing and Inspection. 4. Control Inspection Report Form. 5. Proposal Form. Your proposal for testing should be based on the above criteria and should be specific with the scope of work well defined for a "lump sum" fee. The scope of work definition should include the anticipated number of man hours of each job classification that will be necessary to complete the field testing, lab work, reports, supervision, etc. in accordance with the bid form provided. Include as part of your proposal hourly rates for any additional testing and/or supervision that may be necessary, and submit your proposal on theenclosed form with supplements as required. Please note the attached certification forms which you will be required to execute. Professional Liability, General Liability, and Worker's Compensation Insurance are required. Minimum coverage for Professional Liability Insurance is $500,000. Please indicate in your proposal any additional costs required to upgrade your current Professional Liability Insurance coverage to the value specified. If you feel your firm is not able or qualified to propose on all applicable categories of the bid form, please prepare your fee for the portions for which your firm would like to be considered. Submit your lump sum proposal by on the bid form provided including unit prices and estimated quantities as requested to: Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington TOYS "R" US, INC. West Coast Engineering Center 1624 Army Court Stockton, California 95206 Attention: "Mr. J. R. Valentine. C.P.M." With a copy to: Rudy L. Baker URS Greiner, Inc. 3950 Sparks Drive SE Grand Rapids, Michigan 49546 Attention: "Rudy L, Baker. Protect Manaaer" 05/05/98 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND DIVISION 1• SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL *SECTION 1H -3 Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington PROPOSAL BREAKDOWN PROJECT: Babies "R" Us LOCATION: 17500 Southcenter Parkway, Parkway Supercenter, Tukwila, Washington I. GRADING AND SITEWORK Site Monitoring - "On -call' basis monitoring of site preparation and fill placement, review of compaction procedures, monitoring of utility installation, checking soil moisture, determining percent compaction, etc. 1. In -Place Density Tests (Level II or III Technician or Engineer) a. Mass Grading: estimated visits @ $ per visit...$ b. Standard (Proctor or Nuclear Density) Compaction Tests estimated tests @ $ per test or hours @ $ per hour ...$ 2. Subgrade Evaluation for footings, foundation piers, foundation walls, grade beams and slabs (other than pile- supported foundations) (Staff Engineer or ) estimated visits @ $ per visit...$ or hours @ $ per hour ...$ 3. Backfill for Utility Lines and Above Foundations estimated visits @ $ per visit...$ or hours @ $ per hour ...$ 4.Pile Installation (if required) a. Monitoring, installation and testing of load test piles ( Engineer) estimated hours @ $ per hour ...$ b. Report Preparation ( Engineer with Engineer review and consultation) estimated hours @ $ per hour ...$ c. Monitoring production pile installation( Engineer) estimated visits @ $ per visit...$ or hours @ $ per hour ...$ 05/05/98 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL PROPOSAL BREAKDOWN (continued) 5. Pavement - Asphalt Surface and Graded Aggregate Base Course (if required) DIVISION 1* Inspection of asphalt placement and compaction, measurement of thickness, temperature, in -place density testing and sampling of mix for physical testing. a. In -Place density testing of base course estimated visits @ $ per visit or hours @ $ per hour ...$ b. Modified Proctor Test estimated visits @ $ per visit ...$ c. Marshall Stability and Flow Test estimated tests @ $ per tests ...$ d. Extraction and gradation estimated tests @ $ per tests ...$ e. Engineering Report Review ( Engineer) estimated hours @ $ per hour ...$ ...$ SUBTOTAL SITEWORK TESTING specimens to laboratory, and concrete compression testing. 1. Site Concrete Testing and Placement Evaluation (Level II Technician) a. Footing and other small pours estimated pours @ $ per pour or hours @ $ per hour ...$ b. Slabs: On- Grade, or other estimated pours @ $ per pour or hours @ $ per hour ...$ c. Cylinder pick -up when not on -site for other work estimated trips @ $ per trip ...$ Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington *SECTION 1 H-4 II. CONCRETE Field Testing: May include sampling and testing fresh concrete for slump, reinforcing steel installafion forms, air content, unit weight (if required), molding and transporting test 05/05/98 QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONAL PROPOSAL BREAKDOWN (continued) 2. Concrete Compression Testing estimated cylinders @ $ per cylinder ...$ DIVISION 1* 3. Engineering Report Review ( Engineer) estimated hours @ $ per visit ...$ SUBTOTAL CONCRETE TESTING III. STRUCTURAL STEEL, BAR JOIST AND DECKING Erection Evaluation: Evaluation of any or all of the following, as established by project specifications: material storage conditions, column alignment, elevation verification,' bolt hole alignment and bolt torque, welds by visual techniques, steel decking, built -up roofs, prime coat touch -up and /or final painting. 1. Erection Evaluation of Structural Steel and Bar Joists estimated visits @ $ per visit or hours @ $ per hour ...$ 2. Engineering Report Review ( Engineer) estimated hours @ $ per hour ...$ SUBTOTAL STRUCT. STEEL TESTING ...$ TOTAL ALL TESTING $ $abies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington *SECTION 1H -5 `" QUALITY ASSURANCE TESTING & INSPECTION AND DIVISION 1* SURVEILLANCE BY A LOCAL PROFESSIONS *SECTION 1H-6 CONTROLLED INSPECTION REPORT FOR PROJECT: Babies "R" Us LOCATION: 17500 Southcenter Parkway, Parkway Supercenter, Tukwila, Washington DATE: ,19 NAME: Professional Engineer or Registered Architect ADDRESS: have assumed responsibiity for the inspection work designated above. I personally, or qualified personnel under my direct supervision, did perform the required inspections and tests; and all required inspection and test reports signed by me and tests are substantelly in compliance to quantity required by project specifica- tions. SIGNATURE: DATE: 19 Supervising Engineer or Architect It is my professional opinion that: All inspected material and work conforms to all applicable requirements. All inspected material and work conforms to all applicable requirements, except as described below: SIGNATURE: DATE: Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington City State Zip Code Pr�essional Engineer or Architect 05/05/98 DIVISION 1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. SUMMARY ALT 1.1 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Altemates. 2. ,DEFINITIONS 2.1 Definition: An altemate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Proposal Fomi for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decided to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 2.1.1 The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the contract Sum to incorporate the Altemate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 3. PROCEDURES 3.1 Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. 3.1.1 Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similaritems incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. 3.2 Notification: Immediately following the award of the contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each altemate. Indicate whether altemates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. 3.3 Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract. 3.4 Schedule: An "Alternates Schedule" is included at the end of the Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under the alternate. PART 2: PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3: EXECUTION 4. ALTERNATE SCHEDULE 4.1 ALTERNATE NO. 1: Section 4A Unit Masonry Work. In lieu of normal weight integrally colored concrete masonry units specified in Section 4A, provide lightweight integrally colored concrete masonry units conforming to ASTM C90- 90, Type 1 with aggregates conforming to ASTM C -331. Under this Alternate No.1, the lightweight concrete masonry units shall be moistureproofed with Chemprobe Corporation "Prime -A -Pell Plus" clear coating in lieu of Chemprobe Corporation "Prime -A -Pell 200" clear coating. Under this Alternate No. 1 a written warranty will be required, executed by the Applicator and clear coating manufacturer covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail to provide water repellency within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the contractor Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington ERNATES 'SECTION 11 -1 under the contract documents. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. 4.2 ALTERNATE NO. 2: Section 4A Unit Masonry Work and Section 91 Special Coatings. In lieu of normal weight integrally colored concrete masonry units with clear sealer specified in Section 4A, provide normal weight standard grey concrete masonry units. Under this Altemate No. 2, the standard grey concrete masonry units shall have a special coating application as specified in Section 91. 4.2.1 In Section 91 Special Coatings, give particular attention to paragraph 5. WARRANTY and execute all the work of Section 91 to ensure that the warranty required can be issued as specified. 4.3 ALTERNATE NO. 3: Section 70, Roofing, Flashing and Assoc. Sheet Metal. In lieu of gravel - surfaced built -up roofing system specified in Section 7D provide built -up roofing system with mineral surfaced cap sheet. 4.4 ALTERNATE NO. 4: Section 7D, Roofing, Flashing and Assoc. Sheet Metal. In lieu of gravel - surfaced built -up roofing system in 7D, provide modified Bitumen Membrane. 4.5 ALTERNATE NO.5: Section 7D, Roofing, Flashing and Assoc. Sheet Metal. In lieu of gravel - surfaced built -up roofing system in 7D, provide PVC mechanically fastened PVC Roof System. 4.6 ALTERNATE NO. 6: Section 7D, Roofing, Flashing and Associate Sheet Metal. In lieu of gravel- surfaced built -up roofing system in 7D, provide mechanically fastened, reinforced single ply EPDM roofing membrane. 4.7 ALTERNATE NO. 7: Section 7D, Roofing, Flashing and Associate Sheet Metal. In lieu of Dens -Glass sheathing provide exterior grade gypsum sheathing. END OF SECTION 05/05/98 C DIVISION 1' OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS *SECTION 1J -1 PART 1: GENERAL 4.15 Switch gear - panels, contactors, transformers. 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 4.16 Main Switch and Main Distribution Panel & Power Panel. 1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including 4.17 Safety Switches for Roof -top HVAC units and transformers General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 4.18 Disconnect Switches (except as otherwise noted on drawings) 2. SUMMARY 2.1 Section includes: 2.1.1 On site reception, unloading, inventory, storage, safeguarding, installation, coordination, and start-up operation of all Owner fumished material and equipment as detailed in Section 1A, Article 16. 2.1.2 See individual specification sections fa items appearing in 4.23 Emergency generator & automatic transfer switch. (TRU schedule. Only) 2.1.3 Related Sections: 2.1.3.1 Section 1A, Article 16 2.1.3.2 Section 1B, Article 13 2.1.3.3 Division 15 and 16: Connection to building services. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. OWNER - FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 3.1 Provide labor, tools and equipment using manufacturer's recommended methods of assembly and installation for materials and equipment. 3.2 Coordinate with Owner for acquisition, shipping and receiving of specified items. 3.3 See Schedule. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. SCHEDULE 4.1 Lighting Fixtures (except as otherwise shown on lighting fixture schedule on drawing E -2) 4.2 Lamps for all Owner - furnished lighting fixtures. 4.3 Exit Signage. 4.4 Isolating transformers and filter. 4.5 Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) and isolating switch. 4.6 Register wireway and power poles (wireway internal wiring by ELC). 4.7 Light track. 4.8 Signs. 4.9 Pre -fab Low Height Walls. 4.10 Enlarged Photo Display (BRU Only). 4.11 Sign boxes (KRU Only). 4.12 Exterior "Letter" wall signs. 4.13 Exterior signs. 4.14 "Geoffrey" exterior sign. (TRU Only) Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 4.19 Circuit breakers 4.20 Spare Fuse Cabinet 4.21 Branch Circuit Panels (LA, etc., HA, etc.). 4.22 Dry Type Transformers. 4.24 Lighting Contactors. 4.25 Conveyors /Lifts (where applicable). 4.26 Baler (to be connected not later than 10 days prior to store fixturing). 4.27 Aluminum canopy. Exterior color bands, feature strips and squares, wall pads covers, attachment systems, etc. (KRU Only). 4.28 Exhaust fans. 4.29 Mechanical units. 4.30 Energy Management Systems (and EMS wire). 4.31 Paddle fans with speed control. 4.32 Water cooler. 4.33 Steel joists and steel joist girders. 4.34 Detex equipment 4.35 CCTV and burglar alarm wire and equipment. 4.36 Telephone and paging system. 4.37 Wood register tandems. 4.38 Customer Pick -Up counters. 4.39 Customer Information Center (C.I.C.) (TRU Only) 4.40 Refund counters. 4.41 Baby Registry Desk (BRU Only). 4.42 Automatic doors (supplied and installed by Door Manufacturer). 4.43 Door closers. 4.44 Skylights. 4.45 Customer Pick -Up pass thru window. 4.46 Carpet (BRU & KRU Only), 4.47 Safe. 4.48 Corner guards and column sheet material, 05/05/98 DIVISION 1• 4.49 Crash rails and bumper guards. 4.50 Wainscot. 4.51 Sales vinyl floor tile (mastic by contractor). 4.52 Vinyl floor Icons (TRU Only). 4.53 Toilet partitions. 4.54 Customer Pick -Up swing door. 4.55 Furniture Order Desk (BRU Only). 4.56 Exterior Wall Icons (BRU Only). 4.57 Interior Sign, Endcaps and Display Icons (TRU & BRU Only). 4.58 Galvanized steel dock door hood. 4.59 Toilet accessories (as noted). 4.60 Impact doors. 4.61 Overhead rolling doors (TRU & BRU Only) . Overhead Sectional Panel Doors (KRU Only). Rolling Fire Shutters (if required). (Ail supplied & installed by Door Manufacturer). 4.62 (BRU Only). Environmental floor covering (BRU Only). 4.63 Dock bumpers and dock seals. 4.64 Dressing & Fitting Rooms (KRU Only). 4.65 Time Clock. 4.66 Exterior Ceramic Tile (Only if indicated on drawings). 4.67 Air Curtains (TRU & BRU Only). 4.68 Accordion Fold Doors (20K Only). 4.69 Interior Aluminum Railings (KRU Only). 4.70 Ceramic Tile (Sales Floor) (KRU Only). 4.71 Slatwall and trim (KRU Only). 4.72 Fire Alarm System. 4.73 Break Room table and chairs. 4.74 Refrigerator. 4.75 Break Room lockers. 4.76 Monopoly Wall graphics (TRU Only). NOTE: C/T CABINET SHALL BE PROVIDED BY ELC - END OF SECTION • Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS *SECTION 1J -2 • ..,, f DIVISION 3' PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards of the American Concrete Institute. 1.2.1 ACI 117 -81 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 1.2.2 ACI 211.1 -89 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete. 1.2.3 ACI 212.2R -81 (86) Guide for Use of Admixtures in Concrete. 1.2.4 ACI 214 -77 (89) Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete. 1.2.5 ACI 302.1R -89 Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 1.2.6 ACI 304R -89 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 1.2.7 ACI 304.2R -71 (82) Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 1.2.8 ACI 305R -89 Hot Weather Concreting. 1.2.9 ACI 306R -88 Cold Weather Concreting. 1.2.10 ACI 306.1 -87 Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 1.2.11 ACI 308 -81 (86) Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 1.2.12 ACI 309R -87 Guide for Consolidation, of Concrete. 1.2.13 ACI 315 -80 (86) Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 1.2.14 ACI 318 -89 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 1.2.15 ACI 347R -88 Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 1.3 Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. 1.3.1 Manual of Standard Practice, 1986 1.3.2 Placing Reinforcing Bars, 1986 1.4 Refer to drawings for extent and locations of all concrete work. Verify conditions and requirements of the job. 1.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.6 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1. Include all labor, materials and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation of Concrete Work, and all related work incidental to the completion thereof, as shown on the drawings, complete, in strict accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. Concrete work Includes: Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington CONCRETE *SECTION 3A -1 2.1.1 Concrete, reinforcing and formwork for foundations, pilasters, slabs, sidewalks, stairs, curbs, gutters, all site wok concrete, foundations for light standards and signs, foundation pads for equipment, etc. 2.1.2 Installation of anchor bolts for steel columns, posts, and other anchored work as may be required. 2.1.3 Grouting of column bases. 2.1.4 All anchor slots, sleeves, and other inserts as required. 2.1.5 Shop drawings. 2.1.6 Vapor barrier under all interior concrete slabs on grade. 2.1.7 Gravel subbase beneath slabs on grade. 2.1.8 All dowels from concrete into masonry walls. 2.1.9 Concrete fill for metal pan stairs. 2.1.10 All other items required to make the work of this Section complete including staking for layout of footings, building layout, excavation, backfilling, etc. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 3.1 Installation of epoxy sealer for interior concrete floor slabs specified in Section 91-I, painting (for Toys "R" Us projects only). 3.2 Installation of stair nosing and pipe handrails specified in Section 5E- Miscellaneous Metals. 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 4.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 4.3 Submit steel shop drawings well in advance of placement. Show all details of construction, bending and placing, completely dimensioned. 4.4 Submit concrete mix designs for review by the Projed Manager well in advance of concrete placement. Concrete mix design submittal shall include all strength data necessary to show com- pliance with the strength requirements of this specification for either the trial batch method or the field experience method and shall be certified by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 4.5 Review of submittals will cover general design ony. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for strength of concrete, general or detailed dimension, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 5. QUALITY ASSURANCE 5.1 General 5.1.1 The Owner shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of concrete work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used In Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing 05/05/98 •► :a • ► and inspections shal be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 5.1.2 Concrete materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. 5.1.3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. 5.1.4 At the completion of all concrete work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all concrete work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all other applicable code requirements. 5.1.5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, after, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion d the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. 5.1.6 The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete work and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. 5.1.7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for two years after carnpletion of the project. Records and shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. 5.2 The testing agency shall conduct pre - placement inspections as necessary to determine that: 5.2.1 Formwork has been constructed to the correct dimensions and tolerances. 5.2.2 Reinforcing steel has been placed in accordance with shop drawings bearing the Project Manager's shop drawing review stamp marked either fumish as submitted or furnish as corrected, and that all reinforcing steel is properly secured and supported as necessary to prevent displacement during concrete placing operations. 5.2.3 All bearing material has been inspected and accepted. 5.3 The testing agency shall conduct concrete placement inspections as necessary to determine that: 5.31 Concrete has been mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. 5.3.2 No water is added to the concrete except in accordance with ASTM C94, the accepted concrete mix design and the specified maximum slump. 5.3.3 Concrete is conveyed to the place of final deposit by methods which prevent separation or loss of material. 5.3.4 Concrete is properly consolidated. 5.3.5 Concrete is finished in accordance with the project specifications. 5.3.6 All hot - weather or cold - weather practices as recommended Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington by ACI are implemented as necessary. 5.4 The testing agency shall conduct stength tests of the concrete during construction in accordance with the following procedures: 5.4.1 Secure composite samples in accordance with "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" (ASTM C172). Each sample shal be obtained from a different batch of concrete on a random basis, avoiding any selection of the test batch other than by a number selected at random before commencement of concrete placement. 5.4.2 Mold and cure three specimens from each sample in accordance with "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C31). Any deviations from the requirements of this Standard shall be recorded in the test report. 5.4.3 Test specimens in accordance with "Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens" (ASTM C39). Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days and one shall be tested at 7 days. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days. If one specimen in a test manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding or testing, it shall be discarded and the strength of the remaining cylinder shall be considered the test result. Should both specimens in a test show any of the above defects, the entire test shall be dis- carded. 5.4.4 Make at least one strength test (3 cylinders) for each 50 cu. yd., or fraction thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any 1 day. 5.4.5 Determine slump of the concrete sample for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, using "Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete" (ASTM C143). 5.4.6 Determine air content of normal weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with either "Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" (ASTM C231), "Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the VolummetricMethod" (ASTM C173) or "Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content of Concrete" (ASTM C138). 5.4.7 Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. CONCRETE MATERIALS 6.1 Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, #57 or larger. 6.2 Fine aggregate: ASTM C33. 6.3 Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 or II. (Flyash not permitted.) 6.4 Water. Clear and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkal, organic or other deleterious matter. 6.5 Admixtures: 6.5.1 Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: ASTM C494, may be used at the contractor's option. 6.5.2 Air-entraining admixtures: ASTM C260, for all air - entrained concrete. 05/05/98 DIVISION 3* CONCRETE 6.5.3 Pozzolanic admixtures: ASTM C618, may be used upon review by the Project Manager. 6.5.4 Maximum chloride ion due to admixtures shall not exceed 0.1% by weight. 6.5.5 The addition of calcium chloride is not permitted. 6.5.6 All admixtures shall be used In conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 7. REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS 7.1 Reinforcing Steel Bars: ASTM A615, Grade60, unless noted otherwise. 7.2 Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 7.3 Steel Wire: ASTM A82. 7.4 Metal Accessories: Include all spacers, ties, chairs and other devices required to properly support and fasten reinforcing steel in place in accordance with the requirements of the ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforcing Concrete Structures. 8. FORM MATERIALS 8.1 Removable forms shall be wood, metal or other approved material. 8.2 Forms for unexposed concrete surfaces may be No.2 common boards of dimension lumber of uniform thickness. 8.3 Earth cuts may be used for forms for footings if soil conditions permit and as stated in soils report. 9. RELATED MATERIALS 9.1 Vapor Barrier: 6 mil polyethylene. 9.2 Premolded Filler: Non - bituminous fiber type as per ASTM D1741, Type III, Homasote "300" or approved equal all wood fiber board with the "Homex Plus" pull off strip for joints to be flash - patched. 9.3 Curing Compound: L & M Cure as manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 9.4 Form Ties: Black iron snap ties with a minimum 1 inch breakback. 9.5 "T" shaped plastic control joint: T- shaped 1/16" plastic strip at least 1" deep, with minimum 3/4" wide pull top stiffener and having suitable anchor to prevent vertical movement. 9.6 Form Releasing Agent: Non - staining. 9.7 Grout shall be "Crystex" by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. 9.8 Gravel subbase (beneath slabs on grade): Fine graded granular material conforming to the following requirements: Maximum Size: 1 -1/4" Passing No. 200 sieve: 15% maximum Plasticity Index: 6 maximum Liquid Limit: 25 maximum PART 3: EXECUTION 10. CONCRETE PROPORTIONS 10.1 The specified compressive strength of the concrete, fc, for each portion of the structure shall be as designated on the *SECTION 3A -3 drawings. Strength requirements shall be based on 28-day compressive strength. 10.2 Concrete exposed to weather shall be air - entrained. Air content shall be between 4 and 8 percent. 10.3 Slump of concrete shall not exceed 4" unless a high range water - reducing admixture is used. The slump of concrete prior to addition of a high range water - reducing admixture shall not exceed 4 ". The slump of concrete containing a high range water - reducing admixture shall not exceed 10 ". 10.4 The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall not be more than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one -third of the depth of slabs, nor three- fourths of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. 10.5 The coarse size shall be #57 or larger. 10.6 The minimum cement content (ASTM C150) of all concrete shall conform to the following table. (Flyash not permitted) Specified Minimum Cement Content Compressive (pounds per cubic yard) Strength Non -Air Entrained Air - Entrained (psi) Concrete Concrete 3000 470 517 4000 564 611 10.7 Concrete shall be proportioned by either the trial batch method or the field experience method. 10.7.1 Where the trial batch method is used, make three test cylinders for each trial batch. Break one cylinder at 7 days and two at 28 days to verify strength requirements. Adjust proportions to produce a design mix at least 1200 psi greater than the specified strength, fc. 10.7.2 Where the field experience method is used, the required average compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 5.3.2 of ACI 318. Documentation that proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the required average compressive strength shall consist of a field strengl test record representing materials and proportions to be used for this project. A field strength test record shall consist of at least 10 consecutive lasts encompassing a period of time of not less than 45 days and made within the past 18 months. 10.7.3 Concrete mix designs shall be certified by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and retained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay for this service. 11. FORMWORK 11.1 Forms shall be used, wherever necessary, to confine the concrete and shape it to the required dimensions. Forms shal have sufficient strength to withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the concrete, and shall have sufficient rigidity to maintain specified tolerances. 11.2 The design and engineering of the formwork, as well as its construction, shall be the responsibility of the contractor. 11.3 Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent Toss of mortar from the concrete. 11.4 All exposed concrete comers shall have a 3/4" x 3/4 "chamfer, except as otherwise noted. 11.5 Form ties shall be broken off 1" or more back from concrete Babies "R" Us • Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 • a • i • L. :. surfaces. No wire or strap ties will be permitted. Tes shall be of sizes and weights as required for pressures devekped, and installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations Form ties for exterior walls and grade beams shall be leakproof "waterseal type". 11.6 Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with non - staining releasing agent, applied before the reinforcing steel is placed. 11.7 Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete has adequately hardened. Care shall be taken to avoid spelling the concrete surfaces. 11.8 All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be cleaned of any accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before concrete is placed in them. 12. REINFORCEMENT 12.1 Fabrication: 12.1.1 Reinforcing steel shall be accurately fabricated to the dimensions shown. 12.1.1.1 Bends shall conform to bend dimensions defined as standard in accordance with details In the ACI Detailing Manual -1980 (SP -66) and/or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, unless otherwise shown. 12.1.1.2 Bars shall be bent cold, and shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material. 12.1.1.3 Bars shall be fabricated within the tolerances shown in the ACI Detailing Manual - 1980 (SP -66) and /or CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. 12.1.2 Welding as an aid to fabrication and/or installation will not be permitted except as specifically shown on the drawings or as authorized by the Project Manager. 12.2 Placing 12.2.1 Position reinforcement to 1/4" ± in accordance with placement plans. 12.2.2 Unless noted otherwise, reinforcing shall be placed so that the minimum concrete cover shown on the drawings is provided. 12.2.3 It shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure that the intended reinforcement location is maintained during concrete placement. Tie bars at intersections with soft steel wire. 12.2.4 Lap splices of reinforcing shall be as called for on the drawings. 12.2.5 Do no splicing at points of maximum stress. Lap all bars at all corners and abrupt changes in direction of walls. Provide steel dowels between footings and walls, pilasters, columns and elsewhere, as indicated on drawings and/or as conditions require. 12.2.6 Do not drive nails into wood forms to support reinforcement 12.2.7 Provide two (2) No. 5 bars around all openings in slabs and concrete walls, and at all re- entrant comers in floor slabs. 12.2.8 Reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete shall not be field bent. 12.2.9 Iron worker to remain on job during concrete placing to correct misplacement of reinforcement. 12.3 Cleaning and Protection: 12.3.1 Protect reinforcement from excessive rusting or mechanical injury. Store on skids or otherwise maintain at least 6 inches above ground. 12.3.2 After bars are tied In place take whatever precautions are necessary to protect bars from damage by construction equipment or workmen. Pay particular attention to bars projecting out of previously placed concrete. Damaged steel shall be replaced at no cost to Owner. 13. JOINTS 13.1 Construction Joints 13.1.1 Provide construction joints as required by the drawings, specifications, and job conditions. Provide 1 -1/2" deep key at joint. All reinforcement shall be continued across joints, unless noted otherwise. Remove all laitance from joints prior to placing adjoining concrete. • 13.1.2 Provide construction joints in walls at a maximum spacing of 50 feet unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 13.1.3 Construction joints in slabs on grade are intended to function as formed control joints. See drawings for details. Locate construction joints in slabs on grade at locations shown on the drawings. For exterior slabs on grade the maximum spacing between construction joints shall be 20 feet. Construction joints in interior slabs on grade shall be flash patched with low viscosity mortar. 13.2 Control Joints 13.2.1 Locate control joints in interior slabs on grade as shown on the drawings. Control Joints shall be flash patched with low viscosity mortar where floor covering Is used. 13.2.2 Locate 1" deep scored control joints in sidewalks as shown on the drawings. The maximum spacing of scored joints shall be 8 feet. 13.3 Isolation Joints 13.3.1 Locate Isolation joints at all columns and where exterior slabs or sidewalks abut vertical surfaces and elsewhere, as shown on the plans or as job conditions require. 13.3.2 Locate isolation (expansion) joints in sidewalks at locations shown on the drawings. The maximum spacing between isolation joints in sidewalks shall be 32 feet. 13.3.3 Locate isolation (expansion) joints in curbs at a maximum spacing of 20 feet. 13.3.4 Premolded filler for isolation joints shall be 1/2" thick. 13.3.5 isolation joints that will be covered with floor covering shall be flash patched with low viscosity cement mortar. 14. QRODUCTION OF CONCRET 14.1 Ready -mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance w'th ASTM C94. The ready -mixed concrete producer shalt furnish duplicate delivery tickets, one for the Contractor and one given to the Owner's Representative, for each batch of concrete. The Information provided on the delivery ticket shall include the quantities of all material batched Including the amount of free water In the aggregate. The quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water cement ratio specified Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 05/05/98 DIVISION 3* CONCRETE shall be noted on the delivery ticket. 14.2 For job mixed concrete, mixing shal be done in a batch mixer of approved type. The mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer and mixing shall be continued for 1 -1/2 minutes after all materials are in the drum. For batches larger than 1 cubic yard, mixing time shall be increased 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof. All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged. 14.3 The independent testing agency shall have access at all times to the batching and mixing plant for sampling of materials and inspection of all work performed for this job. 14.4 In cold weather, the temperature of the concrete when delivered at the site of the work shall be at least 50 degrees F. 14.5 In hot weather the ingredients shall be cooled before mixing, or flake ice or well- crushed ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be substituted for all or part of the mixing water if, due to high temperature, low slump, flash set or cold joints are encountered. When air temperature is between 80F and 90F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes. When air temperature exceeds 90F, reduce maximum mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 15. PLACING 15.1 Preparation for Placing Concrete 15.1.1 All bearing material shall be inspected by the independent testing agency prior to placement of concrete. The independent testing agency shall be the sole judge as to the suitability of the bearing material. 15.1.2 Before concrete is placed, all debris and ice shall be removed from the spaces to be occupied by the concrete. Remove surplus form releasing agent from the contact face of forms. Forms and the reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of ice or other coatings. 15.1.3 Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground. 15.1.4 Notify all trades concemed and the Owner's Representative sufficiently in advance of the scheduled time for concrete placement to permit installation of all required work by other trades. 15.1.5 Before placing concrete, all required embedded items, including dovetail anchor slots, anchors, inserts, curb angles, metal frames, fixtures, sleeves, drains, stair nosings and accessory devices for Mechanical and Electrical installations shall be properly located, accurately positioned, and built into the construction, and maintained securely in place. 15.1.6 Build into construction all items furnished by the Owner and other trades. Provide all offsets, pockets, slabs, chases and recesses as job conditions require. Thicken slabs as required to maintain the intended slab thickness at embedded items. 15.1.7 Set anchor bolts furnished under the Structural Steel Section of these specifications. 15.1.8 Place and properly support reinforcing steel. 15.2 Conveying $abies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington *SECTION 3A -5 15.2.1 Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods which will prevent separation or Toss of material. 15.2.2 Equipment for chuting, pumping and pneumatically conveying concrete shall be of such size and design as to insure a practically continuous flow of concrete at the delivery without separation of material. 15.2.3 Provide runways or other means for wheeled equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit. Construct runways so that supports will not bear upon reinforcement or fresh concrete. 15.3 Depositing 15.3.1 Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable In its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. No concrete shall have a free fall of overthree feet from truck, mixer or buggies. The concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete Is at all times plastic and flows readily into the spaces between the bars. No concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited in the work, nor shall retempered concrete be used. 15.3.2 When concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing of the section is completed. 15.3.3 All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by mechancal vibrators during the placing operation and shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into the corners of the forms. Mechanical vibrators shall be applied directly to the concrete and used only under experienced supervision. Vibrators shall not be secured to forms or reinforcement. Compaction shall be carried on continuously with the placing of concrete. Keep a minimum of two vibrators on the job during concreting operations. 15.3.4 Protect adjacent surfaces from concrete drippings, spillage and splashes. Hardened or partially hardened splashes or accumulations of concrete on forms or reinforcement shall be removed before the work proceeds. Clean all damaged surfaces immediately. 15.3.5 All conveyances shall be thoroughly cleaned at frequent intervals during the placing of the concrete, and before beginning a new run of concrete all hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the surfaces. 15.3.6 The superintendent or foreman In charge of concrete work shall mark on the drawings the time and date of the placing of the concrete in the different areas and members. Location of concrete batches from which concrete test cylinders are made shall also be recorded on these drawings. Such drawings shall be kept on file at the Job until its completion and shall be subject to the inspection of the Owner's Representative at all times. 16. REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECT 16.1 Surface defects, including tie holes, shall be repaired Immediately after form removal. 16.2 All honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed down to sound concrete. If chipping is necessary the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut. No featheredges will be permitted. The area to be patched and an area at least 6 In. wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. A bonding grout shall be prepared using a mix of approximately 1 part cement to 1 part fine sand passing a No. 05/05/98 - •-...- ,. • , DIVISION 3• CONCRETE `SECTION 3A-6 300 mesh sieve, mixed to the consistency of thick cream, and then well brushed into the surface. 16.3 The patching mixture shall be made of the same materials and of approximately the same proportions as used for the concrete, except that the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part cement to 2 -1/2 parts sand by damp loose volume. White portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the gray portland cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding concrete, as determined by a trial patch. The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for handling and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing. 16.4 After surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, the bond coat shall be well brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water sheen, the premixed patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, it shall be left undisturbed for at least 1 hr. before being finally finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for 7 days. Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in a formed wall which will be exposed. 16.5 After being cleaned and thoroughly dampened, all tie holes shall be filled solid with patching mortar. 17. FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACE 17.1 After removal of forms all concrete surfaces not exposed to view shall be finished with a rough form finish and all surfaces exposed to view shall be finished with a smooth form finish. 17.2 For a rough form finish, tie holes and defects shall be patched and fins exceeding 1/4 in. in height shall be chipped off or rubbed off. Otherwise, surfaces may be left with the texture imparted by the forms. 17.3 For a smooth form finish, the form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical, with the number of seams kept to the practical minimum. Tie holes and defects shall be patched. All fins shall be completely removed. 18. SLABS 18.1 Preparation of subgrade for slabs on grade. 18.1.1 The bearing material shall be inspected by the independent testing agency prior to placement of all slabs on grade. The independent testing agency shall be the sole judge as to the suitability of the bearing material. 18.1.2 The subgrade shall be well drained and of adequate and uniform loadbearing nature. 18.1.3 Place gravel subbase to thickness shown on the drawings and compact to a minimum of 98% of maximum density at optimum moisture per ASTM D698. 18.1.4 Place vapor barrier over gravel subbase. Lap joints a minimum of six inches. 18.1.5 The subgrade shall be free of frost before concrete placing begins. If the temperature Inside a building where concrete is to be placed is below freezing it shall be raised and maintained above 50 F. long enough to remove all frost from the subgrade. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinciion 18.2 Edge forms and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the designated elevations and contours of the finished surface, and shall be sufficiently strong to support vibrating screeds or roller pipe screeds. The concrete surface shall be aligned to the contours of screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or acceptable compacting type screeds. 18.3 Placement 18.3.1 Mixing and placing shall be carefully coordinated with finishing. Concrete shall not be placed on the subgrade or forms more rapidly than it can be spread, straightedged, and darbied or bull floated. These operations must be performed before bleeding water has an opportunity to collect on the surface. 18.3.2 To obtain good surfaces and avoid cold joints, the size of finishing crews shall be planned with due regard for the effects of concrete temperature and atmospheric conditions on the rate of hardening of the concrete. 18.3.3 Concrete in :slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated. Internal vibration shall be used along the bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidation of slabs shall be obtained with vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, intemal vibrators, or other approved means. 18.4 Concrete Floor Finishes 18.4.1 General: All finishes must be adequate in all respects to receive material to be applied to it, true to line and free of defects or blemishes. Plane trueness tolerance shall not exceed 1/8" in 10'; finished concrete slabs that contain defects exceeding this tolerance shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. No driers, dry cement, nor cement -sand mixture shall be used in connection with any finish surfaces to absorb water, stiffen mix or for any other purpose. 18.4.2 Finish 18.4.2.1 All interior floor slabs shall receive a troweled finish. 18.4.2.2 All metal pan stairs, exterior stairs and sidewalks shall receive a light broom finish. 18.4.2.3 All exterior slabs except stairs and sidewalks shall receive a rough broom finish. 18.4.2.4 Floated finish - After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating with a hand float or with a bladed power trowel equipped with float shoes, or with a powered disc float shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared and when surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the operation. During or after the first floating, planeness of surface shall be checked with a 10-ft. straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall be cut down and all low spots filled during this procedure to produce a surface within a 1/4" in 10' tolerance throughout. The slab shall then be refloated immediately to a uniform sandy texture. 18.4.2.5 Troweled finish - The surface shall first be float - finished as specified above. It shall next be power troweled, and finally hand troweled. The first troweling after power floating shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still show some trowel marks. Additional trowelings shall be done by hand after the surface has hardened sufficiently. The final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the trowel is moved over the surface. The 05/05/98 (, ........ DIVISION 3• CONCRETE *SECTION 3A -7 surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. The finished surface shall be essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall be plane to a 1/8" in 10' tolerance. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the floor covering shall be removed by grinding. 18.4.2.6 Light broom finish - The surface shall first be trowel - finished as specified above. Immediately after final troweling, it shall be given a light transverse texture by drawing a broom across the surface. 18.4.2.7 Rough broom finish - Immediately after the concrete has received a float finish as specified abate, it shall be given a coarse transverse scored texture by drawing a broom or burlap belt across the surface. 19. CURING AND PROTECTION 19.1 Beginning immediately after placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury, and shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete. 19.2 Except when a curing compound is used, interior slabs shall be wet cured by one of the following procedures applied immediately after completion of placement and finishing: 19.2.1 Ponding or continuous sprinkling. 19.2.2 Application of absorptive mats or fabric kept continuously wet. 19.2.3 Application of sand kept continuously wet. 19.2.4 Continuous application of steam (not exceeding 150° F.) or mist spray. 19.2.5 Application of waterproof sheet materials, conforming to ASTM C171. 19.3 For slabs (except when wet curing is used) and for other concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, apply curing compound immediately after completion of placement and finishing. The compound shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately after any water sheen which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface. For any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded, unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, positive measures shall be taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications. 19.4 Moisture loss from surfaces placed against wooden forms or metal forms exposed to heating by the sun shall be minimized by keeping the forms wet until they can be safely removed. After form removal apply curing compound in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. For any surface against which additional concrete or other material is to be bonded, unless it is proven that the curing compound will not prevent bond, positive measures shall be taken to remove it completely from areas to receive bonded applications. 19.5 Temperature, Wind, and Humidity 19.5.1 Cold weather - When the mean daily outdoor temperature is Tess than 40 F., the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 50 and 70 F. for 7 days. When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, Insulating, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury due to concentration of heat. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hr. unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases which contain carbon dioxide. 19.5.2 Hot weather - When necessary, provision for windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering with a light colored material shall be made in advance of placement, and such protective measures shall be taken as quickly as concrete hardening and finishing operations will allow. 19.5.3 Rate of temperature change - Changes in temperature of the air immediately adjacent to the concrete during and immediately following the curing period shall be kept as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5 F. in any 1 hr. or 50 F. in any 24 -hr. period. 19.6 Protection from mechanical injury - During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damaging mechanical disturbances, such as load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. All finished concrete surfaces shad be protected from damage by construction equipment, materials, or methods, by application of curing procedures, and by rain or running water. Self- supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to overstress the concrete. 20. EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETe 20.1 Test results for standard molded and standard cured test cylinders shall be evaluated separately for each specified concrete mix design. Such evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in accordance with the specifications. 20.2 For evaluation, each specified mix design shall be represented by at least five tests. 20.3 The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory so long as the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the spedfied strength, f'c, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength, fc, by more than 500 psi. Should cylinder tests fail to meet these requirements or if deficient construction is suspected by Owner's Representative, core tests may be required and the cost of such tests shall be paid by the contractor. 20.4 Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be used to determine relative strengths at various locations in the structure as an aid for selecting areas to be cored. Such tests shall not be used as a basis for acceptance or rejection. 20.5 Where core tests are required, cores at least 2 in. In diameter shall be obtained and tested in accordance with "Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" (ASTM C42). The cores shall be air dried (temperature 60 to 80 F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and shall be tested dry. 20.6 At least three representative cores shall be taken from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. The location of cores shall be determined by the Project Manager so as least to impair the strength of the structure. If, before testing, one or more of the cores shows evidence of having been damaged subsequent to or during removal from the structure, it shall be replaced. 20.7 Concrete in the area represented by a core test will be considered adequate If the average strength of the cores is 05/05/98 •],, f•.. .. •i •, . -. equal to at least 85 percent of and if no single core is less than 75 percent of the specified strength, fc. 20.8 Core holes shell be filled with low slump concrete or mortar. 21. ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURe 21.1 Completed concrete work which meets all applicable requirements will be accepted without qualification. 21.2 Completed concrete work which falls to meet one or more requirements but which has been repaired to bring it into compliance will be accepted without qualification. 21.3 Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements and which cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected by the Owner's Representative. In this event, modifications may be required to assure that remaining work complies with the requirements. 21.4 The - cost of any additional tests or analysis, including additional architectural and engineering services, performed to prove the adequacy of the concrete work, shall be bome by the contractor. - END OF SECTION ' 95/05/98 Babies "R" Us Tukwila. Washinaton DIVISION 3• PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified In this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORT( 2.1' Furnish all labor, materials, tools equipment required for completing concrete work indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 The extent of concrete work is shown on the drawings and Includes, but is not necessarily limited to the following: 2.2.1 Patching of existing concrete surfaces. 2.2.2 New concrete slabs, etc. 2.2.3 All other concrete work indicated on the drawings as required. 3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3.1 "Concrete work shall conform to all requirements ofACt 301 -84, Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings, except as . modified by the Supplemental Requirements below." Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton CONCRETE PATCHING *SECTION 3B -1 4. SUPPLEMENTAL REQUIREMENT$ 4.1 Concrete shall have a 28-day compressive strength and density, in accordance with the following: STRENGTH DENSITY E21 PEE EXTERIOR CONCRETE SLABS 4000 145 ALL OTHER CONCRETE (U.N.O.) 3000 145 4.2 Slump of concrete shall not exceed 4" unless a high range water - reducing admixture is used. The slump of concrete prior to addition of all high range water - reducing admixture shall not exceed 4 ". The slump of concrete containing a high range water - reducing admixture shall not exceed 10 ". 4.3 Concrete exposed to weather shall be air entrained. Air content shall be between 4 and 8 percent. 4.4 The minimum portland cement content (ASTM C150) shall be 470 pounds per cubic yard for 3000 psi concrete and 611 pounds per cubic yard for 4000 psi concrete. Fiyash is not permitted. 4.5 Reinforcing shall conform to ASTM A615, GREW, unless noted otherwise. 4.6 Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A185. 4.7 Concrete Finishes: As indicated on the drawings. - END OF SECTION - •► • Lac •►: A.; • PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to the following Standards: 1.2.1 American Concrete Institute, ACI 530 /ASCE 5 -88, "Building Code Requirements for Concrete Masonry Structures ". 1.2.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.2.2.1 ASTM A36, Standard Specification for Structural Steel. 1.2.2.2 ASTM A82, Standard Specifications for Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.2.2.3 ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 1.2.2.4 ASTM A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat- Resisting Plates, Sheet and Strip. 1.2.2.5 ASTM A307, Standard Specification for Low - Carbon Steel Extemally and Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 1.2.2.6 ASTM A366, Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold- Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 1.2.2.7 ASTM A615, Standard Specification for Deformed Billet -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.2.2.8 ASTM A641, Standard Specification for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 1.2.2.9 ASTM C90, Standard Specification for Hollow Load - Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 1.2.2.10 ASTM C140, Standard Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 1.2.2.11 ASTM C270, Standard Specifications for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 1.2.2.12 ASTM C476, Standard Specifications for Mortar and Grout for Reinforced Masonry. 1.2.2.13 ASTM D2240, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties - Durometer Hardness. 1.2.2.14 ASTM E329, Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete Steel and Bituminous Materials as used in Construction. 1.2.2.15 ASTM E447, Methods of Test for Compressive strength of Masonry Prisms. 1.2.3 Cast Stone Institute (C.S.I.) 1.2.3.1 All applicable standards and specifications. 1.2.4 National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA) 1.2.4.1 Technical Note No. 6, Estimating the Fire Resistance of Concrete Masonry. 1,2.4.2 Technical Note No. 35, Fire Safety with Concrete Masonry. ,r" 1.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing masonry work, and related items indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). 2.2 Provide on -site inspections and testing, and laboratory testing, along with appropriate reports and certifications, as may be required by authorities having jurisdiction, for all work of this section, in accordance with Paragraph 4 of these specifications 2.3 Masonry walls have been designed to span vertically as simple spans from floor to roof and are dependent upon the completed roof structure, metal roof deck, and completion of all masonry walls for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces, the contractor is solely responsible for providing all necessary bracing as required for constructions loads, for stability and for resistance to wind and seismic forces until the entire structure is complete. The shoring shall not rely on any moment resistance capacity of the footings. 3. SUBMITTALS 3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 3.3 Concrete Block Strength Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification, signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, that all concrete block to be used for this project complies with the requirements of ASTM C90 -90, Type 1 and has a minimum net area compressive strength of 1900 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C140. 3.4 Submit samples approximately 4" x 4" x 4" of concrete block for integrally colored and architectural or customized units. Provide samples of matching custom color mortar. After Owner /Project Manager review and acceptance of block and mortar samples, the contractor shall erect a sample panel (3' x 3') showing block, joints and workmanship. Do not proceed with the manufacture of the custom concrete block units until Owner approval of sample panel is received. 3.4.1 Note: Unless specifically requested, no samples are required for standard gray, smooth face concrete block. 3.5 Where stone sills are required, provide sample sized approximately 6" long. 3.6 Review of submittals will cover general design ony. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for general or detailed dimension, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. 4. QUALITYASSURANC 4.1 General 4.1.1 Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor will employ and pay 1• • , 11 • DIVISION 4* UNIT MASONRY WORK *SECTION 4A -2 for the services of an Independent testing agency to provide testing and inspection of masonry work. The testing agency shall be licensed in the state where the structure is located and shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practices for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" (ASTM E329). All testing and inspections shall be performed under the supervision of an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located. 4.1.2 Masonry materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as the work progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or material shall not in any way prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered nor shall it obligate the Owner's Representative for final acceptance. 4.1.3 The testing agency shall report all test and inspection results to the Project Manager, Owner, and Contractor immediately after they are performed. All test and inspection reports shall be signed and sealed by an Engineer registered in the state where the structure is located and shall include the exact location in the work represented by the test. 4.1.4 At the completion of all masonry work the testing agency shall submit a letter of certification, in a form acceptable to local authority and Owner's Representative, signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located, stating that all masonry work has been constructed in accordance with the contract documents and all applicable code requirements. 4.1.5 The testing agency and its representatives are not authorized to revoke, alter, relax, enlarge or release any requirement of the contract documents, approve or accept any portion d the work, perform any duties of the Contractor, or be a party to scheduling of work. 4.1.6 The contractor shall notify the testing agency and the Owner's Representative a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all masonry work and all reasonable facilities shall be made available for technicians. 4.1.7 Records of inspection shall be kept available to the building official during progress of work for two years after completion of the project. Records shall be preserved by the independent testing agency. 4.2 The testing agency shall verify compliance with design drawings and specifications and keep a record that shall cover such tests and inspections as may be required by local authorities having jurisdiction. Such tests and inspections may included, but are not necessarily limited to: 4.2.1 Quality and testing of masonry units and materials for mortar and grout. 4.2.2 Make prism tests in accordance with ASTM E447, Method B for each size and type of unit, one test in advance of construction and one test for each 5,000 sq. ft. of wall area during construction. Prisms shall be ungrouted. Prism strength shall be 1500 psi minimum at 28 days, unless noted otherwise. 4.2.3 Proportioning, mixing, and consistency of mortar and grout. 4.2.4 Laying, mortaring, and grouting of masonry units and masonry structural elements. 4.2.5 Condition, grade, size, spacing, and placing of reinforcement. 4.2.6 Any significant or unusual construction loads on completed masonry structural elements. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 4.2.7 General progress of work. 4.3 When the ambient temperature falls below 40 F. or rises above 100 F., a complete record shall be kept of weather conditions and of preconditioning and protection given to masonry materials, and protection and curing of completed work. 4.4 Regardless of requirements of local authority, the tests, inspections and certifications as required in subparagraphs 4.2.1, 4.2.5 and 4.3 shall be provided by the Contractor and delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 5.1 Size: Manufacturer's standard sized units with nominal face dimensions of 16" long by 8" high (15 -5/8" by 7 -5/8" actual), unless otherwise shown. Thickness to be as detailed. 5.2 Obtain masonry units from one manufacturer, of uniform texture, size and color for each kind required, for each continuous area and visually related areas. Units shall be delivered to the job site with insulation inserts installed. 5.3 Provide special shapes where shown and where required for lintels, comers, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other special conditions. 5.4 Custom Units: 5.4.1 Refer to drawings for color and location of integrally colored units (i.e., white, brown, gray, beige, etc.). 5.4.2 Refer to drawings for type and location of architectural or customized units (i.e., smooth, split -face, fluted, scored, ribbed, slump, etc.) 5.4.3 Where indicated, provide units called out by manufacturer and catalog number or approved equal. 5.5 Grade and Strength 5.5.1 All masonry units shall be normal weight block conforming to ASTM C90, Grade N, Type 1. 5.5.2 Net area compressive strength of concrete masonry units shall be not less than 1900 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C140, unless masonry prisms are made. Prism strength shall be 1500 psi minimum at 28 days, unless noted otherwise. 5.6 Wherever a fire - resistance classificalon is shown or scheduled for unit masonry construction (4 hour, 3 hour and similar designations) comply with the requirements for materials and installation established by the National Concrete Masonry Association Tech #6 and #35 and other goveming authorities for the construction shown. 6. MATCH EXISTING 6.1 Where indicated that masonry is to "match existing ", visit the site and verify type, color, texture, etc. of existing units to be matched. Provide matching units as approved by the Owner's Representative. 7. MORTAR MATERIALS 7.1 Mortar shall conform to ASTM C270, Type S. 7.2 For job site pigmented mortar use mineral pigments, and with exception of carbon black limit to 10 percent of cement content, and carbon black to 1 -1/2 percent of cement content. Where 05/05/98 DIVISION 4• masonry cement is used, limit color pigments to 1/2 of preceding percentages. Color pigments shall be comparable in quality to material manufactured by Frank D. Davis Co., Beltsville, Maryland. 7.3 Premixed colored masonry mortar shall match integrally colored block. 8. GROUT 8.1 Grout shall conform to ASTM C476. 9. REINFORCING BARS 9.1 Reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise. 10. JOINT REINFORCING 10.1 Continuous wire reinforcing (joint reinforcing) shall be ladder type fabricated units with a single pair of 9 gage side rods and 9 gage continuous cross rods fabricated from cold -drawn deel wire complying with ASTM A82, and galvanized to conform to ASTM A641, Class 1. 10.2 Manufacturers offering products to comply with requirements for joint reinforcing include the following: Dur -O -Wall Company AA Wire Products Company Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 11. ANCHORS. TIES, AND METAL ACCESSORIES 11.1 Anchors, ties, and metal accessories shall conform to the following requirements where applicable: 11.1.1 Sheet Steel: ASTM A366, 16 gage minimum, galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. 11.1.2 Structural Steel: ASTM A36 galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. 11.1.3 Anchor Botts: ASTM A307 galvanized to conform to ASTM A153. 11.1.4 Stainless Steel: ASTM A167, type 304. 11.2 Manufacturers offering products to comply with requirements for anchors include the following: AA Wire Products Company Heckmann Building Products, Inc. National Wire Products Industries 12. MASONRY ACCESSORIES. FINISHES. AND RELATED ITEMS 12.1 Masonry Cleaner: "Sure Klean Vanatrol" as manufactured by The Process Solvent Company. 12.2 Moistureproofing: Prime -a -Pell, 200 clear as manufactured by Chemprobe Corp., Garland, Texas 214 - 271 -5551. 12.3 Masonry Cell Insulation: Korfil expanded polystyrene insulation inserts for standard two core masonry units as manufactured by Korfil, Inc., P.O. Box 123, Chilopee, MA 01514 (800. 628. 8476). Provide Korfil EPS insert, to be installed at the exterior wall face of all cells. This single unit insert is to be used except in those states where open -ended masonry cells are manufactured. Use original Korfil "horseshoe" insert In these areas. Verify application with Korfil. Fumish Insulation in all cells except bond beam blocks and parapets above the roof line. Wall shall have "U" values as follows: 12" walls = 0.19, 8" walls 0.24 (w/140# Density Block). Alternate block insulation to be Insul -Bloc standard Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington UNIT MASONRY WORK *SECTION 4A -3 units as manufactured by Insul -Bloc Corp., 55 Circuit Avenue West, Springfield, Massachusetts 01089, Phone (413- 781 - 0010). 12.4 Premolded Joint Fitter. Expanded or molded polystyrene foam thickness and width to suit joint in which used minus depth necessary for caulking work. 12.5 Premolded Control Joint Gaskets: 12.5.1 Gasket shall be of natural or synthetic rubber, solid section ASTM D2240, not less than 70 durometer, regular or wide flange as shown or required. 12.5.2 Gaskets shall be cross - shaped in section similar to regular flange type designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral masonry stability, as manufactured by Dur -O -Wall Company. 12.6 Concealed Masonry Flashing and Adhesive (thru -wall or spandrel beam flashing): Flexible vinyl sheet formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof, black color, 20 mils thick unless otherwise indicated. Use specifictypes and adhesives recommended by manufacturer for parapets, spandrel beams, door and window flashing and foundation flashing. 13. STONE SILLS 13.1 Cast stone sills consisting of white Portland Cement, aggregates, reinforcing, etc. with a smooth texture finish. Stone sills to be consistent in texture and color and free of chips and cracks. Joints in sills to be determined by best industry standards for maximum allowable lengths. 13.2 Provide all anchors, fasteners, dowels, etc., for a complete and finished installation as shown on drawings. 13.3 Sills to be as shown on drawings with 3/8" mortar setting bed. Mortar to be white in color. All mortar mixes and applications to be per latest ASTM standards for cast stone application and installation. 13.4 Fabricator: Member of the Cast Stone Institute (C.S.I.). PART 3: EXECUTION 14. PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING 14.1 Masonry units shall be sound and free of chips and major cracks which would impair the strength of permanence of the construction. 14.2 Masonry units shall be kept dry during delivery and while stored at the site. Protect units with waterproof coverings to minimize moisture absorption. 14.3 Store masonry units on level platforms permitting air to circulate under stack. 15. PREPARATION 15.1 Make layout In accordance with project drawings. 15.2 Remove Ialtance, loose aggregate, and anything that may prevent mortar from bonding to foundation. 15.3 Do not proceed with masonry construction, until permitted, when the following foundation tolerances are not met: Horizontal alignment ±1/4 In. in 10 ft. (Variation from plan dimension) 1/2 in. max. variation 05/05/9$ •� • •:. • � Vertical alignment ±1/4 in. in 10 ft. (Variation from level) 1/2 in. max, variation 15.4 Mortar (cold weather) - When temperature is Tess than 40°F, comply with requirements of the International Masonry Industry All- Weather Council, "IMIAWC" - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 15.5 Mortar (hot weather) - Use acceptable hot weather precautions in placing and curing of the mortar when air temperature exceeds 100°F and when there is a drying wind at temperatures above 90°F. 16. PLACING MASONRY UNIT$ 16.1 Construct masonry with experienced personnel, using manufactured masonry units and materials necessary to hold units in desired position. There shall be an experienced foreman on the job at all times. 16.2 Thickness: Build walls and ether masonry construction to the full thickness shown, except, build single-wythe wets to actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness shown or specified. Use concrete units that are sound, dry, clean and free from ice and frost when placed. 16.3 Cut masonry units with motor -driven saw designed to cut masonry with clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting wherever possible. 16.4 Dampening of concrete units before or during construction shall not be perrnitted unless made necessary by unusual conditions and approved by the Project Manager. 16.5 Adjust each unit to final position in wall while mortar is still soft and plastic. Remove any unit disturbed after mortar has stiffened, and re -lay with fresh mortar. 16.6 Align vertical cells to be filled with grout to provide a continuous unobstructed opening not less than 3" x 4 ". 16.7 Pattem Bond: Lay all blodk in the bond pattem shown or if not shown or specified in a running bond pattem with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners, unless otherwise shown. Do not use units with less than 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 16.8 Lay out walls in advance for accurate spachg of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, movement - type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the use of less -than -half- size units at corners, jambs and wherever possible at other locations. 16.9 Lay -up walls plumb and true and with courses level, accurately spaced and coordinated with other work. 16.10 Where indicated, inner wythe of front wall to receive graphics and exterior wall to receive paint, ceramic tile or exterior insulation and finish system shall be carefully and accurately laid to a flush, true and plumb plane with tooled joints. 16.11 Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2 masonry unit length In each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. 16.12 Built -In Work 16.12.1 As the work progresses, build -In items specified under this and other Sections of these Specifications. Fill In solidly with masonry around built -in items, j3abies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 16.12.2 Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, 16.12.3 Where built -in items are to be embedded In cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 16.12.4 Non - bearing Interior Partition Walls: Build full height of story to underside of structure above, unless otherwise shown. 16.13 Temporarily brace walls to provide stability during construction, until structure is complete. 16.14 Temporarily shore masonry to provide support during construction, until structure is complete. 17. REINFORCEMENT 17.1 Preparation: 17.1.1 Place all reinforcement for masonry in accordance with project documents.. • • 17.1.2 Use metal reinforcement at time of placement which is free of mud, oil, or other coatings that adversely affect bonding capacity. 17.1.3 Metal reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both may be used provided the minimum dimensions, including height of deformations, and weight of wire brushed specimens are not less than required by applicable ASTM specification. 17.1.4 Do not use metal reinforcement with kinks or unrequired bends. Do not straighten nor repair bars in a manner that will damage the bar or adjacent construction. 17.2 Fabrication: 17.2.1 Fabricate bars without damaging the materials. 17.2.2 Bending of bars 17.2.2.1 Perform bending on unheated bars, unless otherwise acceptable. 17.2.2.2 Bars larger than #5 shall not be field bent unless acceptable to Project Manager. 17.2.2.3 The diameter of bend measured on the inside of the bar, other than for stirrups, shall not be Tess than the values listed below except that for Grade 40 bars in sizes #3 to #11 inclusive, with turns not exceeding 180 °, the minimum diameter shall be five bar diameters. MINIMUM DIAMETERS OF BEND jar Size Minimum Diameter #3 through #8 6 bar diameters #9, #10, and #11 8 bar diameters 17.2.2.4 Inside diameter of bend for stirrups shall not be less than four bar diameters. 17.2.3 Standard hooks - Use one of following: 17.2.3.1 A 180° turn plus extension of at least four bar diameters but not Tess than 2 -1/2 in. at free end of bar. 17.2.3.2 A 90° tum plus extension of at least 12 bar diameters at free end of bar. 05/05/98 ( DIVISION 4* UNIT MASONRY WORK *SECTION 4A -5 17.2.3.3 For stirrup anchorage only, either a 90° or a 135° tum plus an extension of at least six bar diameters but not less than 2 -1/2 in. at free end of bar. 17.2.4 Welding - Welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted. 17.2.5 Joint reinforcement: 17.2.5.1 Reinforcement of two or more deformed longitudinal wires weld connected with cross wires, forming a ladder design. 17.2.5.2 Make out -to -out spacing of longitudinal wires 2 in. less than the nominal width of the wall or wythe. 17.2.5.3 Space welded contacts or cross wires with each longitudinal wire not more than 16 in. 17.2.5.4 Provide joint reinforcement In flat sections 10 to 20 ft. long, except that factory- formed comer reinforcements and other special shapes may be shorter. 17.2.6 Anchors and ties - Fabricateanchors and ties in one of the following ways: 17.2.6.1 Wire mesh ties shall be No. 16 gage minimum 1/2 in. mesh steel wire, 12 in. minimum length and 1 -1/2 in. less than the nominal width of wall. 17.2.7 Rigid steel anchors at intersecting walls shall be 1 -1/2 x 1/4 x 24 in. minimum with ends tumed up 2 in. minimum and shall conform to ASTM A36. 17.2.8 Dovetail anchors shall be sheet steel 0.06 in. minimum thickness, 1 in. wide, and tumed up 1/4 in. at outer end. 17.2.9 Corrugated or crimped metal ties, shall be sheet 0.03 in. minimum thickness, 7/8 in. wide, 6 in. long. 17.2.10 Wire ties shall be joint reinforcement. 17.3 Placing reinforcing bars: 17.3.1 Embed bars in grout and provide a minimum masonry cover not less than the following: 17.3.1.1 Minimum 2" where exposed to earth or weather. 17.3.1.2 Minimum 1 -1/2" where not exposed to earth or weather. 17.3.2 Make splices in bars as shown on project drawings unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 17.3.3 Provide clear distance between horizontal bars in layer not less than the diameter of the bars, nor 1 ", except that they may be bundled in pairs. 17.3.4 Provide clear distance between vertical bars not less than one and one -half times the bar diameter, nor 1 -1/2 ", except that they may be bundled in pairs. 17.3.5 Lay horizontal bars as work progresses, as noted on plans. 17.3.6 Hold vertical bars in hollow unit masonry in place at200 bar diameters or 10 ft. maximum on center whichever is lesser. 17.4 Placing Joint Reinforcement: 17.4.1 Place masonry joint reinforcement so that longitudnal wires are located over face -shel mortar beds and are embedded in mortar or grout for their entire length with minimum cover 1, of 5/8" when exposed to weather or earth and 1/2" at other locations. 17.4.2 Place factory- fabricated sections at corners and wall intersections, unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 17.4.3 Unless noted otherwise, joint reinforcement shall not be continuous through a control joint or an expansion joint. 17.4.4 Lap the ends of joint reinforcement 6" for deformed wire and 12" for plain wire when spliced. 17.4.5 Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: 17.4.5.1 For multi -wythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by Code but not more than 16" o.c. vertically. 17.4.5.2 For single - wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16" o.c. vertically, unless otherwise shown. 17.4.6 Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1' -0" wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing place in 2 horizontal joints approximately 8" apart, both immediately above the lintel and immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of 2'- 0" beyond jambs of the opening, bridging control joints where provided. 17.5 Placing anchors, ties, and metal accessories 17.5.1 Install required anchors, ties, and metal accessories as the masonry construction progresses. 17.5.2 Set bolts and inserts vertically in the top of the walls, pilasters, beams or columns 3" minimum from any face in masonry 7" or more in thickness, and at the center line in thinner masonry sections. 17.5.3 Adjust shelf angles as required to keep the masonry level and at required elevation. Provide anchorage as detailed in the project documents. 17.5.4 Hold all metal accessories to masonry by firmly embedding anchorage Into grout or mortar 3" minimum. 18. MORTAR 18.1 Mixing mortar - Mix all cementitious materials and aggregate in mechanical mixers for a minimum period of 3 to 5 minutes, after all materials are placed in the mixer, with the amount of water required to produce the desired workability. Allow hand mixing only when acceptable. 18.2 Make workability or consistency of mortar on the board such that it can be worked with the trowel. Water for tempering shall be available on scaffold at all times. 18.3 Do not permit mortar to stand more than 1 hr. without remixing. 18.4 Discard mortar which has begun to set or is not used within 2 -1/2 hr. after Initial mixing. Retemper mortar which has stiffened due to evaporation to restore Its workability. 18.5 Mix colored mortar to produce uniform color throughout. Mix trial batches, dry, and establish the color by sample panels. 19. MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINT§ 19.1 Place hollow units with full mortar bedment In all courses of ,iI - 1- 1 i • • $ 11 • - , DIVISION 4' 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 piers, columns, pilaster, in starting courses on footings and solid foundation walls, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with grout or concrete. In other cases provide cross web bedding when required. Place hollow units with head joints tightly mortar bedded for a minimum depth from each face equal to the masonry unit face shell thickness. Make horizontal and vertical face joints 3/8" thick unless otherwise required. Shove vertical mortar joints tight. Tool mortar joints in exposed exterior surfaces when thumbprint- hard with a round jointer unless otherwise required. Point joints tight in unparged masonry below grade. Remove mortar protrusions extending more than 1/2" into cells or cavities to be grouted. 19.6 Fill horizontal Joints between top of masonry partitions and underside of slabs or beams with mortar unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 19.7 Provide joints for sealing on the exterior face at control joints and at other locations where sealed joints are indicated. Rake joints and tool smooth and uniform to depth of 3/4 ", unless otherwise required or accepted. 19.8 In temperatures exceeding 100°F., do not lay out mortar beds ahead of placing of units. Use a very light fog spray, not sufficient to penetrate the masonry, on vertical surface of masonry to aid in mortar curing during first 24 hr. after placing units. 19.9 Do not insert through wall flashing or other elements which stop bond in masonry joints between mortar and masonry units, unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 19.10 Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and relay in fresh mortar. Do not pound comers at jambs to fit stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar, and reset in fresh mortar. 19.11 Clean mortar spatters and drips from adjacent block work immediately. 20. ADJOINING CONSTRUCTION 20.1 Anchor or bond masonry and walls and partitions at points where they meet or intersect by one of the following methods: 20.1.1 Lay 50 percent of units at the intersection in masonry bond with alternate units having a Obearing of not Tess than 3" on the unit below. 20.1.2 Anchor the intersection by metal ties, joint reinforcement, or anchors as acceptable to Project Manager. 20.1.3 Anchor interior non -load- bearing walls at intersection, at vertical intervals of not more than 2' on centers, with metal ties embedded at least 4" into the masonry, or as acceptable to Project Manager. 20.1.4 Where courses of meeting or intersecting walls are carried up separately, use acceptable method of bonding or keeping separate at the intersection. 20.2 Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with the following or as shown on the drawings. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington UNIT MASONRY WORK *SECTION 4A-6 20.2.1 Provide an open space not Tess than 1/2" in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise shown. Keep own space free of mortar or other rigid materials. 20.2.2 Anchor masonry to structural steel memberswith metal ties embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie sections, unless otherwise shown. Space anchors as shown, but not more than 16" o.c. vertically and 32" o.c. horizontally. 20.3 Anchor masonry furring to backing with anchors or ties by embedment at least 1 -1/2" into facing and backing. Space ties not farther apart than 24" vertically, nor 36" horizontally. 21. CONTROL JOINTS AND EXPANSION JOINT$ 21.1 Provide control joints and expansion joints as required, and construct by using special control joint units, open end stretcher units, metal sash jamb units and control joint filler, or abutted standard units, and preformed gaskets, compressible material, building paper and caulking or sealants as indicated on drawings or as required. 21.2 Make control joints and expansion joints weather tight at 21.3 exterior walls. See Section 7G "Sealants" for various joint sealant requirements. 21.4 Control Joint Spacing: If location of control joints is not shown, place vertical joints spaced not to exceed 40' -0" o.c. for concrete masonry wythes if reinforced, or 30' -0" o.c. if not reinforced. Locate control joints at points of natural weakness in the masonry work as directed by Owner's Representative. 22. BOND BEAMS 22.1 Construct bond beams of one or more courses of load- bearing units filled with concrete or grout and reinforced. Use continuous reinforcement unless otherwise indicated. 22.2 Provide custom unit bond beams to match adjacent block color and texture, if required, where shown on the drawings. 23. GROUT FOR MASONRY 23.1 General: 23.1.1 Set reinforcing steel and anchors in required position and secure against displacement before grouting is started. 23.1.2 Mix all cementitious materials and aggregates for a minimum period of 5 minutes. after all materials are placed in the mixer with the amount of water required to produce the desired consistency. Place in cores and/or collar joints while fluid and before Initial set has taken place. Puddle or vibrate grout into place. Place grout in such a way as to prevent segregation of materials. Pour grout fluid enough to flow into all crevices of grout spaces leaving no voids. 23.1.3 Grout beams over openings in one continuous operation. 23.1.4 Grout vertical cores in maximum of 5' lifts. Stop grout pours 1- 1/2" below a mortar joint, except at top of wall. Where bond beams are used stop grout pour 1/2" below top. 23.1.5 Use metal lath, mortar, or special units to confine grout to area required. Do not use materials which may inhbit bond or are combustible. 23.1.6 Use acceptable cold weather precautions in placing and curing of grout when temperature Is less than 32°F. 23.2 Low -lift grouting: In hollow unit masonry construction, limit 05/05/98 C DIVISION 4* UNIT MASONRY WORK *SECTION 4A -7 low -lift grouting to maximum wall height of 5' per lift. Vertical cores to be grouted shall have minimum clear dimensions of 3" x 4 ". 23.3 High-lift grouting: 23.3.1 Grout hollow unit masonry of accordance with this section when erected to height in excess of 5' before grouting. Vertical cores to be grouted shall have minimum clear dimension of 3" and clear area of 10 sq. in. 23.3.2 Provide cleanout openings at 12 sq. in. minimum area opposite each vertical bar at bottom course or in foundation wall. 23.3.3 Clean cores and collar joints of mortar droppings and foreign material, position reinforcement, and close cleanout openings before grouting. 23.3.4 Place vertical barriers consisting of masonry units and mortar in bond beam type hollow units and in collar joints to be grouted at 30' maximum to limit horizontal flow of grout. 23.3.5 Pour grout in 5' lifts maximum allowing minimum of 30 minutes and maximum of 1 hr. before pouring next lift. Grout shall be consolidated by puddling or vibrating at time of pouring and then reconsolidated before plasticity is lost. Reconsolidation may occur as next lift is poured. 23.3.6 Do not erect masonry to a height more than 80 times the minimum clear grout space before grouting with a maximum of 30' unless otherwise acceptable to Project Manager. 23.4 Construction protection: 23.4.1 Do not use high -lift grouting method until masonry units have been in place 3 days minimum. 23.4.2 Do not permit water or foreign material to fall in grout space while grout is being placed and curing. 23.5 Cleanup: Remove misplaced grout immediately and clean affected areas. 24. LINTELS 24.1 Install loose lintels of steel and other materials where shown. 24.2 Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1' -0" are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide formed -in -place masonry lintels. Temporarily support formed- in -place lintels. 24.3 Unless otherwise shown, provide one reinforcing bar for each 4" of wall thickness and of a size number not less than the number of feet of opening width. 24.4 For hollow masonry unit walls, use specially formed "U "- shaped lintel units with reinforcing bars placed as shown and filled with concrete grout. 24.5 Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of 4" for openings less than 6'- 0" wide, and 8" for wider openings. 25. FLASHING OF CONCRETE MASONRY WORK 25.1 Wall Flashing: 25.1.1 Surfaces to receive flashing shall be smooth, dry and free from projections. 25.1.2 Install flashings in walls where and as shown on drawings. Apply the material in one layer and spot bond to masonry Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington with a heavy cold applied asphaltic mastic. Laps shall be not less than 6" and sealed with a full coating of bonding material. Where material tums up it shall be fully coated and bonded. Where anchors, ties, or other materials penetrate flashings, the holes shall be carefully water- proofed with the bonding material. 25.2 Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related work shown to be built into masonry work. 26. REPAIR. POINTING AND CLEANING 26.1 Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped, broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. 26.2 Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up joints at comer, openings and adjacent work to provide a neat, uniform appearance properly prepared for application of caulking or sealant compounds. cut at defective joints and repoint. 26.3 Clean exposed masonry by dry brushing at the end of each day's work and after final pointing to remove mortar spots and droppings. Clean wall surfaces with prepared masonry cleaner in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Check to confirm manufacturer's recommendations for use on integrally colored concrete block. 26.4 Remove mortar splatters and drips from adjacent block work immediately. 26.5 After completion of all work, this contractor shall remove all scaffolding and surplus masonry supplies from construction site. 27. LIQUID WATER REPELLENT 27.1 Installer. A firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in application of water repellents of types required on substrates similar to those of this project. 27.2 Job Conditions: 27.2.1 Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent (except with the written recommendation of manufacturer), when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.; or when substrate surfaces have cured for less than a period of 2 months; or when rain or temperatures below 40 degrees F. are predicted for a period of 24 hours; or earlier than 3 days after surfaces became wet from rainfall or other moisture sources or when substrate is frozen, or at surface temperature of less than 40 degrees F. 27.2.2 Installer must examine substrate and conditions under which water repellent is to be applied, and advise Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions, Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected In a manner acceptable to Installer. 27.3 Preparations for Installation: 27.3.1 Clean substrates of substances which might interfere with penetration/adhesion of water repellents. Test for moisture content, In accordance with repellent manufacturer's In- structions, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. 05/05/98 • 1 • \ : • : • • . 27.3.2 Coordination with sealants: Where feasible, delay application for water repellents until installation of sealants has been completed in joints adjoining surfaces to be coated with repellent. 27.3,3 Mask off areas which receive paint, special coating, ceramic tile or exterior insulation and finish system to ensure that no liquid water repellent is applied on these areas. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where there is possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plant materials with drop cloths. Clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations br cleaning. 27.4 Installation: 27.4.1 Apply "Prime -a -Pell 200" clear coating by Chemprobe Corporation, Garland, TX (214) 271 -5551, in a uniform, one-coat saturation -type spray coating.of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment. Comply with all manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure. 27.4.2 For locations where regulations limit the VOC content of coatings apply "Prime -a -Pell Pius" clear coating by Chemprobe Corporation, Garland, TX (214) 271 -5551, in lieu of "Prime -a Pella 200 ". Comply with all manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, using airless spraying procedure. 28. CONSTRUCTION PROTECTION 28.1 Step back unfinished work for joining new work. Before laying new work, remove loose mortar and clean exposed Joint. 28.2 Protect sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings and other damage during construction. 28.3 Remove misplaced mortar and grout immediately and clean affected areas. 28.4 Protect face materials from staining. 28.5 Keep masonry units dry. Keep the top of masonry construction covered with a water -proof covering when work is not in progress. 28,6 Temporarily brace masonry against horizontal loads until cured and permanently braced. 29. ACCEPTANCE OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 29.1 Completed masonry work which meets all applicable requirements shall be accepted without qualifications. 29.2 Completed masonry work which fails to meet one or more requirements must be brought into compliance in an approved manner or may be rejected or accepted by the Project Manager. 29.3 The masonry work shall be clean and show a quality of workmanship and finish that conforms to the approved sarrpie when viewed at a distance of 15' in average daylight, or as otherwise acceptable to the Project Manager. 29.4 Joints shall be tooled and tight, showing no separation between mortar and units. - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 5• PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards: 1.2.1 AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings (1989). 1.2.2 AISI Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members (1986). 1.2.3 AWS(D1.1) Structural Welding Code - Steel (1985). 1.2.4 AWS(D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel (1981). 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Include labor, materials, and equipment to furnish and install all miscellaneous metal. work shown or required by the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 Miscellaneous metal work includes all items of miscellaneous metal not covered in other sections. All items shal be complete with minor sundry and accessory parts, anchors, fittings, etc., customarily furnished for the general type and kind of items shown or required. 2.3 Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following items of work. (Note: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.3.1 Inserts, bolts, screws, nuts, etc. 2.3.2 Ladders /cages. 2.3.3 Railings. 2.3.4 Bollards. 2.3.5 Frames for wall, roof, pits, skylights, roof hatch, etc. 2.3.6 Lintels. 2.3.7 Water heater mounting shelf. 2.3.8 Steel angle corner guards (if required). 2.3.9 Gondola fixture framing including channels, hanger rods, wall plates, angles, floor angles, etc. 2.3.10 Metal nosings for concrete stairs. 2.3.11 Metal stairs. 2.3.12 Gratings. 2.3.13 Wall pack covers. 2.3.14 Channel frames at overhead doors, compactor door, impact doors, etc. 2.3.15 Angles at loading dock edge. 2.3.16 Other miscellaneous metal Items indicated, specified or required. 3. RELATED WORK SPECFIED ELSEWHERE (As Required by Job conditions) 3.1 Structural Steel - Section 5A Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washinaton MISCELLANEOUS METALS *SECTION 5E -1 3.2 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B 3.3 Steel Joists - Section 5C 3.4 Metal Roof Deck - Section 5D 3.5 Cold Rolled Structural Metals - Section 5F 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 4.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 4.3 Shop Drawings 4.3.1 Submit shop drawings to the Architectural consultant forreview routing and a second set to the Toys "R" Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 4.3.2 Shop drawings shall be in accordance with the contract draw- ings and shall show sizes of metal items, method of assembly, hardware anchorage and connection to other work for each item of miscellaneous metal. 4.3.3. The location of all items must be given either by note or by an erection drawing. 4.3.4 Shop drawings shall also indicate by manufacturer and part number all fastening to be used. 4.3.5 When necessary, measurements given on the contract drawings must be verified at the building on surrounding work to avoid any discrepancies. 4.3.6 Detail metal work for ample size, strength and stiffness and as directed. Detail items subject to live loads to support such loads as required by applicable Codes and goveming agencies, unless otherwise noted. 4.3.7 Detail metal work to receive hardware and show proper clear- ances or bevels. 4.4 Metal Stair Certification: Submit to the Project Manager for review a written certification signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the state where the structure is located stating that all metal pan stairs for this project have been designed in accord- ance with the contract documents and all applicable local, state and federal code requirements. 4.5 Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concepts. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for general or detaied dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS 5.1 Structural Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36. 5.2 Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 KSI. 5.3 Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade 9, Fy a 35 KSI. 5.4 Cast Iron: Gray iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30, unless otherwise noted. 05/05/98 • 1 u _1. • u � • , 5.5 High strength bolts: ASTM A325. 5.6 Bolts: ASTM A307. 5.7 Welding Electrodes for Arc Welding: Series E70. 5.8 Stair Nosings for Concrete Stairs: Curb Bar 150 as manufactured by Wooster Products, Inc. - Phone (800) 321 -4936, or approved equal. 5.9 Paint 5.9.1 Shop Primer. Lead and chromate free, universal modified - alkyd primer complying with FSTT- P-664. 5.9.2 Galvanizing repair paint: High-zinc-dust content paint, with dry-film containing not less than 94% zinc dust by weight and complying with SSPC -Paint 20. Verify usability with jurisdictional authority. 5.9.3 Bituminous paint: Cold- applied asphaltic mastic complying with SSPC -Paint 12 containing no hazardous materials. 6. FABRICATION 6.1 Schedule fabrication and delivery of miscellaneous metals and fumish to trades concerned all items to be built into other work. 6.2 Verify job dimensions before beginning fabrication. 6.3 Drill or punch and countersink holes for bolts and screws. Shearing, drilling or punching shall leave clean, true lines and surfaces. 6.4 At the proper time furnish necessary templates, pattems and items of miscellaneous metal, such as sleeves, inserts and similar items to be built into adjoining work. 6.5 Unless otherwise shown, all corners shall be square and all members shall be true to length and straight. Fabricate metal work with sharp lines and angles with smooth true surfaces and clean edges. Form exposed joints to exclude water. 6.6 All parts exposed to view shall be thoroughly finished, presenting a neat and workmanlike appearance with surfaces ground and dressed, free from flake, rust, pitting, weld marks and other noticeable fabrication marks. There shall be no twists, bends or open joints in finished members, nor any projecting edges or comers at connections, Sharp exposed edges shall be eased. 6.7 All parts shall be properly reinforced, braced and made thoroughly rigid and substantial. 6.8 Conceal fastenings where possible. Where screws or bolts are used, heads shall be countersunk, screwed up tight and threads nicked to prevent loosening. 6.9 Fabricate nonferrous members with fastenings of same material. 6.10 All built -up sections shall be shop fabricated and realigned after welding to true, straight section. 6.11 Welds shall be shop welded Insofar as is practicable. Where problems of shipment, handling and installation require fabrication in sections, provide for field fitting and welding. 6.12 Modification of details for ease of fabrication may be made only upon written approval of the Project Manager. 6.13 Any member requiring a weather seal shall have continuous welds. 6.14 Rough Hardware, Inserts, Bolts, Screws and Nuts, etc.: 6.14.1 Unless otherwise specified, provide all bolts, screws, nuts, etc., shown or required to secure this work in place. 6.14.2 Unless otherwise specified, provide steel inserts where required in concrete to receive bolts or other fastenings. 6.14.3 Use expansion bolts when necessary for attachment to masonry. 6.14.4 Unless otherwise specified, provide all angles, plates, bolts, sleeves and other items to be embedded in concrete as shown or required. Bolts shall not extend more than 1/8" beyond exposed nuts. 6.14.5 All fastenings shall be subject to the approval of the Owner's Representative. 6.15 Vertical Ladders /Cages 6.15.1 Ladders shall be all•welded construction. Fabricate ladder with hot rolled steel rails and round steel rungs extending through the rails with connections welded. Anchor ladder at bottoms and tops and at intermediate points not over 4 ft. apart, with brackets of same size as side rails, unless otherwise detailed. Comply with the requirements of ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise indicated 6.15.2 Cages: If indicated, provide steel cages around ladders, fabricated of steel bars and shapes, conforming to the details on the drawing. 6.16 Railings: 6.16.1 Horizontal and vertical rails shall be formed of 1 -1/2" I.D. standard weight steel pipe as indicated with joints and intersections coped, welded and ground smooth. Refer to the drawings for special details. 6.16.2 Posts shall not be over 5' -0" o.c. and shall have flanged brackets of maleable iron for securing ends to stair stringers and to concrete where required. 6.16.3 Wall railings shall be provided with ends retumed to walls. Provide flanged brackets of malleable iron for support of ends of railings to walls, and intermediate supports not over 5' -0" o.c. 6.16.4 Interconnect railings and handrail members by butt- weldiig or welding with intemal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. 6.16.4.1 At tee and cross intersections provide coped joints. 6.16.4.2 At bends interconnect pipe by means of prefabricated elbow fittings or flush radius bends, as applicable, of radiuses indicated. 6.16.4.3 Form bends by use of prefabricated elbow fittings and radius bends or by bending pipe, at fabricator's option. 6.16.5 Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross- section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe. 6.16.6 Close exposed ends of pipe by welding 3/16" thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton Q5/05/98 DIVISION 5* MISCELLANEOUS METALS *SECTION 5E -3 6.17 Brackets Flanges, Fittings and Anchors: Providewall brackets end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings and anchors for interconnections of pipe and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 6.17.1 For railing posts set in concrete • provide sleeves of galvanized steel pipe not less than 6" long and with an inside diameter not less than 'A" greater than the outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve and of width and length not less than 1" greater than outside diameter of sleeve. 6.17.2 Galvanized exterior steel railings, including pipe, fittings, brackets, fasteners, and other ferrous components. Provide black steel pipe for interior railings. 6.18 Pipe Bollards (Exterior): 6.18.1 Provide and Install pipe guard bollards where shown on drawings. Bollards shall be standard weight pipe buried in concrete below grade. Fill pipe with concrete and mold cap round and smooth. Embed pipe in concrete 18" round (6" cover on pipe) and extend below grade as shown in details. Paint pipe OSHA yellow. 6.19 Pipe Bollards (Interior): 6.19.1 Provide and Install concrete - filled pipe bollards where shown. Bollards shall be standard weight pipe of the size shown set in pipe sleeves sized to accommodate bollard by plus or minus one inch. Sleeve shall be 12" deep with capped end embedded in concrete floor slab. Set bollard full depth into sleeve and provide wedges to center and plumb. Insert foam backer rod to 1 -1/2" below finish floor between pipe and sleeve. Fill with Por Rok grout to finish floor. 6.20 Loose Lintels: 6.20.1 Shall be of sizes shown on the lintel schedule, or as required for the particular location. 6.20.2 This shall include openings for ducts, louvers, grilles, convectors, etc. All lintels shall have 8" of bearing at each end, unless otherwise noted. 6.20.3 Galvanize loose steel lintels to be installed in exterior walls. 6.21 Burglar Protection Guards 6.21.1 At roof openings larger than 12" x 12 ", provide and install 1/2" diameter bars 6" o.c. maximum in 4 -sided welded steel angle frame as detailed. Secure angles to roof opening angle frame. 6.21.2 For burglar protection guards at the mechanical roof top units, coordinate with the contractor for proper size and location. 6.22 Corner Guards: 6.22.1 Furnish steel angle comer guards to the masonry section for installation. Furnish guards with anchors for embedment into block coursing as shown. 6.23 Metal Stairs: 6,23.1 Fabricate and install metal stairs where indicated on the drawings, conforming to size and profile detailed. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 6.23.2 Provide assemblies which, when installed, comply with the following minimum requirements for structural performance unless otherwise indicated. 6.23.2.1 Stringers, Treads and Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a live load of 100 pounds per square foot or a concentrated load of 300 pounds at any point. 6.23.2.2 Handrails and Toprails: Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 pounds applied at any point in any direction or a uniform load of 50 pounds per foot applied simultaneously in both vertical and horizontal directions when tested per ASTM E935. Concentrated and uniform Toads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 6.23.3 Submit written certification signed and sealed by a structural engineer licensed in the state where the structure is located, indicating compliance with all requirements. 6.24 Steel Frames 6.24.1 Provide steel frames for openings, knock -out panels, frames, pits and other openings in floors, walls and roofs as indicated. 6.24.2 Construct frames to profile, sizes, and lengths as shown on the drawings. 6.24.3 Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown, or if not shown, or required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from steel shapes and plates and steel bars, of welded construction using butt joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. 6.24.4 Weld securely to structural steel where indicated. 6.25 Gratings: 6.25.1 Provide banded steel bar type gratings and frames over sump pit and at other locations indicated. Construct gratings of steel bars of size shown. All joints shall be mechanically interlocked, welded, or riveted as govemed by the design indicated. Provide steel supporting members as indicated or required. Form gratings into sections of sizes indicated, or necessary for proper access and handling. Fasten gratings in place with steel clips or other suitable fastenings of a type that will permit removal. Gratings and fastenings on the exterior of the building and as noted shall be hot - dipped zinc - coated after fabrication. 6.26 Miscellaneous Steel Trim: 6.26.1 Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work. 6.27 Edge Angles: 6.27.1 Provide edge angles at overhead door openings, and elsewhere as shown, fabricated of structural steel shapes consisting of 3" x 3" x 1/4" and 5" x 3" x 3/8" back to back. Plug weld outer angle to Inner with minimum 3/4" diameter welds 4" on centers of continuous weld across the top for entire width. Provide 1/8" thick by 2" wide steel step anchors 4" long at maximum spacing of 2' -0" and 6" from each end. 05/05/98 DIVISION 5' 6.28 Steel Door Frames (for overhead doors and special doors): 6.28.1 Fabricate steel door frames of steel shapes or bent plate as shown, fully welded, uniform square and true. Plug weld built-up members, continuously weld exposed joints; grind exposed welds smooth. 6.28.2 Provide adjustable steel strap anchors for securing door frames of overhead doors into adjoining masonry, using 1/8" x 2" straps of the length required for a minimum 8" embedment, unless otherwise shown. Weld anchors to frame jambs no more than 12" from both bottom and head of frame and space anchors not more than 30" apart. 6.29 Steel Plate Light Bracket: 6.29.1 At truck dock inside wall provide steel plate bracket as per details on the drawings. Expansion bolt to wall. Drill and tap to take bolts for bracket of dock Tight. 6.30 Wall Pack Covers: 6.30.1 At exterior wall where indicated. Fabricate of steel bent plate, gauge and size indicated with bolt holes and anchors as required. Units shall be shop primed for field finish. 7. FINISHES 7.1 Galvanizing: 7.1.1 All items to be galvanized shall be cleaned and heat prepared and given one good heavy coating of galvanizing by immersing same full into the vat, allowing same to coat well all joints and surfaces before removing. 7.1.2 Galvanizing applied on product fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strips shall comply with ASTM Al23. 7.1.3 Galvanizing on assembled steel products shall comply with ASTM A386. 7.1.4 Galvanizing on iron and steel hardware shall comply with ASTM A153. 7.1.5 Galvanized surfaces for which a shop coat of paint is speci- fied shall be chemically treated to provide a bond for the paint. 7.1.6 Except for bolts, nuts, etc., all galvanizing shall be done after fabrication. 7.1.7 Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with Military Specifications MIL -P -21035 (Ships). 7.2 Shop Painting: 7.2.1 Unless otherwise specified, ail steel, cast or wrought iron, except galvanized parts and parts embedded in concrete shall be prepared and painted as follows before leaving the shop. 7.2.1.1 All items of miscellaneous iron and steel, except galvanized items, shall be given one shop coat of gray metal primer, or an approved equal, applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 7.2.1.2 Steel in contact with earth, concrete or masonry shall be given a heavy coat of black asphaltic paint over the prime coat. 7.2.2 All paint shall be uniformly applied to produce a smooth surface free from runs, laps, streaks, spatter, brush marks, 1 1 • - • MISCELLANEOUS METALS •SECTION 5E-4 discontinuances, etc., and surfaces shall be evenly covered to the minimum thickness specified. Paint shall be well worked into all joints and open places. Contact and inaccessible surfaces shall be given one coat before assembling. 7.2.3 No paint shall be applied when the materials are wet, or when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F., or temperature of materials is below the dew point of the atmosphere. 7.2.4 All paint shall be delivered to the shop in original, sealed containers, marked with the manufacturer's name, brand identification and paint number. 7.2.5 After erection, spot paint, in a neat and workmanlike manner, all connections, field welds, boles and abrasions with the same prime paint used originally. PART 3: EXECUTION 8. PREPARATION 8.1 Coordinate and fumish•anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, Instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 9. INSTALLATION 9.1 General 9.2 Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devised and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabricators to in -place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through - bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. 9.3 Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, bvel, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. 9.4 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch -up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot - dipped galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. 9.5 Field Welding: comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 9.6 Steel Pipe Railings and handrails: 9.6.1 Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction as follows: 9.6,1.1 Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. OR: at Contractor's option. 9.6.1.2 Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less that DIVISION 5• MISCELLANEOUS METALS *SECTION 5E -5 5" deep and 3/4" greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material, insert posts and fill annular space between post and concrete with non - shrink, non- metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 9.6.1.3 Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off excess grout and leave 1/8" build -up sloped away from post. For installation exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal grout to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 9.6.1.4 Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored tin wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. 9.6.1.5 Secure handrails to wall with wall bracket and end fittngs. Provide bracket with not Tess than 1 -1/2" clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required for design loading. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: 9.6.1,6, Use type of racket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage. 9.6.1.7 For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 9.6.1.8 For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads. 9.6.1.9 For stud partitions use lag bolts set into wood backing between studs. Coordinate with stud installations for accurate location of backing members. 9.7 Abrasive Nosings: Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. Cast anchors into concrete. 9.8 Touch -Up Painting: Cleaning and touch -up painting of field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 of these specifications. 9.9 For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply 2 coats of galvanized repair paint. - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 5• PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.1 The provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the following standards: 1.2.1 AISI Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members (1986). 1.2.2 AWS (01.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel (1981). 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Include all labor, materials and equipment to fumish and install all cold rolled structural metal sections as shown on the drawings and herein specified. All framing shall be complete with fasteners, clips, plates and accessory parts, customarily furnished for this type work. 2.2 The work of this section includes, but is not limited to: (Note: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project). 2.2.1 Structural light gage framing where indicated. 2.2.2 Framing for interior load bearing partitions, where indicated. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (As required by Job Conditions) 3.1 Structural Steel - Section 5A 3.2 Steel Joist Girders - Section 5B 3.3 Steel Joist - Section 5C 3.4 Metal Roof Deck - Section 5D 3.5 Miscellaneous Metals - Section 5E 4. SUBMITTAL 4.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 4.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 4.3 Shop Drawings: 4.3.1 Submit shop drawings to the Architectural consultant for review routing and a second set to the Toys "R" Us Construction Project Manager for review prior to fabrication. 4.3.2 Verify job conditions before beginning fabrication. 4.3.3 The drawings shall show sizes, method of assembly and anchorages. 4.4 Manufacturer's data and certification: 4.4.1 Submit manufacturer's data for all cold rolled structural metals used in this project. 4.4.2 Submit manufacturer's certification that the physical and structural properties of all cold rolled structural metal framing members, connections, and accessories meet or exceed the Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington COLD ROLLED STRUCTURAL METALS *SECTION 5F -1 physical and structural properties listed by Unimast, Inc. 4.5 Review of submittals Is only for review of general conformance with the design concept. In no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for general or detailed dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS 5.1 All cold rolled structural metal framing members, connections and accessories shall be of the type, size and gage shown on the plans. The physical and structural properties listed by Unimast, Inc. shall be considered the minimum permitted for all framing members, connections and accessories. 5.2 All cold rolled structural metal framing members shall be formed from corrosion- resistant steel, corresponding to the requirements of ASTM A446, with a minimum yield strength of 40 ksi for SJ style studs, and 33 ksi for CR- runners. PART 3: EXECUTION 6. FABRICATION: 6.1 Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. Prefabricated panels shall be square with components attached In a manner as to prevent racking. 6.2 All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Members shall be held positively in place until properly fastened. 7. ERECTION: 7.1 Prior to commencement of work under this Section, carefully inspect the work of other trades and verify that all such work is complete to a point where this installation may properly commence. 7.2 Use means necessary to protect the work under this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. 7.3 Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner which will not cause distortion of the members. 7.4 Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection Is completed. 7.5 Splices in studs shall not be permitted. 7.6 Any material damaged during fabrication, shipment or erection shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 1 (... DIVISION 6* CARPENTRY *SECTION 6A -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review ar ly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools and services necessary to complete the carpentry and related work in addition to layout of this work and installation of listed items of other sections of the specifications. Examine be drawings to determine the extent of the work and review the following criteria. 2.2 General Requirements 2.2.1 Furnish and install all rough woodwork, centering for masonry, rough bucks, grounds, screeds, nailing strips, etc. 2.2.2 Furnish and install all required rough hardware, such as nails, bolts, washers, anchors, etc., except as otherwise specified. 2.2.3 Take charge of and distribute hardware at the building and provide and arrange temporary shelving for the storage of all hardware. 2.2.4 Lay out work described and assigned to this section of the specifications in accordance with the drawings. Carefully check dimensions. 2.2.5 Erect temporary protection for all completed or partially completed work where required to protect materials, surfaces, finishes, and equipment this Includes temporary doors until hollow metal doors are delivered. 2.2.6 Examine the conditions including existing dimensions under which the work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.2.7 Coordinate work and cooperate with all other trades furnishing built in items to avoid delays in any work. 2.3 Items fumished by others or included under different sections and installed by this contractor are as follows: 2.3.1 Hollow metal doors and frames (Section 8A) 2.3.2 Finish hardware (Section 81) Closers by Owner). 2.3.3 Toilet partitions (Section 10A) (by Owner). 2.3.4 Toilet room accessories (Section 10B) (as noted by Owner). 2.3.5 Wall protection (Section 10D) (by Owner). 2.3.6 Dock bumpers and dock seals (by Owner). 2.3.7 Interior aluminum railings at the Cash Register Area (by Owner), if shown on drawings. 2.3.8 Baler (by Owner). 2.3.9 Special Doors (by Owner). 2.3.10 Safe (by Owner). 2.3.11 Laminate Wainscots Panels (by Owner). 2.3.12 Prefabricated low height walls (by Owner). 2.3.13 Skylights (Section 7H) (by Owner). 2.3.14 Wood Register Tandem, Refund and RGD (by Owner). 2.3.15 Fixture inside and outside corners (by Owner). 2.3.16 3 -D Icons and Platforms (by Owner). 2.3.17 CPU, CIC and Bike Assembly (TRU Only). 2.3.18 Baby Registry, Furniture and Order Desk (BRU Only). 2.3.19 Enlarged Photo Display (by Owner) (BRU Only). 2.3.20 For KRU slatwall, valance, fitting rooms, etc., see Section 6B, Architectural Woodwork. 2.4 Items of work included but are not limited to the following list. Examine the drawings and this specification section for the extent of work. 2.4.1 Wood grounds, blocking, and other carpentry items as shown, for supporting and fastening millwork, carpentry, toilet partitions, urinal screens, grab bars and the work of the various other Sections. 2.4.2 All rough hardware including bolts, nails, screws, spikes, hangers, etc., required in connection with the installation of all materials under this Section. 2.4.3 Framing including wall studs, plates, joists, etc. 2.4.4 All plywood, rough wood blocking, blocking for roof curbs, copings and other roof wood members. 2.4.5 Front Office construction. 2.4.6 Finish wood trim and cabinet work including; coat rack In Break Room and cabinets and countertop at Front Offices and Break Room. 2.4.7 Laminated plastic covered plywood countertops, walls and counter fronts as indicated. 2.4.8 Plywood for equipment backboards as shown on drawings. 2.4.9 Sheet metal chute for mezzanine (If used). 2.4.10 All miscellaneous work shown on drawings but not furnished or installed by other trades. 2.4.11 Solid surfacing material lavatory. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washinaton 05/05/98 DIVISION 6" 2.4.12 Bike wall construction. 2.4.13 Shelves and stanchions in Janitor's closet. 2.4.14 Temporary construction sign (see drawings). 3. SUBMITTALS: 3.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing Location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. Show location of blocking and supports that are to be built into wall substrates, 3.1.1 Submit the following shop drawings: 3.1.1.1 Front Office details. 3.1.1.2 Lavatory counter tops. 3.1.1.3 Break Room counter and cabinets. 3.1.2 Submit the following samples: 3.1.2.1 Plastic laminate, 3" x 5" for each type, color, pattern and surface finish. 3.1.2.2 Solid surfacing material, 3" x 5" of type, color, pattern and surface finish. 4. TEMPORARY PROTECTION 4.1 Construct temporary doors, stairs, ladders, runways, barricades and railings required in and about the building. 4.2 The building shall be closed with temporary doors and windows as the work progresses, and during periods of inclement weather. All unglazed windows shall be closed with 4 mil polyethylene film in rough frames or old sash, plywood, or other suitable means. Temporary doors shall be storm tight with locks; do not fasten to finished frame of permanent door. 4.3 Protect well and in the proper manner with nonstaining sheathing paper, all materials in construction likely to be damaged by other trades or affected by the weather. The use of nails, wire, or metal likely to rust or cause discoloration, will not be permitted. All protection must be placed immediately after materials or work is set in place, and when directed by the various trades or Architect's Representative. 4.4 Guard rails shall be constructed around all shafts, wells, large duct openings, etc., occurring in the floor and roof constructions. Rails shall be of height specified by Code and of substantial construction, and shall remain In place until the enclosing walls or partitions are erected and roof openings closed, at which time the guard shall be removed. 4.5 Comply with current OSHA regulations and standards. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. LUMBER. GENERAI 5.1 Standard: For each use, comply with the "American Softwood Lumber Standard" PS 20 by the U.S. Department of Commerce. Nominal sizes are shown or specified; provde actual sizes complying with the minimum size requirements of PS 20 for the moisture content specified for each use. 5.2 Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise shown or specified. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington CARPENTRY *SECTION 6A -2 5.3 Provide seasoned lumber with 19% maximum moisture content at time of dressing and complying with dry size requirements of PS 20, unless otherwise specified. 6. FRAMING LUMBER 6.1 General: Where wood framing from 2" to 5" (but not including 5 ") in nominal thickness, and 2" or more in nominal width is shown or scheduled; provide lumber complying with grading rules which conform to the requirements of the "National Grading Rule for Dimension Lumber" of the American Lumber Standards Committee established under PS 20. 6.2 For light framing (2" to 4" thick and 2" to 4" wide), provide construction grade. 7. STRUCTURAL FRAMING 7.1 Structural Framing (6" and wider and from 2" to 4" thick), provide No. 2 grade lumber of any species of specified grade meeting or exceeding the following values: 7.1.1 "Fb" (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending) 1250 pounds per square inch. 7.1.2 "E" (minimum modulus of elasticity) 1,700,000 pounds per square inch. 7.2 General: Where lumber less than 2" in nominal thickness and 2" or more in nominal width is shown or specified, provide boards complying with dry size requirements of PS 20. 8. BOARDS 8.1 Exposed boards: Where boards will be exposed in the finished work, provide the following: 8.1.1 Moisture content: 15% maximum. 8.1.2 For transparent finish (or natural finish), where shown or scheduled, provide the following: Any species hardwood. 8.1.3 For paint finish, where shown or scheduled, provide the following: No. 2 boards, any species hardwood. 8.2 Concealed boards: Where boards will be concealed by other work, provide the following: 8.2.1 Moisture content: 15% maximum. 8.2.2 Species and grade: Southem Pine (SPIB)No. 2 boards or WWPA (any species) "Construction" boards. 9. PLYWOOD 9.1 Standard: For each use, comply with the requirements for "Softwood Plywood /Construction and Industrial" PS1 by the U.S. Department of Commerce. 9.2 Plywood: Provide plywood as specified for the type of exposure and finish shown or scheduled, as follows: 9.2.1 For smooth plywood exposed on the interior and to receive a paint finish, provide Interior Type, Grade A on exposed face; Grade D on concealed face. 9.2.2 For floor underlayment, provide Underlayment Grade C -D plugged. Provide sanded finish where resilient finish flooring is indicated. 9.2.3 For equipment backboards for electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire- retardant treated Standard Grade plywood with exterior glue. 05/05/9$ • DIVISION 6* CARPENTRY *SECTION 6A -3 9.3 Exterior plywood: Where plywood is concealed by built -up roofing provide exterior type. (Make fire- treated as required by local codes.) 9.4 Veneer plywood: Hardwood veneer plywood paint grade finish. See Enlarged Office Plan Sheet. 10. PARTICLE BOARD 10.1 Provide particleboard complying with the requirements of the National Particleboard Association's "Physical Property Specification for Mat Formed Wood Particleboard for Floor Underlayment" and with FHA UM28. Refer to Control Tower details for extent of particle board application. 11. ANCHORAGE AND FASTENING MATERIAL$ 11.1 For each use, select proper type, size, material and finish complying with the applicable Federal Specification. 12. MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS 12.1 Plastic laminate: Plastic laminate shall be of the thickness indicated on the drawings, and shall be of the "high- pressure" type. Laminate shall be general purpose grade with a "M" finish, in color as indicated on the drawings or as selected by the Architect. 12.2 Plastic laminate at Bike Wall: Thermoplastic embossed sheet (34 -5/8" x 103 -3/8" step plate, color: stainless steel) ATI (Advanced Technology, Inc.) 311 Regional Road South, Greensboro, NC (910) 668 -0488 Attn: Bob Burgio or Owner approved equal. (TRU Only.) 12.3 Wood shelves and hanging rods (if used): Shelves for coat racks shall be 1" thick clear pine, 12" deep uriess otherwise shown, and shall be supported on 1" x 3" wood cleats on both ends and across back. Hanging rods shall be provided where required. They shall be nickel- plated steel tubing similar and equal to Stanley No. 7050 with flanges at ends securely fastened in place. Where poles are over 4' long, provide center supporting brackets similar to Stanley No, 7037. Provide white finish #727 Stanley Steel bracket supports at shelves in Front Office area. 12.4 Wood shelves for Janitor's Closet shall be 3/4 "thick interior grade plywood with 3/4" solid wood edge strip, 12" or 18" deep as indicated on drawings supported by factory finish white stanchions 6' -0" long, 24" o.c. 12.5 Sheet metal galvanized steel 22 gauge (for mezzanines, if required). 12.6 Wood shelf at Bike Wall door, 2 layers 3/4" with veneer edges and Stanley shelf brackets as shown on drawings. 13. FIRE - RETARDANT TREATMENT 13.1 Where used in contact with or In composition of rated walls or as shown or scheduled, or otherwise required by code or local authority for framing, blocking, decking and concealed construction, comply with AWPI Specification C -208 for pressure impregnation with fire- retardant chemicals to achieve a flame- spread rating of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with UL Test 723, ASTM E84 or NFPA Test 355. 13.2 Where treated items are indicated to receive a transparent or paint finish use a fire- retardant treatment which will not bleed through or adversely affect bond or finish. 13.3 Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, wherever possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy brush coat of same fire- retardant chemical used for treatment. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 14. WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT 14.1 The following items of rough framing or finish woodwork shall be treated with 'Woodlife" or equal wood preservative process: 14.1.1 Framing lumber in contact with concrete slab or grade. 14.1.2 Framing lumber in conjunction with roofing. PART 3: EXECUTION 15. WOOD FRAMING. GENERAI,, 15.1 Set wood framing accurately to required lines and levels. Provide framing members of sizes and on spacings shown, and frame openings as shown, or if not shown, comply with the recommendations of the "Manual for House Framing" of the National Forest Products Association. Cut, join and tightly fit framing around other work. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise detailed. 15.2 Anchor and nail as shown, or if not shown, to comply with the "Recommended Nailing Schedule - Table 1" of the "Manual for House Framing" and other recommendations of the NFPA. 15.3 Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 15.4 Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. 15.5 Partition framing: Space studs as indicated and double at openings. Unless otherwise Indicated, make headers over openings of two piece stud material set on edge or solid lumber of equivalent size. Bolt end studs to abutting concrete and masonry walls. Provide bearing partitions with double top plates with joints lapped 2 feet. 15.6 Joists and rafters unless otherwise indicated shall bear4 inches onto masonry and 2 inches on wood or steel Frame openings with headers and trimmer. Carry joists, trimmers, and headers on joist hangers when framing into carrying member at the relative same level. Fire cut joist bearing into masonry. Accurately bevel -cut ends of wood bridging to afford firm contact with members and nail each end with two nails. Keep lower end free until subfloor is In place. Metal bridging may be installed as recommended by the manufacturer. 15.7 Stair framing shall be spiked together. Cut rough carriages accurately to receive finish treads and risers. Provide trimmers, blocking, and other framing necessary for support of treads, risers, and railings. 15.8 Anchor sill plates to concrete floors with expansion bolts, one near each end and at 4' intermediate spacing. Anchor other wood members into concrete, masonry and steel with appropriate fasteners and unless otherwise indicated, space fasteners at 4 -ft. centers with a minimum of two fasteners per piece. Anchor bolts shall be a minimum 3 /8 -in. round. Stagger end joints of wood members overlaying one and other 2- ft. and lap members at corners. 15.9 Trim shall be installed with lengths as long as practicable and closely fitted joints. Blind nail to the extent practicable; set and stop face nailing with non - staining putty to match Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 05/05/98 DIVISION 6* CARPENTRY *SECTION 6A-4 finish. Use screws for fastening to metal; set and stop as done for nails. Stagger and conceal joints. Cap molded work at retums and interior angles and miter at exterior corners. Shoulder flat work to reduce warping. 15.10 For exterior canopy, fascia /soffit and other construction attached to and projecting from the building, provide fire - retardant treated blocking, framing lumber and plywood as indicated or as required by all applicable codes, regulations, ordinances and by authorities having Jurisdiction. Fire - treated lumber and plywood shall conform to paragraph 13 as specified in this section (if applicable). 16. ATTACHMENT AND ANCHORAG 16.1 Use common wire nails, except as otherwise shown or specified. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. See Paragraph 15(B). 17. WOOD GROUNDS. NAILERS. BLOCKING AND SLEEPER 17.1 Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Set true to line and level, plumb, with intersections true as required angle. Coordinate location with other work involved. 17.2 Attach to substrates securely with anchor bolts and other attachment devices as shown and as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry; anchor to form -work before concrete placement. 18. WOOD FURRING 18.1 Install plumb and level with closure strips at all edges and openings. Shim with wood blocking or incombustible materials, accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 18.2 Furring to receive gypsum drywall Unless otherwise shown, provide 1" x 2" furring at 16" o.c. vertically. 19. PLYWOOD 19.1 Comply with recommendations of the American Plywood Association (APA). 19.2 Provide plywood underlayment where shown. Install underlayment just prior to laying of finish flooring. Stagger end joints between panels in relation to each other and all joints in relation to substrate jointing. Allow 1/32" space between panels ends and edges for expansion and contraction unless otherwise detailed. Nail or staple In accordance with APA recommendations unless otherwise detailed. Prior to installation of finish flooring, fill damaged areas wider than 1/16 ", set nails 1/16" or staples and screws 1/32" but do not fill; lightly sand rough areas. 20. POCK BUMPERS AND DOCK SEAL* 20.1 Install owner furnished dock bumpers as per the details on the drawings. Set Owner fumished anchor bolts into concrete as per pattem shown or drill -in 5/8" diameter "Kwik -bolts" x minimum 5" long. Weld angle at top of dock bumper to the edge angle at dock. 20.2 Install dock seals In strict accordance with manufacturers instructions. Weld angle clips to steel jambs and head and fit clips Into pockets within dock seals. 21. TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SIGN 21.1 Fumish and Install a freestanding temporary sign constructed of exterior grade plywood supported on 2 x 4 wood framings and 4 x 4 wood posts set in concrete in the ground in a location shown on the site drawings and /or as directed by Owner's Representative. All exposed surfaces of sign to the painted white, with graphic content painted on face as described and noted on drawings by competent sign painter. 22. GYPSUM SHEATHING 22.1 Install gypsum sheathing to metal framing with specked fasteners in strict accordance with sheathing marufacturer's published recommendations and as indicated on the drawings. 22.2 Install in as large sizes as are practical for application indicated to minimize joints and provide a smooth, flat surface to receive the finish indicated. 23.. CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARD 23.1 Install in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions and recommendations. - END OF SECTION - 1 I : DIVISION 7• BUILDIN PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review o� when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Work under this Section consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, tools, equipment, services, and labor requred to completely install the building insulation indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 All insulation shall be stored so that it is protected from weather and shall be kept dry before, during and after application. 3. ITEMS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 3.1 Insulation of mechanical equipment and ducts. PART 2: PRODUCTS 4. MATERIALS 4.1 Batt Insulation (Exposed): It is the intent to have batt insulation installed beneath the panelized wood roof and between the wood purlins with a white facing, factory or field applied to the insulation and the wood purlins. 4.1.1 Batt Insulation: Fine fiber, flexible, resilient glass fiber blanket with flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84, Class /UL Fire Classification. Product shall be Manville Microlite "L" or approved equal. Furnish in width required for fit between purlins, thickness required to achieve R -value indicated and longest lengths as practical to minimize end joints. 4.1.2 White Facing: Lamotite 2820 -WMP, White Metallized Polypropylene /Scrim/Kraft or approved equal. If factory- laminated, furnish facing in widths larger than insulation widths for fastening to wood purlins. 4.1.3 Acceptable Laminators /Suppliers: Industrial Fiberglas, 14819 Salt Lake Avenue, City of Industry, California 91746. Phone (818) 369 -4086 or Mizell Brothers, Stockton, California. Phone (209) 943 -1251. PART 3: EXECUTION 5. JNSTALLATIOI'4 5.1 Insulation of all Insulation shall be in accord with current printed manufacturer's instructions. G INSULATION *SECTION 7B -1 5.2 Insulation shall be cut to fit nearly around projections, pipes, and vents. Provide clearance per manufacturer around heat conducting pipes. 5.3 For white faced insulation, install sample panels, three (3) purlins widths x length required to show end joint treatment for approval of Owner's Representative. Upon approval, sample panel will be used to judge balance of installation. - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 7* PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review g!i y when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, and Substitutions. 1.5 Refer to Section 11 -2 for Alternate Roof System. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing designated roofing system, flashing and associated sheet metal work and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. (Note: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 The extent of roofing, flashing and sheet metal work is shown on the drawings and includes brake metal roof edges, copings, gravel stops, gutters and downspouts. 2.3 Coordinate this work with other trades involved to avoid delays and to insure a satisfactory and watertight installation. 2.4 Roofer: Examine surfaces on or against which roofing is to be applied, check levels of roof for dips or hollows. Notify Owner's Representative in writing of any defects which, in tie opinion of Roofer, would be detrimental to installation of his work. Do not proceed with any work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the contractor. Laying of materials will be considered as acceptance of deck by Roofer. 2.5 Proceed with roofing work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. 2.6 Weather Conditions: Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with requirements and the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 3.1 Masonry thru -wall flashings not associated with roofing specified in Section 4A Unit Masonry Work. 3,2 Preservative treated nailers and blocking specified in Section 6A, Carpentry. 3.3 Skylights specified In Section 7H, Skylights (TRU and BRU Only). ROOFING. FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET METAL *SECTION 7D -1 4. QUALITY ASSURANCE 4.1 The roofing and associated work shall be accomplished by a single firm, which has installed the approved system for at least three years on projects comparable to the work of this contract; and, upon written request of the Owner, shall fumish the name and location of such roof installations. 4.2 Pre- Roofing Conference: Before the roofing work is scheduled to commence, after submittals have been reviewed by the Owner, and before any materials are ordered, a conference shall be called at the jobsite for the purpose of reviewing the drawings and specifications. The Intent is to resolve questions before the work Is started. The conference shall be attended by the roofing contractor, and his foreman, as well as the Owner's Representative. 4.3 UL Listing: Roofing system shall meet requirements for U -L Class "A" fire rating. 4.4 FM Listing: Roofing system shall be applied in accordance with F -M 1- 90 requirements. 5. SUBMITTALS 5.1 Manufacturer's Data, Roofing: For information only, submit 2 copies of specifications and installation instructions from the manufacturer for each major roofing product or system required. The material shall not be ordered until the submittals have been approved. One (1) copy shall be kept at the jobsite at all times for use during construction. 5.2 Samples: Submit 12" square samples of finished roofing sheets, including side /end -lap seam (for single ply). 5.3 Submit 12" square samples of required insulation. 5.4 Shop Drawings: Submit complete shop drawings showing roof configuration and sheet layout, details at perimeter, and special conditions as it applies to the specific roof system. 5.4.1 Indicate layout of tapered insulation materials (if any). 6. RQOFING SYSTEM GUARANTEE 6.1 Submit, in duplicate, ten year unlimited guarantee on roofing and associated work specified in this Section, agreeing to repair or replace work which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or otherwise fails to perform as roofing due to failures of materials or workmanship. Coverage of the guaranty shall include roof membrane, roof insulation, fastener (as applicable), base flashing (minimum height 8 ", maximum height as recommended by manufacturer) and workmanship for the full time specified. Guarantee shall be issued and backed solely by the Roofing Materials manufacturer, and shall be signed by Roofing Materials manufacturer. 6.2 As part of the bid documents, the contractor shall submit written evidence from the roofing manufacturer, to the Owner, Project Manager, and contractor, that he is eligible to provide the guaranty called for. A copy of the guaranty proposed by. the contractor shall also be submitted with the bid. Failure to provide either of the documents shall result in disauaiificatiort of that bid. 6.3 Contractor to submit to the Owners Representative copies of all Manufacturers field inspection reports, including interim and final inspection reports, as well as the 10 year guarantee as provided by Manufacturer. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 05/05/98 •k :•• . 7. SHEET METAL GUARANTY 7.1 Provide guarantee for all sheet metal work for a period of two (2) years from date of acceptance of same, as evidenced by final payment, and binding contractor to repair, or replace, at his own expense, all work which may show defective material or workmanship within said period. This guarantee shall include leaking, failure of materials to stay in place, undue expansion, lifting, deformation, loosening and splitting of seams. 10.2 Insulated Metal Deck: Three plies glass - fiber felts over manufacturer approved insulation, with mineral- surfaced 8. HANDLING. PROTECTION AND STORAGg cap sheet: 8.1 Stand all roll goods on end and store on clean floor to keep ends of rolls free from foreign matter. 8.2 Store all roofing materials in a dry place, on raised platforms, and cover with waterproof tarpaulins, inside, or in closed vans, protected from sun and weather. 8.3 Store all cartons, insulation, and drums of asphalt on raised, level platforms and protect them from the weather with waterproof tarpaulins. 8.4 Store solvents and coatings in a cool dry area. 8.7 Heat asphalt in accordance with manufacturer's recommended limits. Overheating of asphalts may change the physical properties of the asphalt and can contribute to premature aging or failure of the roof membrane. 8.8 Plastic covers and shrink -wrap shall not be used for job storage, nor shall any other cover be used in which moisture can condense within or on the material stored therein. 8.9 Keep temperature of roll materials above 40 degrees F for 24 hours prior to application, especially coated rolls. 8.10 Cover all roofing materials remaining on the roof deck at the end of each work day. PART2: PRODUCTS 9. ACCEPTABLE BUILT-UP ROOFING MANUFACTURERSIBASE �l1Z1 9.1 Built -up roof system manufacturers which are acceptable for use on the project are: 9.1.1 Schuller (Johns Manville) Roofing Systems Division. 9.1.2 Celotex, Roofing Products Division. 9.1.3 Tamko Asphalt Products. 9.2 For Regional Representatives, call: 9.2.1 Schuller (Johns Manville): (800) 654 -3103 9.2.2 Celotex: (813) 873-1600. 9.2.3 Tamko: (800) 641 -4691. 10. ACCEPTABLE BUILT -UP ASPHALT ROOFING SYSTEMS (F ALTERNATE IS REQUESTED). J3abies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washinaton 10.1 Insulated Metal Deck: Three plies glass - fiber felts over manufacturer approved insulation, gravel- surfaced. 10.1.1 Schuller (Johns Manville) 3G -IG. 10.1.2 Celotex AGS- 3 -C -G. 10.1.3 Tamko 501. 10.2.1 Schuller (Johns Manville) 4G -IC. 10.2.2 Celotex AGS- 4 -C -M. 10.2.3 Tamko 502. 11. ACCEPTABLE SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFINQ MANUFACTURERS 11.1 Single.ply roof system manufacturers which are acceptable ALTERNATE BIDS. 11.1.1 Firestone Building Products. 8.5 Keep lids tightly sealed on all cut back adhesives, and flashing cements to keep volatiles from escaping. 11.1.2 Carlisle SyntecSystems. 8.6 Unload and handle all roofing materials with care. Dropping 11.1.3 Stevens Roofing System. rolls, roof insulation, and roofing accessories can damage these components sufficiently to cause unsatisfactory 12. ACCEPTABLE SINGLE -PLY MEMBRANE ROOFINQ application and performance. SYSTEMS 12.1 Single -ply, mechanically fastened EPDM 45 mil. 12.1.1 Firestone Rubberguard EPDM. 12.1.2 Carlisle Sure -Seal (black). i 12.1.3 Stevens Hi -Tuff EP (Black). 13. ACCEPTABLE PVC MEMBRANE MANUFACTURER$ 13.1 PVC membrane manufacturers which are acceptable ALTERNATE BIDS. 13.1.1 Samafil, Inc. 13.1.2 Johns - Manville. 14. ACCEPTABLE PVC MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEMS 14.1 PVC Mechanically- fastened membrane. 14.1.1 Samafil Samafast. 14.1.2 HPG Roofing Systems (Johns - Manville). 15. ACCEPTABLE SBS /APP MODIFIED BITUMEN MEMBRAN$ MANUFACTURERS 15.1 Modified bitumen SBS and modified bitumen APP Membranes. 15.1.1 Siplast, Inc. 15.1.2 Tamko, Inc. 16. ACCEPTABLE SBS /APP REINFORCED MODIRED BITUM) N MEMBRANE SYSTEMS 16.1 Modified SBS /APP reinforced bitumen membrane systems 05/05/98 DIVISION 7• 16.1.1 Siplast Paradiene 20/30 (SBS). 16.1.2 Tamko Awaplan Premium (SBS) or Tamko Speedweld (APP) 17. MATERIAL 17.1 Fiberglass Ply Sheets: Glass fiber reinforced, complying with ASTM D2178, type VI. 17.2 Asphalt: Complying with ASTM 0312. 17.2.1 Type it (Flat) Asphalt shall be used with gravel surfaced specifications on slopes up to 'h" per foot. 17.2.2 Type III (Steep) Asphalt shall be used on all cap sheet specifications and on gravel surfaced specifications with slopes between 'A" per foot and 3" per foot. 17.3 Membrane Flashing: Manufacturer's Standard Modified Bitumen Flashing. 17.3.1 Torch Application: Where specified manufacturer's published specifications include both torch - applied and hot asphalt - applied membrane flashing, provide torch application 17.3.2 Hot Asphalt Application: Where specified manufacturer's published specifications included only hot asphalt- applied membrane flashing, provide hot asphalt application. 17.4 Aggregate: Clean, dry, roofing grade gravel conforming to ASTM D1863. All gravel shall pass through a 3/4" sieve, and none shall pass through a 1/4" sieve. 17.5 Mineral Surfaced Cap Sheet: conforming to ASTM, D3909. Color: White. 17.6 Asphalt Primer: Conforming to ASTM D41 or Federal Specification SS -A -701. Any dilution not recommended by the manufacturer is prohibited. 17.7 Asphalt Flashing Cement: Complying with Federal Specification SS -C -153, Type I. 17.8 Preformed Expansion Joint Covers: Furnish and install metal flanged "Expand -O- Flash" as manufactured by Manville Products Corp., of type "CF -EJ" shown on drawings at adjacent building walls. 17.9 Miscellaneous Materials: Surface Applied Regiet and Cap Flashing: Two piece reglet and flashing system for surface application to masonry reglet of formed 0.50 aluminum; cap flashing .032 aluminum. Hickman "Hinge -Lock" type. 18. ROOFING INSULATION 18.1 Provide Insulation acceptable to the roofing manufacturer in thickness attaining a guaranteed "R" value of 12.50, or greater if required by prevailing energy Codes. 18.2 For a guaranteed "R" value of 12.50, provide the following: 18.2.1 Single Layer: 3" Fiberglas Roof Insulation complying with Federal Specification 1111-1 -526. 18.2.2 Double Layer: 18.2,2.1 Bottom Layer: 1.8" Isocyanurate roof insulation with Non - Asphaltic Glass Fiber Facers, complying with Factory Mutual Standard 4450/4470 and Federal Specification H11 -1- 1972/2 and approved for use with guaranteed roofing assemblies. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington ROOFING. FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET METAL *SECTION 7D -3 18.2.2.2 Top Layer: 1" organic fiberboard complying with Fed. Spec. LLL -I -535, Class C, or 1" perlite board conforming to ASTM C728 (Guaranteed R= 2.78). 18.3 For a guaranteed "R" value greater than 12.50, the roof insulation assembly shall include: 18.3.1 Double Layer. 18.3.1.1 Bottom Layer: Appropriate thickness of manufacturer approved Isocyanurate roof insulation, with the guaranteed "R" value to be calculated at R =5.6 per inch. 18.3.1.2 Top Layer: 1" organic fiberboard complying with Fed. Spec. LLL -I -535, Class C, or 1" perlite board conforming to ASTM C728 (Guaranteed R= 2.78). 18.4 Cant strips shall be standard asphalt- impregnated fiberboard, complying with ASTM D208, in degree sections with 4 -1/4 inch face dimension unless noted on drawings to be wood or steel. All to be reinforced with periodic blocking „strips. 18.5 Edge strips, where indicated, shall be standard asphalt impregnated fiberboard, complying with ASTM D208, 12 inches by 48 inches tapering from 1 -5/8 inches to 1/8 inches to 1/8 inch on the 12 inch dimension. 18.6 Tapered Insulation: For cricket construction and where otherwise indicated, organic fiberboard tapered insulation complying with F.S.LLL -1 -535 or petite board conforming to ASTM C728. Slope as indicated on the drawings. 19. INSULATION FASTENER$ 19.1 Shall be type recommended by insulation manufacturer for substrates intended, sized for thickness and type of insulation used. 19.2 Meet or exceed Factory Mutual Class 1 requirements. 20. ALUMINUM SHEET METAL 20.1 Aluminum sheet metal for fleshings, copings, gutters, and downspouts shall be 3003 alloy, standard mill finish, .032 inch thickness unless otherwise noted. Aluminum to be factory finished as indicated on drawings and in specification Section 9H. 21. ROOF HATCH & SMOKE HATCHE$ 21.1 Roof hatch shall be Type S -20 paint bond galvanized metal as manufactured by The Bilco Company. Coyer shall be 14 gauge metal with 1" fiberglass Insulation and covered with a 22 gauge metal liner. Curb shall be 14 gauge metal 12" in height with 1" thick fiberboard rigid insulation. Scuttle shall be 2' -6" x 3' -0" furnished completely assembled with required operating hardware and inside padlock hasp. Provide automatic hold open arm and neoprene draft seal with unit. 21.2 Safety Post: Provide Bilco "Ladder -Up" telescoping safety post attached to the fixed ladder below roof hatch. 21.3 Smoke Hatches: (If required) 21.3.1 Smoke Hatches shall be No. 4896 CM -SH2D as manufactured by Bristol Fiberlite Industries, Santa Ana, California. 21.3.2 The doors shall be 5052 -1132 aluminum welded for complete weatherproofing and Tined with fiberglass 05/05/98 DIVISION 7• ROOFING. FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET METAL *SECTION 7D-4 insulation protected by an aluminum lid liner. Doors compression loaded with torsion bars attached to a pivot hinge secured with stainless steel ball lock pins, actuated by the melting of a UL -FM listed fusible Zink. No loading from the torsion bars shall be transferred to the fusible link. 21.3.3 The self - flashing curb shall be fabricated from 6063 -T5 extruded aluminum. The curb shall be 5 -1/8 inches with a built-In water barrier and weepage gutter for drainage and a 2 -3/4 inch flange on the roof. Guarantee units against defective workmanship and material. 22 VENTS & LOUVER$ 22.1 Provide ventilation in Vestibule wall as required. Soffit vents for parapet louvers, etc by Contractor as shown on drawings. PART 3: EXECUTION 23 REFERENCE 23.1 The most current application guide published by the manufacturer of the selected roofing system shall be considered part of this specification and shall be referred to for more specific application procedures regarding roofing insulation, membrane and base flashing. 23.2 Where this written specification differs from the manufacturer's application guide, the more stringent specification shall be used. 23.3 Performance: Provide roofing materials recognized to be of generic type indicated and tested to show compliance with indicated performances, or provide other similar materials certified in writing by manufacturer to be equal or better than specified in every significant respect and acceptable to the Owner. 10.2 Compatibility: Provide products which are recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact betvsen incompatible materials. 24. HEATING BITUMEN (ASPHALT) 24.1 Asphalt shall not be heated above 500°F. Maximum storage temperature for bulk asphalt is 325 °F. 24.1.1 Bitumen temperature at the point of application shall be +/- 25 degrees F of the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT). 24.1.2 If the EVT is not known, bitumen temperature at the point of application shall be 375 degrees F to 425 degrees F for Types II and III Asphalt. 24.2 Use separate kettles or tankers for each type of bitumen. 24.3 The heating process shall be strictly regulated by means of an automatic thermostatic control of any approved type for positive temperature control. Kettles or tankers shall be the immersion tube type, fired by liquid LP gas, and shall have 100% safety shutoff. 24.4 Provide each kettle or tanker with a recording thermometer that will graphically indicate and record on a chart the maximum and minimum temperatures to which materials have been heated. Recording thermometers shall be capable of accurately recording temperatures as high as 600 degrees F and as low as 0 degrees F. The thermometers shall be properly maintained at all times. Kettles or tankers without recording thermometers In good working condition shall not be used. At the end of each Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington working day, tum the chart from the thermometer on each kettle or tanker cover to the Owners Representative. If any underheated or overheated bitumen has been applied on the roof, remove that portion of the roof. 24.5 Maintain the temperature of the bitumen at the point of application by using insulated pipes, buckets, Tuggers and other insulated roofers equipment as required by field conditions and as approved by the owner's representative. 25. JNSTALLATION OF ROOF INSULATION 25.1 Installation of roof insulation shall comply with Factory Mutual requirements for Class I construction and 1 -90 wind uplift rating. Follow details as set forth in current Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet I -28. 25.2 If insulation is installed in a single layer, all roof insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the deck. 25.2.1 Fastener quantities: 25.2.1.1 For 4' x 4' fiberglas insulation, provide a minimum of six (6) fasteners per board. 25.2.1.2 For 4' x 8' fiberglas insulation, provide a minimum of sixteen (16) fasteners per board. 25.3 If insulation is installed in two layers: 25.3.1 Bottom layer is to be mechanically fastened to the deck. Fastener quantities shall be: 25.3.1.1 For 4' x 4' isocyanurate insulation, provide a minimum of six (6) fasteners per board. 25.3.1.2 For 4' x 8' isocyanurate insulation, provide a minimum of eleven (11) fasteners per board. 25.3.2 Top layer is to be installed in a uniform, solid 25 -30 lb. /100 ft. square mopping of hot asphalt. Joints are to be offset a minimum of 6 inches from the preceding layer of insulation. 25.4 Insulation boards shall be laid in parallel courses with transverse joints staggered. Parallel courses shall be laid at right angles to metal deck ribs. Adjoining edges of board shall be brought into tight contact, but shall not be forced into place in such manner as to damage boards. Where the roof meets vertical surfaces, boards shall be cut in a neat workmanlike manner, leaving approximately a 'h" joint. Score or cut boards as necessary to lay flat on deck where same is irregular. Any joint parallel to ribs shall be placed over solid deck bearing. 25.5 Roof insulations shall be cut to fit neatly around projections, pipes, and vents coming through roofing. Provide clearance per manufacturer around heat conducting pipes. 25.6 Fiberboard cants, tapered edge strips and crickets are to be mopped in placed with hot asphalt. 25.7 Install only as much roof insulation as can be completely covered with roofing the same day. 26, INSTALLATION OF BUILT -UP ROOFING AND FLASHING (INSULATED METAL DECK, GRAVEL SURFACED) 26.1 Apply roofing plies by first starting at the low edge of the roof. Apply one 12" wide, then over that one 24" wide, then over both a full 36" wide sheet fiberglas ply sheets. Succeeding layers of ply sheets are to be applied in full widths, overlapping the preceding plies in accordance with manufacturer's roofing system guaranty requirements. Q5116191 DIVISION 7* Install each felt so that it shall be firmly and uniformly set without voids into hot asphalt which has been applied just before the felt at a minimum rate of 25 lbs. per square over the entire surface. Roll ply sheets into asphalt. On inclines over 1" per foot, backnailing is required. 26.2 Install modified bitumen flashings as specified by manufacturer. For curbs and walls up to manufacturer's recommended maximum height, flashing is to be installed in one piece. 26.2.1 When shown on drawings, flashing is to be installed in two pieces. The first piece should extend from 4" past the toe of the cant to manufacturer's recommended maximum height, up the parapet wall. The first piece of flashing overlaps the top of the first piece by at least four inches, and extends to the outside edge of the top of the parapet wall. 26.3 Embed not less than 400 lbs. per square of gravel into the appropriate grade of hot asphalt, using a uniform mopping of not less than 60 lbs. per square of roof area. The application of the aggregate to the roofing system should be delayed until the entire roof system including the flashings is completed. 26.4 All conduit/lightweight pipe present on roof surface must be supported by treated wood blocking. Attachment of pipe to wood blocking should allow for minor movement of pipe. Each treated wood blocking support should be set in a heated, upside down piece of modified bitumen, which extends a minimum of 4" beyond all edges of the wood. Modified bitumen pad and adhered wood block are then loose laid on top of the completed roof system (including surfacing). Modified bitumen pad should not be adhered to the membrane or the surfacing. 27. INSTALLATION OF BUILT -UP ROOFING AND FLASHING (INSULATED METAL DECK, MINERAL SURFACED CAP SHEET) 27.1 Apply base ply with 2" side laps and end laps. Mecharicaily secure maximum 9" o.c. at side laps and maximum 18" o.c. on two lines 11 -13" from each edge (staggered). Mechanical securement using mechanical fasteners as recommended by the deck manufacturer. To minimize wrinkles and buckles allow enough time for base ply to relax unrolled prior to attachment. 27.2 Embed two plies of fiberglas ply sheets in shingle fashion (starter sheets required), lapping 19" into uniform solid moppings of hot bitumen, using 23- 451b/100 ft per ply. Starter plies should be cut to dimensions so as to preclude coincident side laps to the base ply. 27.3 Install modified bitumen flashings as specified by manufacturer. For curbs and walls up to manufacturer's recommended maximum height, flashing is to be installed in one piece. 27.3.1 When shown on drawings, flashing is to be installed in two pieces. The first piece should extend from 4" past the toe of the cant to manufacturer's recommended maximum height, up the parapet wall. The first piece of flashing is then nailed off. The second piece of flashing overlaps the top of the first piece by at least four inches, and extends to the outside edge of the top of the parapet wall. 27.4 Embedded nominal 18' lengths of mineral- surfaced cap sheet with 2" side and end laps into a uniform, solid 20 to 30 pound /square mopping of Type III asphalt. End laps shall be staggered, minimum 3'. NOTE: Cap sheet must be installed prior to modified bitumen flashing at all cant strip Babies "�2" Us - Tukwila. Washington ROOFING. FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET METAL *SECTION 7D -5 flashing details. 27.5 All conduiUlightweight pipe present on roof surface must be supported by treated wood blocking. Attachment of pipe to wood blocking should allow for minor movement of pipe. Each treated wood blocking support should be set in a heated, upside down piece of modified bitumen, which extends a minimum of 4" beyond all edges of the wood. Modified Bitumen pad and adhered wood block are then loose laid on top of the completed roof system (including surfacing). Modified bitumen pad should not be adhered to the membrane or the surfacing. 28. INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR SHEATHING AND CORRUGATED SIDING 28.1 All sheathing to be Dens -Glass Gold sheathing in thicknesses and applications as shown on drawings. Install per all manufacturers requirements in conjunction with steel studs, corrugated decking and E.I.F.S. finish material fasteners, nails, etc. per current industry standard. 28.2 At rear of parapets, at front Vestibule; in applications and locations as shown on drawings, provide 7/8 ", 22 gauge galvanized corrugated metal siding with paint grip finish. All connections, joints, fasteners to be installed, caulked and sealed per current industry standards. 29 SHEET METAL FLASHING. COPINGS. GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS 29.1 Surfaces to which sheet metal is to be applied shalt be even, smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry and free from all defects that might affect the application. 29.2 All accessories or other items essential to the completeness of the sheet metal installation, though not specifically shown or specified, shall be provided. All such items, unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or specified, shall be of the same kind of material as the item to which applied. Nails, screws, and bolts shall be of the types best suited for the purpose intended, and shall be of a composition that is compatible with the metal to which it will contact. 29.3 Do not weld aluminum, instead provide mechanical waterproof connections. 29.4 Flash and counterflash with specified aluminum at juncture of all roofs with vertical surfaces and other places as required by drawings. Exposed edges of all flashings shall be doubled back' /:" to provide stiffness. Cap flashing shall tum down over base flashings not Tess than 4 ". Ventilators and other items of equipment which have integral members to cover flashing need not have cap flashing. 29.5 Comply with details and profiles as shown, and comply with the most current SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendations for installation of the work. 29.6 Provide for thermal expansion of all exposed sheet metal work exceeding 15' -0" running length. All thermal expansion Joints are to be mechanical Joints. Provide 6" wide cover plate over 1/4" wide joint. Cover plate shall be embedded in mastic, attached to nailer with waterproof connection and loose locked to the drip edge. 29.7 Flashing and Trim: Expansion joints, 10' -0" maximum spacing, and 2 "- 0" from corners and intersections. 29.8 Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible. Fold back edges on concealed side of exposed edges, to form a hem. Provide continuous clips under coping edges. 05/05/98 DIVISION 7` ROOFING. FLASHING. & ASSOC. SHEET METAL *SECTION 7D-6 29.9 Pitch Pans: Where supports, pipes or other objects extend through roof, provide bottomless pitch pans as indicated on the drawings. Form pans from 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal allowing 4 inch nailing flange and 3 inch standing leg with top edge folded back % inch, all joints soldered. Provide collars where required. Install pitch pans only where flanged sleeve and weather cap flashing cannot be installed. Set pitch pan flange in a sold bed of black plastic roofing cement. Fill bottom of pan to a depth of 1 inch with cement mortar mix. Fill pan to top with dead -level bitumen. 29.10 Install flanged tube - weather cap flashing at all penetrations of electrical conduit and other service lines. 29.11 Fabricate and install .02 inch aluminum rectangular downspouts and cutters in sizes indicated with required special connectors. Anchor to wall with straps spaced and attached as indicated on the drawings. Telescope downspouts ends a minimum of 1 -1 " Provide wat ertight connections and slio type expansion ioints where autters join downspouts, 29.12 Fabricate and install .032 inch aluminum gravel stop in size and configuration indicated. 29.12.1 The fabrication of the gravel stop shall conform to Plate 38, Figure A and joint system shall conform to Plate 42, Figure A of the 1987 Edition of the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by SMACNA. 29.12.2 Where indicated, provide drain -thru aluminum gravel stop equal to Hickman Co. .05V gauge perforated. Factory finished, white color unless otherwise indicated or specified. 29.12.3 Fasten roof flange to wood nailer 3" o.c. staggered. Coordinate with installation of gutter. 30. ROOFING CONSTRUCTION AT EDGES AND PENETRATIONS 30.1 30.2 30.3 Provide preformed edge strips (cant strips) where shown and wherever feasible to install hot mop to insulation. Provide 1" rigid insulation at all preformed curbs for roof penetrations (mech. units, exhaust fans, roof hatch, etc.) At all areas where Modified Bitumen fleshings will be adhered to metal, the metal flange must be primed on both sides and adhered to the field plies with asphalt flashing cement. 30.4 At sheet metal flanges to which Modified Bitumen flashing will be adhered, must be nailed 3" o.c. staggered, prior to the application of the fleshings. Wood nailers equal in thickness to the roof insulation must be installed below all sheet metal flanges prior to the application of the roofing plies. 31. FABRICATED PRODUCTS 31.1 Fabricated Metal Flashing: Fabricate metal flashing, trim, copings, gutters and downspouts and similar items to comply with profiles and sizes shown, and to comply with standard industry details as shown by SMACNA in the "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ". 32. ROOFING APPLICATION QUALITY CONTROL. 32.1 The Contractor shall request the roofing manufacturer to provide a competent representative to inspect and dilect the handling, methods, and application of the roofing materials. While it shall not be required that the manufacturer's representative remain constantly at the building during Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton Installation, he shall be requested to inspect all phases of the work in the application of the roofing as it progresses. This representative should at all times be easily accessible during the execution of the work in order that he may properly attend to questioned items. The manufacturer's representative is requested to certify, in writing, that the workmanship and installation were properly and correctly performed and that the manufacturer's warranty is valid. 32.2 If this inspection and certification process is not provided by the Contractor then the roof test cuts as specified below under paragraph 322.1 and 322.2 below shall be performed by the Contractor. 32.2.1 Contractor is to be responsible for obtaining roof test cuts and analysis as provided by a certified independent testing laboratory for all roof systems as specified by ASTM Document ANSI /ASTM D3617 -77 Standard Recommended Practice for Sampling and Analysis of New Built -Up Roof Membranes. All camping procedures and documentation shall be in accordance with this ASTM Document. Copies of the results are to be submitted to Owner and the Owner's Representative for review and approval. 32.2.2 The cost of the required test and all subsequent roof repairs are the responsibility of the Contractor and shall, therefore, be included as part of the base bid proposal and identified as such. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 DIVISION 7 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review( when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.4 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provision of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.5 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 The contractor shall provide all materials, operations, methods listed or mentioned on the drawings and specified herein, including all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary and required for the completion of membrane waterproofing. 2.1.1 Waterproofing work shall include exterior surfaces at all concrete or concrete block walls where the finish floor line is below grade, unless noted otherwise. 2.2 Before commencing work, examine surfaces upon which waterproofing work is dependent for perfect workmanship; make necessary adjustments to such surface as is required. 2.3 Exercise care in application of materials in order to protect work which will remain exposed. Where exposed surfaces become coated or smeared, clean them thoroughly. 2.4 The installation shall provide complete protection from the penetration of water. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Manufacturer: Shall be an established manufacturer of waterproofing materials for the application required and as approved by Project Manager. 3.2 For each type of work obtain primary materials from single manufacturer, to greatest extent possible. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 3.3 Applicator: Shall be an established contractor approved by waterproofing materials manufacturer. Verification of waterproofing capability, facilities, personnel, financial responsibility, and list of completed projects comparable to the scope of this project shall be required. 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Manufacturer's Data: Submit product data sheets, application, instructions and details, clearly marked, to identify project requirements and manufacturer's standard guarantee in accordance with the requirements of the Division 1. WATERPROOFING *SECTION 7E -1 5. REFERENCE STANDARDS 5.1 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards: 5.1.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 5.1.1.1 ASTM C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement, 5.1.1.2 ASTM C836, Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Liquid - Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course. 5.1.1.3 ASTM D412, Standard Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension. 5.1.1.4 ASTM D2240, Stand Test Methods for Rubber Properties - Durometer Hardness. 5.1.1.5 ASTM D2589, McNet Wet Classification of Asbestos Fiber. 5.1.1.6 ASTM D2643, Standard Specification for Prefabricated Asphalt Canal, Ditch or Pond Liner (Exposed Type). 5.1.1.7 ASTM E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 5.2 Federal Specifications (FS). 5.2.1 FS TT- 5- 0027E, Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi- component (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 6. PRODUCT HANDLING 6.1 Deliver products in manufacturer's sealed containers, with seals and labels intact. 6.2 Store materials in an enclosed space protected from weather and out of the direct rays of the sun. Maintain a temperature range of 40 degrees F. minimum, 90 degrees F. maximum. 7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 7.1 Apply liquid membrane when the temperature is 40 degrees F. or above and only after adequate precautions have been taken to assure dry and frost free concrete surfaces. 7.2 Do not apply during inclement weather. 8. PROTECTION 8.1 Protect adjacent work from damage from work included in this Section. PART 2: PRODUCTS 9. MATERIALS 9.1 Elastomeric Waterproofing Compound: Shall be one part cold applied modified polyurethane conforming to ASTM C836, spray applied and non- sag. 9.2 System shall include the following as applicable: 9.2.1 Expansion Joint Sealant: Two part elastomeric polysulfidet or three part epoxidized terpolymer conforming to FS TT- S- 00227E, Type II, Class A. 9.2.2 Joint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene foam backer -rod. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 7* WATERPROOFING *SECTION 7E -2. 9.2.3 Reducer: For cleaning tools and equipment, standard of the waterproofing material manufacturer. 9.2.4 Leveling Patcher. An acrylic latex base bonding compourd used directly or as an admixture. 9.2.5 Joint Filler Strip: Non - impregnated joint filler strip. 9.2.6 Protection Board: Premolded asphalt- impregnated waterproofing protection course conforming to ASTM D2643, ASTM D781 and ASTM D2589, thickness recommended by manufacturer for required application. 9.2.7 Wax: Liquid household buffing wax containing camuba, if required. 9.2.8 Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1. 9.3 System shall have the characteristics: following minimum performance PROPERTY MEMBRANE (CURED) Shore A Hardness (±5) 40 ASTM -D -2240 Tensile Strength, psi 150 ASTM -D-412 (±25) Elongation, Percent, 600 ASTM -D-412 Avg. 100% Moldulus, psi 80 ASTM -D-412 (±10) Recovery, Percent, Min. 90 Swelling in Water, Nil 3 Days, Room Temp. Service Temperature -40 to +180 Range, °F Moisture Vapor 0.15 Transmission, Perm. inches Crack Test, 1/16 inch, Cycled 10 times /24 hours 15 °F No loss of bond or cracking exhibited. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington ASTM -E -96 ASTM -C -836 PART 3: EXECUTION 10. CONDITION OF SURFACE; 10.1 Concrete shall be cured a minimum of 14 days and shall be dry. 10.2 Concrete Surfaces: 10.2.1 Horizontal surfaces shall be steel trowel finished to a smooth, level surface. 10.2.2 Vertical surfaces shall be smooth, sound and free of honeycombs. 10.2.3 Concrete shall be free of curing and parting compounds, wax or other foreign chemicals or materials. 10.3 Surfaces of all substrates to receive waterproofing shall be clean, dry and free of frost, dew, loose dirt and foreign matter. 11. PREPARATION 11.1 Static Joints or Cracks Tess than 1/8" wide: Seal with waterproofing membrane. Material shall fill and overlay the edges of the Joint to a minimum width of 3" on both sides and shall have minimum surface thickness of 55 (±5) mils. 11.2 Expansion and Working Joints: Cracks and joints larger than 1/8" with maximum joint movement of ±20 %. 11.2.1 Install backer rod joint filler, 1/8" larger than joint width at the depth recommended for sealant. 11.2.2 Apply specified sealant according to manufacturer's directions. 11.2.3 After sealant has cured, wax area over sealant to prevent membrane from adhering to sealant, If recommended by the membrane manufacturer. 11.2.4 Stripe the joint seal and backer rod with 55 (±5) mils of membrane'eztending minimum of 3" on base slab on either side of the joint. 11.3 Penetrations, covers, drains, intersections of horizontal and vertical surfaces shall be prepared as detailed In the project drawings. 11.4 Immediately prior to, and during application of membrane, remove all dust and dirt by use of high pressure air, by brushing with a soft broom, or vacuum cleaning. 12. APPLICATiON 12.1 Apply membrane waterproofing as follows: 12.1.1 For Horizontal Surfaces: 12.1.1.1 Apply membrane at a rate of 5 gallons of material to 125 square feet of surface to produce membrane 55 (±5) mils thick, minimum. 12.1.1.2 Control application rate by means of premeasured surface areas. 12.1.2 For Vertical Surfaces (Non -Sag): 12.1.2.1 Apply prime coat over concrete block consisting of a 50/50 combination of liquid membrane and reducer as recommended by membrane manufacturer. No primer required on cast -in -place concrete surfaces unless otherwise indicated or specified. 12.1.2.2 Apply membrane at a rate of 5 gallons of material to 125 square fee to surface to produce membrane 55 (±5) mils thick, minimum. 12.1.2.3 Carefully control application to avoid runs and sags of fresh material. 12,2 Apply membrane to prestrlpped areas on both horizontal and vertical surfaces at cracks, joints, intersections, penetrations, drains, flashing flanges, etc., to provide a minimum total thickness of 110 mils over these areas. 12.3 Mask any membrane edge to be exposed to view to provide a straight clean edge. 13. FIELD QUALITY CONTROI, 05/05/98 DIVISION 7• 13.1 Before the material attains final set, verify the applied thickness by use of mil- thickness gauge as the work progresses. Take a reading every 500 square feet of surface area. Where readings indicate a thickness less than specified, immediately apply additional membrane to produce required thickness. 13.2 Visually inspect all other areas which cannot be water tested for voids, damage, or rupture. Repair as required. 14. $ACKFILLING 14.1 Do no backfilling before waterproofing has been inspected and approved by the Owner's Representative. 14.2 Do not place protection boards until after inspection. 15. MEMBRANE PROTECTION 15.1 Within 24 hours after completion of a successful water test or visual inspection and /or repairs, cover membrane with protection board. All horizontal and vertical membrane shall be protected. - END OF SECTION - pabies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton WATERPROOFING *SECTION 7E -3 DIVISION 7* PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. Reference Division 1 for allowance amount to be included in bid proposal. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gniy when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing roof patching, and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 The extent of roofing work Is shown on the drawings and includes patching of existing roofing. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton ROOF PATCHING *SECTION 7F -1 2.3 . Coordinate this work with other trades involved to avoid delays and to insure a satisfactory and watertight installation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS 3.1 All materials, including felts, composition flashing, bitumen, roof insulation, vapor retarder (if any) aggregate surfacing or other coating, etc. is to be compatible with the existing roofing system to complete the patching of the existing roof. 3.2 Aluminum sheet metal for flashing, copings, etc. shall be 3003 alloy, standard mill finish, .032 inch thickness unless otherwise noted. Aluminum to be factory finished as indicated on drawings and in specification Section 9H. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. PREPARATION 4.1 Examine condition of existing roof system and the conditions under which.the roof patching work is to be performed. Notify Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 5. PATCHING 5.1 Install all required materials in proper manner to insure a watertight and weatherproof installation. - END OF SECTION pMVISION 7* PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review o� when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing caulking and joint sealant work indicated on the drawings and herein specified. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 The required applications of sealants and caulking include, but are not necessarily limited to those locations herein listed. 2.3 Flashing and counterflashing adjoining wall areas. 2.4 Exterior wall joints, masonry control 'pints exterior and interior. 2.5 Joints between wall and adjacent windows, doors, grilles and miscellaneous frames on exterior and interior. 2.6 Joints at penetrations of walls, decks and floors by piping and other services and equipment. 2.7 Drywall control joints and other joints where drywall abuts other materials. 2.8 Sanitary sealant shall be used for joints between toilet fixtures, accessories, water coolers, janitor's sink, etc and adjacent surfaces, and other areas as indicated on the drawings. 3. SUBMITTAL 3.1 Manufacturer's Data, Sealants and Caulking: For information only, submit 2 copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for each type of sealant required. Include manufacturer's published data, or letter of certification or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material complies with the requirements and is intended generally for the applications shown. Show by transmittal that one copy of each recommendation and instruction has been distributed to the installer, 4. REFERENCE STANDARDS 4.1 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to the following Standards: 4.1.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 4.1.1.1 ASTM C834, Latex Sealing Compounds. 4.1.1.2 ASTM C920, Elastomeric Joint Sealants, including Babes "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton JOINT SEALANTS *SECTION 7G -1 Sanitary Sealants. 4.1.2 Federal Specifications (FS) 4.1.2.1 FS TT- S -001543A, Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing In Buildings and Other Structures). 4.1.2.2 FS TT -S- 001657, Sealing Compound - Single Component, Butyl Rubber Base, Solvent Release Type. 4.1.2.3 FS TT -S- 00230, Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 5. GUARANTEE. SEALANTS 5.1 Submit 2 copies of written guarantee agreeing to repair or replace sealants which fail to perform as air -tight and water -tight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data, as an Inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. Provide guarantee signed by the installer and contractor. 5.2 Guarantee period is 2 years. 6. JOB CONDITIONS 6.1 The installer must examine the joint surfaces, backing, and anchorage of units forming sealant rabbet, and the conditions under which the sealant work is to be performed, and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work and performance of the sealants. Do not proceed with the sealant work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. PART 2: PRODUCTS 7. MATERIALS. GENERAL 7.1 Provide custom colors, wherever indicated, to match Project Manager's samples or to match the adjoining surfaces in a manner to be determined by the Project Manager. Provide manufacturer's standard colors, as selected by Project Manager, wherever custom colors are not indicated. 7.2 Compatibility: Before purchase of each specified sealant, investigate its compatibility to adhere with the joint surfaces, joint materials (manufacturer's recommended variation of the specified materials) which are known to be fully compatibe with the actual installation condition, as shown by manufacturer's published data or certification. 7.3 Provide size and shape of preformed sealant tapes as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the manufacturer, either in his published data or upon consultation with his technical representative. 7.4 Exterior One - Component Silicone Sealants for exterior joints: Provide one of the following: 7.4.1 Dow Corning - 795 7.4.2 Pecora - 864 7.4.3 General Electric - Silpruf 7.5 At E.I.F.S. surface adjacent masonry, sealant to match masonry. 05/05/98 DIVISION 7' 7.6 Interior Caulking: Provide one of the following (paintable): 7.6.1 Acrylic latex water emulsion compound conforming to ASTM C834. 7.6.2 Butyl sealant conforming to FS TT -S -001657. 7.6.3 Sanitary sealant: One -part clear, mildew resistant silicone caulk (non-paintable) conforming to ASTM C920, Type S, NS, Class 25, F.S. TT -S- 001543, Class A, and F.S. TT -S -00230, Class A. 7.7 Miscellaneous Materials: 7.7.1 Joint Cleaner. Provide the type of joint cleaning compound recommend by the sealant or caulking compound manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be cleaned. 7.7.2 Joint Primer /Sealer. Provide the type of joint primer/sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer, for the joint surfaces to be primed or sealed. 7.7.3:Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant- contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self- adhesive tape wherever applicable. 7.7.4 Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber . foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable non- absorptive material as recommended for compatibility with sealant by the sealant manufacturer. Provide size and shape of rod which will control the joint depth for sealant placement, break bond or sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide a highly compressible backer to minimize the possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. PART 3: EXECUTION 8. JOINT SURFACE PREPARATION 8.1 Clean Joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking : compound. Remove dirt, insecure : coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. Babies °R" Us - Tukwila. Washington JOINT SEALANTS *SECTION 7G -2 9. INSTALLATION 9.1 Comply with sealant manufacturers printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified and except where manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. 9.2 Prime or seal the joint surfaces ..wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer /sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. 9.3 Install sealant backer rod where shown allowing proper depth for sealant bead. 9.4 Install bond breaker tape wherever shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly. 9.5 Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure thst sealants will be deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave 'surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. Finish joint surface shall be smooth. 9.6 Install sealants to depths as shown or, if not shown, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer but within the manufacturer's general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of the bead. 9.7: Clean excess material off adjacent surfaces. Remove cartons and other debris related to this work from the project site at the direction of the project superintendent. HOLLOW METAL DIVISION 8' PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gnly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A• for. aequirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 This Section includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for and incidental to the execution and completion of Hollow Metal Work, as shown on the drawings and specified herein. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project) 3. REFERENCE STANDARDS 3.1 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards: 3.1.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3.1.1.1 ASTM A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 3.1.1.2 ASTM A366, Standard Specifications for Steel, Carbon, Cold - Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. 3.1.1.3 ASTM A525 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Delivery of Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Sheets, Coils, and Cut Lengths by the Hot -Dip Method. 3.1.1.4 ASTM A526, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. 3.1.1.5 ASTM A568, Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon and High - Strength Low Ally Hot - Rolled Sheet, Hot - Rolled Strip and Cold - Rolled Sheet, General Requirements. 3.1.1.6 ASTM A569, Test for Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 maximum percent) Hot - Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. 3.1.1.7 ASTM E152, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3.1.2 American National Standards Institute, ANSI A115, Specification for Door and Frame Preparation. 3.1.3 National Builder's Hardware Association (NBHA), Recommended Locations for Builder's hardware. , - 11• •1 WORK *SECTION 8A -1 3.1.4 National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows. 3.1.5 Steel Door Institute, Recommended Specification Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3.1.6 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Building Materials Directory. 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Manufacturer's Data: For information only, submit two (2) copies of manufacturer's data for fabrication and installation instructions. Transmit one copy of instructions to the Installer. 4.2 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of hollow metal work. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, gauges of metal, finishes, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. 4.3 Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for detail and openings as those on the contract drawings. 5. FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIE 5.1 Fire Rated Assemblies: Wherever a fire - resistance classification (3 -hour, 1-1/2-hour, etc., or "A ", "B ", etc.) is shown or scheduled for hollow metal work, provide fire -rated hollow metal doors and frames investigated and tested as a fire door assembly, complete with type of fire door hardware to be used. Identify each ire door and frame with UL labels, and indicate applicable fire rating of both door and frame. Construct and install assemblies to comply with NFPA Standard No. 80, and as herein specified. 5.2 Oversize Assemblies: Wherever hollow metal assemblies are larger than size limitations established by NFPA and UL, provide manufacturer's certification that assembly has been constructed with materials and methods equivalent to labeled construction. 5.3 Label Construction: Each required fire door and frame, including hardware, shall be an exact duplicate, except for size, of a type investigated and successfully fire tested in accordance with ASTM E152 Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies, for the period of time and with the performance under test as required for the various ratings indicated. The assembly shall be identified by labels of the approving agency. The label on the door or frame shall indicate the applicable fire test rating for the construction fumished. Approved agencies shall include the Urderwriters' Laboratories, Inc., the Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada, the Factory Mutual Laboratories, and other authorities having local or regional jurisdiction. 6. PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLINQ 6.1 Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. 6.2 Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided the finish items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to the Project Manager, otherwise, remove and replace damaged Items as directed. 6.3 Store hollow metal units on raised platforms in vertical positions with blocking between units to allow air circulation. Keep stored material covered and protected from damage. I I • DIVISION 8• 7. JOB CONDITIONS 7.1 Job Conditions: Installer must examine the substrate and conditions under which hollow metal work is to be installed and notify the contractor in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 8. QUALITY ASSURANCE 8.1 Provide hollow metal work manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of work and shall be a current member of S.D.I., unless otherwise acceptable to the Project Manager. PART 2: PRODUCTS 9. MATERIALS 9.1 Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel pickled and oiled, comply with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568. 9.2 Cold - Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. 9.3 Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc - coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A526, with ASTM A525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatzed. Provide for exterior doors and frames. 9.4 Minimum Gauges of Steel: Unless otherwise indicated on drawings doors shall be 18 gauge and frames shall be 16 gauge. 9.5 Core material; for interior doors, honey comb; exterior doors, polystyrene, U- Factor = 0.21. 9.6 Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 16 gauge sheet steel. Galvanize after fabrication units to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class B. 9.7 Shop Painting 9.7.1 Clean, treat and paint surfaces of fabricated hollow metal units, whether concealed or exposed in the finished work. 9.7.2 Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before the application of the shop coat of paint. 9.7.3 Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency toprovide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive field- applied paint. 9.7.4 For steel surfaces use rust - inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 9.8 Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units, except hot -dip galvanize items to be built into exterior walls, complying with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. 9.9 Anchors: Provide minimum of 3 anchors each jamb per manufacturer's standards. 10. GENERAL FABRICATION 10.1 Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat In appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units In the manufacturer's plant. Clearly Identify work, that cannot be permanently factory- assembled before Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 9QLLOW METAL WORK *SECTION 8A -2 shipment, to assure proper assembly at the project site. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. Metallic filler to conceal manufacturing defects Is not acceptable. 10.2 Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts. 10.3 Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with final Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 "Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation ". (Note: All loc ksets, latches and cylinders are to be Best.) 10.4 Reinforce hollow metal units to receive surface - applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface - applied finish hardware may be done at project site. 10.5 Locate finish hardware in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware", published by the National Builder's Hardware Association. 10.6 Door Louvers 10.6.1 Provide weatherproof stationary louvers for exterior doors, where indicated, constructed of Z-shaped blades formed of 20 gauge galvanized steel sheets. Space blades not more than 1 -1/2" o.c. Provide removable insect screens on interior face of doors, of 14 x 18 wire mesh in rigid, formed metal frame. 10.6.2 Provide sightproof stationary louvers for interior doors where indicated, constructed of inverted V- shaped of Y- shaped blades formed of 18 gauge cold- rolled steel. Space blades to provide a minimum of 30% free air opening. 10.6.3 For fire -rated openings, provide tightly fitted, spring loaded, automatic closing louvers with operable blades, equipped with fusible links, arranged so that metal overlaps metal at every joint. 10.7 Provide stock hollow metal frames of the types and styles indicated on the drawings or schedules and complying with S.D.I. 100 for minimum materials and construction requirements. 10.8 Provide stock hollow metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, as shown on the drawings. Conceal all fastenings unless otherwise shown. 10.9 Fabricate frames of fully welded construction. 10.10 Form exterior frames of steel sheets with a stretcher level degree of flatness. 10.11 Rubber Door Silencers: Drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 4 silencers on heads of double -swing frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. 10.12 Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bars for across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. 10.13 Sound Deadening: Coat Inside (concealed) faces of door frames in hollow wall construction with fibered asphalt emulsion. 05/05/98 DIVISION r HOLLOW METAL WORK *SECTION 8A-3 PART 3: EXECUTION 11. JNSTALLATIOH 11.1 Except for frames located at inplace concrete or masonry, place frames prior to construction of enclosing waifs and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set.. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 112 In masonry construction, locate three wal anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. Building -in of anchors and grouting of frames is specified in the Masonry Section. 11.3 At inplace concrete or masonry construction, set frames and secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and masonry anchorage devices. 11.4 Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80 11.5 In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie. In closed steel stud partitions, attach studs to wall anchors with tapping screws. 11.6 Door Installation 11.6.1 Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, within clearances specified in S.D.I. 100. 11.6.2 Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80. 11.7 Adjust and Clean 11.7.1 Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal work just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. 11.7.2 Prime Coat Touch -Up - Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch -up of compatible air -drying primer. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/9@ Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington C DIVISION 8• CU PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shop Drawings shall be prepared by the curtain wall manufacturer. 1.3.2 Shall be submitted for review say when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.3 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 The extent of aluminum work under this Section is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Refer to drawings for location, details, etc. for the work which includes, but is not necessarily limited to: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.1.1 Aluminum frames and framing. 2.1.2 Aluminum closures. 2.1.3 Aluminum clad structural or miscellaneous steel framing. 2.1.4 Preparation of aluminum framed openings for automatic entrance/exit doors and coordinating their installation where required. 2.1.5 Caulking specified for work of this Section. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 3.1 Steel channel framing to receive aluminum tube closures: Section 5F. 3.2 Glass and Glazing: Section 8C. 3.3 Automatic Entrance/Exit Doors: Section 8F. 3.4 Storefront Swing door: Section 8K. 3.5 Painting Section 9H. 3.6 Aluminum frames and windows: Section 8D. 4. QUALITY ASSURANC 4.1 Drawings: Plans, elevations and details show spacing of members as well as profile and similar dimensional requirements of aluminum entrances and curtain wall work. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in Project Manager's sole judgment, such deviations do not materially detract from design concept or intended performances. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington RTAIN WALL •SECTION 8B -1 4.2 Drawings are based on Vista Wall CW -250 for aluminum framing. Similar and equivalent system, Kawneer 1600 will be acceptable for use unless otherwise indicated or specified. 4.3 All painted aluminum closures and cladding associated with and required to match the curtain wall system shall be manufactured and supplied by the curtain wall manufacturer in order to assure color match and performance. 4.4 See Section 9H for matching paint finish of steel columns adjacent curtain wall finish. 5. SUBMITTALS 5.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings prepared by the curtain wall manufacturer for fabrication and installation of the curtain wall, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite members, closures, cladding, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions and glazing. 5.2 Submit shop drawings to installer of automatic entrance/exit doors where work includes preparation of aluminum framed openings for doors. 5.3 Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish on 6" long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6" square sheets. 5.4 Curtain Wall System Design Certification: Submit certification by a registered engineer stating that the curtain wall system and its anchorage to the structure has been designed to support the required design wind load as specified in the appropriate building code without exceeding a deflection of 1/175 of the span. 5.4.1 Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 5.5 Submit documentation (if required by local authorities) which verifies that glazing system has been approved for use by local authorities having jurisdiction and complies wih all applicable state or federal codes or regulations. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL WORK 6.1 Materials: Aluminum shall be free from streaking and die marks. Extrusions: Alloy 6063 -T5. Sheets: No. 32 Alumilite. 6.2 Framing system: Vista Wall CW 250 or Kawneer 1600. See drawings for sizes, profiles and colors for exterior storefront at Babies "R' Us. 6.3 Doors: See Section 8F and 8K. See drawings for sizes and colors. 6.4 Color location: Refer to drawings for locations. 6.4.1 Clear Anodized Finish System: Aluminum Association Finish AA- M12C22A31, Class II. 6.4.2 Fluorocarbon coating System: Manufacturer's standard fluorocarbon system to match colors as shown on the drawings that complies with AAMA 605.2 -1992. A clear top coat shall be applied if such a top coat is recommended by the coating manufacturer for the particular color specified. The fluorocarbon color coat and the clear top coat (if required) shall be 70% polyvinylidene resin by weight. (Valspar does not require the clear top coat on the Sweet Com Yellow finish.) 05/05/98 • DIVISION 8* 6.4.3 Colors and Gloss: Refer to drawings. 6.4.4 Color locations: Refer to drawings for locations. 6.5 Mild steel framing operations shall conform to ASTM A283 Grade "C ". All steel to receive one coat of zinc chromate primer after fabrication. Field welds and scratches shall receive one touch- up coat after installation. 6.6 Fasteners: Aluminum alloy 245 -T4, or bronze. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavadable. Match finish of adjoining metal. Provide phillips head countersunk head machine screws for exposed fasteners. 6.7 Coping at the head of the curtain wall shall be .125" minimum thickness with finish applied by the curtain wall manufacturer to match the curtain wall. Vertical column covers within the curtain wall to match the exterior curtain wall shall be .125" minimum thickness with the finish applied by the curtain wall manufacturer. All other column covers shall be a minimum .062" or thicker as required to create a flat appearance and provide reasonable protection against damage by pedestrian traffic including shipping carts. 6.8 Sealant: Dow Coming 795 Silicone Budding Sealant. 6.8.1 Color. "Limestone" at exterior exit door and at base of exterior curtain wall. 6.8.2 Color "Black" at red exterior doors and at vertical joint where curtain wall abuts the E.I.F.S. panel. 6.8.3 Color to be "Clear" at remainder of joints throughout the curtain wall system. 6.9 Workmanship: 6.9.1 All work shall be straight and true, free from warpage, and of highest standard of material and workmanship. As far as possible, all work shall be performed in the shop. Any departure from indicated details shall be submitted for approval to the Owner's Representative. Joints, comers, copes and miters shall be accurately cut, filed, and fitted and framed together at contact points. All surfaces of joints and connections shall match the finish of adjacent metal and be approved by the Owner's Representative. Provide all clips, fastenings and reinforcements required for installation of all work. Removable members shall be carefully formed and fitted. So far as possible, all fastenings shall be concealed. Those which are not shall match finish of adjoining metal. All joints shall be watertight. Provide approved type bituminous insulation between aluminum and dissimilar metals or cement mortar. 6.9.2 All frames, transoms, and mullions, etc., shall be constructed, sized, dimensioned, and reinforced as required to provide rigid construction. Joints shall be of the hairline type. Reinforce with steel plate for all hardware and accessories, including surface applied items. Include all sealing and caulking between metal to metal contacts, between frames, mullions, etc., to provide airtight and weathertight joints. 6.10 Aluminum Framing System: This contractor shall furnish all necessary material, labor and equipment for the complete installation of the following: 6.10.1 Glass framing, vertical and horizontal; transition members connecting these components, adapters and mountings for trim moldings and facing materials. Provide aluminum tube members to be installed over steel channel framing as Indicated. CURTAIN WALL *SECTION 8B - 2 6.10.2 Framing members, transition members, mullions, adapters and mountings shall be extruded of aluminum with alloy and temper consistent with the method of manufacture. These members shall be of 6063 -T5 extruded aluminum alloy (ASTM B221 alloy G.S. 10A- T5). 6.10.3 All screws, miscellaneous fastening devices and Internal components shall be of stainless steel, or plated or corrosion- resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used. 6.10.4 Glass framing members shall provide for flush glazing on all sides with through sight lines, and no projecting stops or face joints except where snap -on stops are indicated or required. The system shall provide fully resilient settings for glass and panels by use of elastomeric gaskets on both sides of the glass. Adapt- ers and mountings for trim moldings and face materials shall be designed so as to permit the installation of these products in their regular manner, and shall not interfere with the normal assembly and weathering of the grid framing. ' 6.10.4.1 Joints, water stops, sealants as recommended by the manufacturer. Joints between framing members and adjoining metals made watertight by caulking with caulking compounds, or other approved sealant material. 6.11 Protection: Provide required protection to prevent damage to finished work. Provide protective barriers as required to prevent damage, after erection, resulting from work of other trades. Use strippable rubber paint on erected work and gummed paper on shop fabricated work. 7. PERFORMANCE 7.1 Window framing fumished under this Section shall meet or exceed the following performance requirements. 7.1.1 Resistance to Water Infiltration: The framing system, shall not leak when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure of 7.5 P.S.F. (Certified test results available). 7.1.2 Performance Under Uniform Loading: When tested in accordance with ASTM E3330, the maximum deflection of any member shall not exceed L/175 of its span and when the load is removed there shall be no evidence of permanent deformation or damage when tested under a Toad of 30 P.S.F. minimum. 7.1.2.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the drawings to verify the wind Toad design for the building indicated on the drawings, and to provide framing that meets or exceeds requirements for the indicated wind load, and satisfies all applicable local codes and regulations. 7.1.3 Allow for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 120 °F. (49 °C). 7.1.4 Air filtration of not more than 0.06 cfm per square foot of a fixed area per ASTM E 283. 7.2 Additional antra- system reinforcing with the curtain wall system. 05 05/98 DIVISION 8• CURTAIN WALL *SECTION 8B -3 7.2.1 It shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor and the contractor to verify that if the Babies "R" Us canopy is removed or other openings thru any curtain wall systems of the prototypes are made part of the individual store design, all framing systems will be checked, verified and provided with any additional reinforcement members per all manufacturer's specifications and certification requirements. PART 3: EXECUTION 8. PREPARATION 8.1 Field Measurement: Wherever possible, take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings, and fabrication, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, proceed with fabrication and coordinate installation tolerances as necessary when field measurements might delay work. 9. ERECTION 9.1 All items under this heading shall be set in their correct locations as shown in the details and shall be level, square, plumb, and at proper elevations and in alignment with other work. 9.2 All joints between interior metal, masonry and between interior glass framing and mullion members shall be tightly caulked in order to secure a watertight job. All materials shall be screwed in place using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required. Where moldings are joined, they shall be accurately cut and fitted to result in a tightly closed joint. 9.3 After erection, the Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of the framing from damage by grinding and polishing machines, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds. 9.4 All framing, accessories, etc. shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 9.5 Remove and replace members that are marred or show evidence of deterioration of finish. 10. PROTECTION AND CLEANING 10.1 After installation, metal and glass surfaces of the walls shall be cleaned on both interior and exterior, of all mortar, plaster, paint and other contaminants. 10.2 This contractor shall be responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning with plain water, or water with soap or household detergent. This Subcontractor shall be held responsible for damages resulting from the use of other cleaning materials, 10.3 After being cleaned, all work shall be protected against damage until it is accepted by the Contractor. Thereafter, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain protection and provide final cleaning. 10.3.1 Cleaning of all frames to be complete a minimum of one (1) week before store opening. 11. GUARANTEE 11.1 For all work of this Section provide guarantee that all workmanship, materials, and the completed installations are first class in every respect, and that contractor will make good at his own expense any and all defects of any nature whatsoever that may develop within one year from date of acceptance of the building. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 12. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 12.1 Water leakage: Manufacturer to check the completed assembly according to procedures In Field Hose Test of AAMA 501 -83. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage as defined in test. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 DIVISION 8 PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS GLASS AN 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shal be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refento Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORT( 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing glass and glazing work and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 Items to be completed include but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2.1 Glazing of entrance and exit aluminum doors. 2.2.2 Glazing of curtain wall /storefront. 2.2.2 Glazing of interior /exterior door vision panels. 2.2.3 Glazing of interior borrowed lites. 2.2.4 Other glazing items indicated or specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3. GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL 3.1 Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C1036 requirements. 3.2 Heat - Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat - treated glass which complies with ASTM C1048 requirements. 3.3 Laminated glass standard: Provide laminated glass with two lites interleaved with polyvinyl butyral PVB) which complies with ANSI Z97 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 safety glazing. Laminate glass occurs in insulated assembly. 4. GLASS 4.1 Float glass of thickness indicated on the drawings shall be clear glazing quality, as manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., or equal. Provide 1/4 inch thickness if not indicated on the drawings. 4.1.1 Float glass shall conform to ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (Transparent), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). 4.2 Tempered glass, 1/4 inch thick clear Herculite as manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co. or equal. D GLAZING *SECTION 8C - 1 , 4.2.1 Tempered glass shall conform to ASTM C1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered). Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (Transparent), Quality q3 (Glazing Quality), Class 1 (Gear). 4.3 One -way Mirror Glass: 1/4" thick "Mirropane E.P." transparent mirror by Libbey -Owens -Ford Go. or approved equal. 4.4 Glass for Mirror Production (Silvering): 4.4.1 Mirror Glass: Provide float glass complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 for silvering. 4.5 Mirror Frame: 18 -8, Type 304 stainless steel channel or angle frame with maximum face dimension of 1/2 ". 4.6 Glass Types: 4.6.1 1/4 "; clear; float at interior storefront above doors and as noted on drawings. 4.6.2 1/4 "; clear, tempered at interior storefront below band of doors and as noted on drawings. 4.6.3 Viracon Blue VE1 -85#3 (TRU & KRU); Viracon Blue -Green VE1 -85#3 (BRU); Low "E ", 1" insulated glass with Low "E" coating on surface #3. Refer to drawings for extent of tempered glass. 4.6.3.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Viracon (507 -451- 9555); Temp -Glass (201 - 729 - 6864); PDC - Permapane (1- 800- 232 - 9050); or approved equal. Shop Drawings shall be submitted (unless Viracon is provided). 4.6.3.2 Required performance data shall meet or exceed the following: 4.6.4 1/4 "; blue, tempered at sliding aluminum doors to match storefront (TRU & KRU). 4.6.5 1/4 ", blue -green tempered at sliding aluminum doors to match storefront (BRU). 4.6.6 1/4 ", mirror as indicated on drawings. 4.6.7 1/4 ", one -way mirror as indicated on drawings. 5. GLAZING SEALANTS & MISCELLANEOUS 5.1 Molded neoprene gaskets (at exterior glazing in aluminum frames) shall be of proper profile and hardness required for watertight construction comply with ASTM D2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black. 5.2 Oil -based channel glazing compound (at interior glazing) FS TT -G-410 type and consistency recommended by manufacturer for application shown. Products meeting this specification include "Tremglaze" as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co., Cleveland, Ohio, "Glazing Compounds M242 and M251" as manufactured by the Pecora Chemical Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 05/05/98 TRU & KRU Visible Light Transmittance: 44% (min.) 62.6% (min.) ASHRAE U- Value (winter): 0.34 (max.) 0.35 (max.) Shading Coefficient: 0.50 (max.) 0.55 (max.) Relative Heat Gain: 105 (max.) 116 (max.) DIVISION 8 PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS GLASS AN 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shal be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refento Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORT( 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing glass and glazing work and related items indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 Items to be completed include but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2.1 Glazing of entrance and exit aluminum doors. 2.2.2 Glazing of curtain wall /storefront. 2.2.2 Glazing of interior /exterior door vision panels. 2.2.3 Glazing of interior borrowed lites. 2.2.4 Other glazing items indicated or specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3. GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL 3.1 Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C1036 requirements. 3.2 Heat - Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat - treated glass which complies with ASTM C1048 requirements. 3.3 Laminated glass standard: Provide laminated glass with two lites interleaved with polyvinyl butyral PVB) which complies with ANSI Z97 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 safety glazing. Laminate glass occurs in insulated assembly. 4. GLASS 4.1 Float glass of thickness indicated on the drawings shall be clear glazing quality, as manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co., or equal. Provide 1/4 inch thickness if not indicated on the drawings. 4.1.1 Float glass shall conform to ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (Transparent), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). 4.2 Tempered glass, 1/4 inch thick clear Herculite as manufactured by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Co. or equal. D GLAZING *SECTION 8C - 1 , 4.2.1 Tempered glass shall conform to ASTM C1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered). Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (Transparent), Quality q3 (Glazing Quality), Class 1 (Gear). 4.3 One -way Mirror Glass: 1/4" thick "Mirropane E.P." transparent mirror by Libbey -Owens -Ford Go. or approved equal. 4.4 Glass for Mirror Production (Silvering): 4.4.1 Mirror Glass: Provide float glass complying with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2 for silvering. 4.5 Mirror Frame: 18 -8, Type 304 stainless steel channel or angle frame with maximum face dimension of 1/2 ". 4.6 Glass Types: 4.6.1 1/4 "; clear; float at interior storefront above doors and as noted on drawings. 4.6.2 1/4 "; clear, tempered at interior storefront below band of doors and as noted on drawings. 4.6.3 Viracon Blue VE1 -85#3 (TRU & KRU); Viracon Blue -Green VE1 -85#3 (BRU); Low "E ", 1" insulated glass with Low "E" coating on surface #3. Refer to drawings for extent of tempered glass. 4.6.3.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Viracon (507 -451- 9555); Temp -Glass (201 - 729 - 6864); PDC - Permapane (1- 800- 232 - 9050); or approved equal. Shop Drawings shall be submitted (unless Viracon is provided). 4.6.3.2 Required performance data shall meet or exceed the following: 4.6.4 1/4 "; blue, tempered at sliding aluminum doors to match storefront (TRU & KRU). 4.6.5 1/4 ", blue -green tempered at sliding aluminum doors to match storefront (BRU). 4.6.6 1/4 ", mirror as indicated on drawings. 4.6.7 1/4 ", one -way mirror as indicated on drawings. 5. GLAZING SEALANTS & MISCELLANEOUS 5.1 Molded neoprene gaskets (at exterior glazing in aluminum frames) shall be of proper profile and hardness required for watertight construction comply with ASTM D2000 designation 2BC 415 to 3BC 620, black. 5.2 Oil -based channel glazing compound (at interior glazing) FS TT -G-410 type and consistency recommended by manufacturer for application shown. Products meeting this specification include "Tremglaze" as manufactured by the Tremco Manufacturing Co., Cleveland, Ohio, "Glazing Compounds M242 and M251" as manufactured by the Pecora Chemical Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 05/05/98 121.102.4.1 1.0 Corp., Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. 5.3 Miscellaneous Glazing Materials: 5.3.1 Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 -90 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. 5.3.2 Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used. 5.3.3 Compressible Filler Rod: Closed -cell or waterproof - jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam, proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 510 psi compression strength for 25% deflection. 5.3.4 Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 6. STANDARDS AND PERFORMANCE 6.1 Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand norrnal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure of any kind including Toss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the work. 6.2 Glazing channel dimensions as shown are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. The Glazier is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established. 6.3 Comply with combined recommendations of glass manufacturer and manufacturer of sealants and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where manufacturer's technical representatives directs otherwise. 6.4 Comply with "Glazing Manual" by Flat Glass Marketing Association except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifically recommended otherwise by the manufacturers of the glass and glazing materials. 7. GLAZING 7.1 Install setting blocks of proper size at quarter points of sill rabbet. Set blocks in thin course to the heel -bead compound, it any. 7.2 Provide spacers inside and out, and of proper size and spacing, for all glass sizes larger than 50 united inches, except where gaskets are used for glazing. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 7.3 Voids and Filler Rods: Prevent exudation of sealant or compound by forming voids or installing filler rods in the channel at the heel of jambs and head (do not leave voids in the sill channels) except as otherwise indicated, depending on light size, thickness and type of glass, and complying with manufacturer's recommendations. 7.4 Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass which is tempered, laminated, heat strengthened, or coated. 7.5 Force sealants into channel to eliminate voids and to ensure )3abies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington ■ •k complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. 7.6 Tool exposed surfaces of glazing liquids and compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of the channel, so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 7.7 Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the glass and stops or frames promptly after installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. 7.8 Gasket Glazing: Miter cut and bond ends together at comers where gaskets are used for channel glazing, so that gaskets wil not pull away from comers and result in voids or Teaks in the glazing system. 7.9 At completion of work and just prior to final acceptance by Owner, clean both sides of all glass. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 .. DIVISION 8• PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gnly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 The extent of aluminum work under this Section is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Refer to drawings for location, details, etc. for the work which includes, but is not necessarily limited to: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.1.1 Aluminum frames and framing. 2.1.2 Aluminum closures. 2.1.3 Aluminum clad structural or miscellaneous steel framing. 2.1.4 Preparation of aluminum framed openings for automatic entrance /exit doors and coordinating their installation where required. 2.1.5 Caulking specified for work of this Section. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 3.1 Steel channel framing to receive aluminum tube closures: Section 5F. 3.2 Glass and Glazing: Section 8C. 3.3 Automatic Entrance /Exit Doors: Section 8F. 4. QUALITY ASSURANCE 4.1 Drawings: Plans, elevations and details show spacing of members as well as profile and similar dimensional requirements of aluminum entrances and storefront work. Minor deviations will be accepted in order to utilize manufacturer's standard products when, in Project Manager's sole judgment, such deviations do not materially detract from design concept or intended performances. 4.2 Drawings are based Kawneer Tri -Fab 450 for aluminum storefront framing (for interior and exterior storefronts of Kids "R" Us and for interior storefronts of Babies "R" Us). Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington ALUMINUM STOREFRONT *SECTION 8D 5. SUBMITTALS 5.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum entrances and storefronts, including elevations, detail sections of typical composite members, anchorages, reinforcement, expansion provisions, and glazing. 5.2 Submit shop drawings to installer of automatic entrance /exit doors where work includes preparation of aluminum framed '. openings for doors. 5.3 Samples: Submit samples of each type and color of aluminum finish on 6" long sections of extrusions or formed shapes and on 6" square sheets. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. ALUMINUM STOREFRONT WORK 6.1 Materials: Aluminum shall be free from streaking and die marks. Extrusions: Alloy 6063 -T5. Sheets: No. 32 Alumilite. 6.2 Framing system: Kawneer Tri -Fab 450 Wall System. See drawings for sizes, profiles and colors. 6.3 Doors: See Section 8F. See drawings for sizes and colors. 6.4 Color location: Refer to drawings for locations. 6.4.1 Clear Anodized Finish System: Aluminum Association Finish AA- M21C22A41, Class I. 6.4.2 Fluorocarbon Three -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard three -coat thermocured system complying with AAMA 605.2, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluorocarbon color coat, and Gear fluorocarbon topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene resin by weight. 6.4.3 Colors and Gloss: Match Architect's custom color sample. Colors similar to Pantone Matching System range or Valspar as called out on drawings. 6.4.4 Color locations: Refer to drawings for locations. 65 Mild steel framing operations shall conform to ASTM A283 Grade "C ". All steel to receive one coat of zinc chromate primer after fabrication. Field welds and scratches shall receive one touch- up coat after installation. 6.6 Fasteners: Aluminum alloy 245 -T4, or bronze. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable. Match finish of adjoining metal. Provide phillips head countersunk head machine screws for exposed fasteners. 6.7 Flashing: 20 gauge aluminum, appropriate finish to match. 6.8 Sealant: Tremco "Mono ", GE "Silpruf" or equal. Color to match Dow Coming 795 Silicone Building Sealant. 6.9 Workmanship: 6.9.1 All work shall be straight and true, free from warpage, and of highest standard of material and workmanship. As far as possible, all work shall be performed in the shop. Any departure from indicated details shall be submitted for approval to the Owner's Representative. Joints, comers, copes and miters shall be accurately cut, filed, and fitted and framed together at contact points. All surfaces of joints and connections shall match the finish of adjacent metal and be approved by the Owner's 05/05/98 • DIVISION 8* ALUMINUM STOREFRONT *SECTION 8D -2 Representative. Provide all clips, fastenings and reinforcements required for installation of all work. Removable members shall be carefully formed and fitted. So far as possible, all fastenings shall be concealed. Those which are not shall match finish of adjoining metal. All joints shall be watertight. Provide approved type bituminous insulation between aluminum and dissimilar metals or cement mortar. 6.9.2 All frames, transoms, and mullions, etc., shall be constructed, sized, dimensioned, and reinforced as required to provide rigid construction. Joints shall be of the hairline type. Reinforce with steel plate for all hardware and accessories, including surface applied items. Include all sealing and caulking between metal to metal contacts, between frames, mullions, etc., to provide airtight and weathertight joints. 6.10 Aluminum Framing System: This contractor shall fumish all necessary material, labor and equipment for the complete installation of the following: 6.10.1 Glass framing, vertical and horizontal; transition members connecting these components, adapters and mountings for trim moldings and facing materials. Provide aluminum tube members to be installed over steel channel framing as indicated. 6.10.2 Framing members, transition members, mullions, adapters and mountings shall be extruded of aluminum with alloy and temper consistent with the method of manufacture. These members shall be of 6068 -T5 extruded aluminum alloy (ASTM B221 alloy G.S. 10A- T5). 6.10.3 All screws, miscellaneous fastening devices and intemal components shall be of stainless steel, or plated or corrosion- resistant materials of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which they are used. 6.10.4 Glass framing members shall provide for flush glazing on all sides with through sight lines, and no projecting stops or face joints except where snap -on stops are indicated or required. The system shall provide fully resilient settings for glass and panels by use of elastomeric gaskets on both sides of the glass. Adapters and mountings for trim moldings and face materials shall be designed so as to permit the installation of these products in their regular manner, and shall not interfere with the normal assembly and weathering of the grid framing. 6.10.4.1 Joints, water stops, sealants as recommended by the manufacturer. Joints between framing members and adjoining metals made watertight by caulking with caulking compounds, or other approved sealant material. 6.11 Protection: Provide required protection to prevent damage to finished work. Provide protective barriers as required to prevent damage, after erection, resulting from work of other trades. Use strippable rubber paint on erected work and gummed paper on shop fabricated work. 7. PERFORMANCE 7.1 Window framing fumished under this Section shall meet or exceed the following performance requirements. 7.1.1 Resistance to Water Infiltration: The framing system, Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington shall not leak when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test pressure of 7.5 P.S.F. (Certified test results available). 7.1.2 Performance Under Uniform Loading: When tested in accordance with ASTM E3330, the maximum deflection of any member shall not exceed 1/175 of its span and when the Toad is removed there shall be no evidence of permanent deformation or damage when tested under a load of 30 P.S.F. minimum. 7.1.2.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to examine the drawings to verify the wind load design for the building indicated on the drawings, and to provide framing that meets or exceeds requirements for the indicated wind load, and satisfies all applicable local codes and regulations. 7.1.3 Allow for expansion and contraction resulting from ambient temperature range of 120 °F. (49 °C). 7.1.4 Air filtration of not more than 0.06 cfm per square foot of a fixed area per ASTM E 283. PART 3: EXECUTION 8. PREPARATION 8.1 Field Measurement: Wherever possible, take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings, and fabrication, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, proceed with fabrication and coordinate installation tolerances as necessary when field measurements might delay work. 9. ERECTION 9.1 All items under this heading shall be set in their correct locations as shown in the details and shall be level, square, plumb, and at proper elevations and in alignment with other work. 9.2 All joints between interior metal, masonry and between interior glass framing and mullion members shall be tightly caulked in order to secure a watertight job. All materials shall be screwed in place using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required. Where moldings are joined, they shall be accurately cut and fitted to result in a tightly closed joint. 9.3 After erection, the Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of the framing from damage by grinding and polishing machines, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other harmful compounds. 9.4 All framing, accessories, etc. shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 9.5 Remove and replace members that are marred or show evidence of deterioration of finish. 10. PROTECTION AND CLEANING 10.1 After installation, metal and glass surfaces of the walls shall be cleaned on both interior and exterior, of all mortar, plaster, paint and other contaminants. 10.2 This contractor shall be responsible for removal of protective materials and cleaning with plain water, or water with soap or household detergent. This Subcontractor shall be held responsible for damages resulting from the use of other cleaning materials. 05/05/98 DIVISION 8* ALUMINUM STOREFRONT "SECTION 8D-3 • 10.3 After being cleaned, all work shall be protected against damage until it is accepted by the Contractor. Thereafter, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to maintain protection and provide final cleaning. 10.3.1 Cleaning of all frames to be complete a minimum of one (1) week before store opening. 11. GUARANTEE 11.1 For all work of this Section provide guarantee that all workmanship, materials, and the completed installations are first class in every respect, and that contractor will make good at his own expense any and all defects of any nature whatsoever that may develop within one year from date of acceptance of the building. 12. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 12.1 Water leakage: Manufacturer to check the completed assembly according to procedures in Field Hose Test of AAMA 501 -83. There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage as defined in test. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 Pabies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton DIVISION 8 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE EXIT DOORS *SECTION 8F -1 THIS SECTION IS FOR INFORMATION AND COORDINATION ONLY TO INCORPORATE THIS WORK INTO THE PROJECT. THE OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH HORTON AUTOMATICS FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE/EXIT DOORS. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE - ORDERED. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION CONTACT NATIONAL. ACCOUNTS DEPARTMENT, 4242 BALDWIN BLVD., CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 78405, PHONE (800.531- 3111). PART 1 - GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shal be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK (By Door Manufacturer) 2.1 Work included: 2.1.1 Electrically operated automatic entrance /exit doors and frames, automatic sliding door operators, motion detector, hold -open safety beam, header box enclosures and accessories for the sliding doors indicated to receive such equipment, all automatic entrance/exit glazing and joint sealants between door frames and adjacent surfaces. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE (By Contractor) 3.1 Aluminum frames and windows: Section 8B (including preparation of opening for door units plumb and square, and all required transoms, if indicated, above door header boxes). 3.2 Glazing: Section 8C. 3.3 Masterkeyed Cylinders: Section 81. 3.4 Electrical Connections: Division 16. 3.5 The Contractor shall prepare all openings required for the installation of work of this Section. 4. SUBMITTALS 4,1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and standard details for automatic entrance/exit doors, including fabrication, finishing, hardware, operators, accessories and other components of the work. Include roughing -in diagrams, wiring diagrams, parts lists, and maintenance instructions, as well as certified test data. 4.2 Templates and Diagrams: Fumish templates, diagrams and Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington other data to fabricators and installers of related work, promptly as needed for coordination of automatic entrance installation. Expedite immediately to avoid any delay. 4.3 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the fabrication and installation of automatic entrance /exit doors and associated components of the work. Indicate anchors, joint system, expansion provision, hardware, and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data. Include glazing details. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 5. MANUFACTURER /AUTOMATIC UNITS 5.1 Manufacturer. Horton Automatic Div.; Overhead Door Corp. Series 2000 Electromechanical operation, Sliding Doors. Size, quantity and location as indicated on the drawings (Bi -Slide at TRU & BRU, Single -Slide at KRU). 5.1.1 Automatic doors shall be factory glazed. 6. ALUMINUM FINISHES 6.1 Finish: 6.1.1 Fluorocarbon Three -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard three -coat thermocured system complying with AAMA 605.2, composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluorocarbon color coat and clear fluorocarbon topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene resin by weight. 6.1.2 Color to match Valspar as indicated on drawings (TRU & BRU). 6.1.3 Match Architect's custom color sample. Color similar to Pantone matching system range. (KRU Only). PART 3 - EXECUTION 7. INSTALLATION 7.1 Not applicable. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 DIVISION 8* OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH RITEHITE CORPORATION FOR FURNISHING SPECIAL DOORS. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE -ORDERED. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION, CALL NATIONAL ACCOUNTS DEPARTMENT, 8900 N. ARBON DRIVE, MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN 53223, PHONE (414) 355 -2600, FAX (414) 356.9248. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review 4nIY when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A. of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for complete installation of Owner - supplied the special doors indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 Special doors include: 2.2.1 Impact doors. 2.3 Steel frames by Contractor as specified in Section 5E. Babies NR" Us - Tukwlta. Wash gton SPECIAL DOORS PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. IMPACT DOORS 3.1 Impact Doors: Model M -6802, (TRU and BRU) and Model M3680, (KRU) double - acting traffic doors as manufactured by RiteHlte Corporation and supplied by Owner. Doors shall be provided complete with all hardware and accessories EXCEPT frame. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. JNSTALLATION *SECTION 8G - 1 4.1 Install where indicated in accordance with details, approved shop drawings and manufacturer's Instructions. 4.2 Adjust and clean all doors and leave in first class operating condition. 5. GUARANTEE 5.1 For all work In this section provide guarantee that all workmanship, materials, and the completed installations are first class In every respect, and that the contractor will make good at his expense any and all defects of any nature whatsoever that may develop within one year from date of acceptance of the project. - END OF SECTION - pIVISION 8• ROLLING FIRE SHUTTERS *SECTION 8H -1 THIS SECTION IS FOR INFORMATION AND COORDINATION ONLY TO INCORPORATE THIS WORK INTO THE PROJECT. THE OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH OVERHEAD DOOR CORPORATION FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING ROLLING FIRE SHUTTERS. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE - ORDERED. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION CONTACT NATIONAL ACCOUNTS DEPARTMENT, MR. BILL BURDETTE, P.O. BOX 809046, DALLAS, TX 75380 -9046, PHONE (214- 2334611). PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review QnI t when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2. MATERIALS 2.1 The brand names mentioned is used to establish quality. It Is not inferred to limit the item to that particular manufacturer. 2.2 Rolling Fire Shutters: Face mounted shutters shall be manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation, Dallas, TX 75380 -9046 Shutters are to be fire rated as called out on drawings. 2.2.1 Shutters: Manually, push up operated with lift handle on bottom bar. Heat actuated hold -open devices shall be installed on both sides of the wall near the door, interconnected so that the operation of any single device will permit the door to close. 2.2.2 An oscillating govemor shall be supplied to control the rate of descent when the automatic closing device Is activated. 2.2.3 Slats: Galvanized steel no lighter than #22 U.S. gauge. Fit each end of every slat with end locks to act as a wearing surface and to maintain slat alignment. Reinforce curtain with bottom bar. Locking to be by slide bolts. 2.2.4 Guides: Fabricated of steel constructed in accordance with U.L. approved details. 2.2.5 Spring counterbalance: House in steel pipe. Springs: Helical torsion type designed to include an overload factor of 25% grease packed and mounted on a steel inner shaft rod with ball bearings to minimize wear of pipe shaft rotation around inner shaft. 2.2.6 Bracket plates: (Carrying counterbalancing shaft) steel plate not less than 1/8" thickness. 2.2.7 Hood: Rectangular and of galvanized steel not Tess than #24 U.S. gauge. 2.2.8 Finish: Baked grey prime coat for galvanized steel. PART 3: EXECUTION 3. INSTALLATION 3.1 All rolling fire shutters are to be installed In accordance with manufacturers instructions by the manufacturer or his authorized representative. .END OF SECTION- Rabies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 8* PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specked in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section IA for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 All hardware items shall be furnished by the Contractor with the exception of Detex Alarm Exit Devices and Norton Door Closers which will be furnished by the Owner as noted on the Schedule. All hardware items shall be installed by the Contractor. 2.2 Lock Installation 2.2.1 All locks shall have Best cylinders and a Best construction core keyed alike. 2.2.2 Automatic entrance doors and detex alarms will be fumished with Best cylinders pre - Installed. Contractor must key with a Best construction core. 2.3 All hardware shall be neatly packed and labeled with identification as to where it is to be applied. 2.4 All hardware shall have the required screws, bolts, and fastenings, wrapped in paper and packed in the same package as the hardware. 2.5 All hardware that fastens to metal doors and frames shall be made to template and attached with machine screws. 2.6 The Hardware Contractor shall fumish and ship templates to other contractors as directed, all F.O.B. Factory Site. All hardware shall be shipped to the job site. 2.7 Provide a competent representative who shall inspect and direct the method of setting, applying and adjusting all hardware. It is not required that the Representative shall remain constantly at the building, but shall properly Inspect all the work in the application of hardware, as it progresses. This representative shall be at all times easily accessible during the execution of the work in order that he may promptly attend to items in connection with the hardware. 1 SUBMITTALS 3.1 Submit hardware schedule organized by "Hardware Sets" to indicate specifically the products to be furnished for each item required on each door. 3.1.1 Include catalog cut - sheets of each item. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington FINISH HARDWARE *SECTION 81 -1 3.2 Hardware schedule to use same door and frame reference numbers for detail and openings as those on the contract drawings. 4. GUARANTEE 4.1 All hardware items shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer as stated in their catalogs. Vendor shall assume all responsibility. 4.2 Guarantees shall be in writing by the manufacturer and shall be delivered to the Owner, The guarantee shall begin from the date of acceptance of the building. 4.3 Hardware vendor shall make a final check of all installed hardware items together with the Owner's Representative and Contractor, prior to final acceptance of the building. 4.4 Defective hardware within the guaranteed period must be replaced at Contractor's expense, including labor for removal and reinstallation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. HARDWARE SCHEDULE 5.1 Items supplied by Contractor. Refer to drawings for schedule. PART 3: EXECUTION 6. INSTALLATION 6.1 Refer to Section 6A for installation responsibility. 6.2 For exterior outswinging doors, closers shall be mounted inside (push side) of door. Interior doors shall have closers mounted on the pull side of the doors unless otherwise indicated. Verify mounting location of closer with the Owners Representative before closer installation. -END OF SECTION- 05/05/98 .., DIVISION 8* TRUCK DOCK DOORS THIS SECTION IS FOR INFORMATION AND COORDINATION width under wind Toad of 20 psf, ASTM E330. ONLY TO INCORPORATE THIS WORK INTO THE PROJECT. PART 3: EXECUTION TOYS "R" US AND BABIES "R" US HAVE ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH OVERHEAD DOOR 6. INSTALLATION CORPORATION FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING ROLLING STEEL DOORS. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE -ORDERED. FOR 6.1 Not applicable. COORDINATION INFORMATION, PLEASE CONTACT NATIONAL ACCOUNTS DEPARTMENT, MR. BILL BURDETTE, P.O. BOX 809046, DALLAS, TEXAS 75380.9046 (214) 233.6611. KIDS "R" US HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH ATLAS ROLL -LITE CORPORATION FOR FURNISHING AND INSTALLING SECTIONAL OVERHEAD STEEL DOORS. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE - ORDERED. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION, PLEASE CONTACT MR. ANDREW GOLD, 10407 ROCKET BOULEVARD, ORLANDO, FL 32824, PHONE (407) 857 -0680. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review Qnly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Work included: Fumish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing manual operated, rolling steel insulated doors and related supporting steel indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 3.1 Padlocks: Section 81. 3.2 The Contractor shall prepare all openings required for the installation of work of this section. PART 2: PRODUCTS 4. MANUFACTURER/DOORS (TRU & KRU) 4.1 Manufacturer: Overhead Door Corp. Series UFN -2. Size, quantity and location as indicated on the Drawings. 4.2 Units designed for maximum deflection of 1/120 of opening width under wind load of 20 psf, ASTM E330. 5. MANUFACTURER/DOORS (KRU) 5.1 Manufacturer. Atlas Roll -Lite Corp. Model 716. Size, quantity, and location as indicated on the Drawings. 5.2 Units designed for maximum deflection of 1/120 of opening - END OF SECTION - *SECTION 8J -i Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* PART 1: GENERAL 3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washincton CEMENT P 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review vnl ( when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications, 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.3.3 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials, equipment, scaffolding, tools and services necessary to complete the plastering work in accordance with drawings and specifications, including but not necessarily limited to the following: 2.1.1 Cement plaster walls, soffits, parapets, fascias, etc. as indicated on the drawings. 2.1.2 All lath, trims, jointing, recess details, beads, etc. to provide complete installation indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2.1.3 Refer to drawings for type(s) of substrate to receive Cement Plaster. 2.2 Painting of Stucco (as indicated on drawings) specified in Section 9H. 3.1 Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor (hereinafter referred to as Contractor) shall visit the premises to thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the work and working conditions and verify all dimensions in the field, and shall advise the Project Manager of any discrepancy before performing any work. Work shall not be started until any defects and discrepancies have been corrected. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of the conditions by the Contractor. 3.2 Coordination: The Contractor shall be specifically responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of other trades. 3.3 Scaffolding: Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain scaffolding, Including ladders, planks and other equipment required for the proper execution of the work under this Section and so erected to limit, as far as possible, interference with other trades. Such scaffolding and equipment shall be removed as soon as the work under this Section is completed and accepted. 3.4 Environmental Conditions: Plaster shal not be applied when the ambient temperature is 40 degrees F or lower, or when a drop in temperature below 40 degrees F is anticipated within 48 hours after application. LASTER (STUCCO) 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Materials List and Samples: Before starting application of lathing and plastering, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for approval the following materials list and samples: 4.1.1 Materials List: A list of materials and accessories to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted in five (5) copies, and shall include descriptive data, catalog cuts, and other such information required to identify the materials as to the locations of their use In the work. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to time. 4.1.2 Samples: One 12" X 12" section of each type of lath and one 12" length of each accessory and trim item proposed for use shall be submitted to the Project Manager for approval in accordance with Division 1. Prior to the application of finish coat, two (2) 12" X 12" X 7/8" thick plaster, showing the finish coat texture and color shall also be submitted for approval. 4.1.3 Product Data: Submit complete, acceptable proddct data and description of method of installation where the direct application of cement plaster over liquid bonding agent on concrete or concrete block surfaces is used as specified herein. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS 5.1 Note: Material designations given are based on general requirements of industry. Contractor is responsible for updating any and all materials to conform with current local and nationwide industry application requirements. 5.2 Aggregates shall be sand conforming to ASTM C897. 5.3 Building Paper shall be waterproofed kraft paper Grade D minimum, conforming to current Fed. Specs. Building paper indicated on the drawings will not be required if paper - backed metal lath will be used. The paper shall be securely held in place by or attached to the metal lath. The paper shall permit 1/2 of the total weight of metal to be embedded fully with a covering of at least 1/8 inch of plaster at all points. Paper- backed lath shall be lapped paper to paper, metal to metal. 5.3,1 At Contractor's option, 'Tyvek" by Du Pont Company may be used in lieu of building paper not attached to metal lath. 5.3.2 If gypsum sheathing is used over metal studs, building paper may be omitted. 5.3.3 If plywood sheathing is used, provide two layers of approved building paper. 5.4 Lime: *SECTION 9A -1 5.4.1 Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206. 5.4,2 Lime Putty shall be made from hydrated lime. Suitable precautions shall be taken to protect the putty from exposure to the sun and to prevent excessive evaporation when stored. Hydrated lime shall be mixed with water to form a putty and shall be allowed to stand for at least 15 minutes before using. 05/05/98 •. • • • 5.5 Metal Lath: Per current Federal Specs., ASTM C1032 woven wire lath with continuous absorptive paper backing and ASTM C1063 expanded metal lath with continuous absorptive paper backing. The paper shall permit 1/2 of total weight of metal to be embedded fully with a covering of at least 1/8 inch of plaster at all points. 5.5.1 Woven Wire Lath shall be used on specified vertical surfaces (as approved by the Owner's Representative) and shall be fabricated from copper - bearing, cold- drawn, galvanized steel wires, 18 gage for 1 -inch openings, 17 gage for 1 -1/2 inch openings, and 16 gage for 2 inch openings. Woven wire lath shall be fabricated in a manner to provide not less than 1/4 -inch keying between wire and paper backing or keying shall be obtained by a uniform series of slots in a paper separator woven between two layers of wire. Woven wire lath shall weigh not Tess than 3.6 pounds per square yard. 5.5.2 Expanded Metal Lath ASTM C1063 shall be used to horizontal and vertical surfaces and shall be fabricated from copper- bearing steel sheets and given a protective coating of paint or .shall be fabricated from galvanized steel. Expanded sheet metal lath shall weigh not less than 3.4. pounds per square yard, self - furring. 5.6 Wire shall be zinc - coated steel. Tie wire for attaching metal lath to metal supports and lacing wire shall be annealed and shall conform to ASTM standards. Tie wire for securing metal lath to metal supports and for lacing shall be not less than 0.0625" diameter (16 gage). 5.7 Plastering Accessories shall be protected by galvanizing, except that manufacturer's standard protective coating may be permitted for comerite and strip lath, arid shall conform to the following: bi 5.7.1 Corner Beads shall be of steel not less than 0.0217 inch nominal thickness (26 gage). Flange dimensions may include nose of bead. 5.7.1.1 Expanded Flange Comer Bead shall have flanges of at least 2 -1/2" wide and a bead not exceeding 3/16" diameter. 5.7.1.2 Bullnose Comer Bead shall have flanges at least 2 -1/2' wide and a 3/4" radius bead. 5.7.1.3 Woven -wire comer reinforcement, fully embedded with plaster. 5.7.2 Comerite shall be cut lengthwise from expanded metal lath weighing 3.4 pounds per square yard or shall be formed of at least 19 -gage galvanized wire woven into fabric weighing not less than 1.7 pounds per square yard. Cornerite shall form an angle of at least 100 degrees between not Tess than 2" legs. 5.7.3 Casing Beads shall be of steel not less than 0.0276" nominal thickness (24 gage), and shall have a depth equal to the plaster thickness, with expanded wing at least 2 inches wide. Face flange shall be as specified and back shall be slightly arched to provide a spring effect. 5.7.3.1 #66 Square Casing Beads shall have a face flange that subtend a 90 degree angle and shall have a short reveal on the front edge. 5.7.3.2 Modified- Square Casing Beads shall have a face flange that subtends a 90 degree angle, and the front edge shall be beveled. 5.7.3.3 Quarter -Round Casing Beads shall have a curved face flange that subtends 90 degree angle. Quarter -round casing beads shall be used where Indicated. 5.7.4 Control Joint shall be of galvanized steel not less than 0.0217" nominal thickness (26 gage), or of zinc alloy not less than 0.013" nominal thickness (29 gage), designed to allow transverse movement of adjoining plaster, and shall have a depth of not less than 3/4" with perforated or expanded -metal wings. USG #75 or equal. 5.7.5 Expansion Joint: #40 double studded; 2 #66 casings, back to back, allow for backer rod and sealant. 5.8 Portland Cement: ASTM C150 type I or II. Portland cement for finish coat shall be Tight gray or white in color. Only one type and brand of cement shall be used in the work. 5.8.1 Altemate Finish Coat: At Contractor's option, finish coat shall be factory- prepared (mill- mixed), integrally - colored; 'Thom Stucco" by Thoro System Products, Miami, Florida 33166, (305) 592 -2081 or "Expo Stucco" by Expo Stucco Products, San Diego, Califomia, 92121, (619) 566-4343, or approved equal. 5.8.2 Additive: The use of acrylic admix such as Acryl 60 by Thoro System Products is acceptable when approved by the Project Manager. 5.9 Water shall be clean and potable. 5.10 Plaster Mix Reinforcement: Glass fibers, 1/2" nominal length, alkali resistant. 5.11 Liquid Bonding Agent: 'Weld- Crete" by Larsen Products Corp. or other approved liquid bonding agent, formulated for exterior use to bond cement plaster to concrete or concrete block surfaces and conforming to ASTM C932 and MIL- B- 19235C (docks). 5.12 Sealer: Clear acrylic emulsion, breathable, non - yellowing 'Thoroglaze" by Thoro System Products or approved equal, for moistureproofing of unpainted stucco finished surfaces. PART 3: EXECUTION 6. INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION 6.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that al, surfaces receiving subsequent finish are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. 6.2 Contractor shall advise Project Manager immediately In writing of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 7. INSTALLATION 7.1 Installation of metal lath: Metal lath shall be applied straight, with true and even surfaces, without sags or buckles, and staggered. Metal lath shall be applied with the long dimension in horizontal position. Metal lath without Integral paper backing shall be applied only after a backing of waterproofed building paper has been applied to the area to receive the plaster. Metal lath on vertical surfaces shall be oriented to provide maximum overlap on the lower sheet. End laps of metal lath shall not be less than 1 Inch and side laps not less than 1/2 inch. Paper - backed woven wire lath applied vertically shall be lapped one mesh and securely tied at intervals not exceeding 6 inches. Ends of wire lath sheets shall be lapped not less than 2 inches. 1 1 • I- in • DIVISION 9* CEMENT PLASTER (STUCCO) 'SECTION 9A -3 7.1.1 On Metal Supports: Self- furring metal lath shall be secured to metal supports at intervals not exceeding 6 inches. Side laps or junction of sides shall, in addition of being secured to support, be tied or otherwise secured at intervals not exceeding 6 inches. Ends of wire ties to secure metal lath to support and to tie side laps shall be given 3 twists and bent into the plane of the metal lath. 7.1.2 On Masonry: Self- furring metal lath on masonry shall be fastened every 8" vertically and every 6" horizontally with case- hardened nails or powder- actuated studs. Nails and studs shall be of proper length and design required for securing the metal lath in approved manner. 7.2 Installation of accessories: Accessories shall be set level and plumb to straight lines and shall be securely located on the plaster base in a manner common to the trade so as to develop uniform plaster thickness. Fastenings shall be spaced not over 12" on centers for single- flanged accessories and not over 24" on centers on each flange of double-flanged accessories. Accessories shall be mitered or coped at corners, or prefabricated corners shall be used. Joints in straight runs shall be formed with splice or tie plates. 7.2.1 Comer Bead or wire comer reinforcement shall be installed at extemal plastered corners. Corner beads shall be in single lengths except where the continuous run of the comer exceeds the standard stock length of corner beads. Corner beads shall be secured to supports. 7.2.2 Cornerites shall be Installed at intemal angles formed by abutting surfaces of metal lath not tumed down at horizontal comers or retumed around vertical comers. The cornerite shall be secured to abutting lathed surfaces. 7.2.3 Casing Beads shall be installed at the joints of dissimilar base materials in the same plane and at exposed edges of plaster including junctions of walls and ceilings. The casing bead shall be secured to the ceiling to provide a 3/8" opening between the abutting surfaces. The opening shall be sealed prior to plastering. 7.2.4 Expansion Control -Joint Beads shall be installed as control joints in plasterwork at the locations indicated. If not indicated, control joints shall be so installed to create panels no larger than 144 sq. ft., with no dimension exceeding 18 feet or a length to width ratio of 2 -1/2 to 1. Metal lath shall not be run continuous through control joints. Additional supports shall be installed as required to support the bead. 7.2.4.1 Control Joints shall be installed with attachment only to the edges of abutting sheet of lath, so that lath is not continuous or tied across the joint. 7.2.4.2 Where control joints are placed parallel to framing members, control joints shall be installed so that none is more than 4" away from a framing member. 7.2.4.3 Control joints shall be installed at all locations where panel sizes of dimensions change. Joints shall extend the full width or height of the plaster membrane. 7.2.5 Expansion Joints: #40 or #66 casing beads butted back to back shall coincide with all "through -wall" expansion joints. 7.3 Installation of Plaster: Plaster thickness and surface evenness shall be controlled by grounds or screeds of metal, wood or plaster. Plaster shall be finished to a true and even surface well within limits established by best trade practice. Plaster thickness from the back plane of the metal lath to the finished plaster face shall be not less than 7/8 inch as defined in ASTM C926. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 7.3.1 Metal Grounds and Screeds: Metal grounds shall be fumished as required for securing trim items and providing finished comers and terminations. Metal screeds shall be installed when wood or metal grounds cannot be used. On completion of approved base coats, temporary screeds shall be removed and resultant voids immediately filled with plaster. 7.3.2 Plaster Screeds shall be used within the plastered areas to supplement wood and metal grounds and screeds. 7.3.3 Surfaces to receive plaster shall be clean, free from frost, loose particles, dust, dirt, soot, grease, oil, acid, and other foreign matter that might interfere with a satisfactory bond. Base for plaster shall be inspected by the Contractor and approved by the Project Manager. Lath, grounds, and accessories shall be true to lines and elevations and securely fastened. 7.3.4 Materials shall be proportioned by volume as follows: 7.3.4.1 Scratch Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 2 -1/2 - 4 parts sand, and 3/4 to 1 -1/2 lime (or 1 masonry cement). 7.3.4.2 Brown Coat: 1 part Portland cement, 3 -5 parts sand, and 3/4 to 1 -1/2 lime (or 1 masonry cement). 7.3.4.3 Finish Coat: 1 part Portland cement (white where indicated or required), 3 parts sand, and 2 parts lime. 7.3.4.4 Plaster Mix Reinforcement: Scratch and brown coats shall have glass fiber reinforcement in the mix, quantity within the limits established in ASTM C926. 7.3.5 Mixing: Plaster mix ingredients shall be mixed in mechanical mixers, except where hand - mixing is approved for small quantities. 7.3.5.1 Frozen, caked and lumped materials shall not be used. Each batch shall be proportioned by volume, accuratey measured by manual or mechanical devices, and thoroughly mixed with a minimum amount of water until uniform in color or consistency. Batches shall be of a size that can be entirely used within the limits established in ASTM C926. Plaster that has begun to set shall not be used. Retempering of scratch and brown coats shall be done only within the limits established in ASTM C926. Retempering of finish coat plaster will not be permitted. Mixer, mixing boxes, and tools shall be cleaned and kept free of plaster from previous mixes. 7.3.6 Workmanship: Items or features of the work in connection with or adjoining the plaster shall be in place, plumb, straight, and true prior to beginning plaster work. Metal lath shall be in place and positioned to provide a good key. Plaster coats shall be applied continuously in one general direction, without allowing plaster to dry at edges. Where it is impossible to work the full dimension of a wall surface in a continuous operation, jointing shall be made at a break, opening, or natural division of the surface. Edges to be jointed shall be dampened slightly to produce a smooth confluence. Plaster shall be 3 -coat work not less than 7/8 inch thick. All exterior corners of plaster shall be slightly rounded. Plaster on sofft or canopy surfaces shall be pitched forward to form a drip. 7.3.7 Scratch Coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through metal lath and to embed the metal lath and with sufficient depth. As soon as the scratch coat has become firm but before it has set, its entire surface shall be scratched (scored) in one direction only, to provide mechanical bond with the brown coat. On vertical surfaces, the scratching or scoring shall be horizontal. 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* CEMENT PIASTER (STUCCO) *SECTION 9A-4 7.3.7.1 On Metal Lath the scratch coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to form full keys through metal lath and to embed the metal lath and with sufficient depth. As soon as the scratch coat has become firm but before it has set, its entire surface shall be scratched (scored) in one direction only, to provide mechanical bond with the brown coat. On vertical surfaces, the scratching or scoring shall be horizontal. 7.3.8 Brown Coat: The scratch coat shall be dampened evenly with a fog spray to obtain uniform suction before the brown coat is applied. The brown coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight contactwith the scratch coat and to bring the combined thickness of the scratch and brown coats to approximately 3/4 inch. The surface shall be brought to a true even plan by rodding and surface defects and scratches or scorings shall be filled with plaster. The surface shall be floated with a dry float and left evenly rough to provide a bond to the finish coat. The brown coat shall be moist cured within the limits established in ASTM C926, Article 12 and Annex A2.9 before the finish coat is applied. 7.3.8.1 Note: Do not wet cure base coats containing acrylic admixtures. 7.3.9 Finish Coat shall be approximately 1/4 inch thick and shall be applied after the brown coat has set and hardened and within the limits established in ASTM C926, Article 12 and Annex A2.9 after the application of the brown coat. Dampening by brush will not be permitted. The finish coat shall be applied with sufficient material and pressure to ensure tight contact with brown coat and to bring the combined thickness of scratch, brown and finish coats to at least 7/8 inch. The finished surface shall match the approved sample in texture. 7.3.9.1 An approved 12" x 12" x 7/8" thick sample with the desired texture shall be kept at the project site for the duration of the contract. 7.3.10 Curing: As soon as finish coat has taken its initial set the plaster shall be protected against direct rays of the sun or rapid drying for at least 6 days. During this time, plaster shall be kept moist by frequent fog- spraying. Care shall be taken to prevent staining of the plaster. 7.3.10.1 Note: Exercise caution when curing integrally - colored finish coat to avoid pigment.migration and streaking. 8. COORDINATION: 8.1 Delivery and Storage: 8.1.1 Manufactured materials: deliver in original packages, containers or bundles, bearing manufacturer's name and brand. 8.1.2 Store plaster, cement and lime off ground, under watertight cover, away from seating walls or other damp surface until ready for use. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from site. 8.1.3 Contact Contractor with regard to storage area at job site and job progress schedule requirements. 8.2 Inspection, Verification: 8.2.1 Before starting work Inspect and verify work Installed by others which might affect lathing or plastering. Report to Contractor any work out of plumb, line or level or other condition detrimental to good plaster job. Failure to so Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton report will be construed as acceptance of conditions and surfaces as satisfactory. 8.2.2 Consult with and cooperate with mechanical, electrical and other subcontractors whose work affects or is affected by furring, lathing or plastering. Make necessary provision for work of other trades. 8.2.3 Do not cover up with plaster work until all approvals, inspections, and installation of concealed work have been completed. 8.3 Scaffolds: Provide necessary scaffolding, stagingand similar items as required for proper execution of work. Comply with Local and State Laws governing same. Erect scaffolding to interfere as little as possible with work of other contractors; remove promptly as soon as plastering is completed. 8.4 Acceptance and Repairing: Plaster showing oversanding, cracks, blisters, pits, checks, color streaks, or discoloration will not be acceptable. Such plaster shall be removed and replaced with new plaster by the Contractor at his expense. Plaster shall be' clean and sound after all related work has been completed. Patching and repairing damaged or defective portions will be permitted only when approved by the Project Manager and shall be performed in an acceptable manner. Patching and repairs shall match existing plaster and color. 8.5 Samples of Completed Work: Samples of completed work may be taken by the Project Manager at any time for laboratory inspection and tests to determine conformance with the specifications. Plaster which does not conform to specification requirements shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 8.6 Protection, Clean -Up: 8.6.1 Protection adjoining finish materials from damage from plastering operations, by use of suitable drop cloths, plastb sheets, masking paper and tape, etc. Particular care must be exercised to prevent plaster being deposited on finish masonry walls. Repair, replace, make good any damage to work in manner satisfactory to Project Manager, Owner. 8.6.2 Provide watertight boxes under all water barrels. 8.6.3 Furnish and install waterproof protection under machine mixers and wherever mortar is piled on floors. Protection: 3 plies tarred felt extending six feet beyond outer edges of boxes, mixers or piles d mortar. Plasterer responsible for damage caused by his failure to provide necessary precaution. 8.6.4 Clean each area of plaster debris as soon as each coat is applied. Do not allow debris to accumulate. At the conclusion of work, remove any plaster which may have been deposited on adjacent work, patch all cracks and defects and leave job in perfect condition. All trash, debris, excess materials, etc. to be removed from Job site by this contractor. Leave in broom clean condition. 8.6.5 Touch up, paint, patch plasterwork around work of other trades installed subsequent to plastering. This refers only to unavoidable minor damage caused by other trades in applying other items of finish work. 8.6,6 Install work in manner satisfactory to Project Manager. Cracks, pits, waves, crooked edges or angles not acceptable. Leave comer beads, trim, and other adjacent finish work free from clippings, splashings and stains. 9. PIRECT APPLICATION TO CONCRETE OR CONCRETe MASONRY 05/05/98 DIVISION 9• CEMENT P 9.1 Where local practice and conditions permit, the direct application of cement plaster to liquid bonding agent over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces, will be considered for use on the project when approved by the Owner's Representative. Written approval, for this direct application, must be obtained with copy to the Project Manager. 9.2 Surface Preparation: Surfaces to receive liquid bonding agent must be clean, free from loose material, dust, dirt, oil, grease, wax, loose paint, mildew, rust, laitance or efflorescence. Surfaces with form releasing agents, curing compounds and sealers must be compatible with liquid bonding agent. Prepare previously painted surfaces in strict accordance with liquid bonding agent manufacturer's recommendations. 9.3 Liquid Bonding Agent: Apply uniformly, using brush, roller or spray, to form a continuous film over entire surface. Allow to dry one hour or as recommended by manufacturer. Prior to cement plaster application, inspect liquid bonding agent application for continuity of film over the entire bonding surface. Re -apply liquid bonding agent over areas not satisfactorily covered. Protect the applied film from dirt and ' debris until the cement plaster is in place. 9.4 Cement Plaster: 9.4.1 After the surface has been prepared to assure bond, apply portland cement base coat, bring out to grounds, approximately 3/8 ", straighten to a true surface, float and compact and leave sufficiently rough to assure adequate bond for finish coat.. Surface shall be left free from imperfections which may reflect in the finish coat. Moisture cure at least 48 hours. END OF SECTION - 9.4.2 Apply the finish coat to an approximate thickness of 1/8 inch. Float or texture to achieve finish desired. Moist curing of finish coats is not usually required except on hot, dry and windy days. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington LASTER (STUCCO) 10. SEALING OF UNPAINTED STUCCO 10.1 *SECTION 9A -5 Surfaces to be sealed shall be thoroughly clean of dirt, waxes, foreign materials, defective paint or coatings. 10.2 Do not apply sealer on frozen or frost -filled surfaces. Do not apply when temperature Is below 500F. 10.3 Apply as material comes from container in two thin coats as recommended by sealer manufacturer. Allow first coat to thoroughly dry before applying second coat. 10.4 Coverage: Verify texture and porosity of stucco to be sealed. At a minimum apply at the rate of 250 square feet per gallon. The rate may be adjusted if porosity and texture requires more or less sealer as approved by the Owner's Representative. 11. GI IARANTEE 11.1 Guarantee work, in writing, for a period of one year, against popping, peeling, or other . defects in workmanship or . materials, after date of final acceptance of building. Defects appearing during guarantee period to be removed and /or replaced by this Contractor without additional cost to Owner. 11.2 For direct application of cement plaster to concrete block surfaces, the guarantee shall further include, as a defect, the telegraphing of block joints to the finished cement plaster surface. ( DIVISION 9* PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED /DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review fly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be Taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 This Section includes all labor, materials, tools and equipment necessary for and Incidental to the execution and completion of Gypsum Drywall work as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 Structural studs and joists: Section 5F. 2.3 Wood studs, blocking, sheathing: Section 6A. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Fire - Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire- resistance ratings as indicated and as required by governing authorities and codes. Provide materials, accessories and application procedures which have been listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E119 for the type of construction shown. 3.2 Tolerances for Drywall Work: Do not exceed a variation of 3/16" in 8' -0" from plumb, level and fiat (all directions); and do not exceed 1/16" offset of planes at joints between panels, shim panels as necessary to comply with tolerances. 4. JOB CONDITIONS 4.1 In cold weather, the building shall be heated during the application of the gypsum wallboard and joint treatment to maintain a uniform temperature in the range of not less than 55 degrees F. for a minimum period of 48 hours prior to during and following application of gypsum board and joint treatment, materials or bonding adhesives and ventilation shall be provided to eliminate excessive moisture. 4.2 Maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. in building prior to drywall application for a period of 48 hours. The temperature shall be maintained for the entire wallboard and joint treatment application. Ventilation should be provided to eliminate excessive moisture, and control drying time of joint compound. Avoid drafts to prevent too rapid drying of joint compounds. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington GYPSUM DRYWALL 'SECTION 9B -1 5.1 Steel Drywall Framing: Studs and Runners - Screw -type complying with ASTM C645. Provide studs of the size indicated with runners of compatible size. Fabricate from electro - galvanized steel with zinc coating. 5.2 Gauge of metal for studs: 5.2.1 25 gauge: Use for all conditions unless otherwise indicated or specified herein. 5.2.2 20 gauge: Use for all partitions over 10' -O" high and for other locations indicated or specified herein. 5.2.3 18 gauge: Use for conditions indicated and for other locations indicated or specified herein. 5.2.4 NOTE; All metal framing members designated "SJ' on the drawings are specified in Section 5F. 5.3 Rigid Furring Channels: Screw type hat - shaped furring channels complying with ASTM C645, fabricate from 25 gauge electro-galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard zinc protective coating. Sizes as indicated on drawings. 5.4 Ceiling Furring Channels shall be 3/4" standard galvanized cold rolled lathing channels. 5.5 Ceiling Runner Channels shall be 1 -1/2" (0.475 lbs. per ft.) standard galvanized channel runners for suspended ceiling work. 5.6 Ceiling Hangers for runners shall be No. 8 gauge steel galvanized annealed wire. 5.7 Ceiling Tie Wire shall be 18 gauge galvanized annealed wire. 5.8 Manufacturer. Same as gypsum wallboard manufacturer, or approved equal. 5.9 Gypsum Drywall Board: 5.9.1 Exposed Drywall Surfaces: Provide gypsum wallboard (48" wide) complying with ASTM C36 with paperface surface suitable to receive decorated finish and with long edges tapered to receive manufacturer's standard joint treatment, unless otherwise shown. 5.9.2 Moisture- Resistant Applications: Where shown on drawings, provide moisture- resistant gypsum backing board and /or face board with core and paper facings treated to resist moisture to comply with ASTM C630. 5.9.3 Fire -Rated Applications: Provide either regular to Type "X" gypsum wallboard, as required to meet the rating for the construction shown. 5.9.4 Exterior Sheathing Applications: Provided exterior gypsum sheathing with water - resistant core compliant to ASTM C79 and compatible with EIFS manufacture's system. 5.9.5 Manufacturers: Provide gypsum wallboard produced by one of the following or approved equal. Georgia Pacific Corporation National Gypsum Company U.S. Gypsum Company 5.10 Drywall Accessory Materials: 5.10.1 Fasteners: Provide 1" and 1-1/2", Type S drywall scows. Comply with ASTM C646. 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* 5.10.2 Drywall Control Joints: For long continuous runs of drywall systems, provide one -piece Joint assembly of non - corrosive metal with continuous unperforated expansion strip for insertion into joint and perforated flanges for attachment to face of wallboard. Material shall be U.S.G. Control Joint #093 or similar if by another manufacturer. Space joints at 30'-0" maximum. 5.10.3 Metal Trim Accessories: Provide trim accessories of the sizes required for the drywall applications shown and specified, fabricated from galvanized steel. At external corners, provide metal comer bead with smooth rigid nose and perforated and knurled metal flanges. U.S.G. Dur -A -Bead or similar if by another manufacturer. 5.10.4 For protection of exposed wallboard edge openings and where drywall abuts or intersects dissimilar construction, provide metal casing bead trim. Beaded nose with exposed flange knurled for joint treatment. Where kerfed jambs are shown, provide trim with special leg designed for insertion into jamb slot. U.S.G. 200A Metal Trim or similar if by another manufacturer. 5.10.5 Joint Tapes: Perforated fiber type complying with ASTM C475, U.G.S. Perf -A -Tape or equal if by another manufacturer. 5.10.6 Joint Compound: Adhesive with or without fillers complying with ASTM C475. Provide in dry powder form or pre -mixed ready for application. 5.10.7 Two - Compound Treatment: Provide compatible joint compounds; one compound for bedding and the other compound for finishing joints. Perf-A-Tape compound system or equal if by another manufacturer. 5.10.8 Water resistant joint compound where required at joints, cut edges, etc. of water resistant backing board, subject to compliance with requirements. 5.11 Miscellaneous Materials: 5.11.1 Wall standard reinforcing strips: 18 gauge x 6" wide horizontal sheet metal reinforcing - 3 rows horizontal and continuous across metal studs, behind all gypsum drywall shown to have wall standards. 5.11.2 Drywall Blanket Insulation: Where shown and where needed to achieve Sound Transmission Class (STC) and where needed for fire - rating indicated, provide semi- rigid, spun mineral fiber blankets without membrane covering, complying with FS HH -1 -521, Type 1, of 3 -1/2" thickness, 2.5 p.c.f. density tested by the drywall manufacturer for the required ratings. Where shown and where needed for Thermal Insulation to achieve minimum R value of 19. 5.11.3 Access Panels shall be Milcor Type M standard access doors and located where shown on Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings. 5.11.4 Drywall Sealant: At sound rated applications, provide non - drying, non - shrinking, non - migrating sealant recommended by the drywall manufacturer. Provide sealant which is paintable wherever exposed to view. PART 3: EXECUTION 6. INSTALLATION OF STEEL DRYWALL FRAMING Manufacturer's Instructions: Unless otherwise shown or specified, Install metal framing and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton GYPSUM DRYWALL *SECTION 9B -Z 6.1 Floor and Ceiling Runner Tracks: Provide Continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align runner tracks accurately to the partition layout at both floor and ceiling. Secure runner tradks as recommended by the stud manufacturer for the floor and ceiling construction involved, except do not exceed 24" o.c. spacing for nail or power - driven fasteners. Provide fasteners at all comers and ends of runner. Use continuous gasket sealers at floor, ceilings, columns and walls of dissimilar materials. 6.2 Height of Partitions: Terminate top of partitions as shown on drawings. 6.3 For gypsum drywall applications, space studs not to exceed 16" o.c. for partitions to 20' -0" high, space studs not to exceed 12" o.c. for partitions over 20' -0" high. 6.4 Provide additional studs to support inside comers at partition intersections and comers, and to support outside comers, terminations of partitions, both side of control joints and adjacent to all openings. 6.5 Use full length studs between runner tracks. 6.6 Friction fit studs to runner tracks by positioning and rotating into place. Provide positive attachment to runner tracks for studs located at partition comers and intersections, and adjacent to openings using 3/8" self- tapping screws on both flanges of studs. 6.7 Provide rough framing at openings using full - length studs adjacent to Jambs and horizontal header and sill tracks. Cut horizontal tracks to length and split flanges and bend webs at ends for flange overlap and stew attachment to jamb studs. Install cut to length intermediate studs between jamb studs at head and sill sections at same spacing as full - length studs. 6.8 Where vertical control Joints are shown at jamb lines, provide additional vertical studs located on opening side of jambs and not Tess than 1/2" from jamb studs. Do not fasten studs to tracks or jamb studs. 6.9 Where solid core wood doors, or double doors, or doors weighing less than 50 lbs., provide 2, 20 -gauge studs at each jamb and one additional stud not more than 6" from jamb studs. At doors weighing more than 50 lbs. substitute 18 -gauge studs. 6.10 Provide 20 -gauge stud horizontal reinforcement for attachment of plumbing fixtures or handrails or grab bars for toilet rooms. 6.11 Drywall Ceiling Framing: 6.11.1 Ceiling Furring Channels shall be not over 12" o.c. Install with metal furring clips. 6.11.2 Ceiling Runner Channels shall be spaced at right angles to the 3/4" channels, shall not be over 4' -0" o.c. 6.11.3 Ceiling Hangers for runners shall be spaced not over 4'4' o.c. in both directions. Hangers shall be securely anchored to floor construction above. Provide additional hanger support for ceiling mounted fixtures. 6.11.4 Ceiling Tie Wire shall be not less than four strands at each bearing. 6.12 Metal Furring Framing: 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* 6.12.1 General: Provide metal furring where shown, as specified, and as required to provide support for drywall. Where size and spacing of furring members is not shown for support, do not exceed the minimum requirements of GA201. 6.12.2 Where control or expansion joints are shown, provide separate supports on each side of joint. Do not bridge joints. 6.13 Wall/Standard Support System: 6.13.1 Install 3 rows of horizontal sheet metal reinforcing strips, behind all gypsum wall board where metal wall standard locations are shown on the drawings. 6.13.2 Locate sheet metal strip reinforcing at centerlines as indicated on drawings. 7. INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM DRYWALL BOARD 7.1 General: 7.1.1 Standards: Comply with the requirements of ANSI A97.1 "Standard Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Wallboard ", except comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations where more stringent. 7.1.2 Provide drywall of the thickness shown. 7.1.3 Form control joints in drywall construction as specified. Allow 1/2" continuous opening between edges of adjacent drywall boards to allow for insertion of control Joint trim accessory. 7.2 Single Layer Applications: 7.2.1 Partition/Walls: Apply gypsum board vertically using floor -to- ceiling length boards with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud space on opposite faces of partition /walls. Use type S drywall screws at 12" o.c. 7.2.2 Ceilings: Apply gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to supports with end joints located over supports. Use maximum practical length boards to minimize end joints. Stagger end joints in alternate courses of boards and locate as far away from center of ceiling as possible. Use Type S drywall screws at 12" o.c. 7.2.3 Wood Supports: Fasten gypsum wallboard with annular ring nails or screws at the Contractor's option. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed nail spacings of 8" o.c. for walls and 7" o.c. for ceilings, or screw spacings of 12" o.c. (wall and ceilings). 7.2.4 Metal Supports: Fasten gypsum wallboard with screws. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for fastening, but do not exceed 12" o.c. spacing. Screws shall be power - driven and screw heads shall provide slight depression below the surface of the board. 7.2.5 Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin -set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install moisture resistant gypsum backing board. Apply with uncut long edge at bottom of work, and space 1/4" above fixture lips, Seal ends, cut -edges and penetrations of each piece with water - resistant adhesive or, where recommended by backing board manufacturer, with water - resistant joint compound. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington GYPSUM DRYWALL *SECTION 9B -3 7.3 Double Layer Application: Mechanically Fastened Layers: Fasten both layers to supports with screws In accordance with manufacturer's instructions; but for base layer, do not exceed 8" o.c. spacing at edges and 12" o.c. spacing at intermediate supports, and for face layer do not exceed 16" o.c. spacing along supports. On walls, apply both layers vertically with vertical joints staggered on opposite side of partitions and offset not less than 12" between layers. 7.4 Sound Rated Applications: Comply with requirements indicated by manufacturer to achieve required ratings, as proven by his certified laboratory test results. For sound -rated construction, comply with the following: 7.4.1 Partitions: Provide continuous beads of sealant at jundure of both faces of runners or plates with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever drywall abuts dissimilar materials. Install sealant prior to installation of drywall boards. 7.4.2 Control Joints: Provide continuous bead of sealant between edges of drywall panels at control joints. Seal prior to installation of surface- applied control joint accessories and locate at proper depth In joint to allow for insertion of expansion strip. 7.4.3 Openings and Cutouts: Seal open spaces between drywal and electric boxes, fixtures, cabinets, ducts and other flush or openings in electric boxes and similar devices built into the drywall work. 7.4.4 Partition Insulation: Install drywall blanket insulation for sound attenuation. Completely fill space between studs to full height of partition /wall. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and other work which penetrates partition/wall. Attach to back face of drywall with adhesive application. 7.5 Thermal Insulation: Friction Fit Thermal Insulation between studs unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 7.6 Drywall Finishing: 7.6.1 Finish exposed drywall surfaces with joints, comers and exposed edges reinforced or trimmed as specified, and with all joints, fastener heads, trim accessory flanges and surface defects filled with joint compound as specified in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for a smooth, flush surface. Form true, level or plumb lines, without joints, fastener heads, flanges of trim accessories or defects visible after application of field - applied decoration. 7.6.2 Use joint tape to reinforce joints formed by tapered edges or butt ends of drywall units and at interior comers and angles. Set tape in joint compound then apply skim coat over tape in one application. 7.6.3 Where open spaces of more than 1/16" width occur between abutting drywall units, (except at control joints), prefili joints with joint compound and allow prefill to dry before application of joint tape. 7.6.4 Reinforce external corners of drywall work with corner beads. 7.6.5 Securely fasten metal corner beads as recommended by the manufacturer. Use fasteners which will be fully concealed by joint compound fill applied over flanges. 7.6.6 Edge Trim: Provide specified type of metal casing bead trim. Install In single unjointed lengths. 05/05/98 -END OF SECTION- , QIVISION'9• ' GYPSUM DRYWALL 7.6.7 Insert control johns strips into open joint and staple flanges to drywall in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 7.6.8'Appli,:.don of Joint Compounds: After mixing, do not use joint compounds if recommended pot -life time has expired. Allow drying time between applications of joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for the relative humidity and temperature levels at the time of application. In no case, allow less than 24 hours drying time between applications of joint compound. Apply not less than 2 separate coats of joint compound over joints, fastener heads and metal flanges. (2 coats are in addition to set and skim coat mentioned above.). Sand between coats as necessary. Final coat and subsequent sanding shall leave gypsum wallboard ready for decorator finish. 7.6.9 Joint compound : treatment is not required above suspended ceilings where partition/walls are shown or specified to extend to structural deck or ceiling above suspended ceiling, unless partition is visible through ceiing grille. 7.7 Completion and Protection of Finished Work: Installer shall advise Contractor of proper procedures for the protection of completed drywall work from damage or deterioration until acceptance of the work. At the completion of this contractots work, all unused materials, tools, scaffolds, and equipment shall be removed from the structure. All work installed by others, which is dirty due to the drywall installation shall be cleaned and restored to its original condition. All drywall construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year as called for in the General Provisions. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinnton DIVISION 9* PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provision of Division specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible Division 1 specifications to each coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review on_ when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1 apply to the work for providing a copy of subcontractor and for 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Fumish all Tabor, materials, tools and equipment required for completing ceramic tile work and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.1.1 Unglazed floor tile and base, glazed wall tile, marble thresholds and floor sealer shall be provided and installed under the work of this section. 2.1.2 8" x 8" ceramic tile, as manufactured by Dal -Tile, or equal, will be fumished by Owner and installed under the work of this section for the "path way" aisles through the store and at check out area. Refer to schedules and drawings. 2.1.3 Exterior ceramic tile feature squares and strips will be furnished by Owner and installed under the work of this section. (KRU) 2.2 Transitional molding where ceramic tile abuts carpet specified in Section 9F. (KRU) 2.3 Exterior ceramic tile specified in 13A (if applicable). (TRU) 3.1 Source of Materials: Provide materials obtained from one source for each type and color of tile, grout, and setting materials. 3.2 ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI Standards referenced with materials, installation products, and installation methods specified herein. 3.3 Tile Council Of America, Inc.: 1988 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, except as expressly modified herein. 4. SUBMITTALS: 4.1 Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit one full size sample for each type of tile and for each color and texture required. 5. PRODUCT HANDLING: 5.1 Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other causes. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washinaton CERAMIC TILE *SECTION 9C -1 6. PROJECT CONDITIONS: 6.1 The installer shall examine the conditions under which ceramic tile is to be installed and advise the Owner's Representative, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper installation of the work. Do no proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of work implies acceptance of surfaces to be tiled. 6.2 The installer shall include flash patching and leveling of the concrete substrate as necessary to properly install flooring materials of this section. The installer shall examine the condition of the substrate during construction to assure such work is performed to its' satisfaction. Where existing slabs are cracked, repair crack with epoxy patching mortar. Variations in floor level shall not exceed 1/8" in 10' -0 ". 6.3 Surfaces to be tiled shall be clean and free from foreign matter, including curing compounds, membranes, oil, grease, wax and dust. Accomplish using mechanical sanding, scraping or chipping. Clean with acid, flushed and neutralized. Smooth, steel troweled surfaces must be roughened to insure a satisfactory bond. 6.4 Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide build -up. 6.5 Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) in tiled areas during installation and for seven (7) days after completion, unless higher temperatures required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. Maintain adequate lighting and ventilation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 7. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS (TOYS "R" US & BABIE$ "R" US) 7.1 Standard grade meeting ANSI A137.2 7.2 Ceramic wall tile, floor tile and base shall be as indicated on drawings and schedules. Glazed tile base shall be 6" High x 8" Wide cove base with straight top and with transitional pieces such as inside and outside comers to match floor tile. 7.3 One foot four inch (1' -4 ") wide ceramic tile horizontal color band at height, color and pattem for toilets as shown on drawings. 7.4 Glazed Wall Tile: All 4 -1/4" x 4 -1/4 ". See Material List on drawings. 7.5 6" high Comer and Cove Base Tile Color: to match floor tile. Provide 90° comers and cove base from "A" Series, maximum lengths. 7.6 Glazed Floor Tile: See Material List on drawings. 7.7 Mortar Mix for Thin Setting Bed Method at drywall partitions: Materials shall be Portland Cement Powdered mortar product of one of the following, manufactured under license to the Tile Council of America, Inc., and all containers shall bear their Hallmark. Mortar shall comply with ANSI A118.1. 7.7.1 S -777 Thin Set Mortar, as manufactured by Summitville Tiles, Inc. or equal. 7.8 Sand: ASTM C144 washed clean and graded; use fine sand for grout; use white sand with white cement. Gradation: 100% passing No. 8 sieve, not more than 5% passing No. 100 sieve. 7.9 Water: Clean, potable free from deleterious substances. 05/05/98 pIVISION 9• CERAMIC TILE *SECTION 9C -2 7.10 Marble saddles shall be white vermont marble, even color and rubbed finish of profile, length and width to match door jamb. See details on drawings. Set snugly between door jambs. Set saddles in thin bed of Portland cement mixture and grout. 7.11 Grout: See Material List on drawings. 7.11.1 Wall Tile Grout: Fungus and Mildew Resistant Grout manufactured by Hydroment, Inc. or equal. 7.11.2 Floor Tile Grout: Sanded Joint Filler manufactured by Hydroment, Inc. or equal. 7.11.3 Color shall be as noted on drawings. Search drawings for accent band colors. 7.12 Marble Thresholds: 7.12.1 Marble saddles to be 5 -3/4" x 1/2" deep in length as shown on drawings. 8. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER$: (KIDS "R" US) 8.1 Fumished by Owner: 8.1.1 Ceramic Floor Tile: 8" x 8" ceramic floor tile, plain finish, as manufactured by Dal -Tile, or equal. 8.1.2 Exterior ceramic tile feature squares and strips. See drawings for size, location and required colors. 8.2 For Ceramic Tile Areas: 8.2.1 Adhesive: Mapes "Kerabond" or "Keralistic" 8.2.2 Grout: Mapei "Keracolor" color to match tile color. 8.3 Semi - Vitreous Glazed Quarry Tile and Glazed Porcelain Paver Floor Tile: Summitville Tiles, Inc. 8.4 Latex Portland Cement Mortar and Grout: Summitville Tiles, inc. 8.5 Tile Cleaners: Hillyard Chemical Co. L & M Surco Mfg. Co., Inc. 8.6 Floor Sealer: Applied Polymers of America, Inc. Anti -Hydro Waterproofing Co. PART 3: EXECUTION 9. INSTALLATION OF TILE 9.1 Concrete or Masonry Base: All wall and floor tile to be installed over a base material consisting of concrete or masonry shall be installed by the thin -set mortar bed method. Thin -set mortar shall be mixed thoroughly and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. Minimum thickness of setting bed shall be 1/8 ". Install with best practice of the trade in accordance with the procedure set forth in the Installation Manual current edition, published by L & M Tile Products, Inc., and Tile Council of America Basic Specifications F 113. 9.2 Ceramic wall tile and base on gypsum board shall be Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton installed per Tile Council of America Specification No. W243 for Dry Set Mortar. 9.3 Grout: Force grout into joints, avoiding air traps or voids, strike or tool joints of tile to depth of cushion. Remove excess grout, check for gaps or air holes. Wall Tile Pattem: 4 1/4" x 4 1/4" repeating random pattem or multi -color tiles. See drawings for elevation. Comer and Base Pattern: Lay one tile width on each surface of inside and outside wall comers and one tile high base all around. 9.4 9.5 9.6 Floor tile Pattem: Lay tile pattem perpendicular /parallel to walUfloor intersection. 10. WORKMANSHIP 10.1 Work: Performed by qualified workmen in a manner conforming to best current practice of the trade. 10.2 Cut and drill where necessary, without marring tile. Grind and carefully joint any cut edges against other work. 10.3 Remove loose mortar, laitance or materials detrimental to bond before applying setting beds. 10.4 Carefully lay out work to ensure straight joints of uniform width. Avoid tile cut less than half size, unless specifically approved by Owner's Representative. 11. PRODUCTS. GENERAL: 11.1 ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types and grades of tile indicated. Fumish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. 11.2 ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI standard referenced with installation products and materials indicated. 11.3 Colors, Textures and Patterns: Provide only tile colors, types and pattems as schedule and shown on drawings. 11.4 Mounting: Factory- mounted tile is required; provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer. 12. TILE PRODUCT: 12.1 Floor Tile: Provide floor tile complying with the following requirements: Size /Color /Pattern: As shown on drawings and schedules. 12.2 Wall Tile: Provide wall tile complying with the following requirements: Size /Color /Pattern: As shown on drawings and schedules. 12.3 Trim Units: Provide tile trim units by the same manufacturer as adjoining flat floor tile and to comply with following requirements: 12.3.1 Size: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining floor tiles. 12.3.2 Shapes: Selected from Summitville, Inc's Trim Shapesfor thin - setting bed Installation: 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* CERAMIC TILE *SECTION 9C -3 13. MARBLE THRESHOLDS: 13.1 Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C503 requirements for exterior use and abrasion resistance for uses subject to heavy foot traffic. 13.1.1 Provide white, bonded marble complying with MIA Group "A" requirements for soundness, uniform in color and finish, fabricated to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces. 14. SETTING MATERIALS: 14.1 Thin -Set Portland Cement Mortar: Where thin -set portland cement mortar applications are indicated, use the following unless otherwise required. 14.1.1 Latex - portland cement mortar. ANSI A118.4 14.1.2 S -777 Thin Set Mortar as manufactured by Summitville Tiles, Inc. 15. GROUTING MATERIALS: 15.1 Latex - Portland Cement Grout: Proprietary preblended compound of portland cement, selected and graded aggregates, color pigments and chemical additives gouged with latex additive to comply with manufacturer's directions. 15.1.1 Use latex additive in grout which is compatible with latex additive in latex - portland cement mortar. 15.1.2 Wall Tile Grout: S -687 Fungus and Mildew - Resistant grout manufactured by Summitville Tiles, Inc. 15.1.3 Floor Tile Grout: S -700 Summit Chrome sanded joint filer manufactured by Summitville Tiles, Inc. 15.1.4 Color for work other than ceramic pathway aisles: White at walls, Gray at floors. 16. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL: 16.1 Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to manufacturer of tile and grout manufacturer for application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation, 112 North Alfred Street, Alexandria, VA 22134, or Ceramic Tile Institute, 700 N. Virgil Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90029. 16.2 Floor Sealer. Provide a 10.0% concentration of polymerized silicone resins in hydrocarbon solvents, complying with FS SS -W -110. 16.3 Control Joint Primer and Sealant: 16.3.1 Primer: Pecora "P -75." 16.3.2 Sealant: Pecora "Dynatrol II" with tinting paste. 16.3.3 Sealant Color: match color of tile. 16.4 Sealant Backer Rod: one of the following: 16.4.1 Pecora #92 Green Rod, Closed Cell. 16.4.2 #91 Denver Open Cell Polyurethane. 17. INSPECTION: 17.1 Examine surfaces to receive tile work and conditions under which tile will be installed. Do not proceed with tile work Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington until surfaces and conditions comply with requirements indicated in referenced tile installation standard. 17.2 Contractor shall lay no more than 36 square feet of ceramic tile "pathway" aisles for inspection and approval by the Owner's Representative for tile layout and grout spacing. No additional ceramic tile shall be laid until the Owner's Representative has approved the sample area. The Owner's Representative's approval does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities specified herein. 18. INSTALLATION. GENERAL: 18.1 Floor must be thoroughly vacuumed clean prior to application. Remove and scrape off all spots, projections and deleterious materials. Flash patch and level out floor a may be necessary for proper installation and as per TCA recommendations. 18.2 ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with applicable parts of ANSI 108 Series of Tile Installation Standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile'. 18.3 TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as applicable to installation conditions shown. 18.4 Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. Use recommended trim units at all intersections and conditions. 18.5 Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. 18.6 Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, walls and trim are same size, along at least two of the longest opposing in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise shown. 18.6.1 For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. 18,7 Grout Tile to comply with referenced installation standards, using grout materials indicated. Mix and install proprietary components to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 18.8 Scribe ceramic tiles in cashier area at aluminum railing insert locations, in order to provide flush installation of escutcheon plates. 19. FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS: 19.1 Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA Installation methods related to types of subfloor construction, and grout types. Thin -set Latex portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5 Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F113 Grout: Latex - portland cement 05/05/98 DIVISION 9' 19.2 Marble Thresholds: Install marble thresholds at locations indicated; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless otherwise indicated. 19.3 Ceramic Floor Tile supplied by Owner. Install tile to comply with requirements of ceramic tile manufacturer, and setting mortar and grout manufacturers directions and specifications. 19.3.1 Joints shall have consistentwidth, adhering strictly to the layout indicated on the drawings, and shall be approximately 1/8" wide as required to achieve the overal width of the "pathway" aisles. 20. WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS (INTERIOR): 20.1 Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with requirements Indicated below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types. 20.1.1 Thin -Set Latex Portland Cement Mortar. ANSI A108.5 Wood or Metal Studs, Interior: TCA W243 Grout: Latex - portland cement 21. WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS (EXTERIOR): 21.1 Install ceramic tile in accordance with ANSI 108.5 specifications and manufacturer's directions, using the notched trowel required for the thickness of tile being installed. Apply mortar to obtain uniform setting bed. Use a sliding and twisting motion to embed units and obtain a 100% mortar contact. Beat in ceramic tile in accordance with accepted practice. Apply grout after mortar has set firmly for 24 hours. Mix and apply grout according to direc- tions on package. Force maximum amount of grout into joints. Tool and compress grout into joints to provide neat and uniform appearance. Clean grout from finished surfaces and cure instalation as required by ANSI A108.10 Specification. 21.2 Back - buttering of all exterior ceramic tile for 100% mortar contact is mandatory. 22. CONTROL JOINTS 22.1 Prime joint surfaces with specified primer. Surfaces must be clean, dry and free of foreign matter. 22.2 Apply specified backer rod allowing for proper depth of sealant bead. 22.3 Thoroughly blend sealant components in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 22.4 After mixing, apply sealant to clean, dry joint surfaces using knife, trowel or caulking gun. Tool immediately after application of sealant. 22.5 Clean misplaced sealant immediately using methyl ethyl ketone, toluene or xylol. 23, CLEANING AND PROTECTION 23.1 Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. Use specified cleaning solution as per manufacturers instructions. 23.2 Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, or otherwise Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington CERAMIC TILE 'SECTION 9C4 defective tile work. 23.3 Remove and replace all cracked, chipped or misaligned tile units. 23.4 Sealer Coat: Upon cleaning of tile floors, apply heavy coat of silicone floor sealer to floor and base areas as indicated below. Ventilate and allow to dry. 23.4.1 Apply sealer coat to tile mg grout joints In Mans and Womens Toilets. 23.4.2 Apply sealer coat to grout joints galy in Owner fumished tile for "path way" aisles indicated on the drawings. 23.5 Protection: Protect installed tile work during construction period to prevent staining, damage and wear. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floors for at least seven (7) days after grouting is completed. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 ( f DIVISION 9* PART 1: GENERAL SUSPENDED ACOU 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review or_ily when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing acoustical tile ceilings, suspension systems and related Items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 The extent of the work is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Types of ceilings specified in this section include acoustical panel ceilings and plastic eggcrate ceiling panels. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 The acoustical tile, suspension systems and related items shall meet or exceed the following standards: 3.1.1 American Society for Testing Materials E84. 3.1.2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Index - Where acoustical ceilings are components of fire rated assemblies, provide complete ceiling systems complying with UL design numbers corresponding with construction assemblies indicated and identified ceiling components with appropriate marking of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 3.1.3 ASTM C 635 - Performance requirements for suspension systems, including dimensional tolerances. 3.1.4 AIMA Bulletin - Acoustic unit performance data as published by Acoustical and Insulation Materials Association. 3.1.5 CISCA Code of Practices - Ceilings and Interior Systems Contractors Association Code of Practice for Acoustical Ceiling System Installations. 3.2 Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than five years of successful experience in installation of acoustical ceilings similar to requirements for this project and which is acceptable to manufacturer of acoustical units, as shown by current written statement from manufacturer. 3.3 Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and Installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other work supported by or penetrating through, ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire- suppression system components and partition system. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington STICAL CEILU G SYSTEMS *SECTION 9P 4. SUBMITTALS 4.1 Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and each suspension system. 4.2 Samples: Set of 6" x 4" square samples for each lay -in unit required, showing full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. 4.3 Set of 12" long samples of each exposed runnerand molding. 5. PRODUCT DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING 5.1 Deliver materials to the project site in original unopened packages bearing manufacturer's name and specific product identification. 5.2 Store materials in a dry place with continuous support to avoid warping units and protect against damage, direct sunlight, or surface contamination or other areas. 5.3 Handle materials carefully to avoid damaging or discoloring. Replace materials which have been damaged or discolored. 5.4 Permit ceiling units to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content prior to installing units. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIE 6.1 Where acoustic ceiling systems are components of floor - ceiling or roof - ceiling or beam assemblies for which a fire resistance rating is shown or scheduled, provide complete ceiling systems complying with the requirements of UL "Fire Resistance Index" (including referenced requirements) for the UL design numbers corresponding with the construction assemblies shown. Provide suspension system access members complying with applicable UL requirements, as indicated. 7. MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS (TRU & BRU) 7.1 Lay -In Acoustic Tile: 24" x 48" x 5/8" tile, fissured design No. 767 with plastic coating as manufactured by Armstrong Cork Company. No substitutions will be allowed unless critical delivery schedules cannot be met. 7.1.1 Where UL time rated designs are indicated provide fissured design "Fire Guard" lay -In panels by the Armstrong Cork Company to match the time rating requirement. 8. MATERIALS AND COMPONENT (KRU) 8.1 Acoustical Ceiling Units, General: 8.1.1 Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturer's standard units of configuration indicated which are prepared for mounting method designated and which comply with FS SS -S -118 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, form, pattern, grade (NRC or NIC's as applicable), Tight reflectance coefficient (LR), edge detail, and joint detail (if any). 8.1.2 Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: No. 7 (mechanically mounted on special metal support), FS SS -S -118; or Type E-400 mounting as per ASTM E 795. 8.1.3 Manufacturer's: Subject to compliance with the requirements, provide products only of the manufacturer's indicated for ACP -1 ceiling. 05/05/98 8.2 Lay -In Panels: 8.2.1 Acoustic Ceiling Panel: (STC =35 to 39, min. NRC =.50 to .65) 8.2.1.1 "Minaboard" fissured - 2' x 4' x 5/8" lay -in panels, non - directional pattern, Armstrong World Industries, Cat. No. 755B. 8.2.1.2 "Omni" fissured - 2' x 4' x 5/8" lay -in panels, non - directional pattern, USG Interiors, Inc. Cat No. 345. 8.2.1.3 "Hytone" Random fissured - "Baroque" 2' x 4' x 5/8" lay -In panels, Celotex Cat No. BET -197. 8.2.2 Louvered Ceiling Panels: White acrylic louver panels with open cells approximately 1/2" x 1/2" x 1/2" deep (eggcrate panels) manufactured by ALP Lighting and Ceiling Products, Co., or approved equal. 8.3 Exposed Grid Suspension Systems (TRU, BRU & KRU). 8..3.1 Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide metal suspension systems'of type, structural classification and finish specified which comply with applicable ASTM C635 requirements. 8.3.2 Manufacturer: Provide ceiling suspension systems by same as acoustical unit manufacturer; one of the following: Donn (USG Interiors, Inc.) Chicago Metallic Corp National Rolling Mills, Inc. /Bundy Eastern Products 8.3.3 Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System complying with ASTM C635. Classify cross tees as main tees. 8.3.4 Main tee shall have 15/16" exposed flange with a rolled cap and 1 -1/2" deep web with double web design. Wall mouldings shall be angle shape. 8.3.5 Finish of exposed surfaces: Matte white. 8.3.6 Attachment Devices: Tested for a carrying capacity of not less than 5 times the design load involved. 8.3.7 Hangers: As recommended by manufacturer to comply with the specified structural classification (ASTM C 635). Wire hangers, if recommended, to be not less than 12 gauge (0.016" diameter), galvanized, soft annealed, mild steel wire. 8.3.8 Primary and Secondary Supporting Members: As further specified and required suspension systems. 8.3.9 Assembly Devices and Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer and as required to comply with ceiling performance requirements. 8.3.10 Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal of types and profiles Indicated or, if not indicated, provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling which fits with type of edge detail and suspension system Indicated. 8.3.11 Provide hold down clips for fire rated ceilings and elsewhere as required by codes or indicated on drawings. 8.3.12 Ceiling Insulation Batts: 3 -1/2" fiberglass 2' x 4' panel batts (if required). PART 3: EXECUTION 9. INSPECTION 9.1 Installer must examine the conditions under which the suspended ceiling work is to be performed and notify the Contractor in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with suspended ceiling work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. 9.2 Installer shall consult other trades and contractors involved prior to start of ceiling work, to determine areas of potential interference. Do not start installation until interferences have been resolved to the satisfaction of the installer. 9.3 Coordinate layout with other work which penetrates or is supported by ceiling suspension system. 9.4 Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less- than -half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. 9.5 Refer to reflected ceiling plan of main sales area. Layout ceiling precisely as shown. Consult with Project Manager or Owner's representative prior to start of work to assure that ceiling grid layout will conform to ceiling plan and owner's intentions. 10. INSTALLATION OF FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIE 10.1 Install ceiling suspension systems which are components of fire rated floor - ceiling or roof - ceiling assemblies, complete, in accordance with the requirements of applicable UL "Fire Resistance Index" design numbers. 11. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CEiLINQ SUSPENSION SYSTEM$ 11.1 Install suspension systems which are part of non -fire rated assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; the requirements of Article 2 "Installation of Components" of ASTM C 636 "Standard Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panels"; and further specified. 11.2 Secure to structural and intermediate framing members by attaching to metal clips designed for the type of member involved, or where possible, by looping and wire -tying directly to members. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck. 11.3 Space hangers to fall not more than 6" from ends and not more than 4' o.c., between ends of primary suspension members, and as required to support other work resting in or on ceiling. Provide at least two hangers at diagonally opposite corners of Tight fixtures as required to prevent deflection of suspension system members In excess of ASTM C 635 requirements. Do not attach hangers to duds, pipes or other similar work which occurs above ceilings; provide additional suspended ceiling members at such locations. 11.4 Install continuous metal moldings for support of runners and units where suspended ceilings meet walls, partitions and other vertical elements in order to conceal edges of acoustical units. Secure moldings to building construction by fastening through holes In web at intervals of not over 16" o.c. and not more than 3" from ends, leveling ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8" In 12' -0 ". Miter cut Inside and outside corners. DIVISION 9• SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS "$ ECTION 9D -3 12. JNSTALLATION OF EXPOSED GRID SYSTEMS 12.1. Main Runners: Support directly from hangers; space as required to support ceiling units and other work resting in, or on, ceilings and as required to comply with ceiling performance requirements. Provide unjointed main runners of manufacturer's maximum standard length wherever possible; join abutting sections with manufacturer's standard splice connection; do not pop rivet flanges of abutting runners. 12.2 Cross Runners: Support by interlocking ends of cross runners with main runners (or cross runners classified as main runners) to form 90 degree angle between intersecting runners. Space as required to support each panel unit used in the work 12.3 Moldings: Install with exposed leg in same plane as bottom flange of exposed runners, unless otherwise shown or specified. 13. INSTALLATION OF ACQUSTICAL PANELS 13.1; Install acoustical panels only after the building is enclosed and moisture is at a low level compatible with manufacturer's requirements. Workmen shall not fingerprint panels with dirty hands or gloves. Scribe and cut panels to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations. 13.2 Install batt insulation above ceiling panels where indicated on drawings. Do not install on Tight fixture. 14. REPLACEMENTS 14.1 Contractor to provide one carton of each type of ceiling tile to be used for replacement of any tiles damaged or discolored in the future. Tile shall be packaged with protective covering for storage and identified . with appropriate labels. 15. ADJUST AND CL • N 15.1 Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members; campy with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington DIVISION 9* RESILIENT FLOORING *SECTION 9E -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH DOMCO FOR FURNISHING VINYL COMPOSITION TILE. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE ORDERED. FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION. CALL DOMCO AT 206 - 766 -0234 FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review Qnly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for completing the resilient flooring work, including Installation of owner - furnished vinyl composition floor tile, and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 Manufacturers of resilient flooring and selection of resilient flooring materials including seamless flooring, resilient base, stair coverings, and metal and resilient edge strips, etc., are indicated on the drawings. 2.2.1 Related items including adhesives, are specified herein. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 Manufacturer: Wherever possible, provide required resilient flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. 4. SUBMITTALS: 4.1 Samples: Provide full -size tile units, and 2 -1 /2" long sections of resilient flooring accessories. 4.2 Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring and accessory required. 5. JOB CONDITIONS: 5.1 Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. (18 degrees C.) in spaces to receive resilient flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours atter installation. Store resilient flooring materials In spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. (13 degrees C) in areas where work is completed. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. MATERIALS (Refer to drawings for specific finishes.) 6.1 Furnished by Owner: 6.1.1 Vinyl Composition Tile as manufactured by Domco 12" x 12" x 1/8" gauge, Special. 6.2 Fumished by Owner. 6.2.1 Wall Base: 4" high x .080" gauge. Provide top -set cove or straight base by manufacturer and of color as indicated on the drawings. 6.3 Furnish by Owner: 6.3.1 Floor icons, as shown on vinyl interior finish sheet (TRU Only). 6.4 Fumished by Contractor: 6.4.1 Adhesives (Cements): Water resistant, stabilized type as recommended by manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. 6.4.1.1 Per Manufacturer's requirements and specifications. 6.4.2 Adhesives for seamless flooring, stair coverings, resilient base, etc. as recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be covered. 6.4.3 Concrete Slab Primer: Non - staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. 6.4.4 Vinyl or Rubber Edge Strips: Domco 2" strip, or approved equal. PART 3: EXECUTION 7. JNSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION 7.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that 8,11 surfaces receiving subsequent finish are prepared in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Testing and approval of the flooring substrate is the responsibility of the Contractor, including bonding and moisture tests. 7.2 Contractor shall advise Owner's Representative immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 8. PREPARATION 8.1 Prior to laying flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered. 8.2 Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 8.3 Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturers. 9. INSTALLATION 9.1 Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer. 05/05/98 ••; . • . 9.2 Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edging. Scribe as necessary around obstructions and to produce neat joints, laid tight, even, and straight. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closets and similar openings. 9.3 In areas where resilient tile floor meets a higher material, install latex type underlayment approved by the the manufacturer with a slope not more than 1/8" per foot. Feather underlayment neatly on a straight line where the slope meets the level floor. 9.4 Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 9.5 Tile Floors: 9.5.1 Lay tile from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that tile at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. Adjust center marks so the border tile widths are no less than 6" wide. Lay tile square to room axis, unless.otherwise shown. 9.5.2 Match tiles for color and pattem by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged is so numbered. Cut tile neatly to and around all fixtures. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tile are not acceptable. All tile to be by same manufacturer from same run for entire store. Lay all in alternating pattern. 9.5.3 Roll tile with 75-100 lb sectional floor roller to assure adhesion. 9.5.4 Adhere tile flooring to substrates using full spread of adhesive applied in compliance with flooring manufacturer's directions. 9.5.5 Where indicated, scribe tiles at aluminum railing insert locations in order to provide flush installation of escutcheon plates. 9.6 Accessories: 9.6.1 Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in as long lengths as practicable, with preformed interior and exterior comers or fabricate from base materials with mitered or coped inside comers. Tightly bond base to backing throughout the length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 9.6.2 Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to flooring and 'secure with adhesive. Install edging strips at all edges of flooring, unless otherwise shown, which would otherwise be exposed. 9.6.3 Place metal edge strips tightly butted to flooring and secure. Install edging strips at all unprotected edges of flooring, unless otherwise shown. 9.6.4 On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with adhesive filler material. Babies "R" l.)s - Tukwila. Washington 10. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 10.1 Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring from damage by covering. 10.2 Allow no foot traffic or other use for at least 24 hours after installation. 10.3 Provide adequate protection for tile in areas where traffic occurs and maintain this protection until all work in building is completed. 10.4 Floors shall be cleaned and waxed in compliance with manufacturer's requirements immediately prior to final inspection of work by the Owner. 10.4.1 Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work, thoroughly clean floors and accessories. 10.4.2 Strip flooring and apply wax and buff with type of wax, number of coats and buffing procedures in compliance with floor manufacturers instructions and requirements. 11. REPLACEMENT 11.1 Contractor to provide two (2) full cartons of each type, size and color of floor tile to be used throughout the facility. This will serve as a replacement of any tiles damaged or discolored in the future. 12. GUARANTEE 12.1 All guarantees and warranties are to remain in effect and will not be voided if vapor barrier is used below slab. -END OF SECTION- 05/05/98 j DIVISION 9* PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENT 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for reviewg_nil when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for completing the carpeting work in the areas designated, and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 Sales Floor Carpeting will be furnished by Owner and installed under the work of this section. Refer to Schedules and Drawings. 2.3 The extent of the work is shown on the drawings and specified herein and is defined to include carpet and accessories. Carpet installer must follow seaming diagram provided by Owner. 2.4 Carpeting shall be installed by glue -down method. 2.5 Johnsonite Transitional Moulding will be furnished by Contractor and installed, where carpet abuts ceramic tile or resilient tile "pathway" aisles, under the work of this section. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 Installer shall be a firm with not less than 5 years of carpeting experience, similar to work of this section. 3.2 The carpet installer shall comply with installation requirements and recommendations of the manufacturer. 3.3 General Standard: "Carpet Specifier's Handbook" by The Carpet and Rug Institute; for definitions of terminology not otherwise defined herein, and for general recommendations and information. 4. SUBMITTALS: 4.1 Adhesive: Submit data sheet for manufacturers approved adhesive. 5. DELIVERY AND STORAGE: 5.1 Owner will deliver carpet, and Mercer transitional moulding to the job site. Installer shall accept and unload carpet and moulding from truck, and store inside, protected from weather, moisture and soiling. PART 2: PRODUCTS j tabies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington CARPETING *SECTION 9F -1 6. MATERIAL; (furnished by Owner) 6.1 Carpet to be furnished by Owner for installation will be as follows (for standard only, actual product may vary): KIDS "R" US & BABIES "R" US - Ameritex J & J 2200 - Construction Tufted level loop -Pile Yam Type - Allied Anso IV HP continuous filament nylon - Primary Backing: Polybac (may vary) - Secondary Backing: Jute Or "Uni -lok" back -Total weight (maximum): 65.00 ounces /yd. -Ply: 3 ply -Flame Rating: Class B - Width: 12 feet KIDS "R" US -Sales Floor except for Racetrack and Front Area. EWES "R" US - Center of Raceway & Baby Registry Bentley Mills Chromatech color to be determined - Mother's Room Milliken, textured Vision II 18" x 18" Modular Pattem *8503, Color: *4 Turleish Treasure. 6.2 Johnsonite Adapter CCA -48, color: gray. 7. CARPET ACCESSORIES ( fumished by Contractor) 7.1 Installation Adhesive: Water - resistant type as recommended by carpet manufacturer, and which complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet. 7.2 Seaming Cement: Hot -melt seaming adhesive or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer, for taping seams and buttering cut edges at backing to form secure seams and prevent pile Toss at seams. 7.3 Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet, and selected by Installer to meet project circumstance and requirements. 7.4 Leveling Compound: Latex type as recommended by carpet manufacturer. 8. PRE - INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT$ 8.1 Installer must examine substrates for moisture content and other conditions under which carpeting is to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 8.2 Clear away debris and scrape up cementitlous deposits from surfaces to receive carpeting; vacuum clean immediately before installation. Check concrete surfaces to ensure no "dusting" through installed carpet; apply sealer where required to prevent dusting. 8.3 Level -out minor imperfections In concrete slab with leveling compound as directed and necessary. 8.4 Sequence carpeting with other work so as to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period. 9. INSTALLATION 9.1 General: 9.1.1 Follow seaming diagram provided by Owner. Maintain uniformity of direction and lay of pile. 05/05/98 DIVISION 9• 9.1.2 Extend carpet under open - bottomed obstrudions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and Into alcoves and closets of each space. 9.1.3 Provide cut -outs where required, and bind cut edges properly where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges. 9.2 Glue -Down Carpet Installation 9.2.1 Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and butter cuts with seaming cement 9.2.2 Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturers instructions. • Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet. 10. CLEANING AND PROTECTION 10.1 Remove debris, sorting pieces to be saved from scraps to be disposed of. 10.2 Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face- beater element. Remove spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. 10.3 Advise contractor of protection methods and materials needed to ensure that carpeting will be without deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. 10.4 Maintenance materials: Deliver usable scraps of carpet to Owners designated storage space, properly packaged (paper wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less than 9' -0" length, and pieces of more than 3 sq. ft. area and more than 8" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces as "construction waste. END OF SECTION - CARPETING *SECTION 9F -2 C DIVISION 9* PART 1: GENERAL 1. BELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review 4J!Y when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment required for completing vinyl wall covering work and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 Owner has entered into a National Account Agreement with Columbus Wallcovering Company, Rockville Centre, New York for the provision of the specified vinyl wallcovering and compatible premixed vinyl adhesive. Contractor shall use the order form attached to this section to place his vinyl wall- covering and adhesive order. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 Installer. A firm specializing in wall covering work and with not less than five years of experience in installing similar wall coverings. 4. DELIVERY AND STORAGE' 4.1 Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer and as herein specified. 4.2 Store materials in original undamaged packages or containers. Do not store rolled goods in upright position. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F. (4 degrees C). 5. JOB CONDITIONS: 5.1 Maintain constant minimum temperature of 60 degrees F. (16 degrees C.) at areas of installation for at least 72 hours before and 48 hours after application of materials. 5.2 Illuminate areas of installation using building's permanent lighting system; temporary lighting alone will not be acceptable. VINYL WALL COVERING *SECTION 9G -1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. VINYL WALL COVERING 6.1 Vinyl wallcovering shall be "Guard Vinyl Wallcovering Stipple Type II 24 oz. Osnaburg - 54" wide" as manufactured by Columbus Coated Fabrics, Borden Inc. See Materials List on drawings. 6.2 Adhesive shall be "FC -100 Premixed Vinyl Adhesive as manufactured by Borden, Inc. PART 3: EXECUTION 7. PREPARATION 7.1 Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing from packagirg in area of installation not less than 24 hours before application. 7.2 All surfaces to receive vinyl wallcovering shall be structurally sound, smooth, clean and dry. Moisture content of walls shall not exceed five (5) percent. The installer shall examine the conditions under which vinyl wallcovering is to be installed and advise the Owner's Representative, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper installation of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of work implies acceptance of surfaces to receive vinyl wallcovering. 7.3 Prepare substrates in accordance with wall covering manufacturer's recommendations for type of substrate. 7.3.1 New drywall shall receive one (1) coat of a white pigmented alkyd or latex primer. 7.3.2 Previously painted surfaces shall be sanded and washed with trisodium phosphate and then rinsed with clean water. 7.3.3 For other surfaces, contact the wallcovering representative. 8. INSTALLATION: 8.1 Brush or roll adhesive on material using approximately one (1) gallon for every 10 -12 linear yards. Reverse every other strip. Hang on wall using butt procedures. Use broad knife to remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. Remove excess adhesive adjacent surfaces immediately using manufacturer's recommended procedures. 8.2 Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from wall covering installation upon completion of work, and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition. - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washinaton 05/05/98 VINYL WALL"COVERING Please fill in the blanks and forward the following order form to Columbus Wallcovering Company (CWC).1.800.521 -5250 so that your walbovering material request can be processed. Note that the material being ordered is to be sent to your company olrce and not the job site. Account* 20223026 Ms. Susan Leff Columbus Wallcovering Company 450 Seventh Avenue, Suite 3301 New York, NY 10123 Dear Susan: Please forward ninety (90) yards of "Guard Vinyl" VVallcovering CWCNY0510 Type it 24 oz. Osnaburg - 54" wide and one 5- gallon pail of pre -mixed vinyl adhesive E234HD to: Name Address City State Zip Code Attn: RE: PROPOSED I understand that the material will be forwarded to my office by UPS C.O.D. The cost of the material will be three hundred, thirty -two dollars ($332.00) plus tax and shipping. Should there be a problem in delivering the merchandise to my office you may contact me at ;; cc: Toys "R" Us C.P.M. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington DIVISION 9* PAINTING *SECTION 9H -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH PRATT & LAMBERT FOR THE SUPPLY OF PRATT & LAMBERT PAINTS. FOR QUOTATIONS AND /OR INFORMATION CONTACT THE PRATT & LAMBERT OFFICE 1- 800 -281 -7728 (1- 800 - BUY - PRATT). PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review Qnly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing surface preparation, painting, finishing and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 2.3 Paint exposed surfaces of unfinished primed surfaces throughout the interior whether or not colors are designated in "schedules ", except where natural finish or material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Project Manager will select these from colors available for materials systems specified. 2.4 Mask off skylights, nameplates, equipment identifications and similar items. Cover sprinkler heads with plastic bags and protect moving parts during painting. Remove all protective coverings at the completion of painting activity. 2.5 The Contractor is responsible for the application of the paint or finishing material. If any surface to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding and puttying operations, the Contractor will Immediately notify the Contractor and Owner's Representative in writing; or assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory finish resulting. 2.6 The Contractor shall examine all documents that form this contract, and the alternates that affect the work under this Section. Examine the specifications under other divisions and thoroughly familiarize himself with all provisions regarding their painting. 2.7 Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85% unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer. When surface temperature is below 50 degrees F. do not apply paints, varnishes, and special Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington coatings, unless otherwise specified. Stop exterior work sufficiently early to permit film to set up before condensation, frost and moisture, caused by night temperature drops, occur. Do not begin exterior painting until frost or condensation evaporates and surface is moisture free. Do not vamish when temperature is below 70 degrees F. Comply with manufacturer's written requirements. Painting may continue in inclement weather only if surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits set by manufacturer. 2.8 Exterior surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.8.1 Hollow metal doors /frames. 2.8.2 Miscellaneous metals /structural steel. 2.8.3 Mechanical equipment screen roof supports. 2.8.4 Aluminum, not prefinished. 2.8.5 Galvanized metal. 2.8.6 Masonry. 2.8.7 Stucco, concrete. 2.8.8 Exterior insulation and finish system. 2.8.9 Exposed gas lines above roof. 2.8.10 Other surfaces indicated to be painted /finished. 2.9 Interior surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.9.1 Hollow metal doors /frames. 2.9.2 Miscellaneous Metals /Structural Steel. 2.9.3 Masonry 2.9.4 Wood, including millwork (painted). 2.9.5 Wood, including millwork (stained). 2.9.6 Graphics (various surfaces). 2.9.7 Sealing of concrete floors not receiving floor coverings (including prestriping where required). 2.9.8 Touching up of scuffs, abrasions, marred areas and other imperfection:; of prefinished metal, wood or other surfaces which are required to be painted /finished. 2.9.9 Spray paint the exposed underside of roof deck and /or Pre - Sales Mezzanine and all structural and miscellaneous steel, steel joists and metal deck(s), etc, and all of the items and related equipment shown or scheduled on the drawings, unless specifically noted or scheduled to be unfinished. Touch -up surfaces which are damaged by other trades to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. 2.9.10 Paint interior surfaces of ducts where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non specular black paint. 2.10 Work specified under other Sections: 2.10.1 Prime coat painting and undercoats of paint, factory finish painting specified In other Sections of the specifications. 05/05/98 DIVISION 9• 2.10.2 Field touch -up of miscellaneous metals. 2.10.3 Field touch up of structural steel. 2.11 items not to be painted: Unless otherwise noted, prefinished, prefabricated, or shop fabricated components or equipment, concealed surfaces, finish anodized aluminum, overhead doors, root hatches, operating parts, labels, identification plates, performance ratings, etc. 3. PELiVERY AND STORAGE 3.1 The contractor shall store all apparatus and materials used on the job in a single place designated by the Contractor, or Owner's Representative. Such storage shall be kept clean and Contractor shall be liable for damage to surrounding areas. All soiled or used rags, waste and trash must be removed from the building every night and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire. 3.2 Deliver all materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages with containers bearing all manufacturer's data, Instructions, spec. numbers, etc. Materials not displaying proper manufacturer's guarantee will not be accepted. 4. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 4.1 The contractor shall study the contract, drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this Section as to insure its completeness. 4.2 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that g4,) surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. Contractor shall advise Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 4.3 The contractor shall cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections so as not to delay job progress. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS 5.1 Painting and finishing products for use in the work shall be the standard best or top brands produced for each particular kind of material required herein, by the following manufacturers with no substitutions, unless otherwise noted: 5.1.1 Pratt & Lambert (P & L) - General interior and exterior paint. 5.1.1.1 Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Glidden, Sherwin - Williams, Benjamin Moore, equivalent products to those Pratt & Lambert Products specified in paragraph 7 PAINTING SCHEDULE below. 5.1.2 EPMAR - Interior clear epoxy floor sealer. Contad EPMAR Corp., 13210 Barton Circle, Santa Fe Springs, California 90670 (310) 946 -8781. 5.1,3 Series 55 Tneme -crete by Tnemec Company, Inc. parapet wall coating. 5.1.4 Devoe Coatings - TRU -Glaze 4030 Waterborne Epoxy Primer and Devthane (Toys "R" Us Blue) 379 Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel as manufactured by iCI Devoe Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington PAWING TING •SECTION 9H -2 Coatings, a division of ICI Paints World Group, 4000 Dupont Circle, Louisville, Kentucky 40207 Tel: (502) 897- 9861, Fax: (502) 893 -1444, Mr. James R. DeChant. 5.2 Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 5.3 Colors shall be pure non- fading pigments, finely ground in linseed oil or japan, as required. Colors used on plaster, masonry and concrete shall be limeproof. Color schedule shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to application of products. 5.4 Shellac shall be pure, white or orange gum, cut in pure denatured alcohol, using five pounds of gum to each gallon. Orange shellac: Used for painting over knots sap, resinous woods. 5.5 Spalding compound shall be finely ground, grit free; when dry, shall set without shrinkage to smooth, hard, white surface, and sand easily to take any finish. 5.6 Patching plaster shall be white non - shrinking, containing no lime and uniform in set and quality. 5.7 Wood filler shall be paste type, match any stain color required. Do not mix filler with stain. 5.8 Raw linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D234. 5.9 Boiled linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D260. 5.10 Turpentine shall be gum spirits of turpentine conforming to ASTM D13. 5.11 Putty shall conform to ASTM D317, Class B white lead whiting putty. 5.12 All finishes to be Class "C" flame spread or matter. 5.13 Painting subcontractor shall provide and leave at job one (1) gallon of each color. (All colors to be In fresh, unopened cans.) PART 3: EXECUTION 6. PfEPARATION OF SURFACE$ 6.1 Prior to installation of work, the contractor shall examine surfaces which are to receive painting and finishing coats, and report conditions of surfaces which are not properly prepared to receive work of this section. Start of work shall imply that work can be performed as speed herein. 6.2 Spaces shall be broom clean and surfaces dust -free before painting is started. Before painting or finishing, plaster, greases and other extraneous matter which would affect the finished work shall be removed. 6.3 Areas and /or spaces where painting and /or finishing work is being performed shall be maintained above 50 degrees F. during application and drying. 6.4 To repairing or spackling of surface necessary for proper application of paint. 6.5 Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned of oil, grease, dirt, rust, sandpapered smooth and otherwise properly prepared. 6.6 Concrete, Stucco, Masonry: 05/0Jj9,$ I.� RETAKE 0 PREVIOUS D 1 CUMENT DIVISION 9' PAINTING `SECTION 9H -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH PRATT & LAMBERT FOR THE SUPPLY OF PRATT & LAMBERT PAINTS. FOR QUOTATIONS AND /OR INFORMATION CONTACT THE PRATT & LAMBERT OFFICE 1- 800- 281 -7728 (1- 800 - BUY - PRATT). PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gnly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 AU references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing surface preparation, painting, finishing and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 2.3 Paint exposed surfaces of unfinished primed surfaces throughout the interior whether or not colors are designated in "schedules ", except where natural finish or material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas. If color or finish is not designated, Project Manager will select these from colors available for materials systems specified. 2.4 Mask off skylights, nameplates, equipment identifications and similar items. Cover sprinkler heads with plastic bags and protect moving parts during painting. Remove all protective coverings at the completion of painting activity. 2.5 The Contractor is responsible for the application of the paint or finishing material. If any surface to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding and puttying operations, the Contractor will immediately notify the Contractor and Owner's Representative In writing; or assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory finish resulting. 2.6 The Contractor shall examine all documents that form this contract, and the alternates that affect the work under this Section. Examine the specifications under other divisions and thoroughly familiarize himself with all provisions regarding their painting. 2.7 Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85% unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer. When surface temperature Is below 50 degrees F. do not apply paints, varnishes, and special Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington coatings, unless otherwise specified. Stop exterior work sufficiently early to permit film to set up before condensation, frost and moisture, caused by night temperature drops, occur. Do not begin exterior painting until frost or condensation evaporates and surface is moisture free. Do not vamish when temperature is below 70 degrees F. Comply with manufacturer's written requirements. Painting may continue in inclement weather only if surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits set by manufacturer. 2.8 Exterior surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.8.1 Hollow metal doors /frames. 2.8,2 Miscellaneous metals /structural steel. 2.8.3 Mechanical equipment screen roof supports. 2.8.4 Aluminum, not prefinished. 2.8.5 Galvanized metal. 2.8.6 Masonry. 2.8.7 Stucco, concrete. 2.8.8 Exterior insulation and finish system. 2.8.9 Exposed gas lines above roof. 2.8.10 Other surfaces indicated to be painted /finished. 2.9 Interior surfaces to be painted or finished include, but are not limited to the following: (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.9.1 Hollow metal doors /frames. 2.9.2 Miscellaneous Metals /Structural Steel. 2.9.3 Masonry 2.9.4 Wood, including millwork (painted). 2.9.5 Wood, including millwork (stained). 2.9.6 Graphics (various surfaces). 2.9.7 Sealing of concrete floors not receiving floor coverings (including prestriping where required). 2.9.8 Touching up of scuffs, abrasions, marred areas and other imperfections of prefinished metal, wood or other surfaces which are required to be painted /finished. 2.9.9 Spray paint the exposed underside of roof deck and/or Pre - Sales Mezzanine and all structural and miscellaneous steel, steel joists and metal deck(s), etc. and all of the items and related equipment shown or scheduled on the drawings, unless specifically noted or scheduled to be unfinished. Touch -up surfaces which are damaged by other trades to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. 2.9.10 Paint interior surfaces of ducts where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non specular black paint. 2.10 Work specified under other Sections: 2.10.1 Prime coat painting and undercoats of paint, factory finish painting specified in other Sections of the specifications, 05/05/98 • k � � 1 • k - 1 2.10.2 Field touch -up of miscellaneous metals. 2.10.3 Field touch up of structural steel. 2.11 Items not to be painted: Unless otherwise noted, prefinished, prefabricated, or shop fabricated components or equipment, concealed surfaces, finish anodized aluminum, overhead doors, roof hatches, operating parts, labels, identification plates, performance ratings, etc. 3. DELIVERY AND STOR! Ge 3.1 The contractor shall store all apparatus and materials used on the job in a single place designated by the Contractor, or Owner's Representative. Such storage shall be kept clean and Contractor shall be liable for damage to surrounding areas. All soiled or used rags, waste and trash must be removed from the building every night and every precaution taken to avoid the danger of fire. 3.2 Deliver all materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages with containers bearing all manufacturer's data, instructions, spec. numbers, etc. Materials not displaying proper manufacturer's guarantee will not be accepted. 4. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 4.1 The contractor shall study the contract, drawings and specifications with regard to the work as shown and required under this Section as to insure its completeness. 4.2 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that:. surfaces receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. Contractor shall advise Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 4.3 The contractor shall cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of other Sections so as not to delay job progress. PART 2: PRODUCTS 5. MATERIALS 5.1 Painting and finishing products for use In the work shall be the standard best or top brands produced for each particular kind of material required herein, by the following manufacturers with no substitutions unless otherwise noted: 5.1.1 Pratt & Lambert (P & L) - General interior and exterior paint. 5.1.1.1 Other Acceptable Manufacturers: Glidden, Sherwin - Williams, Benjamin Moore, equivalent products to those Pratt & Lambert Products specified in paagraph 7 PAINTING SCHEDULE below. 5.1.2 EPMAR - Interior clear epoxy floor sealer. Contact EPMAR Corp., 13210 Barton Circle, Santa Fe Springs, Califomia 90670 (310) 946 -8781. 5.1.3 Series 55 Tneme -crete by Tnemec Company, Inc. parapet wall coating. 5.1.4 Devoe Coatings - TRU -Glaze 4030 Waterborne Epoxy Primer and Devthane (Toys "R" Us Blue) 379 Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel as manufactured by ICI Devoe )3abies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington Coatings, a division of ICI Paints World Group, 4000 Dupont Circle, Louisville, Kentucky 40207 Tel: (502) 897- 9861, Fax: (502) 893 -1444, Mr. James R. DeChant. 5.2 Provide undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 5.3 Colors shall be pure non - fading pigments, finely ground in linseed oil or japan, as required. Colors used on plaster, masonry and concrete shall be Iimeproof. Color schedule shall be approved by the Owner's Representative prior to application of products. 5.4 Shellac shall be pure, white or orange gum, cut in pure denatured alcohol, using five pounds of gum to each gallon. Orange shellac: Used for painting over knots sap, resinous woods. 5.5 Spackling compound shall be finely ground, grit free; when dry, shall set without shrinkage to smooth, hard, white surface, and sand easily to take any finish. 5.6 Patching plaster shall be white non - shrinking, containing no lime and uniform in set and quality. 5.7 Wood filler shall be paste type, match any stain color required. Do not mix filler with stain. 5.8 Raw linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D234. 5.9 Boiled linseed oil shall conform to ASTM D260. 5.10 Turpentine shall be gum spirits of turpentine conforming to ASTM D13. 5.11 Putty shall conform to ASTM D317, Class B white lead whiting putty. 5.12 All finishes to be Class "C" flame spread or matter. 5.13 Painting subcontractor shall provide and leave at job one (1) gallon of each color. (All colors to be in fresh, unopened cans.) PART 3: EXECUTION 6. PREPARATION OF SURFACE 6.1 Prior to installation of work, the contractor shall examine surfaces which are to receive painting and finishing coats, and report conditions of surfaces which are not properly prepared to receive work of this section. Start of work shall imply that work can be performed as specified herein. 6.2 Spaces shall be broom clean and surfaces dust -free before painting is started. Before painting or finishing, plaster, greases and other extraneous matter which would affect the finished work shall be removed. 6.3 Areas and /or spaces where painting and/or finishing work is being performed shall be maintained above 50 degrees F. during application and drying. 6.4 To repairing or spackling of surface necessary for proper application of paint. 64 Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry and cleaned of oil, grease, dirt, rust, sandpapered smooth and otherwise property prepared. 6.6 Concrete, Stucco, Masonry: 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* PAINTING *SECTION 9H -3 6.6.1 Thoroughly clean concrete, stucco, E.I.F.S., masonry and other absorptive surfaces to be painted of grit, efflorescence, grease, dirt and release agents which will adversely affect the adhesion or appearance of the paint finish. 6.6.2 Masonry construction shall be cured for 30 days, and concrete construction cured for 60 days before painting. Check alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted. If surfaces require corrective measures, Contractor to correct condition of painted surface. 6.7 Interior Concrete Floors scheduled to receive epoxy sealer: 6.7.1 New Concrete Floors: Floors shall be cured minimum of 28 days and shall be etched or sandblasted to remove laitence as recommended by sealer manufacturer. If curing compounds have been used on floors, remove these compounds before applying epoxy sealer. 6.7.2 Old Concrete Floors (Remodeling): Remove old coatings such as grease, oil, dirt, paint, etc. By grinding and cutting, sandblasting ( "Cut - Blast "), mechanical scarification or by chemical stripping. Clean concrete with Trisodium Phosphate solution and degrease if required as recommended by sealer manufacturer. Acid etch, rinse, neutralize and flush clean, removing all water and neutralizing solution. Allow to dry before applying epoxy sealer. 6.8 Gypsum Drywall: 6.8.1 Scratches, cracks, holes, indentations, gouges, and similar defects in surface shall be properly cut out and filled with spackling compound, joint compound or other patching material as may be required and brought to a smooth flush surface. Patched portions shall be given a coat of primer - sealer in addition to all other specified coats. 6.8.2 Safe moisture level for painting shall be determined by the use of a moisture meter. Patched areas, "hot" or suction spots shall be spot primed as per manufacturer's label directions. 6.9 Wood 6.9.1 Woodwork to be painted or finished shall be sandpapered to remove all roughness, loose edges, slivers, or splinters, and then brushed to remove dust, grease or dirt and shall be washed off with naptha or other suitable cleaner. Knots and sappy streaks or spots shall be given two (2) thin coats of shellac, lightly sandpapered when dry. 6.9.2 AU cracks, nail holes and surface defects In woodwork shat be filled with putty or plastic wood after the priming coat, filler, or shellac has been applied, Putty or plastic wood filler shall be brought up flush with the surface and lightly sandpapered smooth. 6.9.3 Open grained woodwork to be finished shall be first filled thoroughly with paste filler. Filler shall be of such consistency as to be applied with a short bristle brush. Filler shall be well rubbed into the grain and when set, the rubbing shall continue across the grain until a hard, non - absorbent surface is obtained. 6.9.4 Top and bottom edges of wood doors to be primed the same as face of doors, after fitting. 6.10 Metals: 6.10.1 Metal surfaces shall be washed with mineral spirits to remove dirt or grease before applying materials. Where rust or scale is present, it shall be wire brushed or Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washingto sandpapered clean before painting. Shop coat of paint that becomes marred shall be cleaned and touched up with the primer specified. 6.10.2 Galvanized metal surfaces shall be thoroughly wiped down so that surfaces are free of dirt, grease or foreign matter, as recommended by approved paint manufacturer. 6.10.3 Shop or prime coated metal surfaces shall be cleaned of similar foreign matter as above, and shall have all bare spots or rust spots removed by wire brushing or sanding and be touched up or reprimed as required. 6.10.4 Dents, cracks, hollow places, open joints and other irregularities in metal work to be painted shall be filled with an approved metal filler suitable for the purpose which, after setting, shall be sanded to a smooth, hard surface. 6.11 Mechanical and Electrical Items: 6.11.1 Pipe and duct coverings, shall be given a heavy coat of glue size before other paint applications, except when sized under the work of other sections. There shall be added to the glue size, and to each coat of paint applied thereafter, a sufficient amount of a fungicidal agent to render the fabric mildew -proof. The fungicidal agent shall be a type which will not adversely affect the color, texture, or durability of the paint. 6.11.2 Exposed panel boxes, electric cabinets, piping, ducts, and other mechanical and electrical work and equipment In finished spaces, shall be given one (1) prime coat and then shall be finished to match walls and ceilings on which or near which they are located. 6.11.3 Gas lines above roof shall be painted. Color as indicated or scheduled. 7. PAINTING SCHEDULE 7.1 Exterior Surfaces: 7.1.1 Ferrous Metal: All structural steel, miscellaneous iron, hollow metal doors and frames, roof structures, exposed roof piping: 1 coat P & L Effecto Rust Inhibiting Primer 2 coats P & L Effecto Enamel 7.1.2 Galvanized Metal: 1 coat P & L Galvanized Metal Latex Primer 2 coats P & L Effecto Enamel 7.1.3 Aluminum - All aluminum copings, gutters, downspouts & scuppers (if required) to be factory finish to match adjacent finish. All remaining aluminum surfaces: 1 coat P & L Effecto Rust Inhibiting Primer 2 coats P & L Vapex House Paint 7.1.4 Concrete - All cast -in -place or pre-cast concrete or stucco surfaces: 2 coats P & L Vapex House Paint 7.1.5 Masonry - Concrete block: 7.1.5.1 Normal weight concrete block: See Section 91 "Special Coatings" for Elastomerlc coating 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* PAINTING 7.1.5.2 See Alternates, Division 1, for Lightweight Block Finishes. 7.1.5.3 See Alternates, Division 1. 7.1.6 Masonry - Exposed Parapet above roof flashing: Series 55 Tneme-crete by Tnemec Company, Inc. Apply a two -coat film of minimum 14.5 wet mils thickness each in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the substrate to be covered. 7.1.7 Exterior Insulation and Finish System: 1 coat ICI Devoe TRU - Glaze 4030 Epoxy Primer 2 coats ICI Devoe Devthane 378 "Semi - Gloss" Aliphatic Urethane (Toys "R" Us Blue - TRU Only) (Snowflake White - BRU Only) (Bright White - KRU Only) 7.2 Interior Surfaces: 7.2.1 All drywall surfaces, except where graphics are called for or where ceramic tile or vinyl wall covering is applied to: 1 coat P & L Supreme S4 2 coats P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel 7.2.2 All concrete block surfaces scheduled to be painted except where epoxy paint or graphics are called for: 1 coat P & L Primafil 1 coat P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel 7.2.3 Graphics - on exposed block: 1 coat P & L Primafil 2 coats P & L Latex Enamel - Accolade Interior Semi - Gloss. 7.2.4 Graphics - on drywall: 1 coat P & L Supreme #4 2 coats P & L Latex Enamel - Accolade Interior Semi - Gloss. 7.2.5 Graphics - on wood: 1 coat P & L Supreme #11 2 coats P & L Latex Enamel - Accolade Interior Semi - Gloss. 7.2.6 Wood or Hardboard (painted) - all exposed woodwork to be painted, except where noted to be stained: 1 coat P & L Supreme #11 2 coats P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel 7.2.7 Wood (stained) - all exposed, unpainted wood, noted to have stained finish; 1 coat P & L Tonetic Wood Stain 1 coat P & L Filler Sealer 2 coats P & L Varmor Clear Finish 7.2.8 Ferrous Metal - all doors, frames, handrails and other ferrous metal, except where noted: 1 coat P & L Supreme #9 2 coats P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel 7.2.9 Other Ferrous Metal (sprayed) - all structural steel, including bar joists, beams, and decking, except as listed In 7.2.15: (Refer to schedule on drawings) 2 coats P & L Pro -Hide Dry Fall -Out Spray Coating Flat Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington *SECTION 9H-4 (2.5 mill thickness minimum per coating) 7.2.10 Miscellaneous Metal - all piping, machinery and other ferrous metal not covered in other sections: 1 coat P & L Supreme #9 1 coat P & L Cellu -Tone Enamel 7.2.11 Concrete Floors - All floors without floor coverings: 2 coats EPMAR Sta - Crete Series 1600 Clear, 5 mils total dry film thickness. 7.2.12 Concrete Floors - All floors without floor coverings with striping: 7.2.13 All concrete block surfaces scheduled for epoxy paint: 7.2.14 Prime Coats - Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished but has not been prime coated by others. 7.2.15 Exposed columns at interior face of exterior curtainwall storefront: finish by Sherwin Williams, Industrial and Marine Coatings `Silver - Brite" aluminum paint. Primer (if required by manufacturer), 2 coats of 1.0 - 1.5 mil. dft/ct., brush or spray application, spread and drying rates all per Sherwin Williams manufacturers specification bulletins (1 -800- 321 - 8194). 8. WORKMANSHIP 2 coats P & L Effecto Enamel, OSHA Yellow (striping only). 2 coats EPMAR Sta - Crete Series 1600 Clear, 5 mils total dry film thickness. 1 coat P & L Primafil 2 coats P & L Tech -Gard Epoxy Coating Gloss 8.1 Painting materials shall be applied by skilled mechanics well versed in the several branches of the work. Each painting operation shall be performed in the Owner's Representative opinion in accordance with the best practices which are consistent with the surfaces being finished and the types of materials being applied. Painting materials shall be free of skins, lumps or any foreign matter and the solids shall be kept well stirred in the vehicle of any such material while being applied. 8.2 Painting materials shall be evenly and smoothly spread or flowed on and shall be free of runs, drips, sags, crawling, brush marks and clogging of angles. No successive coats of painting materials shall be applied until the preceding coat is thoroughly dry and hard. Wood and metal surfaces with varnish or enamel finish shall be sanded between coats to produce even, smooth surfaces. 8.3 Each painting material shall be stirred, blended, tinted, thinned and/or applied in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. Each coat of paint shall be a different tint from that of the preceding coat. Each final coat of the painting shall be the exact shade and texture as represented by the sample previously selected and approved by the Project Manager. Where two coat work Is specified, the first coat shall be tinted toward the final color. 8.4 Unless otherwise specified, materials for succeeding coats on any one surface shall be the products of the same manufacturer who furnished the first prime -sealer coat or undercoat for that particular surface, except when metal primers are used as specified under other Sections of the specifications. 05/05/98 (e• C c DIVISION 9* PAINTING "SECTION 9H -5 8.5 An ambient temperature of not less than 50 degrees F. shall be obtained in all spaces or locations where work required under this specification is in progress, unless otherwise directed by the Project Manager. 8.6 Exterior painting shall not be done during any period of high humidity which would prevent the attainment of satisfactory results from any painting operation. 8.7 Coat shall be thoroughly dry before succeeding coats are applied. Allow a minimum of 24 hours between coats on any surface, unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer. 8.8 Stains shall be applied freely with a soft hair brush and the excess wiped off. The operation shall be repeated to prevent blotching and to produce uniformity throughout. 8.9 Each coat of vamish, except the last shall be rubbed with steel wool, after drying. The last coat shall be rubbed with pumice stone and oil to produce a smooth, satin finish. 8.10 The number of coats herein specified shall be in addition to any priming or other coats specified under the various Sections. Painted surfaces shall receive at least one (1) priming coat and two (2) finishing coats, unless otherwise specified. 8.11 Hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates and the like shall be removed before painting and afterward replaced. 8.12 In the painting of movable or operating parts, no paint shall be applied to sliding contacts and the like, where the bare material is necessary for proper operation. Paint applied to such surfaces shall be removed. 8.13 Access doors, plates, panel boxes, conduits and the like shall be painted in with the adjoining surfaces on which they occur, using the same kind of paint, number of coats, color and finish. In spaces where adjoining surfaces do not receive paint the work shall be painted the same as similar work in painted spaces and of color directed. 8.14 Mechanical work shall not be painted while materials contain heat. They shall remain unheated until after the final coat has thoroughly dried. 8.15 No interior painting shall be done until the building is thoroughly dried out and all conditions are suitable to produce satisfactory results, in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 8.16 Provide and use a sufficient number of drop cloths and exercise care to protect finished surfaces of fbors and other work, and immediately remove spatter, stains and droppings from such surfaces. Particular care shall be taken when painting above wainscots and other finished surfaces, furnishings, equipment and the like. 8.17 Wood trim shall be back primed before installation. 8.18 Remove doors to paint tops and bottoms. 8.19 Materials shall be thoroughly mixed and strained before using. Addition of thinners such as linseed oil, turpentine and the like shall be added to ready -mixed materials only in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. If no printed instructions appear on the container, the contractor shall obtain this information in writing from the manufacturer. A copy of these printed instructions shall also be transmitted to the Project Manager. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 8.20 Materials used to prepare surfaces and apply clear epoxy sealer on concrete floors where scheduled, shall be mixed, water - thinned and applied in strict accordance with sealer manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein. 9. PROTECTION AND CLEANING 9.1 Work under this Section shall not check, crack, peel, discolor or have other defects due to improper materials or workmanship, due to improper preparation of the surfaces, or due to the painting, varnishing, or surfaces which were not in proper condition to receive paint, varnish or other painter's materials, and such unsatisfactory work shall be refinished at no additional cost to the Owner. 9.2 The contractor shall, when so directed, retouch where necessary, restore where damaged or defective, and clean off paint spots from floors, walls, finished hardware, glass and other surfaces not scheduled to receive paint, and shall leave painted surfaces clean and in a satisfactory condition. 9.3 Upon completion of work, surplus materials, empty packages and containers and debris shall be removed from the site by legal means. 9.4 Acceptance at final inspection will be govemed by body finishes exhibited and the contractor shall apply additional costs as required to produce proper finish and coverage in accordance with the approved samples. At acceptance, the paint and vamish finished work shall be in a neat, sound and undamaged condition. 9.5 Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned at completion and before acceptance of work. 9.6 This contractor shall protect his work and the work of other trades against damage or injury by his employees or by the materials, tools and equipment used in connection with the painting. Work that is damaged as the result of the painting operations, shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. 9.7 When Owner's personnel take over store for fixturing, Contractor to move all paint materials and equipment to a location outside of store. No storage of paint or painting equipment will be allowed in the store. 9.8 Provide 'Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. 9.9 At the completion of work of other trades, touch -up, and restore all damaged or deface painted surfaces. -END OF SECTION- 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* SPECIAL COATINGS *SECTION 91 -1 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gnfy when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SUMMARY 2.1 Section Includes: 2.1.1 Cementitious waterproofing coat of exterior CMU (painted). 2.1.2 Decorative acrylic finish coat of exterior CMU (painted). 2.2 Related Sections: 2.2.1 Division 1 - Alternates 2.2.2 Section 4A - Unit Masonry Work. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.1 Applicator Qualifications: Must be approved by manufacturer in writing and have manufacturer's authorization to offer specified warranty. 3.2 Field Sample: 3.2.1 Apply masonry weatherproofing system to field sample required by Section 4A. 3.2.2 Reflect proposed color, texture and workmanship. 3.2.3 Obtain acceptance of completed panel from Project Manager before beginning work. 3.2.4 Retain accepted panel during construction as a standard for judging completed work. Do not alter, destroy or move panel until work is completed. 3.3 Coatings, shall be impenetrable to Wind Driven Rain up to 120 mph for 8 hours. Products or systems shall meet Federal Specifications TOT- P0035, para 3.4 10 for cement based coatings or TOT- C -555B, para 4.45 for polymer based coatings. 3.4 All products will adhere to properly prepared, approved substrates and will resist the effect of weathering and shall have passed ASTM G 26 -90 specification at 5,000 hours Accelerated Weathering in Atlas (Xenon Arc) Weathermeter, Type B, Coatings which will not chip, crack, peel flake or fade. 1 iI • - a hi 4. PROJECT CONDITIONS 4.1 Environmental Requirements: 4.1.1 Do not apply on frozen or frost - filled surfaces. 4.1.2 Do not apply if temperature is below 40 degrees F. or expected to fall below 40 degrees within 24 hours. 4.1.3 Protect material from freezing. 4.1.4 Protect from precipitation for 24 hours after application. 4.1.5 The following conditions may require dampening the surface prior to and during application: 4.1.5.1 Wind- caused rapid drying of surface. 4.1.5.2 Excessive surface temperature. 4.1.5.3 Excessive air temperature. 4.1.5.4 Direct Sun. 4.1.5.5 Low humidity. 5. WARRANTY 5.1 Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty form for coating system products, including affirmation of coating system inspection by manufacturer required by warranty provision. Approval by manufacturer for warranty is required prior to system application. Submit manufacturer's "Intent To Warranty Form" prior to start of coating system application. Submit "Application .bb Records Form" required by manufacturer after completed installation. This warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. 5.1.1 Beneficiary: Issue warranty in legal name of project Owner. 5.1.2 Warranty Period: 5 years commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. 5.1.3 Warranty Acceptance: Owner is sole authority who will determine acceptability of warranty documents. 5.1.4 Function: Manufacturer's warranty for labor and material warranting bond, weather and waterproof above grade function. 6. PRE - APPLICATION MEETING 6.1 Contractor shall arrange meeting no Tess than seven days prior to staring work. 6.2 Attendance shall be mandatory for: 6.2.1 Contractor. 6.2.2 Coating Subcontractor. 6.2.3 Owner's Representative. 6.2.4 Coating Manufacturer Representative /Distributor 6.3 Agenda: 6.3.1 Substrate condition. 6.3.2 Sequence and method of application of coating system. DIVISION 9* SPECIAL COATINGS *SECTION 91 -2 7. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT$ 7.1 All elastomeric wall coating materials shall comply with current Federal and State VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) requirements. 7.2 Do not proceed with application of materials when temperature, humidity, and other environmental conditions necessary for the successful application of individual products are not within allowable limits. PART 2: PRODUCTS 8. MANUFACTURER/PRODUCT 8.1 This specification written for products of Thoro System Products, Inc. 8.1.1 Cementitious Blockfiller. Cementitious, Acrylic- Modified Waterproofing Blockfiller Super Quickseal -White with Thorosheen, by Thoro System Products, Inc. 8.1.2 Decorative Acrylic Coating: Thorocoat - Smooth by Thoro Systems Products, Inc. White to match Pratt & Lambert Snoflake, grey to match P&L Carolina Gull or as indicated or as selected on drawings. 8.2 TEC -Top elastomeric coating system by Rainguard Products Company will be acceptable when all other requirements of this specification, including warranty, are met. 9. MIXING 9.1 Mix in strict accord with printed instructions of manufacturer. Mechanical mixers of an approved type shall be used for mixing all products. Frozen, caked or lumped materials shall not be used. Mechanical mixers and containers shall be cleaned after mixing each batch; kept free of Super Quickseal from previous mixes. 9.2 One 50 Ib. container Super Quickseal shall be mixed with 12 to 16 quarts of clean, potable water until a creamy batter consistency is achieved, with uniform color. Hot temperatures and low humidity will require maximum amount of clean, potable water to achieve the creamy consistency. 9.3 Let material set for five to fifteen minutes to soak, then temper back by adding one (1) gallon of Thorosheen -Tint Base. PART 3: EXECUTION 10. EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 10.1 Allow 28 days after completion of masonry work for curing. 10.2 Surfaces to receive Cementitious Blockfiller hall be free of defects such as concrete droppings, laitance, dirt, dust, grease, form release treatments, efflorescence, curing compounds, paint and any other foreign material. 10.2.1 Beginning of application means acceptance of substrate. 11. SCAFFOLDING 11.1 Provide scaffolding and use as necessary to ensure all exposed surfaces of smooth -face and split -face block and all mortar joints are completely covered with primer and finish coats to insure the waterproofing integrity of the wall and so as to provide the specified warranty. 12. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 12.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that surfaces des "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinoton receiving subsequent finish or coatings are prepared In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor and his subcontractors shall require that a representative of the manufacturer inspect and approve the surface preparation prior to application of his product. Contractor shall advise Project Manager immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 13. APPLICATION 13.1 Cementitious Blockfiller 13.1.1 Dampen wall prior to and during application. Change of color of masonry unit should be noted. Do not soak wall excessively mallow water to accumulate on the surface. 13.1.2 Apply brush or plaster type sprayer coat to Sementitious Blockfiller to the surface of fiat and split -faced masonry units at the approximate rate of 150 square feet per gallon. 13.1.2.1 Spray apply at 35-40 PSI air pressure at spray nozzle using a 3/16" or 1/4" spray orifice. 13.1.3 Using a wet clean soft nylon bristled brush or broom, work the fill coat in a horizontal direction to fill pores. Lay off fill coat in a vertical direction. Do not allow brush or broom to become loaded with material. 13.1.3.1 Backroll surface with 3/4" nap roller using downward finish strokes to remove any brush strokes. Do not let material set or harden before backroliing. 13.1.4 Finish from breakpoint to breakpoint. Do not atop in middle of wall. 13.1.5 If hot, dry and windy conditions exist, let fill coat setfor 24 hours, cure by fog spraying on second day if conditions are hot dry or windy. 13.2 Decorative Acrylic Coating 13.2.1 Stir coating thoroughly with mechanical mixer to assure complete, uniform dispersion throughout. 13.2.2 In extremely hot dry weather, slight damping of the surface with clean, potable water is acceptable prior to applying coating. 13.2.3.1 Back roll brushed or spray material; cross roll roller applied material. 13.2.3.2 Finish material so that brush and roller strokes are in one direction. 14. )NSPECTION & SCHEDULE 14.1 Contractor shall maintain schedule of application of Cementitious Blockfiller and finish coat in field office for Owner inspection. See application job record (sample) at the end of this section. Copy of application job record to be submitted as part of as -built set. 14.2 Finish coat must be pinhole free. -END OF SECTION- 05/05/98 DIVISION 9• PROJECT NAME PROJECT LOCATION SPECIAL COATINGS APPLICATION JOB RECORD DAILY LOO RECORDED BY TYPE AND QUANTITY SQUARE LOCATION TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY MATERIAL FOOT ON DATE 8:00 AM 3:00 PM WEATHER' APPLIED COMPLETED BUILDING•' f • - S (SUNNY), PC (PARTLY CLOUDY), C (CLOUDY), F (FOG), R (RAIN), T (THUNDERSTORM), SL (SLEET OR ICE), SN (SNOW). •• - FIRST FLOOR FRONT, EAST PENTHOUSE, ETC. APPLICATOR FIRM 1• • *SECTION 91 -3 05/05/98 DIVISION 9• PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review manly( when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shal be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. PART 2: SCOPE OF WORK PART 3: QUALITY ASSURANCE LINEAR M 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and scaffolding required for completing linear metal ceilings, suspension systems and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. 2.2 The extent of the work is indicated on the drawings and specified herein. Refer to drawings for color and finish. 3.1 Subcontractor qualifications: Installer shall have not less than three years of successful experience in the installation of linear metal ceiling systems on projects with requirements similar to requirements specified. 3.2 Requirements on regulatory agencies: Codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 Source quality control: 3.3.1 Test reports: Manufacturer will provide test certification for minimum requirements as tested in accordance with applicable industry standards and /or to meet performance standards specified by various agencies. 3.3.2 Changes from system: System performance following any substitution of materials or change in assembly design must be certified by the manufacturer. 3.3.3 Wind Toad resistance tests: Exterior metal coiling system shall withstand wind blasts of up to 120 miles per hour (mph) with no deformation of excessive permanent set. PART 4: REFERENCES 4.1 ASTM C635 and C636: Manufacturing and Installation of Suspended Ceilings: 4.2 Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.: Fire Resistance Directory, Design D218. PART 5: SUBMITTALS 5.1 Samples: Submit representative sample of color and finish of all exposed materials. 5.2 Shop Drawings: Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton ETAL CEILINGS *SECTION 9J -1 5.2.1 Reflected ceiling plans: Indicate layout arrangement of ceiling design, dimensions and locations of related integrated lighting and air distribution components. 5.2.2 Installation drawings: Detail complete installation including carrier system, connections between carriers and pans, details of level changes and /or changes in pattem, installation of related lighting and air distribution components, access requirements, sound absorption requirements, and fire rating requirements when applicable. 5.2.3 Manufacturers data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts or standard drawings showing details of system with project conditions clearly identified and manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 5.2.4 Maintenance materials: Submit one percent of amount of linear metal. ceiling components installed. 6. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 6.1 Delivery of materials: Deliver materials in original, unopened packages clearly labeled with the manufacturer's's name and identification numbers. 6.2 Storage: Store in manner that will prevent warpage, scratches or damage of any kind. 6.3 Handling: Handle in such a manner as to insure against racking, distortion or physical damage of any kind. 7. PROJECT CONDITIONS 7.1 Existing conditions: (Include specific alteration work requirements for project). 7.2 Environmental requirements for interior installation: Building shall be enclosed with windows and exterior doors in place and glazed, and roof watertight before installation of linear metal ceiling system and related ceiling components. Climatic condition range of 60 °F (15.56 °C) to 85 °F (29.44 °C) and relative humidity of not more than 70 %. 7.3 Coordination with other work: 7.3.1 Mechanical work: Duct work above ceiling shall be complete, and permanent heating and cooling systems operating to climate conditions prior to installation of linear metal ceiling components. 7.3.2 Electrical work: Installation of conduit above ceiling shall be complete before installation of linear metal ceiling components. 7.3.3 Fire protection work: Fire protection lines and/or equipment occurring above ceiling shall be completed and tested before linear metal ceiling components are installed. 7.4 Protection: Protect completed work above ceiling system from damage during installation of linear metal ceiling components. PART 8: MANUFACTURER 8.1 Soffits at Babies "R" Us canopies to be Interfinish 4" "SQUARE EDGE PLANAR PLUS" linear metal ceilings cdors to be Interfinish custom colors to match Valspar colors as called out on drawings. Paraline linear metal ceiling system as manufactured by USG Interiors, Inc. Chicago, Illinois, USA, 1- 800 - 874 -4968 or Owner approved equal. 05/05/98 {•.••.. DIVISION 9* LINEAR METAL CEILINGS •SECTION 9J -Z 8.2 Interfinish metal ceilings and specialty products are a division of Chicago Mettalic Corporation, 4849 South Austin Avenue, Chicago, Illinois 60638 -1492, 1-800-560-5758, FAX 1 -800- 960 -5759. Pans: Paraline 11 - 3 1/4" wide face, 3/4" vertical legs with carrier attachment edge and integral closure flange. 8.2.1 Aluminum: Roll - formed aluminum sheet 0.24" nominal unperforated factory- finished in baked enamel paint finish (color as indicated on drawings) brushed with clear protective finish. (gauge per manufacturer's request) 8.2.2 Closure flange finish: Finish to match pans. 8.2.3 Splice plate: Finish to match pans. Formed for snap -fit in butt-cut pan ends. 8.3 Support System 8.3.1 Horizontal exterior carrier system: .040 nominal aluminum alloy, roll formed; factory finished in matte black baked enamel paint finish. 8.3.1.1 Symmetrical Main Carrier carrier; Inverted V- shaped carrier, 1 5/8" high by 1 3/4" wide; each leg notched for locating and attaching pans 4" o.c. and 3/4" apart. 8.3.1.2 Expansion carrier. Per Interfinish Same as Symmetrical Carrier except 4 1/8" for spacing pans 1/8" apart. 8.3.1.3 Contraction carrier: Per Interfinish Same as Symmetrical Carrier except 3.906 module for spacing pans 656" apart. 8.3.1.4 Splice sections: Formed to match configuration of carrier; 6" long. 8.3.1.5 Hanger reinforcement clip: Formed to match configuration of carrier. Used in exterior applications to reinforce symmetrical carrier at hanger wire attachment points. 8.3.16 Flat channel carrier. Aluminum channel shape, 7/8" high by 1 3/4" wide; each leg notched for locating and attaching pans 4" o.c. and 3/4" apart. 8.4 Lighting components: (if required) 8.4.1 Standard NEMA Type G: 12" x 48" up to 24" x 48" manufactured by others. 8.5 Lighting components: (if required) 8.5.1 Standard NEMA Type G lay -in nominal 24" x 48" classified for fire resistance and complying with speded UL Design. 8.5.2 Protection board: 7/8" thick Auratone Firecode protection at top and two sides of fixture and at ends when fixture is located below or adjacent to a beam; and complying with UL Design D218. 8.6 Accessories 8.6.1 Trim channel: .024" nominal aluminum roll - formed into channel shape finish to match pans. 8.6.2 End plugs: Size and configuration of pan design; material finish to match pans. 8.6,3 Tee converter clip: Used to adapt standard main tee for Paraline attachment or to space pans at different modules. 8.6,4 Rotating pan clip: Used where pans run at other than 90° Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton to main tees. 8.6.5 Pan retainer clip: Spring steel clip used to prevent pans from being dislodged from PARALOCK main tee due to impact. 8.6.6 Compression posts: Size as required to withstand windload and include integral leveling adjustment. 8.6.7 Compression post adapter: Adapts standard 3/4" EMT conduit for use as compression member for exterior application of PARALINE ceiling. 8.6.8 Face tee cover: Used to cover tabs on PARALOCK main tees between NEMA Type G fixtures when installed end-to- end; finished in standard matte black finish. 8.6.9 Access door kit: Used with standard pans and PARALOCK carriers to field fabricate up to a 36" x 36" (downward) access door, or with standard pans and symmetrical carriers to field fabricate downward access doors. 8.6.10 Mechanical fasteners: Material and finish to match item to which installed; type and size as required for particular installation. 8.6.11 Symmetrical carrier adapters: Brackets designed for use with PARALINE light fixtures when installed on symmetrical carriers. PART 9: FABRICATION 9.1 Pans: Edges formed to snap onto carrier members and provide positive locking mechanism with no additional fasteners: factory- finished to match approved samples. 9.2 Support system: Formed and fabricated for mechanical connection with adjoining section and prepunched holes for direct suspension. 9.3 Lighting components: Fabricate in accordance with LIL classifications as specified. PART 10: INSPECTION 10.1 Examine areas to receive linear metal ceiling system for conditions which will adversely affect installation. 10.2 Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 10.3 Work to be concealed: Verify work above support system is complete, tested and installed in manner which will not affect layout and installation of linear metal ceiling system. 10.4 Exterior wind bracing to be approved by a registered professional engineer licensed by the state where the product is being installed. PART 11: PREPARATION 11.1 Field dimensions: Installer must verify actual field dmension prior to installation. 11.2 Coordination: Coordinate and schedule installation of linear metal ceiling system with work of other trades affected by this installation, with particular attention given to mechanical and electrical work required to be installed and operating before ceiling work can begin. PART 12: INSTALLATION 12.1 Reference: Install in accordance with approved shop Q5/05/98 �r DIVISION 9* LiNEAR METAL CEILINGS drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Follow architects' details for thermal and building expansion joint treatments. 12.2 Hanger Wires: 12.2.1 Spacing: Space hanger wires maximum 48" o.c. along length of carrier system, attached directly to structure above. 12.2.2 Limitation: Do not support hanger wires from mechanical and/or electrical equipment, piping, or other equipment occurring above ceiling. 12.2.3 Provide additional fixture support as required in accordance with local building codes or other regulatory agencies. 12.3 Carrier System: Space PARALOCK main tee 48" o.c. and secure with hanger wires or secure directly to structural supports. 12.3.1 Adjustment: Align support system straight, level and in required position. 12.3.2 Mechanical fasteners: Where required, install in manner which will provide completed assembly to conform to project design requirements. 12.4 Pans 12.4.1 General: Snap metal pans into position; splice end -to- end with snap fit splice plate. 12.4.2 PARALINE II pans must be installed in per Interfinish requirements altemate rows to ensure point access. 12.4.3 Changes in direction: Where ceiling pans change direction, trim pans to correct angles and secure ends for rigidity. 12.4.4 End plugs: When pan ends are visible, install and plugs flush with end surface. 12.4.5 Acoustical material: Where acoustical material is required, install material across top of ceiling pans between support system members. 12.4.6 Access: Where access to area above ceiling is required, cut ceiling pans and carriers to required dimensions and install access door assembly as recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with approved shop drawings. 12.5 Lighting components: 12.5.1 Fixture protection: Install at sides and top of fixture 1" clearance maintained between top of fixture and protection board; mechanically fastened with minimum of three nails per side. 12.5.2 One Tamp fixture limitation: Maximum six fixtures per 100 sq. Ft. of ceiling area. 12.5.3 Two lamp fixture limitation: Maximum nine fixtures per 200 sq. Ft. of ceiling area. 12.5.4 Standard nominal 24" x 48" NEMA Type G fixture limitation: Spaced so that area of fixtures does not exceed 20 sq. Ft. per 100 sq. Ft. of ceiling area. 12.6 Exterior Installation: Install hanger reinforcements, compressions posts and other structural components as required per structural engineer's evaluation. PART 13: CLEANING *SECTION 9J -3 13.1 Paraline pans: Clean painted pans with nonabrasive, nonsolvent based commercial cleaner. Clean polished finishes with nonabrasive, quick -drying glass cleaner. Asoft cotton cloth is recommended. 13.2 Immediately remove any corrosive substances or chemicals that would attack painted finish. 13.3 Touch -up all minor scratches and sports, as acceptable, or replace damaged sections when touch -up is not permitted. 13.4 Removal of debris: Remove all debris resulting from work of this section. - END OF SECTION - Rabies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 9* ENVIRONMENTAL PLAY SURFACE *SECTION 9K -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH DODGE - REGUPOL FOR FURNISHING RUBBER FLOORING. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE - ORDERED: FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION. CALL TERESA LAWRENCE AT THE MATWORKS 1- 800.523 -5179 OR 301 -868- 6034 FOR COORDINATING INFORMATION. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review Qf_ly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for completing the rubber flooring work, including installation of owner- fumished rubber floor tile, and related items indicated on the drawings and herein specified. (NOTE: Refer to drawings for items applicable to the project.) 2.2 Manufacturer of rubber flooring and selection of flooring materials are indicated on the drawings. 2.2.1 Related items including adhesives, are specified herein. 3. QUALITY ASSURANCE: 3.1 Manufacturer. Wherever possible, provide required flooring and accessories produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, and leveling compounds. 4. SUBMITTALS; 4.1 Samples: Provide 12" x 12" tile units. 4.2 Maintenance Instructions: Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's recommended maintenance practices for each type of flooring and accessory required. 5. ) 10B CONDITIONS: 5.1 Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. (18 degrees C.) in spaces to receive flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Store flooring materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55 degrees F. (13 degrees C) in areas where work is completed. PART 2: PRODUCTS 6. MATERIALS (Refer to drawings for specific finishes.) 6.1 Furnished by Owner: 6.1.1 Rubber Flooring (48" widths x 1/4" thick) Tile as manufactured by Softstone Rubber Flooring, Dodge - Regupol P.O. Box 989 Lancaster, PA 17608 6.1.1.1 Color to be special Toys "R" Us Color: blue, teal and purple. 6.2 Furnished by Contractor: 6.2.1 Adhesives (Cements): Ever -Grip Adhesive, water resistant, stabilized type as recommended by manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. 6.2.2 Sealer: Task( Ombra as recommended by manufacturer. 6.2.2.1 Per Manufacturer's requirements and specifications. PART 3: EXECUTION 7. INSPECTION AND SURFACE PREPARATION 7.1 Contractor shall be responsible to insure that ALL surfaces receiving subsequent finish are prepared in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations. Testing and approval of the flooring substrate is the responsibility of the Contractor, including bonding and moisture tests. 7.2 Contractor shall advise Owner's Representative immediately, in writing, of any incompatibilities between materials or surfaces. Commencement of Application implies acceptance of the surface and shall constitute waiver by the respective contractor and contractor to any claim of incompatibility. 8. PREPARATION 8.1 Prior to laying flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered. 8.2 Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to application of adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's directions. 8.3 Use leveling compound as recommended by flooring manufacturers. 9. INSTALLATION 9.1 Install flooring after finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature and relative humidity must be within limits recommended by flooring manufacturer. 9.2 Place flooring with adhesive cement in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. Install the Softstone Fboring with Ever -Grip adhesive. Apply adhesive evenly using a 3/32" square notched trowel; coverage 75 -80 s.f. per gallon. Install flooring into wet adhesive. Press firmly on flooring to remove curt and bubbles. Flooring must be rolled using 50-100 Ib. roller in 45 minutes in insure proper adhesive transfer. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered in 30 minutes. 9.3 In areas where rubber flooring meets a higher material, install latex type underlayment approved by the flooring manufacturer with a slope not more than 1/8" per foot. Feather underlayment neatly on a straight tine where the slope meets the level floor. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington 05/05/98 9.4 Tightly cement flooring to subbase without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections. 9.5 Apply three (3) coats of Taski Ombra, manufacturer specified sealer at time of installation. Allow 30 minutes of drying time between applications. Use sponge mop applicator. 10. CLEANING AND SEALING 10.1 Remove any excess adhesive or other surface blemishes, using neutral type cleaners like Task' Profl as recommended by flooring manufacturer. Protect installed flooring from damage by covering. 10.2 Allow no foot traffic or other use for at least 30 minutes after installation. 10.3. Provide adequate protection for flooring In areas where traffic occurs and maintain this protection until all work in building is completed. 10A Floors shall be rinsed and let to dry in compliance with manufacturer's requirements immediately prior to application of sealer coats. 10.4.1 Finishing: After completion of project and just prior to final inspection of work by Owner, thoroughly clean floors. '11. REPLACEMENTg 11.1 Contractor to provide two (2) full cartons of each type, size and color of floor tile be used throughout the facility. This will serve as a replacement of any tiles damaged or discolored in the future. 12. GUARANTEE 12.1 All guarantees and warranties are to remain in effect and will not be voided if vapor barrier is used below slab. • -END OF SECTION- Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington ENVIRONMENTAL PLAY SURFACE - END OF SECTION - PART 1: GENERAL DIVISION 10' SOLID PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS 'SECTION 10A - 1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH COMTEC PRODUCTS COMPANY, INC. FOR FURNISHING OF SOLID PLASTIC TOILET PARTITIONS. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PRE - ORDERED. 1. RELATED DOCUMENT 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gdy when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "If required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all materials, inserts, anchors, etc. required for a complete solid plastic toilet partition installation as indicated . on the drawings and specified herein. 2.2 Refer to Section 10B for toilet room accessories. 2.3 Comply with local Codes or handicap provisions of local agencies, if no local codes are applicable comply with the requirements of ANSI A117.1 for handicap use of toilet MOM. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS (FURNISHED BY OWNER) 3.1 Toilet Partitions: Flush type, floor mounted, overhead braced with in -awing doors, except for handicapped designated stalls requiring out- swinging doors, as manufactured by Comtec Products Company, Inc. 3.2 Urinal Screen: Flush type, 24" or 42" (as indicated on the drawings) wall hung with wall brackets, supported from the wall and the floor, as manufactured by Comtec Products Company, Inc. 3.3 Color shall be "Teal" Standard Series. 3.4 All hardware required to assemble and mount solid plastic . toilet partitions and urinal screen shall be furnished by Owner, except for wall, floor and ceiling anchors, which shall be provided by contractor. 3.4.1 Owner furnished hardware shall be "one -way" (tamper proof) screws and fasteners. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. ERECTION 4.1 Installation responsibility specified in Section 6A. DIVISION 10 PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gnly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment required to complete the toilet room accessories installation as indicated on the drawings and specked herein, including inserts, backing plates, anchoring devices, etc. for support of accessories. 2.2 Mounting bolts and screws shall be concealed wherever possible. Exposed mounting bolts shall have theftproof type heads and shall match the material of the accessories. u TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES 'SECTION 10B -1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS 3.1 Toilet Room accessories will be provided by the Contractor; (unless noted otherwise that they are provided by the Owner): NOTE: Schedule on drawings is based on prototype store requirements. Refer to drawings for quantities & variations due to code requirements, etc. Contractor responsible for coordination of correct number of accessories. Verify provision responsibility for each item. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. INSTALLATION 4.1 Check all accessories received at job site to determine correct type and quantity. Report missing or damaged merchandise to the superintendent promptly. Installer to examine all areas and conditions under which toilet accessories are installed and coordinate with Contractor that corrections are made prior to proper installation. 4.2 Install all Owner furnished and contractor furnished accessories at standard heights and proper locations per manufacturer's requirements. Protect adjacent surfaces during installation of accessories and correct any damaged areas to the satisfaction of the superintendent. 4.3 Remove paper, boxes and other items at the end of each day's work. 4.4 Check to assure that all accessories are securely fastened before leaving project. - END OF SECTION - c DIVISION 10* WALL & STOREFRONT PROTECTION 'SECTION 10D -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL ACCOUNT AGREEMENT WITH KOROGUARD, INC. FOR CORNER GUARDS, COLUMN COVERS, WALL RAILS AND WITH BOSTON FOR 2" RUBBER BUMPERS. ALL OTHER WALL PROTECTION MATERIALS ARE FURNISHED BY THE CONTRACTOR. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gnly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials and tools required for installation of wall protection work indicated on the drawings and herein specified. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS (SEE INTERIOR FINISH MATERIAL LIST SHEET A6.1) 3.1 Following items are furnished by Owner and installed by Contractor: 3.1.1 Corner guard: Koroguard Thermoformed surface - mounted vinyl guard, .028" gauge P1 haircell texture, 43" and 72" high with continuous aluminum mounting plate and plastic end caps. Mount where indicated on drawings. See Material List on drawings. 3.1.2 Crash Rail: Koroguard Thermoformed, Series 800, Model C200 surface - mounted solid vinyl wall bumper, 8" high with continuous aluminum or vinyl mounting plates, vinyl end caps and preformed vinyl corners. Mount as indicated on the drawings. 3.1.3 Column Cover: Acrylic covering to be Koroguard K -38 .040" thick .028 gauge P1 haircell texture. Refer to color on drawings. 3.1.4 Bumper Guard: Boston Retail Series 50 hinged bumper system, 1.25 "H x .843W, with matching end caps. Mount as Indicated on the drawings. 3.1.5 Rubber Bumpers: 2" diameter, half round rubber bumpers manufactured by Boston Products. 3.1.6 Floor- Mounted Cart Rails: Stainless steel, F110 -3 posts with 1 -1/2" 0 rails 12" high, space posts 4' -0" o.c. maximum by Lawrence Railings, P.O. Box 400 -M, Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington Bayshore, NY 11706 -0779 Phone (1- 800 -441- 0019). PART 3: EXECUTION 4. PREPARATION 4.1 Contractor to prepare all surfaces as required by manufacturers printed instructions. 5. INSTALLATION. ACRYLIC COVERING 5.1 Field installation of Koroguard to building surfaces will be accomplished either by overlay wrapping with solvent binder or themro forming with heat joint (field or shop fabricated). 5.2 Contractor to verify with local Koroguard representative choice of methods based on maximized application for specific application condition. Note: Flush rivets or mechanical fasteners will not be allowed. 5.3 Only authorized materials and methods of installation will be allowed per manufacturers requirements. 6. INSTALLATION. VINYL CORNER GUARDS/WALL BUMPER$ 6.1 Installation responsibility specified in Section 6A. 7. INSTALLATION. CART RAILS 7.1 Install lengths as shown on drawings. 7.2 Field verify all existing conditions and report any conflicts to Owner prior to installation. 7.3 Pipe to be 915 -3P (.062) polished stainless steel. 7.4 Secure flange plate to slab with 3-516-35, 5/16" Loxin shields. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 DIVISION 10 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS *SECTION 10E -1 PART 1 - GENERAL t JZELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 Drawings and general provisions of Division 1 apply to this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review oh when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shat be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4. Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE_OF WORK 2.1 Fumish all labor, materials and tools required for installation of portable fire extinguishers as indicated on the drawings and herein specified. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS 3.1 Portable fire extinguishers shall be of the dry chemical type for Class A, B, C fires, labeled and listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Extinguishers shall be five (5) pound capacity, and shall be provided with wall mounting hardware and signs as may be required by local authority. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. INSTALLATION 4.1 Mount in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 4.2 Contractor shall be responsible for the provision and installation of all portable fire extinguishers as required by local Fire Marshall or other authority. As a minimum Contractor shall provide and install fifteen (15) portable fire extinguishers. Maximum travel distance to fire extingtisher is 75 feet. Owner's Representatives shall determine the location of portable fire extinguishers in the absence of specific requirements of local authority. - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washinato DIVISION 14* POWERED CONVEYOR *SECTION 14A -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL AGREEMENTWITH A.E.S. ENTERPRISES FOR THE FURNISHING AND IN- STALLATION OF POWERED CONVEYORS. FOR INFORMATION AND COORDINATION CALL (732) 390 -0878. PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review gffly when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth In Section 1A of these specifications. (Shop drawings available to Contractor upon request to manufacturer.) 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Altemates, and Substitutions. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 Powered Conveyor furnished and installed by Owner. Receipt of delivery, storage, electrical hook -up, approvals and inspections and all other items necessary for a complete installation are by the Contractor. 2.2 Contractor to field verify all clearances and coordinate with manufacturer's requirements. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS 3.1 Owner shall provide Hytrol floor - to-floor conveyor, Model FRB provided by A.E.S. Enterprises, Inc., P.O. Box 6506, E. Brunswick, NJ 08816 Phone (732) 390.0878. 3.1.1 Model FRB - 24" belt width 30" overall width Speed 65 FPM 1 -1/2 HP 480/3/60 TE brake motor Reversing magnetic starter 2 Up/Down push button stations 3.1.2 Belt, bed, double noseover, undertrussed bed, enclosed brake motor, floor supports, drives, pulleys, rollers, idlers, continuous type adjustable guardrail (both sides), takeup screws, brackets, bearings, etc. to be standard equipment per manufacturer's requirements. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. INSTALLATION 4.1 Contractor is responsible for providing A.E.S. all clearance dimensions required for fabrication (this includes clear floor -to -floor, clear width and length of openings, clearances at structural members, etc. Slope installation to be 25 degrees to 30 degrees maximum. 4.2 Electric controls to be installed by the Contractor. Contractor to provide Axiom with all existing voltages and power for their use in preparing controls for installation. 5. GUARANTEE 5.1 Conveyor and all other equipment in this section shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year. END OF SECTION - f DIVISION 14* OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL AGREEMENT WITH PFLOW INDUSTRIES, INC. FOR THE FURNISHING AND INSTALLATION OF MATERIAL LIFTS. MATERIAL HAS BEEN PREORDERED. FOR INFORMATION AND COORDINATION CALL CAROLYN SCULEY (414. 4624810). PART 1: GENERAL 1. RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.1 The general provisions of Division 1 apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.3 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.3.1 Shall be submitted for review oh( when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. (Shop drawings available to Contractor upon request to manufacturer.) 1.3.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Alternates, and Substitutions. 2. COPE OF WORK 2.1 Material lift fumished and installed by Owner. Receipt of delivery, storage, electrical hook -up, approvals, inspections and all other items necessary for a complete installation are by the Contractor. 2.2 Contractor to field verify all clearances and coordinate with manufacturer requirements. 2.3 Contractor to provide concrete pit at first floor, size indicated on the drawings. PART 2: PRODUCTS 3. MATERIALS 3.1 Owner shall provide Pflow floor -to -floor vertical lift, Model HL-4 as manufactured by Pflow Industries, Inc., 5045 N. 35th Street, Milwaukee, WI 53209. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila, Washington LIFT 3.2 Characteristics: 3.2.1 Capacity: 4,000 lbs 3.2.2 Carriage: 5' wide x 6' long with safety railings on 3 sides. Safety chain across operating end. 3.2.3 Hydraulic: 5 hp motor pump. 3.2.4 Actuation: Operating speed 47 fpm. 3.2.5 Vertical Rise: Height (floor to floor) indicated on drawings. 3.2.6 Operation: Two (2) momentary pressure up -down -stop push button stations. 3.2.7 Enclosures: Full enclosure both levels with wall serving as a rear panel for the enclosures. Both levels equipped with interlocked gates. 3.3 Guide rails, enclosures, steel deck, controls, hydraulic cylinders, floor supports, kick plates, brackets, etc. to be standard Pflow equipment per manufacturer's requirements. PART 3: EXECUTION 4. INSTALLATION 4.1 Contractor is responsible for providing Pflow all clearance dimensions required for fabrication (this includes clear floor - to-floor, clear width and length of openings, clearances at structural members, pit dimensions, etc. 4.3 Electric controls to be installed by the Contractor. Contractor to provide Pflow with all existing voltages and power for their use in preparing controls for installation. 5. GUARANTE§ 5.1 Lift and all other equipment in this section shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year. - END OF SECTION - *SECTION 14B -1 05/05/98 DIVISION 15* PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERA!, 1.1 All mechanical work shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of this Section and all Sections of Division 1. 1.2 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Substitutions, and Alternates. 1.3 All piping work for mechanical and plumbing systems shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of Section 15B. 1.4 All air distribution systems and accessories shall be governed by and subject to the provisions of Section 15E. 1.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.6 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.6.1 Shall be submitted for reviewer when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.6.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean if required under the provisions of Section 1A", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.7 See Section 1J for list of Owner- supplied Items. 2. PROTECTION AND INSTALLATION 2.1 All mechanical equipment and materials stored on the site shall be suitably sheltered from the elements. All materials and items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces. All equipment shall be protected against dirt, water, and corrosive or mechanical damage, and theft. 2.2 All mechanical systems and equipment shall be stored, protected, installed, tested, adjusted, and started up in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions and instructions. Each Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of any conflict between any requirement of the Contract Documents and the manufacturers' instructions and shall receive the Engineer's written instructions before proceeding with the work. Any work that does not comply with the manufacturers' instructions or such written Instructions from the Engineer shall be corrected by the Contractor at no increase in the contract amount or additional cost to other trades. 2.3 All mechanical systems and equipment shall be installed to permit removal of coils, heat exchangers, fan shafts, fan wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves, drives, and all other parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. The installations shall be arranged such that the removal can be accomplished without damage to the part removed and without damage to or disassembly of any other equipment, piping, device, or system. 2.4 All anchor bolts, inserts, supports, and installation hardware shall be provided by the Contractor responsible for installing the respective equipment or system unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified. Each Contractor shall be responsible for the location of all anchoring hardware, inserts, supports, and related accessories. 2.5 All open ends of pipes and equipment connections shall be capped or plugged (until final connections are made) to keep out dirt and other foreign materials. Caps and plugs shall be designed for the intended purpose. Plugs of rags, waste, Insulation, or similar materials shall not be used for plugging. BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS *SECTION 15A -1 2.6 Equipment and materials of the same general type shall, in as much as practical, be of the same manufacturer throughout the work for uniform appearance, operation, maintenance, and repair. 2.7 If the size of any piping, valves, devices, ductwork, or related accessories is not clearly evident on the Drawings, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer prior to proceeding with the work. 2.8 All V -belt, chain, coupling, gear, and similar rotating drives shall be equipped with a protective guard provided by the Contractor installing the equipment. Other than factory furnished guards, all guards shall be constructed of small pattern, flat expanded metal over a steel angle frame or rigid sheet metal guard securely bolted to the floor and/or equipment. Provide a tachometer hole at the motor shaft and driven equipment shaft for guards protecting field adjustable drives and all belt driven equipment. All motor couplings, such as with base mounted pumps, shall be provided with sheet metal coupling guards. All guards, other than factory finished guards, shall be painted with rust inhibiting primer and a final heavy coat of enamel to match the adjacent equipment. 2.9 All mechanical equipment shall be installed in a rigid and secure manner and shall be installed plumb, level, and square with the building, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. All piping connections to pumps and other equipment shall be installed without strain, distortion, or excessive forces in the piping or on the equipment. 3. THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL WORK 3.1 General 3.1.1 The following specifications are the general requirements for thermal insulation for all mechanical systems. The specific insulation requirements for systems and equipment shall be as specified in the respective Sections of Division 15. 3.1.2 Refer to Section 15B for the basic requirements governing the application of thermal insulation common to all piping systems. 3.1.3 Each contractor shall be responsible for the insulation on all work installed under his contract. If certain equipment is furnished by the Owner or others, but installed by the Contractor, the cost of the required Insulation shall be included in the Contractor proposal unless otherwise noted on the drawing or specified herein. 3.1.4 Thermal insulation work shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by workmen regularly engaged in this type work. Insulation work may be done by an Insulation subcontractor. The name of each insulation subcontractor shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to authorization of the work by the respective contractor. 3.2 Materials and Installation 3.2.1 All thermal and acoustical Insulation materials shall be the products of Owens- Corning, Certain -teed Products CSG Group, or Johns - Manville, except as otherwise specified. 3.2.2 All insulation materials used shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used) fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure ASTM E -84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding flame spread of 25, smoke developed of 50, and fuel contributed of 50. Babies "R" Us - Tukvyila, Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 15* 3.2.3 Any treatment of facing or jackets applied to meet the above fire and smoke hazard ratings shall be permanent. The use of water soluble treatments is prohibited. 3.2.4 Insulation accessories, such as coatings, adhesives, mastics, tapes, and cloths shall have the sane component fire and smoke hazard ratings as specked above. 3.2.5 All insulating materials or their containers shall be labeled to Indicate that the fire and smoke hazard ratings do not exceed the above requirements. 3.2.6 All insulation shall be applied and installed in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's instructions using the materials, accessories, and methods required to meet the fire and smoke hazard ratings. 3.2.7 Insulation shall be applied on clean, dry surfaces after inspections, testing, and any other operations requiring exposed conditions are completed. 3.2.8 All cold surfaces shall be insulated using vapor barrier with permeability rating suitable for the intended service. Vapor barrier shall be continuous and unbroken with all joints properly sealed. 3.2.9 All existing insulation on existing piping, equipment, or systems that is damaged due to relocation of equipment, new piping or sheet metal connections, or other operations under the contract, shall be patched or replaced to match the existing insulation and finishes. New insulation work which is subsequently damaged due to negligence shall be repaired or replaced at the cost of the contractor causing the damage. 3.2.10 Pipe and extemally applied duct insulation shall be continuous through wall and floor openings except at penetrations through fire rated construction and where penetrations are required to be firestopped. Duct linings shall be interrupted at fire dampers as required to avoid interference with the fire damper operation. Sleeves for insulated piping and externally insulated ductwork penetrating walls and floors shall be sized to accommodate the specified insulation thickness except where insulation must be interrupted as specified above. 4. 1.AYOUTAND PLANNING 4.1 Contractor shall be responsible to layout, plan, and locate all systems, equipment, ductwork, and piping based on acairate field measurements and shop drawings or certified prints as required to properly install, maintain, repair and operate all systems and equipment. Contractor shall not scale the drawings to locate equipment, ductwork or piping. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement and routing. Contractor shall plan the work to minimize offsets, to avoid interferences, and to provide for the neat and proper erection of the systems. All piping and ductwork shall be installed as high above floor and /or mezzanine as possible to avoid interference with the Owner - installed fixturing and racking. 5. TESTING. ADJUSTING. AND START -UP 5.1 Contractor shall test, adjust, start-up and place Into proper operation all equipment and systems installed under his contract. Prior to the start-up of any equipment or system, the responsible contractor shall make certain that all equipment is clean, free of foreign matter, all bearings properly lubricated and all precautions in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 5.2 Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, temporary piping, devices, gauges, instrumentation, and equipment required to Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS *SECTION 15A -2 perform testing, adjusting, calibration, start-up, acceptance tests, and operation of the equipment and systems, including work related to start-up services provided by the equipment manufacturers. 5.3 Set points given in the specifications and /or on the drawings for operation, control, and safety devices are for initial trial. Final set points shall be established by Contractor as required to achieve optimum operation under installed conditions. 5.4 Provide taps in piping work as required to Install temporary gauges and/or devices for calibrating and adjusting regulating devices, controls, pumps, etc., whether shown on the drawings or not. 5.5 Heating and Air Conditioning Systems - Tests for the heating systems shall be conducted during winter season and that for the cooling systems shall be conducted during the summer season. However, for air cooled refrigeration equipment, cooling systems shall be charged and put into service at the time of completion regardless of the season. If the cooling systems are put into operation during winter or spring season, contractor shall re -check the systems during the following summer season. If the heating systems are put into operation during warm or mild weather, contractor shall re -check the systems during the following winter season. 5.6 Other Systems - Test shall be performed in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's standard testing procedures or as specifically called for under the individual equipment or system specifications. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 �� w C DIVISION 15* PART 1: GENERAL. 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under this Section shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of the following: SECTION 15A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2 This Section is intended to establish the basic requirements for piping work common to all mechanical and plumbing systems. This Section shall govern all piping work except as otherwise modified in other Sections and /or as required to comply with governing Codes and /or regulations of Utilities. 1.3 Fire Protection Systems: Refer to Section 15G. The installation of all fire protection systems and piping shall comply with the requirements of goveming Codes. The provisions of the National Fire Codes (latest edition) published by the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) shall govem as minimum requirements in the absence of requirements from goveming Codes. 2. PIPING MATERIALS 2.1 The piping materials for each type of mechanical system are specified in the respective sections of these specifications. The specified materials shall be used to establish the base bid by each contractor, unless otherwise specified and /or allowed by addendum. 2.2 Substitute Piping Materials 2.2.1 At the time of bidding, Contractors are encouraged and invited to propose as substitutes any piping materials and /or systems potentially suitable for the services involved in lieu of the specified materials. 2.2.2 Contractor's proposal for substitute materials shall be accompanied by the respective add or deduct to the contract amount. Any substitute piping material accepted by the Owner's Representative shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit data on the substitute in sufficient detail to permit the Engineer to evaluate joining and installation methods, expansion and contraction, corrosion resistance, flow performance, and other pertinent features. Contractor shall be responsible to assure that the substitute materials can be installed properly with the restraints imposed by the geometry and construction features of this project. 2.3 Provide chrome plated escutcheon plates to finish and conceal pipe penetrations through walls in all locations where exposed to view. 3. VALVES 3.1 General 3.1.1 All valve catalog numbers specified herein refer to Jenkins valves, except as otherwise noted. 3.1.2 Equivalent valves as manufactured by Stockham, Fairbanks, Kennedy, Hammond, or Nibco are acceptable for base bid. 3.1.3 At the time of bidding, Contractors are encouraged and invited to propose as substitutes any valves of other manufacturers and /or designs potentially suitable for the applications and services involved In Ileu of the specified valves. Contractor's proposal for substitute valves shall be accompanied by the respective add or deduct to the contract amount. Any substitute valves shall be approved by the Engineer prior to award of the contract by the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall, when pabies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS *SECTION 15B -1 requested, submit complete and detailed data on the substitute valves b the Engineer. The data shall include an identification of the proposed service and application of each valve. 3.1.4 Hose -end valves (H.E.V.) shall be provided as gate valves with hose -thread adaptor having 3/4" hose thread, except as otherwise noted or specified. 3.1.5 Valves for special applications or systems which are not specified in this section shall be specified in the appropriate section of Division 15. 3.2 Gate Valves 3.2.1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water 3.2.1.1 2 -1/2" and larger - Fig. 651 -A, 125 Ib., IBBM (iron body, bronze mounted), solid wedge, OS &Y, flanged. 3.2.1.2 2" and smaller - Fig. 47 -U, 1251b., bronze, rising stem, solid wedge disc, union bonnet, screwed. 3.3 Globe Valves 3.3.1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water 3.3.1.1 2 -1/2" and larger- Fig. 613, 125 Ib., IBBM, OSBY, bolted bonnet, regrind -renew beveled bronze disc and seat ring, flanged. 3.3.1.2 2" and smaller - Fig. 106-A, 150 Ib., bronze, composition disc, disc holder, screw -over bonnet, screwed. 3.4 Check Valves 3.4.1 Domestic Hot and Cold Water 3.4.1.1 2 -12" and larger - Fig. 624, 125 Ib., IBBM, swing check, bolted cap, regrind -renew bronze seat and disc, flanged. 3.4.1.2 2" and smaller - Fig. 92 -A, 125 Ib., bronze, swing check, regrinding bronze disc, screwed. 3.5 Gas Systems 3.5.1 2 -12" and larger -ACF (WKM) Fig. R -1431, 200 psig WOG, semi - steel, lubricated plug, flanged; with operating wrench. 3.5.2 2" thru 1" - ACF (WKM) Fig. R -1430, 200 psig WOG, semi- steel, stainless steel spring lubricated plug, screwed; with operating wrench. 3.5.3 3/4" and 1/2" - ACF (WKM) Fig. D -125, 200 psig WOG, semi - steel, stainless steel spring lubricated plug, screwed; with operating wrench. 3.5.4 Lubricant used shall be suitable for intended service. At the completion of the work, each valve shall have an operating wrench secured to the valve or pipe by wire or heavy twine. At the option of the Owner's Representative, all operating wrenches shall be tumed over In a steel or 3/4" plywood tool box with hinged lid and hasp. 3.5.5 Companion flanges for flanged valves shall be provided with flat face or with raised face removed. 3.6 Shut -off and Isolation Valves; Open -end Valves 3.6.1 Required shut -off and isolation valves are shown on the drawings and /or specified in the appropriate section of Division 15 of these specifications. 3.6.2 In general, a shut -off valve will be required at the mains and at each piece of equipment so that the system and equipment may be isolated for service or repairs. Valves shall be line size, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 05/05/98 (.... DIVISION 15• BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS *SECTION 15B -a 3.6.3 Each contractor is requested to notify the Contractor prior to any piping installation, if, in the opinion of the contractor, any additional shut -oft valves might be desired. If approved by Owner's Representative, a change order will be issued. 3.7 Drain Valves 3.7.1 The installation of all liquid piping shall be such that the contents may be easily drained at the end or at the beginning of each run. Provide 1/2" drain valves with 3/4" hose -end connections for all drainage, unless larger size is shown on the drawings or required by Code or regulation. 3.7.2 When a sudden change of piping elevation is unavoidable due to construction obstructions, a drain valve must be installed at the low point for draining. 4. JOINING OF PIPING SYSTEM$ 4.1 Threaded Joints 4.1.1 All steel or wrought iron pipes with threaded joints shall have full cut, taper threads and the interior of the ppe shall be reamed out clean and to full size of pipe. 4.1.2 Factory threaded pipe shall be furnished with thread protector during shipment and until pipe is installed. 4.1.3 Threaded pipe joints shall be made with an approved pipe thread compound, applied to male threads only. 4.2 Sweat Joints 4.2.1 All copper piping shall have sweat joints, except at screwed valves and devices where sweat -to- threaded adapters shall be provided. 4.2.2 Solders for Sweat Joints - For domestic hot and cold water and DWV services, joints shall be made with lead -free soldering; for refrigeration service, joints shall be made with silver solder, 35 or 45% alloy. 4.3 Welded Joints 4.3.1 Welded joints shall be made by the shielded metal -arc process. Welders shall be currently qualified by tests in accordance with the Standards for Qualification of the American Welding Society or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. For portions of the work falling within the jurisdiction of ASME Code, welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Standards. The level and type of welder qualification shall be consistent with the pressures, temperatures, hazards of the respective systems, and as required by governing Codes. 4.3.2 As minimum requirements, welding work shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS and /or ASME Specifications to assure proper procedures for joint preparation, joint alignment, electrode selection, and welding techniques. 4.4 Use of Fittings and Unions 4.4.1 All changes in direction and size of pipe shall be made with fittings. No mitering, saddling, or welding or smaller pipe into larger will be permitted. Run -outs in steel or wrought Iron piping (except galvanized), one -half the size of the main or smaller may be made by use of "Weld-O-Lets"; runouts larger than one -half the main size shall be made with tees. 4.4,2 Unions shall be provided at the connections to all equipment unless the connections are made with flanged fittings or mechanical couplings. 4.5 Connection Between Dissimilar Metals 4.5.1 No direct connection between dissimilar metals is permitted. 4.5.2 For screwed connections, use insulating "dielectric" unions. 4.5.3 For flanged connections (including bronze or copper to cast iron or steel; cast iron to steel; or stainless steel to cast iron or steel) the raised face shall be removed or flat face flange provided. A full face, non - metallic, gasket suitable for the service shall separate flange faces. Flange bolts shall be isolated from the dissimilar material by means of insulating sleeves or bushings and washers. 4.6 Gaskets - Gaskets for flanged connections shall be of suitable materials and thicknesses forthe service involved. For natural gas and water systems, "CC Rubber" by Crane, or equal shall be used. For fuel oil systems, cork -fiber or neoprene compressed asbestos shall be used. 4.7 Joints for Sewer Piping Systems - Refer to Section 15C, Plumbing Systems. 4.8 Mechanical Couplings 4.8.1 At the contractor's option, mechanical couplings and fittings may be used for applications as specified herein. Mechanical couplings shall be considered for other systems provided the contractor submits a proposed substitution prior to contract award by the Owner's Representative. 4.8.2 Couplings and fittings shall be Victaulic, Gustin- Bacon, or approved equal. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 77 and /or Style 75. Gaskets shall be grade "H" synthetic and bolts shall be oval neck track -type with hexagonal nuts. Galvanized couplings with cadmium- plated bolts and nuts shall be used with galvanized pipe. Where malleable fitting pattem is not available, standard seamless welding fittings may be used in conjunction with the grooved fittings. 4.8.3 Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with manufacturer's recommended lubricant to facilitate installation. Pipe shall be grooved in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Manufacturer's field instructions shall be provided. 4.9 Joints for other piping systems, If applicable, shall be as specified in the appropriate Section of Division 15. 5. ROUTING OF PIPING SYSTEM 5.1 All piping shall be run parallel to and perpendicular to walls, floors, and ceilings with due allowance for pitch. 5.2 All piping above ground shall be run exposed in Pre -Sales and unfinished areas. 5.3 All piping above ground shall be run concealed in finished areas, including offices and office areas, finished toilet rooms, and similar finished areas. An area shall be considered "finished" whenever a ceiling is required to conceal structural framing. Concealed piping shall be installed within ceiling plenums or spaces, within wall construction, enclosed in furred columns, etc. Piping to be concealed In unfinished areas shall be so noted on the drawings. No water piping shall be concealed in exterior walls. s /• /s • • DIVISION 15• BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS *SECTION 15B -3 5.4 In general, all horizontal piping shall be run as high above finished floors as possible, with proper allowance for pitch. Elevations and routings of piping shown on the drawings are reasonably accurate and are intended as a guide, not as a restriction, for proper piping installation. Contractors shall verify elevations and routings to minimize offsets and to assure proper coordination prior to installation of piping work. 6. SLOPE FOR PIPING SYSTEM 6.1 All piping shaft be sloped to permit draining of the respective piping system. The following minimum slopes shall apply except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. The direction (of slope) given below is the direction of piping fall with respect to the primary fluid conveyed. Domestic Water Sewers, Ind. & San. Natural & branches COMPONENT SLOPE All interior piping 3" and smaller RATE DIRECTION 1" in 40ft. Against flow 1" in 4ft. With flow Sewers 4" and 1" in 8ft. With flow Ind. & S larger Sewers, Ind. Vents 1" in 4ft. From stacks & San. Sewers, Interior 1" in 8ft. With flow Storm Gas Mains 1" in 50ft. With flow 6.2 When governing Codes or utility regulations require slopes greater than those specified above or prohibit slopes as great as those specified above, the Code or regulation shall apply. 6.3 The direction and magnitude of the slope may be varied from the above specifications for special or unavoidable conditions when approved in writing by the Engineer or Owner's Representative. 7. PIPE HANGERS. SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS 7.1 All piping and related devices and equipment shall be securely supported to avoid sagging, vibration, and excessve strain or forces on the piping or related devices and equipment. Proper allowances shall be made for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage. 7.2 Piping shall be supported from structural framing, concrete floor slabs or walls, or masonry walls as the strength of the supporting construction safely permits. 7.3 No piping shall be supported from roof decks, metal side wall, precast concrete side walls, lateral bracing for structural members, or web members of bar joists without prior written approval from the Engineer. 7.4 Each contractor shall provide all beams, channels, angles, Ifni- Strut, and similar members, including brackets, braces, stanchions, saddles, clips, etc., as required to support piping from building framing, platforms, or floor. Column -type supports and stanchions anchored to floor or concrete pad (exterior) shall be permitted only where shown on the drawings, specified herein, or approved by the Engineer. All steel supporting elements for piping shalt be painted with rust Inhibiting primer, white or light grey in color except as otherwise specified. 7.5 Piping supported from field - placed concrete floors or walls shall be attached by means of appropriate inserts installed at the time concrete is poured. Each contractor shall provide all inserts for his portion of the work and shall be responsible for the location of same. 7.6 No cutting or drilling of structural members shall be permitted without prior written approval from the Engineer. 7.7 Hangers and supports shall be trapeze, split or solid ring, clang or clevis type on adjustable hanger rods. Hanger rods shall be attached to beam clamps or other suitable brackets or supports Welding of hanger rods to steel framing will not be permitted. 7.8 Pipe hooks, strap iron, or chains will not be permitted for supporting piping. 7.9 Hangers and supports in direct contact will copper tubing shall be copper plated and suitably isolated from tube to prevent contact between dissimilar metals. All hangers, rods, and supporting devices shall be primed with light grey rust inhibiting primer, cadmium plated, galvanized, or equivalent non - corrosive finishes or materials. 7.10 Piping shall be supported and /or anchored at each change in pipe direction, at branch connections to mains and runouts to equipment, at valves 3" and larger, and at heavy devices. 7.11 Vertical piping shall be supported with riser clamps placed at each floor or ceiling and at each coupling and fitting. Clamps shall not be exposed where exposed piping passes through finished areas. Clamps shall be securely supported by brackets or similar structural members which are in tum supported from suitable building construction. 7.12 The maximum center -to- center spacing of pipe hangers and supports, in feet, shall comply with the following schedule for hard drawn copper tubing, for steel pipe, Schedule 40, and for Schedule 40 PVC. COPPER COPPER PIPE SIZE fQ STEEL PIPE SIZE STEEL 1/2" 4 5 3" 6 8 3/4" 4 6 3 -1/2" - 8 1" 4 -1/2 7 4" 6 -1/2 8 1 -1/4" 5 8 5" - 8 1 -1/2" 5 8 6" 7 -1/2 8 2" 5 8 8" 8 8 2 -1/2" 6 8 10" 8 8 12" 8 8 7.13 Hanger and support spacing for other types of piping shall comply with the following, except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. 7.13.1 Cast Iron Soil Pipe: 8 -feet (maximum) with supports and hangers located at the joints, but not less than one (1) hanger or support for each length of pipe. When 5 -foot sections of pipe are used or when piping is not supported at joints, hanger and support spacing shall not exceed 5 -feet. 7.13.2 Cast Iron or Asbestos- Cement Pressure Pipe: 8 -feet (maximum) with supports and hangers located at the joints, but not less than one (1) hanger or support for each length of pipe. 7.13.3 Plastic or Fiberglass Piping: The maximum spacing of supports and hangers for specified plastic or fiberglass piping shall be as specified in the appropriate section of these specifications. 7.13.4 Substitute Piping Materials or Systems: Contractors offering substitute piping shall submit proposed hanger spacing, preferably the manufacturer's printed recommendations, to the Engineer for approval. 7.14 When any piping, 6" and larger, runs parallel to steel joists (or j3abies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 0 ► 1/ . 1! •k V beams), such piping shall be supported with hangers attached to supports spanning two (2) joist (or beams). When piping runs perpendicular to steel joists (or beams), piping shall be supported by each joist (or beam). All hangers (or support strats) shall be located at joist panel points. 7.15 Refer to separate paragraph covering thermal insulation for additional requirements for hanging and supporting insulated piping. 8. UNDERGROUND PIPING 8.1 Underground piping shall not be laid in contact with rocks, boulders, cinder fill, frozen earth, or any other materials or objects which could cause physical damage to the piping or unusual corrosion action. 8.2 All underground cast iron, vitrified clay, and concrete piping shall be laid with the bottom quadrant (90 degrees) of the piping fully and uniformly supported on a shaped trench bottom, including bell or hub ends, except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings. 8.3 Vitrified clay pipe shall be installed in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM C -12 as minimum requirements. 8.4 Vitrified clay pipe under exterior paved areas shall be installed with the following bedding conditions, unless more stringent conditions are noted on the drawings or required by site conditions. 8.4.1 Total cover over top of pipe 18" or less: Lay pipe with bottom half (180 degrees) in a concrete cradle not less than 4" thick below pipe barrel. 8.4.2 Total cover over top of pipe 30" to 19 ": Lay pipe with bottom quadrant (90 degrees) in a concrete cradle not less than 4" thick below pipe barrel. 8.5 Underground piping subject to thrusts or "pull- apart" forces due to pressure testing, shock loads, or other potential movements shall be anchored with clamps and rods and /or with concrete thrust blocks as required to resist such forces or potential movements. Clamps, rods, or similar metal anchors shall be painted or coated to prevent corrosive action. 9. THERMAL INSULATION - Applications to Piping 9.1 Refer to Section 15A for basic requirements for thermal insulation work and materials. Refer to each Section of Division 15 for the types and thicknesses of insulation and other requirements for insulation of specific systems and equipment. 9.2 The following specifications are for the methods of applications of thermal insulation common to all piping systems. Special and /or additional requirements (if any) for particular systems shall be as specified in the respective Section of Division 15. 9.3 Fittings and Valves - Insulate with equal insulating value and vapor barrier as the respective pipe insulation with built -up covering, with pre - molded (such as Insul -Sure as manufactured by Insul- Coustic, Corp.) or with one piece pre - molded PVC insulated fittings such as manufactured by Zeston. Fittings insulated with built -up and mitered segments shall have cement, mastic, and wrap applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for proper ratings and for a smooth, even, finished appearance, Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 9.3.1 Exposed portions of valves shall be insulated as much as practical, except the hand wheel and exposed portions of the stem. 9.3.2 Apply cements, mastics, and straps in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for proper ratings and for a smooth, even, finished appearance. 9.4 Pipe Saddles 9.4.1 No insulation shall rest directly on pipe supports. Provide heavy gauge galvanized steel or aluminum protector saddles on the bottom half of the piping at each support of sufficient length and stiffness to prevent noticeable deformation of insulation. 9.4.2 "Hot" Piping (hot water, etc.) 9.4.2.1 Piping may be supported by pipe hangers directly, with insulation fitted around the hangers and finished In a similar manner as fittings, or insulation may pass through hangers. 9.4.3 "Cold" Piping (cold water, downspouts, etc.) 9.4.3.1 All insulation of "cold" piping shall pass uninterrupted through pipe hangers. 9.4.3.2 Insulation saddles on which pipe is supported shall be of sufficient density to safely support the weight of piping and contents without noticeable deformation. Bottom portion of the pipe cover shall be provided with galvanized steel or aluminum protectors. 9.4.3.3 Prefabricated pipe saddles shall be "Insul- Shield ", as manufactured by Insul - Coustic Corp., or similar shop fabricated saddles. Sample of shop fabricated saddles shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. 9.5 Accessories 9.5.1 All accessories, specialties, and thermal conducting components on low temperature piping systems shall be insulated with 3/8" thick flexible foam plastic material or insulation and vapor barrier equivalent to adjacent piping. 9.5.2 All accessories, specialties, and thermal conducting components on high temperature piping systems shall be insulated equivalent to adjacent piping. 9.5.3 Insulation for removable components shall be easily removable without disturbing the main piping insulation. 10. CLEANING AND PRESSURE TESTING 10.1 General 10.1.1 Refer to Section 15C for additional requirements relating to Plumbing Systems. 10.1.2 Definition: Cleaning as used herein shall be taken to mean the removal of all materials foreign to the respective piping system which is or could be contaminating, obstructing, or unsightly. 10.2 Cleaning 10.2.1 The interior of all piping work shall be thoroughly cleaned of foreign materials as the work is Installed. 10.2.2 After installation, the interior of all piping shall be cleaned and flushed in accordance with the specifications governing the respective systems. 05/05/98 ... � DIVISION 15• 10.2.3 The exterior of all above grade piping shall be cleaned of mud, dirt, grease, and other foreign materials by brushing and /or washing with suitable solvents or detergents as required to leave the piping clean in general appearance and suitable to receive thermal insulation. Further cleaning and preparation of piping to receive painting, when required, shall be performed by the other Contractor. 10.3 Pressure Testing 10.3.1 All piping shall be pressure tested in accordance with the following specifications and as required by other Sections of Division 15. 10.3.2 Testing work shall be successfully completed prior to application of any thermal insulation or pipe covering, prior to backfilling any buried piping, and prior to enclosure of any concealed piping. 10.3.3 Testing shall be in the presence of the Engineer and /or the Owner's Representative and all authorities having approval jurisdiction over the installed work. Each contractor shall perform and conduct the testing at times mutually agreed upon with the Owner's Representative. 10.3.4 Isolate or remove any and all devices and equipment from the piping prior to the pressure testing if the devices or equipment are not designed to withstand the test pressures. If the maximum pressure rating is not marked on the device or equipment or is otherwise not known to the Contractor, the Engineer shall be noted prior to testing for directions. 10.3.5 Testing shall be repeated or continued until all piping Is proven leak -free. All defects shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Defective welds in welded piping shall be ground off and the piping shall be rewelded. Defective pipe or fittings shall be replaced, not patched or repaired. 10.3.6 Gaseous Fuel Piping - Shall be pneumatically tested with compressed air at a minimum of 25 psig and in no case less than 50% above the operating pressure of the system. Pressure in the section of piping under test shall hold constant for a period of 24 hours after applying correction factors for temperature changes. Where required by code or utility company, a certificate of compliance shall be obtained from the utility company or code enforcing authority. - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington "SECTION 15B -5 BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS DIVISION 15` PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under this Section shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of the following: Section 15A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS Section 15B - BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS 1.2 All work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. 2. SANITARY SEWER SERVICE 2.1 Waste water disposal for this project shall be accomplished by connection to the underground public sewer system as indicated on the drawings. 2.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the entire sewer service installation, including the payment of all one -time fees or charges related to tapping the public sewer main and/or for the sewer service. 2.3 The Contractor shall, during bidding. contact the Sewer Utility jo determine fees and charges and to verify all requirements. The fees and charges shall be identified separately in the Contractor's proposal. During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the sewer service for the project on a timely and proper basis. 2.4 The Contractor shall verify the invert elevation at the point of discharge to the public sewer system and all other related details prior to proceeding with the sewer system. 2.5 The entire sewer service installation shall comply with the regulations of the Sewer Utility and with governing Building Codes. In the absence of goveming codes, provisions of the National Standard Plumbing Code shall govem as minimum requirements. 3. DOMESTIC WATER SERVIC 3.1 Potable water supply for this project shall be obtained by connection to the underground public water main as indicated on the drawings. 3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the entire water service installation, including the payment of all one -time fees or charges related to tapping the public water main and /or metering. The Contractor shall, during bidding, contact the Water Utilitv to determine fees and charges and to verify all requirements. The fees and charges shall be identified separately in the Contractor's proposal, During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the water service for the project on a timely and proper basis. 3.3 The Contractor shall provide all piping, valves, and accessories as required for the installation of the water meter(s). If required by the Water Utility, the Contractor shall furnish and /or Install the water meter(s). 3.4 The entire water service Installation shall comply with the regulations of the Water Utility and with governing Building Codes. In the absence of governing regulations or codes, provisions of the National Standard Plumbing Code shall govern as minimum requirements. *SECTION 15C -1 3.5 Water service piping shall be laid at a depth as necessary to prevent freezing per NFPA Pamphlet 24 and /or Water Utility Standards. 3.6 Separation between underground potable water piping and all underground storm piping, sanitary and industrial sewer piping, and other potentially contaminating sources shall be as required by goveming Codes and regulations. As minimum requirements, maintain a separation of 10 -feet of undisturbed earth between underground potable water and sewer piping. Where water piping must cross over sewer piping, maintain a clear separation of not less than 18 inches between pipes. Sewer piping shall not be laid above water piping unless approved in writing by the Engineer. 3.7 The Contractor shall be responsible to plan and coordinate the water service piping to interface with and comply with the fire protection requirements of this project. Water piping installed without regard to these requirements shall be reworked and/or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. PIPING MATERIALS (Except as otherwise required by goverrinq Codes/; 4.1 Sanitary Sewer System 4.1.1 Service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, ASTM A74, coated inside and out with tar pitch varnish, shall be used in the following applications, and where noted on the drawings. 4.1.1.1 Underground, within building lines and to not less than 5- feet beyond. 4.1.1.2 Underground vent piping, 2" minimum size. 4.1.1.3 Interior above ground soil, waste, and vent piping 2" and larger. 4.1.2 Standard strength vitrified clay pipe and fittings, ASTM C13, shall be used for underground, exterior of building lines, below unpaved areas. 4.1.3 Extra strength vitrified clay pipe and fittings, ASTM C200, shall be used for underground, exterior of building lines, below paved areas. Where indicated on the drawings, cast iron soil piping shall be used. 4.1.4 Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, ASTM Al20, with screwed, galvanized cast iron drainage pattem fittings shal be used for all interior above ground soil and waste piping, 1 -1/2" and smalier. Vent piping 2" and larger above ground shall be cast iron soil pipe or galvanized steel pipe. 4.1.5 At the PBC's option, underground sewer piping exterior of building lines may be gasketed joint PVC, ASTM D -3034, equivalent to Carlon PS 46. Interior DWV piping (above and below grade) may be Schedule 40 PVC pipe with drainage pattern fittings joined by solvent cementing or thermal bonding. Installation, joining, bedding, and hanger spacing (100 degrees F. ambient basis) shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations for each respective piping system. 4.1.6 DWV copper pipe and fittings may be used for above grade piping. 4.1.7 Interior, (above grade and below grade) storm drainage piping, when indicated on the drawings, shall be schedule 40 PVC with drainage pattem fittings or service weight C.I. Soil pipe as specified for sanitary sewers. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 • ► 4.2 Water Systems (Domestic Hot/Cold and Fire Service) 4.2.1 For combined domestic and fire service, underground main water piping 6" and larger shall be push -on joint, cement lined gray cast iron pipe and fittings, ANSI A21.6 (AWWA C106), ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110) and ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111), having ANSI A21.6 thickness designation of 22, equivalent cement lined ductile iron pipe and fittings, or J -M Manufacturing "Blue Brute" Class 200. 4.2.2 Underground domestic water service 3" and larger shall conform to the above specifications for combined fire and domestic service. 4.2.3 Underground main water service piping 2 -1/2" and smaller shall be Type K copper tubing with solder -type wrought copper fittings (cast bronze when necessary) or Schedule 40 PVC with solvent cemented joints. 4.2.4 Interior above ground piping shall comply with the following: 4.2.4.1 Pipe - Type L copper tubing, hard temper, ASTM B88. 4.2.4.2 Fittings - Solder -type wrought copper, (cast bronze where necessary). 4.2.4.3 Unions - Wrought copper solder - joint, copper -to- copper. 4.2.5 Cold water piping may be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent cemented joints. At changes in material and /or where unavoidable, PVC threaded joints shall be Schedule 80, minimum. Installation, joining, and hanger spacing (100 degrees ambient basis) shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations. 4.3 Joints for Cast Iron Soil Piping 4.3.1 Joint shall be properly packed with jute, oakum, or hemp and filled with molten lead not less than 1" deep. Lead shall be virgin pig lead conforming to the standards of the Lead Industries Association. Reclaimed lead shall not be used. Surfaces of hub and spigot shall ba cleaned prior to joint mark- up. 4.3.2 At the PBC's option, compression -type neoprene gasketed joints, such as Tyler's 'Ty -Seal" or equivalent, may be used. Joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations utilizing the proper gasket lubricant, such as Tyler's "Lubri/Fast ", and the proper tooling to drive the spigot into the gasketed hub. This method must comply with governing Codes. 4.3.3 At the PBC's option, the pipe, fittings, and joints may be of the "No -Hub" design conforming to Standards 301 -72 of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute in the following applications and where permitted by governing Codes. Joints shall consist of neoprene gaskets, corrugated stainless steel shield and worm gear draw bands. Draw bands shall be tightened alternately with the proper torquing tools. Installations shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations and Pamphlet 100 of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. The "No -Hub" system shall be acceptable for above ground piping only. 4.4 Joints for Vitrified Clay Piping 4.4.1 For straight piping runs, joints shall be properly packed with jute or oakum and filled with cement mortar. Surfaces to be joined shall be cleaned prior to joint make -up. 4.4.2 At the PBC's option, compression joints conforming to ASTM C425 may be used on straight runs and where Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington permitted by goveming Codes. Surfaces to be joined shall be cleaned prior to joint make -up. Lubricants and joint assembly shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations utilizing the proper tooling. 4.4.3 Curvilinear runs of VCP shall be installed with plain end pipe joined with compression sleeve couplings conforming to ASTM C- 594 -70. Type B, latest revision such as manufactured by Dickey or equivalent. Surfaces to be joined shall be cleaned prior to joint make -up, and joints shall be made In accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations utilizing the proper lubricant and tooling. At the PBC's option, this method of joining may be used fa all clay piping work. This method must comply with governing Codes. 5. PIPING SPECIALTIE 5.1 Vacuum Relief Valves - Watts No. 36A for water service on water heaters installed above fixture outlets. 5.2 Water Pressure Reducing Valves - Watts with integral strainer and built -in bypass check valve feature. Type, size and no -flow set point pressure as indicated on the drawings (if required). 5.3 Shock Arrestors 5.3.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the quiet operation of the water system. 5.3.2 Provide shock arrestors to absorb hydrostatic shock and vibration in the piping. Shock arrestors shall be sized and located as per manufacturer's recommendations. 5.3.3 Manufacturer: J.R. Smith 5000 Series; Josam No. 1485, Zurn, Wade Shockstops, W -5 to W -100 and WP Series, Amtrol Diatrol as equals. 5.3.4 Where shock arrestors are not used, provide air chambers as follows: All fixtures - At each hot and cold water supply, provide 18" air chamber one (1) pipe size larger than the supply connection to the respective fixture, minimum 1 ". 5.4 Vacuum Breakers 5.4.1 Provide approved vacuum breakers as indicated, specified or required. Vacuum breakers shall be provided for plumbing fixtures as specified under Plumbing Fixtures. 5.4.2 When indicated on the drawings, provide vacuum breakers as follows: Angle pressure type, Sloan V- 300 -A, V- 188 -A, V -350A up to 3/4 ", or approved equal. 1" and over Watts No. 288A, or approved equal. 5.5 The Contractor shall fumish and install a thermal expansion tank in the water supply piping to the water heater when a backflow prevention device, pressure reducing valve assembly or check valve is installed on the Incoming water service. 5.5.1 Thermal expansion tank shall be model ST, "Therm-x-trol" as manufactured by Amtrol, Inc., West Warick, RI 02893. 5.5.2 Thermal expansion tank size and installation shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. 6. DRAINS 6.1 Provide floor drains and special purpose drains in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. 6.2 Drains shall be the product of Josam, Wade, Blake, Jay R. 05/05/98 DIVISION 15* Smith, or Zum. 6.3 All drain outlets shall be the same size as the size of the connecting piping unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Drains used with hub and spigot cast iron pipe shall have caulked outlet unless otherwise required by goveming Codes. 6.4 Drains may be installed by means of a Neoprene gasketed Joint fumished and guaranteed leakproof by the drain manufacturer, such as the Josam "Jiffee- Joint ", where permitted by goveming Codes. 6.5 All floor drains shall be installed flush with finished floor. 6.6 All floor drains shall be installed with deep seal P- traps. Provide trap seal primers where required by governing Codes. Floor drains shall be properly located to serve the respective equipment and areas. Prior to rough -in, coordinate and verify drain locations with the Owner's Representative, Contractor, and other contractors as required. 7. CLEAN OUTS 7.1 Sanitary Sewers 7.1.1 Provide clean outs as required to comply with governing Codes. The following specifications shall apply as minimum requirements. 7.1.2 Clean outs and accessories shall be the products of Josam, Wade, Blake, Jay R. Smith, or Zum. 7.1.3 Where possible, clean outs shall no be located in the Sales Area. In general, clean outs shall be provided in locations indicated on the drawings and shall be spaced not more than 50 -feet apart for interior horizontal piping. Provide a clean out on all soil and waste stacks; locate each stack clean out at 18" to 36" above finished ground floor. 7.1.4 Clean outs shall be of the same size as the pipe served up to and including 4" lines and not less than 4" for larger lines. 7.1.5 Clean outs shall be extended to and flush with finished floor. Exterior clean outs shall be installed in an 18" x 18" x 6" thick concrete pad flush with final grade thickened at the center to encase the pipe joint. 7.1.6 Clean outs shall be installed with accessibility for rodding purposes. In the absence of goveming Codes, the provisions of the National Standard Plumbing Code shall apply. 7.1.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting the proper types of clean outs, including accessories and access covers, for each cleanout application. Each cleanout installed shall be compatible with the surrounding construction and finishes. The following specifications shall govem for the given applications unless surrounding construction or finishes preclude their use. Application Exposed Clean outs 58500 Floor Clean outs Concrete Floors Vinyl Tiled Floors Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton Josam Series Number 58180 or 58190 58000 -12 or 58010 -12 PLUMBING SYSTEMS *SECTION 15C -3 Carpeted Floors Terrazzo Floors Ceramic or Quarry Tiled Floors Wall Clean outs Concrete or Masonry Drywall on Studs Plaster on Studs Ceramic Tile on Drywall Exterior Clean outs 58000 -14 or 58010 -14 58040 -1 -13 or 58050 -2 -13 58020 -2 or 58030 -2 58710 -4 or 58790 -4 58710 -4 or 58790 -4 58700 -2 or 58750 -2 58740 -2 or 58770 -2 Unpaved Areas 58180 or 58190 Paved Areas 58300-5-15 or 58310 -5 -15 7.1.8 Clean outs with Inside caulked outlets may be installed by means of a Neoprene gasketed joint furnished and guaranteed by the cleanout manufacturer, such as Josam "Jiffee /Joint ", where permitted by goveming Codes. 8. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM 8.1 Provide plumbing fixtures and trim in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. 8.2 Fixtures and trim shall be the products of American Standad, Kohler, Eljer, or Crane, except as otherwise noted on the drawings or in these specifications. 8.3 All flush valves shall be Sloan and shall be equipped with approved vacuum breakers. 8.4 Carriers for wall hung fixtures shall be the products of Josam, Wade, Blake, Jay R. Smith, or Zurn. 8.5 Unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, all fittings and trim shall be chrome plated brass and shall be of the same manufacturer as the fixtures, including P- traps, supplies, stops, and union connections. Strap wrenches shal be used where required to prevent damage to chrome plated pipe and fittings. 8.6 All fixtures shall be set firm and squarely aligned with walls and floors. All fixtures shall be properly connected to soil, waste, and vent piping and required water supplies in a rigid and substantial manner, without damage to any adjoining work or finish. Provide chrome plated escutcheons at exposed wall penetrations for all piping work. 8.7 Stops or gate valves shall be Installed in the hot and cold water supplies to each fixture or piece of equipment. Provide union connection on the fixture or equipment side of each stop or gate valve. 8.8 Provide shock arrestors or air chambers as specified herein on hot and cold water supplies to fixtures. 8.9 Lavatories, sinks, and all other fixtures where carrier is not applicable for wall mounting shall be installed with through bolts secured with square steel plates (Min. 4" square by 10 gauge) for bearing and support on the opposite side of the wall. 8.10 Fixtures mounted to partition walls where bearing plates and bolts would be exposed In an adjacent room shall be Installed with not less than 1/4 inch toggle bolts or other fasteners acceptable to the Engineer. Lead shield anchor bolts will not be acceptable. 05/05/98 DIVISION 15• PLUMBiNG$YSTEMS *SECTION 15C-4 9. HOT WATER HEATER 9.1 Provide hot water heater as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. 9.2 Water heater shall be equipped with Watts temperature- pressure relief valve. The relief valve discharge for the unit shall be piped unobstructed and undiminished in size to the floor receptor. Relief valve discharge piping shall comply with goveming Codes. Piping shall be pitched downward in the direction of flow, shall be routed without upward offset, and shall not constitute a hazard for tripping or head room. 9.3 Heater tank shall be insulated with glass fiber insulation covered with a steel sheet metal jacket having a baked enamel finish. Tank shall be equipped with manual drain valve with 3/4" hose thread outlet. 9.4 Hot Water Heater. Energy efficient unit meeting state and local Codes as manufactured by A.O. Smith located as indicated on the drawings. Water heater shall be U.L. listed. Equivalent units by other manufacturers will be acceptable far base bid. Type, size, voltage, and KW as specified on the drawings. 10. THERMAL INSULATION 10.1 Refer to Section 15A for general requirements and workmanship, and to Section 15B for methods of application. 10.2 For insulation work, the Contractor may employ an insulation subcontractor specializing and experienced in this work. Subcontractor shall meet the approval of the Owner's Representative. 10.3 Hot and Cold Water Piping - All exposed piping and all piping concealed above ceilings shall be insulated with 1" thick Fiberglas 25 ASJ /SSL insulation with all service jacket (ASJ) In all cases where accumulation of condensation might damage construction materials, piping shall be insulated. 10.3.1 Contractor may use 1/2" thick closed cell pipe insulation: Armstrong Armaflex; IMCOA "Imcolock "; or approved equal. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All butt ends and joints shall be sealed moisture tight in accordance with the insulation manufacturer's recommendations. 10.4 Electric Water Coolers - Portion of condensate and waste drain pipes within the coolers and exposed shall be insulated with 3/8" thick flexible closed -cell foam - plastic material. 10.5 Hot Water Heater - Shall be factory insulated. 10.6 Interior above grade storm piping (when indicated on drawings): insulate all horizontal piping, including riser elbows, and all roof drain bodies as specified for water piping. 11. CLEANING AND DISINFECTION 11.1 Definition: Cleaning as used herein shall be taken to mean the removal of all materials foreign to the respective system, fixture, or equipment which is or could be contaminating, obstructing, or unsightly. 11.2 The interior of all piping shall be cleaned as it is being installed. Special care shall be taken to keep potable water piping clean and free of contaminating materials, including rodents and vermin. 11.3 Prior to testing, completed sections of sewer piping shall be flushed to clean and assure the absence of obstructions. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 11.4 Prior to testing and insulating, all water piping shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed by opening valves and faucets, etc., until the discharged water is clean and clear. The exterior of all above grade water piping shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, grease, plaster, concrete, caulking, and other loose or adhered foreign materials. 11.5 The exterior of exposed sewer piping shall be cleaned as specified above for water piping. 11.6 All fixtures, water heaters, water coolers, and other fixtures and equipment installed under the PBC's contract shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be clean when tumed over to the Owner. Gummed labels and gum residue shall be removed unless such label constitutes name plate or performance data or is the certification of a nationally recognized rating agency such as U.L., AGA, ASME, etc. 11.7 All floor drains, roof drains, P- traps, strainers, cleanouts, access panels, aerators, piping specialties, and special fixture and trim shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be clean when tumed over to the Owner. 11.8 After all cleaning, testing, adjusting, and insulating work is completed, all domestic and potable hot and cold water piping systems, including related tanks, heaters, pumps, and equipment, shall be thoroughly disinfected in accordance wit governing Codes prior to placing into service for potable use. In the absence of governing Codes, the disinfection shall be in accordance with AWWA Standards C- 601 -54 or C-601-68 for piping and AWWA Standard D- 102-64 for tanks, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 12. TESTING AND ADJUSTING 12.1 This Contractor shall notify the Administrative Authority having jurisdiction over plumbing work and the Owner's Representative three (3) working days before the test will be made. If necessary, tests on portions of the work may be made and these portions of work may be concealed after being proven satisfactory. All tests shall be made in the presence of proper authorities. Repairs of defects that are discovered as a result of inspections or tests shall be made with new materials. Caulking of screwed joints, cracks or holes will not be accepted. Tests shall be repeated after defects have been eliminated. 12.2 Domestic Hot and Cold Water Piping 12.2.1 All piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 125 psig until leak free. Pressure in each test section shall be maintained at the initial test pressure for not less than 12 hours. 12.2.2 All leaks shall be repaired and the pressure test shall be repeated as specified above until proven leak -free. 12.2.3 All devices or items of equipment not designed or recommended by the manufacturer for the test pressures shall be removed or effectively isolated from the test pressure. 12.3 Sewer and Sanitary Piping 0510198 12.4 Check all faucets, stops, and isolating valves for leaks and repair and/or adjust as required. 12.5 Check and adjust the temperature and operation of all hot water heaters in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 12.6 Check and adjust the bubbler stream on all water coolers and drinking fountains. Check and adjust the timing cycle of all flush valves as applicable. 12.7 Check, test, and adjust as required all equipment, fixtures, and devices installed under the PBC's contract in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Equipment requiring lubrication shall be checked and lubricated, if required, prior to start-up. - END OF SECTION, • DIVISION 15* PLUMBING SYSTEMS *SECTION 15C-5 12.3.1 Waste, Drain and Vent - Shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with the goveming plumbing code, but In no case less than the "water test" method specified In the National Standard Plumbing Code. In general, all piping shall be tested with not less than 10-feet of water column except the uppermost 10-feet of the system. Piping exposed to subfreezing temperatures may be tested by the BOCA "air teat" method with the approval of the Code enforcing authorities. 12.3.2 Sewers - Shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of local sewer inspection authority. In general, the sewer under test shall be subject to a minimum pressure of 10-feet water column, or a flow test to be witnessed by the sewer inspector. Babies "R" Us - Tokwila. Washington 05/05/98 • DIVISION 15* HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT *SECTION 15D -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL CONTRACT WITH LENNOX, BERNER AND GREENHECK TO FURNISH SELECTED HVAC UNITS, VENTILATION FANS, ACCESSORIES AND CONTROLS, AS SPECIFIED HEREIN AND NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. THE HVAC SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DELIVERY COORDINATION, RECEIVING, SETTING AND INSTALLING THE OWNER- FURNISHED EQUIPMENT AS WELL AS THE ONE -YEAR PARTS AND LABOR WARRANTY FROM THE DATE OF STORE OPENING. EVEN THOUGH THE EQUIPMENT IS OWNER - FURNISHED, THIS DOES NOT RELIEVE THE CONTRACTOR OF ANY RESPONSIBILITIES RELATING TO THIS EQUIPMENT, ITS INSTALLATION OR WARRANTY. PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under this Section shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of the following: Section 15A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS Section 15B - BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS 1.2 All work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. 1.3 Upon receiving all Owner - fumished HVAC equipment requimg CFC or HCFC refrigerants for operation, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for compliance with all State and Federal regulations relating to clean air and /or venting of CFC and /or HCFC refrigerants until the equipment is tumed over to Toys "R" Us for operation and maintenance. This responsibility shal Include all work relating to charging and /or recharging any and all HVAC refrigerant systems furnished and /or installed, or any existing equipment reused, under the HAC's contract. 2. VENTILATION FANS AND ACCESSORIES(Owner - furnished equipment) 2.1 Fans shall be provided by the Owner. Coordinate delivery of, arrange for rigging of, receive, rig and install in place the ventilation fans with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. 2.2 Each fan shall be provided with the accessories as noted in the schedule on the drawings. 2.3 When fans are specified on the schedule to have a disconnect switch, the switch and wiring between the switch and fan motor shall be factory installed. 2.4 The curb cap of curb mounted fans shall be set in a bed of water proof sealant on the roof curb and securely attached with not less than #10 screws on 9 inch centers. Provide at least two screws on each side for small units. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify the size and location of each roof opening with the Contractor prior to the cutting and /or placement of openings. 2.5 The other contractors shall provide power wiring and motor starters for all fans and all control wiring and devices for all manually controlled fans. 2.6 Except as otherwise noted or specified, the Contractor shall provide control devices, wiring, and work for all fans which are automatically controlled. All work shall comply with the NEC, latest edition. Control devices shall be Honeywell. 2.7 Refer to Section 15E for specifications governing prefabricated roof curbs. 3. GAS FIRED UNIT HEATERS 3.1 Provide gas fired unit heaters as indicated and scheduled on the drawings and In accordance with the following. 3.2 Units shall be as manufactured by Reznor or Modine. Size, type, features, accessories, and ratings shall be equivalent to scheduled units. 3.3 Except as noted on the drawings, units shall be installed as close to the roof deck as practical for maximum clearance to floor. Provide supporting steel members and hardware as required to secure the units. 3.4 Each unit shall be provided with a space thermostat which shall control the fan and bumer. The Contractor shall furnish and install all control wiring. Units shall have aluminized steel heat exchanger, spark ignited pilot with electronic flame supervision and 100% safety shut off, automatic gas valve, pressure regulator, transformer, high limit and fan delay controls, gas cock, and pilot valve. Provide fill size dirt leg (6" length), stop valve, and union connection for gas supply to each unit. 3.5 Except for ducted units, provide Horizontal Louvers on all units. Provide vertical louvers as scheduled on the drawings. 3.6 Units shall be AGA Certified, CGA approved, and approved for use in the state where the project is located. Manufacturer's standard warranty shall apply. Refer to separate Section 15F for gas vents. 4. AIR CURTAINS (Owner - Fumished Equipment) (When included on the project). 4.1 Coordinate delivery of, arrange for rigging of, receive, rig and install in place the air curtains with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on the drawings and according to the following specifications. 4.2 Air curtains shall be provided by Owner and installed by the Contractor in sizes and locations as scheduled and Indicated on the drawings. Refer to Architectural drawings for additional installation provisions. 4.3 Air curtains shall be Bemer Model Mark as specified on the drawings and as manufactured by Bemer International Corp. Contacts for air curtains are: Cooper Equipment, John W. Cooper, phone (314) 367 -1311 or Berner International, 1- 800 - 245 -4455. 4.4 Units shall consist of a base frame of 16 gauge steel on which is mounted fans and two speed air over split capacitor, double - shafted motor(s) with built -in thermal protection. Double inlet forward curved steel fan wheels shall be supplied. A 2.5" deep nozzle shall extend the full length of the unit and shall be equipped with aluminum vanes adjustable ±20 °. A wall mounting plate of 16 gauge steel shall be supplied. The wall mounting plate and base frame shall be made of aluminized steel. The cover housing shall be made of .050" satin anodized aluminum with a matching satin anodized aluminum Inlet grille. 4.5 Units shall be complete with operating and safety controls. Integral switching permits selection of "OFF ", "FAN ONLY" and speed selection. Units shall operate on low speed (2000 fpm) or high speed (3000 fpm). The units shall be complete with unit- mounted, factory installed and wired, disconnect switches for power connections. 4.6 Units shall be AMCA Certified Tested in accordance with Air Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 05/05/98 DIVISION 15* Curtain Test Procedure Standard #220. 4.7 Units shall be U.L. Listed. 5. ROOF TOP COMBINATION HEATING AND COOLING UNIT (OWNER- FURNISHED EQUIPMENT) 5.1 Coordinate delivery of, arrange for rigging of, receive, rig and install in place roof top combination heating and cooling units with all accessories as indicated and scheduled on drawings and according to the following specifications. 5.2 The roof top units shall be Lennox (refer to plans). Units shall be furnished by the Owner. The national account representative for Lennox is Mr. Dennis Lane. He can be contacted by phone: (908) 685 -9082. Each unit shall be a complete unitary package consisting of heating section (when specified), condensing section, cooling coil, blower, controls, wiring, piping, casing, and structural base. The entire unit shall be factory wired, piped, assembled, charged and tested in all modes of operation. Gas - fired units shall be AGA certified for outdoor use. Four -year extended Protection Plan for the motor /compressor is included in the Agreement between Owner and manufacturer, but shall be obtained by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner as part of the Project close -out documentation. The Contractor shall also obtain and provide written certification for 5 year warranty when offered as "standard" for units 15 tons and smaller. 5.3 Each unit shall be designed to operate on a 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz power supply with a single field power connection (unless otherwise noted). All necessary starters, contactors, control transfomiers, controls, and control safety devices shall be factory installed and wired. 5.4 Each unit shall be provided with and installed on a full perimeter prefabricated roof curb, as provided by Owner. Installation shall be by the Contractor. Roof curbs or units shall be shimmed or blocked using sheet stock steel as required to set the units level within the tolerances recommended by the manufacturer (1/16" per linear foot or as otherwise indicated in Installation, Start-up and Service Instructions). All flashing, counterflashing, and sealing shall be provided by the Contractor as required for a water tight installation and interface with the roofing construction. Roof insulation and membrane shall be installed on the exterior of each curb by the Roofing Subcontractor. Contractor shall coordinate as required. Curb design shall conform to the standards of the National Roofing Contractor's Association. When required by local Codes and/or authorities, each rooftop unit shall be anchored to the roof curb as recommended by manufacturer for a water -tight installation. Each roof curb shall be likewise anchored to the roof structure. 5.5 Each unit shall be provided with a factory equipped and installed economizer cycle (unless otherwise noted) actuated by a differential enthalpy controller arranged to cool with up to 100% outside air. Relief air damper sections shall be factory installed and arranged to operate barometrically in direct proportion to the outside air quantities. Compressor short cycle protection shall be provided on all units. 5.6 Outside air dampers on each unit shall be balanced and set for the specified minimum position and shall be closed when unit Is shut down. 5.7 Evaporator condensate drain for each unit shall be trapped (unless the unit is intemally trapped) and drain pipe shall be extended to 3' beyond the unit on the low -roof side and/or as noted on the drawings. Piping shall be Type M copper or copper D -W -V. 5.8 Each unit shall be factory assembled, charged, and tested. All Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT *SECTION 15D -2 starters, relays, and control transformers shall be included. 5.9 The other Contractors shall provide all power wiring in accordance with wiring diagrams, data, and instructions furnished by the Contractor. The other Contractors shall install, and wire all field installed control devices. See Paragraph 6 for the furnishing of control devices. 5.10 Each system shall be installed, checked out, and started up in strict and complete accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Refer to separate paragraphs for testing and balancing requirements. 6. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS 6.1 General 6.1.1 Except as otherwise specified and/or noted on the drawings, all automatic control devices for all rooftop units shall be furnished, installed and wired by the other contractors. 6.1.2 The Contractor shall provide all necessary coordination to insure the proper location and function of all controls. 6.1.3 Refer to the electrical drawings for further clarification of the work provided by the other contractors. All control-related conduit required shall be fumished and installed by the other contractors. 6.1.4 Smoke detectors shall be factory installed in the supply and return air ducts on all roof top units with 2,000 CFM or greater. Smoke detectors shall be wired to shut down the evaporator blower upon activation. HAC shall wire smoke detectors to the fire alarm system (trouble signal). 6.2 All toilet area Exhaust and Transfer Fans shall be interlocked and controlled through a contactor provided and wired by the other contractors. Fans shall be capable of operating only during the occupied period. 6.3 Unit Heater Control: Space thermostat shall cycle unit and burner. All control wiring shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. 6.4 Air Curtains: Refer to manufacturer's equipment specifications for additional control requirements. 6.5 Refer to drawings for additional control requirements and specifications. 7. IDENTIFICATION 7.1 All temperature controls and each Rooftop Unit shall be provided with identification tags of black phenolic material with engraved white letters, supplied and installed by the Contractor. 7.2 Identify each control device with its number and .service by means of a laminated black and white phenolic label with letters engraved in black to white. Identifications shall correspond to the Operating Instructions as specified herein. 7.3 Provide an 8 -1/2" x 11" diagram showing the relative position of each rooftop unit with respect to the store's floor plan. Mount diagram within the control panel cabinet. 7.4 Tags for Rooftop Units shall have letters not less than 1" high and shall be attached to unit's sheet metal housing panel. Tags to read: RTU -1, RTU -2, etc. corresponding to mark on drawings. 8. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 05/05/9$ DIVISION 15* HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQU 8.1 The Contractor shall prepare and mount in a glass frame in the Manager's Office, or as otherwise directed, step -by -step operating instructions for each piece of equipment. The instructions shall be simple and shall enable the Manager to properly start and stop the equipment and to operate the equipment in all seasons. The format and instruction sheet shall be submitted to the Engineer for review before being framed and mounted. 9. TEST REQUIREMgNTS 9.1 After the installation Is complete the Contractor shall perform the following tests to Insure the performance of the equipment: 9.1.1 Refer to Section 15B for additional requirements. 9.1.2 Refrigerant Piping: All field - installed refrigerant piping shall be tested with a halide torch. Any leaks shall be repaired and the system recharged. 9.1.3 Performance Testing: The Contractor shall operate all pieces of mechanical equipment to insure satisfactory results. Measurements of air delivery:shall be made at all fans and air devices and the systems balanced so that the deviation between actual and specified quantities is no greater than 5 %. Ampere measurements shall be made of all motors to insure that none of the motors are overloaded. All automatic controls shall be tested to insure proper sequencing of operations as specified hereinbefore. Any equipment which Is defective in either performance or operation, or excessively noisy shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. This data shall be submitted 30 days prior to store opening. A punch list will be prepared by the Owner's Representative and/or the Engineer and submitted to this Contractor for remedial work to be completed two weeks prior to the date of store opening. Contractor shall remove all filters and shall install new filters throughout the system, one day prior to store opening. 9.1.4 Performance tests shall include, but not be limited to the following: 9.1.4.1 Ampere reading of each motor including corresponding name plate rating. 9.1.4.2 CFM output from each air device and each fan. 9.1.4.3 Suction and discharge pressure for each compressor. 9.1.4.4 Entering and leaving db/wb on each stage of cooling and (db) heating. 9.1.4.5 CFM or fresh air for each unit. (Contractor to mark position of damper when proper fresh air requirement is achieved and lock damper in this position.) 9.1.4.6 List of room temperature and outside temperature at time tests were taken. 9.2 Tests shall be conducted during both cooling and heating seasons, preferably during period of design conditions. These tests will be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner's Representative. Contractor shall submit his proposed schedule to the Owner's Representative no less than three weeks in advance for coordination. 9.3 A properly identified testing and balancing report shall be submitted to the Engineer (in three copies) for each testing period as above. Report shall include all testing and balancing results and all related or influencing conditions. IPMENT *SECTION 15D -3 10.1 The Contractor shall provide, as part of his Contract, one (1) year maintenance and repair service for all equipment and systems provided under the HAC's contract from date of Owner's acceptance of the equipment. 10.2 The one (1) year service shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner for labor and materials and shal include all Owner- furnished equipment. See Section 10 for additional requirements relating to Owner - fumished equipment. 10.3 Each service call shall include, but not be limited to the replacement of defective equipment and components, repair of leaks, oiling and lubricating motors and moving parts, cleaning and /or replacing filters, adjusting and /or replacing belts and drives, replacement of refrigerant which is lost for any reason, and all other routine maintenance work recommended by the respective equipment manufacturers. 10.4 A minimum of four (4) service/inspection visits shall be included. The visits shall be scheduled on a quarter year basis but shall specifically include the start ofthe heating and cooling seasons. The Contractor shall respond promptly upon receipt of calls from the facility's operating personnel in the event of equipment failure. Routine maintenance work may be combined with emergency calls if reasonably within the quarter year schedule. 10.5 At the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall check the condition of filters in each unit, in the presence of the owner's Representative, and replace all filters that are dirty at that time. Thereafter, 4 filter changes shall be made at approximately 3 month intervals for a period of 1 year. Include all labor and material. Contractor shall request the store manager sign for each service trip and verify the replacement of filters. 10.6 This Contractor may provide for the above through use of his own service (except as herein indicated) department or such subsidiary as may be adequately staffed, equipped and competent to perform the required service functions when needed. 11 this Contractor does not maintain such a department or subsidiary, he shall be required to obtain the services of a reputable agency or firm regularly engaged in provision of start, test, check and service for equipment of types specified. 10.7 The company, agency or firm that is selected by the Mechanical Contractor, subsidiary or independent, shalt be subject to the approval of the owner, and shall be able to meet any minimum criteria that the owner deems necessary in providing proper and adequate service of equipment involved. 10.8 The name of servicing agency shall be submitted along with the equipment submittals. 10.9 The provisions of the above paragraphs shall not be interpreted as diminishing in any way the equipment warranties and/or Contractor's one (1) year warranty on the project; however, the beginning date for the service requirements specified above shall begin on the same date as the warranty covering that same portion of this project. - END OF SECTION - 10. SERVICE REQUIREMENT Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05/98 DIVISION 15• PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under this Section shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of the following: Section 15A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS 1.2 All work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. 2. SHEET METAL WORK 2.1 General 2.1.1 Sheet metal work shall be performed by the HAC's own sheet metal shop, or at the HAC's option, may be subcontracted to a qualified Sheet Metal Subcontractor, hereinafter referred to as the SMS. If SMS is to be used, the Contractor shall submit the name of the proposed SMS to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the awarding of the HAC's contract. 2.1.2 Reference Manuals - Quality of workmanship, metal gauges, fabrication, construction and installation of sheet metal work shall comply with the latest editions of DUCT MANUAL AND SHEET METAL CONSTRUCTION FOR VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Inc. (herein referred to as SMACNA). All work and materials shall comply with NFPA Pamphlet 90A, latest edition. 2.2 Materials, Fabrication, and Installation 2.2.1 Ducts for heating, cooling, and exhaust systems shall be galvanized steel of commercial lock forming quality having a minimum galvanized coating of 1 -1/4 ounces per square foot of sheet metal (total coating for both sides), unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified herein. 2.2.2 Sheet metal work as shown on the drawings is, in general, schematic and based on the specified manufacturer's equipment and material dimensions. Contractor shall make accurate measurements in the field prior to ductwork fabrication and shall provide all necessary offsets and transition pieces required to accommodate the actual structural and equipment variations and as required to clear piping and recessed lighting fixtures. All ductwork in finished areas (with hung ceilings and ceilings covering roof structure and framing) shall be concealed. 2.2.3 Duct Dimensions - Unless otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, duct sizes shown are OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS (sheet metal sizes) of the ducts. Round ducts shall not be substituted for rectangular ducts shown on the drawings, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. 2.2.4 All rectangular ductwork shall be cross broken or beaded, in accordance with SMACNA standards. 2.2.5 All ducts and ductwork shall be supported by hangers of the types and at the spacings as recommended by SMACNA. Contractor shall provide additional steel angles, channels, Unistrut, etc., as required to span between bar joists or structural members in order to hang ducts at proper intervals and at necessary points. Hangers shall be provided at all elbows and at branch takeoffs on the main ducts. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES *SECTION 15E -1 2.2.6 No ducts shall be supported from the roof deck. No cuting or drilling of structural members is permitted unless written permission is obtained from the Engineer. No ducts shall be supported from or rigidly attached to any interior partitions, except those of masonry or concrete construction. 2.2.7 Where ducts pass through walls, floors or partitions, the space around ducts shall be sealed with mineral wool, or other non- combustible material as required by NFPA. Ducts shall be provided with sheet metal angle frames close fitted to the openings. 2.2.8 No duct is to be placed directly under any electric Tight outlet, and in those cases where lighting outlet must occupy the same location as the duct, provide sufficient bracing, etc., to allow the other Contractor to hang his lighting fixtures below the duct. The Owner's representative shall determine if the light fixture is to be moved or hung from the duct; secure his written approval before installation. 2.2.9 Where it becomes necessary, because ofjob conditions to run pipes, conduits, ceiling hangers, etc., through the ductwork, the Contractor shall do all sheet metal cutting necessary and shall patch all openings using suitable collars or sleeves with flanges to make an air -tight patch. Furnish a streamline section around the element which is passing through the ductwork. 2.2.10 Access doors shall be hinged and constructed of 18 gauge metal rigidly reinforced, fumished with necessary hardware and framing, including felted edges. When closed, they must be air- tight. Access doors shall be located for easy removal or cleaning and for maintenance of filters, heating coils, dampers, and all other equipment requiring access. Access doors shall be not less than 256 sq. in. and square, (similar to SMACNA Figure 2 -14). For plenums and casing, access doors to be similar to SMACNA Figure 3 -17 and Table 3 -1. 2.3 Tuming Vanes and Radius Elbows 2.3.1 All changes in direction of supply, return, and exhaust ductwork made with square elbows shall have turning vanes. Turning vanes shall be provided in all square elbows whether shown on the drawings or not. 2.3.2 Turning vanes shall be single wall type as manufactured by Aero /Dyne Company or Tuttle & Bailey, or may be shop fabricated in accordance wth SMACNA. The number and spacing of vanes shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendations or, if shop fabricated, in accordance with SMACNA. In ducts with intemal liner, the vanes shall be installed over the liner; the liner shall not be interrupted for vane installation. 2.3.3 At the Contractor's option, elbows may be "Standard Radius" type in accordance with SMACNA with the throat radius equal to the width of the duct in the plane of the radius. When space does not permit the use of "Standard Radius" elbows, a short radius elbow with tuming vane complying with SMACNA may be used. 2.4 Flexible Connections 2.4.1 Provide sound and vibration isolating flexible connections as specified below on all motorized equipment to which duct connections are made unless noted otherwise on the drawings. 05/05/98 DIVISION 15* AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES *SECTION 15E -2 2.4.2 Connections on Interior work shall be made with Ventglas Neoprene - coated glass fabric as furnished by Ventfabrics, Inc. Connections made on work exposed to weather and /or sunlight shall be made with Vention Hypalon - coated glass fabric as furnished by Ventfabrics, Inc. 2.4.3 An allowance of at least one inch slack shall be made at each connection. The fabric shall be attached at equipment with metal collar frames and to ductwork by folding in with the sheet metal or with bands or frames as required to make leakproof joints. 3. VOLUME CONTROLS 3.1 Provide splitter dampers, volume control dampers, and air extractors at all branch take -offs and other locations as shown on the drawings and as otherwise required for the proper balancing of the air distribution systems. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper balancing and volume control of all air distribution systems. 3.2 Volume dampers, splitter dampers, and/or air extractor where splitters are not indicated shall be installed at all branch take -offs of supply ducts. All dampers shall be substantially constructed of 16 gauge metal, proportioning type, and so installed as to prevent rattling. All dampers to be quadrant type with lock nut. 4. AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES 4.1 Provide air distribution devices complete with accessories in accordance with the Schedule on the drawings and the following. 4.2 The Contractor shall verify ceiling construction to assure the suitability of each device, frame, and hardware for the respective application. Provide all mounting hardware required whether specified on the drawing schedule or not. 4.3 Air devices shall be as manufactured by Barber- Colman, Metal -aire, Tuttle and Bailey, Titus, Krueger, Carnes or Anemostat - Waterloo. 5. PUCT LINER 5.1 Low velocity rectangular duct systems (supply and retum) shall be intemally lined with 1" acoustical liner for systems where indicated and/or noted on the drawings. Exhaust ducts shall not be lined unless specifically noted on the drawings. 5.2 Duct liner shall be made of glass fiber material bonded with an inactive resin and having a density of not Tess than 2 pounds per cubic foot. The surface in contact with the air stream shall be coated with neoprene or other suitable coating to prevent erosion and to meet the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 90A. The material shall have the following ratings and characteristics. 5.2.1 Thermal conductivity (k- factor) of 0.23 at 75 degrees F. mean. 5.2.2 Flame spread - 25; Smoke developed - 50. 5.2.3 Maximum air velocity of 4000 FPM in accordance with UL Standard 181. 5.2.4 Maximum temperature of 250 degrees F. 5.2.5 Noise reduction coefficient of 0.08. (Average of sound absorption coefficients at 250, 500, 1000 and 2000 cps.) 5.3 All duct lining shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and SMACNA Standards. hi Mechanical fasteners and • adhesives shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 5.4 Duct liner shall be as manufactured by Certainteed CGS Group or Owens- Coming. 6. PUCT WRAP 6.1 Round ducts shall receive 1 -1/2" of Owens- Coming vapor barrier faced duct wrap FRK -25, series ED -150, with a thermal conductivity of 0.24 at 75 degrees F. mean temperature, or equivalent by J -M or Certainteed. Insulation shall be adhered to metal at 8" o.c. with Foster's 85-15 bonding adhesive. Longitudinal and circumferential joints shall be secured with 9/16" flare-door staples at 6" o.c. and taped with 3" wide (min.) foil reinforced kraft tape. All penetrations of facing shall also be taped. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for Installation. 7. FLEXIBLE INSULATED DUCT$ 7.1 Provide flexible ducts as manufactured by Certainteed CGS Group, Flexible Tubing Division of Automation Industries, Johns - Manville, or Wiremold as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following specifications. 7.2 Flexible ducts shall consist of an Inner of helical wound sprirg steel coated with vinyl and covered with a vinyl coated fiberglass mesh permanently fused to form a continuous inner sleeve. The inner line shall be covered with fiberglass insulation jacketed with a reinforced, metalized plastic vapor barrier casing. 7.3 Flexible ducts shall be UL listed in accordance with UL Standard 181, Class 1 and shall have the following ratings and characteristics. 7.3.1 Maximum thermal conductance (C) of 0.23 BTUH per square foot degree F. at 75 degrees F. 7.3.2 Temperature range of 0 to 250 degrees F. 7.3.3 Maximum vapor transmission rating of jacket of 0.03 Perm 7.3.4 Maximum intemal pressures of 2" w.c. positive and 1 -1/2" w.c. negative. 7.3.5 Maximum velocity of 2400 FPM. 7.4 Duct sizes noted on the drawings refer to the inside duct diameter. Flexible ducts shall be installed to provide sweeping configurations without undue restrictions, but not creating unnecessary sags or curves. Flat banding material not less than 1 -1/2" wide shall be used to suspend flexible ducting. Ducting fumished with factory installed grommets shall be suspended by wires attached to grommets. 7.5 Where ceiling plenum space is not sufficient to permit top connection to ceiling diffuser with proper bend radius for flexible duct, Contractor shall fabricate and /or provide art adapter box for diffuser to permit side connection of flexible duct. 8. PREFABRICATED ROOF QURBS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 8.1 Roof curbs for Rooftop Units (RTU's) and Exhaust Fans shall be manufacturer's standard, uninsulated curbs furnished by the Owner. All other roof curbs shall comply with the following paragraphs. 8.2 Provide factory prefabricated roof curbs and equipment supports as Indicated on the drawings and in accordance with DIVISION 15* AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND ACCESSORIES *SECTION 15E -3 the following specifications. 8.3 When available, roof curbs and equipment supports shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the respective equipment or item to be supported to assure a close and proper fit. All other curbs and supports shall be as manufactured by Vent Products Co., Inc., Louvers and Dampers, Inc., Penn Ventilator, The Pate Company, or Thybar Corporation, in accordance with the following: 8.4 Materials and Construction 8.4.1 Curbs and supports shall be constructed of not Tess than 18 gauge galvanized steel or 14 gauge (.064 ") aluminum. Material of curb shall match the equipment or item to be supported when required to prevent direct contact of dissimilar metals. 8.4.2 Curbs and supports shall be reinforced andlor constructed of heavier gauge materials as required to properly support the applied loads, including wind, snow, and dynamic with safety factor of 2 or greater. 8.4.3 All joints and seams shall be continuously welded to assure leak proof and weather tight construction. 8.4.4 All curbs shall be insulated with rigid fiberglass board, 3 lbs. per cubic foot minimum density. The thickness of insulation board shall be equal to the required nominal curb thickness: 1 -1/2 inches, minimum. 8.4.5 All curbs and supports installed on insulated roofs shall have an integral cant strip, 3" minimum. The cant shall be raised by an amount equal to the thickness of the roof Insulation. The top of all curbs shall be not less than 11 Inches above finished roof. The top of all equipment supports shall be not less than 9 inches above finished roof. The top of all curbs and supports shall be installed level with factory built -in pitch for roofs with a slope of 3/8 inch per foot or more. 8.4.6 Top of all curbs and supports shall have a wood nailer of nominal 2 inch lumber, except where self - flashing curbs are approved. Provide cap flashing for all applications where the wood nailer would be exposed. - END OF SECTION - \ - . a 1 _ A - i • • , 1 . . DIVISION 15• PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 All work under this Section shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of the following: Section 15A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS Section 15B - BASIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS 1.2 All work under this Section shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein, noted on the drawings, or modified by the Contract Documents. 2. GAS PIPING SYSTEM 2.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for all work and payment of all one -time fees or charges related to providing gas service to the building. The Contractor shall contact the aas comoanv during biddina to determine fees. charaes. and requirements. The fees and charaes shall be identified separately in the Contractors proposal, During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the gas service requirements with the gas company to establish the gas service to the building equipment on a timely and proper basis. 2.2 Provide a complete system of natural gas piping as indicated on the drawings and as required to properly connect all gas fired equipment. All work shall comply with goveming State and local codes and regulations of the Gas Utility Company. The building gas piping system is designed and sized on the basis of natural gas at 1000 BTU per C.F. nominal heating value, 0.6 specific gravity, and delivery pressure at the outlet side of the meter as noted on the drawings. Should local conditions and /or Codes vary from the design basis, Contractor shall notify the Engineer and qualify his bid accordingly. 2.3 Pipe shall be ASTM A -120 black steel, Schedule 40, for interior and above grade. Underground piping shall be ASTM A -120 black steel, Schedule 40 with X -Tru -Coat plastic wrap with all joints and damaged areas coated with X -Tru -Coat primer and tape. Underground steel pipe shall receive cathodic protection (magnesium anodes) as recommended and supplied by a vendor specializing in this work. Polyethylene piping approved by local Codes and the Gas Utility Company may be used for underground gas main service. 2.4 Fittings shall be 150 Ib. malleable iron, screwed, or schedule 40 black steel, welding. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington FUEL SYST EM - END OF SECTION - *SECTION 15F - 1 2.5 Unions in sizes 2" and smaller shall be 150 Ib. malleable iron, bronze or brass seat, ground joint, screwed. Unions 2 -1/2" and larger shall be 150 Ib. flanged. 2.6 Each gas fired item of equipment shall be equipped with an isolation valve, dirt leg, and union connection to the units gas train. 2.7 A main shut off (house) valve shall be provided at the main gas riser. For interior risers, the house valve shall be located inside the building. 2.8 Refer to Section 15B for valve specifications. 2.9 Provide gas pressure regulators approved by Gas Utility Company and Local Codes when indicated on the drawings and/or when the delivered gas pressure exceeds the allowable inlet pressure of the installed equipment. Pressure regulators shall be installed on the exterior of the building and shall be equipped with intemal relief. Regulators shall be installed to prevent relief port from being blocked by water, ice, or dirt. 3. FLUE VENTS 3.1 Unit heaters and similar gas -fired units shall be vented with properly sized Type B, double wall gas vent complete with roof cone, sleeve cap, storm collar, UL listed storm proof cap, and accessories as required for proper function and compliance with NFPA Standards and goveming Codes or regulations. Gas vents shall be Metalbestos, Hart & Cooley, or Metal Fab. Flue vent installation shall comply with all applicable codes and regulations. 4. EMERGENCY ENGINE GENERATOR (WHEN INCLUDED ON THE PROJECT) 4.1 Extend gas - piping to the emergency engine generator and provide all mechanical and piping work as required to place the fuel system for the unit into proper operation. 4.2 All work shall conform to the manufacturer's written recommendations and installation manual. 4.3 The pipe size indicated on the drawings shall be extended full size to the unit gas train. The Contractor shall provide a local full size shut -off valve and dirt leg and union or flanged connection to the unit gas train. The Contractor shall install all specialty valves and devices shipped loose with the generator. The primary PRV shall be omitted when consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4.4 Gas piping between the building and the engine generator shall be routed above ground as indicated on the drawings and shall be corrosion protected as specified herein above. 05/05/98 DIVISION 15• FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS *SECTION 15G -1 DIVISION 15 ALL WORK UNDER THIS SECTION 15G IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF CODE CONSULTANTS, INC., ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI (CCI). ALL INQUIRIES REGARDING FIRE PROTECTION WORK, INCLUDING RELATED SITE FEATURES, SHALL BE DIRECTED TO: CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. 760 OFFICE PARKWAY. ST. LOUIS, MISSOURI 63141 ATTENTION: MR. MIKE KIRN PHONE: (314) 991 -2633 ALL SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTAL DATA RELATED TO THE FIRE PROTECTION WORK SHALL BE SENT PIRECTLY TO MR. KIRN AT CCI AS ABOVE. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 05/05JQ8 } PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 This Section covers materials, methods, and requirements common to all electrical work. 1.2 All electrical work shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of this Section and all Sections of Division 1. 1.3 When it becomes necessary to test the emergency lighting system in a store, under no circumstances is the electricity in the building to be turned off, then on again while the registers and related electronic hardware are plugged in. If this equipment is not unplugged the resulting surge will have very damaging effects on the Point -of -Sale system. This holds true whether the store is using Data Terminal System or National Cash Register equipment. All the equipment must be brought down in an orderly fashion and put in an idle state prior to unplugging the electronic equipment related to the Point -of Sale system. Once this is accomplished the electricity may be tumed off and on as often as necessary. If there are any questions pertaining to shutting the system down, contact Owner's Representative before turning the power off. Any shutdown shall be scheduled and coordinated with Owner's Representative. 1.4 Refer to Section 1A for requirements relating to Base Bid Products, Substitutions and Alternates. 1.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing a copy of Division 1 specifications to each subcontractor and for coordinating the work accordingly. 1.6 Submittal data, shop drawings, and samples: 1.6.1 Shall be submitted for review when required by and in accordance with the procedure set forth in Section 1A of these specifications. 1.6.2 All references to submittal data, shop drawings, and samples in the context of the technical specifications shall be taken to mean "if required under the provisions of Section 1A ", unless stipulated otherwise. 1.7 The Contractor shall. during bidding. contact the Electric and Teleohone Utilities to determine fees and charges and to verify all requirements. The fees and charaes shall be identified separately in the Contractor's proposal and §hall be paid by the Contractor. During construction, the Contractor shall make all necessary notifications and coordinate the electric and telephone service for the project on a timely and proper basis. 1.8 Where applicable the Contractor shall provide seismic control on all devices per local codes, and diagrams shown on drawings. 2. SCOPE OF WORK 2.1 The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists of providing all equipment, materials and labor in accordance with any code having jurisdiction, and performing all work as required for the complete execution of the Electrical Work as shown on the Drawings, herein specified, or both, and which without restricting the generality of the foregoing, shall include the following: 2.1.1 General Requirements. 2.1.2 Conduit and Fittings. Wire and Cable. W . h' 2.1.3 Any primary and secondary service work as required by the Utility Company, or as shown on the drawings, including service transformer grounding network. 2.1.4 Installation of Owner fumished service entrance equipment and switchgear. (CT enclosure fumished and installed by Contractor.) 2.1.5 Installation of all Owner furnished lighting fixtures and lamps, including provision of all hangers and supports. 2.1.6 Light and Power Systems including, EMS system, etc. 2.1.7 Mounting of starters and controls. 2.1.8 Grounding. 2.1.9 Telephone System: Work as required by the Telephone Company including service conduit requirements and grounding system. 2.1.10 Power wiring for HVAC and Plumbing work. 2.1.11 Installation of the Owner- furnished items listed in Section 1J. 2.1.12 Temporary Tight and power as required by the Contractor. 2.1.13 Excavation, trenching and backfill. Comply with applicable provisions of Division 2, Excavating, Grading and Backfilling. 2.1.14 The wiring of mechanical equipment shown on the mechanical drawings or outlined in the Mechanical Equipment Schedule and in the specifications shall include all power wiring, disconnect switches, etc. as required. Control wiring by Contractor unless otherwise noted. 2.1.15 Installation of Owner - fumished fire alarm and security system components. 3. RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERR 3.1 The following items of work will be done in accordance with the appropriate Sections of the Specifications, or by the Utility Companies. 3.1.1 Finished painting. 3.1.2 Patching. 3.1.3 Concrete work and foundations. 3.1.4 Fumishing and installing of all telephone equipment and wiring. 3.1.5 Fumishing of automatic temperature controls (except as noted on the drawings), and electric heaters. 3.1.6 Coordinate with utility company as to provision, setting and connection of transformer. 4. CONDUIT AND FITTINGS 4.1 Materials - All conduits shall be hot dipped galvanized steel (cut and threaded before galvanizing), heavy wall aluminum, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), electrical metallic tubing (EMT), schedule 40 PVC (where permitted by Codes) complying with the standards of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NEC). All conduit shall be approved by the Underwriter's Laboratories (UL). Conduit fittings and condulets shall be zinc - coated, /I /• --..- • . u . ,: ■•• 1►• ; • : u ► •► • V threaded type for rigid conduit or intermediate metal conduit, set -screw type for EMT up to 2" size or match the conduit for plastic. Conduits shall be as manufactured by Southwire Co., Wheatland Tube Co., Allied Tube, Carlon, Triangle, or Robroy; fittings by Southwire Co., Carlon, Steel City, Thomas & Betts, Robroy, or Appleton, except as otherwise noted. 4.2 Applications 4.2.1 Galvanized steel, aluminum rigid conduit or intermediate metal conduit line shall be used for the following: 4.2.1.1 All exposed conduit housing 480 volt feeders from finished floor to a point 10' -0" above finished floor. 4.2.1.2 All underground conduit and conduit embedded in concrete (galvanized steel only). 4.2.1.3 All conduit exposed to weather. 4.2.1.4 All conduit 2 -1/2" and larger. 4.2.2 Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC) or Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) may be used for other applications not stipulated above. 4.2.3 Plastic pipe (schedule 40) conduit by Carlon may be used in lieu of rigid conduit where under concrete slabs or embedded in the slab where permitted by Codes. 4.2.4 Plastic pipe heavy wall (schedule 40) conduits by Carlon may be used in lieu of rigid steel conduits in concrete encased duct banks. 4.2.5 Where non - metallic conduit is used, install green insulated copper grounding conductor. 4.3 Installation Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washingto 4.3.1 Conduits shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, from outlet to cabinets, pull or junction boxes and shall be secured to all boxes with locknuts and bushings in such manner that each system shall be electrically continuous throughout. 4.3.2 Where EMT and rigid conduit enters or leaves outlet boxes, cabinets, safety switches, tap boxes, motor controllers, etc., other than those having threaded hubs, a standard locknut shall be used on the outside of the box, and a locknut and bushing used on the inside. Bushings 1" and larger shall be of an approved insulated type. 4.3.3 Under no circumstances shall conduits or fittings be supported from or anchored to the roof deck, or piping. 4.3.4 All conduit shall be fastened securely in place with approved straps and hangers in sufficient number to prevent movement of any part of the conduit. This includes conduit installed in forms before concrete is poured. Where exposed conduits are suspended, the hangers shall be Caddy (Erico), Gateway, or Grinnell, adjustable hangers with rod suspension, having a nut fitted in malleable iron or steel inserts. Inserts for hanger rods shall be installed in the slabs, and all hangers shall be installed at not more than 9' -0" centers. 4.3.5 All concealed conduits installed above suspended ceiling shall be run above bottom of joists, or otherwise coordinated with the other contractors so as to allow room for running ducts and piping. 4.3.6 Expansion fittings shall be provided at all conduits across a building expansion joint. Fittings shall be type "AX ", "EX" or "TX" as made by O. Z. Electrical Company. Provide copper bonding jumper at each expansion fitting. 4.3.7 All conduit shall be run at right angles to and /or parallel to floors and walls. 4.3.8 Connection to Motorized Equipment - Connection to motorized equipment shall be made with flexible conduits having sufficient slack between rigid conduit and motor terminal in order to minimize vibration transmission. No rigid conduit shall be anchored to equipment which is subject to vibration transmission. Fittings shall be of the metallic ferrule, compression type. Minimum length of flexible conduit shall be 18 inches. Flexible metal conduit shall be Anaconda "Sealtite ". 4.3.9 Open ends of conduits shall be capped with plastic cap or corked during roughing -in so as to prevent the accumulation of dust and moisture condensation in conduit. 4.3.10 When rigid metal conduit is joined, all conduit joints shall be made up tight and no running threads will be permitted. 4.3.11 All conduit shall have powdered soapstone blown through them before pulling of wires or wires shall be lubricated with soapstone paste. 4.3.12 When metal conduit is installed in direct contact with the earth, use "hot- dipped" galvanized type and coat the conduit and the joints with asphaltum. 4.3.13 Conduits in hazardous areas, as identified on the drawings, shall be installed with seal fittings between hazardous and non - hazardous areas in compliance with NEC Class 1 installation. All fittings, etc., shall be specifically approved by the Underwriters Laboratories for use in such areas. 4.3.14 All conduit in finished areas shall be concealed. 4.3.15 Conduit runs shall be installed to avoid proximity to hot water pipes. Conduit shall be kept a minimum of 3" from such pipes, except where crossings are unavoidable. In such instances the conduit shall be kept at least 1" from the covering of the pipe. 4.3.16 Conduit connections to rod -hung fixtures shall be by means of flexible conduit from box firmly fastened to building structure. 4.3.17 Conduit in Pre -Sales Areas shall be mounted immediately below top chord of joists. 4.3.18 Pulling wire shall be installed in all empty telephone and computer system conduits ( #10 iron wire w /wood block at ea. end) 5. WIRE AND CABLE 5.1 Types 5.1.1 Unless otherwise noted or specified, all power wiring shall be NEC approved type for 600 volt and shall be UL listed. 5.1.2 All wire #10 AWG and larger shall be stranded copper. All wire #12 and smaller shall be solid copper. _� 05/05/98 DIVISION 16* BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS 'SECTION 16A -3 5.1.3 Conductors shall have insulating rating complying with the following: Type or Letter Application (NEC) 5.2 Wire Sizes Branch Circuits THHN OR THWN (No. 14 thru No. 10 AWG) Feeder Circuits THHN THWN (No. 8 AWG and larger) Branch Circuits HHN OR XHHW (within 3" of ballasts in fixtures) Max. Operating Temo.Deq.F. Unless a circuit breaker, switch, contactor, motor starter, etc., is marked otherwise, circuit conductors connected to the terminals must not operate more than a 60 degree C. ampacity for a breaker, switch, etc., rated 100 amps or less and must not operate at more that a 75 degree C. ampacity for a breaker, switch, etc., rated over 100 amps. 5.2.1 Minimum wire size for branch circuits shall be #12 AWG except that home runs longer than 100 feet for 120/208 system and 200 feet for 227/480 volt system in actual wire length from panel to load shall be minimum #10 AWG. 5.2.2 Size of wires larger than #12 AWG shall be as specified on plans or riser diagram, except as noted in Paragraph 5.2.1 above. 5.3 Color Coding 5.3.1 All branch circuit wires shall be color coded as follows (except as otherwise designated by local codes or as otherwise required to match existing color coding in existing facilities): Lines 240/120 208/120 480Y/277 (Phase2 lVoltl (Volt? (Vold A Black Black Orange B Red Red Yellow C — Blue Brown Neutral White White Gray Grounding Green Green Green Wire 5.3.2 Feeder cables need not be color coded throughout the length, but may instead be identified by colored tapes at each junction box and at each end corresponding to the colors scheduled above. 5.3.3 Wiring for auxiliary systems and control wires shall be color coded by means of colored stripes or tracers. 5.4 Direct burial cable shall be unreeled into trench (not dragged) after all course stones have been removed from base of trench and sand fill laid down. Cables should be snaked slightly to allow for movement and settlement. 5.5 The use of BX cables (type A/C, armored cable) where permitted by code shall be acceptable in concealed spaces (excluding grouted cells of block walls) such as above suspended ceilings or within drywall partitions. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington 5.6 Manufacturers - All wires and cables shall be the products of American, Southwire Co, General Cable, Okonite or General Electric Co. 6. OUTLET AND SWITCH BOXES 140 6.1 All outlet and switch boxes shall be NEC approved type and shall be sized to provide ample space for wiring devices and conductors. Where the number of 167 conductors and connections exceeds NEC limitations, box extensions shall be used. All boxes shall be standard galvanized or sherardized sheet steel as manufactired by 194 Steel City Electric Company or National Electrical Products Corporation. 6.2 All ceiling outlet boxes for exposed work, acoustical tile ceilings, and furred plaster ceilings shall be 4 inch octagonal, 2 -1/8" deep. Provide plaster rings and /or fixture studs as required. 6.3 All boxes for concrete work shall be especially designed for this construction and shall be 3" deep for concrete thickness of 4" or more. Minimum concrete cover shall be 3/4 ". 6.4 Flush mounted wall outlets shall be 4 inch square boxes or gang boxes, 1 -1/2" deep, and shall be provided with suitable extension rings and covers. Outlets shall be carefully aligned so that cover plates will be truly vertical and horizontal. 6.5 Exposed wall or column mounted outlet boxes for convenience receptacles and lighting switches shall be standard, single gang (minimum) utility conduit boxes. 6.6 All boxes shall be rigidly mounted and shall be equipped with suitable screw fastened covers. All raceways entering boxes shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Open knockouts or holes in boxes shall be plugged with suitable blanking devices. Boxes shall be cleared of all plaster, dirt, trash, etc., before the installation of any wiring devices and /or before the installation of cover plates. 6.7 All boxes for conduit system shall be installed flush with finished surface with allowable recess for adaptors so that coverplates may be pulled tight against the finished surface. 6.8 Outlet boxes or switch boxes mounted on opposite faces of a wall shall be offset to minimize sound transmission from one area to another. 6.9 Outlet boxes or switch boxes in finished areas shall be mounted flush with wall surfaces. 7. TAP. JUNCTION. OR PULL BOXES 7.1 Pull boxes shall be constructed of code gauge, welded and galvanized sheet steel. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements, and shall be fumished without knockouts; holes for raceways shall be drilled on the job. Where necessary for boxes to be supported away from ceilings or beams, structural steel members shall be provided for supports. 7.2 Where weatherproof sheet steel boxes are called for, the Contractor shall furnish and install code gauge, welded and galvanized sheet steel boxes with gasketed cover and all flanges designed to resist the entrance of rainwater. Use FS or FD cast boxes as made by Crouse Hinds, Appleton or Killark. 05/05/98 DIVISION 16* BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS * ECTION 16A-4 8. WIREWAYS AND TROUT 8.1 Underwriters approved metal raceways shall be furnished and installed complete with necessary complement of fittings, connectors and accessory parts. Wireway shall be of the "lay -in" type without standard knockouts and with screw covers for full channel access as manufactured by Square D, Hoffman, Columbia or G.E. 8.2 Wireways shall be securely supported by approved methods at 5 ft. intervals. Number of conductors per wireway shall conform to the latest NEC requirements. 9. WIRING DEVICES 9.1 General - All wiring devices shall be of the type indicated below. Color of devices shall be white or as indicated by catalog numbers shown or as shown on drawings. 9.2 Switches - Finished Areas 9.2.1 Toggle, single pole, Hubbell 1221 -WHI. 9.2.2 Toggle, 3 -way, Hubbell 1223 -WHI. 9.2.3 Pilot Light - Neon lights and red jewel, Hubbell 1221 PL. 9.2.4 SPST, SPDT, DPST, & DPDT switches as required for special applications shall be of the corresponding model switches as specified above. 9.3 Switches - Unfinished Areas 9.3.1 Toggle, single pole Hubbell 1221 -WHI, 20 amp. 9.3.2 Toggle, Hubbell 1223 -WHI, 20 amp. 9.4 Convenience Outlets - Finished areas 9.4.1 Duplex Hubbell 5252 -WHI, 125 volt, NEMA grounded. 9.5 Convenience Outlets - Unfinished areas 9.5.1 Duplex, Hubbell 5252 -WHI, NEMA grounded. 9.6 Special Purpose Outlets as scheduled on drawings. 9.7 Cover Plates - Color of cover plates shall match devices. Where devices are indicated to be mounted side -by -side, multi -gang cover plates shall be used. 9.8 Manufacturer - Hubbell (except cover plates). 9.9 Plugmold as manufactured by wiremold #2000GB Series with receptacles on 6" centers color to be white. 10. FUSES (When applicable) 10.1 When the feeders or equipment are to be protected with fusible devices, the fuses shall be fumished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor. 10.1.1 601 Ampere and Above - Bussman Type KRPC, Hicap (600V). 10.1.2 0 to 600A - Type LPNRK (250V) or LPSRK, (600V) Low Peak Class RK- 1. 11. MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS ANP COMBINATION SWITCH - STARTERS 11.1 Except as otherwise noted, all magnetic motor starters and combination starters shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall install all power wiring j3abies "R" Us .Tukwila. Washinaton from the panel or disconnect switch, through the starter and including final connections at the motor. 11.2 Magnetic starters shall be made by Square D, GE, ITE, or Allen Bradley. 11.2.1 Type - Full- voltage, non - reversing, across - the -line type, unless otherwise noted. 11.2.2 Overload Relays - Three (3) overload protection on all 3 -phase motors. 11.2.3 Voltage of Holding Coils - Unless factory pre -wired for internal controls and interlock, all motor starters furnished by contractor shall have 120 volt or less holding coils with individual control transformer installed in each starter. 11.3 Enclosure - Of the proper type for indoor, outdoor, hazardous, dust tight, water tight applications. 11.4 For accessory motor control devices see control diagrams on the drawings. 11.5 All starters shall be fumished with control station and pilot light. If not indicated as being remote from the starter, control station and pilot Tight shall be furnished with starter, mounted in starter cover. 11.6 Fused and non -fused disconnect switches for combi- nation switch - starters shall comply with specification, paragraph 14.3 herein. 11.7 Auxiliary contacts and devices required for interlock and temperature control work shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the control diagrams shown on the drawings. 12. STARTER AND CONTROLLER PROTECTION 12.1 Starters or controllers, whether fumished with the equipment or by Contractor, specifically requiring a certain type or size or overcurrent protection device shall be so fumished with such protection by the Contractor. 13. FUV BUTTON STATIONS 13.1 Push button stations for control of motors shall be heavy duty industrial oiltight type in conduit type surface enclosure. Pilot lights shall be complete with suitable jewels and, where control voltage requires, shall be equipped with transformer. Push button stations shall be Square D, GE, Allen Bradley, or ITE. 13.2 Push buttons shall be either momentary, maintained contact, or selector switch type, as required. Contractor shall verify with Other Contractors the proper type desired prior to installation of these devices. 13.3 Unless otherwise noted or specified, all push button stations shall be provided by the Contractor. 14. FUSIBLE AND NON f USIBIX DISCQWECT SWITCHES 14.1 Unless otherwise indicated, all manual operating and disconnect switches for motors and power equipment installed for this project shall be furnished by the Owner and installed by the Contractor. 14.2 For single phase, 1 HP or smaller motor, use Square D Class 2510, GE- CR101 or ITE, manual motor switch with pilot light where indicated. 05/05/98 DIVISION 16* 14.3 For motor load larger than 1 HP, use Square D, GE or ITE horsepower rated switch. Switches shall be heavy duty, industrial type in NEMA type 1 general purpose enclosure, except as otherwise noted or required. Cover shall be interlocked with mechanism to prevent opening unless switch is in "off' position. Switches exposed to weather shall be raintight NEMA 3R Type. 14.4 For single phase power load other than motor load, use 15A, AC switch up to 1000 watts, and safety switch thereafter, made by same manufacturer as in subparagraph 14.3. 14.5 Refer to control diagrams on the drawings for accessory devices and additional data. 15. DEVICE AND EQUIPMENT MOUNTING 15.1 Location of Outlets - Unless otherwise specifically dimensioned on the drawings, the location for lighting fixtures and outlets shown on drawings are only schematic. Contractor shall exercise great care in locating the outlets during roughing -in period. When the locations of outlets are shown in the detailed drawings on architectural elevations and details, these shall be followed. When in doubt, check with Owner's Representative for instructions prior to roughing -in. 15.2 Mounting 15.2.1 Unless otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top of panel or enclosure 94 inches above finished floor, shall be properly aligned, and shall be adequately supported independently of the connecting raceways. 15.2.2 Flush mounted switch outlets shall be mounted 4' -0" above floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Flush mounted receptacle, telephone and intercommunication outlets shall be mounted 1' -0" above the finished floor unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Clock outlets shall be mounted as noted on the drawings. All outlets, wiring devices and boxes in finished areas shall be flush mounted. 15.2.3 Exposed boxes for receptacles in Pre -Sales areas shall be mounted 5' -0" above the finished floor. 15.2.4 Wall or column mounted push -button stations shall be mounted 5'- 0" above floor. 15.2.5 Motor controllers shall be mounted with center line of operating lever 6' -6" maximum above floor. 15.2.6 All devices or equipment (except thermal sensors) mounted on steel columns shall be mounted on the column web (between flanges) for protection. 15.2.7 Lighting and receptacle panelboards shall be mounted with center of panel 4' -6" above finished floor, except that top most circuit operating handle shall not be more than 6-6" above floor. Adjust as required. 15.2.8 All wiring devices, electrical enclosures and panels in finished areas shall be flush mounted. 15.3 Access to and work space around panels and equipment shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. 16. VIBRATION CONTROLS 16.1 General - It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install all conduits and boxes, avoiding direct contact with any piping or mechanical equipment which is the source Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS *SECTION 16A -5 of vibration or the cause of vibration transmission. Any installation by Contractor which does not comply with this general principle shall be corrected at contractor's expense. 16.2 Transformers 16.2.1 When connection is made with conduits and wires, a minimum of 18 inches of flexible conduit shall be used. 16.2.2 All floor mounted transformers shall be provided with rubber -in -shear mounts capable of providing approximately 0.25 inch of static deflection when loaded. 16.2.3 Small column- or wall- mounted power transformers shall be bolted to steel channels through rubber grommets. 16.3 Conduit Connection to Equipment 16.3.1 In general, all conduit connections to air conditioning, plumbing or building, or any rotating or oscillating equipment requiring electric motors, shall be made with flexible conduits. All flexible conduits shall be Anaconda "Sealtite ". 16.3.2 The length of flexible conduit required for each motor shall be based upon the requirements for a 360 degree loop in the conduit between the electrical motor and electrical box. When flexible conduit cannot be used due to space limitations, a neoprene or rubber bushing between the conduit and the electric motor to break the metal to metal contact may be installed. A flexible ground strap shall be provided to complete the electrical ground where required. 16.4 Ballasts for fluorescent, metal halide, high pressure sodium or mercury vapor lighting fixtures: 16.4.1 Where used inside of building, ballasts shall carry a rating of "A" whenever commercially available. 16.4.2 Remotely mounted ballasts where required will be shown on drawings. 16.4.3 Ballasts shall be high power factor. 16.5 Holes and Openings - Openings around conduits, wireways, etc., where walls or floors are pierced shall be wrapped with fiberglass insulation and shall be grouted on both sides of the opening. Grouting shall be made flush with finished surfaces. 16.6 Isolator Description and Manufacturers 16.6.1 Types of Isolators 16.6.1.1 To be used for isolation of transformers: Molded neoprene units equipped with leveling bolts. Units shall be Mason Industries Type "ND ", Amber Booth or Consolidated Kinetics Corporation sized for .35 inch static deflection. 16.6.1.2 Type W - To be used for Isolation of switchboards or control cabinets. 16.6.1.3 Loading of molded neoprene pads shall be limited to a static deflection of 0.03 to 0.06 inch. The area of pad shall be selected to match the load with manufacturer's recommended unit loading. An auxiliary steel plate may be required to distribute the load uniformly over the pad area. 05/05/98 DIVISION 16' 17. EQUIPMENT. RACEWAY AND WIRING IDENTIFICATION 17.1 General - All interior exposed raceways, wiring, and equipment shall be suitably identified by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide access to and shall open boxes, etc., as required, at time of final inspection to satisfy Owner's Representative that the proper identification procedures for conductors, etc., have been adhered to. 17.2 Boxes and enclosures for emergency circuits shall be marked with red labels saying "EMERGENCY" or in some other manner made clearly identifiable to Electricians or maintenance personnel. 17.3 Conductors 17.3.1 All conductors on circuits 600 - volts and below shall be color coded as specified in Section 16A -5. Color coding shall be by means of colored insulating material, colored braid or jacket over the insulation, or by means of suitable colored permanent, non - aging, insulating tape equal to Scotch *471 to "Texcel 98" applied to conductors at each outlet, cabinet, or junction point. 17.3.2 A description of the color coding shall be permanently posted at each branch - circuit panelboard using the method described in paragraph 17.4.1 in section 16A of these specifications. 17.4 Control and Power Distribution Equipment 17.4.1 The Contractor shall fumish and install engraved laminated micarta nameplates. Lettering shall be approximately 1/16 to 1/8 inch thick and 1/2 to 3/4 inch tall. Plates shall be white surface and black core to produce black letters. Where equipment is not suitable for mounting the nameplate thereon, by bolting or riveting, the Contractor shall fumish a No. 14 gauge steel plate, painted black, to which the nameplate shall be bolted or riveted and which shall be suitably fastened to the equipment or mounted immediately adjacent thereto. 17.4.2 All push button stations, control switches, selector switches, motor controllers, air circuit breakers or safety switches, etc., shall be provided with nameplates as described in the previous paragraph. Such nameplates shall dearly identify by name the equipment controlled and shall state any special operating instructions which may be indicated on the drawings. All nameplate designations shall be subject to the approval of Owner's Representative. 17.4.3 All factory built control panels, breaker panels, etc., shall be equipped with suitable nameplates as specified under these individual headings. Service entrance equipment shall have a nameplate on each branch feeder protection device. 18. TESTS 18.1 Prior to the start-up of any system, Contractor shall carefully check all devices and manufacturer's instructbns for the proper procedure of start-up. 18.2 Check service entrance voltages and inform electric utility of any over - voltage or under - voltage conditions. Check ground conditions and grounding resistance. Check system for proper phasing. 18.3 Balance all single phase loads at panelboards. The total connected load on each leg of the panel shall not vary more than 10 percent. If they vary more than 10 percent the branch circuit connections shall be redistributed at the Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS *SECTION 16A-6 panels by exchanging the circuit wires from the branch circuit protective devices until the above conditions are satisfied. 18.4 Replace all bumed out lamps and ballasts with Owner fumished lamps and ballasts at the completion of work. 18.5 Check all auxiliary systems in accordance with manufacturers' instructions prior to operating systems. 18.6 Make all necessary field adjustments and set all protective relays and devices in accordance with instructions provided by the Owner. Fully coordinate all extemal connections to the equipment with the equipment manufacturer. 18.7 Contractor shall megger each motor winding before energizing the motor. The insulation resistance shall be recorded based on winding temperatures and voltage information fumished by Owner. Contractor shall submit recorded insulation resistance and notify Owner of all motors with low insulation resistance in order that these motors may be replaced. 18.8 Contractor shall perform such tests as are required by utility on service entrance cables. 19. OPERATING TESTS 19.1 In addition to any other tests herein specified, the systems, after completion, shall be tested in operation for at least fifteen (15) days and shown to be in satisfactory operating condition. 19.2 Should any of the equipment or apparatus, furnished by the Contractor, require the service of a Factory Representative for installation or placing in proper service and /or adjustment, the Contractor shall provide same without additional cost to the Owner. 19.3 The Contractor shall fumish to the Owner three (3) sets of instruction books and spare parts list, bound in brochure form, covering each item of equipment fumished under the contract. See Division 1B of these specifications. 20. CLEANING 20.1 During construction, for all work fumished and /or installed under his contract, Contractor shall clean and /or protect interiors of all equipment devices, raceways, etc., from dust, dirt, cuttings, or other foreign matter before closing of finished work. 21. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER 21.1 The Contractor shall arrange with the utility company to provide a temporary construction service for temporary Tight and power. Location to be at the Contractor's field office remote from the building. 21.2 The Contractor shall fumish and install a temporary panel at the above location. Temporary Tight stringers with double pigtail sockets and temporary power stringers and outlets shall be installed by the Contractor as required by the Contractor for the various trades. 21.3 The Contractor shall lamp all sockets originally and shall maintain system during working of all trades. Subsequent tamping and fuses shall be furnished by the Contractor. 21.4 The Contractor shall pay for all energy consumed and any other charges by the Utility Company. 05/05/98 DIVISION 16• 21.5 The Contractor shall remove all temporary equipment and wiring when it is no longer required and when directed to do so by the Owner. 22. PROTECTION AND INSTALLATION 22.1 All electrical equipment and materials stored on the site shall be suitably sheltered from the elements. All materials and items subject to moisture damage shall be stored in dry, heated spaces. All equipment shall be protected against dirt, water, and corrosive or mechanical damage, and theft. 22.2 All electrical systems and equipment shall be stored, protected, installed, tested, adjusted, and started up in strict accordance with the manufacturer's directions and instructions. Each Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of any conflict between any requirement of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's instructions and shall receive the Engineer's written instructions before proceeding with the work. Any work that does not comply with the manufacturer's instructions or such written instructions from the Engineer shall be corrected by the Contractor at no increase in the contract amount or additional cost to other trades. 22.3 If the size of any conduit, conductor, switch, breaker, enclosure or related accessories or the location of any fixture or device is not clearly evident on the Drawings, the Contractor shall request clarification from the Engineer prior to proceeding with the work. 22.4 All electrical equipment shall be installed in a rigid and secure manner and shall be installed plumb, level, and square with the building, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified herein. - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington BASIC MATERIALS. METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS *SECTION 16A -7 C C DIVISION 16* PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL 1.1 The work under this Section shall be govemed by and subjed to the provisions of the following: Section 16A BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS. 1.2 All work covered in this section of the specifications shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise Indicated on the drawings. 1.3 Refer to Civil Drawing for site utilities, miscellaneous work, and coordination with the exterior work of other contractors. 2. SYSTEM VOLTAGE Incoming service and interior power distribution shall be 3 phase, 4 wire, 277/480 volts. 2.2 The majority of interior and exterior lighting shall be wired from 3 phase, 4 wire, 277/480 lighting panels. 2.3 Major HVAC equipment shall be wired 3 phase, 3 wire, 480 volts. 2.4 Convenience receptacles, light tracks and miscellaneous lighting and power shall be wired from 3 phase, 4 wire, 120/208 panelboards fed through step -down transformers. 2.5 All controls shall be wired at 120 volts, or less. 3. ELECTRICAL SERVICE 3.1 Incoming service shall be fed from the Utility Company's transformer as shown on the drawings. 3.2 Contractor shall coordinate with the Utility Company and with information shown on the drawings as to provision of the following: 3.2.1 Primary service, conduit, conductors, trenching and backfilling. 3.2.2 Transformer pad. 3.2.3 Transformer. 3.2.4 Connections of primary and secondary conductors to transformer. 3.2.5 Secondary conduit. 3.2.6 Secondary conductors. 3.2.7 Meter, meter enclosure, current and potential transformers and associated enclosures and conduit. 3.3 All work shall comply with the rules and regulations of the Utility Company. Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination with the Utility Company, including procurement of data, dimensions, and equipment. 3,4 Concrete encasement for conduit, and other concrete work required for electrical installation shall be provided by the Contractor. 4. GROUNDING 4.1 System Grounding - Connect bare copper conductors (#210 minimum) from the neutral bus in the main distribution panel to the main water pipe, to nearest building column and to J3abies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS *SECTION 16B -1 footing reinforcement. Install a bare copper jumper around each water meter. Where conduit is used to protect grounding conductor, bond the conductor to the conduit at both ends of the conduit. Provide copper bonding jumper across each joint in the underground water main for a minimum of 25 -feet of underground pipe. Contractor shall provide grounding to other suitable electrode to establish a path to ground not to exceed 6 ohms resistance. Coordinate with Other Contractors as required. 4.2 Transformers - Ground neutral of transformer secondary to nearest suitable grounding electrode as defined by the inspection authority and the NEC. Provide bonding jumper to connect the neutral of transformer secondary to metal case enclosure of the transformer. 4.3 Equipment (Static) Grounding 4.3.1 The entire conduit network shall be electrically continuous throughout; use as the grounding system, except as otherwise specified, indicated on the drawings or required by Codes. 4.3.2 Panel Boxes, Motor Frames, and other electrically operated equipment shall be grounded per Code requirements and in accordance with equipment manufacturer's Instructions. 4.3.3 Install a green grounding conductor inside all flexible conduit, connected to the equipment served and to the nearest outlet or Junction box. Where permitted by Code, flexible conduit not over 6 -feet in length and termination fittings approved for grounding may be used in lieu of green conductor. 4.3.4 All convenience receptacles shall be of the grounding type; ground to conduit network or to the isolated ground conductor. 4.4 Grounding Conductors - size per NEC and /or local Code. 4.5 Grounding of lighting fixtures • Incandescent lighting fixtures must be installed in accordance with the grounding requirements of the National Electric Code. 4.6 Ground telephone system as required by the Telephone Company. 5. MAIN SWITCH. MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL (MDP) & POWER PANEL (PP) 5.1 Receive, handle, unload and install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, where shown on the plans, Owner - fumished main switch, service and distribution panelboard as shown on riser diagram. 5.2 Contractor shall be responsible for all field wiring within panels, between panel sections and between panel, main switch and CT enclosure. 5.3 Contractor shall provide CT enclosure in accordance with utility company requirements. 6. LIGHTING TYPE PANELS 6.1 Receive, handle, store, install and connect, in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions, Owner- furnished panels as shown on the schedules on drawings. 6.2 Contractor shall be responsible for all field wiring within panels and between panels and contactors, etc. 6.3 Single pole circuits shall be numbered on the right. Multiple 05/05/98 DIVISION 16* TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS `SECTION 16B -2 pole circuits shall be numbered with the lowest pole position (e.g. a 3 pole breaker on poles 8, 10 and 12 would be circuit #8). Lock -on devices shall be furnished on all nightlight circuits, timer circuits and any other circuits so indicated on drawings. 6.4 Contractor shall fill in the panel directory card with a typewritten description of each circuit and install the directory in the panel behind a clear plastic cover. Two (2) copies of each panel directory shall be furnished to the Owner's Representative at the completion of the work. 6.5 Each lighting and receptacle panelboard that is flush mounted shall be provided with three (3) one inch empty conduits carried to a point above suspended ceiling and capped for future use. 7. GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER 7.1 Receive, handle, store, install and connect, per manufacturer's instructions, Owner - fumished dry type transformers scheduled on drawings. 7.2 Contractor shall provide grounds for separately derived systems and equipment grounds. 8. ELECTRICAL WORK FOR PLUMBING AND FIRE PROTECTION 8.1 Electric Water Coolers: Hard wire as indicated on drawings. 8.2 Electric Hot Water Heaters: Wire units in accordance with manufacturer's wiring diagrams and recommendations; provide equipment grounding. 8.3 When local authority requires a remote sprinkler shutoff, post indicator valve or other remote sprinkler indicating device, Contractor shall provide empty conduit and boxes from the building to the remote devices for use by the owner's alarm company. 9. ELECTRICAL WORK FOR HVAC SYSTEM$ 9.1 Provide electrical work as shown on the drawings for rooftop units, unit heaters, exhaust fans, etc. 9.2 Temperature control work shall be as indicated on the drawings. Contractor shall refer to Division 15 for coordination with Other Contractors. 10. LIGHTING CONTACTORS 10.1 Receive, handle, store install and connect Owner- furnished lighting contactors as scheduled on drawings. 11. GENERATOR 11.1 Contractor shall be solely responsible for the complete installation of the emergency standby generator furnished by the Owner in accordance with all codes, requirements and manufacturer's standards. 11.2 The installation shall consist of, but no limited to, the following: 11.2.1 Receive equipment from the supplier (FOB, tailgate delivery to the job site). 11.2.2 Inspect and report any freight damage or shortages per provisions of Division 1 of these specifications. 11.2.3 Installation of all equipment as shown on the drawings, In accordance with all manufacturer's recommendations. 11.2.4 All electrical and mechanical hook -ups, including Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington grounding. 11.2.5 Notify the supplier five (5) working days in advance of system start -up and check -out. 11.3 The equipment supplied by the Owner is limited to that indicated on the equipment checklist. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide and install all additional material necessary for a complete installation. 11.4 It shall be the Contractor's responsibility that the standby engine generator is installed ready for operation in all respects prior to the arrival of the supplier's representative for start-up. It shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer's representative to install and/or service the battery, lube oil and coolant as part of his start-up and check -out procedure. - END OF SECTION - 05/05/98 DIVISION 16" LIGHTING SYSTEMS *SECTION 16C -1 OWNER HAS ENTERED INTO A NATIONAL CONTRACT WITH LIGHTOLIERIGENLYTE TO FURNISH SELECTED LIGHTING FIXTURES, AS SPECIFIED HEREIN AND NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS. 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 Products 1.1.1 Except as otherwise noted, all lighting fixtures shall be fumished by the Owner for installation by Contractor. 1.1.2 The fixture schedule on the drawings includes type designation, Tamp data, mounting, catalog number and special features required. The catalog numbers specified in the schedule are for identification of fixture design only and do not necessarily describe the special or optional features required. All special or optional features shall be provided as called for in the schedule, or required for the application. 1.1.3 Equivalent fixtures by other manufacturers may be provided by Owner. 1.1.4 For uniformity in comparing bids, each contractor's bid for ELC- provided fixtures (if any) shall be based on the fixtures specified on the fixture schedule. Equivalent fixtures by other manufacturers may be considered for approval only at the time of bidding. Refer to the General Requirements article regarding brands and substitutions. 1.2 Fixture installation 1.2.1 Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights indicated and as detailed on the drawings and shall be complete with all lamps, fittings, accessories, et, for a complete finished installation. 1.2.2 Fixtures and /or fixture outlet boxes shall be provided with hangers to adequately support the complete weight of the fixture. Design of hangers and method of fastening other than shown on the drawings or herein specified shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. Neither fixtures nor conduit shall be supported from roof deck. Contractor shall provide supplemental rigid structural members as required to span between roof framing members for support of lighting fixtures and /or outlet boxes. 1.2.3 Fixtures mounted on outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to a fixture stud in the outlet box. Hickies or extension pieces shall be installed where required to facilitate proper installation. 1.2.4 Pendant fixtures within the same room or area shall be installed plumb and at a uniform height from the finished floor. Adjustment of height shall be made during installation. 1.2.5 Flush mounted recessed fixtures shall be installed so as to completely eliminate light leakage between the frame and the finished surface. 1.2.6 Fixture housing, frame or canopy shall provide a suitable cover for the fixture outlet box or fixture opening. 1.2.7 Fixtures located on the exterior of the building shall be installed with nonferrous metal screws finished to match the fixtures. 1.2.8 Fixtures shall be supported at the ends of each fixture with supports not to exceed 8 foot spacing. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washinaton 1.2.9 Surface mounted fixtures longer than two (2) feet shall have one (1) additional point of support besides the outlet box fixture stud when installed individually. 1.2.10 16 foot units shall be shipped in two eight foot unit sections and shall be field assembled. 1.2.11 All units shall be furnished without "pigtail' leads from the fixture. 1.2.12 Internal wiring shall be capped off within the fixture ready for the Contractor connection from the junction box. 1.2.13 Fixtures designed for use in conjunction with the Inverted T -bar ceiling suspension systems shall be of the lay -in type supported entirely by the T -bars and retained by suitable hold -down clips. Where required by seismic or other codes, Contractor shall provide for each fixture a slack wire at each of two diagonal comers. When installing fixtures, the Contractor shall notify the Ceiling Contractor should it appear that additional T -bar support will be required to prevent sag or damage. 1.2.14 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to bring all lighting fixtures to operating condition (refer to ballast replacement information supplied by Owner). 1.2.15 Fixture location shall be coordinated with structural framing system. Owner's representative shall be notified of any conflicts. Contractor shall, without additional cost to Owner, relocate any fixtures so in conflict. 1.3 Ballasts - All ballasts for fluorescent and high intensity discharge lamps shall be factory pre -wired and shall comply with the following minimum standards, unless otherwise noted on the drawings or specified in the fixture schedule. 1.3.1 High power factor - minimum 90 %. 1.3.2 UL labeled and CBM certified. 1.3.3 Class "P ", with built -in automatically resetting thermal protector. 1.3.4 Casing constructed with positive prevention of dripping compound. 1.3.5 Lowest manufacturer's sound level and case temperature rise rating. 1.3.6 Low energy type. 1.3.7 Manufacturer: Universal. 1.4 Lamps 1.4.1 Lamps for Owner furnished fixtures shall be furnished by Owner. Lamps for Contractor fumished fixtures shall be fumished by Contractor. Contractor shall receive, unload, store, protect from damage, uncrate, and install all lamps. Contractor shall provide lamps for temporary construction service lighting. 1.4.2 Immediately following the award of contract, the Contractor shall provide a complete lamp list stating the quantities of each type of lamp required and submit three (3) copies of the list to the Owner's Representative. 1.4.3 Install lamps at the time of fixture installation, at the appropriate time when the building is enclosed for finishing work, or as otherwise directed by the Owner's Representative. 05/05/98 3. LIGHTING CONTROLS 3.1 Exterior Lighting Site lighting.and exterior building lighting shall be wind through EMS system and lighting contactors as • diagramed on,the drawings for "on" and "off' control: END OF SECTION 1.4.4 Replace all bumt -out lamps when the building, or any portion thereof, is turned over to the Owner for occupancy. Lamps furnished by Owner for re- Tamping. 1.5 Concrete bases . forr exterior lighting standards shall be provided in accordance with the technical provisions of Division 3A of these specifications. 2. 11Q1:11 1880 2.1 All Light Track including fittings, shall be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor, as detailed on the drawings. DIVISION 16• LIGHTING • SYSTEMS *SECTION 18C -2 pabies "R" Us - TuI wila. Washington ., ,05/05%98 C DIVISION 16* PART 1: GENERAL 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 All work under this Section of the specifications shall be govemed by and subject to the provisions of: SECTION 1B - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK SECTION 16A - BASIC MATERIALS, METHODS, AND REQUIREMENTS. 1.2 All work covered in this Section of the specifications shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, except as otherwise specified herein or noted on the drawings. 2. TELEPHONE SYSTEM 2.1 Provide empty conduit underground, sized and located as indicated on the drawings, from the telephone relay equipment in the office area to a point near the property line designated by the telephone company. Verify location and routing with the telephone company and the Owner's Representative prior to roughing -In. Provide any pull boxes, junction boxes, etc., required by the Telephone Co. 2.2 Provide for telephone service to individual outlets. Where required bv Codes provide 3/4" empty conduit from each telephone location to telephone relay equipment as indicated on the drawings. Refer to separate paragraphs and the drawings for further requirements. Verify locations of individual outlets with Owner's Representative. 2.3 Provide for telephone service in finished areas, private offices, etc., by means of a flush mounted outlet box with 314" EMT extended to telephone equipment backboard. The telephone company will furnish and install all wiring. 2.4 Provide a duplex grounded receptacle at the telephone relay equipment, and provide grounding as required by the Telephone Company. Provide 3/4" plywood backboard for mounting telephone equipment. 2.5 Provide a #6 insulated grounding conductor in conduit back to service ground per requirements of Telephone Company. 2.6 The entire installation shall comply with the Telephone Company's regulations and standards and all local Codes. 3. SECURITY SYSTEM CONDUIT 3.1 Provide junction boxes , conduit and cabling as indicated on Drawings. 3.2 Where required bv Code, provide 3/4" empty conduit from security system outlet locations as shown on the drawings, to security terminal location as directed by Owner's Representative. 4. ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 4.1 Provide a complete system of conduits and wiring as shown on the drawings. Wiring shall be continuous between devices and equipment with NO splices. 4.2 Install all owner- fumished devices and equipment associated with the Energy Management System except as noted on the drawings. For a complete list of owner- furnished equipment see drawing EMS1. 4.3 Make all 480V, 120V and 24V terminations except as noted on the drawings. Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington SPECIAL & AUXILIARY SYSTEMS •SECTION 16E -1 4.4 Coordinate with telephone installer for Installation of communications. 4.5 Coordinate with other Contractors for terminations within RTUs and other selected terminations as noted on the drawings. 4.6 Verify operation of contactors and associated relays using manual toggle switches within the Novar Executive Controller. 4.7 All EMS - related work shall be complete no later than the date of Substantial Completion. 5. FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 5.1 The Fire Alarm System shall be comprised of Pull Stations, Hom /Strobe units, Waterflow Switches, Tamper Switches, and Low Building Temperature device. 5.1.1 Owner will purchase all Fire Alarm System hardware except flow and tamper switches including backboxes and fire alarm cable. The Contractor will provide all required conduit (and junction boxes) and will install all fire alarm wiring. 5.1.2 The Contractor shall make all final wiring terminations In accordance with the Silent Knight installation manual. 5.1.3 The Contractor must have at least 3 years previous experience installing, troubleshooting and repairing Fire Alarm Systems and must be qualified to install and repair all specified Fire Alarm System equipment. 5.2 Pull Stations shall be wired to the Silent Knight 5207 fire panel on two separate zones. These zones shall be designated as "Front of store" and "Rear of store ". Putt Stations are to be mounted 48" to the center of the pull station, above finished floor. 5.3 Waterflow and Tamper Switches (to be provided by Contractor) and Low Building Temp. device shall be wired to the Silent Knight 5207 as three separate, supervised zones. 5.4 Low Building Temp. device should be located at the Fire Sprinkler Riser location. Setting to be determined by Owner's OSPM. 5.5 Horn /Strobes should be wired using two of the four output circuits proved in the Silent Knight panel. Divide total strobes by 2, Y4 on one circuit, % on the other. 5.6 Special Notes 5.6.1 Fire alarm requirements shall be coordinated with local officials and codes. Verify with Owner /Architect. 5.6.2 Submit fire system shop drawings (2 copies) to the Owner's Project Manager for approval. Subtitle shall include all equipment, materials, and layout. 5.6.3 Waterflow and tamper devices are to be supplied by the Sprinkler Contractor. 5.6.4 Flex conduit from wall to valves shall be In Sealtite. Provided by Contractor. 5.6.5 Coordinate with Sprinkler Contractor, Alarm System Contractor, and Owner's Protect Manager. 5.6.6 If local code dictates that the Fire Panel be monitored Independent of the Morse panel, a Silent Knight 5230 Annunciator will be required and furnished by Contractor. 5.7 Refer to drawing EFP -1 and E6 for additional information. 05/05/98 - END OF SECTION - Babies "R" Us - Tukwila. Washington DIVISION 16• SPECIAL & AUXILIARY SYSTEMS *SECTION 16E -2 5.8 The complete installation shall confirm to the applicable sections of NFPA -72, local code . requirements and the National Electrical Code. 5.9 The Contractor shall perform a test of the Fire Alarm System in the presence of the local fire subcode official. Testing shall be as prescribed by the fire subcode official. Before meeting with the fire subcode official, a pre -test shell be performed by the ' Contractor in accordance with the Silent Knight installation manual. All troubleshooting, system and wiring tests, and repair shat be the responsibility of the Contractor. 5.10 Items listed on drawing EFP-1 are supplied by Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for unloading the storing the Owner supplied equipment and checking it for damaged or missing components. Any damaged or short shipments must be reported to the CPM within 24 hours of receiving the shipment. Any costs associated with replacing equipment identified AFTER the 24 hour period will be bome by the Contractor. The . Contractor shall be responsible for delivering all equipment to the jobsite. 5.11 The Contractor shall. be responsible for all mounts and/or brackets needed to hang any /all equipment that are not provided by. Owner (see equipment spec sheet). URS Greiner July 29, 1998 M 103040.05 Mr. Ken Nelsen, Plan Review City of Tukwila 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite 100 Tukwila, Washington 08188 RE: New Babies "R" Us Store at the Parkway Supercenter in Tukwila, Washington Dear Mr. Nelsen: Per your request, we are resubmitting a revised lighting design for the above project which, in our opinion, complies with the State of Washington Nonresidential Energy Code, 1995 edition. For your review, enclosed with this letter is the following information. Item Drawing E2.0 Drawing E7.0 Form LTG -CHK Form LTG -SUM Form LTG -SUM (Back) URSG Sheet 1 of 1 We appreciate the assistance you provided us in interpreting the code intent. if you need additional information or have any questions, please contact us. Sincerely, URS Greiner, Inc. Lz „I;. M. Richard Wylie Project Electrical Engineer MRW /jac cc /enc. SAM I03O4O\CLERLLT1 VCNOI MRW. WPD Description Revised Lighting Plan Revised Panel Schedules Lighting Permit Plans Checklist Lighting Summary Lighting Summary, page 2 Lighting Control Schedule Toys "R" Us, Inc. Ms. Sue Price Toys "R" Us - West Coast Engineering Center Mr. J. R. Valentine Sierra Construction Company Mr. Todd Rankin Benner Stange Associates Mr. Roger Stange URS Greiner, Inc. Mr. Rudy Baker, Mr. Denis Moncion T1 17.1 12 OD 1 l TT qi JUL iTe, (. i Lit L: . ?L } Date 07/28/98 07/28/98 07/29/98 07/29/98 07/29/98 07/29/98 URS Greiner, Inc. 3950 Sparks Drive, S.E. Grand Rapids, Michigan 49546 Telephone: (616) 285 -3500 Facsimile: (616) 285 -3542 Offices in Principal Cities Nationwide CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 3 01993 PERMIT CENTER Dab -ass Appicamlity Code (tee one) Seeders IN • ' • ' - Corn - - nent • II- . action I Informaoon Required I Location on Mans 1 Bulldog Cepanmeet Notes er,s no ma. 1513 1 emtrict! 1513.2 Local control/access Sciteouie wan ram MOM. 10120 erte aes sly:mews'". . Area controls • Mazunum lond per switch 5BArilTUAgie, a 1513 3 Cayuga zone control Schedule willi type and feetures. indicate locations Miro In Vree31qtazind Indicate ventral glazing on mans MIZINIY IC no n a. 1513.4 averments • • • 01aptevarnibtspeesal Indicate overhead .11=. ; on tans Indicate warm consols SEE A 7744MEO (lir li t513.5 &tenor shot-off Schedule *nth type and features. indicate (=loan AO MR. no n.a. 1513.6 111 timer votteekuo Indicate tocatitm • % P„i:77411 (bI photocell Inter. auto snut-off Meows Icepiticei , _- ._ - . • Indicate location _ 153.3.63 (ai occuo. sensors Schedule with twee end locsoons 1513.8.2 b) luta. Owiterl•S Senemile wort r • and %stuns tback-uo. override oacatiltv : Indents size of zone on -lens fir . , . . ecvons '- or .1 47) Uqhong Sten.lomi Completed and attached. Schedule with nature types. 1114.4 IVE•1111',N) felalw1741TMS'flE1 tames. Lents. wets Der rtdure , yes no Ego motor efficzney MECM-MOT or Equipment Ecnesiule wen hp. rum. effIcren JUL al. • zo i LJJ41 luKo tt_H Lit—Lt/1-141• " —•-••• •-• "••• "`""' '-'"" 1 "". $ I P. 4/5 Lighting Permit PL s Checklist LTG-CHK Pig "die" SA ea Es'r Ralex144+0 ArpER.ZeNTAlia 77)KKOLA De 7- 'OH woonotros May &Mr CNN Comovanco hole The Mowry information is necessary to oneta itgr.ang permit application for compliance weft OW Wang requirements VI the 1994 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. it no circ le or any question, provide provve explanation: ise• Location (floor /morn no.) F'ocure Description Number of Retires Watts/ Fixture Wags Proposed 1 e I AV- (211-4,4x0 TANO,re ,yoN- LENsEP 7T-4+ + 1 2 4 /S!o j✓or4'1'' 205 .$a, $i N A1. Z SIO ArmL 11)PP a PE0 T ✓P0 7/ 29d 2_ HO/4 R44 1.Anil 7ANp�., NwN- LRNSro T -AftU Z 74 2D2B 12M1O3 (3)1- -amv 8.2N4 I,t/►tE0TRAPPER- _ kV A44 A S34 , 0 0 u It Al / 7 d, 1513 7 Loon Oescrrptlon Allowed Wads per R� or per 1-r Area in 1-t (or d for perimeter) Allowed wads a Rs (or r M) Ca�bn7 Panting 'RETAIL S,QLE5 — PE MX eRd F77 Pi' r i N -- . —.: • 02 wm PR it- 141.14 Aareir`yiA/ 6 -2.. -. — Open Parton; fit 2789 0.2 W!R b fP1G0 - L -pig. • or Ate Outdoor Ares '0 473 0.2 Wife Tort.e7J EEulp. R0,4 rosSZ -L Pt — Bldg. (by facade) kV A44 015 W /Res ettlg (bypvtm) B.-Db ? aAJrh1-E7!'R l 4S'X 225. 1.2)S 75WAf Ci 7 Lannon (rloorhoom no.) Occupancy Description Allowed Warts per It •- j, de .. Area in R' 9,9 ' 5 . - ADowed a Area '' 9 - 9 fi r w ei - R m . /0 If 'RETAIL S,QLE5 — PE MX eRd F77 Pi' r i N -- . —.: • Refll3f/ /4 , PR it- 141.14 Aareir`yiA/ 6 -2.. -. 0. S 557 fit 2789 T (03 b fP1G0 - L -pig. - /. 2 3 '0 473 - Tort.e7J EEulp. R0,4 rosSZ -L Pt O. 8 /d 3 kV A44 d✓�7�1�: D/SDL.dY�lypy. /mid! lLLL'Ff /N4 r /dam/ /f fk�MDT. r L ocate — _ Future Description Number of F'adurea Watts/ Failure Watts Proposed • - _ - 41 L.1, 2 °_ - - 2- / 'G JUL e1 'yes 1994 Wash n �at8 Onrepi�ential resit ` P.2/5 I Co ,, ,om • fiance Form Project Info Project Descri . lion Compliance Option M Pro)e Address BAR 1 &S 1/s F, IJpity ayTNCF 'Q ,o IZM.WLe 7P lctnaL y✓as.R/ Applicant Name: Ui(7s6? Arm /r,/L Appears Address. 3/045,3044.6 D R, GRAND R•4p, 1/hai Apprccam Phone a /4)2AS 3Sp0 149546 0 New Balding 0 Addition M aximum Allowed .Ligh tin g Wattage (Interior) To Proposed Wars may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for !Mena Allowed Lighting Wattage (Exterior) Note: for building exterior, croo,e ether the facade area or the permeter memod, btR not both) Alteration Proposed Lit;htinz Watta>~e (Exterior) (May not exceed To 1 Allowed Watts for Extenor) D a' 7-29 -96 For Balding Department Use Prescnptne )(Lighting Power Allowance 0 Systems Analysis (See Qualification Cheol st (over). Indicate Prescriptive & LPA spaces dearly on wan ) Alteration Exceptions (check appreprate bpi) 0 No changes are being trade to the lighting 0 Less than 60 % of the factures are new, end installed lighfag wattage is not being tnveased " From Table 15.1 (ever) : document all acepuons taken from footnotes To;a) Allowed Watts 2 505/ Proposed i4hting Wattage (Interior) (May not exceed Total Allowed Wads for Interior) L Pew y _ Total Proposed Wars 1 G� 5 Todd Allowed Watts Z 47 S Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total AUo+,ed Watts rot tenor T otal Proposed Watt _ /1 CITY OF TUKWILA J U L 3 0 1999 RECEIVED HERMIT CENTER Use' LPA' (WW1 Use' LPA (War Painting. welding, carpentry. rr attune shops 2.3 Poke and the s'ations 1.2 + Barter shops. • shops • _ , 2 _ Atria (atriums) 1 Nat* bencueuccnfare caresfvbition hurt ' 2 Aseamen/ soacese, auditoriums 9vrrnaso', theaters 1 Laboratories 2 Procrrss pants 1 Areran rear hangars 1.5 Resrauran ihors' t Cafeteras. fast toad establishments` 1.5 Reim] A" 1 Fae'.ones, workshops, handling areas 1.5 Retail 8 ", Retail banidrq 1.5 Gas stahorrs. auto repair snare 1 5 Locker antYCr show fealties 0.5 Institutions 1 5 Warehouses ". dotage was 0.5 Litranes 1.5 AieraR storage hangars 0.4 Nosing homes 1 5 Parldsi corages see how tau Wt+olesak stares (uratiet rack shriving) 1 3 Awn concourses 1.4 Plans Sutrra►rted for Canunaet Areas Grey' Schad* txaiainee. scrod ciesuearns. day cam centers 1.35 Carmen area, comders. bases (eacapt marl cartceurse► OA Larmdnes 1.3 Tale( facet= and waterways* 0.8 Office Puddings. ofriwadmnaoaeve areas to fac+Wies of other use types (including but nor limited to schools. hasisnas. hnititubans, magieuress. banks, ChUrctle$)' 1.2 — , JUL 21 '98 11 :10AM 1994 Washin Prescriptive Spaces Qualification Checklist Ness:. W aevpsner tlrpe a 0ih.r.no Mare answer n shacked. the number of theory at tee space nor tirnAad fir Cod.. awrir .ndiaaie Uses. spaces on Vans. r nos awned. do LPA Cainrbsara. itLA DCD.PW P.3/5 n State Nonresidential Energy Code m.liance Form M• wear r.a�on stn, ftowesastesa energrCoee Cen•Mancs Rana $ A 8/F5 -27 i z WJt.M Occupancy Lighting Fixtures: 0 Warehouses. storage areas or aircraft storage hangers "(Other Check Rare 11 at least 95% of Razors In the specs meet as four criteria: 1. Futures we fluorescent, non - tensed, wilt+ only one or two tamps. and 2. Lampe are T -5, 7-5, T.8 or PL, and 3. Lamps.are 5.50 Watts. and s Bantu ere eleetranic ballasts Table 15 Unit Lighting Power Allowance (LPA) for Interior lighting y LTG -SUM 7 21-1 pr4 Footnotes for Table 15-1 1 In coca in 1Nhicft a use is not mentioned zpcuslitally. the 1 )s!r Po,os•rAllowance shall be determined by the building oflidal. This dctorminetion shall ' hated upon the mcti1 comparable use specified in the table. Six Section 1512 f'rx evanpl areas. 2. The tarts per square fool may tc increased. by two paceent per toot of ceiling height above twenty feet. unless specititally directed w hcrnisc by sutncquatl footnotes. 1 Woui per square foot of room maybe increased by two pmer;tt per foot otuxiling height above twelve feet. .L. •nr all other spices, such as sating and common areas. use the Unit Light Power.{Uo.once for assembly. S. Watts pct square cost of room n•.ay be increased by two perca+t pa toot of ceiling. height above nine feet. b. IncluJka pump area under canopy. 7. In torsi in which a lighting plan is submirid for only a portion of a floor. a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.35 maybe used for usable otlia !soot arc and O.80 watts per square foot shat( be used for the common anal. which may include elevator apace. lobby area and rest rooms. Common areas. as herein defined do not include matt cam:oursrs. K. for thc lire engine room. the Unit Lighting Power Aliewmx is 1,0 watt per square foot. }'a indoor sport tournament courts with adjatzrtt spatula sating. the Unit Lighting Power Allowance' for thc court arc is 16 watts per square !bat. 10. For both Ratai1 A and Retail B. light for ti cc.ztandingt display. building shon►ease illumination and display window illumination installed %whin two Vert of the window are exempt. Retail A allows a Unit Lighting Power A1lot.snc of 1.0 warts per square coot. Ceiling mounted adjtatable tungsten halogen and ND mcrchandi,c display illurninarics arc exempt. Retail R allows a Unit Lighting Power Allowance of 1.5 watts per square foot. including all matmtcd mcic1 andi3e display luminaries. 11. Provided that a floor plan, indicating rack location and height, h submitted. the square footage for a warehouse may be defined. tog computing the interior Unit Lighting Power Allowance, as the floor arca not coveted by racks pita thc vertical Cage aria (acucss side only) of the racks. The height allowance defined to footnote 2 applies only to the floor arca not coucred by racks. RECEIVED CITY OP TUKWIlA JUL 3 0 1998 PERMIT CENTER . ROOM N0. ROOM w - COIUTRoL TYPE .LOCATION . . � lritiAaelCs _ 101 SALES AREA 'cans ac 7o/¢ A1Z -Z v ! !ia'J6wT• !y lb w04v Ir ee e /rl� :d"011d 44+704 102 VESTIBULE .COOVTAzitIg # wE,l date' 44 , 711 MA 77L c .v TROT. 103 OFFICE • y41Au-L .6 447 D 04, R 104 COUNT ROOM ' WA L L .1 MO redo 47 PR 105 TELCO ROOM WALL 1,w., Ted? 4T Pa so 106 EQUIPMENT ROOM )444 1.1. 114117 4 •4 r Pe.sR 107 MEWS ROOM W.4 AL two'We 40 7 PQ 108 JANITORS CLOSET WAIL Syvd Tel A r PAR 109 WOMEN'S ROOM V✓A tL .f.A.. 01 TLlV /j psd4 110 MOTHERS ROOM y,/,4` f4 d rae4I /r piehea.t 11 TRAINING ROOM t.V /LL• 0i .4 7 AeaR - - 112 BREAK ROOM w,4,14• S/too .07 3'aaaR 113 PRE-SALES c' Y A�e , L w`.e. i �I'7�747stL c. 114 RECEMNG ' eaii/A4 7d1lliKL. 412; y 4vE,4, &/+7 �b TN1zext.e A'7/204. 115 POWER ROOM ; Wes1. ssv,y4 / • - - - -- - - - - - -- 116 HALL 46.47AL.fd1�C�wY d Aff i d . /P ii.Q0iv0 .fL.0 >4vo30rr r414 URSGreiner ( Job BARIES R - PAwiema Lv wlr4Project No. /Yl/D364 Sheet of Description 74 V4 Computed L Computed By Z. >l1P . Date 7 -2 9 X916 ltMFs3 Checked By Date .2: �AL L /444.W.tt G /.e '4'/77.40eE 2e/ Tor. /-pcLE, LQ•DOAtO Ta M. PAII01L+r7 Soy odt: •GAAA, 5 Jam, 4L O. Ce.vra•4. 0,0 /5 �T y.e vo s.YQacv <Atsrag $44k4 741F drw GEA F 4 1✓GiyT /i✓G. /Ieddr.500.41T4t deeiwT/ce4. Arlo vf•Q6 ' RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 3 0 1998 PERMIT CENTER JUL -07 -98 TUE 01 :46 P11 URS GREINER f fi r, )nom 1 l ll�fl ,JUL 0 7 1998 URSGreiner FAX TRANSMITTAL COVER SHEET TO NAME/CO.: Todd Rankin - Sierra Construction Co. PROM: Rudy Baker PHONE NO.: (616) 285 -3489 .: NO. OP PAGES (INCLUDING COVER SHEET). 9 SUBJECT: Summary of Washington State Non - Residential Energy Code In response to your request, please find enclosed the non - residential energy code for the Babies "R" Us store in Tukwila, Washington. If you have any questions or need further clarification, please contact Lyle Bogner, mechanical engineer in our office at (616) 285 - 3526. cc/enc. Toys "R" Us, Inc. Ms. Sue Price (201) 261 -2409 Toys "R" Us - West Coast Engineering Center Mr. J. R. Valentine (209) 462 -6438 RBrac FAX N0, 16162853542 Client: Project Name: _ B 4 Location: Project Number Issue Date: If there arc problems with this transmission, call (616) 285 -3500 immediately. Thar facsimile contains PRIVILEGED AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION headed Doty Ibr the use of the Addressee(s) harmed above. If you are sot the intended recipient, you are hereby solifcd that easy duplication or espying of Ihks facsimile is STRICTLY prohibited. If you have received this faaimile in mot, OCISC notify w by telephone and retum the facsimile to to et the addles below via he U.S. Postal Service. Thank you. 3950 Spate Drive, SE 34405 W. 12 Mile Rd. Suite 299 • Gnrad (tapids. M149546-4146 Farmiuptaa Hills, MI 44331 -5627 (6x6)215 -3300 ($10) 553.9449 FAX (616) 2/54542 FAX (t 10) 5539571 P 4WVI 4 LEkWAX TRP3RR.MPD 6.1 4$0 Writ Mitchell Strad Petoskey, M149770 -2229 (616) 3474103 FAX (616) 347-9634 Toys "R" Us, Inc. Proposed Babies "R" Us Tukwila, Washington M103040.05 July 7,1998 FAX NO.: (206) 574-0041 P. 01/09 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL -- 8 1998 PERMIT CENTER 546 S. Muid4 SL. Suite 714 btdianapsiis, TN 46225 -1100 (317) 636.7469 FAX (317)656.5364 D98 O(W DATb May 27, '1991 PROJECT NAME: BABIES 'R'US PLAN CHECK NO.: 0911-0I SS 1. Show c mpRaso. wi the gVmhinpou Sete Noweeieemtial Eaa p Code. Sp.elNaaly oomplieocs wide Semi= 133!} Lib rower Agowsoe Opdoa. TUKWILA : BUILDING DIVISIO PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS Coosa Bob Sonedetto at (206).431:3670, Wm aoy IpAst one roprdloi dee Ibtiowhg *meow { , •a` '�a • Cn .]fCeq uirea�eut ` pecWASUteEa : 1'V :Per A Cody • .. �� - -� =U. _ A dual Valli - - - - _.' Roof U -Value - Page 130, Table 13.1 .05 .05 Wall U -Value - Page 130, Table 13 -1 .14 .20 Perimeter Insulation .10 Existing Condition Glass - Page 130, Table 13 -1 1.45 1.03 Glass SC - Page 130 1.00 .82 JUL 07 -98 TUE 01 :47 PM URS GRE.INER t U SGreiner Flt No.: Date: Project: Location: Zone 1 Design Input According to ASHRAE 1993 Fundamental Standards Degree Days per year Temperatures: Summer Winter Latitude: Relative Humidity 511A I0)u.LvulUMS\ENERGYF.N w /0 M103040.05 May 14, 1998 Babies "R" Us Tukwila, Washington Energy Envelope Data Standard Thermal Analysis • 5,145 • 80 db, 64 wb = 23 db 47 °5' North = 30% FAX NO. 16162859542 P. 04/09 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA P. 05/09 Trans Aic 2eoausice Sy: ORS QtrINIn •• BASIES R US TOEwILA, W. LAD :38.500 SO FT NON PR0TOTIPt Nether File Codes Location: Latitude: Longitud0s Time Dona; Elevation: 'Barometric Preceurss Summer Clearness Number: Winter Clearness Numbers Summer Design Dry bulb: Summer Design Wet Dulbs Winter Design Dry Bulb: Summer Ground R.:flcctaaee: Winter Ground Refleetnnces Air Density: Air Specific Heat: Density- Specific Heat Prods Latent Meat Factor: Cntbalpy Factors Design Simulation Period: Juno System Simulation Period: January Time /Date Program vas: nun: Data:.et Name: g N A L Y S I S SEATTLE SEATTLE, . WASHINGTON 47.0 (deg) 122.0 (deg) 0 704 (fe) 29.S (in. Sg) 0.95 0.95 00 tY) fa . (V) 24 (7) 0.20 0.20 0.0749 0.2444 1.090a 4,036.9 4.4053 (Lnm /cuft) (Neu /lbm /F) (Stu - min. /nr /cute /7) (Deu- min. /hr /cafe) (Lb. Din. /hr /suet) To . )covember To December Cooling Load Methodology: TSTD /Tint Averaging Usio: 5 7/ 7/98 38 y.TI)KWI .. TM 11.550.. 31,630. 31,630 33.660 _ 11,550 31,630 '31,630 33,660 .13.791 .: 2' .. ..0 - ...... J'. .:. +.- ....... ..1 ...4.•. JUL -07 -98 TUE01.48 PM' : URS GREINER FAX NO. 1616'2853542 (..' ") . Maio Avail. ;;. Room' Outside Cooling Heating Return . ".,Exhaute Supply exhaust .Airflow* Airflow Airflow Airflow • Airflow ,Airflow . Airflow (Cfm) .. (Cfm) (Cfm) (Cfm) (Cfm) .. (Cfm) (Cfm) . Tram? Air conditioning *economics 14Y' URS GREINER AiAPLCw - ALTERHATIVL 1 System .System Awobor: Type 1 SE Tara2s CA0ACZTY - ALTERNATIVE 1 SYSTEM $ U N M A R Y (Design Capacity q.Wntiries) Cooling Heating Rain Sye. Aux. Sy». Opt: Vent Cooling Main Sys. Aux. Sys. Pr:hoat: Reheat Numidif. Opt. Vent Heating' System System Capacity Capacity Capacity Totals capacity 'Capacity' Capacity Capacity. Capacity ; Capacity Totals Vuaber type (Tons) . (Ton-) (Tons) (Tons) tecuh) • (Stub) :(itch) (atuh) (Stub)' ()Stub), (Stull) 1 SL 60.5 0.0 0.0 60.5 . 791,121 0 - 269.103 Totals 60.5 0.0 0.0 60.5 - 791,121 0 269.103 The building peaked at hour 14 month 7 with a capacity of 60.5 tens EM01NEKRZNG CHECKS - w).TER)GTTVE 1 HICGZ N CH& Percent Cooling -•- Hcatiny 7" System win/ System Outside. Cfm/ Cfm / Sq Ft stub/ 'Cfm/ huts' number Auxiliary Type. Air • 563 Pt' Ton . /Ton Sq Pt .Scr Pt. tq Pt• 1 Main SZ 36.52 0.02 622.7 636.2 16.16' 0.62 - 20.55 P. /09 JUL -07 -98 TUE 01:48 PM URS GREINER frame Air Conditioning Rconomics y: ORS CIR IRRR SYSTEM CHECKSUMS Total Capacity (7or,9) (Mbh) Main Clg 60.5 726.2 Aux Clg 0.0 0.0 Opt Vent 0.0 0.0 Totals 60.5 726.2 System 1 Peak St FAX N0. 16162853542 SINGLt ZONE SYSTEM P. 07/09 v 400 PAGE .69 COOLING COIL PEAK CIA SPACE PEAX HEATING COIL PEAR Peaked at Time -=a Ko /!r: 7/34 • Mo /Hr: 7/34 • • Mo /Hr: 13/ 1 Outride Air - -s OAD9 /W11/Ipt: 79/ 45/ 70.0 • CADS: 79 • =Or 26 • • Space Rot. Air Ret. Air Net Parent • Space Percnt • Space Peak Coil Poak Parent Sent•..Lat. Sensible Latent Total Of Tot • Sensible Of Tot • Space ren9 Tot Sono Of Toc Envelope Loads (itch) (Ptah) (Drub) latch) (4) • (Stub) (41 • (Stub) Muhl (1) Skylitcbolr 75,600 0 76,600 10.41 • 75,600 33.74 '• 0 0 0.00 Skylite Cond 0 1,067 1,06 0.15 • 0 0.00 • 0 - 17,544 2.22 Root Cond 0 99,927 49,927 12.25 • 0 0.90 • 0 - 70,699 6.96 Glass Solar 29.540 c 29,560 3.93 • 21.540 5.19 • 0 0 0.00 Glass Cond 739 0 739 0.10 • 739 0.13 • -7,291 -7.291 o.92 Wall Cond 20,126 1.656 21,963 3.03 • 20,326 3.66 • - 72,671 - 90,506 . 10.16. Partition 0 0 0.00 • 0 0.00 • 0 0 0.00 Exposed Floor 0 0 0.00 • 0 0.00 • -9,3a7 -9,347 1.06 Infiltration 17.126 17.125 2.36 • 10,765 1.96 • .102,943 - 103,943 13.01 Sub Total.“ a 142,160 91,951 234.001 32.22 • 135,610 24.69 • - 191,453 - 257,57.9 26.34 lnt.rnal Loads • • Ligrta 341,641 0 341.641 47.06 • 341,661 62.10 • 0 0 0.00 People 90.000 90,000 12.39 • 50,000 9.09 • 0 0 0.09 Mist 0 0 0 0 0.00 • 0 0.00 • 0 0 0.00 Sub Totul.me 431,641 0 0 431.641 59.44 • 391,441 71.19 • 0 0 0.00 Carl ing Load 22,490 - 72,600 0 0.00 • 22,571 4.12 • - 23,723 0 0.00 Outt2de Air 0 0 0 99,671 12.21 • 0 0.00 • 0 - 532,039 67.36 Sup. Fan Neat 0 0.00 • 0.00 • 0 0.00 Rec. Fan Boat 0 0 0.00 • 0.00 • 0 0.00 Duct Beat Pkup 0 0 0.00 • 0.00 • 0 0.00 CV/':=1 siering 0 0 0.00 • 0 0.00 • 0 0 0.00 rAAA.rst heat - 214,152 0 - 29,162 -3.66 • 0.00 • 29,447 -3.72 Terminal Pypmv: 0 0 0 0.00 • 0.00 • 0 9.00 • • Grand Total - -, 596,471 41,020 0 726,113 100.00 • 650.126 100.00 • - 235,1 - 791,121 100.00 CC'0LINO COIL SELECTION AREAS Sent Cap. Coil Airil Entering D6/68 /FOE Leaving DD /M'B /WR GrOe1 Total Glare (06) ( (Mbb) (efm) Dog F Deg F Grains Deg F Deg F Grains Floor 36.500 647.0 33.630 77.9 63.9 67.5 59.2 56.2 63.6 Part 0 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.9 0.0 0.0 Earle 3 0.0 9 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.9 0.0 0.0 Root 34.£00 640 2 Wall 13.353 420 •4 7EnTZNG cOIL SELECTION AIRFLOWS (efm) -- •-ENGINEERING CMECXS -- -- Tt#r$P TORES (F) - -- Capacity Coil AirIl bait Lvg Type Cooling Heating Clg 0 OA 36.5 Type Clg Mg (SW (cfm) Deg F Dog F Vent 11,550 11.550 C1; Cfm /Sgtt 0.92 SADB 69.2 74.2 Main Rtg -791.1 31,630 51.4 74.2 Iufil 2,231 2,231 clg Ctn /Ton 529.69 Plenum 76.9 66.1 Aux Htg 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 supply 31.430 31,630 Clg Seift /Ton 676.22 Return 76.9 66.1 Preheat -269.1 31,630 51.4 59.2 M.incfm 0 0 Clg Ptuh /Sgtt 16.94 Rat /OA 7 7.6 51.4 Reheat 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Rotorn 33.660 33,960 N0. People 200 Runarnd 75.0 44.0 komidif 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Exhaust 13,791 13,763 2139 4 0A 31.6 Fn StrTD 0.0 0.0 Opt Vent 0.0 0 0.0 0.0 Rm 6x11 0 0 Mg Cfm /1q ?t 0.92 Fn SIOTD 0.0 0.0 Total -791.1 Auxil 0 0 Sty Rtuh /Sgrt -20.55 Fn Fritz 0.0 0.0 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL - 8 1998 PERMIT CENTER JUL -07 -98 TUE 01 :48 PM URS GREINER /lane Air Conditioning Economic' 2y: DRS MINYA MAIN ST5TES COOLING - ALTERNATIVE 1 MAIM SYSTEM HEATING - ALTERNATIVF 1 Room Humber Description BUILDING U- VALUES - ALTERNATIVE 1 1 SALES Aa2A 0.000 0.530 9.500 0.522 0.047 0.400 0.414 0.179 0.317 35.2 Zone 1 Total /Ave. 0.000 0.530 0.500 0.522 0.047 0.400 0.414 0.179 0.317 15.2 System 1 Tota1/Ave. 0.000 0.530 0.500 0.522 0.041 0.400 0.414 0.179 9.317 35.2 Building 0.000 0.539 0.500 0.522 9.067 0.400 9.434 0.179 0.317 35.2 FEAR C O O L S N G LOADS Main System) W I H E A T I N G L O A D S (Main System) BUILDING U VALUES FAX N0, 16162853 Space Coil Peak.. OA Rs Supp. Spscc Space Space Peak OA Rm Supp. Coil ' Coil Coil Timc Cond. Dry Dry Air Seas. Lat. Time Cond. Dry Dry Mr Sens. Lat. !loom No/Er D9 /W9 Elb Bulb Flow Load Load No /3(r D5 /+1E P.lb Bulb Floe Load Load Number Deseription (F) (F) (1') (Cis) (atoll) (9tuh) (r) (F) (F) (CVO tetuh) (Bulb) 1 SALES AREA 7/14 79 65 75 59.2 31,630 550.128 46,340 7/14 79 65 75 59.2 31.630 645.993 79.169 lone 1 Total /Ave. 79 65 75 59.2 31.630 550,129 46,340 79 65 75 S9.2 31,630 644.993 79,169 Zone 1 Block 7/14 79 65 75 59.2 31,630 550,129 46,340 1/24 79 65 75 59.2 31,630 646,993 71,169 System 1 TatOl /Ave. 79 45 75 59.2 31,630 550,129 46,340 79 65 7 5 59.2 31,630 646.993 79.169 System 1 Block 7/14 79 45 75 59.2 31,630 550.128 46.349 7/14 79 65 71 S9.2 31,630 466.993 79,369 Space Coil Perk OA Am Supp. Space Space leak OA Rm Supp. Coil Coil F1oc'r Time Cond. Dry Dry Air Sons. Time Cord. Dry Dry Air Sena. Arca Mo /Hr Dr /es Blb Bulb Flow Load No /Hr DE /R3 Blb Bulb Flow Load 15q Ft) (F) (F) (r) (CfmI (Stun) (F) (F) (l) (Crm) (stun) 1 $r,;BS kP.ZA 38.500 13/ 1 26 23 68 74.2 31,630 - 215.175 13/ 1 26 23 68 74.2 31.030 -791,121 Zone 1 Total /Ave. 36.509 25 23 60 74.2 31,430 - 215,174 26 23 69 74.2 31,630 - 791,121 Zone 1 Block 31,500 13/ 1 26 23 69 74.2 31,630 - 215,176 13/ 1 26 23 68 74.2 31,430 - 791,121 System 1 7ota1/Avc. 39,500 26 23 60 74.2 31,630 - 315,176 26 23 48 76.2 31.630 - 791,121 System 1 Alock 36.500 13/ 1 26 23 68 74.2 31.430 - 215,176 13/ 1 26 23 60 74.2 32.410 - 791,121 Room U- Values Room (loom (Btu /hr /Fait /F) Mass Capac. Roo* Sums' Slate Summr Riatr (1b/ (Etu/ NUmbur Description Part. ExFlr Skyit 3ky1t Roof Riede W1773o Nail Cell. =cat) sgft /F) E08/09 V 400 PAOL 70 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL - 8 1998 PERMIT CENTER Floor Total Exposed sunhat oI" Area /Dupl Floor Partition Floor Skylight Skl Net Roof VIndew yin . Net Fall Roue Duplicate Room Area Area : '.Arta /Rf. .' : )tirca , /21 . Axes N giber ;DeIcriptiea , ?3r am trgft) `tsgit) (sgft) (tgft) (sgft) (t) (sgft) (sglt). (t) `.` (sgtt): • 36,500 31,500 0 37S •!40 2. 37.460 ,420 a ;•'10,733 36.500 . 0 '•.375 • 440 '2 37,440 420 • 4 '10,733' • 34,500 0 376 '640 2 37,660 .420 4 10,733 34,500 . 0 375 840 2 71,460. 420 b • ,,10,733',' - ................._. 72ane Air Conditioning Eeenamieo Dj.: DRS - GREIIIER D'JILDIMC AREAS - ALTTRII &TIVE 1 3 SALES AREA ' Zone 1 Total /Ave. System H3 ,Total /Ave. 'wilding ASSRAE 90 ANALYSIS - ALTERNATIVE1 A 3 Overall Roof U -ValU4 '0.057 (stu /Rr /Sq ?t /r) Overall Wall 17-Value a 0.142 (Btu /Hr /Sq Ft /F) ovcrall 'gilding U Value.* 0.066 (Dtu /Nr /Sq Ft /F) Roof Overall TAermal Transfer Value LOrTVr) a wall Overall 'normal Transfer value IO 2Vw) = P V 1' 2. D O June 25, 1998 Todd Rankin Sierra Construction 16715 NE 79th Street Redmond, WA 98052 Dear Todd: SUBJECT: CORRECTION LETTER #1 Development Permit Application Number D98 -0155 Babies 'R' Us 17500 Southcenter Py This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your application for development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed review comments from the Building Department. At this time the Fire Department, Planning Department and Public Works Department have no comments regarding your application for permit. The City requires that two (2) complete sets of revised plans be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. If your review does not require revised plans but requires additional reports or other documentation, please submit two (2) copies of each document. In order to better expedite your resubmittal a Revision Sheet must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections /revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions please contact me at the City of Tukwila Permit Center at (206) 431- 3671. Sincerely, Brenda Holt Permit Technician Enclosures File: D98 -0155 City of Tukwila John W. Rants, Mayor Department of Community Development Steve Lancaster, Director 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • (206) 431-3670 • Fax (206) 4313665 Plan Reviewer: DATE: May 27, 1998 PROJECT NAME: BABIES PLAN CHECK NO.: D98-0155 TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION PLAN REVIEW COMMENTS Contact Bob Benedicto at (206) 431-3670, if you have any questions regarding the following comments: 1. Show compliance with the Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code. Specifically, show compliance with Section 1530- Lighting Power Allowance Option. ) ACTIVITY NUMBER: D98 -0155 PROJECT NAME: Original Plan Submittal XX Response to Correction Letter # 1 BABIES 'R' US DATE: 7 -8 -98 Response to Incomplete Letter Revision After Permit Is Issued DEPARTMENTS: ing Division ublic Works 5 AL06 5'14 DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues, Thurs) Complete ❑ Comments: TUES /THURS ROUTING: \PR•ROUTE.DOC 6/98 PLA�KEVIEW /ROU�1� SLIP Fire Prev P `g ,►& 5—(3-q7 ❑ Structural Incomplete Please Route REVIEWERS INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ REVIEWERS INITIALS: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions Routed by Staff ❑ (if routed by staff, make copy to master file and enter into Sierra) Plan�n�'ng Division 24- hi /f' ' Permit Coordinator ow DUE DATE: 7 -9 -98 Not Applicable L No further Review Required DUE DATE: 8 -6 -98 DATE: Not Approved (attach comments) n DATE: DUE DATE: Not Approved (attach comments) ❑ REVIEWERS INITIALS: DATE. c t Pevm* Lo '.pq PLAN REVIEW/ROUTIN'Q SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D98 -0155 DATE: 5-11-98 PROJECT NAME: DEPARTMENT: V al �D ision ublic Works • \PR•ROUTE.DOC 1/98 TUES /THURS ROUTING: CORRECTION DETERMINATION: BABIES 'R' US Fire Prevention Pla n i g Division AWC 6'13 - 1 A' ,2-18 Structural Permit Coordinator DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues, Thurs) Complete Incomplete a Comments. Routed by Staff a (if routed by staff, make copy to master file and enter into Sierra) DUE DATE: 5 -12 -98 Not Applicable a Please Route a No further Review Required a REVIEWERS INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: (ten days) DUE DATE: 5 -26 -98 Approved Approved with Conditions a Not A roved (attach commentskil J rreaM1 ar Mitaed 6 REVIEWERS INITIALS: DATE: DUE DATE: Approved E Approved with Conditions a Not Approved (attach comments) a REVIEWERS INITIALS. DATE: CONTACT PERSON: SUBMITTED TO: Bldg. CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development Building Division-Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188 Telephone: (206) 431-3670 REVISION SUBMITTAL DATE: - R - PLAN CHECK/PERMIT NUMBER: , ■ t PROJECT NAME: PROJECT ADDRESS: VS ezi \-k)f- Y - 4 43.1 44 -NA PHONE: k-irr4S, 114. REVISION SUMMARY: SHEET NUMBER(S) 0 "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date visions. Planning RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA 3UL 3 o 1990 FR PE1 Mfl CITY USE ONLY 3/19/96 REVISION SUBMITTAL PLAN CHECK/PERMIT NUMBER: U'iSO('J'5 PROJECT NAME: 5abies e Rf Us PROJECT ADDRESS: I1w 4504 ce/A4a. Py CONTACT PERSON: , 1 � � ,n PHONE: (206) FJ DATE: SUBMITTED TO: CITY OF TUKWILA Department of Community Development Building Division - Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Tukwila, WA 98188 Telephone: (206) 431 -3670 REVISION SUMMARY: S2-1-zst l c-AtC)L + nt s \ E . l-k , _ t4D . '` ) sf —J & . SHEET NUMBER(S) "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revisions and date revisions. CITY USE ONLY : 'Planning: FIECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL -81998 PERMIT CENTER utilicd.WK rks 3/19/96 City of Tukwila John W. Rants, Mayor Fire Department Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief Fire Department Review Control #D98 -0155 (512) May 13, 1998 Re: Babies 'R' Us - 17500 Southcenter Parkway Dear Sir: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by. The Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 1. Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. Portable fire extinguishers shall be securely installed on the hanger or in the bracket supplied, placed in cabinets or wall recesses. The hanger or bracket shall be securely and properly anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The extinguisher shall be installed so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 5 feet above . the floof and the clearance between the bottom of the extinguisher and the floor shall not be less than 4 inches. Extinguishers shall be located so as to be in plain view (if at all possible), or if not in plain view, they shall be identified with a sign stating, "Fire Extinguisher ", with an arrow pointing to the unit. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.3) (UFC Standard 10 -1) Clear access to fire extinguishers is required at all times. They may not be hidden or obstructed. (NFPA 10, 1 -6.5) 2. No point in a sprinklered building may be more than 200 feet from an exit, measured along the path of travel. (UBC 1003.4) Exit doors shall be openable from the inside without Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575-4404 • Fax (206) 57$4439 City of Tukwila Fire Department the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort. Exit doors shall not be locked, chained, bolted, barred, latched or otherwise rendered unusable. All locking devices shall be of an approved type. (UFC 1207.3) Obstructions, including storage, shall not be placed in the required width of an exit, except projections as permitted by the Building Code. Exits shall not be obstructed in any manner and shall remain free of any material or matter where its presence would obstruct or render the exit hazardous. (UFC 1203) Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the Uniform Fire Code. (UFC 1207.1 - 1212.8) Internally illuminated exit signs shall have both bulbs working at all times. (UBC 1013.3) Combustible material shall not be stored in exits or exit enclosures. (UFC 1103.3.2.3) Thomas P. Keefe, Flee Chief 3. Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A. 13. Addition /relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and /or adding sprinkler heads. All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of the W.S.R.B., Factory Mutual, Industrial Risk Insurers, Kemper or any other representative designated and /or recognized by The City of Tukwila, prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance #1742) Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (UFC 10.503) (City Ordinance #1742) 4. Maintain automatic fire detector coverage per N.F.P.A. John W. Rants, Mayor Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 5754404 • Fax (206) 575-4439 t City of Tukwila Fire Department 72. Addition /relocation of walls, closets or partitions may require relocating and /or adding automatic fire detectors. All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #1742) (UFC 1001.3) Contact The Tukwila Fire all required inspections (City Ordinance #1742) 5. All electrical work and strictly to the standards of (NFPA 70) Yours truly, 4 ° - The Tukwila Fire Pre > ntion Bureau cc: TFD file ncd Prevention Bureau to witness and tests. (UFC 10.503) equipment shall conform The National Electrical Code. 6. Required fire resistive construction, including occupancy separations, area separation walls, exterior walls due to location on property, fire 'resistive requirements based on type of construction, draft stop partitions and roof coverings shall be maintained as specified in the Building Code and Fire Code and shall be properly repaired, restored or replaced when damaged, altered, breached, penetrated, removed or improperly installed. (UFC 701) John W. Rants, Mayor Thomas P. Keefe, Fire Chief This review limited to speculative tenant space only - special fire permit may be necessary depending on detailed description of intended use. Any overlooked hazardous condition and /or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. Headquarters Station: 444 Andover Park East. • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone: (206) 575.4404 • Fax (206) S754439 Kind of Fixture Fixture Units No. of Fixtures Total Fixture Units Public Private PugNc Private Bathtubs and/or shower 4 2 c Dental units or lavatory 1 1 Dishwasher 4 2 Drinking fountain (each head) ,JD 1 2 2 Hose bibb or sill cock 5 , (p Laundry tub or clotheswasher 4 2 • Sink, bar or lavatory 1 L r) Sink, clinic, flushing 10 10 e Sink, kitchen 4 2 Sink, other 4 9. Sink wash, circle spray 4 4 Urinal, flush tank 3 3 Urinal, pedestal 10 10 Urinal, wall or stall 5J 5 1 G) Water closet tank 5 3 C4 Water closet, flush valve ran 6 F, Tim Non - Residential Sewer Use Certification (To be completed for all new sewer connections, reconnections or change of use of existing connections. This form does not apply to repairs or replacements of existing sewer connections.) Pursuant to King County Ordinance No. 11034, all sewer customers who establish a new service which uses metropolitan sewage facilities after February 1, 1990 shall be subject to a capacity charge. The amount of the charge is established annually by the King County Council but is limited by state law to $10.50 per month per residential customer or residential customer equivalent for a period of fifteen years. The purpose of the charge is to recover costs of providing sewage treatment capacity for new sewer customers. The charge is collected semi - annually. All future billings can be prepaid at a discounted amount. Questions regarding the capacity charge or this form should be referred to King County's Wastewater Treatment Division at 684 -1740. (Please print or type) KING COUNTY Owner's Name (Las , First, Middle Initial) Property Legal Address: Subdivision Name Lot # Subdiv. # Block # Property Street __ ��. Address \ Z CAB 1 �— p City, State, Zip — et.JI L L _ t.J4 1512%1n Owner's Phone Number ( 5 - D3 ) - S7Y..) Owner's Mailing Address: (if different from above) U Pct'o2er- r 3 ora _ A. Fixture Units Fixture Units x Number of Fixtures = Total Fixture Total Fixture Units Residential Customer Equivalents (RCE) 20 fixture units equal 1.0 RCE Total No. of Fixture Units _ ��� RCE 20 I ' .v ✓ 1058 (Rev. 11/06) White — King County Property Tax ID # � — 1 � Building Name (if applicable) Party to be Billed (if different from owner) w GD Party's Mailing Address: (if different from property address) �r�� U1 '�t�%[ A- ° lbt or Property Contact Phone # ( 20(0 ) City or Sewer District Date of Connection Side Sewer Permit # B. Other Wastewater Flow (in addition to Fixture Units identified in Section A) Type of Facility/Process: Estimated Wastewater Discharge: Gallons /day Residential Customer Equivalents (RCE): 187 gallons per day equals 1.0 RCE Total Discharge (gaVday) 187 Print Name of Owner/ Representative Date Yellow — Local Sewer Agency Pink — Sower Customer H13 RCE C. Total Residential Customer Equivalents: (add A & B) I certify that the information given is correct. I understand that the capacity charge levied will be based on this information and any deviation will require resubmission of corrected data for determination of a revised capacity charge, Signature f Owner/ ; Representative P '" il 4 RinkiNtahC:t4 Nt51( Aga 1 'I A' EVIl.grai GM • ..... . .IERRCC145N,8 6 FEB-20-98 FRI 10:36 All SIERRA CONSTRUCTION halie examined the original document and certify this ' a copy of that o Mil . ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, • ,,,,, .0.67 • DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES THIS CERTIFIES THAT THE PERSON NAMED HEREON IS REGISTEFIEO AS PROVICE0 EY LAW AS A , • 1 .. • •• . „ • SIERRA CONSTRUCT ION CO INC 16715 NE 79Tri ST REDMOND WA 98052 FEB 20 '98 10:41 Public aL for the St of Washington g at WO- My Com n expires. Od Dated /0105 • .. FAX NO 1 425 885 4330 STATE OF WASHINGTON 1 425 885 4330 P. 02 R25-062402 f3•12) PAGE.02 %%/•••• .e.eve ,,,,, 40 OWNER SUPPLIED ITEMS (OS1) I I 1 - " % / j PROJECT TEAM THE FOLLOWING INDIVIDUALS WERE TEAM MEMBERS INVOLVED IN THIS PROJECT UNDER THE DIRECT SUPERVISION OF THEIR RESPECTIVE "PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD "; on site reception. unloading, inventory, storage, safeguarding, installolion, coordination, and start -up operation of Al Owner furnished material and equipment as detailed in Section R Article 16. Provide labor, tools and equipment using manufacturer's recommend. methods of assembly and installation for molests and equipment. Coordinate with Owner for acquisition. shipping and receiving A W AfAd item:. 03/20/98 FIRM /CONSULTANT LEAD CONTACT PHONE OWNER - APM: GPM: TOYS 'R US - PARAMUS TOYS 'R US - STOCKTON, CA. MS. SUSAN PRICE MR. J. R. VALENTINE (201) 599 - 7815 (209) 462 -1858 ITEM OWNER INSTALL CONTRACTOR INSTALL CONSULTANT: PROJECT MANAGER: CIVIL TEAM: ARCHITECTURAL TEAM: STRUCTURAL TEAM: HVAC /PLUMBING TEAM: FIRE PROTECTION TEAM: ELECTRICAL TEAM: QUALITY ASSURANCE TEAM: URS GREINER, INC. URS GREINER, INC. KPFF URS GREINER, INC. BENNER / STANGE ASSOC. URS GREINER, INC. CODE CONSULTANTS, INC. URS GREINER, INC. MR. RUDY L. BAKER MR. RUDY L. BAKER MR. RUDY L BAKER MR, ROGER STANGE MR LYLE BOGNER MR. JOE KOLODZIEJ MR. DICK WYLIE (616) 285 - 3489 (616) 285 - 3489 (503) 227 - 3251 - (503) 670 -0234 (616) 285 -3526 (314) 991 -2633 (616) 285 3555 Lighting Fixtures (except as otherwise shown on lighting fixture schedule on drawing E - 2) x Lamps for all Owner - furnished lighting fixtures. X Exit Signage. MIIMIE X Isolating transformers and filter. Unintertuptoble Power Supply (UPS) and isolating switch. X Register wireway and power pole: (wire.) internal wiring by EEC). X Light track. X Signs. X /// / C) j � j j j j �j jD j jj � /// jjj�j � ` j j�% / / j j j j j j / / �j / / / //. jQ j "jj / j j " "" j / j / / / / j j� j j� / jj / j j Enlarged Photo DisPloy. X Exterior 'Letter" wall signs. X Exterior signs. CONTRACTOR: OTHERS: Switch gear - panels, contactors, transformers. X Main Switch and Main Distribution Panel 8e Power PonN. � O STORE LOCATION MAP Safety Switches For Roof -lop HVAC units (Supplied with roof -top unit) X )---- � o ( O Q p L Q w O . 0 V - k 3 For Trw w X otherwise Disconnect Switches (except as olnwise no on drawings) Branch Circuit Panels LA etc HA, etc.. CADD NAME: Aoo PROJECT NO' M103040 DRAWN BY: MLP / MW CHECKED BY: RAD PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION • '1E$ 'R' U a` 'n 5180th S URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 Dry Type Transformers. • - X Emer •enrdlor & automatic transfer switch. TRU Onl Location TUKW I'LA , WA . PARKWAY SUPERCENTER RECEIVED CITYQF.TU4 W0 Drawing Title MAY 1 I 1991 COVER S H E E ; MR QENTE, • .hlin Contactors I Date MAY 5, 1998 ... Conveyors/Lifts icabe . X ® PAR WAY S U P E C E rJ T E R y FR "- Bal Baler be connected not later Ilion f0 do •nor to store fixlurin• . X Exhaust fans X MechMecMech... units. X Energy Management Systems. TU'KWILA, WASHINGTON '.. '.. . ec Mxc+ rA PEFIMIT EQUIRED FOR MECHANICAL LCTRICAL PLUMBING EMS win backboard aril w'r' • teminat'ons. X MS xecuhve Controller 'nstollotkm and , .. rommin •. X writer cooler,,. X - Deter equipment X X '.. .. ❑ GAS P LNG CCTV ark burglar alarm wire and aq°ipmenl. X CIVIL ARCHITECTURAL STRUCTURAL ELECTRICAL CODE REVIEW NOTE: CITY OF' T` "I1.A BUILDING DIVISION CCTV one burglar alarm wiring. X NOTE: PD.O COVER SHEET ALL IAIS E. ERE LV405CAPE NOTE E1.0 POKER PLAN. $P1 NOT USED ARE THE RESPOAND NSIBIUtt OF STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS, DETAILS, IWD RUINING SHELL. SP2 NOT USED TO BE PROVIDED BY BENNER STANCE ASSOCIATES ELI WOK POWER PLAN KPFF CONSULTING ENGINEERS A7.0 FLOOR PLAN ARCHITECTS - LORE OSWEGO, OR ELO LIGHTING PLW 1 PORTLAND, OREGON (FOR INFORMATION ONLY) E2.1 RACK (503) -3251 F1 FIXTURE PUN AND SIGN UGHTINC PINK A1.1 FINISH PLAN & FINISH SCHEDULES E3.0 RACKING ID. RAN BENNER / STANCE ASSOCIATES W(E OSWGO, OREGON 01.2 REFLECTED CEILING PUNS es FINISH DETAILS E4.0 EN.GED POKIER (503) 670 -0234 EFP1 FIRE AL AND SEOURItt CABLING PULL 07.3 ROOF PLAN A1.4 ROOF DETAILS EMS1 ENERGY 11014.IENT SYSTEMS (NGL'AR) A2.0 ENLARGED VESTIBULE PUN & RECEDING RAN 15.0 FIECTRCAL DETAILS A2.1 ENLARGED TOLET AREA PLAN & OFFICE PUN E6.0 COMPUTER SYSTEM FARING DIAGRAM 03.0 VESTIBULE PLAN DETAILS E7.0 PANEL SCHEDULES MECHANICAL , E8.0 RISER DUGHAY 04.0 NOT DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM Fire alarm equipment X TCYS'Ff US, INC. WILL COMPLETE THE INSTALLATION OF THE INTRUSION DETECTION AND CCTV SYSTEM WTIH REMOTE CENTRAL STATION MONITORING PRIOR TO COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. TABLE OF REQUIRED THERMAL U AND R FACTORS F,re alarm wiring 9 X Telephone and paging system. X ROOF INSULATION R = 12.5 PERIMETER INSULATION (REFER TO DRAWINGS FOR R -VALUE REWIRED) CONCRETE BLOCK - 12 W/ CORE INSULATION (WHEN APPLICABLE) U = 0.19 CONCRETE BLOCK - 8' W/ CORE INSULATION U = 0.24 CONCRETE BLOCK - Er W/ CORE MUTATION & 4' FACE BRICK (WHEN APPLICABLE) U = 0.22 MANDOOR U = 0.20 R = ,g FlBERGLA55 - E '. U VVOilE (W) CLEAR GREEN BL U -VALUE (S). 1.03 1.09 PILE. COPY SHADING COEFFICIENT .82 .59 , + -wwwwww�' " 4 U -V MANS. fi6R 31R f0'lal5 a1'e 1' INSULATED GLASS: BLUE -GREEN , under Btend that lrp pla(1 I'vhBCk GDP rOV810f U -VALUE ' S) • ;uni''''°ef'a 6n1 Iona - 1 it'll Of enV' aut h13r 4 Ze the vi 994W O ERR1O NS 62 55 P'''a �;UO '6 does not Receipt of CO tor code o r Onl ns u actor's col, " a . • . .E'-' \ BY e74��. y �' Date I( Permit N0. �� Wood register tandems. e4i X - Refund counters. X Baby Registry Desk. X Automatic doors. X higclosers. . USED X Carpet. X M.1 NOT USED .. M LAN ,2 INTERIOR .ELEVATIONS M1.0 MECHANICAL FLOOR P M.3 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS M2.0 ENLARGED MECHANICAL PUNS M.4 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS M3.0 MECFA4CAL DETAILS A5.0 VESTIBULE WALL SECTIONS W.0 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES A5.1 NOT USED A5.2 NOT USED P1.0 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN A5 INTERIOR WAIL. SECTIONS P2.0 TOILET RAN & PIPING DIAGRAMS A6.0 NOT USED P3.0 PLUMBING SCHEDULE & DETAILS A6.1 NOT USED A6.2 INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS - A7.0 ODOR SCHEDULE &DIALS A7.I DOOR DETAILS - _ - - - A8.0 ARCHITECTURAL MISCELLANEOUS METAL DETAILS A9.0 REFLECTED CEILING PAN Safe. X Comer guards and column sheet material. X Crash rails and bumper guards. X Wainscot. X X i ilet partitions. X Furniture Order Desk. X Tandem register casework. X Exterior Wall Icons X Golmnized steel dac X ABBREVIATIONS SYMBOL LEGEND CODE DATA SUMMARY Toilet attessories Kos rioted). oc ). X Impact doors. X A.C.T. ACOUSTICAL CEILING 711E JT. JOINT A.F.F. - ABOVE FINISH FLOOR KRU KIDS 'R' US ASPH. ASPHALT LAM. LAMINATE BIT( BLOCK LAV. LAVATORY BLK'G BLOCKING L.P. LOW POINT BRU BABIES 'R' US W.. MAXIMUM CAC. .CEILING MR. METAL. CPU CUSTOMER PICK -UP WIN. MINIMUM C.T. CERAMIC TILE A1.0. MASONRY OPENING CONC. CONCRETE N.I.C. NOT IN CONTRACT CONT. CONTINUOUS NO. NUMBER C.J. CONTROL JOINT O.C. ON CENTER DN. DOWN O.H. OPPOSITE H ANG MA. DIAMETER OPN'G OPENING 'DWG. DRAWING P.B.C. PLUMBING CONTRACTOR E.F. EACH FACE PAS. LM. PLASTIC LAMINATE E.W. E.W.C. ELECTRIC WATER COOLER W. EACH war P rD PLYWOOD EL. ELEVATION RAD. RADIUS EXIST. EXISTING .L .ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR REF.CLG.PL. REFLECTED CEILING FLAN REQ'D REQUIRED EXP. ExPANSON VOL STEEL F.P. FIREPROOF SUSP. CLG. SUSPENDED CEILING AN. FINISH(ED) CA GAUGE I.O.M. TOP OF MASONRY T.O.S. TOP OF STEEL CONTR. CONTRACTOR TRU TOYS 'R' US GAY. CALVARRED Tm.� CU GL. SS U.O.N. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED H.M. HOLLOW METAL V.C.T. VINYL COMPOSMON TILE H.P. RICH 941 w/ WITH HAC HEATING & A/C CONTRACT., WD. WOOD I.D.C. INSIDE DIMENSION CLEAR JOB NAME: BABIES 'R' US D. OCCUPANT LOADING: Oven.. rolling doors (AI supplied & installed by Door Manufacturer). R OOM NUMBER IDENTIFICATION I 104 I 17500 SOUIHCENIER PARKWAY PARKWAY SUPERCENTER SALES AT 30 SQ. FT. /PERSON 10,14,55 PRE -BYES AT 300 SO. FT. /PERSON 14.10 LOCATXN: TUKWILA, WASHINGTON MISC. OFFICES, BREAK RM. ETC. AT 100 SQ. R. /PERSON _14,43 - RECEDING AREA AT 300 S0. FT. /PER PERSON 4.49 A. BUILDING CRITERIA TOTAL PEOPLE - Impact Floor Finish. X DOOR NUMBER IDENTIFICATION J SECTION IDENTIFICATION O Dock bumpers and dock seals. X Exterior Ceramic Zile (Only if 4014100 on drawings). X BUILDING CODE: UNIFORM BUILDING CODE - 1994 WITH STATE AMENDEND. BUILDING USE MERCANTILE - USE GROUP 'N'. OCCUPANCY: RETAIL STORE CONSTRUCTION TYPE: 5N • E. EXITING REQUIRED: Air Curtains X NIA' TYPICAL DETAIL DESIGNATION Time Clack X Breakroam Tables and Choirs X TOTAL BUILDING , & MISC. OFFICE AREAS .02 (1041.4) PEOPLE/ = 208.28 MEEk On side Face Of woos) 301 OOP• PRE -SALES & RECEIVING AREA 0.2 ( 18.59) PEOPLE/ = 3.72 B. ALLOWABLE AREA: 212 TOTAL Refrigerator X DETAIL NUMBER SHEET WHERE $HEFT WHERE DETAIL IS CUT DETAIL IS SHOWN TYPICAL INTERIOR ELEVATION DESIGNATION Breokroom Lockers X REQUIRED BASE AEA EA UNUM TED AR SECTION sass F. EXITING PROVIDED NET EGRESS WIDTI4 Compactor X DOOR 1 & 2 1129 1/2') 'C. BUI LDING A REA 4 1 /Y) '00',01\1_i\ NOTE: C/T CABINET SHALL BE PROVIDED BY ELC DOOR ts& (47') TOTAL Onside Face G Walls) SOFT CGY , , I C BYES: 30.917 SQ.01. p, P P P C OFFICE: 394 SO.FT. . ELEVATION LETTER SHEET WHERE �.. 3 � ELEVATION 111' IS SHOWN `99 PRE -BARS (Ground Floor 4,T3I SOFT. (} - TOTAL EGRESS � 3 MIS. OFFICES. BREAK1 RM., RESTNOOII ETC. 1.083 SOFT WIoTH PROVIDED I275') RECEDING N� 1'x7 �-� G. MISCELLANEOUS ---' It,l` JIJ 5 DI ALLY SPRINKLERED T3�,t N - G TRAVEL DISTANCE DOES NOT EXCEED 200' Revisions No Dale Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY RENEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION I Drawing References Na Drawings BID DATE: - CADD NAME: Aoo PROJECT NO' M103040 DRAWN BY: MLP / MW CHECKED BY: RAD PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION -;'` URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 5287 RED 1•CHITE t, DENIS • MO ION TAT . , AS GTON I • - Notional Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS I. US. Location TUKW I'LA , WA . PARKWAY SUPERCENTER RECEIVED CITYQF.TU4 W0 Drawing Title MAY 1 I 1991 COVER S H E E ; MR QENTE, Scale AS NOTED I Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. AO0O° Revisions No Dote Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05 05 98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References No Drawings BID DATE: - CARD. NAME: AID PROJECT NO • M103040 DRAWN BY: MW CHECKED BY: ROD PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 FAX 616- 285 -3542 5287 p- GISTERED HITE f r � p e r A i' ., MON. ON I WAS HI '.. ._M `"L � i National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The informotion shown moy not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Drawing Title CITYOPTUKV:itr} FLOOR PLAN Hasa PERMIT CENTER Scale 1/16 =1' -0" Dote MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A 1 n 0 FO GENERAL NOTES 1. BUILDING SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES. 2. REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS. EXTERIOR BUILDING SHELL DRAWINGS, AND EXISTING CONDITIONS FOR LOCATION AND ORIENTATION OF ALL COLUMNS. 3. ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING, FLOORING, ETC. SHALL BE FIRE RETARDENT. (REFER TO SPEC.) THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONSTRUCTION OF ALL INSIDE, OUTSIDE, AND !NFU STUD AND PANEL FIXTURE CLOSURES. (REFER TO FIXTURE PUN 'Fi' FOR SCOPE AND DUMMY. AND SHEET A1.1 FOR T ATER& FINISHES.) 5. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTAtE ALL SEISMIC ANCHORS, BRACING, STRAPS, ETC. WHERE REQUIRED BY LOGY LAWS, CODES, OR ORDINANCES. 6. FIELD VERIFY THE FIXTURE GORDO, LAYOUT WITH FIXTURE PUN TV, AND BABIES 'R' US PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 7. FOR OWNERS SUPPLIED AND CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS, REFER TO OWNER SUPPLIED ITEM LIST ON SHEET A0.0 8. REFER TO FIXTURE PUN 'Ft' FOR LOCATOR OF ALL FIXTURE ICONS. 9. REFER TO FLOOR FINISH PLAN ON SHEEP A1.1 FOR FLOOR TILE 'RACETRACK PATTERN AND INTERIOR CARPETED AREA MOTHERS I ROOM JANITOR'S CLOSET TRAINING ROOM i11 I . BREAK I ROOM 55' -0' 55' -0 WCE DESK RONA LOCATION FIXTURE PLAN & I ER'S FIELD REP. ■ 0 zs D D 5 5 MEN 107 �VESTIBULE FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/15' = 1' - 0" 65' -0' PION NORTH 8ABY REGISTRY DESK COORDINATE LOCATION w/ FIXTURE PLAN A OWNERS FIELD REP. A ' I — , D ^ NEW O ARE MISER I CLEAR FIRE RISER LOCATION POWER ROOM r ___ -, I 115 I 1 ..0 -.SO m LINEAR FOOTAGE SQUARE FOOTAGE .11 TRUCK PAD OVERHEAD SHELVING 41 (SHOWN DASHED) • 1 m _ ? ,IZI -� I / © I fi , ° ln '1 ' RECEIVING Q , I AREA 1 3 0 : . PALLET (RGD) 0- CG • REWRAP ' Op COUNTER REPAIR SHOP �� i (BELOW RACKING) \ - .,. 198' -8 3/4 (SALES) FROM INSIDE FACE OF EXTERIOR TO BACK OF SALES GONDOLA I/4 -\„ 24'_4 PRE -SALES 175-1 3/4' (SALES) FROM INSIDE FACE OF EXTERIOR WALL TO OUTSIDE FACE OF INTERIOR WALL - 48' -6 1/4 (RESTROOM / BREAK AREA) 11 RN I .:, ^ I x� ,e .- xlol xm _m I xm1 xmd -.I.,' mi ; I I -ml -t1 -,,,,I x, I -,,,T,.7,1 n F lo --m m o am��m f 1913, 3/4 (SALES) FROM INSIDE FACE OF EXTERIOR WALL TO BACK OF SALES GONDOLA - - 7 1 / 4 il 24' -0 3/0 PRE - SALES 2,227 L.F. D -sz o -sz o -sz o -so — '� o -sz O -sz o -.o .0 -.so 'I f or °_I � � ° �I oaL, I °rL °rk7..1 I °�I brio 1 ° I ° = I ° I ° I °ri ) �� INSTALL TOP LEVEL OF LOAD BEAMS ONLY FOR THESE RACKS ONLY (BULK STORAGE BELOW). 53785 -3Ad ,A /S 1 -.05 CI] v %� " � I ® L � 0 1 �� 1 � 1 L EI ®I��I® I I L��L6I�I�L� N 2 M 41 F _- - _. 2' aj Y ■ ■ ■ -0' RTW STORAGE LADDER � ` _ - - I C o n — — _— r '- T T O' T T STORAGE I m O 'J Q3 3' -i x50' -V a _-, T_+ t f- - - - y I .. k R -, X C7 FfT ', II I F+ II F+ I F+ f+ II F+ II F+ 4 . O I 12 3/4" x I I . I - I f:. . / L ■7 i -- - - Z I.I BREAK RM ■ 1 I i ■ I■ ■ -0' INFANT BEDDING H 92 L.F. 0 � �O M p toll., ., ■IN1 MINI MINI P1 j I pm l7[� CD0 1 1 1�0 °. C q P fl ng nn F f': SBRI3 ,D- ' r GRAVID EEED DIAPERID URA I �' ,I �� ° O 36' - 2 LADDER STOFIGE ® 5' 1/ 1111 � ky'o,. 6 � -9 ' S'- 6- xlcx 6 2" ` 5 -11 ( 6 HXN • 2 "2• 3' -101/ ® ° ° 8' 0 P 0 -.Z9 -.S i�- 14i:2 I =f4Il\ 5' - G 0' 1 5' -6' H! G.4 5 9 . 9' HICH JIM IM 4®m 5' -6 HIGH 5' -6 5' - 6 HI . 1 ® 1( 28 N ® i s II i 0 1 9' HIGH = WIRE 6' -0" e. 5'-6 HIGH 5' -5 GRI 9' HIGH 5' -10 1 2 ". ld I N .' , !�� Ir 28' -7 34 ` 7- 07/2 — _ -_ 8. 2_7 9' NIG 6 D xlG A T 1 6' 6 Hp •i 5' -7 l/ m i ` ENOIRON 9' 7' -2 1 2 " , <z 5 -2 'IL- OVERHEAD SHELVING ' — OVERHEA HED) WIRE MESH (SHOWN DASHED) WIRE ME ADJACENT TENANT 170' -7 1/7 (SALES) FROM INSIDE FACE OF EXTERIOR TO OUTSIDE FACE OF INTERIOR WALL ° `0 ° I 289 ? HICx d2 MENTALPIAYr 4 i 9'- D:� . -0' I �i -� - s -s z 8' -6 xaM „ • 32 2' r 9 -.ro fpI 1i G RID 6 O 9' HIGH APPAREL 5.631 S F 9 .N .g /F � � . Iel\M MMiS`iifMl• 4 o � �' b n I rI Ip i _ '�i 48 6.-01/2- < a 3' -83/ % 3 = 10•_6.,° - 51 / 'HI GI6 o' 9 lo' � lo' -T • Z 5 8' 20 0. ' -2 e'-6 "GI MIMI a I— � ' ' 6"-6 HIG21 Z $. '-2" ■ _ NZ. ' g % 4 6' - 1 5 / 6 1 s• Hx�x) 0, % 3.-5 I /4 HICH _ 63 / 8 . T EN 0 ,_ ``c Q tr e 11 tic.. ` 1 , \ \ j a. APPROXIWE APPROXI -E OF GM T ` ' �. �•� i *- Q I W IRE ., It GRID 5'-6 3/9' 9' H GN .:. � 'A 2' - 10 i/7 x 8' -76•_1 5/g- HIGH (5' ) 111. ' 6' r '^ �tY �1FL>• L11 TKX1 AND a^ `.� (5'- 0(x(5'-0.:10.-0.) '- I/i 9' H 5 91 6 6 } /g' 5' -6 3/8" m v xIGH / 3-10 1/7 4.1._ �7' % WITHIN BRU ST � � � ♦ - $ - 6' x 6' I l zz 3' - 10 1/2" 28. 2 F8 0 3 9• - 07 ilt 6. 0 NA i 5' HX? :. IW 6' -Y 5 1 3 a 5' 2' � 4 k 1 ®� FA OHM i 5' HIa1 40 I/2" % so 1/2- I '° 3' x s 5' - 6 / 111 I 6._3- I l lEl 6' -4. • 5' •� ..... , ♦ 3 ' ... - -. 5' - 0' INFORMATION - CENTER -0 • .4. • • 1 1 -tia 1 IGH ® (r'® II `I 8' 8 6 HIGH -6. cR lo w 6' 5' -9 " -6 XIC 5 ® ® ® ® , i`I 9' H. 8' -6" MICH H' -6 HIGH fi TIME CLOCK 1 -- LADDER STORAGE �1 \ L I STORAGE i .- :. 3 x e 2 5' -2 ,/2 a w � U oh Um� . W L■ _■ M III I A ° -0 " �5' -1, ffil � ' -I , AAf`I N Dm 5' -If TN. MMS' 0'�!�5' L -0"�� UU 7' -0' 1 2 � � i< .1., •- 10' ; 5' i ° W V e u ■ . r - ': 7 I�u � 6, 0 5 -0 1 � ■ 0 y a O O 11 •�•, 3' -10 I/2" 5'- „- X e' -7 �1�.._ e 6 9” F;�9 I : L ■/ E ' 11 :� i / -I C 27 MIS 7 [ 27 CAM ] [ 27 CARTS ] 'HCH ' HKi1 HIG WGx 5 ' G I 5 5 9- O O 24'.77 6 9' -0' HICH A�4 \ ,....,TABLE 22 2' -0 1/ %. 10 - 2' FIXTURE LINEAR 8c SQUARE FOOTAGE LINEAR FOOTAGE SQUARE FOOTAGE SALES GONDOLAS PRE -SALES RACKING SALES CRIB AREA SALES APPAREL '98 37K BRU PROTO 2,147 L.F. 741 L.F. 5,763 S.F. 5,605 S.F. THIS PLAN 2,227 L.F. 828 L.F. 5,845 S.F. 5,631 S.F BUILDING SQ. FOOTAGE CHART SALES SQ. FT. PRE -SALES SQ. FT. AUXILIARY AREA SQ. FT. TOTAL BUILDING SQ. FT. '98 37K BRU PROTO 29,939 4,448 2,888 37,275 THIS PLAN 29,969 5,425 3,061 38,455 SCALE: 1/8"=1'-O " RESTROOM /BREAK AREA PLAN ® = PRICE CHECKER LOCATIONS 1 CEILING HEIGHT AT FRONT = ?± CEILING HEIGHT AT REAR = ?± o- 27' 3 1/4 28' -I 1/4 55 -0 GIFT WRAP 37 10 7/8 30' -5' FROM BACK OF GONDOLA TO EDGE OF RACETRACK 2 3/4- 1 3/8' EXIT 4J 164' -1 I/4' OVERALL INTERIOR DIMENSION 77 -7 5/8' SCALE: 1/16" =1' -0" 55' -lT 93' -4 OVERALL WIDTH OF RACETRACK 163' -2" SALES FIXTURE PLAN 1' -4 X 8' -6 1/2" 64' - -8 I/8" FROM CENTER OF DEMISING WALL TO CENTER OF DEMISING ALL ENTRAN 2 ENCHECE -ND . S 6 D" 'B IILL ❑� : E KIDDIE RIDE I� so -o 54' -9 1/4 COMPACTOR J 1111111 nI L__ 41'-0 1/4 39' -5" FROM EDGE OF RACETRACK TO BACK OF GONDOLA 9 0/4 1 3/8" TRANSFORMER �- LADDER STORAGE CO G[ Lt 51/ p ? pRO PA 31998 No 2 Dote 4/15/98 4/17/98 No Drawings Location Drawing Title Sheet No. Revisions Description REVISED SALES /PRE -SALES FIXTURES 0 BREAK ROOM AREA; RELOCATED INFORMATION CENTER AND BALER; ADDED EGRESS DOOR, COMPACTOR, TRANSFORMER, KIOSK, NOTES AND DETAIL N2 UPDATED TO PROTOTYPE REVISION #6 - C.L.P. RELOCATED DOOR AND COMPACTOR - C.L.P Drawing References BID DATE: CADD NAME: 07F01016 PROJECT NO• DRAWN BY: TIR/TJC/CLP CHECKED BY PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: BRU NON- PROTOTYPE MM LION ASH GTON Notional Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 TUKWILA, WA cs This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "A" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'Ti" US. MAY 1 1 1998 FIXTURE P Scale I Date AS NOTED 2/19/98 F'l AR 101 SALES AREA 102 VESTIBULE 103 OFFICE 104 COUNT ROOM 105 TELCO ROOM 106 EQUIPMENT ROOM 107 MEN'S ROOM 108 JANITOR'S CLOSET 109 WOMEN'S ROOM 110 MOTHER'S ROOM Ii TRAINING ROOM 112 BREAK ROOM 113 PRE -SALES tt4 RECEMNG 115 POWER ROOM 116 HALL 2. 5. NOT USED CODE MATERIAL BG2 BUMPER GUARD .3 BUMPER Cu. CR1 CRASH RAIL CG1 CORNER GUARD CG3 CORNER GUARD CC1 COLUMN COVER .1 VINYL BASE VT1 VINYL TRANSITION PNTI PANT PNT2 PANT PNT3 PANT PNT4 PANT PATS PANT VWCl VINYL BALL COVER. PUM2 PLA I3 POLYi CPTI CPT2 CTt CT6 CT7 CTB CT9 CT10 CTIt VCI1 VCT2 VCT3 RBR1 GRTl GRT2 PLASTIC LUANATE PLASTC LAMINATE SOLID PLASTIC CARPET CARPET CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE CERAMIC TILE VINYL COMP.. BRUTE COMP. TILE VINYL COMP. TILE RUBBER TIE SOLD SURF. GROUT GROUT ACOUSTICAL CEILING TLE ROOM NAME GUARD DOMCO OOMCO DOMCO MIE5 I. SEE SHEET All FOR INTERIOR FINISH DETAILS. FLOOR FINISH ',(VCi•), REFER T DETAIL OF ' AANDOM VCi FlELD PATTERM ON SHEET AI.2 FOR PATTERN & COLORS. 3. DO NOT PANT POWER POLES OR WIREWAYS 0 CHECK -OUT REGISTERS. SEE DETAIL 13 ON SHEET A1.2 FOR CERAMIC WALL TILE GRAPHICS BAND 0 MENS At WOMENS RESTROOMS. 6. PANT COLUMNS P &L 1E34100 (WHITE) FROM 6' -0' A.F.F. TO DECK ABOVE IN SALES AREA 7. DO NOT PAINT EXPOSED WALLS IN PRE -SAES & RECEMNG. 8. NOT USED 9. PANT MAN SPRINKLER RISER WHITE. 10. ALL PANT FINISH TO BE SEMI GLOSS. (U.O.N.) BOSTON RETAL BOSTON RETAIL OROSEAL WALL PROTECTION KOROS./ WALL PROTECTION KOROSEAL WALL PROTECTION KOROSEAL WALL PROTECTION ALLSTATE JOHNSON. SHERWIN WILLIAMS SHERWIN WAWA. PRATT & LAMBERT PRATT & LAMBERT PRATT & LAMBERT NEVAMAR (PARS I652C) NEVAMAR (PAS /5483U) SANTANA BENTLEY MILLS, INC. DAL TILE DAL TIE (RMS COOL GRAY 7C) DAL TILE (PARS COOL GRAY 7C) DAL TILE (PAS I555C) DAL TILE (PAS 112150 DAL TILL (PARS 16430) DAL TILE (PARS 1647C) DODGE REGUPOL HYDROMENT HYDROMENT ARMSTRONG NOTE: "OSf INDICATES OWNER S FLOOR MANUFACTURER COLOR � G a Mggdg CPT1 o o VU o 0 .T1 WTI VCT1 VC, VCTI CT6 CT6 CPT2 VCT1 VCT1 VCT A A 85 BLUE SERIES 50 115 WISTERIA SERIES 50 EG -XX -H NAVY BLUE SW IIOG4 WHITE SW 11482 TAOS TURQUOISE P&L 12242 GETTYSBURG PAL IR131R RED P&L 1E34100 WHITE FISH 'STIPPLE' 0510 GARDENIA TYPE II 2402. OSNABLIRG, 53' W. TEA. STANDARD SERIES I ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE COL .1 VB1 V8 V81 CT7 .1 CT7 VB .1 KOROGUARD K -1 SNOW, SHEET .04L7 THICK PI HARCELL TEXTURE, 6' -0' HIGH CHROMATECH COLOR TO BE DETERMINED 11. PANT ALL (4) FOUR WAILS OF JANITORS CLOSET w/ EPDXY 845E PAINT. 12. SEE ENLARGED PLANS &. INTERIOR ELEVATORS FOR LOCATIONS OF WAINSCOT PANELS &' RAILS. 13. ALL INTERIOR MASONRY WALLS RECEMNG PAINTED FINISH SHAT RECEIVE: (1) ONE COAT OF BLOCK ALL, FOLLOWED BY (2) TWO COATS OF PAINT FINISH. IA. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR Al VINYL REDUCING STRIPS. WHEREVER VCT MEETS EXPOSED CONCRETE SLAB 0 ALL PRE -SAES ENTRANCES, AND VINYL. EDGE TRIM, WHEREVER CARPET MEETS ACT. 15. TLE INSIDE THE RACETRACK; INCLUDING' THE BORDER, IS TO BE INSTATED WITH THE GRAIN ORIENTATED IN ONE (I) DIRECTION, FRONT TO BACK. DO NOT ALTERNATE (CHECKERBOARD) THE GRAIN OF TILE. 16. THE V.C.T. CONTRACTOR IS TO LAYOUT, MARK, AND CUT-IN THE RACETRACK WITH A TECHNIQUE THAT WILL PROVIDE THE MAXIMUM ACCURACY, SMOOTH AT ALONG CURVES AND QUALITY OF INSTATADON. VERIFY PROPOSED RACETRACK INSTALAnON TECHNIQUE WITH OWNER'S FlELD REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO BEGINNING INSTAITATON. INTERIOR FINISH MATERIALS LIST MANUFACTURER NUMBER /COLOR KOROGUARD SERIES 800. MODEL C800, K -35 EVE BLUE 6 H A I 1/4" W., .078' THICK WITH MATCHING END CAPS KOROGUARD THERMOFORMED K -35 EVE BLUE, .028" GAUGE P1 HMRCELL TEXTURE, T X T X 3' -C H. KOROGUARD THERMOFORMED K -35 EVE BLUE, .026 GAUGE PI HARCELL TIDOURE, 2' X 2 X 6' -0' H. 120 TEN, 4' H., COVED FOR TILE FLOOR, STRAGHT FOR CARPET NONE CONTRACTOR TO PURCHASE. CAL. ALLSTATE FOR NEAREST DISTRIBUTOR ( ALLSTATE PHONE N0. (718) 526- 7890). 5 -3 -36T IMPRESSIONIST BLUE - TEXTURED FINISH H -5 GRADE 5 -3 -43T MALLARD TEAL - TEXTURED FINISH. H -5 GRADE TEXTURED BOON II, 16x16 MODULAR PATTERN 18503 CA OR 14 TURKISH TRFASURE 0 -799 PEARL WHITE (MATTE) 4 1/4" X 4 1/4' 1921 GRAY GRANITE ViTRESTONE 6 X 6 X 5/16 IP3689 COVED BASE, COLOR 1921 GRAY (GRANITE, 6 H. X 6 W, WITH MATCHING INSIDE/OUTSIDE CORNERS D -192 BUENA (GLOSS) 4 1/4" X 4 1/4' 0 -130 TEXAS TELLOW (GLOSS) 4 1/A X 4 1/4' K -106 HERON BLUE (GLOSS) 4 1/4' X 4 I/4' 0 -69 DENIM (GLOSS) 4 1/4" X 4 I /4' T -2000 WHITE If X If X 1/6 T -2066 BLUE if X if X 1/6 T - 2070 TEAL If X if X 1/6 507 EVERIAST TILE 30 X 36 X 3/6 CLASSIC BONE 96114 DESIGNER SERIES DELOREAN (BRAY 96635 DESIGNER SERIES MINABOAIi'FISSURED' 17678 PLASTIC FACED - WHITE WALL COLOR PNTI P VMC1 PN C1 PNT CTt PNTI Cif CI PNTI PNTI PAT AILS CASEWORK VESTIBULE MULLION PROTECTION ALL PARTITIONS PARTITION CORNERS COLUMN CORNERS -SALES AREA COLUMNS -SALES AREA TRANSITIONS WAINSCOT A YAM WP2 WP1 RESTROOM PARTITIONS MOTHERS ROOM A RESTROOM WALL GROUT RESTROOM FLOOR GROUT LOCATION OFFICE, COUNT ROOM & MOTHERS ROOM CASEI.K REGISTERS - HORIZONTAL CASEWORK REGISTERS - VERTICAL. CHANGING TABLE LOWER CASEWORK, WANSCOT PANELS 3' -6 H. CENTER OF RACEWAY (SALES) RESTROOM WAIL TILE FIELD RESTROOM FLOOR TILE FIELD RESTROOM WALL BASE RESTROOM WALL DID ACCENT RESTROOM WALL TILE ACCENT RESTROOM WALL TILE ACCENT RESTROOM WALL TILE ACCENT FLOOR FlELD & RACETRACK FIELD CONFETTI ACCENT, RACETRACK BORDER CONFETTI ACCENT ENT% PLAY AREA OFFICE, COOT ROOM, RESTROOMS, BREAK...A, TRAINING ROOM, JANROR CLOSET, VESTIBULE, & ENTIRE CEIGWNG COLOR FA WNl DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES COMPACTOR DOOR & FRAME AND INTERIOR FACE OF PRE -SALE DOOR AND FRAME POWER ROOM DOOR & FRAME AND INTERIOR FACE OF RECEMNG DOOR & FRAME COLUMNS ACTT ACT1 ACTT ACT1 ACTT ACTT ACTT ACT1 ACTT ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 SALES AREA SUPPLIED ITEM/ CONTRACTO'. INSTALLED; "CS" INDICATES CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED & INSTALLED ITEM HEIGHT 21' -0' 17' -a 10' -U 10' -a VAFdES a - 6 10' -0 10' -0' 0' - VARIES VARIES VARIES 21' -0' & 10' -0" CLASS I 20 20 20 20 N/A N/A 25 FLAME SPREAD RATING SEE NOTE iL. 2, 6, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, & 17 SEE NOTE iI, 6, 12, & 13 SEE NOTE 1 & 12 SEE NOTE 1 & 12 SEE NOTE 11 & 12 SEE NOTE /I &12 SEE NOTE II, 4, & 12 SEE NOTE 11, 11, 12, & 18 SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE iI. It 4, 12, & 18 & 12 SEE NOTE 11 &12 SEE NOTE 11, 12, & 18 SEE NOTE 11, 7, 9, & 14 SEE NOTE II, 7, & 9 I7 REMARKS SEE NOTE II, 12, 110, 114, 115, i16 & 117 1 . ANT VCT2 (BLUE) OR VCT3 (TEAL) TILES IN RANDOM FIELD PATTERN THAT BORDERS THE RACTRACK BORDER SHALL BE, REPLACED WITH Val (WHITE) TILE. t8. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE WATER - RESISTANT GYP. BOAR IN BREAKROOM, JANITOR'S CLOSET, & RESTROOMS. 19. WANSCOT.PANELS (WP1) TO BE CONSTRUCTED OF PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIAL (PLAM3) ON 5/6 HIGH 'DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD (3' -6 HIGH).. 140 140 130 0 45 45 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A SMOKE DEVELOPMENT RATING LESS THAN 75 LESS non 450 LESS THAN 75 LESS THAN 450 LESS THAN 75 LESS THAN 450 OSI OS OWNER/ CONTRACTOR (051) OR (CS) COUNT A,. 4 MOTHERS 1 ROOM 4 TRAJNING ROOM 111 ' O uum BREN( !, 4 A A I 4q 3/T 41 41 A ,. 67 4 m L_v - -_ 3 4 A A • • 4.,re ai 11 r 4 JANRORS CLOSET 30' - FROM EDGE OF GONDOLA CHANNEL TO RACETRACK (HOLD) 22' -0" MEL FOR ROOM FINISHES, SEE ENLARGED PUNS AND INTER. ELEVATION .118E1S 93' -4' OVERALL 163' -2" SALES OF RACETRACK 38 -2" 55' -0' 39'-5' FROM EDGE CHANNEL TO HOLD 111111E1 OF GONDOLA CETRACK ARE RISER LOCATION FLOOR FINISH KEY NOTES: 10 co ENTE POINT OF RA,CETRACR ARC. 20 MAINTAIN TILE PATTERN TO MATCH ADJACENT RACETRACK. DOUR 106 FOR ROOM FINISHES. SEE HUBBUB ' AND INIERXR ELEVATION SHEETS. FLOOR FINISH PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0" 165' -0' NORTH FLOOR FINISH COLOR KEY - O FIELD TLE (VCT1) K ACCENT TILL (VCT2) <> ACCENT TILE (VCT3) DO L'ERAAIC TILE (cT6) O CARPET (CPT1) CARPET (CPT2) ENTIRE FLOOR OF ARE RISER AREA TO BE VCT3 - TEAL 28 EXPOSED CONCRETE / SEALER O RUBBER TIE MAT (RBR1) RANDOM FIELD PATTERN OF VCT1, VCT2, & VCT3 r1 No Date Description. 03/20/98 PREUMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Location Drowing References Drawings BID DATE: CADD NAME: Alt PROJECT NO.: M103040 DRAWN BY: NU / MLP CHECKED BY:. RAB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS,' MI 49546 616 - 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 BA This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R" US. T U KW I LA , WA ,ea, PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Drowing Title 1 S 199b F I N I SH PLAN P EH F IIIIVLJR FINISH SCHEDULES Scale 1/15' =r -o' Sheet No. Revisions 5287 MON. ION WA i GTON National Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 I Date MAY 5, 1998 Al . 1 A. i e < - fici 24x24 M.H. VESTIBULE 24x46 SUSPENDED METAL LIGHT FIXTURES (TYP,) CEUNG GRO r/ LAY -IN MTD. 0 14' -6 A.F.F. ACOUSTICAL CEILING TLES SEE DEC. DUGS. (ACTI) r/ HOLD DOWN UPS COUNG HEIGHT (CH.) AS 1 I I I I I I 1 1 l i1 1 1 1 1 1 t, 1 1 1 1 1 i� 11 1 I � , CH. 17' -Y , li •0-,6 ' F '03 SCALE: 1/8' = OFFICES - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTE THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS SHALL BE FULFILLED (FOR All NEW SUSPENDED CEIUNG SYSTEMS) PER BUILDING CODE. A SUSPENDED CEIUNC SYSTEM AND ITS ATTACHMENT TO THE STRUCTURE SHALL CONFORM TO U.B.C. STANDARD 47 -I8 8. (4) FOUR NO. 12 GAUGE WIRES SHA.L BE SECURED TO THE MAN RUNNER WITHIN r OF THE CROSS RUNNER INTERSECTION AND SPLAYED 90 FROM EACH OTHER AT AN ANGLE NOT EXCEEDING 45 FROM THE PLANE OF THE COUNG. THE �.. VERTCAL STRUT, FASTENED TO THE MAN RUNNER, SHALL BE EXTENDED TO AND FASTENED TO THE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS ABOVE AND CEILING GRID BELOW. THESE STRUT'S SHALL BE RACED 12' O.C. IN BOTH DIRECTIONS WITH THE FIRST POINT WITHIN 6' FROM EACH WALL. ATTACHMENT OF THE RESTRAINT WIRES TO THE STRUCTURE SHALL BE ADEQUATE FOR LOAD IMPOSED. C. MAN RUNNERS AND CROSS RUNNERS MAY BE ATTACHED AT (2) TWO ADJACENT WALLS WITH CLEARANCE BETWEEN WALL AND RUNNERS MANTANED AT THE OTHER (2) TWO WALLS. D. DISCONTINUOUS ENDS OF THE CROSS RUNNERS AND MAIN RUNNERS SHNL BE VERTICALLY SUPPORTED WITHIN 6 OF SUCH DISCONTINUITIES. DETAIL 0 OF SEISMIC SUSPENDED R CEILINGS SCALE: NONE E0. 4' -0" E0 EMI 11 11111 1111177 1 r 1/I (5) O 2' -0 5) A 2•-0' 24x1 FENDED METAL CEIUNG / LAY -IN ACOLJSMAL CEILING TILES (ACT1) r/ HOLD DOWN CUPS. COUNG HEIGHT (CH.) AS INDICATED. (TYP.) I NO CEIUNG • ■ICEnirini® i=1 I IIII IIIHhII1 . I■■■.. ■■■■■■■. I EO REFER TO MATEWAL UST ON SHEET AT.I FOR INFORMATION RECORDING (CG2) & (CET) DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2' = 1' -0' PIPE STRUT SCHEDULE (H) HEGHT IN FEET PPE STRUT SIZE O TO 7' 7' TO 10' ICY TO 16' 1/7 0 EMT CONDUIT 3/4' 0 EMT CONDUIT 1' o EMT CONDUIT OF SALES AREA COLUMN PROTECTION 6' -0 H. WNW CORNER GUARDS (CO) (TYPICAL 4 CORNERS) WALL. PROTECTION MATERIAL. (CC1) (TYPICAL 4 SIDES) NQIE FUR OUT N.L ExISTING WOOD COLUMNS IN SALES AREA IN STALL 1/7 GYP. WALLBOARD FROM 6' -0' A.F.F. TO 6 ABOVE FINISH CEIUNC. PAINT PAL /E34T00 (WHITE) REF. CLG. PLAN NOTES: I. COORANATE CEIUNG PIAl1 & INSTAUATION W/ ALL ARCM., MECH. & ELECT. TRADES . (f2EFER TO NECH. PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION, & ELECi. DRAWINGS FOR REQUIREMENTS.) 2. PROVIDE HOLD -DOWN COUNG CUPS O LAY -IN CEILING PANELS FOR SECURITY. REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE & SPECS FOR ANISE CEIUNG TYPE & INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. LIGHT FIXTURES O OFFICE AREA PRE 2 X 4 RECESSED FLUORESCENT. (U.O.N.) PROVIDE A INSTALL SEISMIC CEILING BRACING, A RESTRAINTS. WHERE REQUIRED BY STATE OR LOCAL LAWS, CODES OR ORDINANCES. 12 ga. VERT. WIRE INSIDE EMT STRUT 0. 12' -6 0.C: RE: SCHEDULE FOR SIZE FOUR 12 ga. SPLAYED SEISMIC' SUPPORT WIRES AT 45 MAX. (TV.) ANCHOR TO UNDER - JOISTS NOR /12'go. LAO SCREW EYE BOLT. (TYP. O EA STRUT CROSS RUNNER l ,,,;..- _ Pr N I �/ CONNECT W/ (2) TEK SCREWS 4 TIGHT TURNS IN 1 I/7 LOOP BOTH ENDS (TYP.) MAN RUNNER 2.1 5/6 GYPSUM BMAfd7 (TYP.) METAL STUDS VESTIBULE - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE: 1/8" = 1' -O' 3/6 NA THRUBOLT W/ LOCK - NUT AND OVER SIZED WASHERS (EACH JEST) 1.1 1.2 SCALE: NONE 2 X 2 X 1/8 ANGLE AT EACH PIPE STRUT ANGLE /12 MIN. EYE BOLT W /NUT ON BOTH SIDES OF ANGLE ROOF /FLOOR FRAMING EMT SLEEVE ONE SIZE LARGER THAN STRUT. AOT END OF SLEEVE TO RI OVER MAN RUNNER TOP OF CRASH RAIL INSTAL AS PER MFR'S SPEC. CRASH RAIL (CR1) NOTE: AL CRASH RAILS SHALL BE CUT To Fn. oo NOT STRETCH. WAINSCOT PANEL TO 3' -8' AFF. (PLNA3) r /COUNTERSUNK ANCHORS, TOP, BOTTOM, A MID - HEIGHT 0 16' O.C. INTO STUDS. ANCHORS TO BE CONCEALED BY CRASH RAILS (CR1) a VINYL BASE (VB1). TOP CRASH RAIL TO CONCEAL JOINT BETWEEN WAINSCOT PANELS A. GYP. BOARD. CRASH RN. (CRT) IF C A IF CRASH RATS ARE MOUNTED ON MASONRY WALL, PANT MASONRY WALL BETWEEN BUMPERS SWI482 TAGS TURQUOISE PNT2 DETAIL O WMNSCOT PANELS OF CRASH RAILS SCALE: NONE '® METAL SIUOS WAS BASE (ref) ROSH FLOOR DETAIL OF PARTI GUARD SCALE: 1/2' = 1' -0 DETAIL ® OF COLD CORNER GUARD SCALE: 1/2' = 1' -Cr 1x6 BRCH CHAR S W/ CLEM POLTUOW1E RNSH. WAINSCOT PANEL (WP1) / COUNTERSUNK ANCHORS, TOP. A some 0 16 0.1 INTO STUDS. ANCHORS TO EE CONCEALED BY 1x6 WOOD HAIR RAL N MIME BASE (V81). CHAR RAIL TO CONCEAL JOINT BOXER WAINSCOT PANELS A GYP. BDAO. CORNER OF PARTITION CORNER GUARD (CGI)�, VNYL WALL B IPERS (IY . ) WAINSCOT PANELS (WP1) 4 NATAL BASE I 5/6 AwN NORM (TAP.) TOP CIF CWR RAIL (3) SCALE: 1/8' = 1' -D' O 4 -D fllil�lr�( <I1•111■111MMINiil_ ANNE; I - I -ME11I 111-- -i ■••1I ■1118 I IMO _ =._ 1�■■■1 �� 11 mum* � , I1 m � l siimm r.��lf 4 -.axa 11m I l ib IM MIIIIIII1 __NI I1I inl� 1<I Im1 1 ■_t_IfiImiaim• mom Ems rt ■1∎•ritI 111 =1 ��. � ���■� X11 —�— El I 0 WAIL: GROUT (ANTI) WAAL FLOOR GROUT (ORT2) E0. 4' -0" E0 ❑ FIELD TILE- YCT1 4 ) ®r -0 ti E0. 4' -0" DO TOILET AREA - REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 12' •••••u • ••I•1•. ■u■ ws11111411M MIME 111 1 ■ ■R® ■I THE FIELD PATTERN SHOWN ABOVE (10510') IS REPEATED THRU -OUT EXCEPT AS NOTED''. K O FlEID,TLE - VCT1 DECENT TIE -)VCT2 (BOA OF REDO) (6S CF REDO) DETAIL FIE LD PATTERN SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -0- 46 -8' TO N OF RACETRACK RACETRACK SEE NOTES #15, 16 & 17, SHT AI.I DETAIL 0 OF VCT RACETRACK CURVE SCALE: 1/2' = 1' -0' THE TLE ACCENT BAND PATTERN SHOWN ABOVE (4'x1' -4) IS REPEATED THRU -OUT, EXCEPT AS NOTED (SEE BEET Al.1 FOR CERAMIC LIE TYPES) USEEE.6H.x AN CERAMIC TILE (GM COVED BASE AT PERIMETER OF TOILETS. DETAIL ACCENT TILE PATTERN SCALE: 1/2 = 1' -0' 24x48' SUSPENDED METAL CEIUNG GRID w/ LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL COUNG TILES ( ClIU T N ) G /101 (C H N UPS. AS INDICATED. (TYP.) M. ACCENT 0LE- VCT3 Ell (7R OF ROD) O O ACCENT TILE - VETO ® ACCENT TILE VCT3 LEGENQ y P, 1I ❑ FIELD TILE - Oil 0 ACCENT TILE - cno ® ACCENT TILE CT8 ® ACCENT D E - CTI I ACTOR TILE - CON No Dote 03/20/98 05/05/98 Scale Droeings AS NOTED Description Sheet No. Al Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTOR Drawing References BID DATE:. - CADD NAME: AI2 DRAWN BY: ALP.... NW CHECKED BY: RAT PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION PROJECT NO. M103040 URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 National Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R' US. — Location T U KW I LA . WA RECEIVED PARKWAY SUPERCENTEAF YoFTDKwlLA Drawing Title MAf 1955 I { ! REF . CLG . PLE/1r R & FINISH DETAILS I Date MAY 5, 1998 2 A:, Revisions -- No . " Dote Description 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References No Drawings RID DATE: - CADD NAME: A13 PROJECT NO. M103040.. DRAWN TO: MLP MW CHECKED BY: ' ROB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (AC. 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, G D RAPIDS, 'MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616 - 285 -3542 5287 REGISTERB:... CH T 10 st NCION . INGTON Notional Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown moy not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R' US. Location TUKWILA WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER RECEIVED Drawing Title AY 1 1 1998 ROOF F P L A' PERMIT CENTER Scale AS NOTED Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No Al a J j N V M GENERAL NOTE: I. All ROOF PENETRATIONS REQUIRE PRESSURE TREATED 2x6 WOOD BLOCKING AT INSULATION MOUND ENTIRE PERIMETER OF OPENING FOR FLASHING ATTACHMENT. 2. NOT USED 3. REFER TO DETAILS ON SHEET A1.4 FOR ROOF PENETRATIONS. 4. TYPICAL ROOF TOP UNIT LOCATIONS. (VERIFY LOCATIONS AND ROOF OPENINGS WITH MECH, AND COORDINATE WITH STRUCT. DRAWINGS AND EXISTING ROOF FRAMING 5. GAS PIPING TO BE PAINTED - YELLOW. UNLESS PROHIBITED BY SPECIFIC JOB CONDITIONS. IF THIS OCCURS VERIFY PAINT COLOR WITH BABIES 're US REP. PRIOR TO PAINTING. 6. PROVIDE ROOF CRICKETS (TAPERED INSULATION) AT ALL ROOF OPENINGS A MINIMUM OF I /4' PER FOOT. 7. DO NOT ATTACH 4x4 WOOD SLEEPERS TO DECK FOR SUPPORT OF GAS PIPING. PROVIDE PADS BELOW SLEEPERS. A. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THAT LOCATION OF HVAC UNITS AT PERIMETER MEET CODE FOR MINIMUM DISTANCE FROM EXTERIOR WALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT AND / OR T. / BRU CPM OR FIELD REPRESENTATIVE OF ANY DISCREPANCY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. Dqt 4 4 A 4 A • I 4 4 I I I 4 19J 55' -6" N V C -� ROOF PLAN SCNE: 1/T6 APPROXIMATE LOCATION MD APPR1D' 0') OF Ex OXIMATE 512E (5'- D'x ISIWG SKYLIGHTS HIN - 440 STORE ALL EXSTING SKYLIGHTS ORE TO REMAIN LEO 165' -0" 55' -0' NORTH C=.3 55' -0' EXISTING ROOF HATCH PDNORATE WITH ._ ROOF RUM.) Revisions :-.— INSULATED CURB : Dote Description 03/20/98 PERUMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05 05 98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION TING ROOF i I I (i I 1 1HDI3 c Drawing References .- No Drawings BID DATE: - CADD NAME A14 PROJECT. NO. 1103040 DRAWN BY: NIP / MU CHECKED BY: RA8 - PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION. URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616-285-3542 5287 .. �� EGISTERED . ••CHIT s' G. CON ' F WAGE NGTON r C3� _, ,Q_) 4 4 National Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R' US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER RECEIVED ,..... u1 r..ul 1UAWf Drawing Title ROOF DETAI "'99 PERMIT C >. Scale AS NOTED Date MAY 5,1998 Sheet No. 41 a4 AR -UP : :-.— INSULATED CURB : 1 fT-, I I :, T TO HARDWARE SC TING ROOF i I I (i I 1 1HDI3 c r RASH INTO EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOFING EXISTING BUIL ROOF ON EXI! PLYWOOD ROC REFER TO E X FRAMING, AND DIGS. FOR WAY AROUND. STRUCT. MEM TOP HOOP OF TO STEEL OPENING. BEET PANT MIS, RUNGS AND CAGE O.S.HA YELLOW. 4 / 0 ROOF HATCH DETAIL SCALE: NONE TOP OF ROOF DECK _ :7P 41 li DETAIL THRT C R U O R O B F TOP SCALE: NONE GALVANIZED FACTORY FINISH BILCO TYPE "Y (Oft EOa4L) ROOF RIICH CONTR. TO PROVIDE ED.) REa'0. - vict-p15 NOT USED SCALE: NONE s'.,:•r2'0` i3`i00 lit rUl,$IV B.+ 2&RE. DETAIL CABLI G SCALE: 1 1/2" = A MIN. CONDUIT BY ELC. Ark DETAIL ROOF VENT RU 111 SCALE: 1 1/2' = 1' -0" VENT W/ LEAS FLASHING. (2 I/2 LB. MIN.) EXTEND FLASHING UNDER EXISTING STRIPPING G PLYS 8 FLASH'. INTO EXISTING MALT -UP RO. 44� ..16/OCZ2a EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOF ON EXISTING PLYWOOD ROOF SHEATHING. CONDUIT WEATHERHEAD BY ELC. COMMUNICATIONS CANING. (BY OTHERS) EXISTING BUILT -UP ROOFING ON EXISTING PLYWOOD ROOF SHEATHING. No Dote Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION - 04/22/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawings Drawing References BID DATE: CARD NAME: A PROJECT NO' M1030A0 DRAWN BY: MU CHECKED. BY: R 8 PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION' Revisions ONCI SHING 2, " -4 3/8 ALUM. SLIDING DOORS (OR ST -0' TANDEM REGISTERS REFER TO F1.0 FIXTURE PLAN 1 = 7 u L , L I 3 8 f ALUM. STOREFRONT — — 1 SYSTEM (SF2) 2 3/4 9'-0 I/O ' 2T -0 F0 3/4 F0 42 I/4 VESTIBULE 56' -6 VESTIBULE —. ECW 2 3/4 2 3/43 4 -0 ENLARGED RECEIVING AREA PLAN PLAN SCALE: 1/8' = 1' -0 3' -11 3/ 55 -0" REFUND DESK REFER TO F1.0 FIXTURE PLAN 20' -0 NOTE REFER TO FUTURE PLAN SLEET F1.0 FOR EXRCT. LOCATIONS OF, PRAISERS, REFUND DESK R BABY REGISTRY DESK 0' F.O. 82' -0 MO. D.O. 3'- ALUM. STORE SYSTEM (SF2 O1 165' f Llt__ 3' 6 I/4 3' -6 1/4' 2 /4' 12' -0 1/2' �� 2 3/4' 2 3/4 J.O. 2 3/4' 20'-0' F.O. ,'4' -0' 26 ENLARGE VESTIBULE PLAN PLAN NORTH SCALE: T /8' = 1' -O' 26' -6 I /2' 27 2' -0' 87 -4 3/8' TO Q OF RACETRACK FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF TILT -UP CONC. PANEL ARY REGISTRY DESK, I REFER TO AEET A1.1 AND F1.0 FIXTURE PLAN ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM (SF2) TRASM COMPACTOR (R E.) STL GONDOLA CHANNEL • 7' -6 ASS. \ 2 3/4' F- 3 RECEIVING NORTH 87' -0' TJ Q OF ENTRY DOOR FROM OUTSIDE FACE OF SIT -UP CONC.. PANEL 21' -1 / 3' 1):14 CLEAR AREA FOR FRE RISER LOCATKXN ELECT. TRTN SEE ELECT. CROWS URS GREINER INC. (AC. 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, G D RAPIDS, MI 49546 616 -285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 627 � ).410 dip r fv i I STATE • National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS • R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS •R' US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCEN =�E b"fPi'QFT Drawing Title MAY 1 1998 ENLARGED VT - & RECEIVING PLANS Scale Dote AS NOTED MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A2AOAR ,7 3/4 8' -2 1/4" „ 7 I /4' / / ,FIXTURE 7 3/4" WIDTH (SEE DWG. FIT sTL. GONG. CHANNEL O 7' -8' AF.F. SEE DETML ®D RECESSED TINE CLOCK SEE GED& ®© WAIP1 ' 1 NSCOT .AWLS PANEL W CRT; SEE CET. irk - I - CORNER GUARD (.1) WAINSCOT PANEL (WP1) w/ CRASH RAILS CRT) SEE DEAL irk A EQUIPMENT ROOM STOP WAINSCOT PANEL (WP & CIlXTURRR E TLS O OF E ' DGE FIE. ❑, POWER CUTER DN. SEE ELEC. DA I 106 I --E1 n 7 Y II�1I 07 40:4, ► ■ 2'416' SLOT IN COUNTER TOP FOR r LL �`�•�/ ` �� 1:1 TRANSFORMER SEE ELEC. OWLS 444 SKID 027 e RAS. IN .411NM Tag (2) DRAWEfk$ O.C. , 0 P APER °u , a . 2' I<4 V 0 SAFE (09) . 111 3 -3 II` _ ingininErt _ t I , SHELF FOR ©. © 4.4 PAPER NY COUNT u UNE OF II SHELF II ' O 24 ABOVE COUNTER OFFICE A ' ROOM I 103 I sr' I 104 I ® 6 ~ L i L H-1 I I I /2" 10' -3 7/8" 4 7/8 "-, 13' -4 3/4" 7 I /4- LIST OF ACCESSORIES NO DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER I CATALOG NO DOLOR VIM. I SOAP UISPELSER w/ EXTENDED SPOUT BUBRIat 19- 82216 I STM&E5s STEEL IN COUNTERTOP 2 TOW '.TISSUE DISPENSER 9UPPUED BY BTU, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 19' 0 q 3 GRAB EAR BOBfaa< I B -550 I STAINLESS STEEL 33 3/4 4 REM. NOON DISPOSAL SUPPLIED BY BTU, NSTNLED CO . CONIRACRO R '� 17 • F 5 FEN. NAPJW VENDOR SUPPLIED BY BTU, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 50' O TOP 6 TOWS .DISPENSER SUPPLIED BY BTU, INSTALLED CO CONTRACTOR 54' 0 TOP 7 WASTE RECEPTACLE BOBPoa( I B -2791 . I STAINLESS STEEL 30" 0 TOP 8 URINAL SCREEN SUPPLIED BY BTU, INSTALLED BY CONTR. (24'544X. wino - 9 TORET COMPARTMENT SUPPLIED BY SRO, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 10 FOLDING STOW SHELF BQBRICK B -287 STAINLESS STEEL 40'A/30"C 11 MNROR • ADULT FIXTURE BOBRICK B -145 2436 STAINLESS STEEL 40' 0 BOTTOM 1A NNROR • GILDS FIXTURE BOBPoa( 8 -145 1830 STAINLESS STEEL 30' O COTTON 12 TOP & BROOM HOLDER & UTLTY SHELF SUPPIJEO BY BM INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 60 13 8487 CHANGING TABLE SIIPPIJED BY BRU INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR 37 g ^1 `44 5 GENERAL NOTES: (OFFICE AREA ONLY) 1. ALL BUILDING ELEMENTS SHALL BE BUILT IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. 2. ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING TOO OTHER MSC. CONCEALED WOOD ELEMENTS 414(L BE FIRE RESISTANT TREATED (SEE SPEC.) 3. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE INSTALLATION OF ANY /ALL OWNER FURNSHED ITEMS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 4. AL WOOD CAPS, MOULDINGS. FRAMES. SHELVES. TRIM, ETC. TO BE PANTED 5•1482 TAOS TURQUOISE. (PNT2) 5. ALL DRAWERS SHAT HAVE RECESSED PULLS AND DRAWER SLIDES. 6. ALL COUNTERS, SHELVING, 41045, ETC. 0 DAR. OFFICE MGR OFFICE k COUNT ROOM TO BE 3/4 HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD w/ PLASTIC LAMINATE (PLATO). DRAWERS TO BE SCUD WOOD, NO LAMINATES. PLASTIC LAMINMIE TO BE NEVAMAR 5 -3 -43T MALLARD TEAL TEXTURED FINISH, H -5 GRADE. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. TEL HARDWARE, CLOSERS, PULLS, ETC. TO BE HANOTC APED ACCESSIBLE. 8. REFLECTIVE SURFACE OF ONE WAY MIRROR GLASS TO FACE SAES AREA O DOOR UTES 8 WINDOWS. 9. PLL OFFICE 1NTERK R WALLS TO BE CONSTRUCTED w/ 5/8" GYP. BO. TAPED AND SANDED ON METAL STUDS 0 16" O.C. DIRECTOR'S OFFICE, MANAGER'S OFFICE AND COUNT ROOM TO BE FINISHED WIT NM WALL COVERING (VWCI) FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY CONTR. REFER TO SPECS. FOR ORDER FORM. EOUIPMENT ROOM AND TELCO ROOM TO BE PANTED SW1004 PURE .11E. (ANTI) 10. SALES A'IOR EDE OF OFFICE WALLS TO BE CONSTRUCTED w/ WAINSCOT PANEL (WI) SUPPLIED BY BRU AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR, AND CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED 5/8 GYP. BOOM TAPED AND SANDED ON 6 20 GA. METAL STUDS O l6' O.C. 11. WAINSCOT PANELS (API) TO BE ANCHORED TO STUDS WITH COUNTERSUNK DRYWALL SCREWS AT TOP PLO BOTTOM ONLY. SCREWS TO BE CONCEALED BY CRASH RAILS AND COVE BASE. PLASTIC LAMINATE NOT TO HAVE HORIZONTAL SEAMS. 12. SEE ELECTRICAL ORAN.. FOR TELEPHONE CONNECTIONS. 13. SAFE MUST BE SET IN PLACE PRIOR TO THE INSTALLATION OF THE DOORS TO THE MANAGERS OFFICE AND COUNT ROOM. CONTRACTOR TO DISCUSS A COORDINATE SAFE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES w/ THE BRU SITE REPRESENTATIVE, OR BRU CPM. 14. ALL COUNTERS TO HAVE 4' HIGH ...SPLASH CONSTRUCTED OF 3/4' HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD WITH PIASRC LAMINATE (PLAM3) ON TEL EXPOSED EDGES. 15. SEE SHEET A1.2 FOR OFFICE REFLECTED CEIUNG RAN. EXISTING WOOD - COL VERIFY EXACT SIZE IN THE FIELD. ROOM I 105 2 HOLE IN COUNTER w/ PUS. GROMMET COUNTER 4/ '� (2)- DRAWERS UNE OF ll' SHELF O 24' ABOVE COUNTER 1.0 9 -5 1 /4' 2 24' -10 1/4" .1 j ENLARGED OFFICE PLAN 2SCALE: 1/4 = I R -5" PLAN NORTH GENERAL NOTES (TOILET AREA ONLY) 4. PROVIDE SOLID WOOD BLOCKING WHERE TOILET PMTNONS, GRAB BARS, MID LAVATORIES ARE MOUNTED TO STUD AO GYP. BD. PATTONS. 2. ALL WOOD FRAMING, BLOCKING, AND ANY OTHER MISC. CONCEALED WOOD ELEMENTS SHALL BE ARE RETARDANT. (SEE SPEC.). 3. PROVIDE (2) 16 GE MTL STUDS (NESTED) 0 16 O.C. N WALL DIRECTLY BEHIND WATER COOLER MID TELEPHONE. ANCHOR STUDS TO FLOOR AND STRUCTURE ABOVE. 4. PROVIDE (2) 16 GA MIL STUDS (NESTED) BENwO EACH WATER FAATER SHELF BRACKET. ANCHOR 55405 TO FLOOR AND STRUCTURE ABOVE. 5. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE AL SIGNS, DECALS, SYMBOLS, ETC. REQUIRED FOR DISABLED ACCESSIBILITY AS DESIGNATED BY LOCAL CODES AND AUTHORITY. 6. ALL TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES TO RE INSTALLED PER ABA (COCA AND STATE) REOUIREMENIS AND MOUNTING HBGHTS. 1. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR FIXTURES AND PIPING INFORMATION. INSULATE All EXPOSED PIPING BELOW LAVATORIES. 8. CONTRACTOR S RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALATON OF ANY /. OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS U.N.O.. 9. CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL WATER RESISTANT GYP. BOARD THROUGHOUT BREAK ROOM, RESTROOMS, HALL AND JANTORS CLOSET. ID. PROVIDE SAITARY SEAIAM AT FLOOR, WALL, AND MOP SINK PERIMETER JOINTS IN JANITORS CLOSET. REFER TO SPECIFICAT TINS 1I. SOAP DISPENSER NOZZLE IS TO BE LOCATED TO DISPENSE INTO LAVATORY. I2. ALL MIRROR DINERS.. ARE OUT -TO OUT. 13. PAINT ALL WALLS IN BREAK ROOM, TRAINING ROOM, HALO, AND JANITORS CLOSET -TO BE SEMI- GLOSS. (REFER TO ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE). 14. PANT ALL INTERIOR DOORS MID FRAMES (ALL SURFACES) INCLUDING JAMBS. (REFER TO ROOM ROASTS SCHEDULE). 15. CORNER GUARDS (CG1) MAO WAIL BUMBFRS ARE SUPPLIED BY BRU MAD INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. 16. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR TELEPHONE LOCATOR. 17.. INSTREL PUBLIC TELEPHONE SO THAT THE TOP OF THE COIN SLOT IS AVE AF.F.. PAY TELEPHONE HOUSING AND SHELF TO BE CLEAR PLEXGTAS OR WHITE LAMINATE. (NO MELAMINE PRODUCT). 18. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL LAVATORY. AND COUNTERTOP OPENING CUTS WITH LAVATORY MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS. PROM TO INSTALLATION, OR CUTTING. BETE, MOTHERS ROOM TO BE ROUTED AS MR EMERGENCY EVACUATOR ROOM. PROVIDE 5/8 ARE RATED GYP. WALLBOMD BOTH SEES OF META. STUDS, FROM FLOOR TO ROOF. DECK ABOVE (1 HR RATED ASSENSLY) MTN', 1 HR. RATED H.M. DECK AND FRAME. PROVIDE INTERCOM TO S'E4(ER BOX OUTSIDE BUILDING - COORDINATE LOCATOR OF 'EVACUSANON / RESCUE' ROOM WITH LOCAL ARE DEPARTMENT. EXTENDED PLYWOOD UG.T SRIELD CORNER GUARD (CGI) M/ EJAR PANEL (WP1) / CRASH RAILS CRT) SEE DEAL l 5'-LE tti 2' -11" 1" 2'- 11 Iti 2' -11" 9 -1 1/8 VENDING V/ MACHNES (NLC.) L BREAK 21' -2 i/4 THRESHOLD DISABLED TOLE ROOM SIGN MOUNT ON WALL • fi(F A.F.F. 5/8 Yt 2 -1I" I 4 7/8 ! 7 1/ REFRIGERATOR DT OWNER CORNER GUARD (CC1) TYP. PUBLIC TELEPHONE SEE NOTE 117 BREAK ROOM SINK / BASE CARBINE SEE DEDAM. A 1.0 N�fr&I 55 (ENLARGED TOILET PLAN 2.11 SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -cr NOTE: FOR PARIITON TYPES ®, AND ❑B REFER TO DETML 8- 2.1/5.3' PLAN 4) NORTH No Date 03/20/98 05/05/98 Drawings Scale AS NOTED Sheet No. Description BID DATE' - CADD NAME: A DRAWN BY: Mu PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION SSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References A2. PROJECT NO'. M103040 CHECKED BY: RA. C URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced R without permission of TOYS *Ft" US. Location TUKWILA WA. PARKWAY SUPERCEN�j EOENfED OF TUKWILA Drawing Title MAY 1 1 1998 ENLARGED - 1 - 6.1.66i & OFF OFFICE PLANS I Date MAY 5, 1998 1a A21_02,.\ ARCH\ A21_02.0wg Revisions - No Date Description 03/20/98 PREUMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References _ No Drawings BID DATE: - CARD NAME: MO PROJECT NO.: M103040 DRAWN BY: Nu CHECKED BY: N PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION. URS GREINER INC. (A.C. 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 5287 A , 4. Al. °� I � ONC %"HING O N( Notional Office 461 From Rood Poramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown moy not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced _ without permission of TOYS "R" US. - Location TUKWILA, WA. 'PARKWAY SUPERCENTEgcENED enYsF T11KW11 A Drawing Title MAY 1 1 1998 VEST I BUIPEL,Tc PLAN DETAILS Scale AS NOTED I Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A30O DETAIL SCALE: 3/4 = 1' -0" DETAIL SCALE: 3/4" = 1' -0" aD DETAIL SCALE: 3/4" = 1' - irk av NOT USED SCALE: 3/4" = 1' -0" Dgq° I 55 APPROV A99 3 9 3B BUILDING DIVISION ® Revisions No I 03/20/98 Date Description 3 2 3/A M' ■I 27' -1� F.O. PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION - 4. - -� .27' -i F.O. _ `l' ■ STOREFRONT YSTEM (SF2) (6) EOU SPACES 3 0 3/4" _�___ = S39VdS '03 (Z) _�I-I,■I20 I 1 1 1 3' -11 3/4' (YI EQUAL SPAC �.�i ��� 3' -11 3/4 I e�. (4) EQUAL SPAC REFRON = 17' -8 STO 3/4' SYSTE M (S I) I (2) EQUAL SO ES = 9' -3 1/4" KO � MINI IMIIIIIII _ in. m 3' II 3/4 12' -0 I /2" D.O. 3• 3/4 1' t VdS '03 (3) / nil - -11 Ilia 0 . Drawing References No Drawings 111110111 \ \ -.( t It li� 711 Itil 1 �— ME ginll i rdS Nfl MR ._1 m � �� � s ®�� 6® - BID DATE: — CADD NAME: A42 PROJECT NO M10304R DRAWN BY: MLP / MU CHECKED BY' RAB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION' MEM URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 6287 �� STEREO / 4( / • P ' , 065106 • W • INGT.- National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTaF & Drawing Title MAY 1 1 1998 I N T E D R I O R RMITCENITER ELEVATIONS Scale AS NOTED I Dote MAY 5,'1998 Sheet No. A407 O MOM 0 n . ! I6 3 2 3/A M' ■I 27' -1� F.O. . � - ® - 4. - -� .27' -i F.O. _ `l' ■ STOREFRONT YSTEM (SF2) (6) EOU SPACES 3 0 3/4" _�___ = S39VdS '03 (Z) _�I-I,■I20 I 1 1 1 3' -11 3/4' (YI EQUAL SPAC �.�i ��� 3' -11 3/4 I e�. (4) EQUAL SPAC REFRON = 17' -8 STO 3/4' SYSTE M (S I) I (2) EQUAL SO ES = 9' -3 1/4" KO � MINI IMIIIIIII _ in. m 3' II 3/4 12' -0 I /2" D.O. 3• 3/4 1' t VdS '03 (3) / nil - -11 Ilia 0 . 2 3/0" b/I 111110111 \ \ -.( t It li� 711 Itil 1 �— ME ginll i rdS Nfl MR ._1 m � �� � s ®�� 6® - NM Ill= MEM MN =I MI A MIE 0 0 0 3 2 3/A M' ■I 27' -1� F.O. - 4. -0 0 F .O. I 16 Au _ `l' ■ STOREFRONT YSTEM (SF2) (6) EOU SPACES _�I-I,■I20 I r•1•� � .F2) - _ ll. I6 ME �Viti►iYiY M ME ®E" ' � © 411 1111S=1 _ in. nio - Ng 12 4212 um As, ENE 711 rim 11411N11111111 ginll NM IMMI MR ._1 s ®�� 6® - 0 1.1 4.2 P : 0. STOREFRONT : STEM (5F2) (2) EOUA SPACES 'IrQ VW ... RI. 414 lb ma I, ®11� �r o 1110 _ .aTi1 11 o TOREFRONT (21 E02 1.1 4.2 (6) EOu FC REFRONT SYST: (SF2) SPACES 1.1 4.2 27, F.O. STOREFRONT SYSTEM (SF2) (6) EOUA. SPACES STGREER (2) E0U T SYSTEM (SF2) SPACES STOREFRON (2) EOU SYSTEM (SF2) KEYNOTES O1 ALUM. AUTO SLIDING DOORS (DR2). 0 ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM (SF2). Q SR. TUBE 4 DIAGONAL BRACES. PAINT (PNT5) ED NOT USED 05 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT C NNTL COVE BASE (441) (= CORNER GUARDS (CG1), SEE DETAIL 10 BUMPER GUARD (803) ON ALUM. STOREFRONT MULLION. 11 BUMPER GUARD (8G3) ON 2`12' ALUM. TUBE BETWEEN MULLIONS. 12 NOT USED. 13 OIL CONDOIA CHANNEL 0 7' -7 A.F.F. 14'. CRASH RAILS MTD. ON CONC. BLOCK 15 PAINT MASONRY BETWEEN CRASH PAILS TO MATCH WAINSCOT. 16 GYP. BOARD WALL SURFACE. PAINT (PNT1). (= CONCRETE MASONRY WALL SURFACE. PAINT (PN11). c 1 ELEVATION OF INTERIOR VESTIBULE 2.0 1.1 4.2 / SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -O" 2.0 ELEVATION FROM VESTIBULE AREA II SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" ELEVATION FROM SALES AREA 2.0 SOB ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = D14' ELEVATION OF INTERIOR VESTIBULE SCALE: 1/4" = I' -2 3/4 INTERIOR VESTIBULE FROM SALES AREA 1 3/4" ELEVATION IN�TERIORVESTTBULE (FOR REFERENCE / INFORMATION - PART OF BUILDING EXTERIOR SHELL) SCALE: 1/4 = 1' -0' NOTE: INTERIOR FINISHES OF EXTERIOR WALL ARE PART OF INTERIOR TENANT BUILT OUT. ELEVATION VIEW RI FROM SALES VESTIBULE SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -O" 2.0�� I' -6 3/ ELEVATION OF INTERIOR VESTIBULE SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" Revisions No D ate Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION \ am 21 ® Drawing References No Drawings BID DATE: -. CADD NAME: 043 PROJECT NO•. M100040 DRAWN BY: MU' / MU CHECKED BY: RAO PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION. �►j URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 !SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAD 616 - 285 -3542 '.. 5287 i! IOW '�V WA ON National Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location TUKW1 LA , WA • PARKWAY SUPERCEN� RO 8IVED Drawing Title (� I D MAY 1 1 1998 I I �j T E L\ 04 RMT7CENTER ELEVATIONS Scale AS NOTED 1 Dote MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A4O Of 07 H.M. DOOR k FRAME. PAINT (PNT2) 02 H.M. BORROW LICHT FRAME w/ I/4 TEMPERED MIRROR GLASS. PAINT (PNT2) ( STORE ARTURE ® COLUMN v/ COLUMN COVER (CC1) 3 CORNER GUARDS (CG1). 0 Cr, BOARD BULKHEAD. © LAME CLOCK RECESS. SEE DETAL C 11' 1 �'`� n ,IF11 (L1 WaNSCOr PAN S (WPI) h CRASH RAILS (CRT). 1 r SEE OETAi y1 (.`UIU 3 1`•J8 KEYNOTES ® 4" VINYL COVE 845E (VO1) 9Q CORNER GUARDS (COI). SEE DETAIL 41 vC, Jul +ic,L(lf. 10 STL GONDOLA CHANNEL O 7' -8" A.F.F. i t SR: GONDOLA PLATE O 7' -8' A.F.F. ED IMPACT DOORS IN H.M. FRAME: PAINT FRAME 13 REST000M SONS. MOUNT 5' -0" A.F.F. 14. ETECTTC WATER COOLERS. SEE ELEC. 6 PLUMB. 0006 G5. 15 PUBLIC TELEPHONE IN WHITE PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINET. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. GIP. BOARD WALL. SURFACE. PANT (Rat). I:=1 CONCRETE MASONRY WALL SURFACE. PONT (00TH. CD CRASH Ra15 MTD. ON CONC. BLOCK 19 . PAINT MASONRY BETWEEN CRASH. RAILS TO MATCH WAINSCOT. DD cm two PARTITION (8.50001 ELEVATION ' V N IEW ' F O R R OMRLES SCALE: 1 /4" = 1' -0" 43 5.3 Aft 111W OFFICE ELEVATION VIEW FROM SALES SCALE: ' l/4" = 1' -0" ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" OFFICE VIEW FROM SALES ELEVATION REAR WALL OF SALES SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -Q ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" d ELEVATION MEW EQUIPMENT ROOM SALES REAR WALL OF SALES 1:OPEN.0 Lib ELEVATION EQUIPMENT M ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = II II II II 1 n 3 II 9 I I I i i I I— KM t 22 '\ v' \ am 21 ® 07 H.M. DOOR k FRAME. PAINT (PNT2) 02 H.M. BORROW LICHT FRAME w/ I/4 TEMPERED MIRROR GLASS. PAINT (PNT2) ( STORE ARTURE ® COLUMN v/ COLUMN COVER (CC1) 3 CORNER GUARDS (CG1). 0 Cr, BOARD BULKHEAD. © LAME CLOCK RECESS. SEE DETAL C 11' 1 �'`� n ,IF11 (L1 WaNSCOr PAN S (WPI) h CRASH RAILS (CRT). 1 r SEE OETAi y1 (.`UIU 3 1`•J8 KEYNOTES ® 4" VINYL COVE 845E (VO1) 9Q CORNER GUARDS (COI). SEE DETAIL 41 vC, Jul +ic,L(lf. 10 STL GONDOLA CHANNEL O 7' -8" A.F.F. i t SR: GONDOLA PLATE O 7' -8' A.F.F. ED IMPACT DOORS IN H.M. FRAME: PAINT FRAME 13 REST000M SONS. MOUNT 5' -0" A.F.F. 14. ETECTTC WATER COOLERS. SEE ELEC. 6 PLUMB. 0006 G5. 15 PUBLIC TELEPHONE IN WHITE PLASTIC LAMINATE CABINET. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. GIP. BOARD WALL. SURFACE. PANT (Rat). I:=1 CONCRETE MASONRY WALL SURFACE. PONT (00TH. CD CRASH Ra15 MTD. ON CONC. BLOCK 19 . PAINT MASONRY BETWEEN CRASH. RAILS TO MATCH WAINSCOT. DD cm two PARTITION (8.50001 ELEVATION ' V N IEW ' F O R R OMRLES SCALE: 1 /4" = 1' -0" 43 5.3 Aft 111W OFFICE ELEVATION VIEW FROM SALES SCALE: ' l/4" = 1' -0" ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" OFFICE VIEW FROM SALES ELEVATION REAR WALL OF SALES SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -Q ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -0" d ELEVATION MEW EQUIPMENT ROOM SALES REAR WALL OF SALES 1:OPEN.0 Lib ELEVATION EQUIPMENT M ROOM SCALE: 1/4" = II II II II 1 Revisions ei -� -- . Dote 03 20 98 05 05 98 Description PREUMINARY REVIEW COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION .� :till B it II I i 1 . in S -0", . / . , -- — . . . -■ . . . 11111MENIMEMIMMII := . ■ Drawing References inirei MIIMMNIIMIMMIM al iiIIIMMN IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIMIIIIIIIMIIMM MI IIMMIIIIIIIIIM NI BID DATE: - CADD NAME 444 PROJECT NO • 11103040 DRAWN BY: NL /! CHECKED BY: R10 PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (AC..) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 5287 r :STEREO D IS c`MONCI STATE r AIN ON _ National Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS °6" US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER RECEIVED CITY OFTUI(WI. -� Drawing Title MAY I 1 1998 INTER I ORe,..0 R ELEVATIONS' Scale AS NOTED Dote MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A4O iii .11 N ® i / 2 .� :till B it II I i 1 m in 0 11.IIIIII .11 )• 2 .� :till Ei adi I � 0 2 TYPICAL HANDICAP (7 STALL - WOMEN'S MEN'S (OPP. HAND - DELETE® ) WOMEN'S RESTROOM SCALE: I/4' = 1' -O' , O MEN'S RESTROOM MEN'S RESTROOM SCALE: 1/4' = BREAK ROOM SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -0" O COUNT ROOM OFFICES SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -O' TYPICAL HANDICAP STALL - WOMEN'S B MEN'S (OPP. HAND) O BREAK ROOM s O BREAK ROOM O COUNT ROOM O MEN'S RESTROOM O TYPICAL STALL - WOMEN'S C MEN'S (OPP. HAND - DELETED ) O OFFICE NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A2.I FOR TOILET ACCESSORIES UST. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A2.1 FOR TOILET. ACCESSORIES UST. TYPICAL CHILD'S O STALL - NOT USED D TYPICAL - WOMEN'S MEN'S (SIM.) 0 WOMEN'S RESTROOM : JANITOR'S CLOSET JANITOR'S CLOSET SCALE: 1/4 =1' -d O JANITOR'S CLOSET O OFFICE ` O TELCO ROOM SCALE: NONE , 6' COP.) 0 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 37 NO coasts IN TELCO ROOM. ® TOP OF PARTITION BEYOND 39 UNE OF CBUNG BEYOND. ® SAFE =3 VINYL WALL BUMPERS. 42 SHELF FOR PAPER DISABLED TOILET ROOM SIGNS KEYED NOTES 01 CERAMIC TILE ACCENT BAND. SEE DETAIL ( 6' CERAMIC TILE BASE Q3 VANITY COUNTER. SEE DETAIL BOLT URINAL SCREEN TO VANITY END PANEL (2) BOLTS REQUIRED, TO MATCH SCREEN BOLTS. ( 55 12" ADJUSTABLE SHELVES. SEE DETAIL (= WATER HEATER A: SHELF. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. Q7 CERAMIC TILE WAINSCOT. 12) SIDES OF SINK O. MOP SINK. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. Q 4' VINYL 645E 10 REFRIGERATOR (0.5.1.) CD LOCKERS. 12 NOT USED 13 CLOCK OUTLET O 7' - ARE 14 CLEAN M100 PLUM. SAFETY COAT HOOKS ON HARDWOOD irk BOARD, PAINTED TO MATCH WALL SEE DETAIL 15 NOT USED 16 VENDING MACHINES (N.I.C.) 17 CORNER GUARD (CG1) 18 RASE CABINET WITH SINK SEE DETAIL ( 19 VINYL MC COVET/111G MCI) 20 4" 84CKSPLASH 213 COUNTER WITH DRAWERS 22 2'4l6 PAPER SLOT IN COUNTER 23 3/4 COUNTER SUPPORTS 24 48" LIMIT FIXTURE WITH DIFFUSER. SUPPLIED BY INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR RAISED GENDER SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED DISABLED SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED GENDER TEXT (TYP.) RAISED BRAILLE GENDER TEXT () =3 WOOD SHELF 11TH BRACKETS (STANLEY /797 - ANTE) 26 3Y HOLE FOR TIME CLOCK CORD. SEE DETAI 4 27 1201 DUPLEX OUTLET FOR TIME COCK 28 P100 MOLD. SEE ELECIROAL DRAWINGS. 29. SORTING BINS. SEE DET M. 30 E%TENOED PLYW000 UGHT SHIELD NOR WETS (STANLEY /797 - WHITE). SEE DETAIL/ 11 31 H.M. BOFBROW UDR c /I /C TEMPTED MIRROR MASS. 32 VIDEO CABINET 33 TRANSFORMER SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SET ON 4.4 WOOD SKIDS 0 22' O.C. SET ON STEEL STUD HEADERS IN THE PARTITIONS O EACH END. (SEE PLAN). BOLT SKIDS TO HEADERS. 34 POWER FILTER SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. MOUNT TO FURRED WALL PER MFR'S RECONMEN040ONS. 35 EXTEND WALL TO UNDER SIDE OF ROOF DECK. 36 5 /6 BIRCH VENEER PLYWOOD ON 7/8' METAL FURRING CHANNELS O 16' O.C. TAPCON SCREWED TO MASONRY WALL. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 9 -.L =f� DD .� :till Ei I _O�l EOM � 0 2 TYPICAL HANDICAP (7 STALL - WOMEN'S MEN'S (OPP. HAND - DELETE® ) WOMEN'S RESTROOM SCALE: I/4' = 1' -O' , O MEN'S RESTROOM MEN'S RESTROOM SCALE: 1/4' = BREAK ROOM SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -0" O COUNT ROOM OFFICES SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -O' TYPICAL HANDICAP STALL - WOMEN'S B MEN'S (OPP. HAND) O BREAK ROOM s O BREAK ROOM O COUNT ROOM O MEN'S RESTROOM O TYPICAL STALL - WOMEN'S C MEN'S (OPP. HAND - DELETED ) O OFFICE NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A2.I FOR TOILET ACCESSORIES UST. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A2.1 FOR TOILET. ACCESSORIES UST. TYPICAL CHILD'S O STALL - NOT USED D TYPICAL - WOMEN'S MEN'S (SIM.) 0 WOMEN'S RESTROOM : JANITOR'S CLOSET JANITOR'S CLOSET SCALE: 1/4 =1' -d O JANITOR'S CLOSET O OFFICE ` O TELCO ROOM SCALE: NONE , 6' COP.) 0 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 37 NO coasts IN TELCO ROOM. ® TOP OF PARTITION BEYOND 39 UNE OF CBUNG BEYOND. ® SAFE =3 VINYL WALL BUMPERS. 42 SHELF FOR PAPER DISABLED TOILET ROOM SIGNS KEYED NOTES 01 CERAMIC TILE ACCENT BAND. SEE DETAIL ( 6' CERAMIC TILE BASE Q3 VANITY COUNTER. SEE DETAIL BOLT URINAL SCREEN TO VANITY END PANEL (2) BOLTS REQUIRED, TO MATCH SCREEN BOLTS. ( 55 12" ADJUSTABLE SHELVES. SEE DETAIL (= WATER HEATER A: SHELF. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. Q7 CERAMIC TILE WAINSCOT. 12) SIDES OF SINK O. MOP SINK. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. Q 4' VINYL 645E 10 REFRIGERATOR (0.5.1.) CD LOCKERS. 12 NOT USED 13 CLOCK OUTLET O 7' - ARE 14 CLEAN M100 PLUM. SAFETY COAT HOOKS ON HARDWOOD irk BOARD, PAINTED TO MATCH WALL SEE DETAIL 15 NOT USED 16 VENDING MACHINES (N.I.C.) 17 CORNER GUARD (CG1) 18 RASE CABINET WITH SINK SEE DETAIL ( 19 VINYL MC COVET/111G MCI) 20 4" 84CKSPLASH 213 COUNTER WITH DRAWERS 22 2'4l6 PAPER SLOT IN COUNTER 23 3/4 COUNTER SUPPORTS 24 48" LIMIT FIXTURE WITH DIFFUSER. SUPPLIED BY INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR RAISED GENDER SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED DISABLED SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED GENDER TEXT (TYP.) RAISED BRAILLE GENDER TEXT () =3 WOOD SHELF 11TH BRACKETS (STANLEY /797 - ANTE) 26 3Y HOLE FOR TIME CLOCK CORD. SEE DETAI 4 27 1201 DUPLEX OUTLET FOR TIME COCK 28 P100 MOLD. SEE ELECIROAL DRAWINGS. 29. SORTING BINS. SEE DET M. 30 E%TENOED PLYW000 UGHT SHIELD NOR WETS (STANLEY /797 - WHITE). SEE DETAIL/ 11 31 H.M. BOFBROW UDR c /I /C TEMPTED MIRROR MASS. 32 VIDEO CABINET 33 TRANSFORMER SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SET ON 4.4 WOOD SKIDS 0 22' O.C. SET ON STEEL STUD HEADERS IN THE PARTITIONS O EACH END. (SEE PLAN). BOLT SKIDS TO HEADERS. 34 POWER FILTER SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. MOUNT TO FURRED WALL PER MFR'S RECONMEN040ONS. 35 EXTEND WALL TO UNDER SIDE OF ROOF DECK. 36 5 /6 BIRCH VENEER PLYWOOD ON 7/8' METAL FURRING CHANNELS O 16' O.C. TAPCON SCREWED TO MASONRY WALL. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. -- 256 - bb -- 1 — 6,---- CX. EOM S -0", / EQUAL / S / , -- — � 0 2 TYPICAL HANDICAP (7 STALL - WOMEN'S MEN'S (OPP. HAND - DELETE® ) WOMEN'S RESTROOM SCALE: I/4' = 1' -O' , O MEN'S RESTROOM MEN'S RESTROOM SCALE: 1/4' = BREAK ROOM SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -0" O COUNT ROOM OFFICES SCALE: 1/4' = 1' -O' TYPICAL HANDICAP STALL - WOMEN'S B MEN'S (OPP. HAND) O BREAK ROOM s O BREAK ROOM O COUNT ROOM O MEN'S RESTROOM O TYPICAL STALL - WOMEN'S C MEN'S (OPP. HAND - DELETED ) O OFFICE NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A2.I FOR TOILET ACCESSORIES UST. NOTE: REFER TO SHEET A2.1 FOR TOILET. ACCESSORIES UST. TYPICAL CHILD'S O STALL - NOT USED D TYPICAL - WOMEN'S MEN'S (SIM.) 0 WOMEN'S RESTROOM : JANITOR'S CLOSET JANITOR'S CLOSET SCALE: 1/4 =1' -d O JANITOR'S CLOSET O OFFICE ` O TELCO ROOM SCALE: NONE , 6' COP.) 0 WOMEN'S RESTROOM 37 NO coasts IN TELCO ROOM. ® TOP OF PARTITION BEYOND 39 UNE OF CBUNG BEYOND. ® SAFE =3 VINYL WALL BUMPERS. 42 SHELF FOR PAPER DISABLED TOILET ROOM SIGNS KEYED NOTES 01 CERAMIC TILE ACCENT BAND. SEE DETAIL ( 6' CERAMIC TILE BASE Q3 VANITY COUNTER. SEE DETAIL BOLT URINAL SCREEN TO VANITY END PANEL (2) BOLTS REQUIRED, TO MATCH SCREEN BOLTS. ( 55 12" ADJUSTABLE SHELVES. SEE DETAIL (= WATER HEATER A: SHELF. REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS. Q7 CERAMIC TILE WAINSCOT. 12) SIDES OF SINK O. MOP SINK. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS. Q 4' VINYL 645E 10 REFRIGERATOR (0.5.1.) CD LOCKERS. 12 NOT USED 13 CLOCK OUTLET O 7' - ARE 14 CLEAN M100 PLUM. SAFETY COAT HOOKS ON HARDWOOD irk BOARD, PAINTED TO MATCH WALL SEE DETAIL 15 NOT USED 16 VENDING MACHINES (N.I.C.) 17 CORNER GUARD (CG1) 18 RASE CABINET WITH SINK SEE DETAIL ( 19 VINYL MC COVET/111G MCI) 20 4" 84CKSPLASH 213 COUNTER WITH DRAWERS 22 2'4l6 PAPER SLOT IN COUNTER 23 3/4 COUNTER SUPPORTS 24 48" LIMIT FIXTURE WITH DIFFUSER. SUPPLIED BY INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR RAISED GENDER SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED DISABLED SYMBOLS (TYP.) RAISED GENDER TEXT (TYP.) RAISED BRAILLE GENDER TEXT () =3 WOOD SHELF 11TH BRACKETS (STANLEY /797 - ANTE) 26 3Y HOLE FOR TIME CLOCK CORD. SEE DETAI 4 27 1201 DUPLEX OUTLET FOR TIME COCK 28 P100 MOLD. SEE ELECIROAL DRAWINGS. 29. SORTING BINS. SEE DET M. 30 E%TENOED PLYW000 UGHT SHIELD NOR WETS (STANLEY /797 - WHITE). SEE DETAIL/ 11 31 H.M. BOFBROW UDR c /I /C TEMPTED MIRROR MASS. 32 VIDEO CABINET 33 TRANSFORMER SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. SET ON 4.4 WOOD SKIDS 0 22' O.C. SET ON STEEL STUD HEADERS IN THE PARTITIONS O EACH END. (SEE PLAN). BOLT SKIDS TO HEADERS. 34 POWER FILTER SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. MOUNT TO FURRED WALL PER MFR'S RECONMEN040ONS. 35 EXTEND WALL TO UNDER SIDE OF ROOF DECK. 36 5 /6 BIRCH VENEER PLYWOOD ON 7/8' METAL FURRING CHANNELS O 16' O.C. TAPCON SCREWED TO MASONRY WALL. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. .!. S .9 -.01 \ 0 16' O.C. (TYP.) 5/6 GYP. BOND III 7 3/4 �Il��Jo 5/6 6 20 G4. NTL RUNNER TRACK ANCHOR TO CONC. FLOOR SLAB w/ "HILU H. 1A-12/20 ANCHORS (5 MN. EMBED.) 0 46o .c. (iSP.) VINYL BASE 5 8 I 7 7 7 0 U y SEE PIA" y PARTITION CHASE PARTITIONS ARE CONSTRUCTED Of 3 5/6 20 G0. STL. STUDS 0 16 O.C., w/5/6 GYP. BOARD ON ONE (1) SIDE OF STUDS ONLY. EXTEND PARTITION FROM FL00R TO 6 ABOVE CEIUNC. U.O.N. DIMENSION BETWEEN CHASE PARTITIONS AS SHOWN ON PLAN. STAGGER STUDS SO ONE (1) PARTITION'S STUDS DO NOT ALIGN w/ THE OPPOSITE PARTITION. PARTITION INTERIOR CONC. BLOCK PARTITION CONSTRUCTED OA: 8" SMOOTH -FACE CONC. BLOCK TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF STRUCTURE. H,s EXISTING CONC. FLOOR SLAB TO REMAIN U 5/ SECTION PARUTION "B") SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" PARTITION 4 7/6 PARTITIONS ARE CONSTRUCTED OF: 3 5/6 20 CA SR. STUDS 0 16 O.C., /5/6 GYP. BOARD EACH SIDE OF STUDS. EXTEND PARTITION FROM FLOOR TO 6 ABOVE CEILING U.O.N. PARTITION 3 5/8' 5/8' FURRED OUT PARTITIONS ARE CONSTRUCTED OF: 7/8" 20 GA SIL FURRING CHANNEL 0 16 O.C. ATTACHED TO MASONRY WALL, w/ 5/6 GYP.. BOARD ON ONE (I) SIDE OF FURRING CHANNEL EXTEND PARTITION FROM FLOOR TO 6 ABOVE CaUNG. U.O.N. IKIIF: BRACE TOP Kf METAL STUD PARTITIONS TO EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE ABOVE, AS REQUIRED REFER TO STRUCTURAL OWLS. SUSPENDED A.C.T. CEILING 5/6 GYP. BOARD BOTH SIDES OF STUDS 3 5/6 20 GA MIL. 5" 0 16 O.C. (TSP.) 3 5/6 20 CA MIL. RUNNER TRACK ANCHOR TO EXIS0NG CONC. FLOUR SLAB w/ "8110 NSL M -12/20 ANCHORS (3" MIN. EMBED.), 0 46 O.C. VINYL 80.5E 0 PARTITION TYPES SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" PARTITION 7 1/4" PARTITIONS ARE CONSTRUCTED OF: 6 20 CA STL. STUDS 0 16 O.C., w/5/8- GYP. BOARD EACH SIDE OF STUDS. EXTEND PARTITION FROM FLOOR TO UNDERSIDE OF ROOF DECK. U.O.N. IN AREAS N/ LAY -IN CEUNGS EXTEND GYP. BOARD TO 6 ABOVE CEUNG. U.O.N. 5/6 ,7 3/4° (-T PARTITION "CHASE" PARTITIONS ARE CONSTRUCTED OF: 6 20 i'0. STL STUDS 0 16 O.C. HELD OFF OF TENANT DEMISING WALL 1 1/6, N/5/6 GTE. BOARD ON ONE (1) SIDE OF STUDS. EXTEND PARTIMON FROM FLOOR TO 6 ABOVE CEILING. U.O.N. EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE SEE STRICT. ONc . a 6 20 GA CSI. /EL STUD DIAGONAL BRACE 0 C -0" O.C. - ATTACH TO 6 STUDS w/ (2) /TO TEK SCREWS (1I1w. () 3".81X7/4" CONT. STE. AXLE - W / /10 SCRE85 (TYP.) 0. DRYWALL CASING BEAD PRE -SALES SECTION T eSALE U )11 AD RE -SALES SCALE: 1/2 = 1' -0" NOT USED SCALE: NONE 1‘, 6 3/4" 20 CA MIL DEFLECTION TRACK TO FIT OVER GIP. BOARD (DO NOT ATTACHED TO ROOF DECK) 5/6 GYP. BOND (CUT t FD TIGHT mom PENETRATION) 31/4" CONT. SR. ANGLE - WDD TO BOTTOM CHORD OF JOIST ( PROVDE 11/2" LONG SLOTS 0 16 O.C. TO ATTACH STUOS (2) ) 110 TEK SCREWS (TIP. 6" 20 GA MR SKIDS O 16 0.C. (OYP.) 5/8" OAP. BOARD NEE: PRP. VERTICAL CONTROL JOINT AT BOTH IDS OF BUINIEAD TO HLOw FOR vERTICAL TXSPLACEYEM OF BuxHEAD 6 20 GA INC RUNNER CHMINEL 5/6 OW. BOND K SALES AREA 2 1/2" 20 GA. MIL. STUD DINOO48. BRACING • 48' 0.0. ATTACH TO STUDS w/ (4) 114 SHE MIL. SCREW Iwo TO BRIOaNG w/ (3) 114 5HT. ANTI 5CREW5 6 20 GA. 811. RUNNER TRICK ATTACH TO 6 STUDS w/ (2) 114 SUIT. MIL SCREWS (DO NOT ATTACH TO DEFLECTION TRACK) ,OilS 00-1 ‘..)\. A IC4* (V6 (5111) 14>IA v 111 osOr otvy S ECTION SALES PARTRION SCALE: 1 /2" = V-0" SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" SECTION PARTITION (TYPE "r) 63/4" 20 G0. NIL 067ECTION TRACK ATTACH To 2 1/7 STUDS w/ (2) 114 SHT. MR. SCREWS PER STUD. REFER TO SECTION /5 ON THIS SHEET FOR SIMILAR NFORMA0IN WHERE ROOF STRUCTURE RUNS PARALLEL WRH PARTITION 2 1/81 20 G0. MTL STUD BRIDGING 0 46 0.0. ATTACH 2 1 /2" 20 GA MTL RUNNEL TRACKS TO EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE - REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWNGS \ SUSPENDED ACT. CEILING ' CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE WATER RESISTANT GYP. BAWD IN BREAK ROOM, RE5IROOMS A JANITORS CLOSET. 0 20 CA. NIL RUNNER TRACK ANCHOR TO EXISTING CONC. SLAB w/ 'HIDE HSL M-12/20 ANCHORS (3" EARED) O O.C. (TYP.) VINYL BASE (131) 4.2 5. 5/8 2 1/81 20 GA MIL STUD DIACONAL BRACING O 48" 0.0. ATTACH TO STUDS w/ (4) 114 MT. MR. SCREW AND TO BRIDGING w/ (3) 114 SHT. MR. SCREWS 6" 20 G0. MI- RUNNER TRACK ATTACH TO 6 SOUDs w/ (2) 114 SHT. MIL SCREWS (DO NOT ATTACH TO DEFLECTION TRACK) Vqq/Dt55 6" 20 G0. 811 STUD BLOCKING BETWEEN EACH STUD (TYP.) SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" FACE OF TENANT DEMISING WALL 7/8" 20 ,G0. MIL FURRING CHANNEL- SHIM N ANCHOR TO TENANT DEMISING. WALL SCREWS 0 24 "o.c MAX. (STAGGERED) I 5/8" l WAINSCOT PANEL (WP1) SECTION TIT PE "A") SECTION PARTITION I (TYPE "D") SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" SALES AREA 6 20 GA MIL SKIDS 0 16 0.C. (TYP.) CRASH RNLS. (CR1) VINYL BASE (V81) 6 3/4" 20 C0. ATE. DEFLECTION TRACK ATTACH TO 2 I/Y STUDS w/ (2) 114 SHT. NIL SCREWS PER STUD. EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE TO REMAIN SEE SONNET. OAKS. 2 1/81 20 G0. MR_ 511D BRIDGING 0 48" 0.0. ATTACH 2 1/2" 20 GA MIL RUNNER TRACKS TO EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE - REFER TO STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS s /B" GYP. BOARD DOTN 9DES OF STUDS. EXTEND GYP. WALLBOARD TO 6 ABOVE nMSH CEILING U.O.N. M CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL WANSCOT ! PANEL (WP1) A CRASH RAILS (CRT)' ON STIES SIDE OF PARDTION (U.N.O.) (REFER TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ON SHEETS A41, A4.3, N A4.4 FOR LOCATION) EXISTING CONK. FLOOR SLAB i0 REMAIN No Dote Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION o Drawing BID DATE: - CADD NAME: 850 PROJECT NO • W003040 DRAWN BY: MW / NLP CHECKED BY: RIN PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION. URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616 - 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 vi i Revisions Drawing References National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location TUKW I LA W/ T' R CENED PARKWAY SUPERCENDE'itoFTUKw1LA Drawing Title 4�'AY I I IyyD I N T E R I Or 8CENTE R WALL SECTIONS Scale AS NOTED I Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A50 Revisions _ No Date Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References .: No Drawings BID DATE:. - CADD MARE: 062 PROJECT NO • M1039W DRAWN BY: MIJ / NIP CHECKED BS: RAB P DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (AC.)) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 IMP 5287 M7T.rcr / 1/ , . A AENIS ':N TAT % WA ' 'STAN L am .� �� National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown moy not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location T U KW I LA WA upi PARKWAY SUPERCENECENEo cry OF TUKWIL6 Drawing Title MAY 1 1 1998 INTERIOR DE Scale AS NOTED I Dote MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A607AR ti SECTION A -A SCALE: N.TS. 4 ALL SURFACES TO BE I/2' THICK SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL. (55M11 (BACKSPLASN, DROP, TOP t FRONT) PROVIDE I/O RADIUS ON ALL EDGES. SOAP DISPENSER CONT. 2x4 -LAG TO WALL STUDS (2) CONT. 2E4 BLOCKING BEHIND COUNTER (DP) 2' -3' (1) CONT. 2E6 BLOCKING BEHIND COUNTER (2) LAYERS I/2 THICK SOUL) SURFACE MATERWL (SSMI) O CENTER t END SUPPORTS — -- 2 0" 5' -S i -BACKSPLASH PLAN NOTE: CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL AVATORY t COUNTERTOP OPENING CUTS 00TH LAVATORY MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, OR WING. DETAIL OF BREAK ROOM SINK SCALE: 1" = 1' -0" (61 -E0: SPACES w/ 1 /0 DIVIDERS DETAIL SORTING BINS SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0" DETAIL @;EESTROOM SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" BACKSPLASH: 4' H.0 RACK t (1)S. CONSTRUCTED OF 3/4" H. DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE (PULA3) ON AIL EXPOSED SURFACES AND BACKER SHEET ON ALL CONCEALED SURFACES. PROVIDE I/O RADIUS ON ALL EDGES. COUNTERTOP: 64'L x OAR (PROVIDE I/O" RADIUS 0 EDGES) BASE CABINET: 63L x 29'W a 35 1 /YH. CONSTRUCTED OF 3/4" HIGH DENSITY PARTICLE BOARD WITH PLASTIC LAMINATE (Pt.o 3) ON ALL EXPOSED SURFACES AND BACKER SHEET ON ALL CONCEALED SURFACES. PROVIDE (1) FIXED SHELF. HARDWARE: HINGES - STANLEY /1588 (2 PER DOOR), PULLS - STANLEY /4483 -AL (1 PER DOOR), MN;NETIG CATCH - STANLEY fSP46 -AL (1 PER DOOR). REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR FIXTURES A110 PIPING INFORMATION. INSULATE All EXPOSED RANG BELOW COUNTERTOP. PROVIDE ALL SHOP DRAWINGS TO ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION. LINE: CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL LAVATORY t COUNTERTOP OPENING CUTS WITH LAVATORY OR SINK MANUFACTURERS REQUIREMENTS. PRKOR TO INSTALLATION, OR CURING. SECTION A -A NOTES; 1. LAMINATE INTERIOR, EATEROR,'. t EDGES OF , .SORTING ON w/ PLASTIC WAINATE(RALL3). 2. PANT ORDERS TO MATCH PLASTIC LAMINATE 3: SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR BIN MATERIAL LEL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL LAVATORY t COUNTERTOP OPENING CUTS MTH AVATORY OR SINK MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, OR CUTTING. 2.1 NM BORROW LIGHT FRAME. PAINT PNT2 NOTE PROVIDE (2) OMB ANCHORS EACH MAX. TIME CLOCK (05) WALL BASER (W13100S0— WAINSCOT PANELS (PWA1) (OS) SUSPENDED GEORG ®Y PLAS. LAM. (RA41) ON BOTH 50E5 OF 5/5 NOR DENSITY PARTICLE BOA. 7 1/4 DETAIL 0 TIME CL MK SCALE: 1 1/T = V-0" it DEEP INIEROR GRADE 3/4' PLYWOOD SHELVES / PLAS. LAMINATE FINISH ON ALL DEPOSED SURFACES AND EDGES. COLOR TO MATCH SHELF BRAREETS, AND SLOTTED STANCHIONS. FIN. FLOOR SEE PLAN FOR LENGTH S• LONG SLOTTED STARR.. 0 24' O.C. (ANCHOR w/ FATHEAD W000 SCREWS) COLOR: FACTORY RN. RITE DETAIL LtiTEr SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" APPLIED N.M. GIAZ81G STOPS, PAINT PHU I/O', BOLTS, WASHEfS t NUTS TYPIEN. Y DAMPER HOLE PROVDE PLASTIC GR.. POWER CHORD MR. STUD TRACK 5/5 GYP. BOAR 5 20 GA MTI- STUDS • 16' 0.C. Pf? E 246 WOOD BL0a0NG BETWEEN METAL STUDS E RO Tab HARDWOGO BOARD. ATf001 TO METAL STUDS. ENTIRE LENGTH OF COAT RACK 2x4 WOOD BLOCING O SUPPORT BRACKETS ATTACH TO STUDS (TYPICAL) -0q - ol 55 5 20 GA MS. STUDS 0 15 O.C. 5/5 GYP. BOARD EA SIDE NOTE: PAINT H.M. BORROW LIGHT (PNT2) (2) 5x20 CA NIL STUD HEADER UNTO. HJM. BORROW LIGHT FRAME t STOPS. INSTALL GLAZING ON SALES SIDE OF FRAME. I111 , . 4ITL STUD TRACK I.. 16 . , SHELF BRACKET SUPPORTS " 'STANLEY 1797 (WHITE FINISH) 5. 0 EA END SUSPENDED AY -IN COOING 3/4" PLYWOOD W/ WOOD EDGES (TYP.) PAINT (PNT2) 1' -0 i/2' MIL STUD TRACK 5/5 GYP. BOARD EA SIDE 5 20 CA. MIL STUDS O 15 O.C. DETAIL SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 0 OFFICE WINDOW LIGHT SHIELD DETAIL STOREFRONT SYSTEM SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0" yo1 p O O pl < 6 Y V 1 I 0 0 a a 0 0 0 6 g S i Ii i 0 0 NO 01 02 03 04 05 os 07 08 09 10 15 16 18 21 22 24 / GROUP I TO HAVE GROUP 2 TO FAME GROUP 3 TO HAVE maw 4 TO HAVE 0008008 EXTERIOR TO VESTIBULE (BLDG. SHELL) VESTIBULE 10 SALES EXTERIOR TO VESTIBULE (BLDG. SHELL) VESTIBULE TO REGISTER REGISTERS TO OFFICE OFFICE TO COUNT R00 EQUIPMENT ROOM TO TELCO ROOM REGISTERS TO EQUIPMENT HAUL TO MEN'S TOILET FALL TO JANITOR HALL TO WOMEN'S TOILET HALL TO MOTHER'S ROOM FALL i0 BREAK ROO HALL TO TRAINING SALES TO EXTERIOR (BLDG. SHELL) RECEMNG TO TRUCK DOCK ' ^I.LC.) (BLDG. SHELL) RECEIVING TO TRUCK DOCK (SIC.) (BI DG. SHELL) RECEIVING TO EXTERIOR (BLDG. SHELL) RECEMNG TO POWER ROOM COMPACTOR TO RECEMNG (BLDG. SHELL) SALES TO PRE -SALES SALES TO PRE -SALES CLOSET DOORS IN Ma iNG R 1401E9 1) EXTERIOR FACE OF EXTEROR DOORS TO BE PANTED WHITE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED ON ELEVATIONS. 2 ) INTERIOR FACE OF EXTERIOR DOORS TO BE PANTED PER ROOM DN. SCHEDULE. 3) DR CLOSERS TO BE MOUNTED ON ROOM SIDE OF ORS. 4) IMPACT COORS SUPPUEO BY DRU & INSTALLED BY CONTR. HARDWARE BY MANUFACTURER (INCLUDING BREAKAWAY HARDWARE). ALL DOORS IN GROUP TO HAVE THE FOLLOWING SIGN AT ADJACENT LOCATION: "THIS DOOR TO RERAN UNLOCKED DURING OCCUPARCY. PR0VIDE MANUAL EXIT HARDWARE ON INTERIOR FACE OF REQUIRED) LETTERS TO BE 1" MINIMUM IN HEIGHT I/2 PR. BUTTS - STANLEY PUSH PLATE - HAGER PULL - HAGER DR. CLOSER - NORTON DR. STOP - IVES SILENCERS - MES KICKPLATE - HAGER 1 1/2 PR. BUTTS - STANLEY 1 LOCKSET - BEST 1 DR. CLOSER - NORTON 1 DR. STOP - NES 3 SILENCERS - IVES 1 LOCKGLIARD -IVES 1 1/2 PR. BUTTS - STANLEY 1 LATCHSET - BEST 1 DR CLOSER - NORTON 1 DR STOP - MES 3 SILENCERS - IVES KICKPLATE - HAGER INSULATED ROLLING STL OVERHEAD DOOR PORN. & INSTALLED BY DOOR MFR. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE THE OPENING 8 -0" x 0' - (ROUGH OPENING) 0 FOB 179 4 1/2 x 4 1/2' 260 305 - 6 x 16, 320 90 - 6 C. TO C., 32D 7500 H -BF -AL 407 B360 20 10" x34 ", 16 CA 32D FBB 179 4 1/2" x 4 1/2' 26D 93870150 -626 (TACTILE LEVER WAND) 7500 H -BF -AL 407 B36D 20 #184 32D FBB 179 4 1/0 x 4 1/0 26D 93KON150 -626 (LEVER HAND) 7500 H -BF -AL 407 B36D 20 10 x34", 16GA 32D 0k 1 JTO HOLLOW METAL 0 IMPACT DOORS 12' -R UNIT 12' -0" UNIT 9' -0" UNIT 9'- Y UNIT 3 -Or S - 3• -0" 3 . - 0 3• -0" 3' -0" 8. - a" 6 . -U . 3• -0" 3' - 0" 3 G 3• -0" PAIR 3• -a" PAR 4' -0" PAR / CROUP 7 TO HAVE GROUP 8 TO HAVE METAL LOUVER WHERE INDICATED SEE REMARKS IN DOOR SCHEDULE FOR SIZE OF LOUVER. PANT LOUVER TO MATCH DOOR. DOOR SCHEDULE 7' -0" 7' -0" 0-0 0 -0" 9' -0" 9' -0" 7' - (Y GROUP 5 - TO HAVE GROUP 6 TO HAVE IMPACT DOORS PROVIDED BY 0AI INSTALLED BY CONTR. 7' - 0" 1 3/4" 3/4" 7' -a 1 3/4" 0" 3/e 7' -(Y 3/4 7' -0" 3/ - 3/4" - 3/4" 7' -0" I 3/4" G 3/8 7' -0 13/4" 7' -0" 1 3/C 3/C 2' -0 1 3/4" 7•_O' 1 3/4" 7• -Dr 1 /e 1/2 PR BUTTS - STANLEY LOCKSET - BEST DR. CLOSER - NORTON DR STOP -IVES SILENCERS - IVES KICKPLATE - HAGER VIEWER - STANLEY PR. BUTTS - STANLEY ALARM (BATTERY) - DETEX PULL - HAGER (O INT. FACE) SET WEATHERSTRIPPING - N.G.P. DOOR SWEEP - N.G.P. THRESHOLD -. N.G.P. VIEWER - STANLEY WIND CHAN 1/2 PR BUTTS - STANLEY ALARM (BATTERY) - DE0x PULL - HAGER (O INT. FACE) SET WEATHERSTRIPPING - N.G.P. NEWER - STANLEY DOOR SWEEP - N.C.P. 0RESH0.0 - N.C.P. WIND CHAN PR. BUTTS - STANLEY I SPRINGLATCH - BEST PULL - HAGER ALUM ALU ALu ALu HM STL SR HM PLASTIC PLASTIC WOOD EQUAL EQUAL HOLW METAL w/ 1/4" LO TEMP. GLASS ,MAX FRAME HEM 9210/7.1 3/7.1 4/3.0 3/7.1 6/7.0 2/7.0 7/7.0 3/7.0 7/7.0 3/7.0 6/7.0 2/7.0 6/7.0 2/7.0 6/7.0 2/7.0 6/7.0 2/7.0 6/7.0 2/7.0 6/7.0 2/7.0 7/7.0 3/7.0 6/7.0 2/7.0 8/7.0 4/7.0 8/7.0 4/7.0 7/7. HARDWARE SCHEDULE EBB 179K 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 260 Ea. 230 D 90 - 6 C. TO C. 32D f135N FAIT. 102AV 425 CD4538 (U54) 10"x10" MIRROR GLASS FACING SAES SIDE ',pun META. 0 4/7.1 4/7.1 5/7.1 5/7.1 5/7.1 8/7. 7/7.I 5) CLOSER TO BE MOUNTED ON P60500S SIDE. 6) PREPARE DOOR TO RECEIVE "DEREK CYLINDER BOTH SIDES. FBB 179 4 1/0 x 4 1/2" 260 93K7D150-626 (LEVER HAND) 7500 H -BF -A 20 407 836D 10 x 34, 16GA. 320 C04538 (US4) (DOOR /14, ONLY) EBB 191 4 1/2" x 4 1/2' NRP 26D ECL 230 D 90 - 6 C. TO C., 32D 1135N FAIT C04538 (US4) 102AV 425 FBB 179 4 1/2' x 4 1/0 26D 83T -7C -DL S3C5. -626 (KEYED AT INT.) 9G -8' C. TO C., 32D EGRESS 5:0TH 129 1/0 EGRESS WIDTH 129 1/2' EGRESS WIDTH 98 1/2' EGRESS WIDTH 98 1/2 SEE NOTE f3 SEE NOTE /3 SEE NOTE f3 w/ 24 X 18" LOUVER w/ 24" x I8" LOUVER / 2C X IB" LOUVER HR. RATED DOOR AND FRAME / 24" x IT LOUVER / 24" X 18' LOUVER EGRESS 810TH 42 CHAIN OPER. INSULATED ROLLING DOOR CHAIN OPER. INSULATED ROLLING DOOR EGRESS WIDTH 33"; VIEWER w/ 24" PULL (WHERE "OETEX" OCCURS 0 INTERIOR) "DETEa ALARMED EXITING DEVICE (WHERE OCCURS) REMARKS 8" LOUVER; SEE NOTE 15 H.O. IMPACT D00R5: SEE NOTE f4 H.D. IMPACT DOORS; SEE NOTE f4 FLUSH; PROVIDE TYPICAL SLIDING DOOR TRACK GROUP 9 TO IONE & HARDWARE 1g 0155 1 PADLOCK -.BEST 418772 -606. SHANK PADLOCK (2') KEYED TO MATCH FRONT DOOR GROUP 11 TO HAVE EACH LEAF (USE 0 DOUBLE EXT. EXIT DOORS, IF ROOD) 1/2 PR. BUTTS - STANLEY ALARM (BATTERY) - DETEX VERTICAL ROD ASSEM018 - DETEX PULL - HAGER (0 INT. FACE) SET WEATHERSTRIPPING - N.G.P. DOOR SWEEP - N.G.P. THRESHOLD - N.G.P. WIND CHM GROUP 11 TO HONE EACH LEAF (USE 1/2 PR. BUTTS - STANLEY LATCHSET - BEST DOOR CLOSER.. -NORTON DOOM CLOSER - NORTON KICKPLATE - HAGER SET SMOKE GASKETS - N.P.C. SET ASTRAGALS - N.P.G. FBB 191 4 1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 260 ECL 230 0 VRA 143D 9C - 6C. TO C., 32D f135N FAIT 102AV 425 006001E INT. EAT D 0 REO'D) EBB 191 4 1/2 x 41/2 NRP 260 93005115D -626 (LEVER HARD) :.- - PTO - OUSTER..... • .. , 7700- PIS -SLAVE 10 x 34, 160A, 320 110NA I15NCTA TAI t. NORTON CLOSERS & DETEX AAW5, SUPPLIED BY BABIES 'R US AND INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR INSTALL IVES 407 8360 DOOR STOP ON WALL OF TOILET ROOMS WHERE TOILET PARTITION DOOR SWINGS TOWARD WA U_ ALL LOCKS SHALL BE BEST WITH CONSTRUCTOR CYLINDERS PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR TO SUPPLY TWO "BE52 PADLOCKS 418770 TO TO BE INSTALLED ON ROOF HATCH AND GAS UNE. SEE PLAN FOR R.O. SEE SCHEDULE FOR UNIT WIDTH (0) AUTO. ALUM. SUDING DOORS FURN. & INSTALLED BY DOOR MFR. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE THE OPENING. SUOERS TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED U.N.O. 0 DOOR ELEVATIONS SCALE: 1/4" = 1' -c1 ALUM. FRAMING ALUM. SLIDING DOORS a/ I/4" TEMP. GLASS & BREAK-AWAY FEATURE STATIONARY DOOR 4/ 1/4" TEMP. GLASS (TYP) ALUM. MUNTINS 2 NOT USED SCALE: NONE JAMB � T SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0' Aft NOT USED SCALE: NONE HEAD 0 3 5 /8' . STUD PARTITIONS SCALE: 1 1/2 = 5/8" GYP. BD. (SALES 90E) 6 20 GA MR_ STUDS 0 16 O.C. (2) 6 20 GA MIL STUD HEADER UNTEL FLUSH (NO RAOBETT) 16 GA H.M. FRAME H EAD ® IMPACT DOORS SCALE: 1 1/2" = CITY 0) j131(W'tLA APPRO 00 AID 3 15 l s PLYWOOD .!I' J P;G DIVISION e, . . - (PRE - SALES SID /2' CAULK 0 EA. SIDE CAULK 0 FA SIDE 16 GAL H.M. FRAME CAULK 0 FA SIDE \ / No Date I 03/20/98 05/05/98 No Drawings BID DATE: CARD NAME: 6470 PROJECT NO . 88103040 DRAWN BY: MLP ML CHECKED BY. W0 PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616 - 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown moy not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R' US. Location Drawing Title MAY I 1 1998 DOOR SCI 1EDV ' T ' ENT ER AND DETAILS Scale Description Revisions PERLIMINARY RENEW ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References AS NOTED. COORDINATION National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTegmA Sheet No. A/. Date I MAY 5, 1998 OAR Revisions No Date Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References No Drawings BID DATE: - CADS NAME: 071 PROJECT NO. M103040 DRAWN BY: __ MLP /. Nu CHECKED BY: WAB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, 'MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616 -285 -3542 5287 //��{{�����77��]� - - -. DENISG. 44 STATE OF A ON Notional Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER RECEIVED _.. vfTY OF TUKWILA Drawing Title MAY I 1 1998 DOOR DETA I' Scale AS NOTED I Dote MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A / a 1 AR ... J I I i VESTIBULE JAMB D 0 (PARTITION SLIDING SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0" VESTIBULE JAM B D 0 (STOREFRONT SLIDING YSTEM SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1' -0" 6 NOT USED 7. 7_ SCALE: NONE 2 E5 VCT FM IN SALES AREA SCALE: 3" = 1' -0" I PRE SALES SP= MS Y WeL OR RIBBER REDUCER sitar O AIL SALES ei KM-5415 arENNG (SEE SPECS) E1aSItiG CaNCREtE FLOOR SLAB THRESHOLD. IMPACT DOORS .1)C 01 55 MOTHER'S MLA THRESHOLD • MOTHER'S ROOM SCALE: 3" = 1' -0- 4.2 4.2 Aft `] BOTTOM OF S- ORDRONT MUWON O 7 -6 I /4' A.F.F. VESTIBULE NOT USED SCALE: NONE NOT USED SCALE: NONE HEAD SCALE: 1 1/2' = 1'4 SILL SCALE: 1 1/2 - 1'-0' OF INTERIOR AUTO. SUDINC DOOR 0 STOREFRONT SYSTEM OF INTERIOR AUTO. SLIDING DOOR 0 STOREFRONT SYSTEM Revisions No _..- Dote Description 03/20/98 PREIJMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTOR Drawing References No Drawings 81D DATE: - CADS NAME: ABU PROJECT NO . x103040 DRAWN BY: MLP / Mu CHECKED BY: R PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION. URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616 -285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 6267 STE;:u ,. RC Ca ' L ION ` OF I NGTON 1 L L. U � - - National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS ° R ° US. The informotion shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TONS ° R' US. Location TUKW I LA , WA . PARKWAY SUPERCENIE EOEscEO 0FTIJKWI� Drawing Title MAY 1 1 1998 't - M I SCELLANESrER METAL DETAILS Scale I Date AS NOTED MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A800 4'0 STEEL PIPE BOLLARD FILLED 4/ CONC., PAINTED TRAFFIC YELLOW AND EMBEDDED IN CONC. BASE BOLLARDS BOLLARDS REQUIRED AT WATER PETER, GAS METER SPRINKLER RISER. TRANSFORMER, & ((TURES AT LOCATIONS S40 WN ON THESE DRAWINGS IMERIOR. ®Er DETAIL STEEL�PIPE BOLLARD SCALE: 3/8" = 1' -0" NOT USED SCALE: NONE gir a NOT USED SCALE: NONE NOT USED SCALE: NONE NOT USED SCALE: NONE D1cVc155 NOT USED SCALE: NONE DIMENSION TO COL C 44441/444 LONG CUP ANGLES •/ t /2' W. X I - /Y LONG SLOT FOR ANCHOR 0 6' - O.C. ANCHOR w/ 3 /60 SLEEVE TYPE EXPANSION BOLT INTO MASONRY (GROUT CELLS SOLD) C6410.5 SR. GONDOLA CHANNEL CONT. AJGN CHANNELS k FIELD WELD TO ANGLE. 24241/4' CONT. STL ANGLE EXPANSION BOLT TO EXISTING, OR NEW C.C. FLOOR SOB 0 46o.c. COUNTERSINK 1/2•0 n 4 I /YL FATHEAD EXPANSION ANCH005 O 4' -0'.. O.C. INTO MASONRY (GROUT CELL OM CONT. 441 /4 STL PLATE ROOF HATCH - SEE OIL 4 AI.4 TOP HOOP SCALE: 1" = 1' -0" 543 /8 SR. CAGE HOOP O TOP A DOT. OF CAGE A 2" 43/6 SR. CAGE HOOPS • 4' -0' O.C. 741 /4 STL CAGE VERTICALS (TYP.) ANCHOR LADDER BRACKETS THRU GYP. BD. TO NESTED STUDS /12 -24 AM TEK4 /5 SCREWS. BOTTOM HOOP F 08'7 A.F.F. C4 LADDER RAILS 3/4' RUA. • 12' O.C. SECURE RAILS TO EXISTING CONC. FLOOR SLAB w/ CUP ANGLE WELDED TO RNL NE 1/20 EXP. BOLT TO CONC. SLAB RMSH FLOOR DETAIL WALL CHANNEL SCALE: 1" = 1' -0" OF REQUIRED.) DETAIL WALL PLA E GONDOLA SECTION A -A DETAIL LADDER SCALE: 1/2" = 1' -0" 6 WIDE 16 GA MTL PLATE ATTACH TO STUDS EXISTING ROOF STRUCTURE VERIFY IN THE FIELD REFER TO STRUCTUP.OL DWCS, AND EXISTING COND00NS FOR FRAME ALL THE WAY AROUND. CONNECT STRUCT. MEMBERS PROVIDE SLOT IN LADDER BRACKET • ROOF A CONNECTION TION SLIP NOTE. CO.. TO PROVIDE PADLOCK (REFER TO REMARKS NOTE 14 COON HARDWARE SCHEDULE ON SHEET 07D) PROVIDE (2) 6. 16 GA MIL STUDS (NESTED) BEHIND LADDER BRACKETS (TYP.) t14g; PANT PALS, RUNGS S CAGE O.S.HA YELLOW. PARTRION TYPE A rll� 114 \ D . 1c3 , d �J 17 PROVIDE (2) 6 16 GA MIL STUDS (NESTED) BEHIND UDDER BRACKETS (TYP.) r.nP Revisions No Dote Description 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References NO Drawings . ... a BID DATE: - CADD NAME: aso PROJECT NO • M103040 DRAWN BY Nu CHECKED BY: R48 PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION. - •: t URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616-285 -3500 FAX 616-285-3542 52877 D _;. wy ' ECT ', • CION INGTO, .�L Notional Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location I UKW I LA r 11 mNED PARKWAY SUPERCE RFruKwtLA MAY 1 1 1g98 Drawing Title REFLECTED C!fn.LE ENG PLAN Scale I 1/15' =1' -O' Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. A R I I I Dck9- 0)55 WOMEN MEN — — ® MEM � �11�� 111 ■N �_ 4 WI IIII !11 MEM 4 Ian 1 111 Ida: aaNtroR's l � � �e ■ III ■11 ■� ini ®_ EiIA1 ■11 ■1I1 IIIIIIII ®IIII1IIIII` TRAINWG l iteR191111111111111111.1111110.1111.1.11111 -, l,4 11 1 ■111.1 ■11111II111111■ 1111 - 111111 11111111 ■11111111111 ®II 11111111 ..®[ 111 E I 1 1 ROOM t2 ' iiiin !i� ■■■Llli■IN1111M11■111■1■111 �N11■ e9!e - 4 111® 111 ■11■ 1111■ IIIIi1111111111 ■111■11■11 ■111111■■ ■111■■1■1■ 111® 111.11 ■IIN ■111111111111111 ■111 ■1 ■1111 ■II■■■ ■11111.111 ■1 ■1 1111IIIII11 IIIIIIIIHIIIIIi111111 11111111111O11IIIII ■111 ®IIIIIIIIuII ■■11111.11111 ■I . . ■■■ ■ ■■ ■ ■■■■ F■ ■■■■■ ■■■ ■ ■■ ■ ■�i■■■ ti■ ■ ■■■■tram . ■1: . ■■■ C- I■ s■■ 1■ C■■■■ Ei■ 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■1■.0 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■C ■■1 ■1 ■I� ■ ■■1 ■� 11 ■ ■ ■ ■■ . liii 1111111111 I IIIIIIIOIUIIIIIIIIIIIIIiIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIUIlI y 111■ 111 ■11 ■1111 ■1111111111111■ ■III ■11■ ■N111111■ ■11111 ■11111 ■1 11• 111 ■11 ■11■ ■11111111111111■ 111 ■1.11111111111■ ■11111■111■I■1 1I1 ■■■M■IiV11nIIIII 1!IIa■■■■1■ IENIIIMMI11IMINEHIIIIII1i■11MI1 111 1 III ■II■ IIII ■111111111111111 ■III ■I ■1111111 III■ ■11111 ■■ 111 1 ■1 IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII ■IIIIII11111111111! IIIIII11111 :111 'x 11117 III■11■ 1111■ 11111■ 1111111E '!!iI1III11I11111■■IIIII■111 I 11111111 .11 ■1111■111111111■1111E E•111111111111 ■■11111 ■111 ∎ .e.711� 111 ■11 ■1111■1111P11 ■11111 1111n■11 11111111■■ ■111 ®1■I 11111 1111 IIII iHhIiIIiIIHilIiiIIiliIIlIIIiUiI IIIIIIIlIIIHIIII1i ' iih1111111I11111111111111I11I11111111111 .IIIHI1111111111111111.111 y 1111111111 111 1111111111IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIuiII11111111111IIII1111 ®11 111■ 111 ■11■ 1111■ 111111111111111■■ ■111111111111111■ ■11111 ■111.1■ ►� 111 111 ■11 ■1111 ■111111111111111■ IIIIII ■111111111111 ■ ■11111■11111■1 } .111 iiiriliiiilU •..UCiliiii... .iiiliC•.l. • ii..il ■ioi.•. •ii■'oiii 111■ 111 ■11■ 1111■ 11111111111111■ 1111111111111i1111 ■■11111■111■1■1 ED�NT III1111111I11IIII1II111111111111111111 .1111111AI11111I111111U111 =In ' I 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 a - -- women IIIL ■1■mIIIL■■I■■11■I■■■■■I■L■■■■■ 111 ■■111■is■■I■,1mIIi11L■■■■■ • ■ 1 II■ 1I■ IIi1■ Ii11I11I111iii ■1111II■Ii111i1Ii11i■■iii11 ■11111.1 ■—! 111 ■11■ 1111■ 1111111111 1111 ■1111111111111111111■ ■■111 ■11111 ■1 O AI ° I 111A11�:111�1i111111 a11i1iIGi1Gi11 =i11111■111■1 ■1 COUNT 4 1.� ■■■•1uu I�1® ®��eeee ®� ■.I.I ®I■IIIIIIIII■NIIIII ■111 ■1■I -in I lil ll7 l *Ii i ■ ®o 1 IU I1i ■I Aft OTC I ❑ I ❑ O - VE .LE m REFLECTED CEILING PLAN PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0" NORTH ■ ■ 0 ■ A ,pppn■LLT AUG J Revisions No D Dote D Description 03/20/98 P PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 I ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References NO D Drawings BID DATE: - CADD NAME: MID PROJECT NO • 1103040 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION -, h URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 61.- ; -3542 7 P P Q o e yy wn s q i v i =' J ,ks 1 4P . L ��_ ....... it National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of - TOYS V US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R' US. - Locution TUKWILA, WA PARKWAY SUPERCENTEf Ecenmo CITY MIMII A D Drawing Title MAX 1 1 1958 k MECHAN I CAL WERMFFQW PLAN Scale I I Date Sheet No. 1 1 KEYED NOTES (APPLICABLE TO DRAWINGS M1 THRU M4) = PROVIDE 1 1/0 TYPE L COPPER CONDENSATE DRAIN FROM UNIT TO ROOF ON LOW ROOF (DOWNHILL) SIDE OF UNIT. EXTERNAL 4 DEEP P -TRAP REQUIRED ONLY IF EQUIPMENT IS NOT SUPPLIED WITH BUILT -IN TRAP SYSTEM. REFER CONDENSATE GRAN DETAIL ON DRAWING 02. VERIFY WITH RN MFR. CAP ALL UNUSED CONDENSATE DRAIN FITTINGS. ANCHOR THE DISCHARGE END OF CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING TO MIN. 4° 0 4 X 24 LONG WOL0ANIZED WOOD BLOCKING WITH I GOLY. STRAP ANCHOR AND Tw0 (2) /10 X 1 I/Y SHEET MOTEL SCR:'WS. CENTER BLOCKING BELOW PIPING. DO NOT ATTACH WOOD BLOCKING TO ROOF. TYP- ICAL AT ALL BTU'S. WHEN REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE, CONDENSATE PIPING SHALL BE EXTENDED AS REIM. TO DISCHARGE INTO THE SANITARY SEWER THROUGH Al APPROVED INDIRECT CONNECTION OR TO AN APP- ROVED DRY WELL LOCATION AND METHOD OF DISCHARGE SHALL BE SUBJECT TO THE APPROVAL OF THE ARCHITECT /ENGINEER OR THE OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE. INSULATE ALL INTERIOR CONDENSATE DRAIN PIP- ING WITH 3/6 THICK ° ARMAFLEK PIPE INSULATION (OR APPROVED EQUIVALENT). SEAL ALL JOINTS IN THE INSULATION. I= SUPPLY AND RETURN AR DUCTWORK SHALL HAVE I THICK INTERNAL FIBERGLASS DUCT UNER EQUIVALENT TO CERTAINTEED (CGS) OR OWENS CORNING. DUCT SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWING ARE SHEET METAL SIZES. ALLOWANCE FOR INTERNAL NCI UNER HAS BEEN MADE WHERE SPECIFIED. 03 HAC SHALL PROVIDE FULL SIZE DIRT LEG WITH GAS COCK AND UNION AT ALL CAS FIRED EQUIPMENT. TYPICAL AT ALL RTU'S AND UNIT HEATERS. ® GAS PIPING SHALL BE INSTALLED ON ROOF, EXCEPT WHERE NOTED. REFER GAS PIPING SUPPORT DETAIL ON DWG. 1,13. HORIZONTAL INTERIOR GAS PIPING SHAT BE ROUTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE WITH ALLOWANCE FOR SLOPE AS REQUIRED. 0 TYPE ° B GAS FLUE WITH FLAWING CONE, STORM COUPRS, AND ° UL ° LJSTED STORIN PROOF CAP. HEIGHT OF FLUE STACK AS REQUIRE_ „ LOCAL CODE. FLUE STACK MD ACCESSORIES BY METALBESTOS OR EQUIVALENT. REFER TO UNIT HEATER DETAIL ON DWG. M3. © FLEXIBLE DUCTS SHALL BE INSTALLED TO PROVIDE SWEEPING CONFIGURATIONS WITH NOT LESS THAN NFR'S. RECOMMENDED BEND RADIUS, WITHOUT UNDUE RESTRICTIONS, BUT NOT CREATING UNNECESSARr SAGS OR CURVES. FIAT BANDING MATERIAL NOT LESS THAN 1 I/2' MOE 5041 BE USED TO SUSPEND FLEXIBLE DUCTS. DUCTNG FURNISHED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED GROMMETS SHALL BE SUSPENDED BY WIRES ATTACHED TO GROMMETS. rn THERMOSTAT FOR UH -1. MOUNT ON WALL WHERE SHOWN AT 48' AFF. PROVIDE Y X 4° STEEL CONTROL BOX AND 1/2' EMT CONDOR FOR T -STAT wIRING EXPOSED ON WALL. ROUTE HORIZONTAL PORTION OF CONTROL WIRING CONDUIT AS HIGH AS P059BLE TO UNIT HEATER. = PROVIDE DUCT DROPS FROM UNIT FULL SIZE OF UNIT CURB OPENINGS. TRANSITION AS REQUIRED TO DUCT SIDES SHOWN ON PLAN. TRANOTONS SHALL BE MADE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SMACNA STANDARDS. VERIFY 000 CURB OPENING SIZES AND CONFIGURATION WLTH RTU MFR. m THERMOSTAT FOR Tf -2. MOUNT ON WALL WHERE SHOWN AT 48° AF,F. PROVIDE UNE VOLTAGE THERMO- STAT, HONEYWELL MODEL 1OcT1A OR APPROVED EWIAL ENT. POWER WIRING THRU .THERMOSTAT BY ELC. THERMOSTAT BT HAC.. REFER ELECT. DRAWINGS FOR. CLARIFICATION. 10 GAS NETER AND REGULATOR. CONNECTED LOAD = 1940 MBH. DELNERY PRESSURE = Y w.C. COORDINATE WITH GAS UTILITY CO. REVISED CONNECTED LOAD. 11 PROVIDE UNIT HEATER (UH -1) WITH OPTIONAL VERRCAL LOUVERS. IVC SHALL ADJUST THE VERTICL LOUVERS TO PROVIDE AR DISTRIBUTION NMI A 90 HORIZONTAL SPREAD. ADJUST THE VANES OF THE HORIZONTAL LOWERS TO 20 DM FROM HORIZONTAL 12 MOUNT BOTTOM OF UNIT HEATER (UH -1), PIPING AND ACCESSORIES AT 11' -V A.F.F. (MINIMUM CLEARANCE). REFER TO UNIT HEATER DETAIL ON DWG. M3. 13 REFER TO DOOR AIR CURTAIN MOUNTNG DETAIL ON DRAWING M3, SCHEDULE ON DRAWING c4 AND SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 150 FOR CLARIFICATION. 14 HAC SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL A 240 YAV SYSTEM MTH T -51AT 9 CONTROLS TO CONTROL OR ROW INTO OFFICES, SYSTEM SMALL ALLOW 25% FLOW TO OFFICES IN THE RESTRICTED POSITION AND HAVE A STATIC PRESSURE REGUTARNG DONPER TO BYPASS EXCESS SUPPLY AR INTO SAES AREA INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTAIATON INSTRUCTIONS MID PROCEEOURES. POWER MAY RE GAINED THRU THE SERVICE OUTLET OF THE RN. NOTE: CONTRACTORS SHALL REFER TO THE TXNONG PLAt, DRAWING F1.1, FOR COORONATON OF Al PIPING, EQUIPMENT, DUCTS, VALUING, AND SERVICE RISERS WITH THE OWNERS STORE FIXNRING. Al SYSTEMS SHALL BE ROUTED AND /OR LOCATED AS REQUIRED TO 0901D INTERFERENCE WITH THE STORE FIXTURES, SHELVING, AND RACKING, INCLUDING THE FUNCTIONAL USE Of SAME INSTALLATIONS MADE WITHOUT REGARD TO STORE FlXNRINS SHALL BE CORRECTED AT NO 00010054 COST TO THE OWNER. SPECIAL CONSIDERATION SHAT BE GIVEN TO THE ESTHETIC INTENT OF THE FRONT GRAPHICS WALL OF THE STORE AND TO THE STORAGE AND MATERIALS HAtNDUNG ASPECTS OF THE PRE -SALES AND RECEMNG DOCK AREAS. 14 ;17 GAS "'E. — TRAINING ROOM EQU WOMEN MOTHERS ROOM 110 I (11 BREAK , ROOM COUNT ROOM Tyc1 GAS UR TH1U ROOF' 0" MIN. �1 :F 1 1/ MEN { JANITOR 108 =3 IF I 102 I AR I 101 I ! U [ C O 1- - 1 4 r v 41 _L p VESITI JC- d n MAIN FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/16 P RE -SALES AR 1 113 I FG 00 � o BABY RECEIVING ,141 I 120 an o NORTH L,,,, 1-<2. 1-<2. I E—T 6 SKYLIGHT (TYP) H 3 i G— EGISTRY • POWER -ROOM Cr FLUE THRU ROOF. Revisions No Dote Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY RENEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION 1I Drawing References No Drawings BID DATE - CADD NAME 020 PROJECT NO H103040 : DRAWN BY CHECKED NT: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (AC) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX ',.1.- :5 -3542 P P' WAS 4:71r 1 • Z � 1-'1�Z 1(. -- 94 •ap U �th IS '� „_ SS70 N C ? Notional Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS ° R' US. The information shown may not be used no the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS *R' US. Location TUKWILA, WA.' PARKWAY SUPERCENTW ALA 1 f Drawing Title M 19981 MECHAN I C ffcn DETAILS Scale AS NOTED Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. V200 02_0e_:dde SCALE: t /8' = VESTIBULE I102I PLAN NORTH ENLARGED VESTIBULE PLAN'' S4 -1000 o'? NOTE: FOR KEYED NOTES, REFER DWG. MI. Q = KEYED NOTES S1 -150 924 12x1B El -420 1224 .1'Lct2.I.. 11224 TRAINING ROOM 24018 BREAK MOUNT AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE. WOMEN 1 109 S, -150 624 MOTHERS ROOM St -200 w /DAMPER (FR.) SPIN COLLAR STATIC PRESSURE REGULATING DAMPER MOUNT AS HIGH 02 - 405 AS POSSIBLE. 1806 CEUNG MOUNTED DAMPER (VP.) VAV TELCO ROOM 105 S1 -550 1224 12X8 54 -200 924 OFFICE S4 -250 924 Ei -420 1224 I COUNT ROOM 104' TI EQUIPMENT ROOM Rt 50 9241 VAV : ENLARGED OFFICE PLAN SCALE: 1/8° = 1' PLAN NORTH MOUNT BOTTOM OF TRANSFER FAN TF -1 0 2' (MAX) ABOVE CEIUNG. PROVIDE AUX11.1.4gr STEEL MAGLE5, CHANNELS, AM /OR 001 -STRUT AS REQUIRED To SECURELY SUSPEND FAN FROM ROOF FRMING. PROMDE ANTI -SWAY MOW AND /OR EARTHQUAKE RESTRAINTS AS REQUIRED BY LOLL CODE. SCALE: 1/8° - 1' -0° MEN () as 924 T2 -1166 Mg1NT AS HIGH ' i ✓ 30012 AS POSS18lE. JANITOR PLAN NORTH 12012 DUCT UP TO EF -t ENLARGED TOILET AREA PLAN rural ANt. APPr :i TO, T 0 HANGER ROD (TYP.) SIZE AND NUMBER PER MFR. RECOMMENDATIONS. PROVIDE AUX. FRAMING AS REVD. TO SECURELY SUSPEND UNIT FROM ROOF FRAMING. OWNER FURNISHED RTU OWNER FURNISHED , F ROOF CURD ADAPTER VENT CAP W/ BIRD SCREEN MIN. OF 3' -0" HEIGHT OR 2' -0" HIGHER THAN ANY OBSTRUCTION WITHIN 10' -0 NOTE: MOUNT THERMOSTAT AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS_ UNIT HEATER DETAIL SCALE: NOF€ ADAPTER (AS REVD.) h f " 'RAP SEAL TEE ROOF SURFACE-- PLUG RIPE - FOR CLEANOUT (CO) AND WINTERIZATION DRAIN MINIMUM 4 X 4 NOMINAL WOLMANIZED LUMBER X 24' MIN. LENGTH. CENTER BELOW PIPING. (TYPICAL ALL GAS PIPING ABOVE ROOF) ROOF GAS PIPING SUPPORT DETAIL FLUE DIAMETER AS SHOWN ON DRAGS. COUNTER FLASHING, MAKE RAIN TIGHT FLASHING COLLAR - SECURE TO ROOF DECK SHEET METAL SLEEVE. PAINT PER OWNER'S REP. DIRECTION. � FLUE CAP T . -- GAS PIPING - SIZE AS NOTED ON DRAWINGS. CLEAR HEIGHT AS NOTED ON DRAGS. FIN. FLOOR ELEV. NOTE EXTERNAL P -TRAP REVD. ONLY 9V ELL IF RTU 15 NOT SUPPLIED WTH A BUILT -IN TRAP SYSTEM. VERIFY WITH RTU MFR. EXTEND MIN. 3' -O PAST DOWNHILL SIDE OF UNIT. (TYPICAL) RTU CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING DETAIL 16 GAUGE GALV. STRAP ANCHOR WITH TWO (2) /10 X 2 GALV. SHEET METAL SCREWSf- GAS PIPING / ROOF SURFACE NOTES: 1. PIPING SHALL BE SUPPORTED AT ALL ELBOWS AND TEES AND AT SPACING SPECIFIED IN SECTION 15B. PIPING SHALL BE SLOPED AND ROUTED TO PREVENT TRAPPING CONDENSATE (EXCEPT AT DIRT LEGS) AND TO FACIUTATE CONDENSATE DRAINAGE. 2. GAS PIPING PENETRATIONS THRU ROOF SHALL BE MADE WATERTIGHT BY MEANS SPECIFIED IN SECTION 1B OR WITH APPROVED PITCH POCKETS. 3. BLOCKING BELOW PIPE SHALL HAVE MEMBRANE COATING AT ROOF SURFACE. 4. DO NOT ATTACH 4 X 4 BLOCKING TO ROOF. ROOF CURB (FURNISHED BY OWNER) CANT STRIP ROOF INSULATION TOP OF ROOF DECK ROOF BAR JOIST. J SEE STRUCT. DWGS. (TYP.) SA GRILLE (4 SIDES) 1,500 CFM EA SIDE SCALE: NONE 55 /— SA A RA CONCENTRIC / DUCT WORK ON FROM /` // RTU. NOTES: - INSTALLATION OF DUCTS, DIFFUSER BOX, U GRILLES SHALL BE PERFORMED BY GCC. - INSTALLATION OF DUCTS, DIFFUSER BOX, U GRILLES IS TYPICAL FOR RTU -1 THRU 6 - DO MI INSTALL FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS FOR SA A RA DUCTS FOR RTU -1 THRU RTU -6. - REFER RTU -1 THRU 6 SUPPLY A:. RETURN AIR DUCT A GRILLE SPECIFICATIONS ON SHEET M4' FOR FURTHER REQUIREMENTS AND CLARIFICATION. - HAC SHALL PROVDE AUXILIARY STEEL CHANNELS, ANGLES, AND /OR UNI -STRUT AS REQUIRED TO SECURELY SUPPORT.. THE SA DUCT, DIFFUSER BOX, AND GRILLES FROM THE ROOF STRUCTURE. PROVIDE VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR SUPPORT FRAMING. RTU -1 THRU 6 SUPPLY & RETURN AIR DUCT & GRILLE DETAIL `€ oATE APPROVAL REQUIRE() No Drawings PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References BID DATE' - CADD NAME: K30 PROJECT NO ' M1D3040 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION. CHECKED BY: URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616-285-3542 BA Notionol Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R' US. Location �(I C . w1 - ;7f�F s\2 TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENT R EDero OP TT1 Drawing Title IAN 1) .179, MECHAN I C46-. „ DETAILS Scale Dote AS NOTED MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No 3.0A ROOF TOP UNIT SCHEDULE (OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT) EQUIPMENT MARK RTU -t THRU 6 RTU -7 RTU -8 RTU -9 NOT USED NOMINAL TONS 15 3 2 1/2 8 1/2 COLUMN DOOR HEATER (AIR CURTAIN) TOTAL COOLING (MBH) - - 188.1 36.1 31.0 105.0 GAS COCK SENSIBLE C00LING • (MBH) 135.4 28.8 24.6 74.5 ' / SUPPLY OR DIFFUSER TOTAL CFM 6000 1200 1000 3400 I RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLE ENTERING DRY BULB/WET BULB (T) 80/67 80/67 80/67 80/67 1 R' FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION T�Y-� COND. AMBIENT ('F) 95 95 95 95 L' OKHS IOE Aft Dud GAS HEATING INPUT (MBH) 169/260 100 50 84.5/130 I i I S1 -125 �-- SUPPLY AR -AR QUANTITY (CFM) _ DZUSE`117 GAS HEATING OUTPUT (MBH) 135/206 78 38 67.5 /104 NOT T TO 50600 SCALE AR BLOWER H.P. OR KW 3 H.P. 1/2 H.P. 1/3 H.P. 2 H.P. RETURN AR REQUIRED MIN. OUTSIDE AIR CFM 1303 180 60 133 SEER COMP. H.P. OR KW 12.8 3.2 2.8 7.0 KW SHEET SHEET POWER SUPPLY (VOLTS-PHASE) 460 -3 460 -3 208/230 -1 460 -3 TRANSFER FAIN TWIG. ALTERS 2• TA Y TA 7 TA Y TA WAATT(S EXTERNAL S.P. (' OF W.C.) 0.60 0.60 0.60 0.60 APPROX. WEIGHT (LBS. - W /CURB) 2609 545 536 1460 OWE EQUIP. EER /IPLV /SEER 11.5/13.3/ - -- 9.2/ -- -/10.1 8.8/-- -/10.0 11.0/12.0/-- - URS GREINER 'INC. (kC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616-285-3500 , FAX 616-2 X3542 LENNOX MODEL NUMEF12 .: LGA180H (CS16- 413 -100 GCS16 -311 -50 LG41020 Drawing Title MAY 1 1 1998 M E C H A N I C AtRMIT CENTER SCHEDULES ACCESSORIES /OPTIONS FURNISHED BY OWNER (Y OR N) FACTORY INSTALLED ECONOMIZER TN /BAROMETRIC RELIEF. DIFFERENTIAL ENTHALPY CONTROL & OOIDOOR MI ,HOOD Y Y Y Y TWO POSITION DAMPER Y " FINISH: BARED OFF -WHITE ENAMEL (BRAE) ACCESSOR ES: VC- VOLUME CONTROL .. - PROVIDE LOUVER WITH PC- PATTERN CONTROL OPPOSED GLADE DAMPERS. Y ALTERNATE DRIVE' DRIVE 2 N N DRIVE 1 ALTERNATE MOTOR N N N N ROOF CURB Y Y Y Y BOTTOM POWER ENTRY KIT (IF AVAILABLE) T Y Y Y SMOKE DETECTORS SA /RA FACTORY INSTAL ED.• Y N N N DISCONNECT SWITCH (NON FUSED) FACTORY INSTALLED Y N N Y SERVICE OUTLETS (GFCI TYPE. FACTORY MOUNTED, FIELD WIRED BY ETC) N Y NOTES: 1. PERFORM TESTING MD EIPIMO42 MD SU0Pr REPORTS TO THE • = FIELD SUPPLIED DRIVE REQUIRED. MINER IN 6000 aWCE WIN SPECIE/CATON SECTION 150. •• OWNER SHALL PROVIDE FACTORY INSTALLED SMOKE DETECTORS IN THE 2. REFER TO ROOF FRAMING RAN FOR EXACT LOCATION OF SUPPLY MID RETURN AR DUCTS IN R7U -1 THRU RN -6 AND R1U -9 ROOF TOP 'NITS. 079002. TO SHUT DOWN THE EVAPORATOR BLOWER UPON ACTIVATION. HAC SHALL WYE SMOKE DETECTORS TO THE FIRE 01AF84 SYSTEM 3. PROVIDE PROPER DRIVE PACKAGE FOR LISTED CFM. (TROUBLE SIGNAL) POWER MAY BE 11671 THE COURTESY OUTLET OF THE RRU. Revisions No - -. -.,- Dote Descriptvm 03 20 98 05/05/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION -. - - -G - - - NEW GAS PINING CFM C.L.:. CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CENTERLINE' - -1 F- UNK114 COL DH COLUMN DOOR HEATER (AIR CURTAIN) 111 ORT LEG ± DIA., DIAMETER DSC. ON. DISCONNECT DOWN GAS COCK DOM. DWG. DOMESTIC DRAWING ---- -J DAMPER ER ff ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATA EXHAUST FAN ' / SUPPLY OR DIFFUSER ELC EMS ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ENERGY II0NAGEMENT SYSTEM BREAK NOON ENL EQUIP. ENLARGED EQUIPMENT I RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLE E%H. EN. FL EXHAUST FINISHED FLOOR 0 THERMOSTAT NRN. HAG F EATING O HEATING & AR C.D. CONTRACTOR 1 R' FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION T�Y-� HP. HORSE POWER f f1ETU EOI F4WST . OR / I HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING, AR COND. L' OKHS IOE Aft Dud INTEGRATED PART LOAD VALUE I DISCHARGE OR SUPPLY AR DUCT KW MBH YIN. KILOWATT(S) BNH MANUFACTURER MANU M�NIMINIMUM GTURER I i I S1 -125 �-- SUPPLY AR -AR QUANTITY (CFM) _ DZUSE`117 10N 624 -4--- DIFFUSER. SIZE (NECK /FRAME) DESKGUN. NJ.C. NOT CONTRACT TU8NING VANES - NUMBER OF VANES SHALL 8E N.T.S. NOT T TO 50600 SCALE AR BASED ON ACTUAL DUCT SIZE AND NOT ON SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS ON DRAWING. P 8.0 PIUM PLUM RETAINING BING CONTRACTOR DUCT SIZE DESIGNATION: SIZE IS SHEET METAL w RA HA REa'D. RETURN AR REQUIRED SIZE ALLOWANCE HAS BEEN MADE FOR INTERIOR INSULATION WHERE SPECIFIED. S A S TOP RO OW UN OF A T AIR FOLIIPMEM DESIGNA710N MARK SEER SEASONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO SP. STNS. Drawing References No Drawings SHEET SHEET 0 KEYED NOTES ON DRAWING SVC. T -STAT SERVICE THERMOSTAT /� \ REVISIONS AA TF TIP. TRANSFER FAIN TWIG. UH W/ UNIT HEATER WITH POINT OF CONNECTION w` VAV WAATT(S ANEMOSTAT / GC5 W.C. T EE:c:: Fp FIRE By1pER ~ -. n " :.. " �Ar 1 O 4 0%W r R1 CEIUNG 010105TAT / G05 ALUMINUM OWE BID DATE: - CADD NAME: MAD PROJECT NO u103I0 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY. PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION R2 URS GREINER 'INC. (kC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616-285-3500 , FAX 616-2 X3542 vv gy, .L Z rf ° 1 � 1 z d, y„ EX9Farer. 7 p 1050 L im__ ���� ,,,V l National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 - This drawing is the Exclusive Properly of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R' US. Location T U KW I LA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENT HEDENED (3F ruKWILA Drawing Title MAY 1 1 1998 M E C H A N I C AtRMIT CENTER SCHEDULES Scale AS NOTED 1 Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. V4a0A J FAN SCHEDULE (OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT) MECHANICAL SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND A.F.F. ABOVE F4ISHED FLOOR - - - 0 - - - EXISTING GAS PIPING APPROX. BLDG. APPROXIMATE KNOW -. - - -G - - - NEW GAS PINING CFM C.L.:. CUBIC FEET PER MINUTE CENTERLINE' - -1 F- UNK114 COL DH COLUMN DOOR HEATER (AIR CURTAIN) 111 ORT LEG ± DIA., DIAMETER DSC. ON. DISCONNECT DOWN GAS COCK DOM. DWG. DOMESTIC DRAWING ---- -J DAMPER ER ff ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATA EXHAUST FAN ' / SUPPLY OR DIFFUSER ELC EMS ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ENERGY II0NAGEMENT SYSTEM BREAK NOON ENL EQUIP. ENLARGED EQUIPMENT I RETURN OR EXHAUST GRILLE E%H. EN. FL EXHAUST FINISHED FLOOR 0 THERMOSTAT NRN. HAG F EATING O HEATING & AR C.D. CONTRACTOR 1 R' FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTION T�Y-� HP. HORSE POWER f f1ETU EOI F4WST . OR / I HVAC HEATING, VENTILATING, AR COND. L' OKHS IOE Aft Dud INTEGRATED PART LOAD VALUE I DISCHARGE OR SUPPLY AR DUCT KW MBH YIN. KILOWATT(S) BNH MANUFACTURER MANU M�NIMINIMUM GTURER I i I S1 -125 �-- SUPPLY AR -AR QUANTITY (CFM) _ DZUSE`117 10N 624 -4--- DIFFUSER. SIZE (NECK /FRAME) DESKGUN. NJ.C. NOT CONTRACT TU8NING VANES - NUMBER OF VANES SHALL 8E N.T.S. NOT T TO 50600 SCALE AR BASED ON ACTUAL DUCT SIZE AND NOT ON SCHEMATIC SYMBOLS ON DRAWING. P 8.0 PIUM PLUM RETAINING BING CONTRACTOR DUCT SIZE DESIGNATION: SIZE IS SHEET METAL w RA HA REa'D. RETURN AR REQUIRED SIZE ALLOWANCE HAS BEEN MADE FOR INTERIOR INSULATION WHERE SPECIFIED. S A S TOP RO OW UN OF A T AIR FOLIIPMEM DESIGNA710N MARK SEER SEASONAL ENERGY EFFICIENCY RATIO SP. STNS. STATIC PRESSURE SENSIBLE X SOT. SHEET SHEET 0 KEYED NOTES ON DRAWING SVC. T -STAT SERVICE THERMOSTAT /� \ REVISIONS AA TF TIP. TRANSFER FAIN TWIG. UH W/ UNIT HEATER WITH POINT OF CONNECTION w` VAV WAATT(S ANEMOSTAT / GC5 W.C. T EE:c:: Fp FIRE By1pER ~ -. n " :.. " �Ar 1 O 4 0%W r FAN SCHEDULE (OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT) MARK MANUFACTURES SIZE /MODEL C.F.M. S.P. IN W.C. FAN R.P.M. ELECTRICAL DATA DRIVE ACCESSORIES REMARKS LOCATION H.P. /w vats PHASE TF -I CREENHECK 650 -110 -4 700/1166 0.125 888/1480 1/4 H.P. 115 1 6 DSA .050.40.8 2 MUNE FOR SPEED) BREAK NOON TF -2 CREENHECK SP -127 405 0.050 1580 190 W 115 1 D DS,FSC CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT ROOM EF -I CREENHECK CB- 100 -4 -2A 910 0250 1248 1/4 H.P. 115 1 B DS.fODAP,PC,85 ROOF MID. TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES: DS - DISCONNECT SNITCH, 80 - BACKORAFT DAMPER. AP - ADJUSTABLE PULLET, PC - PREFAB CURB, BS - BIRDSCREEN, O5G - OUTLET SUPPLY GUARD, BG - BELT GUARD, VI - VIBRATION ISOLATORS, FSC - FAN SPEED CONTROLLER UNIT HEATER SCHEDULE MARK MANUFACTURER MODEL B T U H C.F.M. GAS CONN HP. ELECTRICAL DATA FLUE DIA WEIGHT (LBS.) ACCESSORIES LOCATION NOTES INPUT OUTPUT VOLTS PHASE HERTZ UH -I REZNOR F100 100,000 80.000 1250 I/2' 1/30 I 115 1 6 6 97 REFER SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 15D RECEIVING .2 DIFFUSER & GRILLE SCHEDULE MARK APPLICATION MANUFACTURER / MODEL MAT'L. FINISH ACCESSORIES REMARKS VC PC SI CEILING ANENOSTAT / DP STEEL BYIE % LAY -IN T -BAR 52 DUCT MOUNTED ANEMOSTAT / 5200 ALUMINUM BWE X X OPPOSED WOE DAMP. SEE DETAIL ON M2 53 CEILING ANEMOSTAT / OF STEEL BRAE X X SURFACE MOUNTED 54 SIDEWALL ANEMOSTAT / U ALUMINUM OWE % .. DRUM LOUVER 55 CEILING ANEMOSTAT / SLSD STEEL RWE X TAY -IN T -BAR El CEILING ANEMOSTAT /GCS' ALUMINUM BARE X TAY -IN T -BAR E2 CEILING ANEMOSTAT / S3HOD STEEL OWE X SURFACE MOUNTED 11 CEILING ANEMOSTAT / .5 ALUMINUM BW'E LAY -IN T -OAR TO SIDEWALL ANEMOSTAT / GC5 ALUMINUM ORE SURFACE MOUNTED R1 CEIUNG 010105TAT / G05 ALUMINUM OWE LAY -IN 1 -BAR R2 DUCT MOUNTED ANEMOSTAT / .5 ALUMINUM BRAE R3 CEILING ANEMOSTAT / GCS ALUMINUM ONE SURFACE MOUNTED FINISH: BARED OFF -WHITE ENAMEL (BRAE) ACCESSOR ES: VC- VOLUME CONTROL .. - PROVIDE LOUVER WITH PC- PATTERN CONTROL OPPOSED GLADE DAMPERS. RTU -1 THRU 6 SUPPLY & RETURN AIR DUCT AND GRILLE SPECIFICATIONS BRU SHALL PROVIDE AND HAC TO INSTALL, 1. SUPPLY DIFFUSER BOX, RETURN GRILLE AND SUPPLY AND RETURN AR DUCTS AS MANUFACTURED FOR TOYS 'R' US BY: ROOFTOP SYSTEMS, INC. 1811 TRINITY VALLEY CARROLLTON, TX 75006 -6510 TELEPHONE IS (214) 247 -7447 (800) 552 -4822 FAX / (214) 243 -0940 OR 2. DUCTS, DIFFUSER BOX AND GRILLE SHALL. BE OF SI ES AS RECOMMENDED BY MANUFACTURER FOR CFM AND RTU MODEL LISTED FOR RTU -1 THRU 6. SUPPLY DIFFUSER BOX STATIC PRESSURE SHALL NO EXCEED 0.45' FOR LISTEN CFA. 3. SEE OWNERS CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE FOR SELECTED VENDOR MICRO MER 3419 ROOSEVELT AVENUE INDIANAPOLIS, IN 46218 TELEPHONE IS (317) 543 -5980 (800) 662 -4822 FAX / (317) 543 -5986 NOTES: 1. PROVIDE OPTIONAL. DISCHARGE WITH VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL NR PATTERN VANES ON LOUVER. 2. PROVIDE UNIT WITH OPTIONAL UPPER -HALF SAFETY FAN GUARD. HEATING . &. SET POINTS UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY TOYS 'R US, THE FOLLOWING SET POINTS SHALL APPLY TO AL SYSTEMS: OCCUPIED COOL - 78 UNOCCUPIED COOL - 85 OCCUPIED HEAT - 68 UNOCCUPIED HEAT - 58 NOTE: THERMOSTATS FOR HEATING ONLY SHALL HAVE SET PONT RANGE OF 55F TO 75F & FOR HEATING & COOLING SHALL HAVE SET POINT RANGE OF 55F TO 85'F (ADJ.) TO PROVIDE A RANGE OF 1P BETWEEN FULL HEATING & FULL COOLING. ALL HEATING & COOLING THERMOSTATS SHALL BE DESIGNED TO TERMINATE ALL HEATING 0 681 & ALL COOUNO 0. 78'F. MAC EQUIPMENT SHALL COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODE. D15 w► KEYED NOTES (APPLICABLE TO DRAWINGS P1 THRU P3) ALL ABOVE GRADE PIPING SHNJ BE RUN CONCEALED WITHIN THE TOM AREA WHERE HUNG CEILING IS APPLIED. t= FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL BE HAND OPERATED AND SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE WIDE SIDE OF THE TOILET AREAS. M 3/4' VACUUM REUEF VALVE. SEE SP000CA5005 SECTION 15C. © TEMPERATURE /PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ram NO TRAP IN REUEF UNE. ROUTE REUEF UNE FULL SIZE, WITHOUT UPWARD OFFSET, FIGHT TO WALL AND EXPOSED IN THE JANITOR'S CLOSET TO FLOOR RECEPTOR (FR -1) AND TERMINATE AT Y ABOVE FLOOD LEVEL OF FR -1. ▪ SLOPE HORIZONTAL VENT PIPING FROM STACK AT I/4 PER FOOT. (MIN. AND TYPICAL) © OFFSET 4' STACK AT ROOF TO AVOID ROOF FRAMING. (IF REQUIRED.) 77 ALL HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE INSULATED WITH I" THICKNESS OF OWENS- CORNING HEAN DENSITY INSULATOR MTH ALL SERVICE JACKET. K = 0.25 AT 100 F MEAN. ED ABOVE GRADE DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING IN SALES, PRE -SALES, AND RECEIVING AREAS SHAT BE ROUTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE WITH ALLOWANCE FOR SLOPE AS REQUIRED. I= PROVIDE 20 X 20 X CO DEEP GALVANIZED SHEET METAL PAN UNDER NWH -1 WITH 1 1/4' DRAIN PIPE ROUTED TIGHT TO WALL AND EXPOSED IN JANITOR'S CLOSET TO FLOOR RECEPTOR (FR -1). TERMINATE IRAN PIPING AT Y ABOVE ROOD LEVEL OF FR -1. 10 I/Y C.W. DOWN INSIDE WALL STUB OUT OF WALL INTO BREAK ROOM AT 12 A.F.F. AND INSTALL I/2 CATE VALVE FOR VENDING MACHINES CONNECTON. COORDINATE EXACT. LOC- ATON WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 11 3/4 C.W. DOWN INSIDE WALL TO HOSE BIBB (HA -I). LOCATE HD -1 AT If BELOW BOTTOM OF ROOF DECK ADJACENT TO ROOF ACCESS LADDER PROVIDE AUXILIARY FRAMING AS RECD. TO SECURELY MOM H8 -1. NOTE: STORAGE RACKS ON 4 -FT. MODULE UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN. P0GB TO ROUGH -IN OF UNDER- GROUND SERVICES AND UTUTY RISERS, COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF RISERS WITH FIXTURE PLAN, DWG. F1, TO MINIMIZE REQUIRED OMMISION OF RACKS AND TO H0.0 RACKING MODULE WHERE RACKS MUST BE OMITTED FOR RISERS. (FOR EXAMPLE, RISER WITH TRIM. VALVES, MN0 ACCESSORIES 5HOVL0 NOT TAKE UP THE SPACE OF TWO RACKS IF REWIRED SPACE IS 4 -FT. OR LESS, AND SO ON.) CONTRACTORS SHAD. PROVIDE OFFSETS AS REQUIRED IF UNDERGROUND SERVICE IS NOT LOCATED PROPERLY OR IF PROVIDED BY DEVELOPER OR UTUTY COMPANY. NOTE: CONTRACTORS SHALL REFER TO THE RXTURINC PLAN, DRAWING FI, FOR COORDINATION OF ALL PIPING, EQUIPMENT, DUCTS, HAVING, AND SERVICE RISERS WITH THE OWNERS STORE FIXTUPNG. ALL SYSTEMS SHALL BE ROUTED AND /OR LOCATED AS REQUIRED TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH THE STORE FIXTURES, SHELVING, AND RACKING, INCLUDING THE FUNCTIONAL USE OF SAME. INSTALLATIONS MADE WITHOUT REGARD TO STORE FIXTUONG SHALL BE CORRECTED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. SPECIAL CONSIDERATION SHALL BE GIVEN TO THE ESTHETIC INTENT OF THE FRONT GRAPHICS WALL OF THE STORE AND TO THE STORAGE AND MATERIALS HANOUNG ASPECTS OF THE PRE -SAES AND RECEMNG DOCK AREAS. UTILITY NOTES: - CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY POINT OF CONNECTION TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE PRIOR TO COMMENCING INSTALLATION. - CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST LOCATION AND DEPTH OF BUILDING SERVICES AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE. - CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE FINAL CONNECTION TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE (UNLESS OTHER PROVISIONS HAVE BEEN MADE). - CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO PROPERLY C0000INATE SERVICES SHALL NOT BE JUSTIFICATION FOR ANY EXTRA CHARGES. MOTHERS ROOM MAIN FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1 /1C = 1 -0 PLAN NORTH No She Date 03/20/98 05/05/98 Location Drawings Description Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION SSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References BID DATE: - CADO NAME: PTO PROJECT NO M103040 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION' CHECKED BY: URS GREINER INC. (AC. 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616 -285 -3542 National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS *R' US. TUKWILA WA. PARKWAY ',SUPERCEFN o Drawing Title AY 1 1 1998 PLUMB I firCENTER FLOOR PLANS Scale Dote AS NOTED MAY 5. 1998 C A8 PLUMBING SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS LEGEND A.F.F. APPROX. BFP BLDG. C.L.; Q CODA COI. COWP C.W. DAy DN. DIM. DWG. ELC ELECT. EWC FD FIN. FL. FR GCC GPH GPM HAC HB HP H.W. HWH LAY MIN. MFR. MOD. / N.LC- N.T.S. OD OFL PBC PRESS. P.S.I.;PSI P.5.I.G.0SIG RD REO'D. RPZ M, SAN. SAT. SVC. M. TEMP. TEMP. TP 'P. UR V. RISER V.T.R.F. WC WN XT ABM FINISHED FLOOR APPROXIMATE BACHELOR PREVENTER BUILDING CEOTERUNE CLEANOUT DECKPLATE COLUMN CLEANOUT WALLPLATE COLD WATER DIAMETER DOWN DOMESTIC DRAWING ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR ELECTRICAL ELECTRIC WATER COOLER FLOOR ORAN FINISHED FLOOR FLOOR RECEPTOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTOR GALLONS PER HOUR GALLONS PER MINUTE HEARNG AND AR COND. CONTRACTOR HOSE BIBB HORSEPOWER HOT WATER HOT WATER HEATER LAVATORY MINIMUM MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER NOT IN CONTRACT NOT i0 SCALE OVERFLOW ROOF MN OVERFLOW RAINWATER LEADER PLUMBING CONTRACTOR PRESSURE POUNDS PER SNARE INCH POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH GAUGE ROOF DRAIN REQUIRED REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE BFP RAINWATER LEADER ' SANITARY SHEET SERVICE SWARM ARR TEMPERATURE TRAP PRIMER TYPICAL URINAL VENT RISER VENT THOU ROOF FLASHED WATER CLOSET WALL HYDRANT THER4AL EXPANSION TANK DEGREES FAHRENHEIT GATE VALVE OR SHUT -OFF VALVE CHECK VALVE GLOBE VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING /REGULATING VALVE (PRV) FLOOR DRAM WITH P -TRAP CLEANOUT DECKPIATE (COOP) CLEANOUT WALLPLATE (CORP) WALL HYDRANT /HOSE BIBB ROOF (MN WITH CLEAROUT UNION PIPE RISE PIPE DROP SPRINKLER RISER WATER METER POINT OF CONNECTION/ ELEVATION /INVERT CORD WATER PIPING HOT WATER PIPING HOT WATER RETURN PIPING RAINWATER LEADER (RWL) SOIL /SEWER /WASTE PIPWO PLUMBING FIXTURE OR EQUIPMENT MARK (DESIGNATION FOR SPEORCATON OR MARK FOR SCHEDULE ON DRAWING) NOTES ON DRAWING REVISIONS >11 D.1 — ______I F (P) ll I F— - I -D ® ® -0- — — — — — _ RYA. — — — — 0 ,AR KEYED NOTES (APPLICABLE TO DRAWINGS P1 THRU P3) ALL ABOVE GRADE PIPING SHNJ BE RUN CONCEALED WITHIN THE TOM AREA WHERE HUNG CEILING IS APPLIED. t= FLUSH CONTROLS SHALL BE HAND OPERATED AND SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE WIDE SIDE OF THE TOILET AREAS. M 3/4' VACUUM REUEF VALVE. SEE SP000CA5005 SECTION 15C. © TEMPERATURE /PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE ram NO TRAP IN REUEF UNE. ROUTE REUEF UNE FULL SIZE, WITHOUT UPWARD OFFSET, FIGHT TO WALL AND EXPOSED IN THE JANITOR'S CLOSET TO FLOOR RECEPTOR (FR -1) AND TERMINATE AT Y ABOVE FLOOD LEVEL OF FR -1. ▪ SLOPE HORIZONTAL VENT PIPING FROM STACK AT I/4 PER FOOT. (MIN. AND TYPICAL) © OFFSET 4' STACK AT ROOF TO AVOID ROOF FRAMING. (IF REQUIRED.) 77 ALL HOT AND COLD WATER PIPING SHALL BE INSULATED WITH I" THICKNESS OF OWENS- CORNING HEAN DENSITY INSULATOR MTH ALL SERVICE JACKET. K = 0.25 AT 100 F MEAN. ED ABOVE GRADE DOMESTIC COLD WATER PIPING IN SALES, PRE -SALES, AND RECEIVING AREAS SHAT BE ROUTED AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE WITH ALLOWANCE FOR SLOPE AS REQUIRED. I= PROVIDE 20 X 20 X CO DEEP GALVANIZED SHEET METAL PAN UNDER NWH -1 WITH 1 1/4' DRAIN PIPE ROUTED TIGHT TO WALL AND EXPOSED IN JANITOR'S CLOSET TO FLOOR RECEPTOR (FR -1). TERMINATE IRAN PIPING AT Y ABOVE ROOD LEVEL OF FR -1. 10 I/Y C.W. DOWN INSIDE WALL STUB OUT OF WALL INTO BREAK ROOM AT 12 A.F.F. AND INSTALL I/2 CATE VALVE FOR VENDING MACHINES CONNECTON. COORDINATE EXACT. LOC- ATON WITH OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. 11 3/4 C.W. DOWN INSIDE WALL TO HOSE BIBB (HA -I). LOCATE HD -1 AT If BELOW BOTTOM OF ROOF DECK ADJACENT TO ROOF ACCESS LADDER PROVIDE AUXILIARY FRAMING AS RECD. TO SECURELY MOM H8 -1. NOTE: STORAGE RACKS ON 4 -FT. MODULE UNLESS OTHERWISE SHOWN. P0GB TO ROUGH -IN OF UNDER- GROUND SERVICES AND UTUTY RISERS, COORDINATE LOCATIONS OF RISERS WITH FIXTURE PLAN, DWG. F1, TO MINIMIZE REQUIRED OMMISION OF RACKS AND TO H0.0 RACKING MODULE WHERE RACKS MUST BE OMITTED FOR RISERS. (FOR EXAMPLE, RISER WITH TRIM. VALVES, MN0 ACCESSORIES 5HOVL0 NOT TAKE UP THE SPACE OF TWO RACKS IF REWIRED SPACE IS 4 -FT. OR LESS, AND SO ON.) CONTRACTORS SHAD. PROVIDE OFFSETS AS REQUIRED IF UNDERGROUND SERVICE IS NOT LOCATED PROPERLY OR IF PROVIDED BY DEVELOPER OR UTUTY COMPANY. NOTE: CONTRACTORS SHALL REFER TO THE RXTURINC PLAN, DRAWING FI, FOR COORDINATION OF ALL PIPING, EQUIPMENT, DUCTS, HAVING, AND SERVICE RISERS WITH THE OWNERS STORE FIXTUPNG. ALL SYSTEMS SHALL BE ROUTED AND /OR LOCATED AS REQUIRED TO AVOID INTERFERENCE WITH THE STORE FIXTURES, SHELVING, AND RACKING, INCLUDING THE FUNCTIONAL USE OF SAME. INSTALLATIONS MADE WITHOUT REGARD TO STORE FIXTUONG SHALL BE CORRECTED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. SPECIAL CONSIDERATION SHALL BE GIVEN TO THE ESTHETIC INTENT OF THE FRONT GRAPHICS WALL OF THE STORE AND TO THE STORAGE AND MATERIALS HANOUNG ASPECTS OF THE PRE -SAES AND RECEMNG DOCK AREAS. UTILITY NOTES: - CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY POINT OF CONNECTION TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE PRIOR TO COMMENCING INSTALLATION. - CONTRACTOR SHALL ADJUST LOCATION AND DEPTH OF BUILDING SERVICES AS REQUIRED TO CONNECT TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE. - CONTRACTOR SHALL MAKE FINAL CONNECTION TO SITE UTILITY SERVICE (UNLESS OTHER PROVISIONS HAVE BEEN MADE). - CONTRACTOR'S FAILURE TO PROPERLY C0000INATE SERVICES SHALL NOT BE JUSTIFICATION FOR ANY EXTRA CHARGES. MOTHERS ROOM MAIN FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1 /1C = 1 -0 PLAN NORTH No She Date 03/20/98 05/05/98 Location Drawings Description Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION SSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References BID DATE: - CADO NAME: PTO PROJECT NO M103040 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION' CHECKED BY: URS GREINER INC. (AC. 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 -3500 FAX 616 -285 -3542 National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS *R' US. TUKWILA WA. PARKWAY ',SUPERCEFN o Drawing Title AY 1 1 1998 PLUMB I firCENTER FLOOR PLANS Scale Dote AS NOTED MAY 5. 1998 C A8 BREAK ROOM I 112 I 1/Y C.W. O INSIDE WALL 3/4 TRAINING ROOM I/2 C.N. Oh - I: ....,.. INSIDE WALL. ,L,.J 3/4' H. A G,W. ON. INSIDE WN0 3/4 3/4 -f— _ _ — _ _ 1. I i I/2' H. a c.w. JANITOR} ON INSIDE WALL. I 1 I 3/4' H. A, C.W..' ' ON INSIDE `WALE- —1 I • NOTE: REFEP. TO WATER RRNG DHGRAM THIS SHEET. NOTE: I I NOTE: INSULATE AU. RPING BELOW H. S C.W. PINNG TO FR -1 FAUCET LAVATORY COUNTERS. SHALL CONcEALE0 IN WALL TOILET AREA WATER PIPING PLAN SCALE: T /8' = 1' -0 MOTHERS ROOM (TIP.) Y C.W. SUPPLY. REFER MAIN FLOOR PLAN SHE P -1 FOR CONTINUATION. MEN WOMEN I 09 l PLAN NORT) CHID) INSIDE. CHASE V. RISER V.T.R.F. r J v DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING DIAGRAM SCALE: NONE 3/4 - arc UNE „ Y IZ1 I NOTE: REFER TO DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPING DIAGRAM THIS SHEET. NOTE: SLOPE ALL T AND 4 SAN. SEWER PIPING BELOW FLOOR AT 2W N. SLOPE ALL EE SW. SEWER PIPING BELOW FLOOR AT 1% N. NOTE: PBC SHALL FILL FLOOR GRAN P -IPM WITH WATER UPON COMPLETION OF ALL WORN AND TESTING. (TYPICAL ALL FLOOR OWNS) qqO/55 7REVENT JANITOR SCALE: I /8" 6 W7. SEWER. SLOPE AT 1% NK EXTETWOR OF RLOG. REFER TO SITE COORDINATION IWG. 3 /4 3/4' �- 1 1/4 DRALN FROM SAFE .- PAN. v v FULL SRE ADA I' TEMP. @ ROUTE ORAN RPM EXPOSED W PRESS. EEL TIGHT TO WALL IN JAL CLO. TER- LINE. MNATE AT Y ABOVE FLOOD LEVEL OF FR -1. WATER PIPING DIAGRAM SCALE: NONE MOTHERS TRAINING \ ROOM ROOM TOILET AREA DRAIN, WAIST AND VENT PIPING PLAN �AMTROL ST -12 1 /2• � HIT - I f NR CHAMBER I 3/4' NOTE: METER N BACKFLOW SHALL MEET LOCAL AUTHORMES SPECIFICATIONS. 4' WALL C.O. WITH C VENT UP BOOR UNE NORTH 2 NEW 1 1/7 DON. WATER METER AND BVCKFLOW PREVENTER IN SEPERATE VAULTS BY CIVIL SEE CIVIL OWLS. FOR MORE INFO AND LOCATION PROVIDE CRAP BELOW EWC PROVIDE COWP BELOW SINK 4 V. RISER 4 V.TRF. WOMEN 109 MEN SEE OETAL THIS.. SHEET FOR PRV AND HOUSE VALVE SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL 'L IIRE9 No Date 03/20/98 05/05/98 Scale Drawings Description AS NOTED Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References BID DATE: - CADD NAME: POD PROJECT NO• M103040 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION CHECKED BY URS GREINER INC. (A.C,) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616- 285 - 3500 FAX 61 National Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R' US. COORDINATION Sheet No. -3542 I Date MAY 5, 1998 2 Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENWN Drawing Title MAY71 1 1998 PLBG . SHCEC AND DETAILS P2.0A. PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER WATER CLOSET AND URINAL ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES BOWL TYPE OUTLET FLUSH VALVE SEAT CARRIER WC I AMERICAN STANDARD 2234.015 FLED' MOUNTED ELONGATED SIPHON-JET BOTTOM 171 BENEKE 523 2 e AMERICAN STANDARD 3 STA2 FLR. MOUNTED ELONGATED SIPHON -JET BOTTOM SLOW 117 BENEKE 523 INSTAL PER ADA REOUIREAIENfS. FLUSH VALVE HEIGHT SHALL BE DECREASED AS REQUIRED TO AVOID WAND RAIL CONFLICT. ® MY NOT USED ® WY AMERICAN STANDARD 6541.132 WALL-HUNG WASH OUT BALM( SLOW 786 -1 JOSAAI 17810 INSTALL PER ADA REQUIREMENTS. FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER LAVATORY /SINK ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES BOWL TYPE FAUCET SUPPLY PIPE TRAP A& v INERICAN STANDARD 0496.011 19X17 CHINA AMER STD. 2385.002 FLEX WITH ANGLE STOP CHROME X55 FAUCETS WITH LEVER TYPE HANDLE, 0.5 GPM AERATOR k ABLE HOT UNIT SAFETY STOP SET AT 100 F. F. INSTALL PER ADA REQ'S. AMERICAN STANDARD 7024.803 25%22X9 ENAM. CAST IRON AVER SIT. 6270.142H FLEX WITH ANGLE STOP CHROME PAS FAUCET WITH LEVER TYPE HANDLE AND 0.5 GPM AERATOR. FLOOR RECEPTG2 ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES FIXTURE MARK MANUF,TURER SERIES NUMBER BASIN TYPE FAUCET TRAP AM VW POWERS -FLAT SB -6 24X36 PRECAST TERRAllO AMER STD. 8340.242 CAST IRON REMOVABLE CHROME PLATED BRASS STRAINER PLATE. FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER FLOOR DRAIN /STRAINER nr^CESSOPoES AND FEATURES NATERLAL TYPE SIZE FREE AREA MATERIAL AM v JOSNA 30003 -64 CASs IRON AN 5W 11 SO. IN. POLISHED BRONZE TWO PIECE BODY, DOUBLE OFANACE FLANGE, WEEP HOLES WITH DEEP SEAL P -TRAP. FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 - 616- 285 -3500 FAX 6 .- 285 -3542 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES CPL GENDITI TYPE / ELEMENTS WATTS VOLTS/0 .. A0. MY SMITH EUF -20 20 ELECTRIC i 2500 ., 20 8/1 MOUNT ON SHELF PER DETAIL THIS SHEET WHERE SHOWN. SET TEMP. CONTROL AT 110 F. PROVIDE WATTS MODEL 1100XL TEMP. /PRESS. RELIEF .VALVE. ,. FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER ELECT. WATER COOLER ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES CAPACITY VOLTS HP FINISH C) HALSEY TAYLOR HACB -BL (SUPPLIED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY PBC) 8 GALL 120 1/5 STANDARD RI- LEVEL COOLER. INSTALL PER ADA REQUIREMENTS. REFER BI -LEVEL ELECTRI: WATER COOLER ELEVATIONS AND ROUGH -IN DETAL THIS SHEET. FIXTURE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER HOSE BIBB ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES BODY HANDWHEEL HOSE END CONNECTION WEIGHT Mr v WATTS SET -4 CAST BRASS CAST IRON 3/4' I.P ' ECU ' PATTERN I /2LBS. PROVIDE WITH TAMPER PROOF VACUUM BREAKER. FIxTLIRE MARK MANUFACTURER SERIES NUMBER ROOF DRAIN ACCESSORIES AND FEATURES BODY MATERIAL DOME MATERIAL SQL DONE FREE AREA WEIGHT AM JAY R. SMITH 1015 CAST IRON PoLY. AS NOTED 102.5 50. IN. VARIES UNDEROECK CLAMP ASSEMBLY k SUMPRECEfvER. e JAY R. SMITH 1080 CAST IRON POLY. AS NOTED 102.5 SO. IN. VARIES UNDERDECK GIMP ASSEMBLY. SUMP RECEIVER AND EXTENSION NOTES: 1. ALL NOTED FIXTURES SHAT BE ACCESSIBLE TO INDIVIDUALS WITH DISABIUTIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 'AMERICANS WITH DISABILITIES ACT OF 1990'. FIXTURES N4D THEIR INSTALLATION SHALL ALSO COMPLY MTH AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) PUBUCAPON Al17.1 - "PROVIDING ACCESSIBILITY AND USABIUIY FOR PHYSICALLY WWOICAPPED PEOPLE' AND /OR GOVERNING CODE. 2. ALL PLUMBING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, TRIM, AND MTTINGS SHALL COMPLY WITH LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL REGULATIONS AND CODES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT UNITED TO, WATER AND ENERGY CONSERVATION CODES. THE SCHEDULED AND /OR SPECIFIED PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT REPRESENT THE MINIMUM CRITERIA AND SHALL BE THE BASIS FOR THE CONTRACTOR'S BASE BID. IF THE SCHEDULED OR SPECTRE° FIXTURES OR EQUIPMENT DO NOT COMPLY WITH GOVERNING CODES OR REGULATORS IN ALL RESPECTS, THE CONTRACTOR SHAT PROVIDE AN ALTERNATE BID FOR COMPLYING FIXTURES, EQUIPMENT, TRIM, OR FITTINGS. THE ABSENCE OF AN ALTERNATE BID SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO MEAN THAT THE CONTRACTOR'S BID INCLUDES ALL COSTS NECESSARY TO MEET ALL REGULATIONS AND CODES. Revisions No ® 03/20/98 Dole Description PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References N o Drawings BID DATE: — CADD NAME: P30 PROJECT NO• Y103040 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 - 616- 285 -3500 FAX 6 .- 285 -3542 A rr ; ' ilp�'� . ,.� ZP PP� W Al 1, ,• ' 11.12J71T3_l1MF>♦ilJN Notional Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without perrnissian of TOYS 'R' US. Location T U K W I LA, WE PARKWAY SUPERCEdT RFTUKwILA Drawing Title PLBG . SCHTD'T AND DETAILS Scale AS NOTED Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. P CONNECT TO EXISTING DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM. FOR CONTINUATION SEE PANS S.0 V. TYPICAL REOUCING VALVE N'ATT� IU5B -GG -1 I/7 WITH INTEGRAL STRAINER, THREADED UNIDIN INLET THREADED OUTLET, BUILT -IN THERM. EXPANSION BYPASS. 160 P.S.I. GAUGE, 65 P.S.I. SETTING. 7 DON. WATER SERVICE SEE PLAN WATER METER BY J CONTRACTOR IN- STALED BY CONTR. 7 CONCENTRIC INCREASER 1 1/2 x7 TYPICAL PRV PIPING DIAGRAM SCALE: NONE PRESSURE GAUGE (FURNISHED W/ PRY) FULL SIZE VALVED BYPASS NORMALLY CLOSED NOTE: SECURE PIPING TO WALL WITH UNISTRUT AND PIPE CLAMPS 3U O.C. OR AS REWIRED COORDINATE A FIELD ORIENT ALL RANG SO AS NOT TO INTEFERE WITH SPRINKLER PIPING AND /OR ASSOCIATED DEVICES. 6' (MIN.) AFT. 1 1/7 X 1 T/7 X 1/0 AL- WELDED STEP. NIGHT MOUNTING SHELF PRIMED IN PAINTED WRITE GLOSS ENAMEL SECURELY ANCHOR TO WALL STUDS W/MN. OF FOUR (4) 1 /4W STEEL FASTENES. WATER HEATER MOUNTING SHELF DETAIL NO SCALE NOTES: 1. REFER TO ARCH. OWES. FOR REWIRED SUPPORT FRAMING. 2. ROUGH -IN DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE BY HALSEY TAYLOR WITHOUT NOTIFICATION. CONTRACTORS RELYING ON ROUGH -IN DIMENSIONS SHOWN W1THOUT VERIFICATION FROM MANUFACTURER'S DATA SHALL 00 50. AT THEIR OWN RISK AND TO DO SO WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED JUST CAUSE FOR ADDITIONAL COMPENSATOR. BI -LEVEL ELECTRIC WATER COOLER ELEVATIONS AND ROUGH -IN DETAIL NO SCALE 1qq 0 155 Revisions No Dote Description t CAP EXISTING TEE 1 ' 1 4 # -* 3E 4 4'4"-x * 4' AE l ?k # 3E -- 3E 3E -X- 3E X- # # -F- °A( # ?A- h E 3E - A - # 3 -fA ›( # hE * ■ I* 4d # 4(-* 1 4/ I Vt hE I 4(+E # # h4 -3f E- h( �E 9E* 4 A A - 0 - Ah # ( 4( --x 4E I `^,k - - -x Z4- 44 4 4'4 - o4 1 0 - 4() I t f -X- #VET- )� )E .}E E # -WE 4 A 4K-A( � 4 3E -E xl - )ES 34 3E - .3K I # # - 3F )E 3E 3E AE # hE -3LE � ,}F-hE# #3E -- #h+-X .._...k. -v I hE 4E 3 E 3E # # -6( X- # hE h 4E AA AE * # �E �( x_.,,_.,, SD ...........4 h4VfVE-hE 4 3E h 4A h hE -X- hE # i # -3E -3 h(+ '91 I 1D ..._),._,4_,..._,E,_....0 1 . # 4E -X-X¢- 4E #- X- )44EV --X-X- i Vt -E # 4.(-)K-4-70E- # )4 -X - )**(-)E-Is( # )E 3E 3E - - # 3 , -A(' 0 # # �E # -X- hE hE -AA- h4 hE -�( hE hE - -3f T3A I * # # -A # hE -Inf- 3E 3E... ( hE 3E h4 h4 * A AE # # 4;. hE- 3Aref- hf # - 3E ) # # x # hE * h A hE 3E E hA # - �C...., 4f 4E* �E 4& -X- # -X VIE- )� )FW. hE # E- )E hA EhE -X-X � -X- )E 3E +)E3EH # -3E - AE3E -E,- -X 1 I # )E )E� )ESE- ) )E *4 .E - *X �E-(, i. '3E 44 hA(Ahhhhi 41(' h4 4E,-* hE hf - - Af 4( -)E )E AE -E -X -3#- 4E 1 '3E -E hf h4 -AE # 44-+ h( hE 4E -* )4 E-X- 4- )43#- hE hE -X- # hE -XhE -X-3K # 3E -3E )E 4 “E -art- )E # E-)E -A( ) 4( 3i -)4Af- j E )E -3#- #4E -HE -)C-x 1 1 2 1 0 4 # * 3E 3E - 3E hV - * 3E �f -X- *-4E # -3K- 3E 3E -WE # 3E AE 34 hE -Art- ”( f- h # -* # )E -- # 3E -x X- # h4 -* t-- ,)E 44 ÷E +A 4 W - # N 4( �E -3E -3E '3f # .4 hE hE * # hE hE hE -AE hA hE 4 4 -4 -* hE hE # 4 hE VA -* 4( 41 E )E -3E •XE• 3E� -)EK- �E )E -2K- 3E � X-X-fit - F VE -#E- + )F 44 # -3eE )E hE E- )E—X * - 34 VE-X- 3Ej- )f3 # # -f # h4 ?(-AE ., c — f 2 9 4 ' -x * 4 VI-* r * )* # # 3E 3E - 3LE # 3F - AE # h E - 3- 1 - # #.-X 3E 3E -F )E 3E -X S # hE 4, - W-* hE 4 i7E 4'4 o-. E 7 Y,* kE h E hE hE -- hE # 44 VE -Art- h 9 1 1I h4 -?K- h A E'.K- h4 hE -31( # 4E-* h4 -) ')I( - hDE 4424< X24- h4 4 -X- �E' �E 12-3 ( I., )E -X -#E- 3(¢-)EhTE- # hE -XE )4 hE #X- )E--3K I. -0- )E +)E # )E -#E )E hE )E-X -X 1 - +4t: L(}- I F - 4E )E �eE # 3E - - # 4E -X AE# # -AE t. * hE # E 34 3E #.4E -JK * 4E hE -* - # hE - - 3E )E * 4E -X x-4 # - - 3E 44 A hE. hE # ( hf hE -AF 1 4 34 # -3rc h h (-- h hE 4 4f hE h( he "3K hE hE h4 -AF- hE # 4E .3E - Art - hE h@ 4 — ._# VE Vf- 3E}- )EX- # h4 -X- # AA EhE -x-X1 Vf -3Df- A-)E? h E )E - 3E .E -?FF4E -E—x E 4E -3E -x- X� )E hE 4E ,c- )E hA' E-3E -X - # 4E-J*3E3E-3gE- #4E8C X- #hf- 3K-9EhF-*hEhE-)8hE *- # # - * ) ) . - 0 - ) - X- 4E hE - # # 3E # hh VA ) K - - - * #-+ 4Ehf-2K- hE # hf hE -- # # 4 34 hf hE h(-§- 44 - 3 hf -AE hE h4 i X- hE '# -3K- 4E 4E _ -3K- 4EhE-3 )OE hE)E- 32E4E-3E-*4E -)C-X # 3( -0— )E - )f9 hE 4 - 4E -x -x-- E - 3E--(1 -* #VET )(¢ -> e* E- h(44E C I ,- )E hE .E -34 hE -- hE . 4 .,,,,_,8,4, )E . X-.... F hE � h4 -E AE hE - - # # -( X- h4 -X hE ......_4_,..._._...._x_., # hE )E¢-)4X- # # h(- X- 7E —�( -3EE 4.E44-3.(-->f )En(- # h.E -- )4 hf Eh<-hE --A(1 1 : 4 hE -)K- hE hE -- h( # -11( hE 4E-X- hE 4 I h( .....4 X- hF 4( - h( hE -X- h (AE Vrt- hE hE X- 44 hE -X- 44 �A 4 _ -XE # hE + )EX- hE # # # 4( VE -X-X -arc 4E Vf -X- )4¢- )E # # 4K- 3E hE #4E C—X 4 -X- 34 -X- )43*- '( )E 3E 3E - *E-4E Draw References No Drawings I } 1 I I I BID DATE: 05 D D TE /� / CADD NAME: 6277602 PROJECT NO • 62776 -0 L ill, DRAWN BY: JJC CHECKED BY: DJB PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: RENO CODE CONSULTANTS INCORPORATED F ]6a IRE OFFI TION NAr CONSSU17E ULTANTS TEC PARK 4a III PHONE U (i4 LI THE SEAL AND SIGNATURE APPLY ONLY TO THE DOCUMENT TO WHICH THEY ARE AFFIXED, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL OTHER PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, ESTIMATES, REPORTS OR OTHER DOCUMENTS OR INSTRUMENTS RELATING TO OR INTENDED TO BE USED FOR ANY PART OR PARTS OF THE ARCHITECTURAL OR ENGINEERING PROJECT. I I'- PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: 71 DAVID J. BURKHART 314- 991 -CODE �./ v - ✓\ • - _\� ,. , c., a � _J I Notional Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7600 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS W US. The information shown moy not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R" US. Location TUKWILA WA RECEIVED CI'i'YCFTUKWIP.A Drawing Title MAY I 1 1998 AUTOMATIC SPRIG DEMOLITION PLAN Scale AS NOTED Dote 05/01/98 Sheet No. A F P 1 R 165 1 - I T _ T 55' -0' t CAP EXISTING TEE 1 ' 1 4 # -* 3E 4 4'4"-x * 4' AE l ?k # 3E -- 3E 3E -X- 3E X- # # -F- °A( # ?A- h E 3E - A - # 3 -fA ›( # hE * ■ I* 4d # 4(-* 1 4/ I Vt hE I 4(+E # # h4 -3f E- h( �E 9E* 4 A A - 0 - Ah # ( 4( --x 4E I `^,k - - -x Z4- 44 4 4'4 - o4 1 0 - 4() I t f -X- #VET- )� )E .}E E # -WE 4 A 4K-A( � 4 3E -E xl - )ES 34 3E - .3K I # # - 3F )E 3E 3E AE # hE -3LE � ,}F-hE# #3E -- #h+-X .._...k. -v I hE 4E 3 E 3E # # -6( X- # hE h 4E AA AE * # �E �( x_.,,_.,, SD ...........4 h4VfVE-hE 4 3E h 4A h hE -X- hE # i # -3E -3 h(+ '91 I 1D ..._),._,4_,..._,E,_....0 1 . # 4E -X-X¢- 4E #- X- )44EV --X-X- i Vt -E # 4.(-)K-4-70E- # )4 -X - )**(-)E-Is( # )E 3E 3E - - # 3 , -A(' 0 # # �E # -X- hE hE -AA- h4 hE -�( hE hE - -3f T3A I * # # -A # hE -Inf- 3E 3E... ( hE 3E h4 h4 * A AE # # 4;. hE- 3Aref- hf # - 3E ) # # x # hE * h A hE 3E E hA # - �C...., 4f 4E* �E 4& -X- # -X VIE- )� )FW. hE # E- )E hA EhE -X-X � -X- )E 3E +)E3EH # -3E - AE3E -E,- -X 1 I # )E )E� )ESE- ) )E *4 .E - *X �E-(, # # - X. 3E - )E 3E -X *4E hE .3.E# -X- 3E 3F - 3E 4E -X Art- E. h4 -AE # .E -3K- 34 3E - # 3E -3e( X- )E h4 -X- '3E 44 hA(Ahhhhi 41(' h4 4E,-* hE hf - - Af 4( -)E )E AE -E -X -3#- 4E 1 '3E -E hf h4 -AE # 44-+ h( hE 4E -* )4 E-X- 4- )43#- hE hE -X- # hE -XhE -X-3K # 3E -3E )E 4 “E -art- )E # E-)E -A( ) 4( 3i -)4Af- j E )E -3#- #4E -HE -)C-x 1 1 2 1 0 4 # * 3E 3E - 3E hV - * 3E �f -X- *-4E # -3K- 3E 3E -WE # 3E AE 34 hE -Art- ”( f- h # -* # )E -- # 3E -x X- # h4 -* t-- ,)E 44 ÷E +A 4 W - # N 4( �E -3E -3E '3f # .4 hE hE * # hE hE hE -AE hA hE 4 4 -4 -* hE hE # 4 hE VA -* 4( 41 E )E -3E •XE• 3E� -)EK- �E )E -2K- 3E � X-X-fit - F VE -#E- + )F 44 # -3eE )E hE E- )E—X * - 34 VE-X- 3Ej- )f3 # # -f # h4 ?(-AE ., c — f 2 9 4 ' -x * 4 VI-* r * )* # # 3E 3E - 3LE # 3F - AE # h E - 3- 1 - # #.-X 3E 3E -F )E 3E -X S # hE 4, - W-* hE 4 i7E 4'4 o-. E 7 Y,* kE h E hE hE -- hE # 44 VE -Art- h 9 1 1I h4 -?K- h A E'.K- h4 hE -31( # 4E-* h4 -) ')I( - hDE 4424< X24- h4 4 -X- �E' �E 12-3 ( I., )E -X -#E- 3(¢-)EhTE- # hE -XE )4 hE #X- )E--3K I. -0- )E +)E # )E -#E )E hE )E-X -X 1 - +4t: L(}- I F - 4E )E �eE # 3E - - # 4E -X AE# # -AE t. * hE # E 34 3E #.4E -JK * 4E hE -* - # hE - - 3E )E * 4E -X x-4 # - - 3E 44 A hE. hE # ( hf hE -AF 1 4 34 # -3rc h h (-- h hE 4 4f hE h( he "3K hE hE h4 -AF- hE # 4E .3E - Art - hE h@ 4 — ._# VE Vf- 3E}- )EX- # h4 -X- # AA EhE -x-X1 Vf -3Df- A-)E? h E )E - 3E .E -?FF4E -E—x E 4E -3E -x- X� )E hE 4E ,c- )E hA' E-3E -X - # 4E-J*3E3E-3gE- #4E8C X- #hf- 3K-9EhF-*hEhE-)8hE *- # # - * ) ) . - 0 - ) - X- 4E hE - # # 3E # hh VA ) K - - - * #-+ 4Ehf-2K- hE # hf hE -- # # 4 34 hf hE h(-§- 44 - 3 hf -AE hE h4 i X- hE '# -3K- 4E 4E _ -3K- 4EhE-3 )OE hE)E- 32E4E-3E-*4E -)C-X # 3( -0— )E - )f9 hE 4 - 4E -x -x-- E - 3E--(1 -* #VET )(¢ -> e* E- h(44E C ' # # 3 F 3E -o- # 4E -X AF # hE .. # # * hV )E -AE # # AV ....-x-,...-,,,,.....4 hE f # # -Art- 3E 3E .- )E # -. ._ # hE -.- 4- )E hE .E -34 hE -- hE . 4 .,,,,_,8,4, )E . X-.... F hE � h4 -E AE hE - - # # -( X- h4 -X hE ......_4_,..._._...._x_., # hE )E¢-)4X- # # h(- X- 7E —�( -3EE 4.E44-3.(-->f )En(- # h.E -- )4 hf Eh<-hE --A(1 - — # # - 3E 3E # 3F - X X- 4E hE ( I hE )E )E )E -f* # h4 -3K WC-).-2N- hE # - 3E 3E -?3 - 4E )E - X * 34, 4E .. : 4 hE -)K- hE hE -- h( # -11( hE 4E-X- hE 4 I h( .....4 X- hF 4( - h( hE -X- h (AE Vrt- hE hE X- 44 hE -X- 44 �A 4 _ -XE # hE + )EX- hE # # # 4( VE -X-X -arc 4E Vf -X- )4¢- )E # # 4K- 3E hE #4E C—X 4 -X- 34 -X- )43*- '( )E 3E 3E - *E-4E TO NEW SPRINKLER RISER SEE DEVELOPERS DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS e lk AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1' -0" FIN. FLOOR ELEV. = 100' -0" Di GENERAL NOTES PROVIDE ALL NECESSARY OFFSETS, RAISES OR DROPS IN PIPING AND 00000RY DRAINS REQUIRED BY BUILDING CONDITIONS. 2. EXAMINE THE JOB CONDITIONS AND METED ALL MEASUREMENTS, DISTANCES, ELEVATIONS, CLEARANCES ETC. 3. ARCHITECTURAL, AND ELECTRICAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION IS SHOWN FOR COORDINARON PURPOSES MIL REFER TO THE PROPER DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCAPCNS SIZES AND QUANTITIES OF OTHER TRADED WORK. 4. IT IS UNDERSTOOD, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, THAT THE PIPE SIZES AS SHOWN ON THE BID DOCUMENTS MIL BE USED. 5. THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS HAVE BEEN PREPARED USING AUTOCAD. THE DRAWINGS ARE IOTA CAD. THE HYDRAUUC CALCULATIONS HAVE BEEN PREPARED USING HASS. THESE DOCUMENTS WILL BE MADE AVAILABLE TO THE SUCCESSFUL AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IN EITHER THE FORM OF DISKETTE OR HARD COPY. RANGER NOTES 1. 6 -IN01 AND LARGER PIPES RUNNING PARALLEL TO PURUNS STALL BE HUNG FROM TRAPEZE HANGERS SUPPORTED NEARLY EQUALLY BY TWO FORUNS. 2. ONLY ONE PIPE SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM A SINGLE TRAPEZE HANGER UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. 3. HANGERS MTH MORE THAN 150 POUNDS OF LOAD SHOULD BE ATTACHED TO THE PURUN AT A PANEL POINT. 4. COORDINATE ALL HANGER TYPES AND LOCATIONS 00TH THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. TYPICAL SPRINKLER LOCATIONS SPRINKLER (TAP.) 3 RADIUS TOLERANCE. (TOP.) NOTE: SPRINKLERS SHALL BE POSITIONED AS SHORN M/H A Y TOLERANCE. HOWEVER, SHOULD ANY PART OF THE TOLERANCE BE USED, THEN ALL THE SPRINKLERS IN THE ROW SHALL BE OFFSET BY THE SAME DISTANCE IN THE SAME DIRECTION. SYMBOL KEY c EXISTING. SPRINKLER TO REMAIN EXISTING SPRINKLER TO BE REMOVED EXISTING PIPE TO REMAIN 0050NG PIPE TO BE REMOVED Revisions ion IDt Drawing References No Drawings BID DATE: 05/81/98 CADD NAME: 6277602 PROJECT NO.: 62776 -0 > DRAWN BY: JJK CHECKED BY: O. PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION' RENO CODE CONSULTANTS - INCORPORATED FIRE PROTECTION CONSULTANTS 760 OFFICE PARKWAY SUITE 40 ST. LOUIS, MO 3141 I PHONE: C314)991 2633 THE 'SEAL AND SIGNATURE APPLY ONLY TO THE DOCUMENT TO '.. WHICH THEY ARE AFFIXED, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL OTHER PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, -.. ESTIMATES, REPORTS OR OTHER DOCUMENTS OR INSTRUMENTS RELATING TO OR INTENDED TO BE USED FOR ANY PART OR PARTS OF THE ARCHITECTURAL OR ENGINEERING PROJECT. PROFESSIONAL ' OF RECORD: DAVID J. BURKHART 314 - 991 -CODE National Office 461 From Rood Paromus, NJ 07652 (201) 599-7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS T2" US. The information shown moy not be used no the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" OS. - Location TUKWI LA, WA - RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA Drawing Title MAY 1 1 1999 A U TOM A TbCTCENTER SPRINKLER PLAN Scale AS NOTED I Date 05/01/98 Sheet No. = P 2 A R 4 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PLAN ® SCALE: 1/16" = 1 -0" FIN. FLOOR ELEV. = 100' -0" REMOTE AREA HYDRAULICALLY MOST REMOTE 2.000 SOFT. 0.45/2,000 REFER TO DRAWING FP3 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND SPRINKLERS TEE FIRE PROTECTION LINE TO EV OCATION - SPACE IN 2 -6 i� REFER TO :FIXTURE PLAN THIS LOCATION 8" UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE PRESSURE GAUGE 6" CHECK VALVE 6" SUPERVISED WALL POST INDICATING VALVE 8" x 6" DEGREASER OFFICE BRFAKROOM AND VFSTIBUI F AREAS: DESIGN CRITERIA SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: DENSITY - 0.15 GPM /SO. FT. Sot F A55 pRFSAI FS ARFAS DESIGN CRITERIA SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: . DENSITY - 0.45 GPM /SO. FT. . OPERATING AREA - 2.000 SO. FT. . HEAD SPACING - 100 SO. FT. MAX. . TEMPERATURE RATING - 286F. . HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE - 500 GPM. OPERATING AREA - 1.500 SO. FT. HEAD SPACING - 130 SO. FT. MAX. TEMPERATURE RATING - 165F. HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE - 250 CPM. SPRINKLER SPACING SHALL BE AS SHOWN ON DRAW- INGS. 1. FINISHED CEILING AREAS - IT IS INTENDED THAT THE GREATEST ACCURACY BE PROVIDED TO LOCATE SPRINKLER IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS WITHOUT THE EXPENSE OF "RETURN BEND ". IT IS UNDERSTOOD THAT NO MORE THAN A 3 -INCH RADIUS TOLERANCE ABOUT THE POINT IDENTIFIED BY DIMENSION WILL BE ACCEPTED. WHERE ROWS OF SPRINKLERS ARE PROVIDED WITHIN THE SAME CEIUNG PLANE. ANY PART OF THE TOLERANCE USED FOR ONE SPRINKLER SHALL BE THE SAME FOR ALL OTHERS IN THAT SAME ROW. COORDINATE CLOSELY WITH THE ELECTRICIAN INSTALLING LIGHTS AND SPEAKERS. THE INTENDED EFFECT IS THAT SPRINKLERS BE IN LINE WITH EACH OTHER AND WITH OTHER SYSTEMS (I. E. UGHTS AND SPEAKERS). A WATER FLOW TEST CONDUCTED NEAR THE SITE OF THIS PROJECT WAS NOT AVAILBLE. DEVELOPERS AND / OR SUCCESSFUL FPC. SHALL � PERFORM. A WATER FLOW TEST AND FORWARD A REPORT TO TOYS "R" US AND COL', REUSE EXISTING FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION AS INDICATED, ON DRAWING. NOT TO SCALE DESIGN CRITERIA @ 6" TO SYSTEM 2" A.G.F. TEST & DRAIN DEVICE TO EXTERIOR 6" FLOW SWITCH ELEVATION @ RISER 8" UNDERGROUND FIRE SERVICE GENERAL NOTES PROVIDE RU. NECESSARY OFFSETS, RAISES OR DROPS IN PIPING AND AUXILIARY DRAINS REWIRED BY BUILDING CONDITIONS. 2. EXAMINE THE JOB CONDITIONS AND VERIFY ALL MEASUREMENTS, DISTANCES, ELEVATIONS, CLEARANCES ETC. 3. ARCHITECTURAL, AND ELECTRICAL. BACKGROUND INFORMATION IS SHOWN FOR COORDINATION PURPOSES ONCE REFER TO THE PROPER DRAWNGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS SIZES AND QUANTITIES OF OTHER TRADES' WORK. IT IS UNDERSTOOD, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, THAT THE RPE SIZES AS SHOWN ON THE BD DOCUMENTS WALL BE USED. TIE ENCJNEEIBNG DRAWINGS HAVE BEEN PREPARED USING AUTOCAD. THE DRAWINGS ARE 100% CAD. THE HYORAUUC CALCULATIONS HAVE BEEN PREPARED USING HASS. THESE DOCUMENTS NU_ BE MADE AVAILABLE TO THE SUCCESSFUL AUTOMATIC SPRNKLER CONTRACTOR IN EITHER ME FORM OF DISKETTE OR HARD COPY. HANGER NOTES 6 -INCH AND LARGER PIPES RUNNING PARALLEL TO PUMAS SHALL BE HUNG FRGM TRAPEZE HANGERS SUPPORTED NEARLY EQUALLY BY TWO PURUNS. 2. ONLY ONE PIPE STALL BE SUPPORTED FROM A SINGLE TRAPEZE HANGER UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. 3 . HANGERS WITH MORE THAN ISO POUNDS OF LOAD SHOULD BE ATTACHED TO THE PURLIN AT A PANEL POINT. 4. COORDINATE ALL HANGER TYPES ANO LOCATIONS Hem THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. o TYPICAL SPRINKLER LOCATIONS' LTNC m$) 4-0 NOTE: SPRINKLERS SHALL BE POSITIONED AS .0...1 WITH A 3 TOLERANCE. HOWEVER. SHOULD ANY PART OF THE TOLERANCE BE USED; THEN ALL THE SPRINKLERS IN THE ROW SHALL BE OFFSET BY THE SAME DISTANCE IN THE SAME DIRECTION. SYMBOL KEY 0 BRASS UPRIGHT 0 BRASS. UPRIGHT. AND DROP 165'F 1/2" ORIFICE TO CHM,,. RECESSED CENTER UNE ELEVATION OF PIPE FROM TOP OF PURUN AND/ OR STRUCTURAL MEMBER PIPE IS TO BE HELD TIGHT TO --0- RISE FROM LEFT TO RICHT AND DROP FROM RIGHT TO LEFT I- CAPPED PIPE O HYDRAULIC REFERENCE PONT 286F 17/32 "ORIFICE 0 • • • • 14 ,11 II I L II,• t, 1111111%1111MEIm' _ • AhOII HEM I uuriurIII . • 'i MEW eu1111111e111 sllUSU mil II 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 • IfleNll IIIIe l 1111111111111 1111111111111 11U111111111111111111111M I lei MALI !IIl IUIII9lIIei . I II1IIIPPRHHhIHHIIIIIIINuHHilhIIIH:mJII . I II 1011u0U11 01 Io111ululul 01111 1 II I I dII m 101uhIIII0111 IllhIII 11111111 u0111hIIl �INIO I uhIIIIIII11101111�1 111 111u1011ue11111111 I iiil.Im�. iri11111M111 inu .uliiiiiiuiIiiiiiI.I.riiiIi1 11111 11111111111001111 I 1111111111121* III I11101111i1UC1111G1111C1111C1111A■ - • m••i...i.... •'. iin•• il•iili.uuu•••..••uu•Cli " i1111C 1 IIiIOIiHIhHHIIlhrIIIiIIIIl1lliIIUlIOIiIIIiIIhI IOI • 1. i. • . U . •1 111.•• . nnq■ M!■ I n■ ILIMIiInhI1■1■■■uuuu1I ■■■IIIn •° 11 �11Ummil Iwinc IN� MIIIIIIMIIM 1- 1 u11u 1111111111.111111111111111111111111■ 1 n1111111mnc11 =111a1111:111110111 MEN • • I ■■•••Ilu @A11111■1I111111n111n111111 IIIIIIIIL MILLI• I 1 ...111.11C[1IHU ! I ;I� III_:t:I::' _ • e • s • e • • e • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • S5-0' gF • III I II . I j /� I ® SCALE: 1/16" = 1' - 0" 165' -0" 55' -0 SEE DRAWING FP2 FOR LPRIGHT SPRINKLERS AND PIPING iii : Io :fa 11 IN1111 111111n111n 11 n111111 11111111 11111L Iraqi l_ NE 110CU10uU01111 ®IIIOIIIIiHild111101111�II nine ' 1' 11 lU um111lI111 ■111111111111111111111111 II • lOm • uO11u5111111111111110111I o11UO HI m111u1u11uuuuu1N111111■ .......... • ldU !l ' mmummu Wllsull!�■ _ 1 . - 1 miul � � lj Milll Im 1 1'�lu r ® INIumI NI'OIIuiIl1I II I I11 • • ,UI1, 11111111111M: • 11011 A111011110111v110■ .. s. J , _LH .0 . • ...111u..11! .t....i11� m• • • • 1. IUCIIIIC 1 1111011111M AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER LAYOUT FIN. FLOOR ELEV. = 100' -0" REFER TO DRAWING FP2 FOR UPRIGHT SPRINKLERS AND PIPING `iok0 155 GENERAL NOTES PRONDE ALL NECESSARY OFFSETS, RAISES OR DROPS IN PIPING AND AUXILIARY DRAINS REQUIRED By BUILDING CONDITIONS. EXAMINE THE JOB CONDITIONS AND AR, ALL MEASUREMENTS, DISTANCES, ELEVATIONS, CLEARANCES ETC. ARCHITECTURAL, AND ELECTRICAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION IS SHOWN FOR COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLE, REFER TO THE PROPER DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS SIZES AND OIANTITIES OF OTHER TRADES' IT IS UNDERSTOOD, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, THAT THE PIPE SIZES AS SHOWN ON THE BID DOCUMENTS WILL BE USED. 5. THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS HOVE BEEN PREPARED USING AUTOCAD. THE DRAWINGS ARE 1008 CAD. THE HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS HAVE BEEN PREPARED U9NG HASS. THESE DOCUMENTS MIL BE MADE AVAILABLE TO THE SUCCESSFUL AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IN EITHER THE FORM OF DISKETTE OR HARD COP, HANGER NOTES 1. 6 -1501 AND LARGER RPES RUNNING PARALLEL TO PURUNS 91ALL BE HUNG FROM TRAPEZE HANGERS SUPPORED NEARLY EQUALLY BY TWO PURUNS. 2. ONLY ONE PIPE SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM A SINGLE TRAPEZE HANGER UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. 3. HANGERS WITH MORE THAN 150 POUNDS OF LOAD SHOULD BE ATTACHED TO THE P0808 AT A PANEL PONT. 4. COORDINATE ALL HANGER TYPES AND LOCATIONS MI, THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD.. 2'_0" 2' -O SPRINKLER'(TYP.) 3 RADIUS TOLERANCE (TIP.) NOTE: SPRINKLERS SHALL BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN WIN A 3 TOLERANCE. HOWEVER. SHOULD ANY PART OF THE TOLERANCE BE USED. THEN ALL THE SPRINKLERS IN THE ROW SHALL BE OFFSET BY THE SAME DISTANCE IN THE SAME DIRECTION. SYMBOL KEY • CHROME RECESSED }� CHROME PENDENT WITH 2 -PIECE ESCUTCHEON • DRY HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL 286'f 17 /32'ORIRCE 165 17/32 "ORIFICE 165 I /2' ORIFICE I N N o Dote Description Drawing References No Drawings BID DATE: .05/01/98 CADD NAME: 6277603 PROJECT NO.: 62776 -0 DRAWN BY: 3.K CHECKED BY: 0.2 PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION RENO CODE CONSULTAN INCORPORATED FIRE PROTECTION CONSU ]60 OFFICE PARKWAY SUI iE 40 ST. LOUIS, ') 63,41 I PHONE: (314)991 -2633 THE SEAL AND SIGNATURE APPLY ONLY TO THE DOCUMENT TO WHICH THEY ARE AFFI %ED, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ALL OTHER PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, ESTIMATES, REPORTS OR OTHER DOCUMENTS OR INSTRUMENTS RELATING TO OR INTENDED TO BE USED FOR ANY PART OR PARTS OF THE ARCHITECTURAL OR ENGINEERING PROJECT. PROFESSIONAL OF RECORD: DAVID J. BURKHART 314- 991 —CODE National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exdusive Property of TOYS 12 US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 1R' US. Location TUKW I LA , WA CITY O OF TUKWILA Drawing Title MAY I f 1998 1 AUTOMAT SPRINKLER LAYOUT Scale AS NOTED Dote 05/01/98 Sheet Na. PPA I 0 • • • • 14 ,11 II I L II,• t, 1111111%1111MEIm' _ • AhOII HEM I uuriurIII . • 'i MEW eu1111111e111 sllUSU mil II 111111111111111111111111111111111111111111111 • IfleNll IIIIe l 1111111111111 1111111111111 11U111111111111111111111M I lei MALI !IIl IUIII9lIIei . I II1IIIPPRHHhIHHIIIIIIINuHHilhIIIH:mJII . I II 1011u0U11 01 Io111ululul 01111 1 II I I dII m 101uhIIII0111 IllhIII 11111111 u0111hIIl �INIO I uhIIIIIII11101111�1 111 111u1011ue11111111 I iiil.Im�. iri11111M111 inu .uliiiiiiuiIiiiiiI.I.riiiIi1 11111 11111111111001111 I 1111111111121* III I11101111i1UC1111G1111C1111C1111A■ - • m••i...i.... •'. iin•• il•iili.uuu•••..••uu•Cli " i1111C 1 IIiIOIiHIhHHIIlhrIIIiIIIIl1lliIIUlIOIiIIIiIIhI IOI • 1. i. • . U . •1 111.•• . nnq■ M!■ I n■ ILIMIiInhI1■1■■■uuuu1I ■■■IIIn •° 11 �11Ummil Iwinc IN� MIIIIIIMIIM 1- 1 u11u 1111111111.111111111111111111111111■ 1 n1111111mnc11 =111a1111:111110111 MEN • • I ■■•••Ilu @A11111■1I111111n111n111111 IIIIIIIIL MILLI• I 1 ...111.11C[1IHU ! I ;I� III_:t:I::' _ • e • s • e • • e • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • S5-0' gF • III I II . I j /� I ® SCALE: 1/16" = 1' - 0" 165' -0" 55' -0 SEE DRAWING FP2 FOR LPRIGHT SPRINKLERS AND PIPING iii : Io :fa 11 IN1111 111111n111n 11 n111111 11111111 11111L Iraqi l_ NE 110CU10uU01111 ®IIIOIIIIiHild111101111�II nine ' 1' 11 lU um111lI111 ■111111111111111111111111 II • lOm • uO11u5111111111111110111I o11UO HI m111u1u11uuuuu1N111111■ .......... • ldU !l ' mmummu Wllsull!�■ _ 1 . - 1 miul � � lj Milll Im 1 1'�lu r ® INIumI NI'OIIuiIl1I II I I11 • • ,UI1, 11111111111M: • 11011 A111011110111v110■ .. s. J , _LH .0 . • ...111u..11! .t....i11� m• • • • 1. IUCIIIIC 1 1111011111M AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER LAYOUT FIN. FLOOR ELEV. = 100' -0" REFER TO DRAWING FP2 FOR UPRIGHT SPRINKLERS AND PIPING `iok0 155 GENERAL NOTES PRONDE ALL NECESSARY OFFSETS, RAISES OR DROPS IN PIPING AND AUXILIARY DRAINS REQUIRED By BUILDING CONDITIONS. EXAMINE THE JOB CONDITIONS AND AR, ALL MEASUREMENTS, DISTANCES, ELEVATIONS, CLEARANCES ETC. ARCHITECTURAL, AND ELECTRICAL BACKGROUND INFORMATION IS SHOWN FOR COORDINATION PURPOSES ONLE, REFER TO THE PROPER DRAWINGS FOR EXACT LOCATIONS SIZES AND OIANTITIES OF OTHER TRADES' IT IS UNDERSTOOD, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INDICATED OTHERWISE, THAT THE PIPE SIZES AS SHOWN ON THE BID DOCUMENTS WILL BE USED. 5. THE ENGINEERING DRAWINGS HOVE BEEN PREPARED USING AUTOCAD. THE DRAWINGS ARE 1008 CAD. THE HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS HAVE BEEN PREPARED U9NG HASS. THESE DOCUMENTS MIL BE MADE AVAILABLE TO THE SUCCESSFUL AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR IN EITHER THE FORM OF DISKETTE OR HARD COP, HANGER NOTES 1. 6 -1501 AND LARGER RPES RUNNING PARALLEL TO PURUNS 91ALL BE HUNG FROM TRAPEZE HANGERS SUPPORED NEARLY EQUALLY BY TWO PURUNS. 2. ONLY ONE PIPE SHALL BE SUPPORTED FROM A SINGLE TRAPEZE HANGER UNLESS OTHERWISE APPROVED IN WRITING BY THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD. 3. HANGERS WITH MORE THAN 150 POUNDS OF LOAD SHOULD BE ATTACHED TO THE P0808 AT A PANEL PONT. 4. COORDINATE ALL HANGER TYPES AND LOCATIONS MI, THE STRUCTURAL ENGINEER OF RECORD.. 2'_0" 2' -O SPRINKLER'(TYP.) 3 RADIUS TOLERANCE (TIP.) NOTE: SPRINKLERS SHALL BE POSITIONED AS SHOWN WIN A 3 TOLERANCE. HOWEVER. SHOULD ANY PART OF THE TOLERANCE BE USED. THEN ALL THE SPRINKLERS IN THE ROW SHALL BE OFFSET BY THE SAME DISTANCE IN THE SAME DIRECTION. SYMBOL KEY • CHROME RECESSED }� CHROME PENDENT WITH 2 -PIECE ESCUTCHEON • DRY HORIZONTAL SIDEWALL 286'f 17 /32'ORIRCE 165 17/32 "ORIFICE 165 I /2' ORIFICE Drawing References Drawings BID DATE: - CADD NAME: El. DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: PROJECT NO U103040 CHECKED BY: ANN 1498 EMU 37K REV 0.9N URS GREINER 'INC. (A.C. 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, G D RAPIDS, MI 616 -285 -3500 FAX 616( 8 - Scale AS NOTED National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R' US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER POWER P L A AN 19 MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. Dote 03 20 98 05 05 98 Revisions Description PREUMINARY REVIEW COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION 3. I ll LA- 6,8,10 Alb CONDUIT ABOVE CENNG, IN WALLS, EXPOSED OR CONCEALED UNDER SLAB OR BELOW GRADE HOME RUN TO PANEL 'LA" CIRCUITS 6,8,10. HACHURES = NO. OF WIRES. LONG HACHURE = SYSTEM NEUTRAL = ISOLATED GROUND CONDUCTOR LIGHTING FIXTURES (NOT ALL SYMBOLS ARE NECESSARILY USED ON DRAWINGS) FLUORESCENT (UPPER CASE LETTER INDICATES FIXTURE TYPE, NUMBER INDICATES CIRCUIT, LOWER CASE LETTER INDICATES SWITCHING). 0 s Sk 0 m 7 K I�IJ DISCONNECT SWITCH (NON -FUSED EXCEPT AS NOTED) O SWITCHES SINGLE POLE SWITCH (AT HT 48' AFF) SENSOR FOR ROOF TOP UNITS GENERAL NOTES INCANDESCENT OR HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE WALL PACK (HID.) NIGHT LIGHT FUTURE EXIT "N EMERGENCY HA7ERY PACK SWITCH WITH PILOT LIGHT (AT HT 48' AFF) KEY OPERATED SWITCH (MT HT 48' AFF) POWER AND CONTROL TRANSFORMER PANEL MOTOR MANUFACTURER FURNISHED CONTROL PANEL 1. BEFORE SUBNITTNG THE BID PROPOSAL. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VAST THE JOB SITE AN0 FULLY ACQUAINT HIMSELF WITH THE JOB CONDITIONS AND VERIFY SERVICE CONNECTIONS, INCLUDING ALL NECESSARY PULLBOXES, SIZE AND NUMBER OF CONDUITS AND CONDUCTORS, MICHGFAR, METERING, CABLE CHARGES, ETC., WHETHER SHOWN ON DRAWINGS OR NOT BUT REQUIRED BY SERVING UTILITY COMPANY, TO MAKE A COMPLETE AND OPERATING ELECTRICAL SERVICE WITHOUT ADDITIONAL COST TO THE OWNER. VERIFY SERVICES AND CHARGES WITH POWER AND TELEPHONE COMPANIES. 2. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE HIS WORK mT; THAT OF ALL OTHERS AND SHALL INSTALL UGHTNO FIXTURES SYMMETRICALLY WITH AISLE AND /OR DIMENSIONS AND ACCOMMODATE FIXTURES WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS. PRIOR TO FINISH OF EFFECTED WORN, ELC SHALL INSTRUCT THE OWNER AND /OR MANAGER ON THE USE AND MAINTENANCE OF THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. ELC SHALL VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WITH MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. AND SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL ALL ITEMS REQUIRED BY THE HAC CONTRACTOR FOR COMPLETE INSTAIATION. 4. ELC SHALL MAINTAIN EXACT LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATORS AS DIRECTED BY DIMENSIONS ON PLANS. 5. RUNNING OVERCURRENT PROTECTOR AND DISCONNECT MEANS SRAL BE INSTALLED ON ALL MOTORS TO COMPLY WITH CODE. 6. ALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES SHALL BE 'HORSEPOWER RATED' FOR THE MOTOR CONNECTED. 7. FLUORESCENT AND HID BALLASTS SHALL. COMPLY W/ ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS, AND CODES. B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS IN UGHTING PANELS CONTROLLING FLUORESCENT FIXTURES NOT WITHIN SIGHT OF PANEL SHALL HAVE APPROVED MEANS FOR LOCKING IN THE OPEN POSITION. 9. ELECTRICAL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL COMPLY WITH LATEST'N.E.C.' AND ALL LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES. IN CASE OF CONFLICT AMONG REQUIREMENTS, THE MORE RESTRICTIVE SHALL APPLY. 10. UGHTNG FIXTURES AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES FOR USE OUTSIDE THE BUILDING SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF. 11. FUSES SHALL BE AS MANUFACTURED BY RUSSMANN CO. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 12. GROUND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PER 'N.E.C' AND LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. 13. ALL FANS, UNIT HEATERS, ARE FURNISHED BY OWNER. 14. NO CONDUIT, DISCONNECTS, ETC., SHALL BE ROUTED ACROSS, OR MOUNTED ON, FRONT WALL.. CONDUITS SHALL BE ROUTED IN SLAB OR waHIN WALL OR CHASE 15. ALL CONDUCTORS SHALL BE BID ROG. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED OR AS REQUIRED FOR VOLTAGE DROP (SEE SPECS.). ALL CONDUIT 1/7 EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED. 16. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR 51541 PROVIDE ALL WIRING TO ALL SKINS AND SHALL MAZE FINAL CONNECTIONS TO AL SIGNS. SINS ARE FRONDED BY OTHERS, EEC. SHALL COORDINATE LOCATION OF ROUGH -IN W71H STUN CONTRACT.. 17. FLUORESCENT FIXTURES SHALL BE SUPPORTED AT THE ENDS OF EACH FIXTURE WITH SUPPORTS NOT TO EXCEED. 4 FOOT SPACING. 18. THE ONLY CONDUIT FERMIRED ON BUILDING COLUMNS IN THE SAES AREA WILL BE FED FROM ABOVE FOR THE SENSOR, UNLESS SHOWN OTHERWISE. ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS M = MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH SCOT LIGHT K = KEY OPERATED DPLEX RECEPTACLE (GROUND TYPE) MOUNTING HEIGHT 15 AFF �IIG • PENDANT RECEPTACLE • DUPLEX RECEPTACLE (GROUND TYPE) WEATHER -PROOF � IC WAO • QUAD RECEPTACLE (GROUND TIP) MT HT 17 AFF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE MISCELLANEOUS O JUNCnoN BOX J❑ V AR RECEPTACLES DUPLEX RECEPTACLE ISOLATED GROUND TYPE. MOUNTING HEIGHT 15' AFF, MESS NOTED. SPECIAL RECEPTACLE (AS NOTED) HUBBELL IG5361 (2) HUBBELL IG5362 JUNCTION BOx MOUNTED IN JOIST AREA FOR CONNECTION TO RACKING. CONDUITS CONNECTED BETWEEN SUCH BOXES SHALL BE ROUTED IN JOIST AREA TELEPHONE OUTLET LOX, WALL TYPE, W/ 3/4' C. BACK TO TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT BACKBOARD (MT HT 48' AFF UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) DATA PROCESSING J -BOX 4' SQUARE (COVER PLATE BY OTHERS) W/ 3/4' C. STUBBED UP AND EXTEND TO COMPUTER BACKBOARD VARIABLE SPEED CONTROL O SMOKE DETECTOR, 120V PHOTOCELL TYPE D (ANSUL OR WALTER KIDDIE) MT HT AS NEAR BELOW SUSPENDED CEILING AS PRACTICAL RDAS. MARK PLAN NOTES' 1. VERIFY LOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WITH MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR, (UNIT HEATERS, ROOF TOP UNITS, TRANSFER FANS, ETC.). 2. ALL EXHAUST FANS, TRANSFER FANS, ETC. ARE TO BE ABOVE OFFICE NEAR ROOF. 3. AL WIRING TO BE / 12, I/7 C. BON., AND ARRANGED TO BE BALANCED PHASE TO NEUTRAL. 4. SENSORS FOR SAES AREA ROOF TOP UNITS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON COLUMNS WHERE SHOWN AT F- 0 AF. SENSORS AND CONTROL WIRING BY ELC. SEE SENSOR MOUNTING DETAIL MIS SHEET. 5. IN DOOR HEADER FOR DOOR OPENER. PROVIDE 4 / 12 FROM OPERATOR DOOR ACTUATOR FOR SYSTEM'S LON VOLTAGE WRING. CONNECT AS DIRECTED BY DOOR INSTALLER. VERIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS AND CONNECTIONS WITH AUTOMATC DOOR SYSTEM MANUFACTURER, TYPICAL. FOR ALL FRONT DOORS. 6. ALL FINAL SIGN CONNECTORS SNAIL BE BY ELC. VERIFY AND COORDINATE LOCATION WITH SIGN CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS. 7. 3/e CONDUIT DOWN FROM ROOF FRAMING MEMBERS AND TERMINATE IN DOOR HEADER WITH PULL WIRE FOR SECUITY. TYPICAL FOR ALL EXTERIOR DOORS. NOTE ALARM CONTACTS ARE INSIDE DOOR HEADER. 8. INASMUCH AS POSSIBLE, RUN AL ELECTRICAL CONDUITS THROUGH BAN JEST AND NOT BETWEEN METAL DECK FLUTES TO /NOD PENETRATION BY ROOF INSULATION FASTENERS. 0 FOR POWER IN THIS AREA SEE ENLARGED TOILET AREA PLAN SHEET E4.0= (2) Y CONDUITS FOR DATA RTU -8 SENSOR MOUNT AT 66' OFF RTU-7 SENSOR MOUNT AT 66' OFF T �I OVERHEAD WIRENAY FOR ISOLATED GROUND, GENERAL RECEPT. TFLEPNDE,NIERcoM AND COMPUTER WNW. WIREWAY SUPPORTS AND ROOS ARE PROWOD BY ETC. EEC IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL C AND NORMAL ROAR WIPoNC, RTT0X'S, ETC. TO WYE A COMPLETE WOIMIG INSTAUAIFON, MOUNT AT 14'-II NT SEE DETAIL / 2 ON SHEET E5.0 lj J:. r FOR POWER IN THISAREA SEE ENLARGED FRONT. OFFICE PUN SHEET E4.0 43>r 430 SCALE: 1/16 = 1 0 J -BOX BY COMPACTOR MANUFACTURER COORDINATE LOCATION COMPACTOR 10 HP, 480V. 3A BY OWNER. ELC SRALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR FINN. CONNECTION TO COMPACTOR. FOR SECURITY STUB -DOWN 1/7 C. FROM ROOF FRAMING MENDER TO 1' -0' AFF 45b MOUNT WP, GFI RECEPT. ON RTUS, TYPICAL FOR 9 CIRCUIT TO IA -2 COUNG FANS (TIP FOR 171 FURWUIED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY ELC. MOUNTED BETWEEN JOIST AS HIGH AS POSSIBLE AND AS CLOSE TO DIMENSIONS AS 0055k'IIE TO LOCATIONS SHOWN. '.. BLADES MUST NOT PROJECT SLOW BOTTOM OF JOIST. LOWER (POE LETTER INDICATES SPEED CONTROLLER FURNISHED BY OWNER INSTALLED BY ELC. MOUNT CONTRO[IFRS'Bt POWER"ROON"0T TO PANFt - I£. E'OETAIC ON SHEET E5.0 FOR MOUNTING OF CAUNG FANS.. - 454. RTU-3 SENSOR SEE PLAN NOTE / 4 RN -4 SENSOR SEE PLAN NOTE / 4 22 J -BOXES TOR BRU SIN, i"::NS.O. J-BOXES R( SIGN LETTER, SEE • ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATION FOR LOCATION TIP FOR 9 SEE RAN NOTE / 6 SEE PLAN NOTE 15 TV FOR ALL DOORS FLUSH MOUNTED T -V AFF WITH HINGED WP COVER D %1O / 0 1 15 5 PEAR C NORTH MAIN FLOOR POWER PLAN DP -it ELC TO MOUNT DISC SWITCH FURNISHED BY OWNER AT 5' - AFF AND MOUNT J -BOXi AT 8' -0' AFF ON WALL ABOVE DISC. SWITCH AND CONNECT INTO BALER 0 FOR POWER IN THIS AREA SEE ENLARGED POWER ROOM PLAN SHEET E4.O L. w W i i e Ni o m 0 4 x PLAN NOTE$ 1. J -BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST AREA ELC TO EXTEND I/2" CONDUIT DOWN FROM J -BOX TO RACK AND FLEX CONNECTED TO DEVICES AS DESCRIBED ON SHEET E2.1. 2. ELC TO OBTAIN THE LATEST •FT PLAN TO LOCATE THE J -BOXES WITH THE RACKING. 3. ALL J -BOXES FLUSH MOUNTED IN FLOOR SNAIL NE HUBBELL BOX / E12527, WITH COMBINATION COVER AND CARPET FLANGE i 5E2525 TYPICAL. MOUNT J -BOX CENTERED IN RACK AND FLEX CONNECTED TO DEVICES MOUNTED ON RACKING 4. ELC TO PROVIDE WALKER DUCT CAT. I 2 (3 1/8' x 1 1/4") BLANK DUCT WITH ADJUSTABLE SUPPORTS / 012 -17, WITH HS12 HOLD DOWN STRAPS, WOO JUNCTION BOXES 1 12S, INCLUDING, BUT NOT UNITED TO MALE OR FEMME ADAPTORS FOR CONDUIT ATTACHMENTS, ETC. TO MAKE A COMPLETE WORKING SYSTEM. COORDINATE LOCATION OF WALKER DUCT AS DIRECTED IN RED BY TRU REP, 2 MIN. CONCRETE COVER OVER DUCT. ELC TO PROVIDE WALKER DUCT J -BOXES 1 125 FLUSH MOUNTED IN FLOOR WITH BRASS COVER PLATE, AND 1 255 -2 BOX TO CONDUIT ADAPTORS FOR Y CONDUITS INTO CORNERS OF BOX. PROVIDE 1 202 CLOSURE PLATES FOR UNUSED BOX OPENINGS. SEE DETAIL 13 ON SHEET E5.0. 5. ELC TO PROVIDE (I) 1/2' CONDUIT, ROUTED UNDERSEAS AND UP WALL AND OVERHEAD FROM WALKER DUCT J -BOX TO CIRCUITS IN PANEL "LE" AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS. 6. J -BOX MOUNTED ON WALKER DUCT. SEE DETAIL /3 ON SHEET E5.0. CONNECT FROM J -BOX TO RACK MOUNTED DEVICE WITH FLEX CONDUIT. 7. ELC TO OBTAIN THE LATEST •Fl• PLAN TO LOCATE THE J -BOXES WITH THE RACKING. 8. STUB -DOWN 1/Y CONDUIT FOR DATA UNE, FOR BASE STATION MOUNTED AT 13•-0" AFF WITH INSULATED BUSHINr '1'P FOR 7 PLACES (BS) 9. HUBBELL 1 5361 RECEPT. FOR BASE STATION. MOUNTED AT 13• -0' AFF TYPICAL FOR 1 PLACE (BS) 10. HUBBELL I IG5261 RECEPTACLE FOR PRICE CHECK MACHINE. TYPICAL (4) PLACES (PC) MOUNTED AT 4• -0" AFF i. STUB-DOWN 1/2' CONDUIT FOR DATA UNE, AND TURN OUT INTO SALES AREA AT 4 AFF WITH INSULATED BUSHING. TYP FOR 4 PLACES (PC). SEE PLAN FOR CONTINUATION' SEE PLAN FOR CONTINUATKXN ENLARGED REFUND DESK SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- 0" I I/2" C. STUBBED -UP FOR DATA rm /—SURFACE MOUNT All A DEVICES U UNTER AS IN FIELD IG DIRECTED IN FIELD BY BRU REP. PEP. � (T :J �J 1 I/Y C. STUBBED -UP FOR DATA ENLARGED BABY REGISTRY DESK SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- 0" SEE PLAN FOR CONTINUATION —.. _ r_ 1 I/2 C. STUBBED -UP FOR DATA J1 � 38 38 38 ENLARGED SPECIAL ORDER DESK SCALE: 1/8" = 1'- 0" � t0 , T0, 1 1/2" CTTI - , i LE- 31,33,35 NOTE: FOR ADOMONAL I >>( ,aROKTS IN THIS C O N D O V2 C FUR " SEE SHEET E2.1 !!! 33 _ J SEE PLAN NOTE j 10 -_ SEE POW NODE / 1 .-LI L.L - Y. - i FOR POWER LAYOUT OF THIS AREA SEE MARCO SPECIAL OFAER DESK PLAN MS SHEET -SEE PENN NOTE / 4 FLUSH MOUNTED J -BOX TYP _ LC -• (PC) HS LE- 36,38,41 IO T_..-.. 9 ' - 10 ,.._ ._6. 6' NOTE_FDA'XDDRTENUNE -- -_ _. CIRCl11T5 IN MS CONOUrc, I I I SEE PLAN NOTE f 3 TYPICAL STUB 1 -0" CONDUIT-, .__ WIWA MIRE FOR" 717 `1 >-fl� DATA I N ;TYP 2 ?'E$ I ! 111 1� l 1 A H LC -10 - -_ i LE -14 LE -13 LE -18 FOft POWER UYOUT OF THIS ARFA SEEOV L 2ON SKEET E5.0 J3 • 155 FOR POWER LAYOUT OF THIS AREA SEE ENLARGED BABY REGISTRY DESK RAN M15 -41EET NORTH RACKING POWER PLAN SCALE: 1/16' = 1'- 0" N Dale 03/20/98 05/05/98 Location Drawings Description BID DATE: - CADD NAME: E11 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION Sheet No. Revisions PREUMINARY REVIEW COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. PROJECT NO- u103040 CHECKED BY: N. 1998 8911 37K RFV 0 9A URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, I 495 616- 285 -3500 FAX 61, -35 National Office 461 From Rood Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUP ERCENTEEGnvo ° Drawing Title it 1 I 1998 RACKING PO PLAN Scale I Date AS NOTED MAY 5, 1998 o AR, LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE FlX. TYPE SPECIFICATION LAMP DATA MOUNTING HEIGHT TO BOTTOM OF FIXTURE N0. OF AXT. 'TOTAL WATT. /fOR MANUF ACTURER CATALOG NUMBER •• NO. WATTS LAMP TYPE AA DUAL -LITE Pt-2 (BATTERY PACK) FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE WALL OR COLUMN MOUNTED 10' -0" A.F.F. 26 5D CRESC CRESCENT Ri2408- 27N / }2 + /2 /OCT 4 32 F032/835/5 -8 12' -6' SEE PUN NOTES /3 & 4 AND DETAIL /10 ON SHEET E5.0 126 156 i l` CRESCENT RT2404- 277V/32 + /OCT 2 32 F032/835/7 -8 12' -C SEE PLAN NOTES /3 & 4 AND DETAIL 110 ON SHEET E5.0 0 78 D CRESCENT .82. -277 IOW N NW f Millir NEW W W NMI F032/835 SURFACE MOUNTED 3 JD E CRESCENT 240P34001- 277V- SS -OCT F F032/835 RECESSED 23 89 CRESCENT SCF232- 8- 7- 32 +- OCT -TRU SU NOTE / 26 78 :850;:: -11H TRACK MOUNTED 14 70 H01070 NE RA40EM01-35 -TOYS Mp400/C /BU -ONLY 3200K 17' -6' AFF 0 458 HOLOPHANE RA40EMH -35 -TOYS -WITH QUARTZ r. .r.. — . ` AIM. Ali. MP400 /C /BU -ONLY 3200K AM. INIMIL ``ANIL 17' -6" AFF — . i. 0 .�. 458 150 �.. HC NV- HOLOPH4NE RA25LMH -27 -P -310 -TOYS 1 250 MP250 /C /BU -ONLY 3200K PROIECiED MOUNT ON CEIUNO AT 19' -6' AfF - 64 _ 290 _ HCE HOLOPHANE �. + RA25UAH -27 -P -310 -TOYS WITH QUARTZ 0 1 1 250 150 MP250 /C /1311-044Y 3200K PROTECTED QUARTZ 1508 YOUM ON CDUNG AT 19' -E 4FF 7 290 150 ! LIGHTOLIER _ 2050250 NMHC CPNDT 8 50502E WHITE �'w1�(/ ��'"�� Wil� T • 50 •+• •— M2 0. /8U -ONLY -� ��. ' w 14' -6' AFF 5 290 DUAL -UTE EXIT LIGHT WITH LAMP FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE SEE NOTE / 4 0 50 81 DUAL -UTE ME EX LIGHT (BATTERY PACK) FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE SEE NOTE / 4 8 R UGHTOUER LD721)WH17HB MH 1 175 101175 RECESSED Q au SL1 WIDELRE SLS /14- 800- S- 480V- D8 -MHL FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE 1AR 400 (TWIN) SSS -101- 5017 -30 -82 0 910 St2 WIDELTTE SLS /M- 8000- 480V -DB -TA FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE MVR 400 (TWIN) SSS- 101 - 5011 -30 -82 0 910 T UGHTOUER 9108WH 8' TRACK N /A N/A 17 AFF U.N.O. SEE DETAIL/ 5 ON SHEET E5.0 3 T1 UGHTOUER 9108WH 4' TRACK N/A N/A 17' -Y. AFF U.N.O. SEE DETAIL / 5 ON SHEET E5.0 2 U WIDEUTE WPC100MAL- WHITE -277V FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE 8728 -100 MH SEE ARCH. ELEVATIONS 0 295 UT STONCO WP250MAL- WHITE -277V FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE 8T28 -250 MO SEE ARCH. ELEVAT1045 4 295 to STONCO WP400MAL- WHITE -277V FURNISHED W/ FIXTURE BT28 -400 MH SE ARCH. ELEVATIONS 0 458 V CRESCENT C140RE7-I20V-T8- ELECTRON 4' LONG FlX TIIRE F 1 32 FO }2 635 / MOUNTED ON RACKING U.N.O. 31 68 Vi CRESCENT 014082 - 1200 -18- ELECTRONIC B' LONG FIXTURE F 2 JS F096/835 MOUNTED ON RACKING U.N.O. 114 113 Z CRESCENT DC40 I i' 40 40W/A19 6'- 0' 1 40 •• LAMPS: I- INCANDESCENT F- FLUORESCENT MV- MERCURY VAPOR MH -METAL HALIDE 0- QUARTZ HPS -HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM I v • j gi LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE NOTES: I. ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES. LAMPS At BAL.TS WILL BE FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY ELC. 2- FIXTURE OUANTMES SHOWN ARE FOR INFORMATION ONE " RC SHALL VERIFY FIXTURE QUANTITIES. 3. ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SALES AREA SHALL BE ROD OR PENDANT HUNG. ELC SHALL PROVIDE RODS AND ATTACHMENTS. SUPPORT FROM WOOD STRUCTURE ABOVE GRID CEILING. 4. PENDANT MOUNT EXIT SIGNS AY 1C' -0' OFF EXCEPT SURFACE MOUNT OVER SLIDING DOORS. EXIT SIGNS SHALL BE CLEAR OF All RXTURING. 5. MOUNT FIXTURE ABOVE BOTTOM OF ROOF FRAMING MEMBERS IN PRE -SALES AREA AND MOUNT FIXTURE TO TOP OF ROOF FRAMING MEMBERS IN RECEMNG AREA PLAN NOTES: 1. E.L.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION OF QUANTITY AND LOCATION OF EXIT LIGHTS (ME 'MI' FIXTURES) WITH LOCAL AUTHORIPES. 2. ALL WIRING TO BE / 12. 1/2' C. U.O.N. '..'C ARRANGED TO BE BALANCED PHASE TO NEUTRAL 3. ALL FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES IN SALES AREA SHALL BE INSTALLED WITH ENOUGH FLEX (BY ELC) TO PERMIT 6' -0' OF SIDE TO SIDE ADJUSTMENT (APPROX. 8' -0" OF SLACK) EXTRA FLEX SHALL BE COILED AND SUPPORTED IN A CODE APPROVED MANNER AT UPPER JUNCTION BOX. 4. LICHT FIXTURE LOCATIONS ARE DETERMINED BY DRAWING 'FY. ELC TO OBTAIN THE LATEST 7 F1" DRAWING. ELC TO CONFIRM LOCATION OF LIGHT FIXTURE WITH TRU APM AND CPIA. THE 16,NT IS TO LOCATE THE SALES AREA FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES IN THE CENTER OF THE AISLE AND SYMMETRICAL WITH LENGTH Of RACKING. i D°Iq - 0 l5 5 PLAN NORTH MAIN FLOOR LIGHTING PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1'— 0" gf3- C! N1PP y LO JUL 3 II 1998 AUO 3 i99b PERMIT gtJI�D'�!v 0110 /IS;C;IV,.. No Dote Description 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05 05 98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION PRE -BID ADDENDUM NO.1 07/28/98 Drawings BID DATE: - CADD. NAME: E20 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: URS GREINER INC. (kC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616 -285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location TUKWILA, WA, PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Drawing Title LIGHTING PLAN Scale Sheet No. growing References AS NOTED Revisions ADDENDUM NO. 2 ADDENDUM NO. 3 PROJECT NO • 51103040 CHECKED BY: M. 1998 REM 1750 RFV 0 9R National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 Dote MAY 5, 1998 i D. JUNCTION BOX [D t F- L.) F- L_) CD ROOF JOIST (2) 5/8' THREADED ROO FRONT OF STORE BABY REGISTRY DESK SCALE: N.T.S. L_J SCALE: N.T.S. FOR JOIST HUNG SIGNS FRONT OF STORE SERVICE /REFUND DESK SCALE: N.T.S. 8• -0' AFL DEPARTMENT SIGN DETAIL WAIL MOUNTED 00NS (2) EACH SHALL BE HUNG AT I0' - AFF TO BOTTOM OF SIGN. JOIST HUNG SIGNS (3) EACH SHALL BE HUNG AT 8' -0' AFF TO BOTTOM OF SIGN. (1) 2 x Y x 10' - 0• LONG (MIN) KINDORF CHANNEL WITH 7/8 HOLES 1/2" ALUMINUM SIGN SUPPORT FURNISHED AND INSTALLED BY ELC DEPARTMENT SIGN FURNISHED BY TRU INSTALLED BY GC. SCALE: N.T.S. (2) 10' -0 LONG (MIN) 4' z X x 5/16' STEEL ANGLE WUH 7/6 HOLES MOUNT LIGHT FIXTURE ON BACKSIDE OF BEAM VALANCE LIGHTING SYSTEM "A" SCALE: N.T.S. TRAVEL OF SIGN VALANCE LIGHTING SYSTEM "B" VALANCE LIGHTING SYSTEM "C" SCALE: N.T.S. ACROSS FRONT WALL MOUNTED SIGN. MOUNT: J -BOX AT i,'-V AO 8T10,-1 1/2' C. TO . S=20,21,22,23,24 N P 0 005 C00 CI IN THIS CONDUIT S EET E1.1 V1 V VI V V1 V1 V1 V1 V V1 V1 V1 V V7 V1 VI VI V VALANCE LIGHTING.. SYSTEM 'C 10' -4 6' -8 " -1 10' -0 V1 VI VI VI X— _/L V1 321 4 / I0,, I/2 C.'.. TO LE- 28,30,44 VANCE 5GHTFNG SYSTEM 'd VALANCE UCHIING SYSTEM 'A I S I V1 (1 30 44 28 V1 V1 V, V1 VI V1 V1 DTI-0155 E , so 10. 1/2" C. Lam_._ TO LE- 15,17,26 NOTE FOR A000101. L CIRCUITS IN 11.5 CONDUIT 1 SEE SHEET E1.1 V, V1 30 28 44 V1 V1 VALANCE 1100510 SYSTEM • C ALL J -80X6 MOUNTED IN JOIST AREA ELC TO _.EX1END_Ig...CONDlaL00WH_F00 J =BWLTQ RACKING AND CONNECT AS SHOWN. SEE DETAIL. 1 1 I ON SLEET 05.0. J -BOXES SKIP ON ELI AND THIS SHEET ARE ONE AtiO THE SAME: • V1 01 V .B VALANCE LURING SYSTEM •C HANGING DEPARTMENT SIGN, SEE ceNL TH6 SHEET. ALL RECEPTACLES SHOWN ARE MINTED ON ENDS OF RACKING FOR 'END CAP %GNS'. SEE DETAIN. 1 I ON SHEET 05.0. VALANCE UGHIING SYSIE14 •C J VALANCE LIQTWG STS. 'HI HANGING DEPARTMENT 9CN. SEE DETAIL T115 SHEET. SYSTEM "0 Vl r� VALANCE LIGHTING SYSTEM 'B' u BO X 28 VI V VALANCE LOTTING SYSTEM 2 / 10,I /00C ro 1F -23 17 RACK AND SIGN LIGHTING PLAN SCALE: 1/16' = 1'- 0 WAIL MOUNTED SKIN,: MOOT -U- 69X-m -te-fr AFF VALANCE LSERIOG SYSTEM VALANCE L1ONI NG SYSTEM 'C 34 VALANCE 0GH1ANG 5Y5011 .C11-\\,,, 32' -0" V1 V1 VALANCE UGHTING SYSTEM • C� ca V1 V1 VALANCE UGHToNG SYSTEM - C . < 484 ��1!!!4A :: -f� ALL J -BOXES FLUSH MOUNTED IN FLOOR SHW V1 V1 V7 L BE HUBBELL BOX 1 02527, 11011 / COMBINATION COYER AND CAPPET FLANGE N O SF2525 D RE NOL J -BOX 0iNOUTE & ANC UMW SYSTEM 'C ON RACK AND FLEX TO LIGHT FlI(TURE iIOIWIT ON PACK TYPICAL 4 / 101 I/2' C 70 LE9.48 r PUW NORTH • VAlkd DOMING SYSTEM 'A 4 4 10, 1/2'. C. LE- 32,34,48 VALANCE UCHRNG SYSTEM • A • VALANCE LIGHTING SYSTEM 'A' VALANCE UIOIING SYSTEM 'A' VPIANCE UGHRNG SYSTEM 'I' ................... 1 Dote 03/20/98 05/05/98 Drawings Description Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References BID DATE: CARD NAME: 121 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49 6 616- 285, -3500 FAX 616- 8 -3 2 1'l . 11 k �� , / , i►? � .wr�w _ 1 0 'd' National Office 461 From Road Poramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R' US. Location TUKWILA, WA, PARKWAY SUPERCENTE,15}7 E ' 3F7'UOKV' ✓f Drawing: Title ° i jggy RACK AND S" LIGHTING PLAN Scale AS NOTED Sheet No. E2 COORDINATION PROJECT NO• M103040 CHECKED BY: NRW ta08 0111 37K RR O RR Date MAY 5, 1998 RACKING PLAN KEY ® = FLOOR END CAP SIGN ® = PLUGMOLD 5' TOTAL PER SIDE MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY ON RACK, CENTER PLUGMOLD ON RACK ®= PLUGMOLD (2) 5' SECTIONS PER SIDE FORA TOTAL OF 10' MOUNTED HORIZONTALLY ON RACK, EQUAL DISTANCE FROM EDGE OF RACK TO EDGE OF PLUGMOLD, AND FROM EDGE OF PLUGMOLD TO EDGE OF PLUGMOID. NaTE: I. FOR POWER CIRCUING SEE SHEET E1.1 AND E2..1. 2. RICKING 5' - OR LOWER RECEIVES PLUGMq. AT if APT, AND RACKING HIGHER THAN 5' -6 SHALL RECEIVE PLUGMOLD AT T -6 AFT'. 3. PLUGMOLD AS MANUFACTURED BY WIRE/IOLD / 2000CB SERIES WITH RECEPTACLES ON 6 CENTERS COLOR TO BE WHITE. O 0 SCALE: 1/16" 1'- 0' PLAN N ORTH RACKING I.D. PLAN Date 03/20/98 05/05/98 Sheet No. Drawings Description Revisions PREUMINARY REVIEW ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References BID DATE: - CADD NAME: E PROJECT NO' M103040 DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY' MRW PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION 1998 Eit1 nK RIBL 098 URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS 616 - 285 -3500 FAX 6 Notional Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R US. COORDINATION Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTE RECnIV rl, 1 Drawing Title AUX t s 19g RACKING '' P_ LA N Scale Date AS NOTED MAY 5, 1998 -_ 3 0 0 AR TOILET AREA PLAN IF IF -1,5 BID DATE: - CADD NAME: EAT DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION' PROJECT NO M103040 CHECKED BY: MEW 19N8 FRII 37K REV 0 9A MOVE PANELS AS CLOSE TO CORP. AS POSSIBLE MOUNT AT 36 A.Y.F. TIP FOR 4 ELC TO PROVIDE 6' x 4' x 3/4 PLYWOOD BACKBOAA FOR TELEPHONE EEWPMENT (2) S CONDUITS FROM WHEWAY PULL BOX DOWN WALL TO 8' -0 AFF FOR DATA UNFS SEE E6.0 ELC TO PROVIDE 6' x 4' x 3/4' PLYVICOD ENCKBOABD FOR FCP SYSTEM. FCP BY OTHERS, ELC TO FNCMDE 120W POTTER MOUNT J - BOX . AT 66 NY. AND ISTNL FCP PANEL MOUNT 4 RECFPT BELOW P TEL AT 12' WIT MOUNT ABOVE COUNTER TIP FOR 2 MOUNT AT 8'-0' AFT. 1Yin l 55 PANEL HA WITH C -I, C -2, C -3, C7, 8 C -8 MOUNTED ABOVE PANEL PANEL LB WITH 0 -4 MOUNTED ON WALL ABOVE PANEL PANEL LA WITH C -4, C -9 MOUNTED ABOVE PANEL -i - , IA171• Pg .. OF GMOLD, 60.C. AT PLU 36 (2) 2• C. FOR CCTV FR011 ROOF FRAMING NO*. DOWN TO 12' ATE, TERMINATE IN 6 x 6 SURFACE MOUNTED BOX. BOX FACING INTO OFFICE FRONT OFFICES SCALE: 1/8' = 1'— 0" 0111.115 METER -� C/F'S H T_2 LA-12 ELC TO PROVIDE 4' x 4' PLYW000 BACKBOARD FOR EMS SYSTEM. EMS BY OTHERS, ELC TO PROVIDE 120V POWER. ''.MOUNT J -BOX AT 42 OFF AND INSTAL EMS PANEL C -5 RECESSED OUTLET FOR EMPLOYEES ATIFND4NCE /€CORDER. 4' -4 AFF AT AT 66 AFF. SUSPEND T- , SEE 5 ELEVATION I 2 OHM FILTER UPS 3 BY -P N -1 LC -5 PANEL LE (2 SEEDONS) WTH C -A MOUNTED A6WE PNIEL PANEL HC WITH C -5 MOUNTED ABOVE ENS PANEL BY OTHERS ELC TO ROUTE ALL COIL CONTROL WIRING FROM ALL CONTACTORS TO THIS J -BOX ON BACKBOARD AT 4' -6 AFF AND CONNECT WIRING INTO'. EMS PNL AS SHOWN ON SHEET EMSI ENLARGED POWER ROOM PLAN SCALE: 1/8' = 1'— 0" NORTH TOP EpA 2 SURFACE MOUNTED OVERRIDE PANEL BY OTHERS. STUB -UP 1/7 CONDUIT AND TURN OUT IN ROOF FRAMING MEMBER SPACE. PLAN 41) NORTH PLAN 4) NORTH SN. » 4 j 4No girta No Scale Dole Description Revisions 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION AS NOTED Sheet No. Drawing References URS GREINER INC. (AC. 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPH MI 21546 616- 285 -3500 FAX _ 542 A /y National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of _ TOYS 'R' US. The information shown moy not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS US. T: ly �N11N1LGi� \ia4F��� Locotion T U KW I LA, WA R ECEIVED PARKWAY SUPERCENTE9"�'oFrwcyyTt.q Drawing Title ENLARGED P 1'E PLAN Date MAY 5, 1998 -1 4 0 AR E a o � z I V . rn TYPICAL WALL SECTION SCALE: NONE SCALE: NONE EOL RI SCALE: NONE SPRINKLER RISER WITH SWITCHES (8) STROBS AT 0.0350 0 35(n EACH LENGTH OF RUN, WORST CASE 324' LOAD IN me = 280ma I 18 AWE SOLID D.C. RES a 8.08 OHMS /Ml = FROM NEC CH 9 CIRCUIT RES .324 /kft x 8.08 OHMS /kH = 2.6 OHMS IR DROP = .280 AMPS x 2.6 = 0.7330176 VOLTS 0.7330176 - 24V = 3.05X VD FIRE ALARM CABLE TYPE FPL UNSHIELDED 18 AWE, SOLID. SIGNAL CAT 198844. FOUR (4) CONDUCTOR 8. C. , NOM. OD .173. INSUU5ON PVC OR POLYPRLOPOLENE, JACKET PVC (WHITE). UL RATED TEMPERATURE RATING 67 C FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM SCALE: NONE El In ® • TYPICAL CABLE RUN THRU JOIST 89IE, NOT EVALUATED FOR "ADA COIAPLVNCE alb, © © ® m HS HS CABLES TO RuN ALOxG a. AISTS - YTD To BAR JOISTS w! CABLE eE SIRAPB EOL * *VERY IMPORTANT ** HOME -RUN ALL SECURITY & CCTV WIRES. 0 LAZ Q L 1 t • RUN WIRE IN CONDUIT PROVIDED HORN /STROBE (7 MAX + BELL) ZONE 1 HORN /STROBE..- (8.... MAX) ZONE 2 EXTERIOR DOOR CONTACTS RUN BURGLAR WIRE IN EXPOSED CONDOR PROVIDED ON INSIDE FACE OF MA50NAR8 WALL AN PROVIDE 15 FEET OF SULK TIED IN A COIL FOR FUTURE INSTALLATION. (TYPICAL AT ALL CONTACT LOCATIONS -AB.C. ROOF HATCH) 1/2" CONDUIT WITH SINGLE 1900 BOX FOR PULL STATION AND MAIN. MOUNT INSDE OF METAL STUD OR CHASE WALL. -� MOUNT INTERIOR ALARM NOD. TO BAR JOIST ABOVE • e♦ SECURITY EQUIPMENT SPFC'S ARAN ifAfABER FIRE -LITE GENERIC GENERIC GENERIC GENERIC GENERIC 9 KNIGHT 5230 4NEELOCK 0138 wHEELOCK LS, 24 -RER WHEELOCK LOB CPU ANNUFACNPFF'S BG -8 IBA4G/IC 207,4 CL2 N/A N/A 4NEELOCK i4- 24- LSM -vFR SHAT KNI ^uR 5204 SILENT KNIOHT 5207 SIONATTIRES , SOS 9ES9PR. FIRE DULL STAND. EPL SCUD WIRE BuRR.R AVE - STANDARD M46ETE0 TRITE 004 /POWER NRE (MIME) MITE TO POTTER PR. (IAAAR /12C -0H14) 12 MLT RATTERT FOR FIRE PANEL ROADIE ANNUNCIATOR - IF REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE 4 ZONE PRE PANEL (ARV ONLY) 8 ZONE PRE PANEL (TRU ONLY) ADEN /STROBE (0 44.1/ DEEP HACK RO% FOR rmEELOCK HORN /STROBE STROBE (24 VOLT TRI.PLATE (FOR CEILING AREAS ONLY) CABLING INSTALLATION NOTES: 936. 6000 2000 2000 N/A ADDITIONS/ COORDINATE WATERFLOW AND POST INDICATOR DEVICE WITH SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR. NOT USED. RUN WIRE TO LOW TEMPERATURE ALARM DEN. NEAR FIRE SPRINKLER RISER. VERIFY LOCATION WITH BRU GPM. 4. MOUNT FIRE PANEL KEY PAD NEXT TO BURGLAR AWN KEY PAD, UNLESS REWIRED OTHERWISE BY LOCAL ARE CODES. 5. PEFER TO LOSS PREVENTION PLAN FOR OTHER EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY BRU. 6. INSTALL WIRE FOR EXTERIOR DOOR CONTACT. IN AUTOMATIC DOOR HEADER. 14.11 THE E(xFF.T MOW 6 BURIED BY H41 MC 1611.0 BY CONTP/CIDR ML DTI. EpANEM MSrMEEO BY OTTERS. GENERAL NOTES: I. CABLING MUST RUN PER PRESCRIBED ROUTES. CABLE RUNS MUST MEET APPROVAL CC ON -SITE BABES 'R US C.P.M. 2. ALL CABLE RUNS NEATLY BUNDLED WRAPPED TIGHT AND SECURED TO JOISTS AND BEAMS. LEAVE 15' OF COIL 3. ALL CABLE RUNS NEAT AND PROFESSIONAL OR WILL BE PULLED OUT AND RE -RUN BY INSTALLER. 4. CABLE RUNS IN PRE -SALES (BEHIND CHANNEL) IN REAR OF STORE MAY RUN ACROSS JOISTS. ALL OTHER RUNS FOLLOW JOISTS. 5. CABLING RUNS ARE SHOWN FOR DIRECTION ONLY. SYMBOLS MAY ACTUALLY REPRESENT MORE THAN ONE RUN. 6. ALL SECURITY 9 CCTV WIRES MUST BE HOME RUNS FROM SEWRRY /CCTV DEVICE TO PANEL LOCATION 0 CCTV EQUIPMENT ROOM. 7. CONTRACTOR RUNNING WIRE MUST MARK BOTH ENDS OF WIRE AND PROVDE A WIRE LEGEND FOR ALL LOCATIONS. 8. CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE A CONDNUITY TEST LOG FOR EVERY WIRE. CURRENT LON (mA) ca RE coxrROL/ uuuNluraR SOUNDRC OMB NORN STROBES CONWCi0R5 /PESISTORS (fi ZOxES. 6 CIF[UC6) Torn, STANCOx Fpul rM % ipURS N Ru HOURS IM % NOURB SUBTOTAL Zlz U 1z (AMPERE /H STANOBT 30.6 1506 ALAN 1285 BATTERY CALCULArNINS 084 10794 CANDo0TION NOTES. ME MARY CONIRACtCIt SINLL VEFIDT ALL CALCULADONS B SED Ox INSTALIARON AND 7 EWIP.EED IN CONSrRUCROx. RESISTANCE BASED Ok 045 qIY /LOUD R fOP 18 AwG COPPED caTED WIRE A xD Aron axu ExD a ,,Ni xE �RESISraxs. SECURITY LEGEND STROBE MN 6 BELOW CEIUNG TILE IM Pluc uol0 HORN STROBE TO BE 1013 Br SPEC. OF LOCAL PRE COOS L sTADav ryr0.a4a AROBE NE 2 Ai 6' -8" 2 ZONE 2 - RESCUE INTERCOM SYSTEM I� I = RESCUE INTERCO. *GAINER -PROOF SPEAKER. LLL`JJJI t1D'_O pEpy[ GRADE DCTV WIRE - BURGLAR WIRE (22 AML /4 CU) ,li - END OF LINE BURGLAR DEUCES 1 - END Of UNE WV DEUCES 0 FIRE. CONTROL/. ..... COMMUNICATOR PANEL SEE FIRE ALARM RISER DIAGRAM THIS SHEET CONTROL PANEL MOUNTED AT 12" ABOVE SAFE MOUNT ALARM KEY PAD AT 57 OFF. RUN ALL CCTV CABLE IN (2) 2 CONDUITS PROVIDED FROM JOIST TO J -BOX AT 17 A.F.F. !T ' TM — ( 10) 10'. COAX CABLE PIECES MUS( 1 ....._BE.. EHERM._. ENIr' CCTV EQUIPMENT USE RUN ALL BURGLAR WIRE I 1 1 2 C(XRDUR PROVIDED DOWN WALL TO`6` ¢ 0- iFA 9290 - " VE 5' OF SUCH AT EACH RUN. LOCATION OF BOX TO BE DETERMINED N FIELD BT PLAN 4) NORTH MOUNT TO WALL rowEST EYJT DOOR ON BL T /2" CONDUIT WITH SINGLE 1900 BOX FOR PILL STATION AND,ALARM. MOUNT INSIDE OF METAL STUD OR WALL O 00 0 0 ALARM FLOOR PLAN SCALE: 1/16" = 1 -- 0 1 ��� - MM. EXTERIOR NN01 ( ABOVE DOOR ('-1 AT'•14' -7 AF.F. 1 1I • • No Dote Description BID DATE: - CADD NAME: EFPI DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: URS GREINER INC. (A.C. 3950' SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND 616-285-3500 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location Revisions 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION 05 05 98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References Drawings PROJECT N0. 0993040 CHECKED BY' MOW 1RRR RRII 37K RFS OOP National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 M ® 49546 3542 TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENT R EFINED vr KWILA Drawing Title MAY t I tggg FIRE ALARMPEI446, SECURITY CABLING Scale AS NOTED I Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. l A, 03/20/98 05/05/98 Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION TO ALL TERMINAL 6 4 ON SQUARE 7 SOLID STATE CONTROLLER TO INPUT / 8 TERMINALS Q 50,51 OUTDOOR — OUTDOOR DEMAND SENSOR TEMP PULSE INPUT SENSOR INPUT 58 59 60 NPUT 6" 2 63 64 ANALOG LIGHT SENSOR OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR OUTDOOR SENSOR ARRANGEMENT SEE DETAIL 6 CP -1 OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE SENSOR (SEE DETAIL 6) TO CONTACTORS 1 l/4 CONDUIT TELEPHONE UNE EN OWNER CLASS 2 OUTPUTS FIELD 24 vOLT. PILOT OUr TE 714 1 8 ll0 112 14 16 ] I] 18 TR -2 TRANSFORMER (LOCATED IN CP -I) LB -2 vo (( A/C TO ALL TERMINAL M 3 ON SQUARE D' SOLID STATE CONTROL MODULES - -� FOR CONTACTOR 1 2,6,7,8 FOR CONTACTOR 1 1,3,5,10,, FOR CONTACTOR 1 4 FOR CONTACTOR g 9 - , FOR CONTACTOR 1 11 FAULT OUTPUT 69 70 0 WMPAMnnnnnnnn VOLT A/C PHASE LOSS INPUT PHASE LOSS SENSOR SEE DETAIL 3 EC NOVAR EXECUTIVE CONTROLLER PHONE JACI( EMS. STATUS INPU i 65 66 67 68 NE. 1 RELAY ENCLOSURE, CP -1 NETWORK GRN — 24 VAC SHLD 4 4 CLASS 2 71 72 73 74 75 76 EXECUTIVE CONTROLLER WIRING DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. 4' -0' X 4' - PLYWOOD PANEL PHASE SCALE: N.T.S. ONE LINE DIAGRAM OF ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PHASE LOSS (REFER ro 01141 3) SENSOR fr MI 8761 OVERRIDE PANEL IN FRONT OFFICE TR -1 TRANSFORMER (LOCATED IN CP -I) (LOCATED IN CP -1) — MODULE NETWORK CLASS 2 HLD 39 40 4 REMOTE OVERRIDE INPUTS RTUS• ROUTE CABLE TO MINIMIZE RUNS (NUMBER OF 114135 MAY 4 1) w: ] Tax rvx 5 uw aW ] a 6 BUTTON SCHEDULE OVERRIDE PANEL IN DIRECTOR'S OFFICE (BACK -SIDE SHOWN) CLASS 2 INPUTS 24 VAC 4 -20 MA CURRENT LOOP / DRY CONTACT ONLY 42 44 46 48 50 52 154 7 55 56 OUTPUT RELAY 8 (LOCATED IN CP -1)- ▪ O J • ± NOTES: 1. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR (EXCEPT AS NOTED) IS TO FURNISH INSTALL ALL CONDUITS, CABLE (BELDEN CABLE TO BE FURNISHED BY B20) ANO INSTALL ALL OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL CONTROL CABLE IN 1/2' CONDUIT, IF CABLE 6 BELOW THE BAR JOISTS OR INSIDE WALLS, AS REQUIRED BY CODE. 2. THE ELECTRICAL. CONTRACTOR (EXCEPT AS NOTED) IS TO INSTALL THE NOVAR FURNISHED MODULE BACKPLATES, ENCLOSURES, TRANSFORMERS, RELAYS AND OUTDOOR SENSORS. 3. THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO MAKE ALL TERMINATIONS (EXCEPT AS NOTED). 4. NOVAR 15 TO PROGRAM. AND PERFORM FINAL SYSTEM CHECKOUT. 5. THE NOVAR (ETA -2050) ELECTRONIC THERMOSTAT MODULE IS FACTORY INSTALLED IN NEW LENNOX ROOF TOP UNITS (SEE 4 DETAIL). ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSORS ARE FURNISHED WITH AND ARE PACKAGED WITHIN THE ROOF TOP UNIT. SENSORS ARE MOUNTED BY THE ELECTRICAL CON- TRACTOR AND SHAH BE WIRED FROM .THE RN TO THE SENSOR LOCATION BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 6. THE NOVAR (ETA 2024) ELECTRONIC THERMOSTAT MODULE 5 88030RY INSTALLED IN NEW CARRIER ROOFTOP UNITS (SEE DETAIL 5). ALL DEVICES FURNISHED BY CARRIER. SENSORS ARE MOUNTED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE WIRED FROM THE RN TO THE SENSOR LOCATION BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 7. THE NOVAR (ETA- 21724) ELECTRONIC THERMOSTAT MODULE IS FIELD IN- STALLED BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IN EXISTING ROOF TOP UNITS (SEE DETAIL 5). SENSORS ARE MOUNTED BY THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR AN0 SHALL BE WIRED FROM THE BAR JOIST AREA TO THE SENSOR LOC- ARON BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. 8. ALL INQUIRIES PERTAINING TO THE ENERGY MANAGEMENT AND CONTROL SYSTEM SHOULD BE DIRECTED T0: PROJECT MANAGEMENT GROUP NOVAR CONTROLS 24 BROWN ST. BARBERTON, OH 44203 (330) 745 -0074 9. ITEMS PROVIDED BY NOVAR: EXECUTIVE CONTROLLER BASE PLATE 24VAC TRANSFORMERS OUTDOOR SENSOR ASSEMBLY PEASE FAILURE DETECTOR RELAY ENCLOSURE (CP -I) REMOTE OVERRIDE PANEL EM 2024 (IF REQUIRED ON RETROFITS) 10. ALL LOW VOLTAGE WIRING SHALL BE BELDEN 8761, EXCEPT AS NOTED. NOTES: OUTPUTS 2 PYLON SIGN /BLDG SIGN UNOCCUPIED NODE SALES LTS 4 PLUGS PIE546 • wwwt SUS aTa LOOM SECURITY LIGHTS EXT 24 PK LOT LTS SKYLIGHT - LGHTS UNOCCUPIED MODE 15. OVERRIDE TOGGLE SWITCH INDICATORS: OFF = CONTACTOR DISENGAGED, 0RCUIT OPEN. ON = CONTACTOR ENGAGED. CIRCUIT CLOSED. AUTO = AUTOMATIC OPERATION. � eTo 61 6x63 61.165 fi6167 68169 ]OI] ] 74 I75 a BELDEN 87611 A8C RU69 DELAY 03 ED ears SECONDS VOLTS arR 11111ww■ 112 MC 600 VOLT RATED SIZE AS REUVIREa er coDE 0 A PHASE LOSS DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. LOW VOLTAGE JUNCTION BOX TB ZONE SENSOR OSLO LENNOX /LOGIC DETAIL (WITH NOVAR ETM -2050 MODULE) SCALE: N.T.S. PHASE MONTOR .ENCLOSURE ON 12 X 12' PLYWOOD BACKBOARD LOCATE ADJACENT TO ADP. NOTES: 1. TI818884 PHASE POWER MONITOR, MODEL 8269. FOR 208VAC AND C269 FOR 4130VAC. 2. THREE PHASE BREAKER, MAX. 883880 20 AMP. PROVIDE NEW BREAKER OR 30 AMP k 10A[IG WIRE FUSED DISCONNECT F SPARE 5 NOT AVM)&E. 3. MAIN POWER UNE5 TO MIN PANEL COMMUNICATION CARE TO EXECUTIVE CONTROLLER 1 39 40 411 meow CONTROLLER TERMINAL 5PRP — W2 DAMPER (SEE NOTE 2) YI Y2 120 VOLT A/C 120/24 VAC TRANSFORM TO 8EXT NOTES` 1. ZONE SENSOR PADOCED IN BLOWER COMPARTMENT. 2. DISCONNECT FACTORY EQUIPPED RETURN NR SENSOR OF EQUIPPED) WHEN TERMINATING ZONE SENSOR. 3. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTAL ZONE SENSOR AND MIKE TERMINATION AT SENSOR AN0 1B1. 111111111 A NS CONnR4A110N INPUTS SWITCH NSOF�SENSQ C SS CONTACT CLOSURE ONLY INPUT PUi INPV C ROOF TOP UNIT TERMINAL BLOCK IT'S -10 ZONE TEMPERATURE SENSOR North ETA -2024 WIRING CD (FOR HVAC UNITS OTHER THANILENNOX /LOGIC) SCALE: N.T.S. (2) 8761 TO EXECUTIVE CONTROLLER LOCATION' OUTDOOR SENSOR ASSEMBLY SCALE: N.T.S. OUTDOOR SENSOR ASSEMBLY 1" WEATHERHEAD 1 " RIGID CONDUIT MOUNTING ASSEMBY 4x4 NEMA 1 JUNCTION BOX (BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR) +0/55 ` r— BELDEN 8761 TO NEXT RN \ \ BELDEN 9761 NQTE: 1. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR TO INSTALL ALL SENSORS AND MARE TERMINATKINS. 2. REFER TO RTU SCHEMATIC FOR SPECIFIC DAMPER INTERFACE. 3. ZONE SENSOR PACKAGED IN CONTROL PANEL TO EXECUTIVE CONTROLLER DTS 30 DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR MOUNTED IN SUPPLY AIR DUCT EM 2024 UNIT MOUNTED wITHIN RTU ENCLOSURE WALL OF BUILDING OVER TRUCK DOCK DOORS This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS 'R' US. Locution TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUP ERCENTE EO WED errvopnn Drawing Title MAY 1 t 1gg81. EMS NIOVAZI Scale I Date Sheet No. AS NOTED National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 MAY 5, 1998 V S 1 A, SUSPEND LIGHT FIXTURE ACROSS uNISTRUT CHANNEL ACROSS TOP P CHORD JOIST IN DECK FLUTING FROM PLACED Of MIL. ! -- - __- - c /— I 1124 -I NIPPLE - -: s I/ / � FLOOR HAUNTED J -BOX -- - -- - _ - - - PRDVIDE OUTLET OR z , WIRE EOLtlPNENT �— AS REQUIRED, VEPoF7 WITH TRU REP. I J ABBREVIATIONS I I �� �' \ •. ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR EC EMPTY CONWD EF EXHAUST FAN ELC ELECIPoCRL CONTRACTOR EWC ELECTRIC NAIER COOLER JB JUNCNN BOX NI I NIC. NOT N CONTRACT MOP MN PSTPoBUt10N PANEL MT. HT. MOUNTING HEIGHT RTU ROOF TOP UNIT BRU BABIES 'R' US UH UNIT HEATER IXNT UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED WP WEATHER -PROOF W/ WITH RGC RK1D GALVANIZED CONDUIT FCP FIRE CON P CONTROL PANEL TROL ANEL PANEL EMS ENERGY J -BOX MOUNTED IN JOIST AREA ROUTE FLEX INSIDE RAGING TYPICAL ' / / % / �/ RACKING BY OTHERS //� �// Gf RA. (EITHER =° y : _ ' PLUGMOLD Eno CAP SIGN KM CORD AND PLUG � � VALANCE LIGHT FIXTURE 1YPICAI =' THREADED ROD uCHi FIz1U5.. S EE ELEC. I �''� , , , ,_-=7- - /— I 11264 -I ADAPTER T - — �✓ 'MET 7/8' _ - - i r —1 I =� "_ i E LA CORE DPoLL AND SET AF AND DEVICES " PER LATEST EL SURFACE AND NOT BEFORE. COORDINATE IT TRU REP. IN FIELD. INSTALL SURFAA CE JUNCTION BOX ON AFTERSET. CONNECT TO STORE FIXTURE WITH REXIBLE RACEWAY. W. 7 HID HANC:NG DETAIL NO 2 DUCT 3 1/8 ' a 1 I /4' WALKERDUCr--' UNDERFLOOR WALKER -DUCT DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. EXIT - 8 EXIT SIGN J -BOX W/ HUBBELL AL4 FIXTURE LEVELER FOR ■ T1PE 'AF FIXTURE. FIXTURE LEVELER BY ELC. 1/Y CONDUIT J -BOX DETAIL PANEL LF -120Y, IOU, 2W ` P aEL LB- 120 /240Y.IW,3w. MTh 404W YNN R — '� 7 8, 1 ISOMETRIC OF RACK DUPLIX RECEPTACLE I MOUNTED ��„ ROUTE FLEX INSIDE RACKING TYPICAL \` / / PLIIGNOLD (EITHER 5' OR 10') ROUTE FLEX INSIDE RACKING TYPICAL EQUIPMENT FED FROM JOIST ! / /1. C � I , 4J8,1 /8 1.G., I'C BY PASS SMTCII I UPS I BYPASS sen. a ues TO BE. FINN. / 8 GROUNC. COI:YECT BY ORO HST. IT ELC. IN STRICT TO &DC. STEEL, GRN D.OM•N uFACI 5 ROLk �. PEHZ Sm. M FRA BE OE BYPASS ' JUM AS THEuPS. INRNNSCNTOF 4 UPS AND BY -PASS DIAGRAM \p SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. TOP CHORD OF ROOF FRAMING MEMBER. — PROVIDE ANGLES WHERE NEEDED �y PADDLE FAN � CENTER FAN BETWEEN ROOF FRAMING MEMBERS. - - -' 9 FAN HANGING BOTTOM CHORD OF ROOF FRAMING MEMBER. HOOK PRO / FAN PROVIDED W , i /- ELC i0 INSTALL SAFETY 7 CABLE PER MARV. SPEC'S., CABLE FURNISHED WM( FAN. .� .�. / ti \�/ 7 �/ % � t / , ��� �i . DETAIL C .. T} � � � . TOP OF ROOF �� FRAIAING MEMBER. \ � \� WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE ��/ SEISMIC SPLINE LINES OC. (MICA/ FOR '' /� ALL, MOUNTING DETAILS). ;-,.1"-. I \ . / CABLE BY ELC / �i / 1/13 DU' AIRCRAFT i::r TRACK LIGHT MOUNTING DETAIL 2 MUD FIN 1G MR I/7 OMIT FOR FROM FRONT CHASE IMO_ IQYL FOEEit PoEFJt S¢ ROOF FRO MM WEER �'` OF FILL K m �� ' (z) r caalErs wR MTA e � �!J ROE FTwY FTpMT CHASE MI. e Roe OF RILL BOft I 1? a 12 . IT RILL BOk , MOWED AT 14, AFF . THREADED ROD PROWOEP BY Fit UCM FEM. FEM. IYP ' TO FRONT OF STORE 2 CASH �. � OVA d PHOTE LOFT AS PoWm EACH to FRONT REGISTER WFW — FUTURE f SAPPORO PROW. REELED BY a E TYROL CASH REGISTER C.A. REGISTER TYPIfJt SEE � R SrRE EL Mx ENE SHEET / ' _` I LANE MD E8.0 ISOMETRIC .'�� `� 1t _� •I • \ ' �� / / 16. RTDISIEA i : '` f ¢ � �. j 1 1! Mr '''.-• `^ ,'► ." \ \ i BRCNETS MAXS \ \ . TO F1N. EW �a BY \ \ \ \ CO i i PWG INTO ELC \ \ ODER � \ \ \ \ \ \ POWER POLE a BROW fUN. BY iHU OUST. BY ELC \ �i POI. 90E T OF MIEWA DATA t PFIONE SIDE W�'MAY' SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. SEE NOTE 3. DWG E2 FOR FLEX NTS IT / REQUIREMENTS FOP OF ROOF Y - FRAMING MEMBER. , \ ii• BEAM CLAM / 8Y ELC ... '� �/ THREADED ROD r / � � i� E SLIDE BRACKET // / � �y ( ) , ' FLUORESCENT ELC PROVDE ANGLES LIGHT Fl %TURF WHERE NEEDED SALES AREA ELC TO DRILL A 3/4 DIAMETER DETER HOLE INTO COLUMN AT BOTH TOP AND 7' -0' A.F.F. FO \ R CONTROL WIRE. ROUTE CONTRO WIRE DOWN INSIDE OF COL!;MN TO SENSORL SENSOR If Cl)llMiN �} BO1rON 7• -0' (SAE S 6 SENSOR CONTROL 80X - PAW TO MATCH COLUMN OR w as, w \� ' CONTROL W1PoNG OF SENSOR TO A.F.F. ( TYPICAL) EXCEPT AREA ONLY) MOUNTING UMN N BE HOUNDED LOCATE SENSORS IN SALES AREA AS IXILUNNS PEW NOTED SHOWN. DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. MOUNTING DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. (� Revisions No Date DeOriptioo 03/20/98 PRELIMINARY RENEW / COORDINATION 05/05/98 ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References Na � U RID DATE: - CA0D NAME: E50 PROJECT NO • M103040 DRAWN 8Y: CHECKED 80: MRW PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION. 199A AM 37K RFV 09A Mr URS GREINER INC. (AC.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, 'GRAND RAPIDS, NI , 49546 616 - 285 -3500 FAX 616-2 3542 M A . '� / QiL�'ij...._,l•■ .9, 1 4, ,, , , , :4.k, c' ) L_. I . 1 ,' C '...._.) lak.-,,, _ National Office 461 From Road Por000e, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drowing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS 'R� US. The information shown Roy not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced Without permission of TOYS 'R' US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENT RECE)vED 9 '' Drawin Title HAY f i t9� _ ELECTR I CAVT DETAILS Scale AS NOTED Date MAY 5, 1998 Sheet No. _500A 5 W � ma -me - TYPICAL DUPLEX ISOLATED GROUND OUTLET SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N.T.S. FURNISHED BY BRU INSTALLED BY ELL. WIREWAY AND POWER POLE CONNECTIONS CONDNUE ON TO END OF WIREWAY. EEC. TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CONTINUED WIRING PAST THIS POINT, AND COORD. WIREWAY DWGS. AND Al. ELC TO PROVIDE ADDITION. CKTS. AS REQUIRED. POWER POLE DETAIL CONDUCTOR COLOR CODE COLOR RED BLUE YELLOW BLACK WHITE GREEN WIRE NUMBERS LA5 SA H1, H2, H3, H4, H6, H8, HIO NA, NX, NB. NC, ND ID:, K;2, IG3, IG4, IG6, IGB, IG10 DUPLEX OUTLETS PLYWOOD FOR MOUNTING DATA EQBIIPMEN� I E i Nd Eiri EiQ ❑ ❑ ❑ \. CELL- uLAR ELEVATION SCALE: N.T.S. SILENT KNGHT PANEL MORSE PANEL NOTES I. ALL CONDUCTORS 112 EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE NOTED 2. ALL "1Q CONDUCTORS TO BE INSULATED B TO BE CONNECTED ONLY AT ISOLATED GROUND TERMINAL ON RECEPTACLE AT INSULATED /ISOLATED GROUND BLS B AT BUILDING ENTRANCE GROUND POINT. 3. OVERHEAD WIREWAY FOR ISOLATED GROUND OUTLETS, TELEPHONE, INTERCOM B COMPUTER WIRING. WIREWAY, SUPPORTS N RODS ARE FURNISHED BY 'ENV, INSTALLED BY ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR. EEC RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL IG AA NORMAL POWER WIRING, RO BS, ETC., TO MAKE A COMPLETE WOWING INSTALLATION. !JIMMY SUPPORTED AT 5 -0" MAX. O.C. 4. THERE IS TO BE NO 'DASY CHAINING' OF GROUND WIRES FROM RECEPTACLE TO RECEPTACLE TO PANEL 5. ALL POWER N COMMUNICATION WIRING TO RAVE COPPER CONDUCTORS. f WIREWAY I I I I 1 I t B I GKT A NOTE SILENT KNIGHT PANEL IS HARDWIRED INTO J -BOX. OTHER PANELS NavE PLUG -IN TRANSFORMERS EMRYEES ATTENDANCE RECORDER ELEVATION SCALE: N.T.S. N B ICI 1G3 G2 TO BUILDING ENTRNICE GROUND POINT -7\ H3 H2 H4 I 2 POLE, 60A BKR N PANEL "HC METALLLC CONDUIT pormanus) 4 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDUCTOR TO &DC. TO HOG. STEEL OR OTHER CODE *PROVED GROUND t T r —T aIT e- "— I IG4 r - — I 3' EVE f PLUG-IN FCR REGISTER / 1 ONLY TO BE EQIJFP. WITH TWIST -LOCK RECEPT. NENA / L5-20R ELEVATION SCALE: N.T.S. ELEVATION SCALE: N.T.S. NORM& POWER RXCEPT P0917VE SYSTEM REFERENCE POINT FACTORY INSTALLED CASE GROUND PANEL S iota Lam 4 PRE-NRED ' _. _.. __.. 0 �� ) ��i1 CKT A I.C. RECEPT. DOVER POLES TYP. U ISOIATBAG TRANSFORMER AND ONEAC FILTER 480- 240/120V, 1 0, 3W, (T1) 15KVA L2 LL TO 120N, PHI 2 CUTS, CKT -A & CKT -B SEE JUG E5H E7 100 (AT) ( 1 10 LANE LIGHT (TYPIC.AL) LANE L1GHT SYI ITCHES 01 yto H1 3 �\ - H3 5 CARRY TO END OF WIREWAY FOR FUTURE POWER POLES. PLUG -IN (TIP) SHIPPED SEPARATE - INST BY ELGIN POWER TRAY n zszs I SCALE: N.T.S. NEUTRAL BUS INSULATED /ISOLATED GROUND BUS PANEL LC 4 H4 �1 6 H6 8 10 T -1 2 KvA BEST BATTERY UPS k BY -PASS ELEVATION ONEAC FILTER TELCO & EQUIP. ROOM ELEV. KEY PLAN SCALE: N.T.S. I I I No Dote 03/20/98 05/05/98 Description Drawings BID DATE: - CADD NAME: EAT DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION: URS GREINER INC. '(AC. 3950 SPARKS DRIVE; G R A N D RAPT •, I 41.46 616- 285 -3500 FAX ,1 1� 5- 4. • ill ill Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION Drawing References National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R' US. Location TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTEI6RECWfV ,. . OFT(/MA/n Drawing Title Mf4Y I i f99$ COMPUTER SY iT WIRING DIAGRAM Scale AS NOTED Sheet No. PROJECT NO M103040 CHECKED BY: MRS 10 ROBI 37K RFV 0 SIR Dote MAY 5, 1998 - 6 0 o., FLUSH SURFACE PANEL LE 120/208 V. 30. 4W, 225 A MCB CA T DISCRIPTION LOADS x KW • DISCRIPTION C # 1 TRACK UGHTNFG �® n REGISTER RECLPT. n QUAD. RECEPT SPARE 2 3 1RAC K UGHI1NG 3 n SPACE I 4 SPARE 4 5 TRACK UGHTAIG 6 n' QUAD 0800 6 SPARE 6 7 SPARE 9 n' DACE 8 SPARE 8 9 SPARE - n SPARE 10 SPARE 10 1 t SPARE n n ® n SPACE 12 FLOOR MOUNTED J -BOX 12 FOR 108860 13 SPECIAL ORDER DESK /"1 n SPARE 11111 FOR FLOOR J -BOX 14 15 J -BOX FOR SIGN SPARE 1.5 16 FLOOR MOUNTED J -BOX 16 - FOR 11CHING 17 J - BOX FOR SICK SALES LIGHTING r1 1.5 2'3 RDOR MOUNTED J - BOX FOR WRING 16 19 RACK MOUNTED 1 -BOX FOR UCHT1NG n__ ®- 22 24 25 ` a` RACK MOUNTED J -80% 20 FOR 1x41815 21 RACK 40426160 •I-BOX FOR 0GH0NG 27 n 1 1.0 SALES LMHIING 668 114 J -80X 22 23 J -BOX FOR DEPr. T. r1 SPARE 20 1.0 • J -BOX 24 FOR LIGHTING l SPARE 33 a ali - 121` RACK MOUNTED J -BOX 26 FOR infru4G 27 SPARE n -` '6 37 -� n VALANCE LIGHTING 28 29 SPARE 411 _ 1.6 VALANCE LIGHTING 30 31 FOR P WOIJNI J -BOX SPARE SPARE BKR 1P a ,u < NLE55 NOTED • HANDLE LOCK - ON DEVICE VARIANCE LIGHTING 32 33 RACK 4068100 J -BOX FOR PLUGMOLD NOTE THIS PANEL IS BE FURN5HE0 WITH FACTORY *STALLED ISOLATED GROUND 045 SPARE ., r\ YAIANCE LIGFHTIFK 34 35 RACK 404INTED J -BOX FOR PLUCJ.4042 30 31 SECURITY W ALL PACKS 6606 1084760 J - 808 FOR PL004O1D 36 37 RICK 40UN1ED 'BOX FOR PLUC40ID r1 SPARE 32 33 RAC K MOUNTED J - 80X & FOR PLU;LIO60 81 RECEP 38 38 RACK /0041010 J - B" RAC P 6 6081 D 39 ® WO KIOSK 40 . 41 0 KPL.680018 SPARE 42 43 1815 PADDLE FANS ill 37 SP. VALAN Lx,Y1TI CE NG 44 45 PADDLE FANS 2 NS1 39 a FOR L101RNG 46 47 PADDLE FANS " r1 VALANCE UGH11NG 48 49 SP ARE r1 SPARE 50 51 SPARE 42 • MOLE' DLE 1P, LOCK -O DE 20A UNL SS VICE E NTD. SPARE 52 53 SPARE P 'SPARE 54 55 SPARE i : : l SPARE 30 . SPARE 56. 57 SPARE 30 31 SPARE SPARE 56 69. SPA lin! 32 31 .11 61 00 SPACE 32 33 SPARE r1 SPACE 62 63 65 SPACE SPACE 2111`�= 33 -' `� SPACE 64 SPACE 66 67 SPACE /l SPA CE 68 64 SPACE ` n __ SPACE 70 71 SPACE , (1 SPARE 38 SPACE 72 73 SPACE n _® 39 SPARE r1 SPARE SPACE 74 75 SPACE ` - `. ` SPACE 76 77 SPACE SPACE 78 79 SPACE r1 '.. ^ SPACE 80 81 SPACE /1 5.8 / TOTAL CONNECTED 20.4 KW SPACE 82 83 SPACE r\ TOTAL CONNECTED 10.1 KW `. SPACE 84 BKR 1PAUN NOTED • FIANDL E LOG -ON LESS DEVICE. , 13.0 / 15.0 13.7 V TOTAL CONNECTED 4 1 7 KW NOTE: THIS PANEL IS A DOUBLE SECTION PANEL F USA - Qtr PANEL IF 120/240 V. 10. 34, 40 A MCB -Cal. C DESCRIPTION LOADS KW I DESCRIPTION C d 2 REG51ER RECEPT QUAD RECEPT n Nil n REGISTER RECLPT. n QUAD. RECEPT g7 r1 RN -9 1444061 2 SPACE n 3 n SPACE I 4 5 OWD 6ECFPT n PRICE . ^NEDT 6 n' QUAD 0800 6 '.7 SPACE n 9 n' DACE 8 '.9 BASE STATION n ROLLING REGISTER n SPARE 10 11 SPACE n n n ® n SPACE 12 13 SPARE n /"1 n SPARE 14 15 SPACE n SPARE n SPACE 16 n SPARE 20 14,4 15 SALES LIGHTING r1 1.5 2'3 19 ® ® 21 ® ®n` 23 ®� __ ®n MCI®® n__ ®- 22 24 25 ` a` 28 29 Elio 111 27 n � i ___ SALES LMHIING 28 32 Op, r1 SPARE 20 39 n 35 l . 32 33 a ali - 121` 34 30 MIIIMMEMINEM. 39-® n -` '' ®_ 37 -� n �® ® -_ 38 39 MIME n _ SPARE 28 a , 26 27 SPARE SPARE BKR 1P a ,u < NLE55 NOTED • HANDLE LOCK - ON DEVICE rh r1 • SPARE TOTAL CONNECTED IS NOTE THIS PANEL IS BE FURN5HE0 WITH FACTORY *STALLED ISOLATED GROUND 045 SURFACE 84 PANEL - 120/240 V. 10, 3W, 80 A MCB -)- C � DESCRIPTION LOADS KW DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION C 1 REG51ER RECEPT n SALES LIGHTING n REGISTER RECLPT. 2 g7 r1 RN -9 1444061 2 REGISTER RECEPT. I "x ®� n 3 n ' REGISTER RECEPT. ri 21 I.9. EMPLOYEE'S THE RECORDER n PRICE . ^NEDT 6 7 COUNT ROOM RECEPT. n SPARE n SPECIAL ORDER DESK 8 9 8487 REGISTRY n SALES UGHBNG n RGD RECEPT 10 11 ROLLING REGISTER n bk. 8 A n SPARE 12 3 INFO. KIOSK n n ® ® n SPARE 14 10 12 SPARE n SPARE 16 /"1 SPARE n. r1 SALES 14041 NG n SPARE 18 SALES LIGHTING SPARE n 5 n SPARE 20 14,4 15 SALES LIGHTING r1 1.5 2'3 23 25 27 __ n. .-` ® n ®- 24 n �� 26 28 29 Elio ` ��' 30 SALES LMHIING �• 32 (1 SPARE 20 r1 SPARE 20 21 35 l 2.6 ` 36 37 MIINMII n ` ® �s 38 39-® n -` n _ ® n MIN n BKR ANDLE 1P,2 LOCK -ON 0A LOEI SDEVIC'. NOTEE D • H % 25 1.8 % TOTAL CONNECTED 43 KW NOTE: THIS PANEL TO BE FURNISHED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED ISOLATED GROUND BUS SURFACE - ..(%)_ MLO- FLUSH PANE HA 2 7180 V, 30, 4W, 200 A MC8_ 1' DESCRIPTION LOADS A0 KW I*0 CO DESCRIPTION CKT 1 SALES LIGHTING r1 2A '9 LOADS g7 r1 RN -9 1444061 2 r1 SALES UCHIING 2 3 SALES uoineG ri 21 I.9. 4 /, SALES 1661140 4 5 SALES LICHIINC /, SPARE ' 9 r1 MLLES LI9RINC 6 7 SALES UGHBNG /"1 2.5 1 . 9 COMPACTOR ' Yi r1 SALES 1641160 8 A 9 SALE'S 1GH080 r1 2.3 1.6 11 /.. SVF'.. LN,HTING 10 12 11 SALES LIGHTING /"1 12 ' r1 SALES 14041 NG 13 SALES LIGHTING r1 1 S 2.3 2200 BALER 14 5 r1 SALES 1041I44G 14,4 15 SALES LIGHTING r1 1.5 2'3 16 ,- SALES LIGHTI NG 16 17 SALES LIGHTING f 30 (1 SPARE 18t 19 SALES LMHIING ,m 3.5 33,1 (1 SPARE 20 r1 SPARE 20 21 SALES LIGHTING r1 2.6 23 r1 SPARE 22 x 23 SPARE r1 3.5 n �_ r1 SPARE 24 25 OFFICE UGHTING r1 1.6 `(1 SPARE 28 r1 PRE SUS UGHT4C , 26 27 SPARE SPARE (1 18 20 22 24 r1 • SPARE 28 R 29 SPARE ., r\ 18 17 -_ r1 SPARE 30 31 SECURITY W ALL PACKS • 1.2 (1 SPARE 36 r1 SPARE 32 33 SPARE II (1 SPACE 38 39 r1 SPARE 34 35 SPARE SPICE 40 41 S (1 SPARE 36 37 SP. r1 16.7 16.7 /1 SPACE 38 39 25 SPARE " r1 ^ C -1,C -4 C- 6,C- 7,C- B,C- 9,C- IO,C -11 40 b l r1 26 r1 42 • MOLE' DLE 1P, LOCK -O DE 20A UNL SS VICE E NTD. / 20.0 14.4 8.3 TOTAL CONNECTED 42.7 KW SURFACE (X1 MLO_ AL... FLUSH PANEL H6 277/480 V, 30, 44, 200 A MCB CKY N DESCRIPTION LOADS A0 KW 80 CO AT DESCRIPTION C N 1 PARKING LOT W ONG ,1 6.3 CKT S C # DESCRIPTION LOADS g7 r1 RN -9 1444061 2 3 (� ®p. 2 ill 6.3 Ma ^ j 4 5 PARKING LOT LIGHTING n SPARE 6'3 SPARE 6 /'1 j 0 70 „ SPARE COMPACTOR ' Yi SPARE 10 KVA FOR - R III' 13 SPACE 1 SPACE 11 MME 6 SPACE 17 SPACE 12 73 Rill -7 (HACR) SPACE 19 ii 2200 BALER 14 5 : ( : ) SPACE 28 2 23 25 IIMMIMM2--` IMI■1112` 2 Ell 16 17 `2 -` ,., .D' - 30 18 19 SPARE (1, 33,1 (1 SPARE 20 21 SPARE f1 34 ` /, SPARE 22 23 SPARE SPARE 24 25 SPARE 8.5 3.5 n �_ /, SPARE 26 27 SPARE 15 DOCK RECEPT ` `(1 SPARE 28 29 S SPARE 30 31 SPARE (1 18 20 22 24 17 QUAD RECEPT. (1 SPARE 32 33 SPARE r\ 18 17 -_ rl SPARE 34 35 SPARE 19 WAD RECEPT. /-1 1A (1 SPARE 36 37 SPACE /, n - II (1 SPACE 38 39 SPACE /, BRLI SIGN SPICE 40 41 S r1 n I� 23 KIDDIE RIDE RECEPT r1 SPACE 42 BKR 1P, 20A UNLESS NTD. • HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE 16.7 16.7 16.7 TOTAL CONNECTED 50.1 KW 7 SURFACE IX) FLUSH PANEL .. =/1„___80 V, 30, 4W, 5 A .CB= I DESCRIPTION FLUSHCE ( %) PANEL 'LB .120 240 V, 10, 34. 80 A �' W DESCRIPTION CO SALES LIGHTING N CKT S C # DESCRIPTION LOADS SALES LIGHTING 3 SA LIGHTING LES ®p. 2 ill r1 6 4 Ma SALES 1010610 5 EXIT ,k MGIi1 /EMER LIGHTS BIT k NK,HF/EMER LKN15 1515 KVI PNL !LC 7 SPARE n EMS 5YSIEIA J -BOX SPARE RECEPTACLES POSE /'1 i 70 „ SPARE /Th r1 ' Yi WM 10 KVA FOR - R III' 13 SPACE 15 SPACE r1 r1 j 6 SPACE 17 SPACE r1 SPACE 19 SPACE ROWAVE : ( : ) SPACE 28 2 23 25 IIMMIMM2--` IMI■1112` 2 Ell 21MIIMMia II-_m II_-21 27 29 `2 -` ,., .D' - 30 n SPARE 10 11 VENDING MACHINE RECEPT I \ 33,1 I S P FRONT EIN 12 11 j n 34 35 37 39 3' � ■'a--` -�M -2.` 2 --21■■11111 -©__ 0211112MMO2 3.6 kM 38 4a r TOTAL CONNECTED 15.6 KW BKR 1P. 20A UNLESS NTD. • HANDLE LOCK -ON DEVICE 8.5 3.5 SURFACE III � MLO fX) FLUSH PANEL U 120 208'. V, 30, 4W, 100. A MCB_ � III FLUSHCE ( %) PANEL 'LB .120 240 V, 10, 34. 80 A CKT M' DESCRIPTION 'LOADS A0 KW 6a CO I DESCRIPTION CKT � ' CKT S C # DESCRIPTION LOADS KW DESCRIPTION CKT EWC r1 6 4 /1 RN RECEPTACLES 2 1 PHONE BOARD RECEPT n n EMS 5YSIEIA J -BOX 2 RECEPTACLES POSE /'1 1. 6 1.2 /"1 NOT WATER HEATER 4 • 3 8L4R11. RECEPT ' Yi ® n RESCUE INIERCUA S1STD/ 4.. 5 iF -1 @ EE-1 r\ 12 r1 j 6 ' S ROWAVE : ( : ) 9 VENNG MACRECEPT rl ' r. DOOR 3�T n SPARE 10 11 VENDING MACHINE RECEPT I \ ,i....,, I S P FRONT EIN 12 11 j n n SPARE 12 13 LANE LIGHTS r1 4 n SPARE 14 n �_ ®n 4 15 DOCK RECEPT / r1 SPARE II SI I MM.= 18 20 22 24 17 QUAD RECEPT. /Th r1 SPARE 18 17 -_ n ` ® n -_ 19 WAD RECEPT. /-1 1A r1 SPARE 20 19 __ n - ` n _ ®. 21 SIDEWALK SALE W,P. RECEPT. ^ 1.6 ,2 BRLI SIGN 22 21 __ 6111101 ® n I� 23 KIDDIE RIDE RECEPT (' 5 /, 840 SIGN 24 23 25 SPARE I'M . ^ C -1,C -4 C- 6,C- 7,C- B,C- 9,C- IO,C -11 26 25 26 27 TF -2 rl l UH -1 28 27 29 SPARE r\ i : : l SPARE 30 29 oil 30 31 SPARE r1 r\ SPARE 32 31 .11 32 33 SPARE r1 r1 SPARE 34 33 -' ',MI P __ 34 36 38 4o 35 SPARE /l r1 SPARE 36 35 -_ ` n __ 37 SPARE /, ` r1 , (1 SPARE 38 37 ®- n `® n _® 39 SPARE r1 SPARE 40 39 ' ®a -` n MIME= 41 SPARE n r1 SPARE 42 '.. \ BKR i • 4 UNLESS NTD. • HANDLE LO -ON DEVICE / 6.0 8.6 5.8 / TOTAL CONNECTED 20.4 KW BKR E . i 1 UT NOTED •HANDL E LOCK NI ON DEVICE 4:7 5.4 TOTAL CONNECTED 10.1 KW NOTE: TM PANEL TO TO FURNISHED WITH FACTORY INSTALLED ISOLATED GROUND BUS UPS SYSTEM 8 BY -PASS SWITCH MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE SAME PHASE LEG EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION; 277/4800 PANELS --- . SQUARE 0 TYPE NE 14KUC 120/20811 AND - -- SQUARE D TYPE ROOD 120/240V PANELS 10100C DISCONNECT - -- SQUARE D CUSS 3110 SWITCHES HEAVY DUTY TYPE 9q-o i s5 1. AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT FORA 300 KVA TRANSFORMER SECONDARY • 33,426 AMPS (BASED ON UNLIMITED FAULT CURRENT.) FAULT CURRENT CALCULATIONS POINT TO POINT METHOD (PER BUSSMANN SPD) 2. /ADP 20' OF 2 SETS 350 ARCM I = 'fix 20 x 33.426 _ 0.06 480 x 2 x 19,703 Mc • 3 .426 3 = 31.534 AMPS AVAIL AB F AT MOP 0.06 3. PANEL HA 20 OF f 3/0 I =13x 20 x 31 534 480 x 12,843 • 0.18 Isc = 37.534 = 26 773 AMPS AVAILABLE AT PMFI HA 4. TRANSFORMER T -2 20' OF / 6 I= 'LTx 70' x 31 534 480 x 2,425 = 0.94 14c = 1 31.0534 .94 = 16 754 AMPS AVAII ARI F AT PRIMARY I = 16.254 x 460 x 'O 3 100,000x 13.5 Isc = 208 460 x ,3.5) + 16.254 _ 7, 586 AMPS AWLIAR18 AT SECONDARY C 1Tt G o5lf t�"I� 0 iw6 3 tv36 rim ALL PANELS SHALL BE OF SQUARE D MANUFACTURE. RECEIVED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ALL CIRCUIT BREAKERS SHALL BE 20 AMP, I POLE, CITYCFTUKWILA AND ALL BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTOR SWl BE f 12, N I /2' CONDUIT, TYPE 7}iW, THAN, OR TNEN, RATED fOR 75 DEGREE C. PANELS H.A. HC ARE RATED FOR 42,000 AMPS RATS SYM UL LISTED SERIES RATED JU L 3 1998 PANELS LC, LE, ARE RATED FOR 10,000 AMPS RIOS SYM UL LISTED PERMIT CENTER No 2 3 Date 03/20/98 05/05/98 05/12/98 06/16/98 07/28/98 Drawings Description BID DATE: - CADD NAME: E70 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION Location Scale AS NOTED Revisions PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION PRE -BID ADDENDUM NO.1 ADDENDUM NO. 2 ADDENDUM N0. 3 Drawing References This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R" US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS • R" US. PROJECT NO 61103040 CHECKED BY: M8W TQNR RR11 37K FRY 0 OR URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPIDS, MI 49546 616 - 285 -3500 FAX 616- 285 -3542 Notional Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599-7800 TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Drawing Title PANEL SCHEDULE Dote MAY 5, 1998 A / 0 CONTACTOR SCHEDULE (MECHANICALLY HELD) PLAN MARK MANUFACTURER CATALOG NUMBER LOCATION SERVING CONTROLLED BY C -I SQUARE 'Q 204 12P, 120V COL POWER ROOM CKTS EL 'HA" OFT OE PAN EMS OUTPUT J 2 C -2 NOT USED T -TRON (JJS) 78.4 2 PANEL 'H8 C -3 NOT USED 200 T -IRON (JJS) 60.4 3 C -4 SQUARE 'D' 204 8P, 120J COL POWER ROOM BOG. SIGNS OFF PANEL "IA EMS OUTPUT J 3 C-5 SQUARE 'D' 204 8P, 120Y COL POWER ROOM OFF PpANEt OF EMS OUTPUT I 2 C -6 SQUARE BY 200A, 3P, '202 COL POWER ROOM PANEL BY EMS OUTPUT J 1 C -7 SQUARE 'D' 20A, 12P, 120V COIL POWER ROOM CKTS OFF OF PANEL "HA' EMS OUTPUT ► i C -8 SQUARE 'D' ... 20A, 10P, 120V COL POWER ROOM CKTS OFF OF PANEL .., EMS OUTPUT J 1 C -9 SQUARE 'Q 204 2P, 120/ COL POWER ROOM CKTS OFF OF PAVF1 "H> EMS OUTPUT J 5 C -10 SQUARE 'D' 204 6P, 1205 COL POWER ROOM CKTS OFF OF PANEL "HA" EMS OUTPUT J 2 C -11 A SQUARE 'Q 20A. 4P, 1205 COL POWER ROOM CKTS OFF OF PANEL 'Hd EMS OUTPUT / 6 MAIN DISTRIBUTION 600A, PANEL 277/480V,30,4W,SN PROTECTION Kw, p` SERVING TYPE TYPE AMPS POLES SW. FUSE I PANTO.. "HA 3 200 200 T -TRON (JJS) 78.4 2 PANEL 'H8 3 200 200 T -IRON (JJS) 60.4 3 PANEL "HC : 3 100 70 FRS -R (RK -5) 18.8 4 "T -7 TO PNL "LA 3 60 40 FRS -R (RK -5) 36.0 5 "T -3" TO PALL " 3 100 100 FRY -R (RK -5) 90.0 6 RRI -I 3 8o 45 FRS -R (RK -5) 40.0 RN -2 3 6O 45 FRS -R (RK -5) 40.0 8 810 -3 3 60 45 FRS -R (RK -5) 40.0 RTU 4 3 60 45 F (RK -5) 40.0 10 RN -5 3 60 45 FRS -R (RK -5) 40.0 11 RTU -6 3 60 45 FRS-R (RK -5) 40.0 600A MAIN SWITCH W/ 600A FUSES (T -TRON JJS TRANSFORMER SCHEDULE MIK Kw, PHASE yp j vE0E,St FR M SERVING LOCATION MAW 0 -I 15 I 480 120/240 HC LC MOUNTED ON SKIDS K -TRANS NO ONEAC FILTER FURN BU TRU" INST BY ELC T -2 30 3 480 120/208 MDP LA FLOOR MOUNTED T -3 75 3 480 120/208 MOP II IR0EZE MID. FROM ROOF MEMBERS ABOVE PALL Fit T -4 l0 I 480 120 /240 H0 ' Le TRAPEZE MID. FROM ROOF FRAM'G M6MBER5 ABOVE PALL EXTERIOR WALL -� (2) 3 1/7 C. WITH 4 J 350 MCM IN EACH )--" ELC TO PROVIDE C/T ENCLOSURE (SUBMIT DWCS TO UTILITY CO. FOR REVIEW) (2) RTU -1 3 J 4, I ye C. MDP -6 MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL 'MOP' 6004 MAIN SWITCH 8 10 1 OP RTU -2 DP -8 DP -9 DP 10 DP -11 DP -3 DP -4 DP -5 MDP -I — .— J 2/0 COPPER 3 1/7 C WITH 4 J 350 MGM IN EACH, ARO (1) 3 1/7 E.C. WITH PULL WIRE. ELETPC SERVICE CONDUCTORS TO R7ANSFORMER PAD. SEE SITE PLAN, COORDINATE WITH UTILITY CO. I � 3 1 4, 1 1/0 C /4'C. 5 J3J4, 1 /4 C. `R' E. N - 3 1 4 , t /4' C J 4 J 4 1 1 4 (10). 1/7 C / 3 /6, I' C. NF/IRST , Oi]UaFn = s1MKnwK IIrAI Nam+ SEPARATELY DERIVED AC SYSTEM SCALE: N.T.S. 3J3,1 I /0 C MIN. 2 -350 MCM COPPER FROM SERVICE NEUTRAL INCOMING SERVICE CONNECT TO WILDING STEEL, METAL WATER 4944 (PROVIDE JUMPERS AS REQUIRED), AN0 STEEL RE -BARS (MIN. 2(?) IN FOOTING J 2/0 COPPER SERVICE GROUND DETAIL SCALE: N.T.S. J 2/0 COPPER NEUTRAL ROIL WHERE CONDUIT IS USED TO PROTECT THE GROUNDING CONDUCTOR, IT SHALL BE BONDED TO THE CONDUCTOR AT BOTH ENDS. RTU -3 1 3/0, 2 I/7 C. 3 J 8, 3/0 Ta . taeww, 13 9 OVUM ] O MDP LOAD ANALYSIS LIGHTING 93.8 KW X 1.25 = 126.6 KW RECEPTACLES FIRST 10 KW 10.0 KW X 1.00 = 10.0 KW RECEPTACLES REMAINING 18.9 KW X .5 = 9.5 KW MECH. 223.3 KW X 1.00 = 233.3 KW SUB -TOTAL 379.4 KW = 457.0 AMPS + 25% OF LARGEST MOTOR 33.2 X .25 = 8.3 KW TOTAL 387.7 KW = 467.0 AMPS 3 J 10. 3/0 C O) C - 07 (DI . -10 F SQUARE 'D' SOLID STATE CONTROL FURNISHED BY. OWNER. INSTALLED BY mm4LT0R '0 - 17 PAWL 'MK aa CONTRACTOR 9 13 15 IB 22 I H SALES NR'A. VaIING SPIRE PANEL 'HA 00440401 SQUARE 'D' SOJD STATE CONTROL FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY Amoco: 0 -7 PWIa'NC OR I CONTRACTOR SQUARE '0' SOU, STATE CONTROL FURNISHED BY OWNER INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR BLDG. 0044060X1401 WW41 On ccaucrOR "C -C-\\ I II 1 12 44 444444 3s 6 � eIM sa swss RN -6 60 RIU -7 01 C,5 ELECTRICAL SERVICE RISER DIAGRAM SCALE: N.T.S. SCALE: N. T. S. Ana RC' WIN 4 Can.ClaN'C -6 ( ( TO MS irtewut I, m y � � ro F115 ,TPo.V4 5 OWN , , PA1ELL "HOC CO M. DeFCTORY AND ENSPIAY CONIRO PANEL 'LC CONTACTOR AND RELAY DIAGRAM 2 J 4, 1 I4(40),I1/4'C. / 8 COppER 3 J 4, 1 J 4 (iG), 1 I/C C. ® H ONEPC FILTER (THIS UNIT HAS OVERCURRENT PROTECTION) CZ'L 71 4, 1 1 4 (IG), 1 I/4" C. GROUND CONDUCTOR FOR ISOLATED GROUND PALL "LC TO DE CARRIED BACK TO GROUND BUS IN "MOP. -FLOOR C r MIS SYMBOL INDICATES EQUPMENT. FURNISHED BY OWNER INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR. 2 J 6 , 1J : (0), "T - ' O 1 LEI 100 (80) J 8 COPPER JO 2J4, I J4(IG), 1 I /4 SQUARE 'D SO2D STATE CONTROL FURNISHED BY OWNER, INSTALLED BY CONTRACTOR Thes Revisions PANEL LB' RTU -8 121611111S2041, 30 (30) 2 J 10, Y C. COXMCIat C - PARR "IC COIMI No Date 03/20/98 05/05/98 BID DATE: CARD NAME 680 DRAWN BY: PROTOTYPE DESIGNATION URS GREINER INC. (A.C.) 3950 SPARKS DRIVE, GRAND RAPID MI 546 616 -285 -3500 FAX 6, 285- This drawing is the Exclusive Property of TOYS "R' US. The information shown may not be used nor the Drawings Reproduced without permission of TOYS "R" US. Location Scale Drawing References Drawings AS NOTED Sheet No. Description PRELIMINARY REVIEW / COORDINATION ISSUED FOR PERMITS AND CONSTRUCTION PROJECT NO. 4103M0 CHECKED BY: 49 W 1998 RRII 37K RFB 0WI National Office 461 From Road Paramus, NJ 07652 (201) 599 -7800 TUKWILA, WA. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER0 Drawing Title AV f f f9$8 R I' SER D I AGI11 , Date MAY 5, 1998 - 0 A sewer mh rim =200.6 inv =194.3 6" NOTE: ROOF AND DRIVEWAY RUNOFF FOR LOT 2 WILL BE COLLECTED IN A SIMILAR MANNER TO THAT SHOWN FOR LOT 1 AND DIRECTED TO THE ROADSIDE DITCH. SPECIFIC DESIGN OF THIS PORTION OF THE SYSTEM WILL BE DETERMINED AT THE TIME OF BUILDING PERMIT FOR LOT 2 WHEN A SPECIFIC BUILDING PAD AND DRIVEWAY ARRANGEMENT IS DETERMINED. - 16" D 20' 440' = co 0 DT-- 0(5 5/8" CRUSHED ROCK See R -11 SECTION A -A 2" Min. ore = dfr led or m Drireleoy Max. Reconended Grade to 150) Top of Curb of . Driveway - 6 5% 3/4.1 18' CURB DETAIL 191.93' calc. 192.00 plat RESIDENTIAL DRIVEWAY ea to n. , DATE: 11/15/96 RS -8 • ,EX, 4'STD,d'M .fEfVA - e 191.95' caic. 192.00' plot EAS.A Y.&Y , 7/a, /7063/ I 6` S 89'46'59" W . &2,440 SEF'T /D!/ 1" = S' Pr ,olded Exp. Joint CTypICaU /492.40Y1/.67eAS3£G Sl 4'LL 0 ✓. 'PVC ti mo o• ti 4' DRAIN- ,46E EASE - /TENT tele. vault .,/ 4',,,%,, 4 , 6..4'q-a,,, '''a ZD' Pe /1/A715 R'0,46 AND LIT /L /7Y EASE MEN T C/N /DENS TD 24-e AT €As PAIR L /r91E CU a; w N■1/ / /,- 4' cv 24192.8 Z %a" L'!. PR4 »°- AV IZELS 25 ■ / N T 85.38 z 0 195/2 tV N 89'46'26" E MO" Lo x 194,9 Ake1/1 0/1/- 117 / TYPE. D.P /DW 26 195.3 let ■ Are Par Area = 18, EX, GAP, ■ ■ 6,500 sq.ft. ` Parcel',,; E ' � gDde ? a ' � b µA -se 0 3 C3� 4 ,-- NEW / x 192. N 5 el B "P 106.55 ■ 106.55 • NEb ZD ' C s Y 1 \ 4 "PVC STE /Ye o5 C7YV) ,.� a • Existing House #14471 38 sq.ft. 11 /1146E EASEMENT O 5 v,j . PK/017E WD AND ° LK'ITT2 A /VO PAlc 'E Fr 1 x 192,3 1 Lr'7 TYPE '! (le/He', , .8 W/ eS.cA ,P//'9 = /CV. /Eth "- /9'. �I (i 1 I LIN Al 'imill11101 1111111 W .ilr6 PUNIIFISMIffloatan l7 0 9.3 188.1 189. V 1 b . , ji s � a3 11 1 ',. 4V N .t'l..4rirs ;CJ r A7�! �i ., IPA 7 `. A.6, R OA© T ' o • 4.6' 1'j EX, /„ W S. It 01 CO CD 0 U,, w, .� p9 SS NATIVE 144T e These plans have been reviewed by the Public iA'orks Department for conformance with current Croy standards. Acceptance is subject to errors and omissions which do not authorize violations of adcpted standards or ordinances. The responsibility for the adequacy of the design rests totally with the designer. Additions, deletions or revisions to these drawings after this date will void this acceptance and will require a resubmittal of revised drawings for subsequent approval. Elevations ® flowline top curb up 0.4' Final acceptance is subject to field inspection by the Public Works utilities inspector. Date: (3 8y- , ()j /NsanLL " " Ite. 7..6E ANC €1..EANDUT' D/+! Zge5 DA' ' 1/ Basis of Elevation sewer mh rim =190.2 inv(S - >N)= 184.0' NEW ZO' eive, DPiL'EWAYS C Z LDCA7 /DNS RE/14 VE EX, DR/YE NEW I" W.. 7D EstIEN Dr' ZMEINt157''5 Z 3 LP 4,"PVC Sr GS".3/ /0 3 IS "S6. CLING. CB W /SDL /D LIP R/M = / 9Z. 1 /E !a " _ /8.x..78 = ZE 1,2" drain mh rim =192.2 inv(N) =187.6 . E X . 3 d L F /2 " S T 7 Ye PEPLA ee W /340 L /2" ADS IV-- /2 STK' 3, 7/0 EX, /NLETIREPLA 3E l$// CB- 7..YPE I /9/, 8 C!7A7 - 41.4/ /2 " = /88.70 1. CONCRETE SHALL BE CLASS B OR BETTER THAN 5 1/2 SACK. 3000 PSL 2. INSPECTION REQUIRED 'BEFORE PLACING CONCRETE. AT LEAST 24 HOUR NOTICE MUST BE GWEN TO TUKWILA PUBLIC WORKS. 3. AU. DRIVEWAY APRONS SHALL BE A MIN. 6" THICK. 4. WHORE DRY TMEKC CENTERLINE. /8'•5 1/2' EXPANSION JOINT SHALL 6E PLACED 5. Au. WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH APWA/W5o0T PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR AS DIRECTED BY THE CITY OF TUKWILA 6. AN ASPHALT APRON MAY BE USED IN AREAS WHERE NO CURB KSSTS. 7. REMOVAL OF ED SONG CONCRETE CURB, CUTLER OR SIDEWALK SNAIL BE BY SAW CUT TO THE NEDT JOINT. -8 LE /Z" API N- /Z 57 / 0 '/x+ yis ,� #14a4er s s G /2.S 99 z/ X1"7 ?9 4 :9 c a 74?i a O S /z o / //Z O 4 U so O a) 0 M C/] 00 'd O 4 C:1 at R; a v� N UNDISTURBED so, NOM PROVIDE IIi TmRUsr MCC& • t-At— City of Tukwila TRENCH RACKFILL STREET Rpr, : lei te DATE: 11/22/g6 , WS— 1 0 CONC. RACKING tio.c. IWO FNE mYORAN• TO BE PAINTED WQH WO COATS V Wens,* CASE r STORTZ MAW. #34723. HYDRANTS ARE TO EQUAL MUELLER #A-423 OR CCW MEDALUON IF PNORANTS SHALL CONEDR41 ANNA. SPECIRCAMONS C 1102 smeLL V COIIIMSSION TYPE NO &WI. HAVE A WO PIECE EIREAKIND FUME WM4 BREAKING TRIMBLE AT DIE GROUND UNE V Mk SHALL HAVE A SELF-01UND DRY BONNET WMI FACTORY FlUXD PtEsERYcort MOOING APPRECOVTELY 8 OUNCES or OD_ OIL RESERvost Sou BE o DESICINED IS TO ONE A COLIPLEPE WIFOCAMON OE STEMS EACH Ilms THE HTORANT t3 OPERATED. TIM UPPER STEN SHALL WAVE A ROSS SLEEVE. SIDEwALX 1 si44;4,r1. City of Tukwila cuM GuTTER 2-3/4 ASPNALT COATED STEEL SHACKLE RODS. RANGE /OM DATE: 11/22/96 FINISHED PAvD,ENT. giT,lq IOX RESILUNT WEDGE GATE VALVE VAST IRON 'ME (CEWERT UNED) •••11J X X R SEE SUCKING DETAIL UNDISIVROED SOL NOM: A. 1.1W11 4.11. ME FLUFFED wmi TWO 2 1/2 ti.S.T. Host roars ANo ONE �N X PORTZ PUMPER 1:$5.0 PORT, MO SMALL KIK • 1/4 pENINCON 0 OpERAnic NUT mot:burs SmALL Keit A r M./. COTTON CONNECTION AND S wAIN we& OPENING, AND SMALL MAX! 11 ABOVE GRADE LEVEL TO TM CENTER OF THE PUMPER DISCHARGE PORT. wmERE NO CURD & DOTER IS ImSTALIED. flX HATRANT SHALL OE LOCATED (IN RELATION TO STREET CENTER LINE) CLOSE TO PROPERTY UNL. C. HYDRANT INSTALLATIONS TO BE PEA THIS STANDARD PLAN AND REQUIREMENTS V TUKWILA MUNICIPAL CODE 14.2e AND CITY OROINANV. O. HYDRANTS WALLED, RaoCATED CR orNERwisE 'RANO) UPON AS A RESULT OF A PROJECT SHALL BE FRIZIe.T PAINTED. E. GREEN BONNETS MAU. BE Went FORM eltett03523). WS-4 wo moccosboOko....... FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY & SEWING DETAIL lise la v.& •TYPICAL PATCH MR RIGID PAVEMENT TYPICAL PATCH FOR FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT NOTES: I. AD rodt to cordon to the currant Steward Spotiflootione fei Rood, Id*. odd Miodeiool Cortotruedoo. 2. • minimum of • we pee f000rome• to ragultood M MI pnirmst pets., Ond water% 3. Cootrokod di1 DO Al plots of ensolmd reek motodol met X� .47.1.4 X 00014 Of MN* paostnant ow*. of or awe. by Mt .••••••, City of Tukwila, PAVEMENT PATCHING DATE:11/15/95 1 RS-3 foosialgia=ik ciq D99-0155 , • , ` ,L 'A ftJ p00 EXPIRS: 4/24/ ,4fri 4 "tr.,R (7az- e" 7 4e' . f Z/Z u 61